Eating Together
Listen to the Entire Lesson Preparing a meal and eating together is a wonderful way to spend time with family and friends. While doing this activity not only can you share foods you love but it is also a good opportunity to talk and learn about one another. In this lesson, we will be covering everything you need to know from coming up with a meal to prepare, cooking it together, and sharing a conversation. Invitation and Planning First you must choose a meal to share. Breakfast is eaten in the morning, lunch in the afternoon and dinner in the evening. The steps for planning a menu are relatively the same for all three. When planning a meal it is also important to try and come up with something you all will enjoy. Here are some questions commonly used when asking someone to cook a meal and have dinner. "Would you like to come over to my house and have dinner with me?" "Maybe we could cook dinner together?" "What time should we plan on getting together?" "Do you have any suggestions on what we could make?" "We should probably make a grocery list." "Do you want to go to the grocery store together?" "What grocery store do you prefer?" "If we could go together do you want me to drive?" "Should we pick up any wine or beer to drink at dinner?" "Maybe we can split the grocery bill?" If you are asked any of these questions, here are ways that you could respond. "Sure, I would love to come over for dinner. I really love to cook and it might give us some time to catch up with one another." "That sounds great. I am free tonight so I can definitely make it." "Cooking dinner together sounds fun." "I think that is a good idea, maybe we can share recipes." "How does 5 o'clock sound?" "I get off work at 5. I can go straight home to grab a few things and meet you around 6." "I have this new recipe I have been dying to try. Do you like Italian food?" "I am not too picky. I have some steak and chicken we can use." "Yes we probably should make a list. I don't want to forget anything." "I am pretty sure I will remember everything we need, but if you want to jot a few things down that is ok with me." "Sure, we can go to the grocery store together." "Let's see what we both have at home to cook and maybe we can skip the grocery." "I usually shop at Albertsons." "I don't have a preference where we go." "If it's ok I can just meet you there." "Sure, you can drive if you don't mind." "I do not drink alcohol but maybe we could grab some soda." "Sure, wine sounds good with dinner. I prefer white wine." "I think splitting the bill is a good idea." "No big deal. I can buy the groceries this time and if we do this again you can treat."Cooking Together
Listen to the Entire Lesson Cooking the meal together is a fun time to talk, share recipes and work together. Here are some questions commonly used when cooking a meal together. "You have a preference on which job to do?" "Do you mind heating up some water on the stove?" "Do you have any different ways to prepare this meal?" "Would you like something to drink while we are cooking?" "Do you mind setting up the table for us?" "Can you turn the oven on to 360 degrees?" If you are asked any of these questions, here are ways that you could respond. "No, I really don't have a preference." "Yes, I would really like to prepare the salad." "No problem, I will heat the water up now." "Sure I can heat it up. Do you mind it boiling?" "I have a way to prepare this that my mom taught me." "I don't really have any other ways. Let's just do what the recipe says." "Sure, can I have a glass of water?" "No thanks. I might just wait until dinner." "Sure I can set the table." "I have never set the table before. Do you have a particular way of doing it?" "Yes, I can turn on the oven." "No problem." This is also a good time to talk about other subjects while sharing interests and learning more about each other. If questions like these come up, just answer them the best you can. Everyone will have different opinions and answers about each of these personal topics. "What is your favorite TV show?" "Do you have a favorite book?" "Do you have any brothers or sisters?" "Where were you born?" "Do you have any hobbies?" "So how is work going?"Eating and Clean Up
Listen to the Entire Lesson Here are some questions commonly used while eating and then cleaning up afterwards. "Do you mind if we pray before we eat?" "I love your recipe for the chicken. Where did you get it?" "Can you pass me the salt?" "Would you like some dessert?" "Can you help me clear the table?" "Do you want to take home any leftovers?" If you are asked any of these questions, here are ways that you could respond. "I normally do not pray but you can if you want." "That sounds good. I will let you pray if that is ok." "I found the recipe in a cookbook I have." "My mom gave me the recipe a few years ago." "Sure, here you go." "Yes I can." "Dessert sounds awesome." "No thank you, I am too full to have dessert." "Yes, let me help you clear the table." "Sure, I will just put the dishes on the sink." "Sure, I will take home some leftovers." "No thanks. You can just save it so you can have something for tomorrow." Here is a list of a few other statements you can say after eating. "Thank you for a wonderful dinner." "Thank you for your help." "Thank you that was delicious." "I sure am full." "Thank you for inviting me." "Thanks for accepting my invitation to come over." "We should do this again sometime."Grocery Shopping
Listen to the Entire Lesson Grocery shopping is something commonly done when replacing or refilling things needed around the house. The steps involved include figuring out what you need and making a list, making a decision on when and where to go, and then the actual process of shopping at the grocery store. Below we will look at each section and the questions/answers associated with each. Preparation Preparation is the time for decision making. You will need to decide on making a list of what to buy, where to take coupons and the possibility of planning meals just to name a few. Here are some questions commonly used when preparing to grocery shop. "Should we make a list first before we go?" "Should we check the newspaper for coupons?" "Should we plan out our meals for the week?" "Should we check in the fridge for anything that has expired?" If you are asked any of these questions, here are ways that you could respond. "Yes, I think making a list would save us time once we are there." "I have been making a list this week as I noticed we needed things. Take a look and see if anything needs to be added." "I will get Sunday's newspaper to look for coupons." "That's ok. They usually have coupons at the store we can use." "I think planning our meals would be smart. That way we know exactly what we need." "I don't think we need to plan our meals. Let's just make a list of things we need and we can cook whatever we have." "Yes we should check the dates on what we have. That way if anything is expired we can replace it." "I think most of what we have is ok. We don't need to check the expiration dates."Planning
Listen to the Entire Lesson Some of the important decisions in the planning process are where to go, when would be a good time to go, and who is going to go. "Should we go to Costco for some of the bigger items we need?" "Should we go at a certain time so it's not so crowded?" "Should we go to the fresh market or to our regular supermarket?" "Should we both go and take the kids or one of us stay home with them?" "Should we take our own grocery bags?" If you are asked any of these questions, here are ways that you could respond. "Let's go to Costco some other day, it will take too long." "Sure, I think we can find most of what we need there." "I like to go to the grocery at night. There always seems to be less people." "I prefer to go in the morning so I can get it over with." "I think we should go to both. We can get the vegetables and fruits we need at the fresh market." "Let's just go to the regular grocery. We do not have time for both." "If we go to Fred Meyer the kids can go into the kids play area. That way we can shop without any distractions." "It might be too much to take the whole family. I can just go if you do not mind staying home with the kids?" "I think we should take our own recyclable bags. It's good for the earth!" "We can just use what they have there."At The Grocery
Listen to the Entire Lesson While at the grocery you could be asked by workers a variety of questions. "Do you need any help finding anything?" "Would you like a sample?" "Do you have any coupons?" "Do you have your grocery card?" "Would you like paper or plastic bags?" "Would you like any help out to your car?" If you are asked any of these questions, here are ways that you could respond. "Yes, can you please tell me where I can find your produce section?" "No thanks, I know where to find what I need." "What kind of samples do you have?" "From the samples you offered me, where can I find them in the store?" "No I do not have any coupons." "Yes I do have coupons. Let me get them." "I do not have a grocery card. What is that?" "I do have a grocery card. Here it is." A lot of grocery stores offer a plastic card you could present when checking out that can offer special prices and points for how much you spend. These points can sometimes be used for special promotions and sales. You can usually apply for one at the register. "I would like paper bags please." "I brought my own bags to use. Here you go." "No thanks, I don't need any help out today." "Yes, I would like some help taking my groceries out to my car." You too, may have questions while at the grocery. Below are a few examples of things that you might ask. "Can you tell me what isle the frozen food is in?" "Can you help me reach that?" "Can you tell me the difference between...?" "Can I please have a pound of the oven roasted chicken breast?" "Do you have any more of this in the back room?"Pet Care
Listen to the Entire Lesson Choosing a Pet Choosing the right pet is one of the most important steps in becoming a pet owner. There are a lot needs to be considered when taking into account the time, money and effort a pet can require. Where you live, are you active, are you gone a lot, any medical issues and do you have a family? All of these questions and more should be discussed when thinking of buying a new pet. When looking for a pet you may also consider visiting a shelter. Many animals at a shelter need a good home and most likely will already have their vaccines and be spayed or neutered. A shelter is a good place where stray or homeless animals are taken in order to try and find them suitable homes. Here are some questions commonly used when discussing what kind of pet to consider. "Do you like cats or dogs?" "Do we have time for training?" "Do you have a house or an apartment?" "Is this going to be a family pet?" "Would you consider getting a pet from a shelter?" "Is there any other animals you are considering?" "Are you active?" "Are you comfortable grooming a cat or dog?" "What kind of food should you feed it?" If you are asked any of these questions, here are ways that you could respond. "We like cats and dogs but are looking more for a dog." "My wife is allergic to cats, so we prefer a dog." "We both work full time so finding time for training may be tough." "I really want to be committed so I will take my dog to training classes." "We live in a small apartment so maybe a cat or very small dog would be best." "We have a house with a yard so we have lots of room for any size dog." "Yes, we have children so we need a pet that can get along with small kids." "This is just me, so my house is pretty quiet." "We are not sure about cats or dogs but we really are interested in a fish." "My kids really want a hamster, but my husband and I are not too sure yet." "I run everyday so having a dog that could run with me would be great." "We go on walks occasionally but are not really active." "I am not too comfortable grooming animals so I would probably take it somewhere for nail trims and baths." "Yes, I am familiar with brushing and nail cutting but we would have to take it somewhere to get it bathed." "I think we should just ask our veterinarian." "I hear that a raw diet is the best. Maybe we can look up information on it."Bringing Home a Pet
Listen to the Entire Lesson One of the most important things to do before bringing home a pet is to plan out everything. A few things you need to consider are food, shelter, space, and the overall safety for the animal. "What kind of food do we need to get?" "Should we get a crate to keep it in?" "Should we get any toys?" "If we get a crate where should we put it?" "Do we need to put things out of reach of the animal?" "Do we need a collar?" "Where should we feed it?" If you are asked any of these questions, here are ways that you could respond. "The breeders gave me information on how much to feed." "I read in a book we are supposed to feed it twice a day." "I heard a crate is good with helping to house train." "Yes, I think we should get a crate. I don't want it pooping all over." "I think we should get some squeaky toys." "I say we ask someone at the store what they recommend." "I think we should keep the crate in our bedroom." "I think we should keep the crate in the garage." "Since she is a puppy we should definitely pick up anything around the house she can chew." "Yes, we need to put away anything we don't want it to chew on." "Yes we need a collar and leash so we can take it on walks." "I think we should get a collar with sparkly diamonds on it." "We should feed it in the kitchen." "We should feed it in its cage."Taking Care of a Pet
Listen to the Entire Lesson Knowing how to take care of your pet is an important part of having a good experience and also making sure your pet is healthy and happy. Here are some questions commonly used asking about pet care. "How often should we walk it?" "Should we brush its teeth?" "How much should we feed it?" "How often do we need to clean the cage?" "How often do we need to change the water?" "How often should we brush it?" If you are asked any of these questions, here are ways that you could respond. "I have never done a nail trim." "Yes, I used to trim our dogs nails when I was growing up." "We should walk her every day. The Vet said it is healthy for her." "I think we should walk her as much as we can. It's good exercise for us too." "I will ask the Vet if we should brush its teeth." "Yes, I read it's good to keep their teeth clean." "The breeder said to feed her 1 cup two times a day." "I am not sure how much to feed her. Let's look on the food package." "We need to clean the cage once a week." "We should just change it once it starts to smell." "We need to change the water once a week." "We will just clean it once in a while." "We should brush her daily." "We only need to brush her once in a while."Child Care
Listen to the Entire Lesson Whether you're a single parent or a family in which both the mother and father work, child care can be an important issue when deciding what to do with your children while away. Being knowledgeable and being able to ask the right questions can help provide you with what you need to make the best decision. Finding Child Care If you live near family you may be fortunate enough to have one of them take care of your child while at work. But what if you have no family near you and need to look into other means of child care? Other options may include in home day care and daycare centers. Asking friends, co workers, or neighbors can be a good way to get recommendations when beginning your searching process. Call and make appointments to see the facilities and meet the staff. You can learn a lot by seeing and talking to people in person. Below we will look at the different types of child care as well as questions you might be asked as well as important questions you may want information on. In Home Child Care In home child care can include someone coming to your house and watching your child or you dropping your child off at someone else's house. This could be a family member or someone with a licensed in home daycare. Since having a family member watch your child can be easier to set up, we will look more at having a non family member come over or taking your child to an in house daycare. Here are some questions you can use when looking into an in house daycare. "How long have you been running a daycare?" "Are you licensed?" "What hours are you available?" "What if I am late picking up or dropping off?" "How much do you charge?" "Do you have some references?" "Are you certified in child CPR?" "What is the ratio of children to teacher?" "How do you discipline a child?" "Do you have the children nap?" "How many and what are the ages of the children you're currently looking after?" "Are the children separated by age group?" "What is your curriculum?" By asking these and other questions that may pertain to your individual circumstances you will learn a lot about whether or not this daycare will work for you. Below are some questions that you might be asked when looking into an in house daycare. "Has your child ever been to a daycare before?" "Does your child have any allergies?" "Does your child have any special needs?" "What is your child's feeding schedule?" "What is your child's nap schedule?" "How do you discipline at home?" If you are asked any of these questions just answer them to the best of your knowledge. Providing good information about your child can help with the transition. Day Care Centers Day Care Centers are much like a school that a wide variety of children can attend. From babies to older children, daycares can vary in their prices, age ranges and curriculum. When making a decision on which Day Care Centers to use it is important to research them and what they have to offer. The questions listed for In-Home daycare are virtually the same for Day Care Centers as are the questions you might be asked. Just be prepared and make choices that you feel comfortable with.Bank and Money
Listen to the Entire Lesson Banking, money management and investments are all important areas when talking about what do with your money. There are a lot of decisions to be made from choosing a bank to investments. Being knowledgeable and being able to discuss different areas in English will help you to feel more comfortable when making decisions about what to do with the money you earn. Below we will look at different ways of handling the decision making process. Where to Bank Deciding where to bank/open an account, can be as easy as using a credit union associated with your work of employment to comparing different banks and what they offer as incentives for customers. You may also take recommendations from family, friends or co- workers. Here are some questions commonly used when discussing which banks to consider. "Is it important that they offer internet and telephone banking?" "How important is location and accessibility?" "Will you need a safe deposit box?" "Is free checking important to you?" "Are free withdrawals from an ATM important?" "Is reputation of the bank important to you?" If you are asked any of these questions, here are ways that you could respond. "Yes, internet and telephone banking is important. I work late hours and have a hard time going during their normal business hours." "Not really, I do not feel comfortable doing money transactions on the internet." "Location is really important. I like to visit my bank on a regular basis." "Location is not that important since I do most of my banking online." "I will not need a safe deposit box." "I have some valuables that I do not feel comfortable having at my home so yes, I will need a safe deposit box." "Of course free checking is important. I do not want to be charged for writing checks." "Free checking is not really important, I really do not write checks." "Free withdrawals are very important. I use the ATM machines all the time." "I prefer not to use the ATM card so it's not that important to me." "The banks reputation is important to me. I want to feel comfortable with where my money is." "I thought all banks were the same. It does not matter to me."Managing Your Money
Listen to the Entire Lesson Managing your money is an important factor in building a savings and making sure that your money is accounted for and spent wisely. "How often should I check my savings/checking balance?" "When I withdrawal money should I write it down?" "Should I come up with a budget?" "Should I pay bills online or send payments in the mail?" "Should I have a direct deposit from my work?" "What if I notice anything unusual on my bank statements?" These questions may be asked individually and may vary depending on your circumstances and needs.Investing
Listen to the Entire Lesson Investing is to commit money or capital in order to gain a financial return. There are many ways to invest and spend your money. Since there are risks involved with investing, become knowledgeable yourself and possibly seeking out advice from a professional. Here are some possible questions to ask when talking about investments. "Can you tell me about bonds?" "Can you give me more info on stocks and the stock market?" "Can you give me information on mutual funds?" "How long has this company been in business?" "What am I investing in?" "How risky is the investment?" "When can I access my money?" "Are there any fees?"Sending Mail
Listen to the Entire Lesson After preparing the items(s) needed to be mailed/shipped one must now decide in which manner to send it. Here are some questions commonly used when discussing sending a package or letter. "Can I just put this card in my own mailbox for the mailman to pick up?" "If I am sending something breakable should I inform the post office?" "How fast will my letter/package get to the person I am sending it to?" "Why should I want to send a package through another company other than the post office?" "How much will it cost to send this?" "How do I know if I need more than one stamp on this letter?" "Is there a way I can be notified once my package is delivered?" If you are asked any of these questions, here are ways that you could respond. "Yes, if your letter is stamped and addressed you can just put it in your mailbox and the postman will take it to the post office." "Our mailbox has a different place to put outgoing mail. You may want to look at yours to see if you have one." "Yes, I would inform the post office. They usually ask if what you are sending is fragile or breakable but you can also write on the outside of the box FRAGILE." "I would definitely let them know so they do not break anything." "There are lots of options when sending something. The price may vary depending on the weight of the package and how you want it sent. I would just check with the post office." "You can choose anything from next-day delivery to regular delivery which could take days. Checking with your post office or looking online is always a good way to get information." "Using a company like FedEx or UPS you can usually guarantee a faster delivery but they are a bit more expensive." "The post office can weigh the package for you and let you know how much it will cost to ship your item." "I have a scale at home I use to weigh packages. Then I look online to see how much it will cost." "I think it depends on the weight, take it to the post office." "Just send it with one stamp. If it is too heavy they will send it back to you." "Yes, the post office can email you a confirmation of delivery." "They can give you a tracking number so you can look online to check on the delivery of what you are sending."Receiving Mail
Listen to the Entire Lesson Here are some questions commonly used when receiving mail. "What happens if I am not home and something is delivered to me?" "Do I need to sign for a package when it comes?" "If I am out of town can I put a hold on my mail?" "Can a neighbor accept a package for me?" "What if I receive a package that is not addressed to me?" If you are asked any of these questions, here are ways that you could respond. "If you are not home the postman will leave you a note. They may try and deliver it another day or you might have to go to your post office to pick it up." "Sometimes they will just leave the package on your front doorstep. If you live in an apartment they might just leave it at the rental office." "Not all packages need to be signed for." "If you need to sign for a package and are not home they will not leave it." "Yes, you can put your mail on hold either by filling out a form at your post office." "Yes, you can actually do it online. Just check the post office web site." "I am not sure. Maybe you should call the post office." "I think they can but you have to inform the post office before hand that you will allow it." "I would take a package not addressed to me to the post office and let them know." "If it was addressed to a neighbor, I would just take it to their house."House Care
Listen to the Entire Lesson Owning a home involves care both inside and out. Outside care can include yard work, window cleaning, insect and animal issues. Inside house care involves cleaning, washing, painting and upkeep. Below we can look at some of the questions and possible answers one might come across when dealing with house care. House Care-Inside Here are some questions commonly used when talking about taking care of your house from the inside. "How often should I change the batteries in the smoke detectors?" "How often should I change the air filter in the furnace?" "Should I clean the house myself or look into hiring a cleaning company?" "What should I use to clean my carpets?" "What colors should I use to paint the inside?" "Should I have one can for trash and one for recycling?" "How should I decorate?" If you are asked any of these questions, here are ways that you could respond. "Some smoke detectors will beep loudly to let you know when the batteries are low." "I would change the batteries every six months to be safe." "You should change your filter every six months also." "I am not sure, I just take it out and look at it. If it is dirty I replace it." "Make time during the week to clean. It helps keep a clean environment and you can feel good about having a clean house." "If you have the money I would hire a cleaning company. They do a good job and you can just relax more." "For small stains I just use spot cleaner I purchased from the store, otherwise I rent a cleaner and do it myself." "I usually hire a carpet cleaning company. They do a better job than I can do myself." "I would go to a home improvement store and look at their paint colors." "You could get some magazines and look for ideas." "You should always recycle so I would have two cans, one for trash and one for recycling." "You can just have one, it's less of a hassle." "You could hire an interior decorator to help you decorate."House Care - Outside
Listen to the Entire Lesson Here are some questions commonly used when talking about taking care of your house on the outside. "How often should I mow the grass?" "What should I do to get rid of the weeds?" "When should I plant flowers?" "How do I clean my outside windows?" "How do I get rid of moles?" "What do I do about bee hives?" If you are asked any of these questions, here are ways that you could respond. "You should mow your grass once a week." "I just mow mine once it gets really long." "I would go to Home Depot and ask someone for recommendations." "It depends on what kind of weeds you have, some are worse than others." "You should plant flowers in the spring." "I would always wait until it gets warm to plant flowers, that way they will last all summer." "I would use a ladder and clean my outside windows myself." "I would see if you can hire someone. Your windows are really high and you could get hurt." "They sell pellets you can put in mole holes to help get rid of them." "I would call a pest control company and ask them for recommendations." "I would not mess with bee hives, call for someone to come out and get rid of it." "I would buy bee killer spray from the store and just spray it."Phone
Listen to the Entire Lesson Technology is constantly changing and cell phones for one are more remarkable than ever. From adding applications and ring tones to texting and internet access, the options seem endless. With the constant advancement in technology comes a lot of decision making when one considers buying a new phone. Though cell phones add convenience and on the go communication, home phones too have advanced throughout the years making it possible to video chat, forward calls, and conference call. Cell Phones The use of cell phones has increased dramatically over the years adding a new dimension to the on-the-go, fast paced life styles of today's world. Below we will take a look at some questions involving the decision making process when looking at and ultimately choosing a cell phone. Here are some questions commonly used when talking about cell phones. "With all the cell companies out there how do I decide who to go with?" "Should I ever consider a pre paid cell phone?" "I have never text before. Would you recommend getting a phone I can text with?" "How important are all the applications you can get for your phone?" "Should I purchase a phone that is blue tooth compatible?" "What kind of plans are there to buy?" "Should I buy a warranty?" "Should I consider a family plan and purchase phones for them?" If you are asked any of these questions, here are ways that you could respond. "I would go do some research and compare companies, that way you can try and get the best deal." "I would go off of recommendations from friends. See who they are with and who they like." "I would maybe consider getting a pre paid phone if you were buying one for of your kids. You can put a certain amount of money on it that they can't go over. So that way you can keep them from charging up the bill." "I have never used a pre paid phone. I don't see why you just don't get a regular one." "Yes, texting is great and it's a fun way to talk and keep in touch." "Most phones you can text with. I would look for one with a bigger keypad so it's easier to use." "Applications are fun. Some phones have free ones and others you can buy." "I use applications on my phone all the time. I have one for music, one for games, and one I use as a GPS." "Blue tooth is a wireless earpiece used for hands free talking. I would highly recommend getting one." "Yes I would make sure it is blue tooth compatible. In some states it is illegal to talk while driving but if you're using a blue tooth it's ok." "Every company has different plans. I would just ask when I go there to look at phones." "I would get a plan with free long distance and free texting." "I always buy a warranty. That way if you break your phone they will replace it." "I think warrantees are a waste of money. If my phone breaks I just buy a new one." "I would first look into the prices for family plans if you're interested." "Family plans are great. Your whole family can get their own phones and it's a good way to keep in touch with busy teenagers."Home Phones
Listen to the Entire Lesson With the popularity of cell phones, home phones seem to be getting less attention. But there have been many new upgrades with the home phone which allow families to enjoy lots of fun and exciting new experiences. Here are some questions commonly used when talking about home phones. "What company should I use for my home phone?" "Should I get wireless phones for my home?" "Is there a way to check my messages while I am away?" "Can I forward a call coming to my home phone to my cell phone?" "Should I purchase a video home phone?" "How important is conference calling?" "Is caller ID important?" If you are asked any of these questions, here are ways that you could respond. "I would check around with your neighbors and see who they use." "I would check for any specials to see who is offering the lowest prices." "You do not have to get wireless but they are a lot more convenient to use." "Definitely go with wireless. Do they even make the non wireless anymore?" "I would make sure you buy a phone that allows you to check your messages while away. That way you can get back to someone faster." "I never use that feature. If someone wants to reach me that bad they can just call my cell." "You can forward a call to your home to your cell. Just make sure the home phone you buy will allow you to do it." "I tried that before and it's too complicated." "Video home phones are great. I use mine to talk to my family in California. It's nice to be able to see them as you talk." "I don't use video home phones. I just use my computer to video chat." "Conference calling is great to use for work but not really practical for the home." "I never use conference calling at home, we just use three way calling." "Caller ID let's you know who is calling you. That way you can screen your calls." "I use caller ID so I don't have to talk to all the telemarketers."Computers
Listen to the Entire Lesson Computers are used everywhere from work, education and for entertainment. With a vast variety of styles, sizes and types of computers the options seem limitless. Make sure that you learn as much as you can before purchasing a computer to assure you are buying the best one to fit your needs. Here are some questions commonly used when talking about computers. "I am interested in buying a computer. Do you have any recommendations?" "Should memory of the computer be an important factor when making my choice?" "I am unfamiliar with computers. Can I get help setting it up?" "Should I get a laptop or a PC?" "What do you plan on using the computer for?" If you are asked any of these questions, here are ways that you could respond. "It depends on what you're going to need it for. I would do a little research to learn more about them." "I would go to the store and tell them your needs and interests and they can help you with which computer would be best for you." "If you're going to be saving a lot of information or media I would get a computer with a lot of memory." "Memory is always important. I would get a computer with more now so you don't have to upgrade later." "Most places that sell computers offer help with setting it up and other troubleshooting areas." "They are pretty simple to set up. I would just use the directions it comes with." "Laptops are more mobile so if you're on the go a lot I would recommend a laptop." "I would go with a home PC for now. It will be accessible for your whole family to use." "I am using the computer mostly for storing all my photos and music." "I have a home business so I will be using it for a variety of things."Internet
Listen to the Entire Lesson The internet is a place accessed through your computer which contains large quantities of information. People use the internet in their daily lives for research, work and pleasure. Almost anything you can think of can be accessed or found through the internet. Here are some questions commonly used when talking about the internet. "Should I get some sort of virus protection for my computer?" "How do I get virus protection for my computer?" "Can I download music over the internet?" "Is it safe to shop over the internet?" "Why is my internet is running slow?" If you are asked any of these questions, here are ways that you could respond. "I would definitely get some sort of virus protection. You do not want your computer to crash." "Yeah I would. My computer got a virus one time and it cost me $100 to get it fixed." "There are a few good ones out there. I will come over and help you download them." "I know of a few online. They cost money but are worth it." "You can. There are a few sites to use for downloading music." "Downloading music is great! You can find just about anything but you do have to pay for them." "Make sure you are shopping on a reputable site otherwise I would be careful." "I don't feel comfortable using my credit card over the computer." "You can check with your provider to see if there are any problems." "Maybe you need a faster connection for what you are doing."Driving a Car
Listen to the Entire Lesson Knowing the rules of the road and how to operate a car properly are all important factors in staying safe while driving, both for your safety and others. Getting a License Getting your license is the first step in becoming a driver. Most states have certain regulations on how to go about getting one. Most require some sort of written test as well as an actual driving test. You can usually pick up study booklets with the information you will need to know to pass the test. Here are some questions commonly used when preparing to get your license. "Where do I get my study material?" "Where is a good place to practice my driving?" "Should I learn on an automatic or a stick shift?" "Does someone need to be with me when I am practicing?" "Is the driving test difficult?" "Will my driver's license be good in other states?" "What happens if I fail my test?" If you are asked any of these questions, here are ways that you could respond. "You will need to call your local DMV to set up an appointment to take your test." DMV stands for Department of Motor Vehicles. "Call a DMV to set up a date." "You can get your study material at the DMV." "You may want to call the DMV and see if they offer the study material online." "Practice in a safe place with no one around." "Maybe an empty parking lot would be a good place." "I would recommend learning on a stick shift. That way driving an automatic will be easy." "I prefer learning on an automatic, it's just easier." "Yes, you need to have a licensed driver with you while practicing." "You first need to get a learners permit before practicing to drive." "If you study for the driving test you should be ok." "I did ok on the written test but had a bit of trouble on the driving part." "You can drive from state to state with a legal driver's license from where you live." "Yes it is good if driving to other states but if you move to another state, the laws may be different and you will need to get a license for that state." "If you fail the test you can take it again at another time." "Stay positive! You're going to do just fine."Driving
Listen to the Entire Lesson Once you have obtained a legal drivers license in your state, you are now able to drive. You should be knowledgeable on the laws and regulations regarding where you live. "Do I need to have car insurance?" "Can I talk on my phone when diving?" "What if I get caught speeding." "What are the carpool lanes for?" "What if I have car trouble?" "What if I get into a wreck?" "If I have my license in one state can I drive in another state?" If you are asked any of these questions, here are ways that you could respond. "Some states require car insurance. Make sure you find out before driving." "If you do not have car insurance and hit someone you are responsible to pay for the damages." "In some states talking on the phone while driving is illegal, check you laws first." "Always use a blue tooth device so you can concentrate on the road." "If you get caught speeding just calmly do what the police officer asks you." "You will most likely get a ticket and have to pay a fine." "Carpool lanes are for cars with two people or more inside." "Carpool lanes are for motorcycles and cars with a lot of people." "If you have car trouble you can use a cell phone to call for help." Some people use a service called AAA. It stands for American Automotive Association. You can become a member by joining and paying a yearly fee. "You can wave down someone to help you or just wait for help." "You should wait for the police to come and help handle things." "You should get each others insurance and personal information." "Yes, you can drive from state to state with your license." "If you move permanently to another state you will need to get a driver's license for THAT state." Other options besides driving There are other options for transportation besides driving your car. You could ride the bus to work. You could ride a bike or use the public subway system if they have one. You may also choose to carpool. Carpooling is when you share a ride with friend(s) to cut down on the amount of traffic on the roads.Car
Listen to the Entire Lesson The purchasing of a new car can be a fun experience as long as you do some research beforehand. You might want to consider price, condition the car is in, your needs and the practicality of the vehicle. All are important factors in deciding which car is best for you. Purchasing a Car Purchasing a car can be both exciting and intimidating. Knowing what you want, how much the car is worth and how much you can afford are all important factors. Sometimes dealing with car salesman you will want to know these points beforehand. If you an uncomfortable bargaining with a salesman just have an idea of what you can afford and stick with it. Here are some questions commonly used when purchasing a car. "How can I check what a car is worth?" "Can I check if the car has been in any major wrecks in the past?" "Should I consider financing?" "Does the car have a warranty?" "Can I negotiate price?" "Should I buy used or new?" If you are asked any of these questions, here are ways that you could respond. "There are different ways to check. A common place is called the Kelley Blue Book." The Kelley Blue Book is a trusted prices, values and reviews of cars. "You might be able to look up prices on the internet." "You can ask for a 'history' on the car from the salesman to check if there are any past accidents." "There are websites where you can look up the history of a car. Just search for them." "Almost all car companies offer financing." "I would try and pay cash but if you can't afford the entire car you may need to finance." "All cars have some sort of warranty. Check with the car dealership." "Warranties are good in case you need anything fixed." "Just know how much you can spend and only spend that much." "You can try and negotiate if you're comfortable with it." "Used or new depends on you and what you need." "You can usually spend less money buying a used car. Just make sure it is in good shape."Car Maintenance
Listen to the Entire Lesson Proper maintenance on your car can help assure it will run smoothly and last you a long time. Here are some questions commonly used when talking about the maintenance of your car. "How often should I change the oil in my car?" "Should I rotate the tires?" "What type of gas should I put into it?" "Should I get tune ups?" "Should I keep it outside or in my garage?" If you are asked any of these questions, here are ways that you could respond. "Normally you should change your oil every 3000 miles." "Yes change your oil when it gets low." "Rotating your tires will make them last longer." "Rotating your tires will keep them in good condition and keep you safe." "Most cars use unleaded gas." "I would check your car manual. You don't want to put the wrong gas in your car, it can ruin it." "Tune ups keep your car running smoothly." "Tune ups are good and you may find something that needs replaced that you would normally not know about." "If you have a garage I would use it. It will keep your car safe from the weather." "If you don't have a garage just keep it in your driveway."Selling a Car
Listen to the Entire Lesson There comes a time when you will need to sell your car. You may need a bigger one, or smaller one. You may want one less expensive or one that is better on gas. Make sure you research how much your car is worth as well as viable ways of advertising it before you attempt to sell. Here are some questions commonly used when selling a car. "How should I advertise my car to sell?" "Should I fix any issues with my car before selling it?" "Should I research how much it is worth before selling it?" "Will I get more if I trade it in?" "Should I be firm on the price I am asking?" If you are asked any of these questions, here are ways that you could respond. "There are many ways to advertise. You can use the newspaper, the internet, or even put a sign in it that says For Sale." "I would advertise in a local car selling/buying magazine. A lot of people will see it there." "You can fix any issues if you want. It might up the value of the car when you sell it." "I would just be honest and inform people it has something wrong with it." "Definitely research how much it is worth. That way you can be sure to sell for the right price." "I would just sell it for what you owe on it. If you already own it then I might look up how much it is worth." "I would try and trade it in if you are buying a new car." "I would try and sell it, you will probably get more money for it." "Once you find out how much it is worth, some people price cars at a higher price to try and make money." "I would ask for more than it's worth, then you can lower the price and still get what you want."Dental Care
Listen to the Entire Lesson Picking a Dentist Going to the dentist is an important part of your health. With some of the anxieties that sometimes come with visiting the dentist, choosing the right one can be beneficial. Sometimes using recommendations from friends or family is a good way to find a dentist you will like. Here are some questions commonly used when picking a dentist. "I am nervous about going to the dentist, do you have any recommendations for one?" "Should I go to a dentist that I saw an advertisement for?" "Are there any dentist just for children?" "How do I make an appointment if I have never been to this dentist before?" "Do I need to have dental insurance?" If you are asked any of these questions, here are ways that you could respond. "My dentist is really nice. I think it would be a good experience for you." "My dentist will let you come in and just talk at first. That way you can get comfortable with each other." "Sure, you can try a dentist you are unfamiliar with." "Go for it. If you do not like him you can always go somewhere else." "There are dentists that specialize just in children. I would look on the internet." "My dentist will see children or adults and is great with both." "I would just call and tell them you are a new patient and you would like to schedule an appointment." "You could always stop by and make an appointment." "Most places require dental insurance." "I don't think you need insurance but you will need to pay for things up front."Dentist Check Ups
Listen to the Entire Lesson Checkups are appointments to your dentist where they examine your mouth for overall health and usually include some sort of cleaning. Check ups are an important part of keeping a healthy mouth as well as a way of catching any possible problems before they cause any pain or discomfort. Here are some questions commonly used when asking about checkups. "How often should I go in for checkups?" "Do they clean your teeth at checkups?" "Will they take x rays at my check up?" "Can I ask questions if I have any concerns?" "Do I really need checkups?" "Will I have to get any fillings?" If you are asked any of these questions, here are ways that you could respond. "Normally you should go in for a checkup every six months." "I would ask your dentist and see what they recommend for you." "My dentist cleans my teeth at my check ups." "Usually they do. It feels good when they are done." "Sometimes they take x-rays to check your teeth." "I think they only take x-rays if they have not seen you before." "Yes, this is a time to ask questions if you have them." "Ask all the questions you want. They will try and help you." "Check ups help keep your mouth clean and healthy." "Check ups are a good way to find any problems before they begin to hurt." "If you have any cavities then you will have to get a filling." "Fillings are not normally part of a check up."Problems with your teeth
Listen to the Entire Lesson If you are having any pain or problems with your teeth you should go see a dentist, as soon as possible. If you wait, you may make things worse. Below are some things you can tell the dentist you are experiencing. "I have a really bad tooth ache." "My teeth are really sensitive when I eat or drink things that are hot or cold." "My gums bleed when I brush my teeth." "My tooth is loose." "I think I might have cracked my tooth." "It hurts when I bite down." The answers to all of these depend on you and your dentist. Just make sure you call and make an appointment if any of these occur.Pediatric Care
Listen to the Entire Lesson A doctor that specializes in pediatrics is a children's doctor. Choosing the right one can make you feel more comfortable as well as make it a good experience for your child. Choosing a Doctor When choosing a doctor for your child you can ask your friends or family for recommendations, try one out simply by finding them on the internet, or using one supplied by the hospital where your child was born. Here are some questions commonly used when choosing a doctor. "Do you have a recommendation for a Pediatric doctor?" "Can the hospital my child was born at recommend any?" "Can I visit the doctor's office before going there?" "Are there reviews on Pediatric doctors?" "Do I just call to make an appointment?" "Will I need to go to certain doctors because of insurance?" "What if I do not have any insurance?" If you are asked any of these questions, here are ways that you could respond. "We have one we have used for years, I will give you her name and number." "I know of a couple really good ones. I will call you with their information." "Sure, they can usually provide you with a list." "Sometimes they can give you names and numbers of doctors associated with their hospital." "You should be able to visit before your appointment." "I would call and ask them first. Each office can be different." "Sometimes you can find reviews on the internet." "I would just go off of recommendations." "Just call and tell them you are a new patient." "You can call or just stop in. If you stop in you can see the office first hand." "Most insurance companies have a network of doctors associated with them." "Yes, I would get a list of doctors from my insurance company." "You do not need insurance but you will have to pay for everything yourself." "I would check. Some places require that you have medical insurance."Appointment
Listen to the Entire Lesson Depending on the age of your child and the reason for the appointment things may vary on what happens during the appointment. Most appointments will include taking the height and weight of the child. Checking ears and eyes, listening to hearts and lungs, and taking blood pressure. Depending on the age of your child, vaccines might be also done. This is also a good time to talk with your doctor about any concerns or issues and simply a good time to ask questions. Here are some questions commonly asked when making an appointment. "How is your child doing?" "Do you have any concerns?" "Is he/she eating ok?" "Is he/she sleeping ok?" "Is he/she responding to noise or their name?" "How are the child's bowl movements?" "Is he/she saying any words?" If you are asked any of these questions just answer to your best knowledge and be honest. They are all important information for the doctor to know and see how your child is doing.School - Kids
Listen to the Entire Lesson Picking a school Depending on where you live you will most likely have a school assigned to you. The schools assigned to your area are public schools which offer grades kindergarten all the way up through high school. Public schools are free and are offered to all. A few other options available are private schools or even home schooling. Private schools usually require a tuition fee and vary in price and distance from where you live. Home schooling is where the parent(s) are the teachers at home educating and teaching their children. Children that are home schooled and decide to change to public or private schools usually will need to test into their appropriate grade. Here are some questions commonly used when picking a school. "Are the public schools in this area good?" "Do the public schools in our area have full day kindergarten?" Getting to School When talking about getting to school you are simply talking about the act of 'how' your child will get to the school they are attending. Here are some questions commonly used when talking about ways to get to school. "Is there a bus stop near our house?" "Can I drive my kids to school?" "Can my kids walk to school?" "What if we miss the bus in the morning?" If you are asked any of these questions, here are ways that you could respond or answers you might hear. "There is a bus stop right around the corner from our neighborhood." "There are no bus stops close to our neighborhood. We need to drive to the bus stop." "Yes, you can drive your kids to school." "Not sure, you may want to check with the school." "Kids can walk to school if they live within a close distance from the school." "Children walking to school need to be accompanied by an adult." "If you miss the bus it is your responsibility to drive your child to school." "If you miss the bus maybe you can catch a ride from a neighbor or a friend."After School
Listen to the Entire Lesson What happens after school can include a lot of decisions and planning as well. After school care, transportation, playtime with friends, sports and homework are all possible factors when making decisions about what happens after school. Here are some questions commonly used when talking about what happens after school. "Does your child need after school care?" "Will your child be riding the bus home?" "Do you want to have play dates after school with our children?" "Do you want to enroll your child in sports?" "Will your child have to finish homework before playing?" If you are asked any of these questions, here are ways that you could respond. "Yes, both my wife and I work so we need help after school." "I am a stay at home mom so I do not need any afterschool care." "Yes my child will be riding the bus home." "No, I will be picking up my child after school." "Sure, a play date would be fun for the kids." "Play dates are great! Let's plan some." "She does not get much homework in this grade." "Yes, we usually have our kids finish their homework before playing."Birthday
Listen to the Entire Lesson Birthdays usually include a party or gathering to celebrate the life of the person whose birthday it is. Although having a party is not a necessity for birthdays, we will be going over the steps involved when deciding to have one. Planning and Invites The first thing you will want to do is plan a date to have the party. It does not need to be exactly on the date of the actual birth of the person the party is for. If the person's birthday falls on a Tuesday you can very well have the party on Saturday if it's more convenient. A birthday party can be a surprise, it can be at a special place, or it can happen simply at home. Coming up with a guest list and sending out invitations would be the next step. Below we will look at possible questions involved with the planning of a birthday party. "My birthday this year is on a Monday. Should I have the party on a Saturday instead?" "Should we have a surprise birthday party?" "Who do I invite?" "What's the best way to send out invitations?" "Should we have people RSVP? RSVP means 'Please respond.' You are asking people to let you know if they are attending beforehand so you can plan ahead." "Should we reserve a room for the party?" "Where should we get a cake?" If you are asked any of these questions, here are ways that you could respond. "I would have the party on Saturday then more people might be able to come." "It does not really matter, have it whenever you like." "He does not like surprises so I would just do a regular party." "A surprise party would be fun, just make sure he does not find out." "I would just invite family since it's a small party." "You could invite friends and family. Make it a big party this year." "You could just pass out invites when you see the people." "I would mail them since it is a surprise party." "I would have people RSVP so you will know how many people are coming." "Having people RSVP lets you plan the party easier." "I would reserve a room so no one else is using it." "They require a reservation so they can plan ahead for your party." "We should get a cake at the bakery." "We should get an ice cream cake from the ice cream store."Set Up
Listen to the Entire Lesson Setting up for a party can be time consuming and sometimes expensive. Make sure you plan ahead and set up early if you can. How much you decorate depends on how much you want to spend. If you decide to reserve a party room they typically will decorate and even cater the party, which will add to the cost. Here are some questions commonly used when setting up for a party. "Should we reserve a room?" "Should we get there early to decorate?" "Should we buy decorations?" "Should we have the party catered?" If you are asked any of these questions, here are ways that you could respond. "If we reserve a room we can have them decorate for us." "Let's just have the party here at home to save money." "Yes if we get there early we can decorate and be done with it." "Not really, we can decorate anytime." "Yes we should go out and buy lots of decorations." "We can just use stuff we have around here. We can just make a couple signs." "Having it catered would be great! Then we do not have to cook." "Catering is too expensive. Let's just cook the food ourselves."The Party
Listen to the Entire Lesson After all of the hard work planning for the party it's time to enjoy yourselves. Make sure the guest of honor is having a good time and remember this party is about THEM. Here are some questions commonly used when setting up for a party. "When is he going to open presents?" "When are we going to have cake?" "How did you find the caterers?" "Should we yell SURPRISE when he walks in?" "Are we going to play any games?" If you are asked any of these questions, here are ways that you could respond. "He will open presents after we eat." "I think he will open presents after we eat some cake." "We will have some cake later on." "I am not sure. Did they get a cake?" "I found the caterers on the internet." "My neighbor recommended the caterer." "Yes, we should all hide. Then when he walks in we jump out and yell SURPRISE!" "Don't yell too loud, you might scare grandpa." "I think we are going to do some karaoke." "They have some games scheduled for later on."Vacations
Listen to the Entire Lesson If you have a job, vacations are a time spent away from it, or a vacation may just be time spent relaxing and taking a break from your daily responsibilities. Vacations can be as simple as staying home and relaxing with family to going on a trip somewhere to get away. Planning a Vacation Planning a vacation properly can make all the difference between having a fun, relaxing time to being stressed and not knowing what to do. If you decide to just stay home for a vacation then relaxing with family or friends might work just fine but if traveling, you may want to put in some research into what to do and when to do it. If visiting family or friends make sure they are able to take time away from their own jobs to spend quality time with you. If you are going to another state or country, checking travel requirements, weather, and accommodation will help make it a better experience. If you are employed it is a good idea to ask for the time off before scheduling anything. That way you can be sure of dates and times you will be gone. Here are some questions commonly used when planning a vacation. "How far in advance should I ask for vacation time?" "How do I find out if I need a passport?" "How do I get a passport?" "How do I find out about fun places to visit?" "How far in advance should I book a place to stay?" "Should I use a travel agency?" "Should I contact family or friends to make sure we can visit?" "Should we go to an all-inclusive resort?" All-inclusive means you pay ahead of time for your rooms, food and beverages. Sometimes it helps to cut down on costs. "What if we do not speak the language of the place we are going to?" "What if we need to rent a car?" If you are asked any of these questions, here are ways that you could respond. "I would ask for vacation time months in advance if you can." "The earlier you ask the better chance you have of getting the time off." "Once you decide where you are going I would call the airport and ask them." "If you travel outside of the United States you will need a passport." "You can apply for a passport at a local Government Agency." "Check online for information." "You could go to the book store and look at travel books or brochures." "I would get online and do some research on places you are interested." "It depends on where you are going. I would call and ask them how far in advance they take reservations." "I would call them as soon as you decide on where to go." "You can sometimes get good deals and information from a travel agency." "I would just do it yourself. You can find out all the information online." "Yes I would contact them to make sure they are available when you visit." "If you can visit when they have time off you will be able to do more together." "An all-inclusive resort would be nice so everything is already paid for." "I would rather just stay at a hotel and pay for things as we do them." "You can buy a book to bring a along to help translate." "You could study a bit before you go to learn a few new words." "I would call ahead of time and reserve a car from a car rental agency." "I would check with the place you are staying to see if they have car rentals." Getting There Once you have scheduled a vacation and have decided to travel, you must now consider some sort of transportation. A lot depends on how far you are going, where you are going, and how fast you need to get there. Options might include traveling by airplane, car or even train. Checking prices, requirements for travel, and whether or not the mode of transportation goes to the destination are all the things to consider. If traveling by plane or train, make sure you book your seats months in advance if possible to assure a spot. A lot of times the price of traveling will change depending on your choice of seats and the time of year. So make sure you consider all when making reservations.On Vacation
Listen to the Entire Lesson While on vacation you can simply hang out and relax at the beach, enjoy time with friends and family, or go sightseeing. It all depends on what you want and a lot of times what you can afford. Here are some questions commonly used when on a vacation. "Should we do any sightseeing on vacation?" "What places should we visit?" "What if we do not speak the language of the country we are in?" "How do we know good places to eat?" "How do we book any excursions?" If you are asked any of these questions, here are ways that you could respond. "It is always fun to visit historical places while on vacation." "Depends on what you like to do. Sightseeing can be a fun way to discover new places." "You can always ask the hotel for recommendations on what to see." "You can read in a historical travel book and fun things to see and do." "Try and find someone to help answer your questions at your hotel." "Bring along a language book to look up words so you can communicate better." "A good idea is to ask the locals where to eat. They can give you good advice on places you might not normally go." "I would ask the concierge at the hotel." "Sometimes you can book excursions with the concierge at the hotel." "You can book them beforehand through the travel agency."Family and Friends
Listen to the Entire Lesson When you have discussions with family and close friends, you usually speak the language you are most comfortable with. Therefore, this lesson will not focus on the sentences you use to speak with your family, but it will focus more on the sentences you use when you are talking to someone about your family or your close friends. Here are some questions you can ask when talking about family. "How are your parents doing?" "Are your parents healthy and well?" "Do you still live with your parents?" "Do you live near any family members?" "Where do your in-laws live?" "Do you see your family frequently?" "Do you ever have family reunions?" You can respond to these types of questions in multiple ways. Here are some examples. "My parents are doing well." "My father is getting old, but otherwise, healthy." "My mother has been complaining about chest pains. I hope it isn't anything serious." "Yeah. I live with my parents. It saves me some rent money." "Just for another year until I get back on my feet." "No. I moved out several years ago. I have my own apartment now." "My in-laws are in Ohio." "I grew up in Florida, so my in-laws are there. We moved to California 5 years ago." "My family lives in the area so I usually see them once a month." "My family lives pretty far away, so I only see them a couple times a year." "We have a family reunion every 5 years." "No, but I wish we could." "We used to, but everyone is too busy these days, so we haven't had one in a while now."Talking about Friends
Listen to the Entire Lesson Having lifelong friends is a great conversational topic. Many questions are related towards how long they have been friends. Here are some questions you can ask when talking about friends. "How long have you guys been friends?" "How long have you known each other?" "Did you grow up together?" "Did you go to school together?" "So how did you meet?" Here are some example you can use to respond to these types of questions. "We've been friends since elementary school." "I think it's been like 20 years." "We grew up together. Our parents lived pretty close so we were basically neighbors." "We went to the same school since the 5th grade." "We met in middle school and started going to the same school from the 7th grade." "We started going to the same school at the University of Washington." "We met at church when we were young. We have been close friends since." "We met in high school in our English class."Pregnancy and Birth
Listen to the Entire Lesson Expecting a baby can be both exciting and a nervous time. For first time parents you are deciding on a hospital for delivery, doctors for child care, deciding on birth classes, curious about what you are having, and preparation for home just to name a few. For second, third, or even forth time parent's things may be a bit easier and relaxed. We will be taking a look more at the experience or events of first time parents. Pregnancy Having a doctor you feel comfortable with and like will help make the pregnancy process a bit easier. The mother as well as the baby will be going through changes and having someone to answer all your questions will be helpful. You will need to go in for exams, have ultrasounds and continue to check the overall health of mom and the baby. Here are some questions you may be asked if you are pregnant. If you feel comfortable answering you can, but pregnancy is personal so it is ok to not answer questions especially asked by strangers. "How far a long are you?" "Are you having a boy or girl?" "Do you have names picked out?" "Is this your first child?" "What hospital are you delivering at?" "What are some things that you need?" Here are some ways you can answer. "6 months." "I am in the 8th month." "I am having a boy." "I am having another boy." (If this is your second boy.) "We are having a girl." "We thought a lot about names, but we haven't decided on one yet." "We don't know if it is a boy or girl, so we haven't decided on a name." "If it is a boy, we picked Mark, and if it is a girl, we decided on Jennifer." "This is our 5th child." "No. We have 2 other children." "We are going to Bellevue hospital." "We will be delivering at Overlake hospital." "Thank you for offering, but we don't need anything right now." "I think we have everything we need, but I'll let you know if I need something. Thank you."Pregnancy Checkups
Listen to the Entire Lesson You will go to checkups throughout your pregnancy. This will help assure you and your baby are staying healthy and things are going well. This is also a good time to ask your doctor questions. Here are some questions you might ask at a checkup. "I am having a bit of back pain, any recommendations?" "How is my baby doing?" "What should I be eating?" "Is there anything I should not be eating?" "Can I fly on the airplane?" "Is it ok to exercise?" "Can I still take my medication?" Here are some questions your doctor might ask you during your checkup. "How are things going?" "Are you getting any sleep?" "Are you in any pain?" "How is your appetite?" "Do you want to know the sex of your baby?" Here are some ways you can answer. Providing as much information will allow the doctor to help you. "I'm having a lot of morning sickness and I can't hold anything down." "I feel tired all the time." "I get a lot of heart burn. It is very uncomfortable and I can't eat well." "I am hungry all the time. I am eating so much. Is it okay to eat so much?"Birth
Listen to the Entire Lesson The time has come for the baby to be born. Here are some questions that might be asked to the mother or doctor at the hospital. "Did your water break?" "How far along are your contractions?" "Are you in any pain?" "Do you need to call any family?" "Do you need an epidural?" "Can I get you anything?" When it is time to have a baby, here are some sentences you might need. "Doctor, I think my water broke. I will need to come in to the hospital immediately." "My contractions are 5 minutes apart." "I am having contractions every 10 minutes." "I have severe cramps." "Can I call my mother?" "What are the side effects of having an epidural?" "I would like to get an epidural." "Does it hurt to get an epidural?"Neighbors
Listen to the Entire Lesson Neighbors are people who live in your neighborhood. You may live in a large neighborhood with lots of homes or a small cul de sac with just a few homes. Neighbors can even include people who live upstairs or downstairs from you in an apartment complex. Introductions Here are a few statements you can use when meeting a neighbor: "Hello, my name is Jack." "This is my wife, Suzie." "I live next door to you." "I live downstairs from you." These statements are all good ways of letting someone know something simple about you. Here are some questions you can ask when speaking to a neighbor. "What is your name?" "How long have you lived in the neighborhood?" "What do you do for work?" "Do you have any children?" "Where are you from?" "Hi, how are you doing?" You may be asked the same questions from a neighbor. If this happens, just answer them the best you can. These questions are a good way to initiate a conversation and a way to find out more about one another. Hanging out with Neighbors After meeting your neighbors you may want to spend more time with them. You can invite them over for a barbeque, for a drink, or even just hang out outside in the neighborhood. Just do the best you can talking and asking questions. Enjoy the time together to learn more about one another and have fun. Questions will come to you as you get to know them better and you will hopefully begin to feel more comfortable.Organizing Time
Listen to the Entire Lesson Being able to manage your time efficiently can help relieve some stress of trying to get things done and also help accomplish goals in the proper time frame. We will take a look at a few different ways to better/help manage your time wisely. Organizing Time Just as stated above, managing your time can be an important tool in performing jobs in a time frame as well helping with some of the stress that comes with getting things done. Here are a number of ways/tools to help manage your time wisely. Using a daily calendar to mark down appointments, commitments, or special events will help remind you of what needs to be done. A monthly calendar can basically work the same way as a daily one but enable you to plan ahead far in advance. Here are some questions commonly used when organizing your time. "What is the best tool to organize time/appointments?" "Should I use monthly or a weekly planner?" "Should I carry my planner with me?" Daily Planner A daily planner will help you schedule your time wisely when dealing with a busy life full of events. Using a daily planner can help organize meetings, lunch plans and other responsibilities throughout your day. Daily planners come in all shapes and sizes. From writing things down to using an electronic planner, lots of options are available. Here are some questions commonly used when using a daily planner. "How do I know what to use as a daily planner?" "If I use an electronic planner should I set reminders?" "What if I have more things to do than the time to do it?" "What if I need to cancel something?" "What if I need to make an appointment?" "If I have someone at work who plans for me should I still keep a planner?" Monthly Planner/Yearly Planner A monthly or yearly planner is essentially the same as a daily planner except the fact that they allow you to plan far in advance. Just as daily planners can be as simple as writing things down on a calendar or using an electronic device to keep track, the same methods can be applied on a monthly or yearly planner. Managing your time, making and keeping appointments, and keeping notified of special events are all functions of a planner.Habits and Health
Listen to the Entire Lesson Habits and heath are popular topics with almost everyone. From listening to the radio, watching T.V, or talking with friends, the topic of habits and health seem to always come up. Habits can include such things as smoking, drinking and eating and health topics can include dieting to exercising. Talking about these subjects with others depends on your comfort level or interest on the subjects. Often times these subjects come up because of curiosity or even by someone looking for other options. While information on these subjects is readily available for people to research on their own, it is important when talking about them to be caring and show respect while not telling someone what they SHOULD be doing but instead talk about your experience and thoughts while lending some support. Habits The definition of a habit is an unconscious pattern of behavior that is acquired through frequent repetition. Although you hear a lot about 'bad' habits, not all are. You could have a habit of shaking hands when greeting someone or a habit of looking both ways before you cross the street for example. But without a doubt the 'bad' habits are the ones you will hear the most about and the ones people like to discuss. Below you will find some questions associated with bad habits. "How can I stop smoking?" "How can I cut down on drinking?" "How can I reduce my eating?" "I should stop smoking." "I think I drink too much." "I have to watch what I eat." "I have a bad habit of interrupting people when they speak." "I have a habit of smoking when I drink." "Why are most habits bad for you? I wish I had a habit of eating vegetables."Health
Listen to the Entire Lesson Our health is an important subject for all of us. How much we eat, how much we exercise and how much we sleep are all topics of discussion when mentioning health. The United States in particular is surrounded by conversations of obesity, but on the flip side one of the greatest consumers of health care products. As popular of a subject health is it can also be an uncomfortable one. People who are overweight might not be as comfortable talking about health, so try and be aware of the person you are talking to's feelings. Here are some questions and statements commonly used when talking about health. "How do I find a good gym?" "What vitamin supplements do you use?" "How often do you go to the doctors to get a regular check up?" "Now that I am getting older, I wonder what I have to do to stay healthy." "I need to find a good way to exercise without putting too much pressure on my knees." You may also find yourself asking some of these questions: "Have you ever been on a successful diet?" "Have you ever tried yoga?" "Have you ever used a personal trainer?" "Do you belong to a gym?" "How do I find information on diet?" "What is some healthy food?" "Should I use a weight loss system/company?"Sleeping and Dreams
Listen to the Entire Lesson Getting a good night sleep is an important part of your health and overall happiness. Sleeping well can insure you are rested for the next day and able to perform properly at work and school. Lots of things can interfere with a good night sleep from babies crying in the middle of the night to having a lot on our minds. People in general require different amounts of sleep to function properly throughout the day although the recommended amount of sleep is typically 8 hours. Here are some statements about sleep you might say. "I wish I could sleep more, but I have too much to do." "I usually sleep 6 hours a day." "I have a hard time falling asleep, and also a hard time waking up." "When I lay down to sleep, I am usually asleep in matter of minutes." "I wake up automatically at 6am every morning." "I am having a hard time sleeping." "I got a new bed yesterday." "My husband snores a lot." "I am not getting a lot of sleep with our new baby at home." "My neighbor's dog keep waking us up at night." "The storm last night kept me from getting a good night sleep."Dreams
Listen to the Entire Lesson Dreams are very interesting and can be a topic of discussion in many situations. Here are some sentences to start some of these discussions. "I had a really bad nightmare last night." "I keep having the same dreams over and over." "I had a great dream last night and I really didn't want to wake up." "I rarely have dreams that I remember." "I had this weird dream where I was flying through the mall. What do you think it means?" "I have a recurring dream where I am walking through the woods in a green costume. Do you know what it means?" "I had a dog when I was young, and I often dream about him." When dealing with children, they can get nightmares if they watch a scary television show. You can use some of these sentences to talk to your children or to talk to other people about this problem. "You can't watch that show because you'll have a bad dream." "You know you'll get nightmares if you watch something scary." "Are you sure you want to watch that show? It might be a little scary." "My son kept me up all night because he couldn't fall asleep after watching a movie. I shouldn't let him see anything like that anymore." "The daycare had a movie day and although it was a children's movie, my kid had nightmares." "Even babies have dreams. One day my 1 year old daughter woke up screaming pointing to the bed."Hair Cut and Massages
Listen to the Entire Lesson Although some men enjoy massages and are picky about where they get their hair cut these are generally more talked about by women. Women usually go to a salon to get hair cut and some salons offer more than just hair cutting services. Salons can offer a number of different massages, pedicures and manicures. Choosing a Salon Finding a good place to get your hair done is usually done by word of mouth. Meaning someone has recommended one to you or you liked someone's haircut and asked them where they go. Here are some questions commonly used when choosing a salon. "I like your hair cut, where did you go to get it cut?" "Will I need an appointment?" "What other things do they offer there?" "Do they sell hair products?" "How much do they charge?" "How far in advance should I book an appointment?" Booking an appointment Once you have chosen a salon now it is time to book an appointment. Simply calling them on the phone will do. Sometimes by checking on the internet or simply by calling you can check on prices and other options like what kind of massages they offer. "Where are you looking to get your hair done?" "Did you need to get your hair colored?" "When did you want to try and come in?" "Did you want to book a pedicure?" "Did you want to book a massage?" "Do you prefer male or female for your massage?" "What type of massage do you like?"At the Salon
Listen to the Entire Lesson Once you have booked your appointment and have arrived at the salon, you will need to communicate what you want. First, they might ask you some of these questions. "How would you like your hair cut?" "What are we doing for you today?" "What can I do for you today?" "What did you want to do with your hair?" "Did you want a manicure or a pedicure?" "Did you want your nails done?" "What color nail polish would you like?" "Are you in for a hair cut or a perm?" "Did you want to color your hair today?" "So what color were you thinking for your hair today?" To make sure you get what you want, it is important to be clear on your expectations. Use some of these sentences to express what you want. "I only want a trim." "Can you cut about 2 inches off the length?" "I want 1 inch off the top and the sides blended in." "Can you layer my hair?" "I would like a straight perm today." "Can you color my hair to brown?" "I would like my nails done please." "A pedicure with red nail polish please."Books and Magazines
Listen to the Entire Lesson Books and magazines contain a wealth of information. Learning new things, finding information needed to help with projects or simply a way to escape from the everyday world are some of the many reasons why people read books and magazines. Reading books is also a great way to spend time with your children for fun, or to share what you have learned with family and friends. Here are some questions you might ask while at a bookstore. "What are some of the bestsellers?" "What are some new releases?" "Where can I find books by a particular author?" "Where is the children's section?" "Do you have books on animals?" "Do you offer a membership for customers?" "Does this magazine have monthly or yearly subscription?" "Can I get a subscription sent to my business?" "Can I reserve a book?" You can also make many statements about books to your friends. "I just finished reading a book on money management. It was very informative." "I love reading. If I am not out, I am usually in my room reading a book." "My favorite types of books are autobiographies." "The new fiction bestseller was fun. You have to read it." "Buying books as a present is not appreciated by the kid, but the parents usually love them." "I really like getting books as a gift."Machine Problems
Listen to the Entire Lesson There are many things to say while in the office. Something can go wrong with the printer, or you could be wondering why a package didn't arrive. The next several short lessons will be about Basic Office scenarios. "Do you know what's wrong with the printer?" "Who do we call to report a problem with the printer?" "When is the printer going to be fixed?" "The printer next to the break room is broken. Where is the other printer?" "The copy machine is jammed again." "The copy machine is broken." "We need to get the copy machine fixed." "A technician is coming this afternoon to fix the copy machine." "Where is the paper for the copy machine?" "We need to order more paper. We're running low."Mail Room
Listen to the Entire Lesson For larger size companies, a mail room is provided where each employee has their own box. Here are some sentences you might need to know. "Where is the mail room?" "I don't have a mail box. Who should I contact to get one?" "Your mail box was pretty full. You should go pick them up." "I haven't checked my mail in 2 weeks." "I never receive anything so I don't need to check my mail often." "What time does the delivery person usually come?" "What time does the mail usually come?" Large companies also have multiple buildings. So sending mail to another worker is a common practice. For example, if I need to send some financial documents to the auditor in a building down the street, I will use the Inter Office mail service. Some people might say I.O. to make it short. "I can send it to you through Inter Office mail." "I'll send it through Inter Office mail immediately." "I'll IO it to you." "I need those documents. Can you IO it to me?" "Would you like to pick them up or should I send it through Inter Office mail?" The term inter basically means between when there is more than one. For example, in the word international, nation is a country, and if you have inter in front of it, we have international, which means involving two or more nations.Requesting Equipment
Listen to the Entire Lesson "I'm out of staples. Do we have any more in the supply room?" "The supply room is running low on pens. I think we should get more." "My monitor is very old. It's a little blurry and it gives me a headache when I look at it for a long duration. Could I get a new monitor?" "My computer is too slow. It slows down my work. I would like a faster computer. It will increase my efficiency on many of my tasks." "I would like an ergonomic keyboard. I can type much faster with those." "Can I get a new chair? This one is so uncomfortable." "Can you get me a headset for the telephone? I'm on the phone most of the day and I would like to free up my hands."Company Policies
Listen to the Entire Lesson Every company has their own rules about animals, dress code, break time, vacation time, and many other policies. Let's take a moment to learn how to ask about these policies. "How long are we allowed for lunch?" "How long is our lunch break?" "If I only take a 30 minute lunch, can I leave 30 minutes earlier?" "What time should I report to work?" "Is there a strict policy on working hours?" "Are we allowed to start work an hour later if we work an hour more?" "What is the dress code here?" "Are we allowed to wear casual clothes on Friday?" "Does this company have the casual Friday thing?" "If I have ten vacation days, am I allowed to use them all at once?" "What holidays do we have off?" "Do our vacation days expire?" "Does this company allow telecommuting?" "Are we allowed to work from home?"I'm Busy
Listen to the Entire Lesson For general statements about being tired at work or being sick of work will be covered in the 'Talking to coworkers' section. These types of statements shouldn't be said to everyone. "I'm busy with work." "Can I do this later?" "Does this have to be done now?" "When do you need this by?" "When is the deadline?" "I'm not going to have time for any other assignment until Thursday." "I'll try to free up my schedule." "I'm pretty sure I can meet the deadline." "If I don't get any help on this, I won't be able to complete it on time." "I'll do whatever I can to make sure this is done on time." "You can count on me." "Have I ever let you down?"Giving/Asking Business Cards
Listen to the Entire Lesson "Do you have a business card?" "Could I have one of your business cards?" "Can I have your business card?" Responding to these questions are very easy. You can just say 'sure' or 'no problem.' "Can I get your phone number or email address?" "What is the best way to contact you?" "Can I get your contact information?" "Let me give you one of my business cards." "My contact information is on my business card. Let me give you one." "You can reach me by calling the number on my business card." "My email address is on my business card."General Office
Listen to the Entire Lesson If you can't find a file, you can ask around. "Do you know where the ABC file is at?" "Do you have the ABC file?" "Is anybody using the ABC file right now?" "Did you check the file cabinet? It should be there." "Check the bin. Sometimes people throw it in there after they are done." "Oh... it's on my desk. I forgot to put it back." "It's in my office. I'll get it for you." If you see a file or a book you need on someone's desk, you can ask to borrow it. "Are you using this book right now?" "Can I borrow this book?" "Are you finished with this file?" "Are you done with this report?" "Can I use this file?" If you need something, it is common to ask around. Here are some examples of what you might need in the office. "Do you have an extra mouse? Mine broke." "Do you have another network cable? The one I have is too short." "Do you have a blank floppy disk I can have?" "I ran out of labels. Do you have any I can have?" "Can I borrow your stapler?" "Do you have a hole puncher?" "Do you have a staple remover by any chance?"A Little Late
Listen to the Entire Lesson When you work for a company, there are times when you are late or you can't make it to a meeting. Sometimes you are sick, or sometimes you are stuck in traffic. We will study sentences you need to know to say why you are late or can't make it to work. Late Some jobs require you to 'punch in' when you get to work. 'Punching in' keeps track of how long you worked. Many hourly jobs use this system. But if you are a salary person and do not have to 'punch in', then you have more flexibility. Let's say you are going to be five minutes late. If you have your own office, then nobody will know. But if you work in a setting where your boss sees you coming in, then you will need an excuse. We'll cover everything about being late here. Five minutes late If you are going to be just a little late, then you don't need to call in. However, you will need to tell them why you are late when you get in the office. Here are some examples. "Sorry I'm late. Traffic was unusually bad today." "I apologize for being late. I had to drop off my wife at work. It took longer than I thought." "I had a dentist appointment this morning and it was longer than I expected." "I'm sorry for being late. I got stuck in every light this morning." If you are the boss, then you might want to ask why your employee is late. Let's see some of these sentences. "Running late this morning?" "What held you up this morning?" "Do you have a reason for being late?" "Why are you late?" A boss or manager will not be too upset if you are late only once or very rarely. But if this is a constant habit, they might be a little more upset. "You have been late three times in the last two weeks. Is this going to be a continual problem?" "Your tardiness is getting out of hand. You had better start managing your morning time better." "I expect you to be at your desk at eight o'clock. Do you have a problem with this?" If you hear one of these statements, then you better say something that will calm the boss down. Also, you shouldn't let this happen again so tell him or her it won't happen again. "I am terribly sorry. It won't happen again." "I had a lot of recent changes at home, but it's all taken care of. I will not be late again." "I'm really sorry. It's been one of those weeks. It won't happen again."Very Late
Listen to the Entire Lesson If you are going to be a lot later than 5 minutes, then you should call your manager and tell them about it. "Hi Barbara, I'm going to be 30 minutes late today. My car is having trouble this morning, so I arranged for a ride with a friend." "Hey Jack, I'm running a little late today. I just got out of my dentist appointment and it was longer than I expected." "Mark? This is Pat. I'm stuck in traffic. I think there is an accident that is holding up traffic. I'm going to be a little late." When you plan on being late ahead of time, it is much easier. For example, if you have a doctor's appointment in the morning, you can tell them in advance and then you don't have to worry about coming in on time. "I have a doctor's appointment tomorrow morning. Remember I told you earlier this week? I'll come in right after my appointment." "My daughter has been sick, so I'm going to take her to see the doctor tomorrow morning. Is it ok if I'm a little late? My appointment is at seven in the morning, so I'll only be an hour late." "I have to take my parents to the airport tomorrow. I shouldn't be too late, but wanted to tell you ahead of time."Leaving Work Early
Listen to the Entire Lesson This is a little easier than explaining to your boss why you are 10 minutes late. You can think of an excuse ahead of time, or tell them about an appointment so you can leave early. You can use the same excuses as the ones I mentioned earlier. You just have to change the wording a little and make it future tense. "I have to leave a little early today. Is it ok if I finish my work at home?" "I have a dentist appointment at four. I have to leave early today." "I have a dentist appointment tomorrow at four. Is it ok if I leave early tomorrow?" "I have to pick up my wife at the airport tomorrow. Is it ok if I leave at three?" "I have a conference with my son's teacher tomorrow at three thirty. I have to leave at three. Will that be ok?" "I have a terrible headache. Is it ok if I leave early today?" "I think I might be coming down with the flu. I should get some rest and try to fight this thing off early. May I leave early today?" "I'm not feeling well. I think I should get some rest. Will it be ok if I go home early today?" "My son got sick and I have to pick him up from school. Will that be ok?"Sick day
Listen to the Entire Lesson "Martha? This is Jack. I have a fever and I will not be able to come in today." "Hi Mary, I have to use a sick day today. I'm feeling terrible right now." "Hi Steve, this is Mark. I wanted to let you know that I am too sick to come in today." "Hi Andrew, this is Josh. I'm pretty sick so I will not be able to make it in today. I was feeling sick last night and thought I would be better after some sleep, but it just got worse." "Hi Sam, this is Jessica. I have some urgent personal matters I have to deal with. I won't be able to make it in." "Mark? This is John. My dad went into the emergency room this morning. I'm not sure what the problem is, but I don't think I can make it in today. I'll send you an update later." "My son all of the sudden got really sick. I have to take him to the hospital now. I doubt I can make it in today. Will that be ok?" "Jake? Will it be ok if I take the day off? My grandmother just passed away and I don't think I will be able to work today."Network share and public share
Listen to the Entire Lesson Network share is a location on your network that you can access. The files are stored on a different computer. If you do not have a network set up in the office you work at, then you won't need this section. In order for you to save data on a network share, you will need permission. The person in charge of the computer has the ability to add users. If you know of a public share and you cannot access it, then tell your administrator or the person in charge of that computer to give you permission. "I have it saved on a network share. You can find it at computername public John data.doc." Whenever you tell someone a network location, you tell them the name by the path. I'll use the previous sentence as an example. Computername is the name of the computer, then the next word is a folder name. The next name is also a folder name. Finally, data.doc is the name of the file. So, the location of data.doc is in a folder named John that is under a folder called public under the computer computername. When you say a path verbally, you just leave a pause after each word or say slash between the words. In the written form, it looks like this, \computernamepublicJohndata.doc. When people share documents, they save them on their own computer and put it in a folder that they made public. Or, a co-worker might have data saved on their computer. If you don't want to deal with the floppy disks, then you can retrieve the data from the network if they make the folder public. "I have those files in my public folder. Just go to John01 public. You should see all the documents there." "I saved it at John01 public. Go ahead and take what you need." "I'll need all the information on ABC Company. Didn't you say you have the information? Can you put them on a public share?" "Hey John, I don't have permission to get into John01. Can you check the permissions on the folder?" "I don't have write access on the folder. Can you give me write permissions?" "I don't want anybody changing the data, so everyone only has read permissions."Vacation
Listen to the Entire Lesson Taking a planned day off These are the easiest to request. If you are caught up with your work and you want to take a vacation or personal day, it is as easy as asking for it. "Can I use a vacation day this Friday?" "Will it be ok if I use a personal day this Thursday?" "I have to catch up on a lot of errands, so can I use a vacation day on Monday?" "My parents are coming into town. Can I take Thursday and Friday off?" "I would like to use my vacation days for the first week of June. Will that be ok?" "Will it be ok if I take the last week of July off?" "Can I schedule a vacation for the second week of August?" "I was wondering if I can take a vacation. Can I take the first two weeks off in September?" Remember that asking for a vacation all depends on the office policies. Some companies do not like an employee taking all their vacation days at once. However, some places are more lenient and allow long vacation days. Before asking for long vacation days, you should first see what other employees are doing.Removable Disk
Listen to the Entire Lesson When you save data, there are several ways to save it. There is the standard removable disk, saving to the hard drive, and saving to a network share. "Does anybody have an extra floppy disk?" "I ran out of floppy disks. Where can I get more?" "I think we need to order more floppy disks." "I saved it on a floppy disk." "I have all the information on my USB drive." "Can you save the document on a disk and give it to me?" "Save the information on a disk and give it to Jack." "I'll have all the information on a disk and bring it to the meeting." Standard floppy disks only hold 1.44 MB of information. There are times when the disk is not big enough. Here are ways to express this. "All the information doesn't fit on one disk." "The file is too large to fit on a disk." "Do you have a different storage device that can hold more information?" "Can you order a 128 MB removable storage device for me? I always need to move files that a regular floppy disk cannot hold."Hard Drive
Listen to the Entire Lesson "I have all the information saved on my hard drive." "I finished the presentation preparation and I saved it on my hard drive." "I have the documents you are looking for saved on my computer." "I have the information on my computer. Do you want me to put it on a floppy disk for you?" When you say something like, 'saved on my computer', it is understood that you are referring to the hard drive, so in this situation, you can use the two words interchangeably. "I'm running out of room on my hard drive." "I need a bigger hard drive." "I have the information on my computer, but I think I will need to prepare hard copies for the meeting." Hard copy refers to something that is tangible. For example, a hard copy of a report is a printed out version on paper. A soft copy is the file stored on the computer.Software
Listen to the Entire Lesson Different companies use different software programs. For example, a tax firm might use a program for tax purposes, and an insurance company will use their own software for inputting data to retrieve quotes for customers. You might not have the software or it might be broken. I'll have some example sentences for these situations. "What software do you use here?" "What kind of application do you use to keep track of all these records?" "Martha told me about TaxIt. When can I get a copy?" "Is there a manual how to use this program?" "How do you use this?" "TaxIt won't open any more. I think it's broken." "I can't get TaxIt to work. Can someone help me with this?" "Microsoft Office applications do everything we need. That's all we use here." "What version of Office do you use here?" "What software do you use for word processing?" "All the documents are saved using MSWord. Do you have Word or another application that will be able to read the information?" "We use a different word processing application. Can you save as a text file?" "I can't open the file that you gave me. What version of Word are you using?"Internet
Listen to the Entire Lesson I'm not going to explain all the specifics about the Internet here. The goal of this lesson is not to give a computer lesson, but to learn English related to using the computer. I will show some sentences that are commonly used for the Internet. "What is the URL of that site again?" "What is the address to the English site you are studying?" "What is the best search engine?" "Where can I find information on marriage law?" "If you go to greatsite.com, you will find all the information I just told you." "If you need more information on cooking, go to cooking.com." "I purchased all the computers from Dell.com. We should have them by the end of the week." "Do you have a company website?" "Is there a website where I can learn more about your services?" "Do you have a website where I can review the different products you are offering?" "I HATE POP-UPS!" I really do. I hate pop-up ads with a passion. If it was up to me, I would shut down all companies that produce pop up ads. For now, we have to live with them. "Can I install something that stops pop-up ads?" "What tools are available to block pop-up ads?" "I think I misspelled the web address. Can you spell it out for me?" "I'm getting a page not found error. I think the web site is down."Intranet
Listen to the Entire Lesson A lot of companies have an intranet site. This is basically web pages that can be viewed by employees connected to the network in the office. The address does not use the standard .net or .com address. It will simply be http://companysite. "Do we have an intranet site that explains our benefits?" "What was the site where we log our travel expenses?" "If you want to use a sick day, you can go to http://timereport." If you have an intranet site for your company, then when you talk to other workers, you don't need to say http:// everytime. You can simply say the name, for example, 'If you want to use a sick day, you can go to time report.' The other person listening should understand that you mean http://timereport. "Is there an intranet site detailing each project our company is doing?" "Is our company going to put an intranet site for employees?" "I think it will help a lot if we had an intranet site with general questions and answers from all the employees."General Computer Sentences
Listen to the Entire Lesson "My computer is giving me problems again." "My computer broke, but luckily I saved my work on a disk." "My computer is too slow." "Something is wrong with my computer." "I work with the computer most of the day." "All my work is done on the computer." "We are upgrading our computers this week." "I hope we upgrade our computers soon. The ones we have are way too old." "My computer froze. What should I do?" "My computer is not responding and I haven't saved my data yet. What should I do?" "My computer is making a weird sound. Can I get someone to look at it?" This concludes the computer English lesson. I know many of the business topics are large and some of them have topics I didn't cover. I want to remind you that you can ask specific questions to us using the business bulletin board.Asking for Email Address
Listen to the Entire Lesson Email is a daily part of the office life. Everybody and every company uses email as a way to communicate quickly. This lesson will cover all aspects of using the email. "Can I have your email address?" "What is your email address?" "Do you have an email account?" "My email address is someone at hotmail dot com (someone@hotmail.com)." "It is someone@hotmail.com." "Do you have his email address?" "What was her email address again?"Requesting information through email
Listen to the Entire Lesson "Can you send it to my email address?" "You can send it to me through email." "Can you email it to me?" "Can I email it to you?" "Can I send you the information through email?" Whenever you send an email to an account that doesn't exist, you get an automated email saying the mail was not delivered. You can use these sentences if you are in this situation. "Can I verify your email address? The address I have on file appears to be incorrect." "I am unable to email it to you. Can you tell me your email address again?" "I am getting a mail saying it is undeliverable. I might have misspelled it. Can I double check your email address?" "The email address I sent it to was someone@hotmail.com. Is this correct?" "I sent the email to someone@hotmail.com. Didn't you get it?" "That's the wrong email address. My email address is someone@hotmail.net." "Oh... I see the problem. My email address is some1@hotmail.com."Sending attachments through email
Listen to the Entire Lesson Some companies have security in place such as firewalls that prevents sending certain types of attachments. For example, sending a .js file is potentially dangerous because it can run scripts. Also, some documents can carry viruses through macros or other methods. Sending attachments to some email addresses are not possible. However, text files are usually permitted. Here are some sentences that you might find useful. "I can send you the document through email." "I'll send you the images to your email account." "Can I send the documents to your email?" "Can I email you the files?" "Can I email the files to you?" "I received your email, but I didn't receive the attachments." "My company prevents many types of attachments. Can you send a text file instead?" "Before you send the document, change the extension .doc to .txt and then send it. When I receive it, I will change it back to .doc before I open it." "Hi Mary, I sent you an email with my proposal as an attachment. Did you receive it?" "Hey Jack, did you receive my attachments?" "The file is too large to send through email." "My email account will only allow sending attachments that are 1 MB or smaller." "My email account will only allow me to receive attachments that are 2 MB or smaller."Email Problems
Listen to the Entire Lesson "My email is getting full. I better delete some old mail." "I better save my emails to my hard drive so I can make some room in my inbox." "How do I request more storage space for my email account? I am constantly running out of space." "You're running out of email space too? I have the same problem at least once a month." "I hate getting the mail that I am running low on space." "I just started my job so I haven't received my email address yet." "My email account hasn't been created yet. They said I should receive it tomorrow." "I haven't received any emails in the last four hours. I think the server is down or something." "I think the exchange server is down. Is somebody taking a look at this problem?" "I can't send anything right now. Is anybody else having a problem with their email?" "It could be a network problem, but my email account is not working." "I can't access my email right now. I think the server is down." "Who should we contact if we are having email problems?" "I keep getting junk mail in my work account. How did they get this email address?" "How do I prevent junk mail?" "Don't open any mail with the title, 'Your request has been approved!!!' It contains a virus. Please delete this mail at once if you see it."Reply and Reply All
Listen to the Entire Lesson When you reply all, it goes out to everyone on the To line and the CC line. Reply only goes to the sender. When we send out a mail to many people, you might see a sentence that says 'little 'r' me'. This means to use the small R instead of the Big R. That basically means to reply only to me instead of replying to everyone on the mail thread. A mail is also referred to as a thread. That is because in the office, a mail can go on back and forth among many people so it becomes a chain of mail that started from one email. I'll use these terminologies in the next several example sentences. "I sent out a mail to the whole group. I requested that they little 'r' me with their ideas." "When I receive a mail sent out to multiple people, I keep forgetting to send to all." This next sentence is not a spoken sentence. It's a common sentence used in email when someone forgets to send to everyone. 'Resending to include everyone.' If you see this, that means the person sent a reply to the sender instead of replying all. "Start a mail thread on your idea. I think everyone should get in on this discussion." "Do you want me to start a mail thread for this?"Forwarding Mail
Listen to the Entire Lesson "I can't find the mail about our next project. Can you forward the mail to me?" "I got a useful email on productivity. I think I will forward it to our team." "I have that email. I'll forward it to you." "If you find that mail, please forward it to me." "I'll forward you the mail I got from the manager." "I received a mail from the marketing manager. I don't know what she is asking for. Can I forward the mail to you?" "One of our clients is asking for more data on the BB project. Who should I forward this mail to?" "Forward the complaint to the manager. I think he should see this." Sending to an alternate email address is common when the work email is not working. Here are some sentences you can use if you are ever in this situation. Some companies do not allow this, so make sure your company does not have policies prohibiting this. "My work email is currently down. Can you send it to my personal email address? It is someone@hotmail.com." "I'm having problems with my work email account. Can you send it to someone@hotmail.com instead?" "I'm having problems sending you an email to this account. Is there another email account you have that I can try?" "Our exchange server is down for the next thirty minutes. If this is urgent, you can send me an email to my personal account. It is someone@hotmail.com." Although I have a couple of sentences on writing, most of this is to talk about email. Learning to write is not what I am trying to teach here. I want everyone to be able to speak. You should be practicing all of these lessons while talking along.General email sentences
Listen to the Entire Lesson "Hi Jack, this is Steve. I have a proposal for the marketing idea. Can I email it to you?" "I will need the information by noon. Can you email it to me soon?" "The deadline for the project was an hour ago. Did you send the information?" "I'm going to send you a rough draft. Can you review it and email me back?" "I have sent three mails asking for information on their design. I haven't received a reply yet." "Send an email to the team with your plan of action. I want everyone following this process." "I have to send out my report before five. I won't have time to help you right now." "I have a meeting at 4:00 pm. I think I should send out a reminder mail. I don't want anyone to forget." "If you are not sure how to talk to the boss about this, why don't you email her?" "Did you read the mail from the CEO? It's about our new mission statement." "The CFO sent out a mail that describes our quarterly earnings." When you are going on vacation, there is an option in some mail programs such as Outlook to reply with a message saying anything you want. After you turn on auto reply, there is a text field where you can type in your message. In general, this is what I have seen the most. Once again, the following is not spoken, but email language. 'I will be vacation until June 4th. I will be on email occasionally, but if you have an emergency, you can reach me at 555-555-5555. For information on financial reports, contact Suzy Mae. For information on quarterly earnings, contact Jim Beam. For other urgent matters, contact Billy McHale.'Explanations and Presentations General
Listen to the Entire Lesson This lesson will give some guidelines on how to explain something and how to speak during presentations. Because I cannot be specific to every topic, I'll choose general ones. You should primarily be looking at the structure and style for this Business English lesson. It is understandable if you feel nervous or uneasy about having to explain something in English. Because English is not your first language, it is very difficult. However, in the office, you will be in many situations when you have to explain something. Here are 3 tips to make your explanation or presentation easier. First, you should not talk fast. I work in a large company with many different people from all over the world. The hardest time I have when listening to someone is when they talk fast with a bad accent. The problem they have is that they are fluent and comfortable speaking English, but they do not realize how bad their accent is. If you speak slower, you can avoid this problem. Unless you are certain that your accent is understandable, always speak a little slower. Second, you should speak clearly. Say each word clearly and emphasize the important words. Even if they don't understand every word in your sentence, they will understand the whole meaning with proper emphasis. Third, prepare and practice ahead of time. You should record yourself and listen to the recording. You should also get an American friend to judge you. This is a lot of work you have to do in the beginning, but this is VERY important. Even though it will make your presentation or explanation clearer and better, that is not the reason I am saying you should do the recording and getting a friend to listen. The reason why this is so important is because you are laying the foundation on proper communication in regards to intonation and pronunciation. For example, if you don't do this, you might think you don't have a problem and you will continue to practice incorrectly. Soon, you will be someone who can talk fast but have terrible pronunciation. You will become the type of people I described... hard to understand. If you take the time to practice for several hours before each presentation, you will be practicing the correct way to enhance your English abilities.Explanation
Listen to the Entire Lesson The third step above is primarily for presentations. When you have to give an explanation, you might not have time to prepare for it. If someone asks you a question, you can't tell them that you will need two hours to prepare before answering. However, if it is work related, you have the ability to anticipate questions ahead of time. Think of your area of expertise and list many questions you have heard from co-workers or friends. If you speak in your own language, you know exactly how to say it without preparing for it. But in English, you don't know where to begin. List all your answers out and learn how to say it in English. If you do this, then anytime you get asked a question about your area, you can quickly respond. Here is an example with more tips. "Can you explain the process of selling a house and the cost associated with it?" "You can either sell the house by yourself or get an agent. Since most of the people use an agent, I will explain that. The first thing you need to do is find a sellers agent. The agent will list your house on the market. After the house is on the market, people who are looking to buy a house will find a buyers agent. The buyers agent looks through the list of houses for sale posted by the sellers agent. The buyers agent shows your house to potential buyers. When someone makes an offer, the buyers agent will let the sellers agent know about the price that the buyer has offered. After everyone agrees, the house is sold. The price associated with selling a house is based on commission. The sellers agent will get an average of 2.5 percent of the selling price and the buyers agent will get 2.5 percent as well. If the price of the house was $300,000, then each agent will get $7500, costing you a total of $15,000." You're first reaction might be, 'when am I ever going to be able to say all this at one time?' But it is much easier than you think. I'll explain further. We have someone asking about selling a house or something. We have to explain the process. Even if you don't know the process of selling a house in America, you can use the same guideline for your area of expertise. If you can say each sentence individually, then you can say all of them put together. I start by saying there are a couple of ways to sell a house. Then the example says you will explain the more common process. From here, it is basically listing steps. 1. "The first thing you need to do is find a sellers agent." 2. "The agent will list your house on the market." 3. "After the house is on the market, people who are looking to buy a house will find a buyers agent." 4. "The buyers agent looks through the list of houses for sale posted by the sellers agent." 5. "The buyers agent shows your house to potential buyers." 6. "When someone makes an offer, the buyers agent will let the sellers agent know about the price that the buyer has offered." 7. "After everyone agrees, the house is sold." 8. "The price associated with selling a house is based on commission." 9. "The sellers agent will get an average of 2.5 percent of the selling price and the buyers agent will get 2.5 percent as well." 10. "If the price of the house was $300,000, then each agent will get $7500, costing you a total of $15,000." This list seems pretty simple now. Each sentence is relatively short. There is no difference between the long paragraph and the listed out items. Both contain the same words. All I did was put them together. Finally, if you feel that you cannot create these sentences even in a list form, use an example that you are familiar with. I'm sure you will have an easy time creating a list if the topic is in your area of expertise. I recommend listening to the paragraph again. But this time, listen to the speed I talk. Also, listen to the pauses after each sentence. Notice that I don't have unnecessary words like 'and', 'moreover', 'furthermore', 'Afterwards', and so on. These are good words, but you don't need them that much when you are explaining something verbally. Using pauses between sentences and speaking clearly and slowly is the best way to communicate an explanation.Presentation
Listen to the Entire Lesson Presentations are longer than an explanation, but it is easier in the sense that you have time to prepare for it. The biggest mistake I have seen is that people do not use short simple sentences. Many of the best presentations from English speakers I have seen are those who use simple sentences that are easy to understand. Remember that a long paragraph can consist of 10 short sentences. It is still effective and much easier to say. Many times, a person will be using a presentation software like Power Point. If that is the case, then you should prepare your slides and a separate document with your sentences for each slide. You shouldn't read them, but at least it is there just in case you forget to mention something. Use it as a preparation material before the presentation and reference during the presentation. Each sentence should be step by step explaining the content on the slide. I am not going to be giving an example because presentations are all different depending on the subject. But keep in mind the process I explained on the house selling example. Keep the sentences short, speak slowly and clearly, put emphasis on key words, and leave a short pause after each sentence. There are many times when you will have to explain something. Here are some questions you might hear. "What did you do this week?" "What are you going to do next week?" "What is your schedule like for the next two weeks?" "Can you explain how to perform an evaluation for a partner feedback?" "How do I perform a refund for a credit card purchase?" There are numerous questions like these you might run into. To answer all of them, just follow the list example. "This week, I finished the analysis on Ford Motor, I started writing a report on international market penetration, and I showed our new employee how to use our software." This example is very simple. It is basically a list of three things. You don't need to include any words in between. You can use this same style of answer for many different types of questions. "Next week, I have to finish my report, research information on GM Motors, and make a presentation on our market strategy." "To perform a feedback on a partner you need to specify who the partner is, what project they worked on, the outcome of the project, where they need to improve, and finally what they did well." "On the credit card machine, press the refund button. Then type in the credit card number and press enter. Type in the amount, and press enter. That's all you need to do." Whenever you are giving an explanation, remember the easiest way to do it is by giving a list and putting them together. In order to be able to do this, you must know how to say key words in your area of expertise. When you have to give a presentation, remember that preparing is the most important. As I said earlier, take the time on your first several presentations to record yourself and find a friend to listen to your presentation. Finally, let's review the three key steps you need to remember when giving an explanation or a presentation. Don't talk fast: Even people with perfect English have this problem. Talking fast is not good when you are explaining something or giving a presentation. Talk clearly: Making the words in each sentence clear will help anyone to understand you better. Prepare and Practice: This is the most important. As time goes on, you will realize how much your preparation will help with your overall English skills.Before the meeting
Listen to the Entire Lesson There are many questions to ask before a meeting. If you are curious about what the meeting will cover, you will need to ask the organizer of the meeting. You can also ask things like how long the meeting will take, and who is coming to the meeting. Let's try a couple of these sentences. "Hi Jack. Do you know who is coming to your meeting at 2:00?" "Who all did you invite to the triage meeting?" "Hi Jack. How long do you think the meeting will be?" "I have to schedule another appointment at 4:00 but I don't want it to overlap with yours. How long is the meeting going to be?" "Is the meeting going to be more than an hour?" "What time was the meeting again?" "When are you going to make that presentation? I thought it was today?" Here are common statements people use when they can't attend a meeting. "I have another appointment that conflicts with your meeting. I will not be able to make it." "I have another meeting that I cannot miss. I won't be able to make yours." "I won't be able to go to the 3:00 meeting. I have another appointment at the same time." "I can't go to the meeting at 4:00. I have a doctor's appointment. Can you take notes for me?" "I'm going to be out of town tomorrow, so I won't be able to attend the quarterly meeting. Can you send me a mail on the topics that were discussed?"Canceling a Meeting
Listen to the Entire Lesson If you are the meeting organizer, then there are times when you have to cancel a meeting. Here are some sentences you can use for this situation. "There are four people who will not be able to attend the meeting tomorrow. I am going to reschedule the meeting to a more convenient time." "The director asked that we postpone the finance meeting until the quarterly report comes out. So I'll send an update with the new date and time later this week." Some meetings are weekly meetings that occur at the same time. It is common that these meetings are canceled when there is nothing to talk about. "There is nothing new to discuss this week, so we are going to cancel this week's agenda meeting." "I am running late this morning. Let's postpone the meeting until the afternoon." "I can't make it in tomorrow, so let's cancel this week's meeting. I'll email everyone if something new comes up."During the Meeting
Listen to the Entire Lesson If you have to talk in a meeting, there are three general reasons. You might have to ask a question, state your opinion, or you will have to ask for clarity on something you didn't understand. Let's see some of these sentences. Raising a Question Depending on the type of meeting, you might have to wait for the meeting to end before asking a question, you might have to raise your hand to ask a question, or you can simply ask a question any time. I'll give an example on each of these. If you are in a type of meeting where you can ask a question at any time, then you can say this. "I have a question. Why is marketing not handling the portion on end user analysis? They usually did this work in the past." "How will the new addition to our project affect the deadline that we have?" "Are we making sure to incorporate user feedback on the changes we are making?" Stating your Opinion Basically, you can ask any questions, there is no specific way to do it. This is the same when you are talking about your opinion. Someone might ask what you think about the idea or situation. You will simply speak your answer. "I agree with Mark. The correct approach is to send out the tools to our partners before making it public to everyone." "In my opinion, I think we should introduce our new line of printers in August. Many companies get more funding at this time, and students are school shopping. Our target market will be more responsive to our ads during this time period." "I think we can go either way. I believe both solutions will take care of it." Asking for clarity Asking for clarity is similar to asking a question. The only difference is that they already answered it and you don't understand. So you should state exactly what you don't know, or ask for clarity on a specific part of the question. "I didn't understand why we are going to be late. I thought we had everything planned out early. What were the reasons again?" "Can you elaborate on how this process can help the sales department?" "Can you clarify the second step in your solution proposal? I don't understand why it is necessary."After the Meeting
Listen to the Entire Lesson It is common to talk about meetings afterwards. Sometimes it is to say how useless it was, or that you were bored, but there are times when someone might ask you for feedback. Other times, you might want feedback if you were the person holding the meeting. Let's cover these here. Asking for Feedback "What did you think about my presentation?" "Did you think the meeting went ok?" "Can you provide feedback on the meeting we just had?" "Did you find the meeting useful?" "Did the meeting help to clarify the current situation?" "Is there any part of our discussion during the meeting that you are still unsure about?" Providing Feedback Even if you think the meeting was boring and useless, you can't say that unless you are talking to a close friend. Many times in the office, you have to give a professional answer. "I thought the presentation went well. You provided great information and I think everyone was impressed." "The meeting went well. We covered a lot of information and made some important decisions." "The whole presentation went pretty well, but next time I would recommend that you talk a little slower. When we were running out of time, you started speaking too fast and it was hard to keep up." "Most of the time, our weekly meeting is pretty dull, but today was quite useful." "I understand what is happening to our project now, but I'm still unclear about exactly who is affected by this change."General Statements
Listen to the Entire Lesson "I have to go. I have a meeting I'm late for." "I have to go to a meeting now. I'll talk to you later." "I forgot about my 1:00 meeting. I don't have much time for lunch." "I'll finish the feedback form after my meeting." "I'll be in meetings all day today." "I have five meetings today, so I won't have time to help you with this now. Let's set up a time for tomorrow." "The meeting went an hour over." "The meeting was canceled." "The meeting started 15 minutes late." "George didn't arrive to the meeting on time." "We finished late because John had problems with his computer during the presentation portion of the meeting." "Are you going to the company meeting next week?" "Can you set up a meeting for our brainstorm session?" "My calendar looks pretty clear on Thursday. Set up a meeting for that day." If you have a close friend in the office, then you can speak more candidly. Here are some general statements you can make about meetings. But be careful who you say them to. "I hate meetings. I think they are a waste of time. I'm an engineer, not a planner." "I don't know why I have to go to those meetings. I never learn anything from them and I never say a thing." "I can't believe our weekly meeting is at six o'clock in the morning. I hate waking up that early." "If I skip that meeting, I wonder if anyone will notice." "That meeting was hilarious. I can't believe the manager forgot John's name." "I get so sleepy at meetings." "I almost fell asleep during that meeting." "I had a hard time keeping myself from laughing. I saw you falling asleep during the meeting."Phone Call
Listen to the Entire Lesson Talking on the phone is very common in the office. You will be in a situation where you have to call someone, receive a phone call, leave a message, return a call, and a variety of other tasks. We will use this lesson to cover all the details about making and receiving phone calls. Receiving a call is probably the easiest. "Hello, this is Mike." "Microsoft, this is Steve." Calling someone is a little more difficult. You should state your name, where you are from, what you are calling for, and the question. Let's give it a try through an example. "Hi Mary, this is Michael Johnson from ABC Consulting. I am reviewing the financial data for the payroll project. I will need the 2002 fiscal report to complete this task. Do you know where I can get a copy?" This example is very clear, organized, and concise. It first explains who the person is, what they are doing, and what they need. If you need to call someone to obtain information, you can use this type of sentence. Let's try one more, but this time, you are asking for help. "Hi Bob. This is Steven from ABC Company. I'm calling in regards to the data entry program you created. I'm having trouble locating where the connection is made to the server. Can you help me with this?" Similarly, this phone call starts with an introduction of the person, a quick sentence on what the call is regarding, and a short description on what this person needs. If you are in this situation, use this process and write it down so you can say what you need smoothly. After you become familiar with it, you will not need to write it down anymore and you should be able to say it fluently. If you have questions and a consultant or another business employee is visiting your company, then asking a question to them is very similar to asking a question to anyone else. "Hi Bob. I'm George. I'm the technical writer for this project. I had a question regarding the installation process. If you have a minute, can you show me the installation process? I'm having problems on the confirmation section." Usually, when a person is visiting your company, then it is polite to tell them your position so they can understand what type of help you will need. In the previous example, we used the same process of asking for help with an introduction, telling them what it is regarding, and what the problem or question is. Verifying Information Sometimes you have to verify an order, or double check a figure. If you have the information and you just want to verify that it is accurate, then you can use these types of sentences. "Hi Debra, I'm analyzing the log files and noticed entry 14 was negative 42. Can you confirm if this is accurate?" "I see that our April 2003 revenue was 1.2 million dollars. Can you double check that this figure is accurate?" "I am going to meet with the CFO in an hour. Can you look through this report and double check my findings? It should only take you 20 minutes or so."Telling person you will call them back
Listen to the Entire Lesson If you receive a question from a client or customer that you do not know, you can either tell them that you will find the answer for them, or tell them to call someone else. Let's learn how to do these things professionally. "I don't have the answer right off hand. I'll need to find that information for you. Will it be ok if I call you back in about 30 minutes?" "I believe I can find that information for you. It might take 10 minutes or so. Can I call you back with the information?" "I'm not sure about the answer. I'll find the information and call you right back. Will that be ok?" "I'm not sure about this one. Let me ask my manager. Can you please hold?"Redirecting
Listen to the Entire Lesson Receiving a Call "I believe Joe Carry in marketing can help you with that. Do you have his contact information?" "I'm not sure about that. I'm pretty sure Mitch Smith will be able to answer this and other questions. Let me give you his number." Making a Call "Can you redirect me to that person?" "Can I get his contact information?" "Can I get his phone number?" "What is the best way to contact her?" "Can you direct me to someone who can help?" "Hi, this is Matt from ABC Company. I have some questions on your Platinum level business package. Can you redirect me to someone who can help?"Leaving Messages
Listen to the Entire Lesson When you call someone and they are not there, you have to leave a message on their voice mail. Remember to state your name, your company, and what the phone call is regarding. Then leave your phone number even though you think they have it. "Hi Mary, this is Josh from ABC Company. I have some questions regarding the financial data you sent me yesterday. Can you give me a call back when you have time? My number is 555-123-4567. Thank you." "Hi Jack, this is Julie from Consult R Us. I am missing a couple pages on the document you sent me. Can you call me when you are free? My number again is 555-321-7654. Thank you." In some cases, you will receive a phone message like this. If you have to call them back and they are not there also, you can leave a message saying, you are returning their call. Here is an example. "Hi Josh, this is Mary and I am returning your call. I'll be in the office for the next three hours, so feel free to call me back any time. Just in case, my number is 555-234-5678." "Hi Julie, this is Jack. I double checked the documents I sent you and I am not sure what pages you are missing. I might not be at my desk, so feel free to call me on my cell phone. The number is 227-1000. Hope to hear from you soon so we can straighten this out." On another occasion, you might call someone and they might not call you back. In this case, it is polite to call them again. This is how you can leave a second message. "Hi Mary, this is Josh again from ABC Company. I'm not sure if you got my first message so I am leaving one more. I have some questions regarding the financial data you sent me several days ago. Can you call me at 555-123-4567 when you get a chance? Thank you." If the company does not have voice mail, you can leave a message with the secretary. After asking for the person you are looking for, if they say they are not in, then leave a message with them. "Can you have Julie return my call? This is Jack, and my number is 555-123-4567."Sending and receiving information
Listen to the Entire Lesson While you are working, you will need to send information back and forth to business partners or to clients and customers. Since email is covered in its own separate section, let's work on sending packages through the mail and the fax machine. "Hi Jack, I have the final documents requiring your signature. I will have them delivered to you by tomorrow. If you can sign them and return them, we can submit the documents by Friday." "Hi Ruth, I have the escrow papers ready for review. Should I mail them to you, or can I fax them?" "Do you have a fax machine?" "Can I have your fax number?" "When you finish the final review, can you fax over the documents. Our fax number is 555-345-6789." "I have a package that I am going to send out. I will Fed-Ex it to you tonight." Fed-Ex is a short way of saying Federal Express. It is a delivery company that ships immediately. A lot of businesses in the States use this method of shipping things, so it became common to say, 'Fed-Ex it.' "I believe I have your fax number. Is it 555-234-5678?" If a person said they will send information, you might have to call them to check on the status if you haven't received it. "Hi Mary, this is Diana at ABC Marketing Co. Can I get a status on the fax you are going to send over?" "Can you check on the status of the documents you are faxing to me? I haven't received it." "Hi Mary, I didn't receive the fax last night. Can you fax it again? We should also confirm what fax number you have on file."Talking to Co-Workers
Listen to the Entire Lesson What ever company you work for, you will have a boss or a manager. If you are a manager, you will have directs reporting to you. And in most cases, you will have to work with co-workers. This lesson will cover the English you need to know to speak to co-workers. I will also have a lesson on talking to the manager and subordinates. When you talk with a co-worker, most of it is small talk. You can talk about your background, what school you attended, your major, and your previous work experience. So studying the English lessons along side the business section will help you for your daily English needs. However, I'll have some sentences you can use when you are talking with a co-worker. If you miss a meeting, then you will need to ask a co-worker what happened during the meeting. "I missed the meeting. Can you fill me in?" "I had a doctor's appointment so I missed the meeting. What happened?" "I couldn't make it to the meeting today. Anything interesting I should know about?" "I missed the meeting. Was there anything new?" Another time you talk with a co-worker is if the boss is mad or you don't like the boss. But whenever you talk about bad things with co-workers, make sure you are talking to a friend. If that person is not a friend, then they might tell your manager what you said. "Matt looks pretty upset right now. Do you know what's going on?" "Did something happen recently? Matt looks pissed off." "I think Matt is mad about something. Do you know what it could be?" Or if the manager only treats you bad, then you can ask your co-worker/friend if the manager treats them differently or the same. "Matt talks to me like he is mad all the time. Does he do that to you?" "Does Matt talk to you like he is upset? Or is it just me?" "It's not you at all. He talks to me that way too." "Matt is way too moody." "If he knew what he was doing, we wouldn't be in this mess." "What is wrong with Matt these days?" "He is having one of those days again. I think his manager just gave him a hard time." "What do you think about our manager?" "He gets too mad easily and he doesn't really help us out that much. What do you think?"Asking for help or offering help
Listen to the Entire Lesson When you offer to help someone, you are asking your co-worker if they want to give you some of their work. Here are a couple of ways you can offer some help. "I finished my project already so I have extra bandwidth. Let me know if you need help with anything." Bandwidth is usually used as a networking terminology. But in this context, it means having extra time. "You're doing the analysis on ABC Company? I did that last year. If you need any help, just let me know." "I'm pretty familiar with your project so if you have any questions, feel free to ask me." Asking for help is a little more difficult. You will have to see what the work environment is like and what type of relationship you have with your co-workers. "I'm having trouble implementing Plan A on ABC Company. Can you look at my work and see if I am missing a step?" "Can you help me analyze the finance data? This is my first time and I don't want to screw it up." "Do you have a few minutes to help me with the data migration tool? I can't figure it out."Complaining about another co-worker to a co-worker
Listen to the Entire Lesson I remember in my first job, I had a co-worker I really didn't like. He was a nice guy, but he was a complete idiot. To vent out my frustration, I talked with some closer co-workers about my problems with him. Here are some of the things I said. You might be in a similar situation of dealing with a complete idiot. "Have you worked with Jake yet? He can't do anything right." "The problem with Jake is that he doesn't know that he is an idiot." "I remember helping Jake out so much, and then he stabs my back." "I don't think he does his own work. He goes around asking everyone to do a portion of his work and says he did it all." "If you have to work with Jake, remember the things I told you." "Is management blind or am I being too sensitive about this?" "I think the manager likes him because he kisses her ass all day long." Kissing ass refers to butt kiss and brown nosing. Basically, a person who butt kisses is a person always saying good things to the manager, giving compliments, showing off in front of the manager, and doing anything possible to look good. "The manager is blind because he is a total brown-noser." "I can't believe this company is paying $75,000 a year for this fool."Complaining about the company
Listen to the Entire Lesson As I already said previously, make sure you are careful who you talk to when you are complaining about anything such as the company. "This is a dead end job. I don't see much of a future here." "I hate the redundancy. It's so boring." "Work isn't exciting for me anymore. I am doing the same thing over and over again." "This company doesn't care about employees that much. I haven't received a fair raise in 3 years." "I don't know if it is my manager or this company, but I'm really getting sick of my job." "What do you think about all the politics in this company?" "The politics suck here. But it is the same for any large corporation. The best way to deal with it is to take advantage of the rules." I heard in some countries that switching companies is not common. Once you have a decent job in a decent company, the person usually works there all their life. In the States however, changing jobs and changing companies is very common. That makes it a common discussion to have with friends and co-workers. "I don't know how much longer I can take this job. I've been thinking about applying to a different company." "Have you ever thought about leaving this company?" "What company do you want to switch to?" "I started applying for other jobs. There are a lot of positions open." "I've been looking for jobs on monster.com. They have a lot of positions available."Talking about work experience
Listen to the Entire Lesson I won't cover topics we have in our regular English lessons, but talking about work experience is not a separate topic I have, so let's spend a few minutes here. When you are talking to a co-worker, you can talk about many different things. One of the topics might be previous work experience. Whenever you receive this question, the easiest way to answer this is to say where you worked and what you did. "What did you do before working here?" "I worked at ABC Company. I was a market analyst researching what the user wants in portable devices." "I was over in the sales department on the second floor. I was in charge of overseeing the sales made by all the sales associates each month." "I was a software engineer at Sun Microsystems. I created internal tools using Java to help automate the recruiting process."Talking to the Boss
Listen to the Entire Lesson Unless you are the owner of the company, you will have a boss. This lesson will cover all English you need to know to express what you want to say to your boss. This will include asking for feedback, explanation, showing frustration, asking for more work, and more. If you are doing a project and you want your manager to review it before submitting it, then you can ask the manager in several ways. "Did you want to review my project?" "I just completed the assignment. Did you want to review it?" "This is my first project and I was wondering if you could review it real quick?" "I think I covered all the bases, but could you do a quick check." If you are new at your job, then it is good to ask for feedback. This can be done when you complete a project or after several months on the job. Some companies have a process in place where you have a weekly one on one meeting with your manager. You can use this time to talk about your work and anything else on your mind. If you don't have a weekly meeting, then you might have to set up a time with your manager to discuss your progress. "Hi Roger, can we set up a time to discuss my progress so far?" "I was wondering if we can meet to discuss how I am doing." If you are doing work that doesn't include projects or assignments, then you can't ask for feedback on the work you completed. But you can ask how you have been doing in the last several months. "Can I get some feedback on my performance?" "Where do you think I need to improve?" "What areas do you think I should work on?" If you have a project you completed, you can ask for feedback on the project. But make sure you give your manager enough time to review the work before asking for feedback. "Did you finish reviewing my project I completed?" "Hi Mark, this was my first project, and I wanted to know how I did so I can improve." "Where do you think I could have done better?" "Is there any areas that I could have done better?" "What should I do better for next time?" "What areas did I do well, and what areas did I do poorly."Asking for more work
Listen to the Entire Lesson Most companies will have so much work that you will never run out of things to do. But there are times when you don't have enough to do. In this situation, you should ask your manager to give you more work. "Hi Mark, I finished all my weekly duties already. Do you have more work I can do?" "I've been completing my work early on a regular basis. Can I have more responsibilities?" "I have a lot of extra time. I usually double check all my work, but that doesn't take much time. Is there any additional work I can do?" Although asking for more work is a good sign of being productive, there is actually something better. Instead of asking for more work, find the extra work without asking. After you find something to do, then tell your manager that you want to do the work. "I had extra time on my hands so I started investigating the network problem. If you don't mind, I would like to work on this project to help the office productivity around here." If you are a manager, would you want someone asking you what to do, or would you prefer a worker who found a problem and wants to fix it. I have had people ask me for more work and it is stressful trying to think of something. I am busy and don't have that much time to find extra work. If a worker identifies more work to do, then I would appreciate it that much more. "I have been completing my work a day early every week. I know the reference material has been sitting there for some time. Would you like me to do that project, or did you want to assign another project to me?" Although having extra time to do more work is a good situation to be in, there might be times when you have too much work. Here are a couple of sentences to ask for help. "Hi Mark, the addition we made to the project made it difficult to complete by myself. If the deadline doesn't change, I will need some help to complete it. Can you assign someone to help me out?" "I have spent every minute on this project and have been putting in serious overtime. This project is a lot bigger than we anticipated. I am going to need some help to complete it on time. Do you have anyone available to help me?" "The Alpha project has been eating so much of my time that I didn't have much time to work on the Beta project. Is there anyone with extra bandwidth to help me finish the Beta project?"Complaining and Showing Frustration
Listen to the Entire Lesson Showing frustration is ok if you do it right. If you are frustrated and you start complaining, then the manager will either think you are not capable of doing your work, or the manager will realize that you have way too much work. So it is important how you complain and how you show your frustration. Showing frustration because of your mistake is ok to do. It shows that you are upset at yourself and that you can't believe you made a mistake. So it is indicating to the manager that you are not going to screw up again. Hopefully you won't screw anything up, but just in case, here are some ways to show your frustration. "I can't believe I messed that up. I don't think I am stupid, but this is suggesting otherwise." "I am so frustrated at myself. How did I not catch that?" Complaining about someone else is not good. But if you are so frustrated and you have to tell your manager, take a deep breath, calm yourself down, and say something like my example as calmly as you can. "It's frustrating working with Tim. I'm doing everything I can to help and I am trying to be understanding, but he is slowing our project down immensely." The best kind of frustration is when the manager knows exactly what you are talking about. If the manager is frustrated as well, then he or she will completely understand. An example of this is when you are working with another company and they are not doing their work properly. "I'm having a hard time working with ABC Company. They are always late and the work they do has numerous errors. It is really frustrating because I have to spend a great deal of time proof reading the material. I recommend not giving ABC Company any more work."Talking to your boss about another boss
Listen to the Entire Lesson Sometimes there are multiple bosses and they both give you work. This can cause some problems. The best way to handle this situation is to tell your direct boss what is happening so it gets straightened out at the management level. "Hey Mark. I'm doing all the projects you gave me, but John gives me additional work. I don't mind it, but lately it's been too much." "Hey Mark. John has been assigning a lot of work to me. I have a lot of current work I am doing, so I would like to know what work has more priority." "John wants me to do the payroll analysis. He said he needs it by end of week. But didn't you want the employee headcount finished by Friday? I can't finish both. What should I do first?" If another boss is giving you a hard time, you can tell your manager what you think. Here are some professional sentences that you can use to show your frustration about another boss. "I'm having some problems with John lately. He is very critical and puts me down in public. I don't know what I am doing wrong so I don't know where I need to improve. What do you think I should do about this?" "John has been very difficult to work with. He is very bossy and expects everything to be done his way. I have been tolerating it because he is a manager, but some of his methods are wasting a lot of time. I always suggest other ways, but he will not hear me out."Talking to your Subordinate or Direct
Listen to the Entire Lesson If you are a manager, then you will more likely have someone reporting to you. The most common terminology I am used to is a direct. Throughout this lesson, I will use the word direct. There are many things you have to say to a direct. You have to give them work, explain things, encourage them to do better, and even reprimand them when they are not performing well. We will cover these types of sentences in this lesson. Status A common question a manager asks is to find out what the status of a project is. "What is the status of the marketing documents?" "How far along are you in your analysis?" "Are you almost done with the technical report?" "When are you going to finish the design plans?" "Can you give me a status on your progress so far?" "How is the reporting assignment going?" "When can you give me a working draft by?" Requesting a weekly status mail from your direct is very common among large companies with many employees. Basically, the status mail will include what has been accomplished the current week, and what will be done next week. If your company has this process, or if you just want to implement it yourself, you can tell your direct something like the following. "At the end of every week, can you send me a weekly status mail? I'll email you a template you should follow. You should email it to me every Friday." "I want you to send me a status report at the end of every week. You should include what you did for that week and what you plan on doing for the next week." "Can you send me a weekly status report? If you haven't done it before, let me know and I will send you a template to use."Project Change
Listen to the Entire Lesson There are times when a project changes and you have to tell your direct to change something. Let's work on some sentences where you do this. "I know you have been working on the database using excel, but we need to use SQL. Can you make the necessary changes?" Although you don't have to be polite to your direct, it is good practice to show directs some common courtesy. In the sentence above, it recognizes the work that has been done so far, instructs what needs to be changed, and politely asks if they can do it. You should follow a similar way of asking your direct to change something. In another scenario, your direct might give you a report to review. If something is incorrect, or not complete, you should tell them professionally what needs to be redone. "Hey Jackie, I reviewed your report and there are a couple areas you have to change. Can you double check the figures you provided in page 7, and provide a recommendation for step 3? I would appreciate it." This example is a little more firm, but still polite. It states that changes are required, it then asks if two things can be changed, and finally, adds a good comment about appreciating the work. Finally, your direct could be doing something on a regular basis that you don't like. As a manager, you should tolerate things that do not affect the work, but if there is something that is work related, it is your responsibility to tell that person. Let's use an example where a person has a habit of talking before someone finishes. "John, when we are discussing something in meetings or small groups, I noticed that you don't allow the other person to complete their sentences. I do appreciate your contributions, but I think you should always hear the other person out. Can you try to do that?" Adding a simple phrase like appreciating the contribution can make a huge difference when giving criticism. There is a great chance the direct will be offended or upset. But if you add a small compliment in there, the chances of the direct accepting your criticism will be that much greater.Deadline
Listen to the Entire Lesson Deadlines and due dates are common among projects and assignments. Sometimes the deadline changes or your direct needs a reminder. In any case, you should know some sentences how to convey the deadline. "Here is your new project. You have two weeks to complete it. After you review the project, let me know if there will be any problems." "You have until the end of this month to complete your assignment. It is critical that everyone completes on time." "We have two more days to complete the test pass. If anyone cannot complete their portion on time, let me know as soon as possible." "We are not required to send in our analysis until Wednesday, so you have a couple more days to complete it." "Do you think you can finish the marketing report by Friday?" "Our deadline is fast approaching. I try to minimize weekend work, but we might have to work this Saturday if we do not finish on Friday."Subordinate asking you Questions
Listen to the Entire Lesson All directs at one time or another asks you questions on how to do something, or asks what something is. The average employee will usually ask you something that is obvious and you simply tell them. Sometimes however, a smart employee asks difficult questions that you are not sure about. If an employee asks you a factual question that you are not sure about, you can always refer them to other sources. "I'm not sure about that one. I think the information you are looking for is in a manual I saw in the file cabinet. Why don't you check there?" "Do a search on Google and see if you can find the information there." "I think Stacy will know the answer. She is very familiar with that topic." If the question is more process related where it involves an opinion, you can answer telling them what you would do. "I'm not sure on the exact procedure, but if I were you, I would do the forth step before the third one." "I don't think we ever decided on a specific way. I think it might be better to do this before that." These are vague sentences, so you should fill in the details depending on your situation.Encouraging
Listen to the Entire Lesson As a good manager, you should encourage great workers and bad workers. Good directs need encouraging to keep them working hard. Bad employees need encouragement to work harder. Here are some sentences for both types. "Hey James, I think you're doing a great job and it is not going unnoticed." "You're doing great. Keep up the good work." "I told my manager about your performance. He was quite impressed. Keep up the good work." Directs having difficulty "I had a hard time on my first project too. Don't let it get you down. I'm sure you will do better next time." "It wasn't as bad as you think. I also saw definite improvements so you shouldn't give up." "Your work has been pretty good, but I really think you can do better. You have potential and I hope you start trying a little harder."Reprimanding
Listen to the Entire Lesson Finally, when you have an employee that is doing something wrong such as being late, turning in a project late, or not performing well, it is your responsibility to let them know. If someone is always late, then you don't have to ask for an excuse. If it was one time, then it is ok, but if they are constantly late, there is no excuse for it. "You have been late for work on a regular basis. You better start coming to work on time." "This is your third warning. If you are late for work again, we will have to take more serious action on you. Is that understood?" "Being late for work once in a while is understandable. But there is no excuse to be coming in to work late every day. You better start coming in on time." When a direct doesn't turn in a project, it's a pretty serious no-no. I would definitely be upset, but as a good manager, I wouldn't accuse the employee without giving them a chance to explain. Here is an example. "The report was due last Friday. What's going on?" This is more like a trap question. Unless it is a life or death situation, the excuse shouldn't be good enough. Here is a generic excuse. "I was working on three other assignments. I just couldn't finish them all." This is not a good excuse, so you can start reprimanding the employee. You gave them a chance to explain, and since the excuse wasn't good enough, you can basically, 'let them have it.' "If you were not going to finish on time, at least you could have let me know. Regardless, you knew how important this project was and you knew about the due date. What am I going to do with you?" "You should have at least told me that you wouldn't be able to finish. Then I could have asked Mary to finish it. This is very irresponsible of you. Is this going to be a continual problem in future projects?"Business Trips
Listen to the Entire Lesson If you have a job that requires traveling or business trips, there are many things you need to know how to say. I recommend studying the Travelers Guide section I have for general traveling needs. But for this lesson, I am going to cover the things you need to say to the people you are traveling with and questions you need to ask about the business trip. Most of this lesson is primarily showing you a variety of questions you might need. Details When you go on a business trip, you will need to find out a lot of information. "Where are we going for our business trip?" "Where are we going this time?" "What city are we traveling to?" "What is the objective for this business trip?" "What is our goal for this business trip?" "What do we want to accomplish for this business trip?" "What is the primary purpose for this business trip?" "What day are we departing for our business trip to Los Angeles?" "How long are we going to be there?" "How long is the business trip scheduled for?" "What time is ABC Company expecting us?" "Who should I report to when I get to ABC Company?" People who go on business trips get a daily allowance for food and other small necessities. This is called a per diem. The amount depends on the company, but you should ask how much you get a day. "How much is the per diem?" "How much per diem do we get a day?" "How do we get the per diem?" "Isn't the per diem too low?" "What do they expect us to eat with this amount of per diem?" "Is the business trip really going to take us all five days?" "If we finish on the fourth day, can we come back early?" "I think we can finish a day early. Can we come back on Thursday if we complete our work early?"First time business trip Q's
Listen to the Entire Lesson If this is your first time on a business trip, then you will have even more questions. If you are not sure what to bring or how much stuff to bring, you can ask your manager or a co-worker. "How much do you usually pack for a week long business trip?" "How big is the suitcase you take with you on a business trip?" "Do the hotels we stay at have a hair dryer?" "How many pieces of luggage do you bring with you on a business trip?" "Where do you usually park when you go to the airport?" "Is long term parking available at the airport?" "How early should I go to the airport?" "Where should we meet?" "Should we meet at the airport?" "I missed my flight. The next flight they have available is in 45 minutes. I'll have to meet you at the airport in Los Angeles. I'll call you when I land."Talking to people
Listen to the Entire Lesson Talking to the employees of the company you are visiting is very different than talking to employees. Basically, you have to be polite and formal when dealing with them. "Hi Mark, I'm Alex from ABC Consulting. It's nice to meet you." During this stage, you might be engaged in small talk such as how your flight was or how the weather is over in your city, but if not, then you can get straight to work. You might need to know where you will be working. Only ask this if they never tell you. But chances are, they will let you know before you ask. "Where will I be working this week?" "Where is your office located?" "Is your office relatively close to where I will be working?" You might need to ask who you will be working with. But again, don't ask this too early, you should give them a chance to answer. "Who will I be working with this week?" These previous questions should only be used in rare cases the other person doesn't tell you. The next couple of sentences are more likely. "Who should I contact if I have a question regarding inaccurate data?" "Who should I contact if I have a question with this type of problem?" "I am going to be calling my manager frequently with critical updates. What phone should I use?" "How long does it take to get to the airport from here?" "How bad is the traffic around this time to the airport?" "Where is the closest place to eat around here?" "Is there a fast food restaurant near by?" "Does this building have a cafeteria?" "Do you have a cafeteria close by?"Eating during the Business Trip
Listen to the Entire Lesson If you go on a business trip alone, then you don't need to talk much, and you can eat whenever you want. But if you go with a group, they might want to eat together. Some people like to eat together all the time, but some people might not want to eat because they are not hungry. "What kind of food do you guys want to eat today?" "Anybody want to go for lunch?" "I'm going to lunch. Anybody want to join me?" "Let's go in 20 minutes. I have to finish this real quick." "I can't make it. I have to finish this and it will take me another 30 minutes." "I'm going to pass today. I brought a bagel with me." "I have a small sandwich. I'm just going to eat here." "Where should we have dinner tonight?" "Hey, let's go to the Italian restaurant next to the hotel." "We can either go to the steak house in the hotel, or the Italian restaurant next door."Office and Cubicles
Listen to the Entire Lesson The office has three types of workstation setting. Some companies provide a single office for each employee, other companies have a cubicle system, and some companies have desks put together in a large open space where everyone sits. I'll separate this lesson into these three categories. Desks all together If you are in an environment where you have to sit at a desk right next to 15 other people with the same desks, I'm sorry for your situation. It's very uncomfortable working like this, but it is a reality. Here are some things I heard from people in this setting. General statements or complaints "It's not that bad, but there is no privacy." "I wouldn't mind it so much if the manager couldn't see every minute of my day." "I hate it. Even if they can't give us offices, they could at least give us cubicles." "The reason I hate it so much is because I can't take a small break. Since the manager is always looking at everyone, even when I am not working, I have to pretend like I am." "There are a lot of distractions. I can hear everything everyone says in the whole office." "Mary sometimes turns on the music. It's not that bad, but sometimes I want it quiet." "If I have a complaint about something, I can't talk to the manager because everyone will hear. I have to set up a meeting and use the conference room." Questions and Requests "I don't have another outlet near my desk. Can I get a power strip?" "Can I move to a different location? The sun always glares off my monitor and I have trouble working." "Can I sit on the other side of the room? This is too close to the door and it gets cold here." "I get hot easily. Would it be possible if I sit next to the door? It is much cooler there."Cubicles
Listen to the Entire Lesson A cubicle is a work area that is separated by small portable walls. It is generally about 4 to 5 feet high and it gives a little more privacy. Although it's not as good as an office, it is much better than having to sit in an open area looking at everyone. Another benefit of having a cubicle is that you can personalize the space. There are small walls to put up pictures, decoration, or to put up a white board or a cork board. "I sit in the cubicle down the hall. It's next to the conference room." "My cubicle is directly on the other side of this wall. Come by sometime." "The files are on my desk in my cubicle. I'll get them for you." "I walked by your cubicle and saw a heater. Where did you get such a small one like that? I think I want one for my cubicle as well." "There are a couple of people with the name Steve in our office. If you say, 'Steve' real loud, you will see two heads appear at the same time. It's quite funny." If you hear the term 'cube farm', it is referring to a huge space with a lot of cubicles. "I heard ABC Company has a serious cube farm. Even the CEO has a cubicle. I think that's pretty cool." "How big is your cubicle?" "My cubicle is about 5 feet by 6 feet." "It's roughly 5 by 6." "I'm not sure, but it fits two small desks and a drawer. I guess it's big enough for me."Office
Listen to the Entire Lesson If you think having an office will stop all your complaints and you will be happy, you are mistaken. It's amazing how people with their own office still find things to complain about. I am just as guilty. I remember when I was sharing an office with one other person, I was complaining about not having my own office. And when I got my own office, I remember complaining about getting a bigger office. When I got a bigger office, I remember complaining about not having a window office. Isn't it strange how the complaints never end? Let's see some of the sentences for this section. "Why is Jack's office so much bigger than mine?" "I'm next in line for a window office. How come you gave it to Paul?" "There is an empty office across the hall. Can I have it?" "It's great having my own office because I can surf the Internet and take a real break anytime I want." "The privacy is probably the best thing about having my own office. I can't image working in a cubicle again." A common phrase you might hear from you manager is to come to their office. "Can you stop by my office?" "Stop by my office when you get a chance." "Let's meet in my office." If you want to stop by someone's office, you can say this. "Can I stop by your office after lunch?" "Can I come by your office now?" "Can we talk in your office?"Performance Review Period
Listen to the Entire Lesson A performance review period is a time when your manager reviews your work and tells you where you need to improve or where you have been doing well. Some smaller companies do not have a concrete review process. But large companies have a process in place. Some of them do a review two times a year, and some companies have a yearly review. Your review is sometimes dependent on how much raise you will get and sometimes even the bonus amount. Because the review is different from company to company, I will use this lesson for sentences you need to say during the time you speak with your manager. I will not be going into the details and timeframe of the review. If there is a process in place, then you probably have a template to write down your achievements over a certain time span. This is your chance to toot your own horn. So include everything you did and do not be modest. If you don't have a template to follow, then write down on a word document the achievements you made. It is also good to write down some places where you want to improve. Some people might think that telling your manager where you need to improve is basically admitting to having flaws, but great managers think a person who can identify their own problems and fix them are great employees.Achievements
Listen to the Entire Lesson Everyone has certain responsibilities. You should use your responsibilities as a guide when you talk to your boss. The best way is to go through each responsibility and state how you successfully accomplished everything you were responsible for. If you are a sales person, then the best metric is to use your sales number. "I have exceeded the average for all sales categories. I was in the top 3 for renewals, I was second in accessory sales, and the most in new services. Overall, I was the first in our store and third in the whole region." If you are a computer engineer, then it will be a little different. "I finished all my assignments on time, I fixed the most amount of code errors, I did code reviews on numerous occasion, and I created a program that helped the installation process. This ultimately reduced the installation time by 40%." Some General Statements "I feel I did a great job. I exceeded all my goals, and I made the most sales throughout the year." "I am very happy with my performance over the year. I completed all my projects and I even took on three additional assignments. I also helped the junior employees on a regular basis." "I'm happy with my results. The project I have been working on was a success. During the process, I managed to overcome all obstacles and finished on time. We have increased our revenue while decreasing cost." "I believe I am on track. This year I have learned a great deal. I am very familiar with all our tools and I even completed my first project successfully." These are general sentences you can say, but if you have a list of accomplishments, you should say them one by one in a paragraph. But make sure you speak clearly and slow enough so the other person can keep up. "I have accomplished a great deal this year. I analyzed all monthly sales data, wrote up a thorough report for each one, I also created a process of submitting the report form that saved an hour for each report, I worked on four projects that were all successful, and I created a How-To document for new employees." This is long, but it is actually very simple. All I am doing is stating each thing right after the other. You should make a list and basically say them all together. It's effective and short.Self Improvement
Listen to the Entire Lesson If you are going to mention where you need improvement, it is very important to include how you are going to improve. This is similar to asking what is your weakness. If you mention a weakness, show them what steps you are taking to improve in that area. Finally, you must be certain it is ok to expose an area for improvement. I don't recommend doing this on your first review. After the first review, you will have a better idea if it will help to critique yourself. "I feel I need to be more technical. I realized how important it is to know different computer applications. In order to improve, I have researched some classes I can take, and I even bought a couple of books. In the next 3 months, I am going to concentrate on learning these new tools." This is a good answer because it shows the manager that you are capable of finding your own faults. It also has a step by step process with a timeline on how you are going to improve. Timeline is important because it shows that you are not going to procrastinate. If someone says, I'm going to read this book, you don't know when they are going to read it. It is much better when someone says they will read this book within 2 weeks. Here is one more example. "An area I would like to improve is in planning. I plan all my work and I complete everything on time, but I feel if I do a better job at planning, I can be more efficient with my time. In order to work on this, I created a checklist of everything I should think about before starting a project. Using this checklist will make me think of potential obstacles that I wouldn't normally think about, verify that I am not forgetting something, and keep me on track to complete ahead of time. I am going to do this and see how much it improves my efficiency for the next 2 projects. Afterwards, I'll report how much it helped or didn't help."Compensation
Listen to the Entire Lesson Reviews are another time period where you get a raise and a bonus. If you work in a large company, then it will be hard to complain and get something changed. But if you work in a small company, you can ask for a larger raise. However, you must be in a position where the company will suffer if you leave the company. If you are replaceable, then the company doesn't have to give you a good raise. Just in case you are in one of these situations, here are some example sentences. If you know you did more than anybody else, then here is a statement you can make to your manager. "I have done more and better work than anybody else. I have learned everything on my own in the first three months without any training, and I have been a great employee. An 8 percent raise is not what I had in mind. I want a minimum 20 percent raise." If they agree with you, then they might give you a larger raise, but they will question the 20 percent raise. You should know the average pay in your field and use that as ammunition. "I agree that you have performed well, but 20 percent is a large raise. Where did you get that number from?" If you researched, then you can answer calmly with facts that your manager cannot disagree with. "I have researched the pay for 5 different companies for someone with my experience and skill set. On average, they are being paid 25 percent more than me. I don't expect to get paid more than the other people because this is a smaller company, but I should get what I deserve and that is at least 20 percent." If you have to go on frequent business trips, then you can include that as well. "The average pay for workers who have to go on frequent business trips is significantly higher than what I am being paid. There is no overtime pay here and all the extra work is not compensated for. I feel it is fair to get a larger raise due to the amount of quality work I do and the frequent business trips required for this position." Large companies have a process in place and most people will get a similar raise. If you get a small raise and you know you cannot fight for a larger raise, then you can at least ask what the average raise is. "A three percent raise barely covers inflation. What was the average raise throughout the company?" Most of the time, the answer will be very similar to what you got. "I did very well this year and exceeded all my goals. Why am I only receiving a four percent raise?" Sometimes even great employees will get a small raise in a large company. It might seem small, but if the company is struggling financially, they might not give anybody raises. Here is an example of what you might hear for the question above. "You actually got the maximum raise this year. Most of the people didn't get anything. Some people got a two percent raise. So you should actually be happy with your raise. The economy is down and the company needs to save money. They can't give large raises this year."Quitting or Leaving Work
Listen to the Entire Lesson When the time comes to leave work, you can do whatever you want. You can raise hell, say you hate everyone and yell out, 'I quit!!!' But in other cases when you want to leave professionally, you can use this lesson to help. There's a common phrase when you are leaving a company. 'Don't burn the bridge.' This is basically saying you should leave on a good term. If you leave on a good note, then you have the option of coming back to the company or your position if something goes wrong with your next job. So basically, you are leaving the bridge back to your position. If you are leaving because you have an offer from a different company, here are some professional statements you can make to your manager. "Hi Mark, I have a wonderful opportunity to work at a different company. I enjoyed my time here, but I shouldn't pass this up. I am putting in my two week notice." Remember that in the States, changing job is very common. So it is no big deal when you leave a company. Businesses understand the need for change and realize that some people want different challenges in their life. So don't be nervous when you have to leave. Giving a two week notice is standard. This gives your current employer the chance to hire someone to replace you. It also gives some time for you to finish the remaining work you have to do. Not giving a two week notice is one way to burn a bridge. The new company you are going into should realize this and will not expect you to start your job immediately if you have to give a two week notice. If you don't have a job, then this doesn't apply to you. Here is another example. "Hi Mark, unfortunately I have to tell you that I am leaving the company. I really enjoyed my time here and I appreciated all your help on my tasks. I have to put in my two week notice." "Hi Mark, I received an offer from a different company. This is a great opportunity for me so I accepted the offer. My decision on leaving is not because I didn't like my duties here. I really enjoyed my experience. But I am at a point where I want to find other challenges. I hope you can understand." I have seen some people leave the company to go on a year trip around the world. Others I have seen just wanted to spend more time with their kids. I know in some countries it is hard to get back into a company after you leave, but in the States, if you are a good employee, it is easy to get their job back. Many times after a long break, they returned to the same company. "Mark, I have decided to leave the company. I have worked here for 10 years and I really enjoyed it. But I want to take a break and spend more time with my family. So I am putting in my two week notice." "Hi Mark, I have come to a decision to leave the company. I am going to travel for a year and this is the best time period for me to do so. I have always wanted to travel for an extended time period, and this is the only time I can do it. I can work for another month, so hopefully that should give you some time to find a replacement. And if you want, I can train the new employee on my areas."Negotiating before Leaving
Listen to the Entire Lesson Receiving a job offer is another way to negotiate a salary increase or a position change. If you are a great employee then your current employer might try to entice you to stay. If you are willing to stay, you can say that you received another offer and you are still thinking about it. If they try to make you stay, you can state what it will take for you to stay. "Hi Mark, I am at a crossroad in my career. I have recently interviewed with a different company and they extended an offer to me. I haven't decided yet, but I wanted to tell you before coming to a decision." If at this time they ask you to stay, then you can ask for a couple of things. "If I didn't like this company, it would be an easy decision, but I really like it here. However, I have been asking to take on Program Management responsibilities here. Also, they are offering me a 6 percent higher salary than my current pay. Can anything be done about these two things?" "Hi Mark, I have been thinking about moving back to my home town. I have a job lined up, but I haven't decided yet. I wanted to let you know before I make my final decision." If they ask you to stay, you can say the following, but if they don't ask you to stay, then it is useless. "Well, they are offering me a higher salary. It's 7 percent higher than my current salary. Would it be possible for you guys to match this?"General Statements
Listen to the Entire Lesson When you talk to co-workers, you will eventually tell them that you are leaving. Here are some general sentences. "Next Friday is my last day." "I already put in my two week notice." "I'm leaving the company." "I accepted a job offer from ABC Company. This Friday will be my last day here." "I'm leaving this dump." "I would've left a lot sooner but I had to get a job lined up first." "I got screwed here so many times. I don't want to work here anymore. My last day is this Friday." "It was great working with you. I wish you the best on this project." "I had a wonderful time here. I wish the best for you." "I really enjoyed working with you. I'll send you my personal email so keep in touch." If someone else is leaving, then you can say something good like the example sentences below. "I hope you enjoy your new job. Let me know if they have any other opening." "Good luck in your new job. We'll keep your seat warm for you in case you want to return." "Hey Jack, good luck with your new job and save me a seat." "We'll miss you here. Good luck with your new career."Greeting - Basic
Listen to the Entire Lesson There are many ways to greet someone. We'll learn about the most common way to greet someone in this lesson. I'll give a variety of example sentences. Greeting someone you never met: "Hi, my name is Steve. It's nice to meet you." You can respond to this by saying, "It's a pleasure to meet you. I'm Jack." Another common question to ask is "What do you do for a living?" You can respond to this by saying, "I work at a restaurant." "I work at a bank." "I work in a software company." "I'm a dentist." Usually, you will not need to ask for a name. It is implied that each person should say their name. But in case they don't, you can ask, "What is your name?" Many times, I don't hear the name. If you would like for them to repeat their name, you can say, "What was that again?" "Excuse me?" "Pardon me?"Greeting Someone you Know
Listen to the Entire Lesson "Hey John, how have you been?" "Hi Bob, how are you?" "Hi Nancy, what have you been up to?" "Andy, it's been a long time, how are you man?" If you meet someone unexpectedly, you can say, "Hey Jack, it's good to see you. What are you doing here?" or "What a surprise. I haven't seen you in a long time. How have you been?" If you see the person at a restaurant, you can say, "Do you come to this restaurant often?" Or at the movie theater, "What movie did you come to see?" Appropriate responses: "Hi Steve, my name is Mike. It is nice to meet you as well." "I heard a lot about you from John. He had a lot of good things to say." "Wow. How long has it been? It seems like more than a year. I'm doing pretty well. How about you?" A typical response to this type of greeting is simple. "Not too bad." If asked what you have been up to, you can respond with, "Same ole same ole." Or, "The same as usual." Here are some other example responses. "I'm pretty busy at work these days, but otherwise, everything is great." "I'm doing very well." "I finally have some free time. I just finished taking a big examination, and I'm so relieved that I'm done with it." Restaurant Responses "I've been here a couple of times, but I don't come on a regular basis." "I come pretty often. This is my favorite restaurant." "I can't believe we haven't seen each other before. I come here at least twice a week." Movie Response "I came here to see Matrix Revolution. How about you?"Greeting - Example Conversations
Listen to the Entire Lesson Let's look at several example conversations. Then we can move on to the practice section. Person A: "Hi, my name is Steve. It's nice to meet you." Person B: "I'm Jack. It's a pleasure to meet you, Steve." Person A: "What do you do for a living Jack?" Person B: "I work at the bank." Person A: "What is your name?" Person B: "Jackson." Person A: "What was that again?" Person A: "Hey John, how have you been?" Person B: "What a surprise. I haven't seen you in a long time. How have you been?" Person A: "I'm doing very well. How about you?" Person B: "I finally have some free time. I just finished taking a big examination, and I'm so relieved that I'm done with it." Person A: "Hi Nancy, what have you been up to?" Person B: "The same ole same ole." Or, "The same as usual. How about you?" Person A: "I'm pretty busy at work these days, but otherwise, everything is great." Person A: "Andy, it's been a long time, how are you man?" Person B: "What a surprise. I haven't seen you in a long time. How have you been?" Person A: "Do you come to this restaurant often?" Person B: "I've been here a couple of times, but I don't come on a regular basis." The next lesson is the interactive practice section. If you would like to repeat this lesson or previous lessons, feel free to go back and study as many times as you need. When you are ready, go to the practice section.Bored - General Phrases
Listen to the Entire Lesson Being bored means having nothing to do. When someone is bored, they often call people and try to entertain themselves or try to find something to do with a friend. So being bored is a good starting point for conversational English. There are a couple of situations you can express to someone that you are bored. Most commonly, you will call a friend and tell them that you are bored or ask them to do something together. The other time is when someone asks you how you are doing. We will cover both situations in this session. General Phrases "I'm dying from boredom." "I hate being bored." "I don't have anything to do." "My life is so boring." "Life is so boring." "I'm just watching TV until I find something to do." "I was bored all weekend." "I am so bored today." "I get bored very easily." "I get bored all the time." A common place to get bored is when you have to visit family members. "It's always boring whenever we go to our relatives." "It's nice to visit my grandmother, but it gets boring after a couple of hours." "My cousins are so boring. All they do is watch tv." "There's nothing to do in the country side. I'm always bored there." If you think you are a boring person, here is a way to say that you are boring. "I think I'm a little boring." "I'm a boring person." Boring can be used to describe someone. "He is a boring person." "His personality is very boring." "It's boring whenever she's around." Using bored to answer a question is very common. Here are some general questions that someone might ask. "How was your trip?" "How was your vacation?" "How was your weekend?" "How was the lecture?" "How was the class?" "How was the game?" Any of these types of questions can be answered with a simple answer. "It was pretty boring." "It was boring. I didn't do much." "It wasn't as fun as I thought. It was a little boring." "I was bored most of the time." "Because it was disorganized, we had too much extra time. I was bored during our free time."Bored - Calling Someone
Listen to the Entire Lesson The conversation when you call someone might sound something like this. "Hello." "Hi Jane, this is Jill. Do you have time to talk?" "Hi Jill, sure, I was just watching TV." "What are you watching?" "I was just watching a re-run of friends. How about you? What are you doing?" "Nothing much. I really wanted to start studying for the Psychology test coming up, but I can't seem to motivate myself." As you can see, Even though Jill is very bored, she didn't say that she was bored. To sensitive people, they can misinterpret the situation. If I am bored and I call you, then that could mean that I am only calling you because I have nothing better to do. So if you are not very close friends, it is better to say something like, 'nothing much' instead of 'I am bored.' If you are very close friends with someone, then the conversation can be more direct and honest. "What are you doing?" "I'm doing the laundry." "I'm so bored. I have nothing to do." "Why don't you come over and help me with the laundry?" "I'd rather do my own house chores. Hey, you wanna take a break from your house work and have coffee at Starbucks with me?" "Sure, that sounds great. I'll meet you there in thirty minutes."Bored - Boring Work
Listen to the Entire Lesson A different situation you can tell someone you are bored is when you are simply talking with a friend concerning a part of your life that is boring. For example, if you have a boring job, you can explain to your friend how boring it is. "How is your work these days?" "Work is so boring that I'm going crazy." "I ran out of things to do and management is too busy to give me more work. I tried to find things to do with no luck. I'm basically sitting in my chair pretending to work." "That sounds so boring." "Tell me about it. Time goes so slow when you're bored. I'd rather be busy. Then at least the day would go by faster." Similar type of boring work is when doing something that is routine. Some sentences expressing boring work are: "I'm doing the same thing over and over again." "My work is so repetitious that I am getting bored of it." "My work does not interest me." "I'm only working to pay the bills." "I wish I had your job." Because some people are so busy, they envy people who have nothing to do at work. "I'm so bored. I have nothing to do at work. I just surf the Internet all day long." "Dang! I'm so busy at work, it's driving me crazy. I really wish I had your job."How is your Day - General Statements
Listen to the Entire Lesson In this lesson, we are going to learn how to communicate to someone using the present tense. However, because this isn't a site teaching grammar, I do not want to spend too much time on details. I wanted to include this section primarily to show many different sentences using present tense and to have a dedicated practice section with only present tense sentences. This lesson is a little shorter than others because speaking in the present tense is not as common as speaking in the future or past tense. Although speaking in the future tense or the past tense is more common, it is still important to know how to communicate in the present tense. Here are some example sentences: "I see Bob over there by the newspaper stand." "I'm going to the library." "I'm on my way home." "I'm going to the bus stop." "Jack is going to the store." "Jill is stopping by now." "The meeting is starting now." "The manager is waiting for you in her office." "Tell the receptionist that you are here to see Mr. Hwang." Questions: A very common question you will run into is, "How are you doing?" "How is your day going?" "What are you doing now?" To answer these types of question, you must remember that you are talking about what is currently going on now, so you must use the present tense. Here are some ways to answer the above question. "I'm enjoying the beautiful weather without any worries in the world." "I'm playing a video game on my computer because I have nothing to do." "I'm at the grocery store buying ingredients for tonight's dinner." "I'm at the gym working out." As you can see, each sentence is starting with, 'I am' instead of 'I will be' or 'I was.' We will discuss past tense and future tense in the next sessions. More descriptive answers you can give are the following: "I'm pretty busy right now. I'm doing my homework because I have an exam tomorrow." "My project deadline is coming up, so I'm currently in the process of finishing my tasks." "I'm taking the day off from work today because I have so many errands. I'm going to the post office to send some packages to my friends." "I'm looking for a job. The job market does not look that great, but I can't give up." "I'm applying for a job at a consulting firm in Taiwan." "I'm listening to music while thinking about my situation."How is your day - Example Conversation
Listen to the Entire Lesson The present tense is more common in writing. As you can see by all the explanations I am giving, they are all written in the present tense. That is because it is instructional. Instructional writing is more commonly written in present tense. However, stories in novels are written in past tense. The reason past and future tense is used more commonly than present tense when speaking is because usually you are telling someone what you have done or what you plan on doing. Speaking in the present tense is used primarily to tell someone what you are currently doing. As in previous lessons in 'Bored and Greeting' it is very common to have a conversation using the present tense when you run into somebody or when you make or receive a phone call. Let's use this time now to incorporate what we have learned so far. Person A: "Hi Jack. What are you doing?" Person B: "Hi Mary. I'm filling out a job application." Person A: "Are you finished with school already?" Person B: "No. I have one more semester, but it would be great to have a job lined up." Person A: "How is your day going?" Person B: "Quite busy. I'm preparing for my presentation tomorrow on our marketing strategy. I'm not even half done yet." Person A: "You must feel stressed out now." Person B: "That's an understatement." Person A: "What are you doing now?" Person B: "I'm playing pool with my friends at a pool hall." Person A: "I didn't know you play pool. Are you having fun?" Person B: "I'm having a great time. How about you? What are you doing?" Person A: "I'm taking a break from my homework. There seems to be no end to the amount of work I have to do." Person B: "I'm glad I'm not in your shoes."Tomorrow's Plan - I am going to
Listen to the Entire Lesson Talking about the future is something that is done very frequently. Whether we are talking about our dreams or simply telling someone what we will do tomorrow is all spoken in the future tense. As in the previous lesson, this isn't a grammar lesson. This lesson is to provide many different sentences using the future tense. In the previous lesson, we concentrated on present tense using 'I am' When we speak in the future tense, we can still use 'I am' but it is important what follows the two words that will make it future tense. Here are a couple of examples. "I'm going to see Bob tomorrow." "I'm going to meet John at the airport at 6 O'clock tonight." "I'm going to go home in an hour." "I'm going to go to the bus stop right after class." "I'm going to do that tomorrow." When using 'going to' after 'I am' it is important that a future indicator is present. For example, if I say, 'I am going to meet John', this can also be present tense that we practiced previously. But if you add a future indicator like 'at 6 O'clock tonight' then it becomes future tense. Other future tense indicators are: 'going to go' 'going to be' 'I will' 'I have to' Let's practice using these words: "I'm going to be dead if I don't finish this project by tomorrow." "I'm going to go home next week." "I'll meet you there at five." "I can't go tonight because I have to work late."Tomorrow's Plan - Questions and Answers
Listen to the Entire Lesson When asking questions about the future, you can ask questions like: "What are you going to do tonight?" "What are you doing next week?" "When do you plan on doing your homework?" "When are you going to eat dinner?" "What time do we have to leave for the airport?" "What should we do tonight?" There are many different questions you can ask. By changing a few words, you can make numerous questions properly about the future. When you are answering questions that relate to the future, remember to use the future tense. Here are some ways to answer the questions directly above: "What are you going to do tonight?" "I plan on meeting John after dinner. We're going to go to a night club." "I'm going to go to take my girlfriend out to dinner. And if we have time, we might try to see a movie." "What are you doing next week?" "Since I'm on vacation next week, I plan on going to Pusan to visit some friends down there." "Next week I have to go shopping for all the Christmas presents. I have to buy a present for my dad, mom, and my two sisters." "When do you plan on doing your homework?" "I think I'm going to do my homework after I watch the world cup. I don't think I'll be able to concentrate until after the game is over." "I'm so unmotivated to do my homework. But I'll eventually have to do it, so I'll get around to them probably after dinner." "What time do you have to leave for the airport?" "The flight comes in at 4:30, so I plan on leaving at about 3:30" "The security is pretty tight so I should get there early. I plan on arriving there 2 hours before my flight leaves." "What should we do tonight?" "After dinner, let's go grab a couple of beers. Then we can go shopping for a couple of hours, and afterwards, we can rent a video and watch it at my place." "I'm pretty busy tonight. I have to do the laundry, vacuum, and then make dinner, so I won't be able to meet you tonight."Tomorrow's Plan - Example Conversation
Listen to the Entire Lesson Let's use this time to incorporate what we have learned so far. Person A: "Bob is in the hospital, did you get a chance to visit him?" Person B: "I'm going to see Bob tomorrow." Person A: "I thought you had to meet John tomorrow?" Person B: "I'm going to meet John at the airport at 6 O'clock tonight." Person A: "I'm going home now, do you want to head out together?" Person B: "No Thanks. I'm going to go home in about an hour." Person A: "Didn't you need to buy a present for your brother's birthday?" Person B: "I'm going to do that tomorrow." Person A: "I'm going to go to the bus stop right after class, so I won't have time to meet you." Person B: "That's OK. We can always get together tomorrow." Person A: "Why do you look so stressed?" Person B: "I'm going to be dead if I don't finish this project by tomorrow." Person A: "I thought you had 2 weeks to finish this project." Person B: "I don't have time to explain now. I'll talk to you later." Person A: "Since we are done with school, when are you going back home?" Person B: "I'm going to go home next week." Person A: "Me too. Do you want to meet at the train station on Sunday?" Person B: "Sure. I'll meet you there at five." Practice asking questions: "What are you going to do tonight?" "What are you doing next week?" "When do you plan on doing your homework?" "When are you going to eat dinner?" "What time do we have to leave for the airport?" "What should we do tonight?"Yesterday - The Past - General Statements
Listen to the Entire Lesson In daily conversation, talking about the past is done very frequently. Whenever you meet a friend, you always tell each other what you have been doing recently. Friends are always interested in each other so they want to know how you have been spending your time in the past. Today's lesson is going to target past tense communication. This goes hand in hand with the last two lessons and changing a few words around can make a future or present tense sentence into a past tense sentence. To begin, here are a couple of sentences that are common to say: "I went to the airport yesterday." "I met Bob last week." "I was an hour late for my meeting." "I went to the bus stop, but I was 30 seconds late. A person on the street told me the bus just went by." "I completed that task this morning." Speaking in the past requires past tense words. Let's take a closer examination for the sentences above. As you can see by some of the examples in the chart, some words change when speaking in the past tense. Besides some words that change, many times a word with the letter 'd' or 'ed' at the end changes the word to past tense. Here are some examples: "I was being polite so I opened the door for him." "I stapled the papers together to keep them organized." "The paper ripped on the bottom, so I taped them together." "I switched the presents around because I found out Jane doesn't like red lipstick." "I was very interested in the topic so I paid close attention." The tricky part is to know when to add a 'd' to the end of a word to make it past tense. There are exceptions that can cause confusion, for example, "I rode my bike to school." It would be incorrect to say, 'I rided...' "I built the house from scratch." Incorrect way is to say, 'I builded...' "I sat on the chair next to the emergency exit." Incorrect way is to say, 'sitted...' So remember to use past tense words correctly or the other person might not understand what you are saying.Yesterday - The Past - Questions and Answers
Listen to the Entire Lesson When asking questions about the past, you can ask questions like: "How did you enjoy the movie?" "What time did you get home last night?" "How was your date with Jackie?" "How was the traffic going to the airport?" "What have you been up to?" "What did you do last weekend?" "How was the party?" "How come you didn't come to class yesterday?" "How did your presentation go?" Here are some ways you can answer these types of questions. Remember to use past tense because these actions already occurred. "How did you enjoy the movie?" "It was a long movie, but overall, the movie was great." "I really didn't like the movie. It was slow and boring." "I enjoyed the movie so much that I saw it again." "What time did you get home last night?" "I got home at two in the morning." "I didn't make it home until eleven last night." "I made it home at midnight." "How was your date with Jackie?" "The date went so well. We had dinner at a seafood restaurant. And then we saw a movie together." "I don't think it went too well. We hardly had anything to talk about. I really thought Jackie was bored to death." "The date was alright. She called me this morning to go out again, but I haven't responded yet." "What have you been up to?" "I just graduated from school so I'm happy that I'm done." "I met Jackie yesterday and we spent the evening together in a nice restaurant." "The only thing I have done in the last three months is computer games." "What did you do last weekend?" "Last weekend, I visited my parents." "I went golfing on Saturday. I shot a great score." "I stayed home and watched TV all weekend long." "How come you didn't come to class yesterday?" "I was very sick yesterday." "I missed the bus and by the time I got to campus, class was already over." "I slept in because I didn't hear the alarm ring." "How did your presentation go?" "It went ok. A few of the people asked some tough questions, but overall it was good." "I messed up so bad. I brought the wrong folder from my office so I didn't have any notes." "It was the best presentation of the day. My boss told me I was organized, focused, and spoke clearly."Yesterday - The Past - Example Conversation
Listen to the Entire Lesson Study some examples and then we will be at the practice session. Person A: "Why didn't you come to my party last night?" Person B: "I'm sorry I couldn't make it. I had to go visit my grandmother at the hospital." Person A: "Oh, I'm sorry to hear that. Is she doing ok?" Person B: "They just completed a small operation and the doctors said she should recover." Person A: "Did you get a chance to go to that new restaurant down the street?" Person B: "Yeah. I ordered the special, but the server screwed up my order." Person A: "That sucks. So what ended up happening?" Person B: "They finally got my steak out, but it was overcooked. It was a terrible experience." Person A: "What did you do last weekend?" Person B: "I went on a date with Sammy." Person A: "Really? How was it?" Person B: "I couldn't ask for a better night. We talked all throughout our two hour dinner, and then we sat by the river and cuddled in the night." Person A: "Didn't you finish finals week?" Person B: "Don't remind me. I think I failed most of the exams." Person A: "Why did you do so terrible?" Person B: "My mind just went blank. I think I overloaded my brain. I just couldn't concentrate during the exams."Weather - Summer and Autumn
Listen to the Entire Lesson In this section, we will learn about the four different seasons along with the difference between Celsius and Fahrenheit. Also, we will learn about weather in different parts of the world. In the next session, we will practice more dialog. But this is a good starting point when learning to hold a conversation about the weather. Summer: Depending on the location, summer can be warm and pleasant or unbearably hot and humid. Although you will describe summer in one particular way, you should be aware of how other people describe summer in different parts of the world. In Nevada, Arizona, Egypt, or other places that are like deserts, people might say, "Summer is very hot and dry. It's not so bad when we are in the shade." "Summer is extremely hot. The sun will burn you if you don't wear sunscreen." "Because it's not humid, it is easy to get used to." In Seattle, the summer is the best season, "Summer is the only time of year that it doesn't rain much." "Summer is like paradise in Seattle." "If summer wasn't so good here, I would move to a different city." In New York, Korea, or other hot and humid places, people can say, "Summer is both hot and humid here." "I am always sticky because I sweat so much during the summer." "Without air conditioning, I don't know how I would survive." Spring and Fall / Autumn From my perception, I noticed that spring and autumn are generally pleasant seasons for many areas of the world. I haven't heard enough to say one way or another, so I can only write down what I know. "My favorite season is autumn." "The only reason I don't like the fall is due to all the leaves I have to rake up." "Fall is so beautiful because of all the different color leaves everywhere." "It rains a lot around here during the fall." "It gets cold in late autumn." "In our country, autumn is just like summer. It's hot and humid." "My favorite season is spring because of the budding flowers." "I love the spring because it's not cold nor hot." "The spring season here causes a lot of people to sneeze due to all the flowers appearing. Many people with allergies hate the spring."Weather - Winter
Listen to the Entire Lesson Winter has many differences between locations. Some places might be extremely cold like Korea, New York, Alaska, Greenland, etc, and some places might be perfect like Hawaii, Los Angeles, Mexico and other hot places. Hot places that enjoy pleasant summer warmth: "I don't think we have a winter here. During the winter months, it's still 80 degrees. So everyone loves the winter months because it's not too hot." "Winter time is the best time to visit because the temperature is the best during January." "I like to go to Hawaii for my winter vacations because it's so cold in my home city." Cold places: "It's freezing out." "It doesn't snow often, but when it does, it stays around for several weeks because it stays cold." "For 3 months, this city will be covered with a layer of snow because it will never melt." "It doesn't get too cold here, but it's always raining and very gloomy." "The winter here is cold and dry. We hardly get any precipitation."Weather - Fahrenheit and Celsius
Listen to the Entire Lesson It's unfortunate that some countries still use the Fahrenheit system. It would be so much easier if everything was in Celsius. But because the United States still uses the Fahrenheit system, knowing the conversion of Celsius to Fahrenheit will help when speaking to Americans. "How do you convert Fahrenheit to Celsius?" "Well, you subtract 32 from Fahrenheit, multiply by 5 and then divide by 9." "How do you convert Celsius to Fahrenheit?" "You multiply Celsius by 9, divide by 5, then add 32." Here is an example dialog. Person A: "What is the average temperature in Seoul during June?" Person B: "It is usually about 26 degrees Celsius during June." Person A: "What is that in Fahrenheit?" Person B: "That would be about 80 degrees Fahrenheit." Usually, it takes some time to convert degrees using the conversion method. So it's easier to have general temperatures already memorized. Here is a small table so you can quickly respond when talking with a foreigner about the temperature. You don't need to remember everything. But if you know a couple of numbers you can just change the other number slightly. For example, if you know that 80 degrees is about 27 degrees Celsius, then if the temperature is 77 degrees, you can figure that it will be about 25 degrees Celsius. Also, you don't have to be very accurate. In conversation, many people just want general numbers and being off by a half a degree will not do any harm. Finally, during the winter months, it gets so cold that the temperature goes below 0 degrees Celsius. Let's practice a few sentences using negative numbers. "How cold does it usually get in Korea?" "Usually around minus 5 degrees Celsius, but sometimes it gets as cold as minus 12 degrees." "How cold does it get in Alaska?" "Depending on the area, but it's common for the temperature to be below 0." "Is that in Fahrenheit or Celsius?" "Fahrenheit." "That means it's 20 below zero!" Remember, although numbers below zero are negative numbers, it's not common to say, 'Negative 2 degrees.' It's not wrong to say it and everyone will understand, however, when speaking to many people, almost everyone says 'minus 2 degrees.' Another common way to say it is below zero is to say, '2 below' as in the example above.Weather - Questions and Answers
Listen to the Entire Lesson In this session, we are primarily going to practice speaking key sentences that will help you carry a conversation about the weather. Asking about the weather: "Do you know what the weather will be like tomorrow?" "Do you know if it's going to rain tomorrow?" "Did you see the weather forecast?" "What is the weather like in Korea/Seattle/Los Angeles?" "How is the climate in Korea?" "Does it rain much in Denver?" "How different is the weather between Pusan and Seoul?" "What is your favorite season of the year?" Answering questions about the weather: "The weather is supposed to be sunny and warm tomorrow." "It's supposed to rain for the next several days." "I didn't see the news yesterday so I don't know what the weather is going to be like." "Weather in Los Angeles is usually hot in the summer and mild in the winter. It never really gets that cold." "The weather in Pusan is very similar to Seoul. The main difference is that Seoul gets a little more snow in the winter and a little hotter in the summer. This is primarily because Pusan is right next to the water." "My favorite season of the year is Spring. It's not too cold and the anticipation of a good summer puts me in a good mood." Statements about the weather: "I heard Seattle is a very gloomy city with so many clouds." "The weather is beautiful this time of year." "I hate the rain. It makes me feel depressed." "Autumn is a great season." "The summer months are so humid in Korea." "I can't stand the cold winter months." "It's a beautiful day today, isn't it?" "I wish the weather was like this everyday." "It's been raining for 5 days straight. I wonder when it will stop raining." "I hate the snow. The roads are dangerous to drive in, and when it melts, the streets are very dirty." "I love snowboarding so I always look forward to the winter." "The winter months are tolerable because I don't mind the cold." "Korea has four distinct seasons."Weather - Long Description
Listen to the Entire Lesson Being able to speak specific sentences is good, however, it is more important to be able to say a whole paragraph when talking about topics such as the weather. I'll have a specific lesson about putting sentences together in a future lesson. But I'll give one advice now. Basically, make about 10 sentences. After you know your ten sentences about this question, you can say all of them one after the other so it is a long answer. The ten sentences should be in a list format. We will learn how to speak longer in a future lesson, but if you want to give it a try now, here are two examples. Question: "What is the weather like in Korea?" Answer: "Well, the weather in Korea is unique with four distinct seasons. In the winter, the temperature is about zero degrees Celsius. But, because it doesn't rain much in the winter, there isn't much snow and the air is very dry. In spring, the days warm up significantly but the night gets a little chilly. The summer has two characteristics. It is very hot and humid most of the time, and for about 3 weeks or so, we have a rainy season called monsoon. It gets very rainy and windy during that time period. But we all look forward to autumn. It is a beautiful time of year and the temperature is very pleasant. If you plan on visiting Korea, I highly recommend visiting during autumn." Question: "Which season do you like the most?" Answer: "I like summer the most, but at the same time, I hate it. I like summer because it's warm. I don't mind the heat and I like the longer days. So, I can do more activities like swimming, bicycling, rollerblading, and many other outdoor activities. I usually take a short vacation during the summer so I always look forward to that. However, the part about summer I hate the most is during the monsoon season. I can tolerate the humidity, but when it gets hot and humid along with the rain and the wind, then it gets terrible."Small Talk
Listen to the Entire Lesson Many people believe small talk is very boring and not personable. Although that is true, there are many places where small talk is very important. In the western culture, strangers talk to other strangers frequently. On the other hand, small talk is not so common in the eastern culture. Because strangers are friendly to one another in the western culture, small talk is very important to master in regards to learning English. One other place small talk is important is in an interview. That is why this session will be important to learn. The best way to learn small talk is to provide many examples. So this lesson will be taught using an example format. Small talk involves many different topics. We will have several sessions on small talk once we have covered other subjects such as sports, jobs, school, etc. But for now, we will go through the basics of small talk conversation. To initiate small talk, we can use what we have learned from our previous several sessions: One: "Hi Bill, how are you doing?" Two: "I'm doing great. How are you doing?" One: "I'm doing well myself." Wasn't that simple? If you studied the material in prior sessions, this should be real easy for you. Now that we have initiated the small talk, it's your responsibility to keep the conversation going. In order to do so, you can talk about anything that is not too personal. Let's first ask what the other person has been doing lately. One: "What have you been up to lately?" Two: "Well, I just started to work at the bank so I'm pretty busy learning everything." You can elaborate on what you have learned to keep the conversation alive. In this example, you are going to ask more questions about school and work. One: "Does that mean you already finished school? I thought you had 1 more semester left." Two: "I took summer courses, so I finished one semester early." One: "It's great that you got a job. I'm really happy for you." Two: "Thanks." As you can now tell, the conversation is getting old. You have a choice of ending the conversation, or changing the topic. Let's practice ending the conversation. One: "We should get together for lunch sometime." Two: "Yeah, that would be great." One: "I'll call you sometime." Two: "Ok. I'll see you later." One: "Alright. See ya."Small Talk - Two Example Dialogs
Listen to the Entire Lesson In this conversation, we initiated the conversation and talked about the other person. However, sometimes you will not have anything to talk about. In order to keep the conversation alive, you should think about topics such as the weather. One: "Hi Mary." Two: "Oh, hi." One: "How are you doing?" Two: "I'm doing alright. How about you?" One: "Not too bad. The weather is great isn't it?" Two: "Yes. It's absolutely beautiful today." One: "I wish it was like this more frequently." Two: "Me too." One: "So where are you going now?" Two: "I'm going to meet a friend of mine at the department store." One: "Going to do a little shopping?" Two: "Yeah, I have to buy some presents for my parents." One: "What's the occasion?" Two: "It's their anniversary." One: "That's great. Well, you better get going. You don't want to be late." Two: "I'll see you next time." One: "Sure. Bye." This example is when you run into someone. This is an easy type of small talk because when you run out of things to say, you can always say bye. There are times when you don't have that option. Let's practice a situation where you cannot leave, such as an interview. I go into depth about interview communication in a different section. For now, I am going to emphasize the small talk portion of an interview. There are times when you will not have an opportunity for small talk, but in other cases, you might have to talk about general things. Them: "Hi. My name is Josh. It's a pleasure to meet you." You: "Hi Josh. I'm glad to be here." Them: "Did you have any problems finding this place." You: "I didn't have any problems. I found directions on the internet so it was pretty easy to find. However, the traffic was not that great." Them: "Traffic is never good around here." You: "I agree. It would be great if there was a train or a subway line that went through here." Them: "That would be so great. I would definitely take the train if they had it." You: "Trains are great because you can read a book or get a little rest instead of having to fight the traffic." Them: "Very true. Well, let me begin by telling you about our company..." This is a good example of small talk. It shows that you are easy to speak with, and most importantly, you found a small connection even though it was about a small topic such as the traffic problem. In this type of situation, don't feel that you have to constantly talk. If it is not relevant to the topic, it might be better not to say anything. But if you can add on to the topic, it's a good thing. The person who is giving the interview has the control, and that person will direct the small talk to the interview when the time is right. In my example above, I made a small transition from the traffic and started the interview process. If you are interested about interview, please go to the Interview Section. You may now move on to the practice session.Movies - Asking Friend
Listen to the Entire Lesson In this section we will work on the planning aspect of watching a movie. In other Movie sections, we will cover discussing a movie, types of movies, etc. Since this is the first Movie section, let me take a quick minute to explain how to find out movie times and how to pay for tickets in America. It's very similar and simple. First, you need to find out what time a show is playing. In most cases, this is done by checking the internet. Usually, you type in the zip code and all the theaters in that area will display all the movies and movie times for that week. After you have chosen the movie to see, you need to buy the ticket. There are some places you can buy on-line, but it isn't that popular yet. You can go to the theater before the movie starts and buy it at the theater. The only thing you need to know how to say is the movie name and the movie time. Here is a quick example. Let's say you are watching the Titanic at 3:00. You walk up to the counter and say, 'Titanic. Three o'clock.' Wasn't that easy? Finally, big block buster movies usually sell out of tickets very quickly. So if you want to see it on opening day, it is wise to go to the theater right when it opens and buy the tickets in advance. Before you watch a movie, you need to plan ahead with friends. Either you are asking a friend to watch a movie, or you are answering. In either case, we will cover it here. The following questions and statements are used when asking a friend to watch a movie. "Hey John, do you want to (wanna) go see a movie tonight?" "I'm going to watch Terminator 2. Do you wanna join?" "Let's go see The Matrix tomorrow." "What time should we meet at the theater?" "Let's watch a movie after dinner." "The Titanic is coming out this Friday. Let's go see it." If there are not enough details, a response can be in a question form. Here are a couple of examples. "Who is all going?" "Who are you watching it with?" "Where are you watching it?" "What time are you watching the movie?" Normal answers: "That sounds great." "I always wanted to see that. Let's go." "Let's meet at the theater at four o'clock." "Sure. Do you wanna eat lunch together before the movie?" "I've already seen that movie. What else is playing?" "I can't. I have to work that night." "That movie sounds scary. I don't like horror movies." "I really don't like the actors. I'm going to pass."Movies - Example Conversation
Listen to the Entire Lesson Let's look at a couple of example conversations before going to the practice section. Person A: "Hey John, I'm going to see The Matrix with Peter and Brad. Do you wanna come?" Person B: "When are you guys going?" Person A: "We're going to see the eight O'clock showing." Person B: "That would be great. Where are you guys meeting?" Person A: "We're meeting at the theater at seven thirty." Person B: "Great. I'll meet you guys there." Person A: "Hey Jill." Person B: "What's up Mike?" Person A: "I was wondering if you have any plans for tomorrow night." Person B: "Umm... I don't think I have anything special for tomorrow. Why?" Person A: "Do you want to see The Titanic with me?" Person B: "I wanted to see that. Yeah. Let's go." Person A: "What time is good for you?" Person B: "How about seven thirty." Person A: "Sure. I'll meet you at the theater at seven.Movies Types - Action and Drama
Listen to the Entire Lesson In the next three movie sections, we are going to learn about different movie types. Afterwards, we will cover having discussions about movies that you recently saw. But for now, let's work on movie types. There are many different types of movies. You probably know them all in your language, but let's learn what they are in English. Also, we will learn how to say a couple of sentences related to a movie type. If you disagree with a sentence, feel free to change some words around so they fit what you want to say. Although there are many categories, we will learn the most basic 10 types of movies. Action Drama Comedy Romantic comedy Horror Science fiction Suspense (Thriller) Western Commentary / Non-Fiction Action: Movies with lots of fighting, shooting, exploding, etc. "What kind of movie do you like?" "I like action movies because they are fast paced." "Action movies are my favorite." "I like all the action movies with a lot of guns." "I like fight scenes that are choreographed." Drama: Everyone knows drama. Like Titanic and Schindler's List "What type of movies do you like?" "I like all sorts of drama." "I like movies that play with my emotion." "Drama movies are great because they are the most realistic." "The sad drama movies that make me cry."Movie Types - Comedy and Horror
Listen to the Entire Lesson Comedy: Funny movies with many jokes or actors acting in a funny way. "I love all types of comedy because I love to laugh." "Comedy is my favorite because it is very entertaining to me." "I like comedy that makes fun of political things." "Comedy is so hilarious that I always enjoy watching them." Romantic Comedy: Funny movies with a strong romantic theme. Opposite to action because usually guys like action and the ladies like Romantic comedies. "Many people view romantic comedy movies as chick-flicks." Chick = girl Flick = movie Chick-Flick = a girly type of movie; a movie a girl will like; 'take your girlfriend to' type of movie... or something like that. "Romantic comedy is funny movies that involve a lot of romance." "I love all the story lines of romantic comedy movies." Horror: Scary movies that will give you nightmares for 3 months. "When I was a little kid, I couldn't sleep because of horror movies." "Horror movies are not scary anymore." "I have yet to see a movie that really scares me." "I hate horror movies because I cannot sleep." "I always have nightmares after watching horror movies so I try to avoid them."Movie Types - Other Types
Listen to the Entire Lesson Science Fiction: Futuristic movies like star wars, star trek, theme of time travel, superhuman powers, etc. "Many science fiction movies are about the future." "The success of a science fiction movie is usually dependent on how much they spend on special effects." "After watching a science fiction movie such as star wars, I always wish I lived in the future." "Gene Rodenberry and George Lucas are two great people in the Science Fiction world." Suspense (Thriller): A movie that intentionally keeps you in a heightened state. "I am always on the edge of my seat when I watch suspenseful movies." "I can't stand to watch suspenseful movies because my stomach always gets upset." "The suspense just kills me." "It's so exciting to watch a suspense movie." Western: Old time cowboy movies "Western movies are not so popular anymore." "Client Eastwood was a popular western actor." "Western movies show a little bit about the United States during the early years." "After watching The Last Samurai, I always hoped an Asian country will make a movie called The Last Cowboy." Commentary / Non-Fiction: Educational and true. "Commentaries and non-fiction films are usually educational." "Non-profit organizations usually create commentaries supported by the government." "Popular non-fiction films are about chimpanzees and gorillas." "Sometimes non-fiction films are sad because of the hidden truth that is revealed."Movie Discussion - General Statements
Listen to the Entire Lesson In this movie section, we are going to have discussions about movies that we already saw. This is useful because whenever we come out of a movie theater, we always ask our friends what we thought about the movie. Sometimes, it's a simple answer such as, 'It was alright.' But sometimes, a good discussion can arise from a great movie. Let's get started... Every time I finish watching a movie, I either ask someone, or someone asks me, "What did you think about the movie?" For the most part, the answer is a simple one line sentence: "It was alright." "It could have been better." "It was pretty good." "I liked it." "It was entertaining." "It was so stupid I almost fell asleep." "Lame." "Boring." "Too unrealistic." I can go on for a long time describing movies. I have listed a few so you get an idea how to answer simple movie questions. Besides simple one line answers, there are a few reasons we need to say other things. It is because either we didn't understand something, want to describe a scene we liked, want to describe a scene that was stupid, or simply go on and on about how great the movie was.Movie Discussion - Describing a Movie
Listen to the Entire Lesson Didn't understand: "Do you remember the scene when Mary walked into the dining room? Why was she carrying a knife? She didn't use it and the cameras focused on it." "I can't understand why she betrayed him. The whole movie concentrated on her trust and loyalty. It just doesn't make sense." Good Scene: "I love the scene when Russell Crowe showed his face to the emperor after the first gladiator fight." "What did you think about the last fight scene between Neo and Agent Smith in the rain?" "The courtroom scene between Jodie Foster and Richard Gere was absolutely amazing." Great Movie: "That was such a cool movie. It was the best movie I've seen in a long time." "Anytime I see a great movie I tend to look at my watch often. That's because I don't want the movie to end." "The movie was great. I liked everything about it. I'm definitely going to buy the dvd." Situational questions: "What would you have done? Would you have taken the million dollars and give up your wife for a night?" "Would you choose money and fame, or family and stability?" Some movies are known to be 'based on a true story.' These types of movies are very interesting because they actually happened. The only reason they are not considered to be a non-fiction movie is because the director or writer will add some scenes that didn't happen, or change some facts around so the movie is more appealing to the masses. A conversation can start from movies such as Schindler's List. When coming out of a theater, I heard a couple talk briefly about this. "What did you think about the movie?" "I thought it was great. It was very powerful." "How much of it do you think was true?" "I learned about Germany and World War II in one of my classes, and this movie showed everything I learned from class." "Wow. It's amazing that these things have happened in our history."Movie Discussion - Example Dialog
Listen to the Entire Lesson As of this writing, the latest movie I saw was The Last Samurai. After the movie, I had a meal with a couple of people. We had a good discussion due to this movie. It is difficult to specifically teach what you will need to know about movie conversations because every movie will require different words and sentences. The only thing I can do here is to give ideas and couple of examples about movie conversations. So this is not really going to be a practice section, but a chance to hear a real conversation from a movie. You can click on each individual sentence, or you can click on the link provided below to hear a real life conversation. Listen to the conversation A: "Did you like the movie?" B: "It was better than I thought." C: "I liked it." A: "The movie didn't have many cheesy or stupid scenes." B: "Yeah. I'm glad that they didn't have any love scenes. Sometimes a love scene destroys a good movie." C: "I thought the scene where the girl was washing her hair and Tom Cruise came to say good bye was stupid. Why did they have that there? It didn't make sense." B: "I agree. They didn't need that scene." A: "I don't see the harm in that scene. They didn't do anything or show anything. What's the big deal?" C: "When you are talking about good movies versus great movies, each and every scene counts." A: "That's true." B: "But besides those one or two scenes, the movie was great." A: "I liked everything about it. I really liked the samurai that was beating up Cruise in the beginning of the movie. The guy second in command. He was cool too." B: "Every movie has a guy like him. They try to make him awesome even though they don't say much." C: "I don't understand why Tom Cruise went back to that village. If he was the only survivor, wouldn't that make everyone suspicious about where his loyalty lies?" A: "It was clear in the movie that he loved the place and the samurais. Clearly everyone knows that he isn't a traitor. I would have done the same thing in his position." B: "I think so too." C: "But isn't it suspicious that he is the only survivor." A: "Well, all the samurais were looking for a death in battle. Cruise wasn't." C: "But only the boss received the satisfaction of being killed with the sword. Nobody else did." A: "True." B: "What are we going to order?" C: "I am going to have a chicken burger because of the Mad Cow disease." A: "Me too." B: "I'm just having a soup and salad."Favorite - What's your Favorite
Listen to the Entire Lesson The word favorite is used a lot in spoken English. It is very common to talk about your favorite things with your friends or acquaintances. Topics can range from favorite movies, favorite TV shows, favorite food, favorite cars, etc. Since there are so many favorite things in the world, you should pay close attention to this lesson. Asking questions is the most common way to use the word favorite: "Who is your favorite singer?" "Who is your favorite person?" "Who is your favorite athlete?" "Who was your favorite ex-girlfriend?" "Who was your favorite elementary teacher?" Are you following me? It's very easy. Just change the word at the end and you can make dozens of sentences. "What is your favorite show?" "What is your favorite movie?" "What is your favorite dessert?" "What is your favorite program?" "What is your favorite class?" "What is your favorite game?" "What was the title of your favorite song?" "What was the name of your favorite sit-com?" We used 'who' and 'what' in our sentences. It's possible to use 'where', 'how', and 'when', but the most common is 'what' and 'who'. I'll provide a couple of sentences for the other words. "Where is your favorite vacation spot?" "When is your favorite time of day?" "How is your favorite noodles cooked?" It's not common, because even though it is grammatically incorrect, you can ask the same question with 'what' "What is your favorite vacation spot?" "What is your favorite time of day?" Nobody is really going to notice and it's not a big deal. After this lesson is over, I suggest practicing with 'what' and 'who', but don't bother with the others. It's not as important.Favorite - Answering Questions
Listen to the Entire Lesson To answer these types of questions, it is very easy. All you have to do is change 'your' to 'my', repeat the last portion of the question and add your answer. We'll practice a couple of times. "What is your favorite show?" "My favorite show is Smurfs." "What is your favorite movie?" "My favorite movie is Matrix." "What is your favorite dessert?" "My favorite dessert is cheesecake." "Who is your favorite singer?" "My favorite singer is Josh Groban." "Who is your favorite athlete?" "My favorite athlete is Tiger Woods." "Who was your favorite elementary teacher?" "My favorite elementary teacher was Mrs. Smouse." Different ways to ask about favorite things You don't necessarily have to use the word favorite. Favorite basically means what you like the most. So, you can ask favorite questions without the word favorite. "What do you like to eat the most?" "My favorite food is ice cream." "What is a childhood memory that stands out?" "My favorite childhood memory is a time I went fishing with my dad." "Which professor do you like the most?" "My favorite professor is Professor Kim." Likewise, you can answer questions without using the word favorite. "What is your favorite baseball team?" "I like Seattle Mariners the most." "What is your favorite type of food?" "I love Italian food... especially pasta. They are so good." "Who is your favorite music group?" "I really enjoy listening to Depeche Mode."Hobby - Questions and Answers
Listen to the Entire Lesson Hobbies are a hot topic anytime. Similar to favorite things, hobbies are favorite things that you do. This is a small section so let's get started. Questions you can ask: "What are your hobbies?" "What do you do in your spare time?" "What do you like to do?" "What do you like to do for fun?" "If you had extra time, what would you do with it?" There is not much else you can say. Remember that we can create many different sentences, but we want to use what is most common in spoken English. So we need to stay with the most common words. Answering questions: "My hobbies consist of golfing, reading novels, and watching movies." "I like to play computer games in my free time." "If I'm not working, then I'm busy chatting with people on the Internet." "During my spare time, I like to cook." "I like to read magazines." "In the summer I play golf, and in the winter, I go skiing." "I love every type of sports." Making statements: "I need to find a hobby. I have nothing to do all day." "Maybe you wouldn't be so lonely if you had a hobby." "Hobbies are great because it allows you to do what you enjoy." "Although I have many hobbies, I wish I had more time to do more." "I love to go snowboarding. It's exhilarating." "I would go skiing more often, but it takes such a long time to go up to the mountains." "I wish golfing wasn't so expensive. I would golf almost everyday if I could afford it."Hobby - Various Q&A
Listen to the Entire Lesson "If you had all the money in the world, what would you do?" "I would probably find some hobbies and join an organization that works for a good cause." "You just stay home most of the week. Don't you ever get bored?" "A lot of my hobbies are things I do by myself such as oil painting, sculpting, and drawing. So actually, I have a lot to do with not enough time." "I'm so bored. I have nothing to do." "Maybe you should start thinking about some hobbies." "Is studying considered a hobby?" "Studying is usually associated with school and work, so it's not usually considered a hobby. But if it's not for these purposes, then I guess it can be a hobby. That's just my opinion though." "What do you do in your spare time?" "I do a lot of writing, so I write every chance I get." Like many topics in English, a conversation will go towards the content of the conversation. So let's review with longer dialogs in practice.Exercise - Questions
Listen to the Entire Lesson There are various types of exercise. Some people might think walking is exercise, and some other people will think weight lifting is exercise. In the next couple of lessons, we will take a closer look at various types of exercise. Exercising can be done in many different ways. Here is a small list to get us started: Walking Jogging Running Sports Aerobics Rowing (boat) Commuting to work Etc. Here are some questions. "Do you exercise at all?" "Do you work out?" "What type of exercising do you do?" "Where is a good place to exercise?" "Why don't you exercise?" "Where do you usually jog?" "How long do you take a walk for?" "How often do you jog?" "Where do you do aerobics?" "How long do you usually run for everyday?"Exercise - Walking Jogging and More
Listen to the Entire Lesson Walking: "Every morning right when I get up, I like to take a thirty minute walk." "I like to take walks with my dog." "Golf is a healthy sport because of all the walking it requires." "I heard from some doctors that walking is the healthiest form of exercise." "There's a trail by my house that is a perfect 20 minute walk." "We usually go to a nearby lake and walk around it." Jogging: "Every night, I go to an elementary school across from my house and jog a few laps around the playground." "I go jogging in the morning when the air is still fresh." "Some people find jogging stressful, but I find it as a way to relieve some of my stress." "It feels so good after jogging for half an hour." "I usually jog on a treadmill because it's convenient." Sports: We will have another more comprehensive lesson on sports in a different lesson. "I usually play a lot of basketball." "I get enough exercise from soccer." "I like to play sports because it is a good form of exercise and allows me to have fun all at the same time." "Although bowling is a sport, I don't consider it a form of exercise." "I play volleyball a couple hours a day." "I practice baseball with my school team everyday." "I'm in my high school's track and field team. I'm a long distance runner." "I don't play soccer because it requires too much running." "Running constantly is a hard thing to do." Others: "Aerobics is an excellent form of exercise." "I use a video at home to do my aerobic sessions." "I like to do aerobics because it targets specific areas." "I get my exercise from rowing. I'm on the junior varsity crew team." "I ride my bicycle to work every day." "I take the stairs because it gives me a little bit of a work out." "I go to the local park and ride my rollerblades."Exercise - US Culture
Listen to the Entire Lesson Having lived in the United States and Korea, I realized one big thing immediately. In Korea, I have to do a lot of walking. When I went to school or to work, I had to leave my house, walk to the bus stop or the subway which takes about 10-15 minutes, get off at my destination, and walk the rest of the way, which is another 15 minutes. Total time walking is about 25 minutes. This translates to 50 minutes a day round trip, and about 3-4 kilometers everyday. I didn't even know it, but I was exercising. In America, everyone has a car. While going to work here, I literally walk about 7 minutes a day. That's a total distance of 300 meters. The reason is because I only have to walk to my car. I drive to work, and then I walk from the parking lot to my office. So, I realized I was gaining weight without having changed anything except the walking I wasn't doing. I suppose that is why in America there is a big hype about exercising and losing weight. If you don't want to, you don't have to walk anywhere or exercise at all. In Korea, walking is part of the daily routine. So although you don't need to know this lesson as much as other lessons, it will still help when talking to foreigners about this subject. Let's continue with the lesson by doing the practice. In the next exercise lesson, we will learn about speaking English in relation to working out in the gymExercise Gym - Lifting Weights
Listen to the Entire Lesson Popular types of exercising are conducted in the gym or health club. When I refer to a gym, I am implying a health club. Two common types of exercising in the gym are working out / lifting weights, or using machines such as treadmills, bicycle machines, step machines, etc. It's common for guys to get together and talk about lifting weights. Likewise, girls get together and discuss the best methods to lose weight. In this lesson, we are going to lay the ground work on talking about exercising in the gym. Lifting weights Professional weight lifters are called body builders. But since the number of body builders are not significant, we are going to concentrate more on regular weight lifting. I don't lift weights, but when I see a friend who is noticeably bigger due to lifting weights, these are the types of things I say. "Have you been lifting?" You do not need to say lifting weights. When you say lifting, it's understood that you are talking about weights. "You got big man." "How long have you been lifting?" Other terminologies for lifting weights are: Pumping Iron Pressing Iron Pressing Weights Working Out Weight Training Hitting the GymExercise Gym - Questions and Answers
Listen to the Entire Lesson Here are some questions you can ask. "Where do you work out?" "What club do you work out at?" "When do you usually work out?" "How often do you work out?" "How many hours do you work out in a day?" To ask how they work out or what their routine is, you can ask: "When you bench, how many reps and sets do you do?" Reps are repetition. In weight lifting terminology, this means how many times they lift in one set. "Do you do low reps with heavy weights, or many reps with light weight." "How many sets do you do when you work out your arms?" If you are the person being asked these questions, here are ways you can answer: "I work out at 24 Hour Fitness." "I work out at Bally's." "I work out at Samsung Health Club." "I started lifting weights about 2 years ago." "I have been lifting weights for about 2 years now." "I just started 9 months ago." "I usually work out 2 hours a day 4 times a week." "I work out everyday for an hour." "I go to the gym 3 times a week." "I go in every other day." "I can bench press 220 pounds." "I squat 400 pounds." "I curl 90 pounds." "I'm trying to gain bulk so I'm doing low reps with heavy weights." "I'm trying to get ripped, so I'm doing a lot of repetitions." Ripped means to get lines to show up in the muscles. It's called ripped because when you rip a piece of paper, you see a line in the paper where the tear is. So a person is ripped when you can see lines on his body due to muscles.Exercise Gym - Other Methods
Listen to the Entire Lesson Other ways to work out in a health club Many people lift weights in the health club, but many people also go to lose weight using machines such as the treadmill and bicycle machines. Here are some things you can say in a conversation if you fall into this category. "When I go to the health club, I usually spend 30 minutes on the treadmill, 20 minutes on the bicycle, and finally 10 minutes on the step master." "There is no place to run in the city, so I have to do my running on the treadmill." "It always rains around here so I like to exercise in the gym." "I usually use the treadmill, but I try to work on the nautilus machines at least twice a week." "My wife exercises four times a week." "My husband can't last 10 minutes on the step machine."Intro and General Things Review
Listen to the Entire Lesson This review section is going to incorporate every lesson we had so far. We are not learning anything new here, but the sentences and topics will be selected randomly from previous lessons. If you feel you have done poorly after the first grouping of questions, please stop and go through the lessons you failed to answer. The only way you will completely master English is through persistence, hard work, and repetition. You are judging yourself, so be honest. The rule of thumb is that if you cannot answer a question relatively quickly, you need more practice.University Life - Meeting New Students
Listen to the Entire Lesson As you can see, these portions of our lessons are dedicated to school. There are many things to learn here, so we are going to spend numerous lessons on school. But don't worry; only a couple will be geared towards classes. The rest will be about night life, partying, and having a good time. Before we start learning about topics such as classes and examinations, let's learn some general university phrases. The first type of speaking you will have to do is when you meet new people. During this time, you can engage in idle small talk. Since you have learned small talk, feel free to use your new skills. On top of that, let's learn some new phrases that will help you. "Where are you from?" "What high school did you attend?" "What are you going to major in?" "What are you majoring in?" "How many credits are you taking this semester?" "What classes are you taking?" "What year are you?" "What is an easy class to take?" "Where is the best place to hang out?" "Are you in the dormitory?" "Where do you live?" "Why did you decide to come to this school?" "What made you choose Berkeley?" Many of the answer to these questions are general things you should already know. But it never hurts to review again, so let's go over how we can answer some of these questions. "Where are you from?" "I'm from Seattle, Washington." "I'm an exchange student from Seoul, Korea." "I'm from Dublin, Ohio." "I'm from Southern California."University Life - Questions and Answers
Listen to the Entire Lesson "What high school did you attend?" Before we answer this question, keep in mind that a foreigner will not be asked this question. Usually they will not ask a foreigner because they think that they will not know the high school you mention. But it is still good to know how to say such things. "I went to Lynnwood High." "Lynnwood High." "I went to a high school in San Francisco." "A high school in Olympia." "What are you going to major in?" "I haven't decided, but I'm leaning towards biology." "I'm thinking about majoring in psychology." Universities in the States are a little different than others. You don't choose your major until you are in your 3rd year. Basically, you apply to get into a major your junior year and if accepted, you have a major. If you get turned down, you have to find a different major, or spend another semester or year trying to get in. That's why you see so many people not graduate after 4 years. The problem is that they do not know what to major in. "How many credits are you taking?" "I'm taking eighteen credits this quarter." "I'm only taking 10 credits this semester." "I'm taking 20 credits this semester." "What classes are you taking?" "I'm taking chemistry 135, math 231, and English 101." "This quarter I'm taking Intro to Sociology, Basics of Music Composition, and Spanish 101." "What year are you?" "I'm a junior." "I'm a freshman." "I'm a fourth year junior." "I'm a fifth year senior." If you wonder how you can be a fourth year junior or a fifth year senior, you must understand that the number of credits you have completed represents what level you are. So a fourth year junior is someone who has been in school for four years, but has the same credits as a junior.University Life - More Q and As
Listen to the Entire Lesson "What is an easy class to take?" "Fishing 101 is an easy 4.0" "I thought psychology 101 was an easy class." "Communication is pretty easy if you're not afraid to make speeches." "Where is the best place to hang out?" "The best place to hang out is on the Ave." "Currently, the bar on 4th and James is the best hangout. Everyone goes there on the weekends." "Are you in the dormitory?" "Yeah. I'm over at Terry Hall." "Yes. At Buchanan Towers." "No. I'm commuting from home." "I have an apartment right next to school." "Where do you live?" "You know the McDonalds on the south side? Just 2 blocks from there." "I live next to the west entrance. There are some apartments behind the dormitories." "I live in the dormitory." "I live in Seattle." "Why did you decide to come to this school?" "It was the most convenient." "It was either this school or the University next to my home. I wanted to get away from home, so I came here." "I researched a bit, and found that this school offers exactly what I am looking for." "This is the best school that I could afford." "Do you know where the music building is?" "The music building is 2 buildings away from the library." "Over by the fountain. It's the building with the round looking doors." "I'm not sure. There are maps in the Student Union Building though." "I think it's over in that direction, but not exactly sure." "Where is the student union building?" "Ah, that's what I'm looking for too." "I was told it was right next to the east parking lot." "It's the brick building behind the large oak tree." Remember that when you are talking to somebody, an answer to a question is another potential topic to talk about. I'll show you an example of a conversation. Please take note that I ask questions about the answer. Look for it in the practice session.University Classes
Listen to the Entire Lesson In this lesson, we are going to learn about the terminologies you need to know when you talk about classes with your peers. There are several sections I will break this up into: Registering for classes Grades in class Professors and different curriculum Dropping out/Withdrawal First, let's talk about registering for classes. Questions "Did you register yet?" "When do you register for classes?" "When does registration start for next semester?" "How do you register for classes?" "Where is the registration office?" "What classes are you registering for?" "What classes are you going to take?" "What classes do you want to take?" Ways to answer these questions "I haven't registered yet." "I register next Tuesday." "Registration starts 4 weeks before the next semester." "You register on-line. Go to the website, and click on register." "The registration office is in Schmidt Hall. That's right across the street from the statue." "I'm not worried about getting into psychology 101, but I think the physics class will be full by the time I register." "If all things go well, I plan on registering for English composition, chemistry, and calculus." "I really want to take computer programming, but I'll have to see if it is full or not." Regular comments about registering "I hate registering for classes. All the classes I want to take are always full." "Being a sophomore sucks because we register last." "Seniors have the first pick so registering is easy for them." "If I get all the classes I want to take, I'll be so happy." "Registration was great this time. I got all the classes I wanted." "Registering for classes is such a big headache."University Classes - Grades
Listen to the Entire Lesson Grades in Classes Talking about grades is all dependent on if you open up about these things or not. I know some people are very secretive about their grades, and others like me freely talk about grades. So make sure you are close friends with the person you are talking to about grades. Grades are different depending on school. Some schools give letter grades that translates into number grade. Other schools strictly give number grades only. The difference is in letter grades, you cannot get a 3.5. You either get a B+, which is a 3.3, or an A- which is a 3.7. However, in number grades, the instructor can give a 3.4, 3.5, or 3.6. "What did you get in English?" If you are talking about the subject, you do not need to say grade. But if not, you can ask, "What grade did you get in English?" "I can't believe I got a 3.1 in biology. What did you get?" "How was your GPA this semester?" GPA stands for Grade Point Average. "How were your grades this quarter?" "Did you do well this semester?" "Did you screw up your grades this semester?" "What was the lowest grade you ever got?" "What is your overall GPA?" "How are your grades?" "What's your accum?" This is short for accumulated. This is asking what your overall GPA is. I'll give examples for both specific and general answers. "In English, I got a B+." "I got a 2.9 in English." "I did similar to you." "I got a 3.4 this semester." "If I didn't get the C+ in Biology, my GPA would have been awesome this semester." "My grades were ok." "I did average this quarter." "My accum is 3.6 right now. I really want to get over 3.75." "My overall GPA is 2.94. I need to get a 3.4 next semester to bring my GPA above 3.0." "My GPA sucks." "I did pretty good this semester." Although grammatically this is incorrect, spoken English allows such errors. If you want to be grammatically perfect, you will need to say, "I did pretty well this semester."University Classes - Professors and Curriculum
Listen to the Entire Lesson "How is Professor Johnson?" "Is Professor Smith an easy grader?" "What is Professor Lee like?" "Would you take another class from Professor Jackson again?" "How many exams did you have to take in Sociology 121?" "What's the curriculum for Chemistry 101?" "Do you have to give any presentations in journalism class?" "What do you do in poetry class?" If somebody asks you these types of questions, you can answer like the following: "Professor Johnson is so uptight. He's always lecturing and never allows students to ask any questions." "Professor Johnson is a brilliant professor. I learned so much from him." "No way. He is such a hard grader. I was expecting a 3.7, but it turns out that I got a 3.1. Can you believe that?" "His grading system is messed up. He grades according to how much he likes you." "He's a difficult grader." "He's an easy grader." "So far, I have taken 2 classes from Professor Jackson. I'm going to take every class he offers." "I wouldn't recommend Professor Jackson. His classes are so boring." "He's an idiot. He doesn't know anything." "There were just two exams... the midterm and the final." "There is an exam ever other week. It was hard, but at least it prevented me from cramming." "The curriculum is pretty basic. We have two days of lecture, two days of lab, and one day of discussions. Every now and then we have a quiz, but it's pretty routine." "In journalism, we have to give a presentation 3 times during the course. I didn't mind it, but a lot of other students were complaining." "We had two presentations, but they were pretty easy. It was the writing that was hard."University Classes - Dropping Out / Withdrawal
Listen to the Entire Lesson There are two ways to leave a class. You either drop out, or you withdrawal. Dropping out usually means you are going to get a failing grade and you don't care about it. But primarily, dropping out refers to leaving college life altogether. So if you intend to say that you dropped out of a class, you should use withdrawal. There are several time periods for withdrawal. The first week, there is no penalty. The second week up to the first month, a W will show up on your transcript. And finally, withdrawal after the half way point will give you a failing grade. But this is dependent on each school policy. So learn the withdrawal format of your school. I was using the dates mentioned above only as an example. Let's learn some sentences to say these kinds of things. "I dropped out of my chemistry class." "I withdrew from my biology class." "I had too many classes as it is, so I dropped out of my statistics class." "I couldn't keep up with the schedule, so I dropped out of that class." "I couldn't understand the material, so I withdrew." "I hated the professor, so I just withdrew." If you need to ask questions about withdrawal, these may help: "When is the last day to withdrawal?" "If I withdrawal now, will it show up on my transcript?" "Does a withdrawal look bad on the transcript?" "How do I drop out of a class that I don't want to take anymore?" "What is the procedure to withdrawal from class?" "How do I withdrawal from a certain class?" Other things you might want to say when discussing this topic... "Are you sure you want to drop out of that class. You only have 4 more weeks. At least you can get the credit." "If I stay in that class, I'm going to screw up my GPA." "The best I can do is a C in this class. I don't want a C on my transcript. I'm going to withdrawal from the class." "If you get a bad grade, can't you just re-take the course?" "Even if I retake the course, both grades are used. This school has a different system where re-taking the course doesn't really help."Examinations
Listen to the Entire Lesson What is a school without examinations? They all have it. So, we will have to spend a session talking about exams. There are many types of tests and different terminologies. You can be taking an in-class test, or it could be a take-home final. It could be a multiple choice exam or an essay type format. In either case, we will cover it here. First, let's learn the different terminologies associated with testing. Examination Mid-term Finals Test Quiz Pop-quiz Exam Take-home final Research paper Final paper Report Essay Presentation Open-book test/final Common questions you can ask about exam format: "How many tests did you have to take in your Math class?" "What was the mid-term like?" "How much percentage is the mid-term towards the final grade?" "Do you have to write any papers in that class?" "How many pages did you have to write for your essays?" "Was the open-book exam hard?" "How difficult was the take-home final?" "Was the final exam short answer questions, or was it multiple choice?" "Did you have any pop-quizzes in your geology class?" "How much time did you get to write your research paper?" "How often did you have a quiz?" "What day did you take your final?" "When did you take your final?" "Are you done with your mid-terms?" "When is finals week?" "The syllabus for the econ class says you have six exams. What were they like?" "How difficult is the mid-term for psychology 101?"Examinations - Finding Information
Listen to the Entire Lesson Having a lot of information about tests can help prepare for exams. The next several questions are geared towards finding specific information. "Does Professor Giles use old exam questions for his tests?" "Can I borrow your old exams for Intermediate Accounting? I want to use the questions to test myself before the real exam." "Do you know anybody who took Physics 340? I want to know the types of questions that were asked on the final." "Do you think I need to study chapter 6 for the mid-term? It's so boring, and I can't seem to apply it anywhere." "What topics did the professor cover the most in the final exam?" "What were the long essay questions on?" "Do you remember the long essay questions you had on the final?" "I was thinking about buying the study supplement for the engineering class. Do you think it will help?" And of course, you may be required to answer these types of questions, so let's get into answering: "How many tests did you have to take in your Math class?" "We had a total of 4 tests in that math class." Or more simply, '4 tests.' Answering can be real easy. The reason I put full sentences is for your practice. But remember when you really answer, you are not required to put them in full sentences. I'll try to mix it up so you get a familiar feel answering both long and short ways. "What was the mid-term like?" "The mid-term was hard. If you read all the material, you will still have a hard time because the professor wrote up all the questions in a difficult way."Examinations - General Information
Listen to the Entire Lesson The hardest types of questions to answer are the, 'What was it like' types, and the 'how was' types. The reason it is hard is because you have to explain in your own words the answer. It's not as simple as a number or a 'yes' or 'no.' "How much percentage is the mid-term towards the final grade?" "The instructor said it was twenty percent of our final grade." "Do you have to write any papers in that class?" "No. We only had one mid-term and one final." "Yes. We had to write 2 essays for that class." "How many pages did you have to write for your essays?" "We had to write 5 pages for both essays." "Was the open-book exam hard?" "Most of the time, open-book exams are harder, but this one was really easy. All the questions were in the glossary so I found the answers quickly." "How difficult was the take-home final?" "It is easy that we have the material to look through, but it is very time consuming. I had to do an all-nighter just to finish." All-nighter means to stay up all night.Examinations - More Information
Listen to the Entire Lesson "Was the final exam short answer questions, or was it multiple choice?" "It was multiple choice." "Neither. The exam had 2 long essay questions." "Did you have any pop-quizzes in your geology class?" "We had 3 pop-quizzes in that class. Luckily, only five percent counts toward the final grade." "Fortunately we didn't have any." "How much time did you get to write your research paper?" "We had two months to write the research paper." "How often did you have a quiz?" "Once a week." "What day did you take your final?" "I took the final last Monday." "I didn't take it yet. I take the final tomorrow." "The syllabus for the econ class says you have six exams. What were they like?" "It was pretty easy because they only covered 2 chapters. If you keep up, then you shouldn't have a hard time." "Does Professor Giles use old exam questions for his tests?" "He always creates new test questions so old ones will not help you." "Can I borrow your old exams for Intermediate Accounting? I want to use the questions to test myself before the real exam." "Sure, I have it in my dormitory. I'll bring them tomorrow." "He didn't return the exams, so I don't have them." "What were the long essay questions on?" "Both questions were on supply and demand. Make sure you know that stuff inside and out." "I was thinking about buying the study supplement for the engineering class. Do you think it will help?" "I highly recommend it. I didn't have it for the first exam, and I got a B-. But after I studied with the supplement, I aced the next test."Roommate - Dormitory
Listen to the Entire Lesson While in school it is common to have a roommate when you are in the dormitory. In the States, it's also common to share an apartment with a roommate. This lesson will cover the English you will need to talk to your roommate. Of course you can talk about many things, but I will specifically target this lesson towards roommate stuff. Dormitory Roommate When you first go into a dormitory, you will either be greeted by the person already there, or you will have to greet someone that is coming later than you. Most dormitories have one room for two people. After the dormitory section, I will cover living in an apartment with a roommate. When you arrive to the dormitory, you can usually engage in small talk first. Most of the time, you have to get to know one another. Talk is initiated by both parties simultaneously. You can ask questions like where they came from, what year they are in, or what they like to do. But besides that, you have to find out the living habits of each other. After you engage in small talk, you can ask these questions: It's important to know the sleeping habits of your roommate, so ask if they are a night person or a morning person. "So, are you a night owl or a morning bird?" A night person is referred to as an owl. That is because owls are more active at night. Birds on the other hand wake up early. So they associate morning people to birds. If you don't want to use this expression, you can ask, "Are you a night person or a morning person?" "What time do you usually go to sleep?" "What time do you usually wake up?" "If you didn't have anything to do the next day, what time would you sleep till?" It's common courtesy to respect each other. If you are asleep, the roommate should be quiet. This goes for you too. When you get sleepy, you can either go to sleep, or tell your roommate that you are going to sleep. "I'm a little tired. I'm going to sleep now. Have a good night." "I'm sleepy. Time to go to bed. See you in the morning." If you like listening to music, you can ask your roommate, "Does the music bother you?" "Let me know if you want me to turn the music off." "Do you mind if I turn the stereo on?" But when you ask questions about music or TV, you should make sure that person is not studying. If they are, then it's pointless to ask because it should be quiet. This is only good for times when you are both doing nothing.Roommate - Sharing things and Questions
Listen to the Entire Lesson Sometimes a roommate will bring a mini refrigerator, or it might turn out that you will. It's polite to let your roommate use the refrigerator too. "Feel free to use the refrigerator." "Can I put my drinks in your fridge?" "Do you mind if I use your refrigerator?" If you connect with the person and you become friends, then you will not even need to ask. For example, after you get to know the person your comments will be different. Say I become a friend of my roommate. And then after a month or so, he brings a refrigerator. I wouldn't ask to use it, I would rather comment on how useful it will be. It's assumed that a friend can use the refrigerator, so no need to sound weird by asking politely. Instead you can say, "Cool, you brought a fridge. I can go buy milk now." This comment is saying that you appreciate the refrigerator by saying, 'cool', then you indicate that you are going to use it by saying you will buy milk. If your friend doesn't object to your comment, then it is the same thing as getting permission to use the refrigerator. Responding to questions "Are you a night person or a morning person?" "I'm a night owl. I usually sleep pretty late." "What time do you usually go to sleep?" "It varies. Usually between midnight and one in the morning." "What time do you usually wake up?" "I don't wake up until I have to." "I usually wake up at nine in the morning." "Does the music bother you?" "No not at all. I like it." "Do you mind if I turn the stereo on?" "Oh, feel free." "Can I put my drinks in your fridge?" "Sure. Don't worry about it." "Do you mind if I use your refrigerator?" "No problem at all."Roommate - Apartment
Listen to the Entire Lesson When people live in an apartment, it is usually among friends. So there's no need to worry about being too polite. As long as you have common courtesy, you will have no problem. On the other hand, if you are looking for a roommate, then there are some things you should learn how to say. The list of questions below are examples of questions you should ask when looking to join existing people in an apartment. Questions "What is the rent here?" "How many people live in the apartment?" "How many bedrooms does the apartment have?" "How much is utilities?" "Does the rent cover the utility bills?" "Do you have any rules for living here?" "Does it get loud in here?" "What time do people usually go to sleep?" "Do you hold any parties here?" "How many people share the bathroom?" "Do you have cable?" "Do you have high speed Internet?" Common answers "The rent is $1200, so you would only pay $400." "This is a three bedroom unit, so you would be the third person." "On average, utilities are about $125." "The rent does not cover utilities. You would be responsible for 1/3 of the utilities." "We are pretty quiet during the week days, but on the weekends, it can get a little loud." "We have both cable and DSL here."Fraternity and Sorority - Explanation
Listen to the Entire Lesson A big part of university life in America is the fraternity and sorority. Since many people do not know what they are, let me explain a little so you understand what I'm talking about in this session. Fraternity and sorority is a group of people that get together and live in a big building. They are in a special group that is defined by their own rules. Most of the students live in either apartments or dormitories, but an alternative is to live in a fraternity or a sorority. I don't know the short name for sorority, but the short name for a fraternity is a frat. It all depends on the sentence whether you should call it a fraternity or a frat. Also, fraternity and sorority have names and they are already established. The names are always Greek and so they named the area where these buildings are located, Greek Row. Fraternity is the terminology used for guys, and sorority is what they use for the ladies. So if you are a guy, you will be looking at fraternities, and if you are a lady, you will be joining a sorority. The price to live in a fraternity or a sorority is similar to the price of dormitories. There are many sizes, but as an example, a fraternity house might have 50 rooms. All rooms either hold 2 or sometimes 3 people. There is a kitchen and food is served at specific times. If you want to get into a fraternity or sorority, you usually have to apply and interview with existing members. Popular ones are very picky and will not let some types of people in. Others are desperate to fill their rooms so they will accept anyone. Almost everyone who has been in a fraternity or a sorority never regrets it. There are more people who regret not having lived in a fraternity than having lived in one. So if you plan on attending a university in the states and will be there for more than 2 years, you should definitely consider the frat or sorority life. Here are some examples of fraternity and sorority names. I do not know these fraternities or sororities. I am using this as an example so you understand the naming scheme. Alpha Phi Alpha Fraternity Kappa Sigma Fraternity Delta Tau Delta Fraternity Zeta Phi Beta Sorority Delta Sigma Theta Sorority Sigma Gamma Rho SororityFraternity and Sorority - General
Listen to the Entire Lesson In this session, we will cover some of the things you need to know how to say if you decide to join a fraternity or a sorority, or if you are just talking with a member. "How do you like being in a fraternity?" "What is it like living in a sorority?" "How often do you hold parties in your frat house?" "Is it hard to get into a fraternity?" "What are the popular sororities?" "Which sorority has a reputation for putting out?" Other comments you might hear will be... "Those sorority chicks really know how to party." "All the frat boys want to do is get you into bed." "Some fraternities are very studious." "He's a good friend from my fraternity." "The Delta house is having a party this Friday. You wanna come?" "We're going to crash the Sorority party this weekend." Crash in this sentence means to go uninvited.Fraternity and Sorority - Joining
Listen to the Entire Lesson If you are trying to find a fraternity or a sorority to join, you would either need to know someone in that group already, or find an advertisement in the local school paper, or go to the fraternity or sorority house and ask how to become a member. Here are some things you can say initially: "Hi, I was interested in joining a fraternity. What is the process to get in?" "Hi. I was wondering what I needed to do to get into this sorority." "Are you taking in members now?" "Where can I find information on joining this sorority?" After the initial sentence, they should respond with more information. Here is an example. "We take new members every semester. All you need to do is fill out this application, and then we will contact you for an interview." "Every Monday at 10 am, we have an informational session about our sorority. I highly recommend you attend if you are interested." If you ask a question about information, they might respond with a question such as, "What would you like to know?" You can ask the following questions if you have this opportunity. "How much does it cost each month?" "What meals are included with the monthly rent?" "How many people are in this sorority?" "What activities do you have in this fraternity?" "Do you have tours of the building?" "What is the policy during summer break? Can we stay in the frat house during the summer months?" "How long has this fraternity been around?"Fraternity and Sorority - Interview Questions
Listen to the Entire Lesson When you are trying to get into a fraternity or a sorority, you might have to interview. Lot of the interview questions are geared towards who you are. They are trying to determine if your personality matches what the group represents. "Why should we let you in this fraternity?" "What do you want to gain from your experience in a fraternity?" "What can you bring into this sorority?" "What are your hobbies?" "What do you usually do on a weekend?" "Do you like to go to parties?" "What type of music do you listen to?" "Where did you grow up?" "Do you play any sports?" Before answering these questions, it is important to find out what type of fraternity or sorority you are applying for. Sometimes a good answer for one group will be a terrible answer to another. Most of the time, fraternities are about having a good time with friends. "Why should we let you in this fraternity?" "I'm a fun person to be with, I have a good personality, and I like to have fun." "What do you want to gain from your experience in a fraternity?" "The most important thing is getting good memories of good times with good friends." "Meeting people and making friends who like the same things I do. I also think it is important that the friendship goes even beyond the college years." "What can you bring into this sorority?" "My parents have a boat, and I can use it to have fun parties on it in the summer time." "What are your hobbies?" "I like to play basketball and football." "I like to go shopping and have drinks with my friends." "What do you usually do on a weekend?" "I either throw a party or go to a party." "Do you like to go to parties?" "Hell yeah!" "What type of music do you listen to?" "Mostly rap, hip-hop, and top 40's." Finally, if you decide to join a fraternity or a sorority and you pass the interview, you will have to go through initiation. Some places are real easy, but some places can be a little weird. For example, you might have to run down the street in your underwear, or you might have to kiss 10 different people, or you might have to drink a lot. What ever it is, it's usually a surprise. Try to get as much information as you can before you join the group.College Partying
Listen to the Entire Lesson One of the great things about college is the parties. However, it could be boring and dull for others. I'm not saying it's fun for everyone. But if you like to drink, have fun with a lot of different people, it might just be your thing. First, I'll explain the various parties you can attend. There are fraternity and sorority parties, parties at a friend's house, parties at clubs or bars, night clubs, and so on. That is what we will discuss here. We will have other sessions on different types of parties, but since we are on the college track right now, I will dedicate this session to partying while in school. Usually, fraternity or a sorority party has a lot of drinking, a lot of people, and a lot of music. At the party, you usually mingle and meet a lot of people. Some people go to the parties to have sex. These can occur at many parties because there are a lot of rooms in the fraternity and sorority houses. But don't think this is all fun and games. There are some people who thinks these types of parties are boring. For the people who do not like to talk to strangers, it can really be boring. They will end up in a corner by themselves and have a beer or two and then go home. It basically depends on what type of atmosphere you like. If you like this type of partying, the first thing you need to do is find the party. "Where is everyone hanging out this weekend?" "Are there any good fraternity parties this weekend?" "Where does everyone go to party?" "Are there any parties to crash this weekend?" An easier way to find a party is to have a friend who is in the loop. "There's a party this weekend at the Kappa Sorority house. I think we can sneak in. Wanna go?" "There's a bunch of us going to the Last Supper Club in downtown. If you're not doing anything, you should join us." "A friend of mine is having a party at a huge house. It's going to be a blast. Let's go man." "There's going to be a kegger at my fraternity. You're welcome to come."College Partying - Questions
Listen to the Entire Lesson If you are new to these types of partying, you can ask questions about what takes place at these parties. "What do you usually do at the party?" "What goes on at the party?" "Are there a lot of girls?" "Are there a lot of cute guys?" "What types of drinks do they have at the party?" "Do I need to bring anything to the party?" "How many people usually come to the party?" The most important thing you will need to learn is what to say when you are at the party. In order to be liked, it doesn't matter what you look like, or how much money you have. Although both of these help, the most important thing is if you are a fun person. Usually, fun people have good things to say and keeps the conversation going. You can engage in small talk, but it also doesn't matter what you say, it matters how you say it. The most important thing to do is to do a lot of laughing. It really doesn't matter what you say, so no use learning new sentences. I will have several practice sessions so you can hear what the conversation should sound like.Smoking
Listen to the Entire Lesson There are several facts to smoking. First, smoking is bad for you. Second, everyone knows it's bad for you, but many people still smoke. I will cover two aspects of smoking. First, we will learn about asking for a cigarette. And second, we will learn about what people say about smokers and the conversations that take place between non-smokers and smokers. First, let's talk about smokers. There is not much you need to know except how to ask for a cigarette. What else are you going to say? "Do you have an extra cigarette?" "May I have a cigarette?" "Can I have a cigarette?" Sometimes, you can ask while giving a reason. "Can I get a cigarette from you? I just ran out." "I forgot my smokes at my house. Do you have an extra one?" There are other terminologies you can use. "Can I bum a cigarette from you?" "Can I bum one of those?" "Do you have an extra cigarette I can bum?" "I need a cigarette. Can you help me out?" Bum is another way of saying beggar. In essence, you are admitting that you are a bum for asking. Although the meaning can sound pretty serious, many people use this term to be polite. Answering these questions is pretty simple. Nobody ever says, 'No.' That's just too rude. If it's a friend, then you don't even need to say anything. Just pull out the pack of cigarettes and hand your friend a cigarette. But here are some other things you can say. "Sure." "I think I have a spare." "Here you go." If you are sitting at a coffee shop, you can put it on the counter and say, "No need to ask, just help yourself." If you don't have anymore then you can say, "Sorry. I just ran out." "This was my last one." "I bummed this one off another person." Or if it's a stranger walking by, you can ignore them and keep walking without saying anything, although this could be rude.Smoking - Non Smoking Areas
Listen to the Entire Lesson Smoking and non-smoking areas Currently in America, many states are banning indoor public smoking. That means no smoking in bars, restaurants, or any other place that is deemed public. California is an example of a state that implemented this rule. But there are still places where smoking is permitted. Here are some questions you might find useful. "Is this a non-smoking establishment?" "Do you have a smoking section here?" "Is smoking allowed?" "Where is the smoking section?" "Is there a designated smoking area?" At a bar or a smoking place, if you need an ashtray, you can say, "Can I have an ashtray?" If you have one and you need another one, simply say, "Can I have another ashtray?" If you are smoking in an area that is a non-smoking area, you might hear people say the following... if you are a non-smoker, then you can learn this to say to others that are smoking in a non-smoking area. "This is a non-smoking area." "There's no smoking in this area." "This is a non smoking establishment." "There's no smoking in the airport." "Smoking is only allowed in the bar area." "You cannot smoke here. Can you please go to the bar or outside to smoke?" Responding to these can be done with a simple, "I'm terribly sorry. I'll take this to the smoking area." "Sorry. I didn't know I was in a no smoking area. I'll move right away." The easiest way is just to apologize and leave immediately with a, 'sorry.'Smoking - Quitting and General Statements
Listen to the Entire Lesson If you are in a hotel getting a room, the clerk might ask you, "Would you like a smoking room or a non-smoking room?" If you hate the smell of smoke and they do not ask, you can verify what type of room it is by asking, "Can you make sure it's a non-smoking room?" "Is this going to be a non-smoking room?" While smoking, you will sometimes talk about smoking. If that's the case, you can ask these types of questions. "How long have you been smoking?" "Have you been smoking long?" "Have you ever tried to quit smoking?" Comments you can say while smoking with someone "Smoking is so bad, but it feels so good." "I've been smoking for 10 years." "I tried to quit a couple of times. It's really hard." I heard some comments from some people justifying cigarette smoking "There was a 90 year old man who smokes one pack a day and drinks one bottle of Soju a day and he is very healthy. He's been doing it for over 60 years." "I only smoke when I'm with friends." "I only smoke when I'm drinking." "I can quit anytime I want. There is just no need to right now." "The best way to quit is cold turkey." Cold turkey is a terminology used to completely stop without any help with things such as nicotine gum or nicotine patches. "There are a lot of aids to help you stop smoking. I heard hypnosis is pretty good." "I quit for 3 months last year. I used the patch to help stop the cravings."Smoking - Asking for Light and Hate Smoking
Listen to the Entire Lesson When you don't have a lighter or matches, do not ask for fire. That is a common mistake. Instead, ask for a light. "Do you have a light?" "Can I borrow your lighter?" "Can I use your matches?" If you catch someone smoking, like your kid or your significant other, you can say, "Have you been smoking?" "Is that smoke I smell?" "Who taught you how to smoke?" "Where did you get those cigarettes?" "I saw you smoking yesterday." "You smoke don't you?" Finally, for people who do not like smoking, here is a section on communicating your disgust with smoking. "I hate smoking. It smells so bad and hurts my throat." "I don't like that club because it smells like smoke in there." "It is way too smoky in the bar." "It's a little stuffy with smoke in here. I'm going outside to get some fresh air." "Have you ever kissed a smoker? You can taste the smoke. It's disgusting." "I get a headache when I'm around smoke." Second hand smoke is a term used for non-smokers breathing the smoke from smokers. So if you are a non-smoker and you are in a bar, the air you are breathing is basically second hand smoke. "I heard that second hand smoke is just as bad for you as smoking." "Second hand smoke can give you health problems too." "Children who grow up breathing second hand smoke have greater health risks growing up." "I don't mind second hand smoke. I got used to it over the years."Drinking - Terminologies
Listen to the Entire Lesson Many countries have drinking rules such as using two hands to receive drinks, never allowing your drinking friend to pour their own drinks, never leaving a glass empty too long, and so on. But in America, there isn't that many rules you need to know. I'll cover as much as I can and soon enough, you shouldn't have any problems talking while drinking in America. (I do not know the drinking etiquettes of other English speaking countries such as England, so learn about drinking rules before going there) In a Bar There are a few terminologies you have to learn. Tap - Beer in a glass that is from a large container Well - Same as Tap. Different wording Pint - This is 16 fluid ounces. This roughly translates to 500cc. Bottles - Bottles of beer Pitchers - Same as Tap, but put in a pitcher Mixed Drinks - Special Drinks like a mixture of Vodka and Orange Juice. They have names for these such as Fuzzy Navel, Rum and Coke, Buttery Nipple, Gin and tonic, and so on. Wine - Red or white. Bottle or glass Shots - Hard alcohol in small shot glass On the Rocks - Hard alcohol in a bigger glass with ice Straight Up - Used when ordering a hard alcohol. Specifying that you do not want ice Double - Two shots in a bigger glass Round - Used in groups when ordering together. Bottoms up - One shot. Drink everything in your glass Cheers - Word used before hitting glasses together before drinking Champagne - Carbonated wine used in special occasions such as weddings. Toast - A person usually makes a speech at a special occasion with glasses raised before all taking a drink together. Usually with champagneDrinking - Ordering Drinks
Listen to the Entire Lesson I'll cover ordering drinks in a restaurant in the 'Restaurant' section. For now, I'll limit this session to ordering drinks in a bar, and drinking with friends. When you are in a bar, you can either go up to the counter or wait for a server to come by. If you go to the counter, you order what you want by saying the drink name and the quantity. "I'll take 4 bottles of Corona." "I'll take a pitcher of Red Hook." "Give me 3 shots of Crowne." "I'll have one Jack and Coke." After you get the drink, the bartender will usually say, "That will be $12.50." If you pay with cash, then you should receive change. Make sure to tip once in a while. However, if you pay with a card, they will usually ask if you want to leave it open. Leaving it open means to keep the credit card open so if you order more drinks, you will get one bill instead of having to use the credit card multiple times. You will hear something like this. "Do you want to keep it open?" If you want to keep the credit card open before they ask you, you can say this. "Can you keep it open?" If you have a credit card open, then any more drinks you order will go on your credit card. When you are done for the night, you can simply tell them that you are ready for your bill. "Can I get my bill?" If the bartender has your credit card, then you can go up to the counter and say the same thing, or say, "I would like to close my tab."Drinking - Ordering at a Table
Listen to the Entire Lesson If you are sitting at a table in a bar, a server will come up and ask you what you want. They can ask in multiple ways, but the most common are the following. "What can I get you guys?" "What can I get you?" "What would you like today?" "What will it be?" "What do you guys want today?" Other things you can ask is if there are any specials. "Are there any specials today?" If they do, they will probably tell you the drink and the price that is on special. Here is an example. "All our margaritas are $2.50, and well drinks are $2.00." "Every Monday we have pitchers for $5.00." If you are having pints or shots or some other drink, and you want to get one more for everyone, you can say to the server that you want one more round. "Can we get one more round?" They will respond by saying, 'Same thing?' or 'Four Coronas again?' When you are sitting with your friends to drink, mostly you just talk and drink. But if somebody is getting low on a drink, you can offer to buy another one. Another situation is if someone buys you a drink, you want to say that you will buy the next round. Here are some examples. "I'm going to get another drink. Do you want one?" "Let me buy you a drink." "Thanks. I'll get the next round."Drinking - General Things
Listen to the Entire Lesson When you are all standing in front of the bar to buy a beer, sometimes one person will pay. Usually everyone reaches for their money, but one person who wants to pay says, "It's alright, I got this one." Another popular saying is when you meet a good friend and you want to buy them a drink. "Hey, let me buy you a drink. What do you want?" When you do cheers, you can either say cheers, or dedicate the next gulp to something. You first lift up your glass and say, "This is to good times. Cheers." "For the end of our junior year." "To success." Basically anything you want to drink for. Among friends, you can recommend shots. At a bar, mostly people drink beer and mixed drinks. However, between drinks someone can recommend having a shot altogether. "Hey, let's all do a shot." "Shot time." "Let's get 4 shots of Jack." Asking questions about how well someone drinks "How much can you drink?" "How many beers does it take to get you buzzed?" "Depending on the day, but mostly it will take 4 beers before I start to get buzzed." "I usually have about 6 drinks when I go out." Also, when someone can't drink that much, people usually use the term light weight. You should also know how to ask if a person is ok to drive. If they look drunk, then you should take away their keys. However, if they are ok, you can usually ask them if they are capable of driving. "Are you ok to drive?" "Are you going to be able to drive?" "You sure you can drive?" Before moving on to the Interactive Practice section for drinking, listen to a conversation with a couple of friends in a bar. Listen to the Conversation A: "Hey wassup. What are you guys drinking?" B: "We're having pitchers." C: "Dude, you're going to need a glass." A: "Excuse me?" S: "Yeah." A: "Can I get a glass?" S: "Sure." A: "Have you guys been drinking long?" C: "Not really. This is only our second pitcher." B: "You better start catching up." A: "When I get my glass, I will." B: "You ok with shots right?" A: "Yeah." B: "What do you usually have?" C: "He always has the same thing. Crowne." A: "Exactly." B: "That's good stuff." C: "You finally got your glass. Hey Cheers. To good friends."College Related Topics Review
Listen to the Entire Lesson This review section will cover all the lessons we had so far. This includes small talk, weather, movies, classes, university, etc. If you are slow on some sections, please go back to that particular lesson and study the material again.Health
Listen to the Entire Lesson Health is an important part of life so it is useful to know how to speak about this topic. We will cover eating, and general health statements you will need to know. Eating "What type of food is healthy to eat?" "Are hamburgers healthy for you?" "Is drinking coke bad for you?" "Do vitamins really work?" "If you eat better, you will be healthier." "If you want to be healthy, you should eat better." "Eating ramen and drinking beer everyday is not healthy for you." "Eating vegetables is good for you." "Eating a variety of food is good for you." "I take vitamins everyday." "Even though eating cereal in the morning is boring, it's quite healthy." "If you want to be healthy, you should eat better and start exercising." General statements "I need to start thinking about my health." "I get sick very often these days. I think I need to start worrying about my health." "It is very important to take care of your health while you are young." "Trying to regain your health when you are old is more difficult than people think. That is why it is important to take preventive measures early." "Smoking and drinking is bad for your health." "You're ruining your health." "Now that I am thirty years old, I should really start thinking about my health." "You need to take care of yourself more." Questions regarding health "What made you decide to start working out?" "I want to get healthier." "You never used to eat spinach. Did you acquire a taste for them?" "No. I just heard it's healthy for you." "You run so often. Do you like jogging?" "I hate jogging, but I do it because it's very healthy."Health - Family
Listen to the Entire Lesson If you are young and pretty healthy, then you do not need to say many different things. What we have covered so far is a good starting point in health discussions. For the next section, I am going to go into good and bad health of older people such as parents or grandparents. If a person is very old and does not have any sickness, then the usual comment is to mention how healthy that person is. "My grandfather can't move that much because of leg pains. But besides that, he is very healthy." "She's quite healthy for her age." "My mother always complains about some pain, but the doctor can never find any wrong with her." "My grandmother is in a nursing home. She's pretty healthy but can't walk that well." Often times we ask about the health of a new born baby. Here are some sentences you can say. "I just had my baby." "Oh really? Is the baby healthy?" "He's a healthy little boy." "I'm so blessed with healthy children." "I'm so happy that my children are all healthy." "I wish I was rich, but I can't complain. I have a job, my children are healthy, and most of all, we are all happy." Although it is fortunate to have healthy relatives, we are sometimes in a situation where health is a problem in the family. "My uncle died from stomach cancer. The doctors say it is mostly hereditary but I think it was due to all the spicy food he ate." "My father is very unhealthy. He says it is because he didn't take care of his body when he was young." "My sister is always sick. I'm really concerned about her health." "My brother is tired all the time. I think he is unhealthy."Body Parts
Listen to the Entire Lesson I'm not going to talk about every body part in this lesson. For information concerning detailed body parts, I would suggest a book that is solely covering body parts. Instead, we are going to cover various types of conversations and sentences most commonly used in standard English communication. Let's first list the different body parts I will cover in this lesson: Arm, Forearm, Elbow, Wrist, Hand, Finger, Knuckles Leg, Calf, Thigh, Knee, Ankle, Toes Head, Ear, Mouth, Nose, Eyes Neck, Chest, Stomach, Back, Groin, Butt, Shoulder The arm area Here is a list of sentences most commonly used "My arm hurts." Remember you can change the word of arm to any of the other body parts. "My wrist is sore." "I sprained my wrist while I was playing tennis." Sprain is to hurt the ligaments of a joint. It is different than breaking a bone. Breaking a bone is hurting the bone itself, and sprain is hurting the tissue that connects the bone. "I can't bend my elbow that well." "Your fingers are so long." "My fingers are short and stubby." "I like to crack my knuckles." "My grandmother has arthritis so she can't move her hands well." "I got a flu shot on my arm yesterday." "I hate people who don't wash their hands after going to the bathroom." "I broke my finger when I fell down the stairs."Body Parts - Leg and Head Area
Listen to the Entire Lesson The leg area "I went jogging yesterday so my legs are all sore." "Your legs will be very sore after you go skiing." "I hate it when I get cramps." "I usually get cramps on my calf." "I banged my toe against the coffee table." "These shoes hurt my feet a lot." "I got a bruise on my thigh after he gave me a charley horse." Charley horse is most widely used to describe as stiffness or a muscle ache of the upper leg after being hit. So if I hit someone in the thigh, then that is called giving someone a Charley horse. "I banged my knee against the door and it hurts." "I got this scar on my knee when I was little." "Twisting your knee is so painful." "I broke my ankle playing volleyball." "My ankle was swollen after I sprained it." "I like shoes that support my ankles." The head area "My ears are so cold." "My nose turns red when I'm cold." "I always get a runny nose during the winter time." "I get a runny nose during allergy season." "Your whole face is turning red." "I usually turn red when I drink alcohol." "Don't pick your nose." "My eyes are itchy." "I have a cold sore on my lips." "I have a canker sore in my mouth." "I hit my head on the desk after picking up a pen." "How did you get a black eye?" "What happened to your face?" "How did you get that cut on your cheek?" "Did you have acne problems when you were young?" Acne is another terminology for pimples. "I used to get a lot of pimples when I was young." "My mouth always waters when I smell steak." "I got my ear pierced yesterday."Body Parts - Body Area
Listen to the Entire Lesson The body area "I got a whiplash after the car accident." "My father hurt his neck when he turned his head too quickly before sneezing." "He has a big Adam's apple." Adam's apple is the bump in the neck most common among guys. "I've been getting chest pain recently." "When I get asthma, it feels like someone is pressing on my chest and squeezing my lungs." Asthma is a respiratory disease that makes it difficult to breath "He bumped me on my shoulder as he was walking by." "I feel like a big load has been taken off my shoulder." "He has broad shoulders." "Many girls like guys with broad shoulders." "I want to get rid of the fat on my stomach." "I have a beer belly." Beer belly is a terminology used to describe a stomach that sticks out from excessive beer drinking. "I get a stomach ache if I eat spicy food." "I have an upset stomach." "My stomach hurts." "You must be hungry. I can hear your stomach rumble." "I want a six pack." Six pack is a terminology used to describe a flat stomach with six or eight lines showing the muscle lines. You can also use washboard, "His stomach is like a washboard." "He hit me in the groin." Groin is the area between the legs. It can also mean the crotch area, but crotch is more specific to the personal area, where groin can mean the general vicinity. Vicinity means area "I pulled my groin when I was doing sprints." Sprint is running as fast as you can. "She has such a big butt." "Her butt is so flat though." "If you go snowboarding, your butt will hurt the next day."Dieting
Listen to the Entire Lesson Everyone who wants to lose weight has to go on a diet. Since most of the people are somewhat overweight, this becomes a hot topic to talk about. Although both men and women go on diets, I will primarily focus this towards the women population as it is more of a discussion topic for them. When you see someone and notice a weight change, you usually want to mention that they look better or that they lost weight. "Have you lost weight?" "You look better, did you lose weight?" "Have you been dieting?" "Wow. You look so good." Another time dieting discussion starts is during meals. When a person is trying to eat less, people question why and a conversation about dieting begins. "Is that all you're going to eat?" "Why aren't you eating anything?" "Did you already eat?" "Are you on a diet or something?" "Are you not hungry?" And then the person will usually respond by saying: "I'm trying to lose some weight." "I started to diet so I am watching what I eat." "I want to lose some weight before I take family pictures next month." "I'm on a diet." Some people look so skinny and they still say they are going to go on a diet. Here are some comments you can say. "You do not need to go on a diet." "You look great now. Why do you want to go on a diet?" "Yeah right. Like you have to lose weight." Remember that it is ok to talk about dieting with friends, but if you are among people you do not know too well, make sure there isn't somebody who is overweight already. You don't want to talk about dieting in front of these people because they might be self conscious about their weight.Dieting - Questions
Listen to the Entire Lesson Now that we have covered some basic sentences, let's work on sentences that will help in a discussion. First let's cover some questions about dieting. "How long have you been on a diet?" "What type of diet are you on?" "Have you lost a lot of weight?" "How much weight have you lost so far?" "How many pounds do you want to lose?" Remember that most countries use the kilogram system, but the United States uses the pound system. Don't ask me why, it's just the way it is. Here are some ways to answer these types of questions. "I've been on a diet for 2 months now." "I'm just watching my calorie intake and doing a little bit of exercise." "I lost 6 pounds so far." "My goal is to lose 10 pounds." "I want to be 105 pounds." Currently, the Atkins diet is very popular. Atkins diet is a low carbohydrate diet that causes the body to burn fat. Don't quote me on this though. If you want to learn more about Atkins diet, you can find a lot of information over the Internet. For now, I'll share with you some sentences that you might hear Americans say about Atkins. "I'm on the Atkins diet." "After three days on the Atkins diet, all I think about is bread and rice." "I lost 15 pounds in 4 weeks due to the Atkins diet." "I could never go on the Atkins diet. I love carbs too much." Carbs is the short form of carbohydrate. You might hear people say, low carb diet in the place of Atkins.Dieting - Specific Areas
Listen to the Entire Lesson Another common area about dieting is describing the exact area of where you want to lose weight. For some people, they want to lose weight on the arms or the legs, or even on the cheeks. Here are some things you may say. "I am going on a diet until I get skinny legs." "I've been on a diet for 3 months now and I can't get rid of the fat under my arms." "I hate my love handles. I can't seem to get rid of them." Love handles are the fat on the side of the stomach. "I want to lose weight on my cheeks." "What is the best way to lose weight on the thighs?" "How do you get rid of the fat on the cheeks?" "I can't seem to lose my gut. I'm pretty skinny everywhere but my gut is a big problem." Gut is the lower part of the stomach. Many people have some fat on the gut. Other general sentences "I am way too undisciplined to go on a diet." "I like to eat too much. I wouldn't survive a day on a diet." "If I can eat ice cream then I don't have a problem with a diet." "A good diet is a combination of eating well and exercising." "Many people think dieting is all about eating less." "I think exercising is more important than eating less." "The best way to naturally lose weight is to eat five times a day but smaller amounts." Talking about other people "She used to be so fat in high school. I can't believe how skinny she is now. I wonder what kind of diet she went on." "She's been on a diet for 6 months and still looks the same. She has to be cheating." "My sister has always been skinny, but after she gave birth, she had to go on a diet." Let's put all this together and practice with a conversation.Dating
Listen to the Entire Lesson There are several aspects of dating that are important so we will dedicate a couple of lessons on dating. There are two sections of dating. It comprises of the time period of trying to get a date, and then the time during the date. It is also important to point out the differences from the male and female perspectives. In this first lesson on dating, we will cover getting a date from both gender perspectives. In the United States, both genders can ask each other for a date. Just like in any culture, it isn't normal to ask a complete stranger for a date. Usually, you have to start a conversation and get to know each other a little bit before asking for a date. In the beginning, it's normal to engage in small talk. During small talk, you should then find something that you have in common. The longer you talk, the greater the chance that you will get a date. It is all up to how you feel if you want to ask or not. In this lesson, I will cover some sentences you should know so you can succeed in getting a date. Before we continue though, I would like to mention that blind dates are not common. For example, in Korea, So-geh-ting is a very popular way to get dates. This is in essence a blind date. It is not so common in the United States, so no need to cover it here. During the conversation, throwing out compliments is a good thing to do. Most people will be flattered by them. But remember not to make them too cheesy. Compliments to a guy "Do you work out at all? You have a nice build." "What kind of cologne is that? I like the smell of it." "I like the sound of your voice. It's soothing listening to it." Compliments to a girl "Your eyes stand out a lot. Do you get many compliments on them?" "Does it take you long to style your hair? It looks very good." "I bet you get hit on a lot." The term 'hit on' means to be approached by the opposite sex. So somebody who gets hit on a lot means to have many people approaching them. Compliments to either gender "It's very comfortable talking to you." "I feel like I can be myself when I'm talking to you." "You seem so intelligent. I like that." As you can see, these types of compliments are not too aggressive. They are implying good things, but are not a burden to hear. For example, imagine you are talking to a stranger. If they say, "You're so beautiful." It will more likely scare you away. You will probably think that person is a little crazy. But if someone is talking to you and says a small compliment, then it is very welcomed. So keep that in mind when throwing out compliments.Dating - Follow Up and Flirting
Listen to the Entire Lesson If the conversation goes well, and you feel that you have a strong connection, feel free to ask for a date. There are a couple of ways to do so. You can either ask for a phone number, or you can ask to go out by meeting somewhere. When you the conversation is about to end, make sure to bring up the subject of a date. "It was so great talking to you. I would love to get together and chat some more. Would you care to have dinner with me sometime?" "If you don't have anything planned for Saturday, I would like to take you to dinner." "We should talk some more later. Can I get your number?" There are many ways and if you are sincere, then you shouldn't have a problem. If you feel you are not sure, or you are scared, then you can leave your phone number and hope that the other person calls. "I enjoyed talking to you. Let me give you my number. I would love to hear from you." "Give me a call anytime you want to just chat." Flirting The previous section was more for people who usually start up a conversation before asking a person on a date. There are other types of meeting people. There is a terminology called flirting that is popular. Flirting basically means to make gestures or movements or comments that are a little sexual in nature. So if you move your body in a certain way, or you rub the other persons arm slightly, or talk about slightly sexual things, then that is considered flirting. Flirting is all dependent on both sides. It is hard for only one person to do the flirting. If that is the case, then the other person usually finds a quick exit out. Here are some things people might say while flirting. "Hey sexy. I can't believe I didn't notice you earlier." "How come you didn't ask me to dance yet?" "You have nice legs." "I can tell you workout. You have a nice body." "You want to feel my muscles?"Dating Part - Asking for a Date
Listen to the Entire Lesson In the previous section, we covered talking to someone before getting a date. In the next section we are going to work on some sentences you need to say during the date. As I said previously, there isn't really another dating language. Most of it is regular conversation such as small talk, movies, hobbies, school, and work topics. Let's start where we left off. By now, you should have a phone number. It is your responsibility to call and get a date. Even though you got a phone number doesn't guarantee a date. You have to convince the person to actually show up. Here is what you should say. On the phone Them: "Hello." You: "Hi. Is Janet there?" Them: "This is Janet." You: "Hi Janet. This is Mike. I met you at the party last Saturday night." Them: "Oh. Hi Mike." You: "Did you enjoy the party?" Them: "I had a great time. How about you?" You: "The next morning was tough, but it was real fun, especially meeting you." Them: "It was great meeting you too." You: "Can I take you out to dinner followed by a movie or some other thing?" Them: "Well, I am a little busy with school and all." You: "A couple hours shouldn't hurt too much. I'll make sure you have a good time. If you want, we can talk about your school. Maybe I can help you on some topics you are unsure about." Them: "Ok. Sounds good. I'm free this Friday after 6:00. How does that sound to you?" You: "That sounds good. Do you want to meet somewhere or would you like for me to pick you up?" Them: "If you don't mind Italian, I'll meet you at Olive Garden at 6:30 on Friday." You: "Sounds great. I'll see you then." Let's analyze this small conversation real quick. First, Mike didn't assume that Janet remembered him. He reminded Janet where and when they met. It isn't a good idea to put someone on the spot right. Next, Mike asked if Janet had a good time. This is a small talk question to break the ice. Afterwards, Mike gave a small compliment by saying, '... it was real fun, especially meeting you.' So Mike is giving an indication that he is interested in Janet. Next, Mike asks for dinner. Janet's response is important to learn from. She knows Mike has interest in her, but she is not too sure. When Mike asks for dinner, she is hesitant. We see this when she says, 'I am a little busy with school and all.' Everyone is busy, and Mike knows that this is an excuse of not going out. There are many things that Mike can do now. 1. Mike can put pressure on her without any substance like, 'Come on. Let's just go out.' Or he can not even let her completely answer by saying, 'I'll meet you at Olive Garden at 7:00.' 2. Mike can be a coward and say, 'Ok. Well, if you decide to change your mind, give me a call.' 3. Or Mike can persuade Janet by appealing to her interests. The number 1 choice doesn't work because putting pressure on someone is not good. She might not come, or start with a bad impression. Number 2 choice will result in Janet never calling back. The answer Mike gave is a great answer. He is promising that she will have a good time, and also understanding her school interest and promising to talk about her school. From Janet's perspective, Mike has good manners not pressuring too much, and understanding her interest by talking about her schooling.Dating - On the Date
Listen to the Entire Lesson When you finally see Janet at the restaurant or another dating place, you should say something right when you see her. Here are a few examples "I'm glad you showed up." "You look great." "Hi Janet. It's good seeing you again." During the date, you have to make sure the person stays interested. This is primarily done by talking about subjects the other person wants to talk about. In this case, Janet is concentrating on school. Here are some things to say "What subject do you find difficult?" "What classes are giving you a hard time?" "Do you like multiple choice questions or short answer questions?" "Do you like writing essays?" "What subjects interest you the most?" After you find out more information on her interest, then you can say more things about it. "When I was in college, I had a hard time with my writing assignments. I guess my high school didn't prepare me enough. So I went to the writing center located next to the library, and they helped me tremendously." "I found psychology to be pretty easy, but I always made stupid mistakes with the multiple choice questions. So I got a study guide for it and it helped me to get the minor details out of the way." "I really like history too. I enjoy learning about what happened and how we got to the state we are in now." "You don't like calculus? I was a math major. If you would like, I can help you out with your homework. I'm sure after a couple of lessons, you will think it is easy." So helping out with homework is another way to get another date. Although it will be more geared towards school work, you can take the opportunity to impress the other person.Dating - Preparing Activity after Dinner
Listen to the Entire Lesson Sometimes a date will end right after dinner. Other times you can go to another place such as a bar, or go bowling, or see a movie. It is your responsibility to find out what the other person likes to do and then suggest it. If the date was strictly for dinner, then it will be difficult, but in this case, Mike suggested a dinner and a movie, or another thing. That means Janet should have left the night open. "Have you seen Master and Commander yet? I heard it was a good movie." "No, I haven't." "There is an 8:30 showing down the street. Would you like to go see it?" Mike made sure to look up movie times and locations before the movie. Then when he suggests a movie, he has all the information. "What do you like to do when you are not studying?" "I like to hang out with friends and drink a little and I also like to go bowling sometimes." "Do you want to go bowling after dinner? We can have a few drinks while we play. It will be fun." In this scenario, Mike is using both her interests here. In the States, they serve alcohol so drinking and bowling together is a great option.Dating - Saying Goodbye on Date
Listen to the Entire Lesson Finally, when the date is over, you can say a couple of things depending on how the date went. If it went bad, You can lie and say, "I had a good time. I'll call you sometime." Or you can not lie and say, "The dinner and movie was great. Have a good night." Mike is not lying. He is saying the dinner and movie was good but didn't say anything about the date. If you had a good time, say, "I had a great time tonight. Can I call you again?" "We should do this again." "I really enjoyed spending time with you." Common courtesy sentences, "Make sure to drive safely. If you have any problems, feel free to give me a call." "I hope you had a good time. Drive home safely and have a good night."Engagement
Listen to the Entire Lesson Engagement is the time period spent before getting married. In this lesson, we will learn about English when asking someone to marry and the terminologies when becoming engaged. When a friend has been together with a boyfriend or girlfriend a long time, they usually ask when they are going to get married, or when they are going to get engaged. "When are you going to get married?" "When are you going to tie the knot?" "When are you going to settle down?" "When are you going to propose to her?" "When are you going to ask her to marry you?" "When do you think he is going to propose?" After the big question is asked, then the two people are engaged. "We got engaged last week." "I got engaged about a month ago." "We're going to have a short engagement." "Our engagement is for about 6 months." "We had an engagement party at a restaurant with both families." "We really didn't have a formal engagement dinner." You can get creative in the ways to ask your significant other to marry you, but the most general way is to simply say, "Will you marry me?" These four words cannot be replaced really. Mostly, it is how you ask it and in what situation. When two people are engaged, then they are not boyfriend and girlfriend, instead, they refer to each other as fiancé. "This is my fiancée." "She is my fiancée." "He is my fiancé." "Where is your fiancé?" "I want to meet your fiancé."Engagement - Proposing
Listen to the Entire Lesson Other common type of questions regarding pre-marriage is how a person proposes. Here are some examples: "How are you going to propose to her?" "How do you think he will propose to you?" I'll list a few answers I heard from other people. "I'm going to take her to dinner and I'm going to put the ring on top of the dessert. So when the cake comes out, she will see the ring." "I'm going to take her to our favorite restaurant and ask her there." "I'm going all out. First, I'm going to send her to a massage. Then, I'm going to have her relax at a coffee shop where I'll send her some flowers. After that, I'm going to have her picked up in a limo to a restaurant where I'll be waiting in the entrance on my knees." "When my husband asked me to marry, he put a ring inside a fortune cookie with a message asking, will you marry me in the cookie." Some other types of questions that you might hear: "Are you nervous about proposing to her?" "Are you sure she is going to say yes?" "Are you sure about this?" "How long have you been engaged?" "What are you thinking?" "You're too young to get married." "What did you do for your engagement party?" "Did you guys have an engagement party?" A friend might ask you questions regarding your relationship when the marriage topic comes up. "How long have you been with her?" "What made you decide to get married?" "Are you sure she is the right one?" "When did you know he was the right one?" "Did you see a sign or how did you know?"Engagement - Best man and Maid of honor
Listen to the Entire Lesson Preparing for marriage is a time consuming thing with so much to do. I'll explain most of it in the next lesson, but I wanted to explain one difference in this lesson. In the western culture, they have friends standing next to the bride and groom during the wedding ceremony. At a minimum, it is one person. That person is called the best man. For the lady side, that person is called maid of honor. But if you have more than one, you usually have one best man, and multiple grooms men. For the ladies, they are called brides maid. Best man - Best friend or relative of groom usually holding the ring Grooms men - Other friends or siblings standing next to the best man Maid of honor - Best friend or relative of the bride usually holding the ring Brides maid - Other friends or relative standing next to the Maid of honor. The best man and maid of honor have responsibilities such as taking care of the bride and groom, planning for parties and taking care of the presents, and many other things. We'll discuss more about this in the next session. Let's move on to practicing the material in this lesson.Marriage - Getting a Church
Listen to the Entire Lesson In this lesson, we will cover the process of marriage and all the things you need to know how to say in English. In the previous session, we learned about the engagement and initial wedding procedures. Let's now look into more depth at the marriage process. After two people agree to marry, there are many things to plan. There are many different things you can do, and depending on your budget, you will have more or less. I will give an example of the marriages I have seen around me. The first thing you need to do after you set a date is find a church. In eastern cultures, marrying in a church is not as popular, but in America, a large percentage of marriages still take place in the church. You will need to call a church and ask if you can rent there place for a marriage. "Hello. I'm going to get married and I was wondering if you rent out your church for this purpose." If they say no, you can say thank you and good bye. If they say yes, then you can follow up with more questions. "I was looking to get married on June 15th. Will your church be available on that date?" "What Saturday do you have available in the month of June?" If timing is an issue, then you will need to tell them the time. "We would like to get married at 1:00pm. Is that ok?" "We would like to get married at 4:00pm. Does that time work for you?" "We are pretty flexible with the time so I will take whatever time is available on that date." After a date and time is confirmed, they might ask you to meet and get all the details from you.Wedding Process - Flowers
Listen to the Entire Lesson The next step is for the decoration and flowers. Friends might ask, "What kind of flowers are you going to have?" "What color flowers are you going to have?" You can respond by, "I'm thinking about white and yellow roses." "I'm not sure yet, but I'm leaning towards lavender and white roses." You will need to call up a flower shop and ask for flowers to be arranged. "I'm going to get married next June and I would like an estimate for flowers." Usually it all depends on your price range so they might ask you how much and how big the wedding will be. "How many people are you expecting and what is your budget for flowers?" "I am expecting about 150 people and I wanted to stay under one thousand dollars for flowers." "What types of flowers did you have in mind?" "I want purple and white roses." "I believe I can provide what you are looking for. I can prepare the flowers for the walkway, for the altar, the flower you hold, flowers for the brides maid, and overall decoration. Because of your flower selection, it will cost twelve hundred dollars."Wedding Process - Photographer, Dress and Tux
Listen to the Entire Lesson Another thing you will have to prepare is the photographer. "How much do you charge for wedding pictures?" "What is included in your wedding package?" "How many years of experience do you have?" "How many weddings have you worked on?" "Do you have samples of wedding pictures you took that I can look at?" "Do you use both color and black and white film?" "Do you provide video service in your wedding package?" You also need to prepare for the dress for yourself and the dresses for your maid of honor and brides maid. Usually this is done talking with friends and family. "What color do you think we should get for the brides maid dresses?" "What color dress do you think will go well with purple and white roses?" Candle lighters are another person in the wedding party. You might need to get a dress for that person as well. "Should we have the same dress for the candle lighter or a different dress?" The men need to get a tuxedo. Usually you find a tux shop and they take care of the rest. Only instructions you need to give to the best man and grooms men is the location of the place. "Make sure you go into the Black Tie tuxedo shop next week and get your size measured." "Go to the tux shop and pick up your tuxedo on the 14th." I don't know the rule for who pays for the tux or the dress. I've seen it both ways. In some weddings, the people wearing the dress or tux pays for it, and in other weddings, I've seen the wedding couple pay for everything.Wedding Process - Gifts and Reception
Listen to the Entire Lesson In some cultures, wedding present is usually given in the form of money. In America, money is rarely given among friends. Family might provide financial support, but for presents, it is always a gift bought at a store. In order to prevent duplicate gifts or gifts that you don't want, many stores such as The Bon, provide a wedding registry. You go and pick all the things you want and they enter it into a computer. You tell everyone in the invitation you sent out that the gift registry is at The Bon. They will go to The Bon and print out a list of what you have selected. If someone bought it already, then that item will not show up. This is a way to get what you need and makes it easier for the people buying you gifts. In the store, you simply tell the person: "I'm going to get married in June and I would like my registry here." If you are a person buying a present, then you can ask, "My friend is getting married and they registered here. Where can I get a list of presents they selected?" After the church is selected, the flowers have been ordered, and the photographer is reserved, then you have to practice. The wedding party usually meets at the church a day or two before the wedding and rehearses the coming day's event. After the rehearsal, a rehearsal dinner should be provided. Don't forget about the reception. You have to plan for a reception after the wedding. Usually it is a meal at a different location or at the church. Again, this is all dependent on how much you can afford. An open bar is also an option that many people like. An open bar is a bar that people can order drinks for free. Now that we looked through the process of a wedding, let's work on a few sentences friends say to each other before and during the busy wedding process. "Planning for a wedding is so time consuming. I don't know if I can finish everything on time." "I'm getting so stressed out. It feels like there are a hundred different things to do." "I think I'm almost done with my wedding plans. Although I'm relieved, I now feel anxious about the wedding." "Did you help your fiancé plan for the wedding?" "You made her do all the work?" "My boyfriend was so helpful. He literally did most of the planning." "Are you going to have the reception at the church or did you reserve another place?" "How much did your wedding cost?" "How much was the reception?" A wedding is much larger and requires much more planning than I described here. I primarily covered the larger items in a broad way. This is to give you an idea and a starting point. If you have additional questions or specific requests, feel free to ask.Honeymoon
Listen to the Entire Lesson Honeymoon is a small vacation two married people go to right after the wedding. It doesn't have to be right after the wedding though. I know some people who hold off the honeymoon until the summer, or if they are in school, until school is complete. Discussing with your partner where to go for the honeymoon "Where should we go for our honeymoon?" "Where do you want to go for our honeymoon?" "Did you have a place in mind for our honeymoon?" "How many days should we go for our honeymoon?" "Do you think a week is good enough for our honeymoon?" "How much should we plan on using for our honeymoon?" Answering "I want to go somewhere to relax." "I was thinking about Hawaii or the Bahamas. What do you think?" "I wouldn't mind going to Europe." "What do you think about New York? I have never been there and there is a lot to do." "I think Australia would be great." "I'm pretty much open to anything. Where did you have in mind?" "I can only take 5 more days off from work." "I can only go for a week." "The longer the better. I wouldn't mind going for 10 days." "How about 2 weeks." "Let's go for 6 nights and 7 days." "How about 3 nights and 4 days." "I think we will need about two thousand dollars for our honeymoon." "Depending on what we are going to do, but we will need a minimum of three thousand dollars." "I think we need about five thousand dollars for our honeymoon." "We only have two thousand dollars so we have to go somewhere inexpensive."Honeymoon - Planning
Listen to the Entire Lesson Planning on what to do "Let's plan on what we are going to do when we get there." "What should we do everyday?" "We should make a daily plan so we have things to do everyday." "Why don't you make a list of things you want to do and I'll do the same. We'll try to do all of them while we are there." "I'm pretty much open to anything, but I want to at least go jet skiing, scuba diving, and golfing." "I don't care if we do anything. I just want to relax and have good dinners with you." "Let's just lock ourselves in the room for 5 days." "I want to go to some of the local restaurants." "I want to try horseback riding while we are there. I wouldn't mind taking a couple of surfing lessons also." "I want to take a lot of pictures while we are there. So don't forget to bring the camera." To learn about booking a flight and making hotel reservations, please refer to the traveler's guide. I cover everything you need to know about getting airline tickets and hotel rooms.Honeymoon - Conversation before Honeymoon
Listen to the Entire Lesson These sentences are used when talking to a friend before the honeymoon "So where are you going for your honeymoon?" "How long is your honeymoon going to be?" "What are you guys going to do there?" "When are you leaving for your honeymoon?" "How are you guys going to the airport?" "Do you have everything planned out already?" Answers "We decided to go to Hawaii." "We're going to the Greek Islands." "We are going to be there for a week." "We're going for 10 days." "Mostly to relax. The wedding took a lot out of me so I just want to vege out." 'Vege out' means to be a vegetable. That means not using the head at all. When you say this, you are saying you don't want to do anything except relax. Another common way to use this is to say, "I'm vege-ing out in front of the TV." That means you are watching TV not thinking about anything. "We're going the day after the wedding." "We're leaving right after the wedding." "We're going to the airport after the reception." "We're not going on our honeymoon until August. My husband needs to finish a project before taking an extended time off." "We're going to go in September because I need to finish summer school first." "My parents are going to take us to the airport." "John agreed to drive us to the airport." "I think we have everything planned out. I'm not missing anything am I?" "We didn't do much planning. I just got the plane tickets and booked a room at the hotel. Besides that, we are just going to wing it." 'Wing it' means to play it by ear. Or in other words, do things without planning or do things as they come along.Honeymoon - Conversation after Honeymoon
Listen to the Entire Lesson Talking to a friend after the honeymoon "Did you have a good time on your honeymoon?" "How was your honeymoon? Tell me all about it." "How was Hawaii? Do you think I should go there for my honeymoon?" "Did you have enough time to do everything you wanted?" "What was the best thing about your honeymoon?" "What terrible timing. I got my period right when we arrived. I had a stomach ache for the first two days." "Oh man. My wife was sick for the first couple of days. We just stayed in the room watching TV." "My honeymoon was great. I had such a good time. The weather was perfect and there was so much to do." "It was perfect. I went swimming, fishing, played some beach volleyball, and we went hiking." "Hawaii was an awesome place for a honeymoon. We went to 3 different islands and they were all great." "I would recommend Hawaii as a honeymoon spot to anyone." "We only went for 4 days so we couldn't do everything we wanted. We agreed to go back after a couple of years. Kind of like a second honeymoon." "The best night I had was walking down the beach without anyone around. The sun was just setting and it was a beautiful romantic moment."Married Life
Listen to the Entire Lesson When we talk about married life, we talk about the good and the bad. In this lesson, I will teach you the English you need to know to communicate how you feel about your married life. If you are not married, then at least you can learn this lesson to speak about your opinions on your friends married life. We will not go into detail about conversation between married couple. Mostly, couples talk about the same thing in a routine. But when you talk to friends, it's very different. Girl talking to friends "How is married life?" "How is your husband doing?" "What do you guys do for fun?" Some responses I've heard "I love my married life. My husband and I get a long so well." "He is so helpful. He does the dishes for me and helps me around the house a lot." "It was fun in the beginning, but now we are in a regular routine." "Everything is great, but he's a little lazy. One time he was watching TV and he called me when I was in the kitchen and asked me to get the remote control for him that was 6 feet away." "All he does is watch TV. I don't understand how a person can watch so much television." "Since we're both working, we don't have much time for each other. But we get to spend the weekend together and that is always good." "Since I'm working also, we go out to eat a lot because I don't have time to cook." "My husband is working at a consulting firm. He is always at work. I get bored a lot so I'm trying to find some hobbies." "My husband works at Microsoft. He gets home late and when he comes home, he's too tired to do anything. I'm thinking about starting a career because I have so much extra time." "My husband is in school right now. He's finishing his PHD."Married Life - Talking to Friends
Listen to the Entire Lesson Guys talking to friends "So who's the man of the house?" "How are you enjoying married life?" "Why don't you ever come out any more?" "What advice would you give to someone who is getting married?" Answers "There are a lot of great things I am enjoying about my married life. She does the cooking, the laundry, and the cleaning. What else can I ask for?" "I wish she would cook more often. I'm sick of eating out so much." "She's always busy with work. It's not a bad thing. But sometimes I get bored." "I get a lot of free time because my wife is working." "Since we don't have kids, and my wife is staying at home, she always complains about being bored." "The only problem is that I can't go out that often anymore." "I miss hanging out with the guys." "She doesn't let me in the kitchen. She does all the cooking and the dishes. She's so good to me." "It took some time to adjust in the beginning, but after getting used to it, I'm really enjoying my marriage." Where ever there is a marriage, the topic of kids always comes up. "When are you going to have kids?" "Are you guys planning on having a kid anytime soon?" "Aren't your parents giving you any pressure to have kids?" "Do you want a boy or a girl?" "What month do you want to have a baby?" "We don't plan on having kids for a couple of years." "We'll probably have a kid next spring." "I want to get financially stable before having a kid." "My parents are always asking when we are going to have a kid." "My parents really want for us to get pregnant." "I don't know if I want a baby yet." "We got a honeymoon baby." "My wife is already pregnant." "We're going to have our first child in September."Married Life - Talking about a Friend
Listen to the Entire Lesson Talking about a friends marriage There are some terminologies used when a man is controlled by his wife. For example, if a friend cannot come out because the wife said no, or if he needs to get permission for everything, then these words apply to him. Attached to a ball and chain - Ball and Chain refers to the wife. The ball and chain is the old type of device used to lock somebody up. You put a chain around the leg that has a large heavy metal ball attached to it so they cannot move. Here are some example sentences: "Ever since he got married, he has been imprisoned in his house. He never comes out anymore." "Calling the ball and chain already? You've only been out for a couple of hours." "You got to get that ball and chain off your leg man." "It's obvious who the man of their house is."Married Life - Cheating
Listen to the Entire Lesson Affair and cheating In a marriage, having an affair and cheating on one another is a topic we'll discuss. Hopefully in your marriage you won't need to discuss this. But use this as a reference for when you see it on TV or something. Accusing "Where were you last night?" "Why does your shirt smell like perfume?" "Who is the person that keeps calling you at night?" "You've been acting strange lately? Are you having an affair?" "Are you seeing someone?" "Are you cheating on me?" "Who was the girl I saw you with at Starbucks?" "How long have you been seeing her?" "How long have you been sleeping with her?" "I can't believe you would do this to me!" "I don't understand why you would throw away our marriage like that." "Why did you do it?" "What did I do to deserve this?" Talking about a married couple with cheating problems "I think they are going to get divorced. Josh caught his wife cheating with another guy from work." "He should have been more careful." "I think she is having an affair with her boss. Her husband has no idea what is going on." "It's so obvious that she's sleeping with the boss. They go out together so often." "If she wasn't sleeping with him, I think she would get fired. She is incompetent at what she does." "You know that girl from the strip club? Zack is sleeping with her and his wife doesn't even have a clue."Health - Dating - Marriage Review
Listen to the Entire Lesson Up until now, we have covered quite a bit. If you have made it this far, I want to congratulate you for your persistence. There are no cutting corners in learning English so you should take it step by step and learn all the material I am presenting. So let's move forward and review what we have learned so far.Sports in General
Listen to the Entire Lesson Sports is a common topic mostly among the guys. In America, the three biggest sports are baseball, basketball, and American football. Due to the popularity of these sports, I will have individual lessons for them, but I will not have individual lessons for other sports such as soccer, volleyball, etc. For this lesson however, I will briefly talk about most sports and the most common language used among each one. First, let's practice general sports sentences: "What do you like to do in your free time?" "What are your hobbies?" "What sports do you like to play?" "I like to play sports. It's good for my health and I think it's very fun." "I like competitive sports because winning feels good." "I like to play tennis and I like to swim." "Jeff is pretty athletic so he picks up on sports real quick." "If you need a girl to play, you should get Jessica. She's very athletic." In English, you can mostly use the word play for a sport, but there are some sports where play doesn't work. Here are some examples: "I like to play basketball." "Let's go play basketball." "Do you like to play basketball?" This would also work for football, baseball, tennis, volleyball, soccer, and softball. However, sports such as swimming, bowling, and golf do not use the word play. Here is how you would say it. "I like to swim." "I like swimming." "Let's go swimming." "Do you like swimming?" As you may have noticed, each of the sports that do not use play is the ones with an 'ing' at the end. So if the sport is primarily used with an 'ing' at the end, then do not use play with that sport name.Sports in General - Volleyball
Listen to the Entire Lesson There are many different types of sports but I will primarily talk about the following in this lesson: Volleyball Soccer Swimming Softball Tennis Volleyball "I play volleyball on our high school team." "I play volleyball for our university." "I play recreational volleyball." "I play in a volleyball league run by the city." "What position do you play?" "I'm a setter for our team." "I'm the outside hitter." "I'm a back row specialist." "I'm good at digging balls, so I play in the back." "I'm the tallest in our team so I'm the middle blocker." "Our team plays a two six rotation." Two six rotation is a terminology used in volleyball where there are two setters. They take turns and the person who is in the back is the setter, so they should be opposite of each other in the lineup. "I like to play beach volleyball. There is so much more action because it is only two of us." "Beach volleyball is the best. It is so fun." "He hit the net." "He totally went fishing." This is a slang term to say that a person hit the net. "The ball was out." "I can't believe the line judge didn't see that. He must be blind." "That was a double hit. The ball is spinning like mad." "He used his palm to lift the ball and he wasn't called for it." "I like to watch volleyball on TV."Sports in General - Soccer
Listen to the Entire Lesson Soccer "Soccer is my favorite sport." "I love soccer." "I play soccer whenever I can." "I used to play a lot of soccer when I was in school." "I'm usually the forward on our team." "I play midfielder on our team." "I'm the fullback." "My favorite position is the midfielder." "I like to be the goalie." "I've been a goalie ever since I was in Junior high." "I am always the goal keeper." "He was off sides, but the officials didn't see it. That's how he got the goal." "He's a very rowdy player. He gets a yellow card each game. I can't believe he hasn't been given a red card yet." "He clipped him from behind. Why didn't he get a red card? The other guy could have broken his ankle with that tackle." "I like to play soccer because of all the running. It keeps me in shape and I have fun while playing." "I don't know why soccer is not so popular in America. Soccer is a very popular sport in most other countries." "Watching the world cup is so fun."Sports in General - Swimming
Listen to the Entire Lesson Swimming "I'm on the swimming team." "I got a scholarship for swimming." "I made the varsity swimming team." "I love swimming." "What style of swimming do you specialize in?" "I like breaststroke the most." "I like freestyle swimming, but I'm better at the butterfly." "I'm pretty quick at backstroke." "I like the competitive aspect of swimming. Sometimes it's hard to tell who is ahead of you or behind you, but right when you touch that wall and see that nobody else is there is a great feeling." "I've been swimming ever since I was 6 years old." "I swim 4 times a week." "I try to swim everyday." "I believe swimming is very healthy, especially for the joints." "I'm not a good swimmer. The only style I know is the dog paddle." "I can't hold my breath long enough to be an effective swimmer." "I can hold my breath for a minute and a half."Sports in General - Softball
Listen to the Entire Lesson Softball "I play on a men's softball league. It's underhand pitch and mostly just to have fun." "Softball is similar to baseball, except you have 4 outfielders instead of 3." "Softball is fun if you are not good at hitting fast pitches." "I'm the shortstop on our team." "I play the outfield." "I'm the pitcher." "I saw a friend hit two grand slams in one game." "His pitches have way too big of an arch." "He needs to get his pitches above 6 feet from the ground." "The ball hit the plate and the umpire called it a strike." "I play on a co-ed softball team. We have 5 girls and 5 guys." "When we play co-ed softball, the girls hit with smaller balls than the guys." "It takes a while to get used to throwing two sizes of balls in co-ed softball."Sports in General - Tennis
Listen to the Entire Lesson Tennis "Tennis is my favorite sport." "I play tennis just for fun." "I started playing tennis when I was in high school." "I made the varsity team in high school when I have been only playing for 3 months." "I used to have a girlfriend who left me to be with a tennis coach." "I can't hit a back hand." "I have a two handed back hand." "One handed back hands are more effective for attacks." "You can generate more power by using one hand for your backhand." "How do you topspin a ball?" "Every time I try to lob a ball, it always goes out." "My serves need a lot of help." "My second serve is too easy to hit." "I can't believe how fast professional tennis players serve." "A guy once died from getting hit with a tennis ball in the crotch at a professional tournament. He was an old guy and got a stroke from the shock or pain." "My favorite tennis player is Agassi." "Martina Hingis is the cutest tennis player." "I hate playing against a serve and volley type of player." "I'm a baseline player."Baseball
Listen to the Entire Lesson Baseball is one the biggest sports in America. It's also popular in many other countries as well. Because of the large popularity, I will dedicate one lesson on baseball so you can be equipped to talk to English speaking people about this sport. Playing baseball "I like to play baseball. It is my favorite sport." "I used to play baseball when I was younger." "Baseball is a great sport." "What position do you play?" "I play second base." "I play shortstop." "I play center field." "I'm the catcher." "I'm a pitcher." "What kinds of pitches can you throw?" "I have a fastball and a curveball." "I have a pretty good slider." "My best pitch is a forkball." "I always wanted to learn how to throw a curveball." "My curveball doesn't curve at all." "I love turning double plays." "I'm a good hitter." "My batting average is above 300." "I can hit a homerun every now and then." "I'm a fast runner so I can steal a lot of bases."Baseball - Topics
Listen to the Entire Lesson Topics in baseball "I can't believe how much players make." "I don't like Alex Rodriguez because he followed money instead of going to a good team." "The biggest contract ever was signed by Alex Rodriguez. It was a 10 year deal for two hundred and fifty million dollars." "Most good players usually make above five million dollars a year." "Baseball doesn't have a salary cap. That's why the Yankees are so powerful. They have the money to buy all the good players." "I think baseball would be more fair if there was a salary cap." Although grammatically, fairer is more correct than more fair, it is common to use it this way when speaking. It is based on sound and flow of sentence. Using more in front of fair is emphasizing more. "The difference between National league and American league is that the pitcher doesn't bat in American League. They have a designated hitter that bats for the pitcher." "It's good that Byung Hyun Kim went to the American league. He wasn't a good batter." "Byung Hyun Kim was at a Seattle night club the other weekend."Baseball - Baseball Cards
Listen to the Entire Lesson Collecting baseball cards In America, baseball cards have monetary value depending on how good the player is. So there are some serious baseball card collectors who have thousands of baseball cards. But for the average person, having a couple of baseball cards of your favorite player is good enough. If you want to find a baseball card for a specific player, you can find them at a baseball card store. "Do you have any Chan Ho Park cards?" "I'm looking for Byung Hyun Kim's rookie card." "How much is this card worth?" "What is the value of this card?" "Do you have a case I can store this card in?"Baseball - Equipment
Listen to the Entire Lesson Buying baseball equipment Many stores carry baseball equipment. You can find them at large stores like Fred Myers, or a sporting goods store. Cleats - Shoes with large bumps on the bottom to give you better traction in dirt or grass. Baseball - The ball itself. Baseball mitt - The glove worn when playing defense to catch balls. Batting glove - A glove worn while batting. Bats - Aluminum or wood item used to hit the baseball. Pine tar - Sticky material used on a wooden bat so it doesn't slip. Stirrups - A type of sock worn on top of socks that are usually worn as a decoration. It will show colored lines about 3 centimeters thick on each side of the leg. "Where is the baseball section?" "Where can I find baseball bats?" "Where are the baseball mitts?" "Do you sell pine tar for bats?" "Do you have children mitts?" "Where can I find wooden bats?" "Do you have soft baseballs?"Baseball - Amateur League
Listen to the Entire Lesson Many people like to play baseball even after growing up. But they are not good enough to play in a professional league, so they have amateur leagues for fun. Most major cities will have recreational league and if you are looking for one, you will need to call up the city. Do a search in the Internet for Parks and Community Services for your city name, or Parks and Recreation. Here is an example on a small city of Lynnwood. In the search engine, I type, 'Lynnwood Parks and Recreation'. You should see some links and they should have phone numbers. Call that number and ask how you can join a baseball team. "Hi, I wanted to join an adult baseball league. Do you have these events?" "When are signups?" "What process do I need to take to join a team?" "When does the season start?" "How much does it cost?" "What days and times do teams usually play?" For most adults, we like to watch baseball, so you might not have to go through the above process. However, when you get a kid, your son might want to play. "I'm looking for a baseball league for my 10 year old son. Where can I find information on little league?" "Where can I sign up my 8 year old son to play baseball?" Most of the time, your son might have friends and they will sign up with your permission. But if you have to find it, you can use the sentences we have learned right above to find a team for your son.Basketball
Listen to the Entire Lesson Basketball is a great sport to play even after growing up. This is because you don't need so many people to play. Even 4 people is enough to play 2 on 2. We'll cover both playing and watching basketball in this session. Here are basic ways to say you want to play basketball. "I want to play basketball. We should round up the guys and play." "We haven't played basketball in a long time. Let's get something going." "When are you guys going to play basketball again?" "Anybody up for a game of basketball?" "Let's go down the street and play some basketball." "I've been itching to play basketball for a while." Shooting hoops is a terminology a lot of people use when referring to basketball. "Let's go shoot some hoops." "Do you wanna go shoot some hoops?" "I'm going to shoot some hoops with the guys. You wanna come?" Common expressions about basketball. "Basketball is my favorite sport." "I like to play basketball." "I get a good workout playing basketball." "At the gym, I play basketball with a lot of guys." "I'm out of shape to play basketball." "Running up and down the court is too tiring for me." "I need to get in shape to play basketball." "I'm going to play basketball this weekend." "I have a 36 inch vertical." "Where do you guys go to play basketball?" "Are there any basketball courts around here?"Basketball - Terminologies
Listen to the Entire Lesson Dribbling - Bouncing the ball up and down. Double dribble - When you dribble the ball. Stop dribbling, and then start dribbling again. This is illegal. Traveling - Walking without dribbling the basketball. This is also illegal. Foul (shooting) - A person hitting the body or the arm of the shooter while that person is shooting. Free throw - Taking a free throw shot for 1 point at the line. Technical foul - A bad foul such as arguing with the referee or hitting someone in a bad way. Results in two free throws and regaining possession. Possession - The team with the ball has possession. Slam dunk - Putting the basketball in the hoop without shooting. Lay up - Shooting the basketball right below the hoop 3 pointer - Shooting outside the far line around the basketball court that counts as 3 points instead of 2. Shot clock violation - Failing to hit the rim before the 24 second counter expires. 3 in the key - When an offensive player stands in the area below the basket for more than 3 seconds. This is a foul. Screen - Using a body to block another player Vertical - The height a person can jump in inches. Air ball - Shooting the basketball and missing the backboard and the rim completely. In baseball, umpires are the people calling the strikes and balls and fouls, etc. In basketball, the judges are called referees.Basketball - Talking with Friends
Listen to the Entire Lesson Talking about basketball with friends "I have a friend who can dunk." "My friend is six five. I saw him dunk with two hands without running." "Peter's pretty good. I was playing with him the other day and he worked us all." "John's a great shooter. Anything within fifteen feet is just about guaranteed." "My friend Jason is a great 3 point shooter." "I can't believe how bad Sean is. Does he know he sucks, or is he clueless?" "Don't bring out Doug again. He's a ball hog and can't shoot worth crap." "He's not a bad player, but a little slow."Basketball - Watching Basketball
Listen to the Entire Lesson "Do you watch the NBA?" "Do you keep up with basketball on TV?" "Do you like to watch basketball?" "Which team do you like the most?" "When does basketball season start?" "Who's your favorite player?" "Who do you think is the greatest basketball player ever?" "Do you think Karl Malone is any good?" "I like watching the Lakers play." "I'm a Pistons fan." "I try to watch every Rockets game." "I don't watch much basketball." "I only watch the playoffs." "I never got into basketball." "Playing basketball is fun, but it's boring watching other people play." "I don't watch the Bulls on TV much, but I keep up with them through the newspaper." "I only watch the highlights on the sports channel."Basketball - Talking about Kids
Listen to the Entire Lesson "My daughter made her junior high basketball team." "My son is playing for his high school team." "I have to drive my son to basketball practice every Tuesdays and Thursdays." "I'm going to watch my daughter's basketball game tomorrow night." "Your daughter is pretty athletic. She plays both soccer and basketball." "Johnny started dribbling the ball since he was 3 years old." "Does your son play any other sport besides basketball?" "Your kid is quite a basketball player."Football
Listen to the Entire Lesson Football is referred to as soccer in most countries, but in America, football is different than soccer. That is why I sometimes refer to football as American football. American football is not popular worldwide yet, but it's very popular in America. The Superbowl is the most watched sports event. To buy commercial time during the Superbowl is the most expensive. In this lesson, I'll give you some pointers on having a football conversation, and I will also explain some rules. Let's start with the rules first because not everyone will know them. I will not be too specific because this isn't a lesson on football rules. Rather, I will give a brief description so you have an understanding of the game before we move on to the conversation aspect. There are eleven players on the field for each side. That means you need 22 people to play an official football game. The point of the game is to reach the other side, which is called the end zone, with the ball. A player can run with the ball, or they can throw the ball to another person. Touchdown is worth 6 points. If you are close enough but not quite in the end zone, you can kick the ball. That is called a field goal. Field goals are worth 3 points. After you make a touchdown, you can either kick a ball, similar to a field goal for 1 point or you can run or pass it for 2 points. This is called a two point conversion. Quarterback always starts with the ball. He either passes it to a wide receiver, hands off to a running back, or runs the ball himself. Offense positions: Center - The person hiking the ball to the quarterback each play. Quarterback - The main person starting with the ball each play. Either passes, hands off, or runs. Running back - The person who runs with the ball. Running backs can catch passes as well. Wide Receivers - The people who run out and catch balls from the quarterback. Tight End - Similar to a wide receiver but blocks a lot as well. Full back - Like a running back who runs with the ball, but mostly blocks for the main running back. Offensive Guard - blocks for the quarterback positioned right next to the Center on each side Offensive Tackle - same as the guard and standing right next to the guard Defense positions: Nose Tackle - Person in the middle facing the center Defensive Guard and Tackle - Opposite the offensive guard and tackle Linebacker - People right behind the front line. Cornerbacks - People on the sides of linebackers. Primarily covers the wide receivers and outside running plays. Safety - People behind the cornerbacks who covers wide receiver and passing plays The object for the offense is to get in the end zone. The goal of the defense is to prevent the offense from getting in the end zone. A defensive person is always trying to tackle the person who has the ball. If the person goes down to the ground with the ball, then that play is over. There are four downs. After four downs, your team no longer has possession of the ball. If you gain 10 yards before the four downs are used, then you start with four downs again. Usually on first down, they call it first and ten. That means it is the first down, and I need ten yards to regain first down. If on the first play I only get one yard, then the next down is called second and nine. It is the second play and I need 9 yards more. On the second down, I get 5 yards, then it is third and 4. And on third down if I get 5 more yards, I have succeeded in getting 10 yards, and it is first and 10 once again. You continue to do this until you either get a touch down or get a field goal or fail to reach 10 yards in four plays. On the fourth down, your team can punt the ball. Punting the ball is used because you do not think you can get first down and punting the ball would move the other team further away from their end zone, making it harder for them. To punt the ball, a punter grabs the football and kicks it as high and as far as possible. There are many other rules, but I think this much explanation will be sufficient to understand a little about American football. Let's move on to speaking about this topic now.Football - General Statements
Listen to the Entire Lesson "Do you like football?" "What do you think about football?" "Do you keep up with the NFL?" "Do you keep up with football?" "Who is your favorite team?" "Did you play football when you were young?" "Which player do you like the most?" "Who is your favorite player?" "Football is a brutal sport. It seems so dangerous." "Most of the people in football are so big." "There are too many injuries in football." "Football is so fun to watch." "I just started watching football on TV. I kind of get it, but I'm still learning all the rules." "In my country we don't have football so I really don't know how to play." "We don't have football in my country so I never learned the game." "I only watch the Superbowl." "I'm from Seattle, and because the Seahawks suck so bad, I don't really keep up with them." "I love the Miami Dolphins." "Joe Montana was my favorite player. I don't have a current one right now." "My favorite player is Priest Holmes. He is such a great running back."Football - Topics
Listen to the Entire Lesson Talking about people you see "I saw a guy in a restaurant. He was huge man. Towering over everyone. I got the nerve to ask him if he played football, and he ended up being a professional football player for the Seahawks." "I saw a professional football player last week at a night club. All the girls were around him." "College football is very popular in America. It's almost as popular as the NFL." "My brother had class with a football player in college named Cortez Kennedy. He's now playing for the Raiders." "Even though a lot of football players are huge, most of them are really nice." Steroids "I heard that about ninety percent of football players have used steroids before." "Steroids is a big problem in the NFL." "I think the problem with the NFL is the steroid abuse." "I heard people say that you have to use steroids to be competitive. That's primarily because everyone else is using it, so if you don't, then it's your disadvantage."Golf - Terminologies
Listen to the Entire Lesson Golf is a sport that is increasing in popularity. This is more true for Asian countries with many great golfers coming from Korea, Japan, and China. Golf is also great because it is a sport for all ages and both genders. In this lesson, we will cover all the things you need to know to have a great conversation about golf. Before we start, let's cover some terminologies and equipment Iron set - A typical set of irons consist of a pitching wedge and 3 through 9 irons 5 wood - Fairway wood designed to hit the ball a little farther than the 3 iron 3 wood - Fairway wood designed to hit the ball a little farther than the 5 wood Driver - The club used to hit the ball the farthest off the Tee Putter - The club used to putt the ball in the cup Tee box - The place where you hit your first shot Fairway - The short grass area in the middle Rough - Taller grass next to the fairway that is not in the middle Green - The area where the hole is and where you putt the ball. Par 3 - Short holes where it should take 3 shots to get in the cup Par 4 - Middle length holes where it should take 4 shots Par 5 - Long holes where it should take 5 shots Hole in one - When the ball goes in the cup on the first hit. Usually only on par 3's. Double Eagle - Ball goes in the cup after hitting the ball twice on a par 5. 3 under par Eagle - Ball goes in the cup after hitting the ball 3 times on a par 5 or 2 times on a par 4. 2 under par Birdie - Reaching the hole at one under par. So on a par 3, you reached the cup in 2, par 4, you reached in 3, and par 5, you reached in 4. Par - When you put the ball in the cup in the number specified by the par. Par 3, in three, par 4 in four shots, and par 5 in five shots Bogey - Using one extra shot to reach the cup. For example, on a par 4, you used 5 shots to get in the cup. Double bogey - 2 over par Triple bogey - 3 over par Quadruple bogey - 4 over par Etc.Golf - Talking on the Course
Listen to the Entire Lesson On the course, here are some common sentences you can use when playing with other people. "Do you play this course often?" "Have you been here before?" "Great shot." "Great putt." "That was a nice shot." "You're doing great." "The ball hooked to the left." "Your ball sliced to the right." "I think your ball is out of bounds." "Your ball is behind that big tree." "Your ball went towards the bushes." "I thought your ball went in the water." "You're about 160 yards away." "There is a dog leg left on the next hole." "I have a terrible lie." "I'm going to take a mulligan." "I'm going to hit again." "I'm going to play a provisional." "I can't find my ball so I am going to drop one." "I'm just going to drop." "I think the ball is going to break to the left." "It's an uphill putt." "I see a left break." "I don't see a break at all." "I'm not good at reading greens." "Do you know how far I am away?" "Did you see where my ball went?" "What color is the pin?" "What is the distance of this hole?" "Is this a par 5?"Golf - Talking to Friends
Listen to the Entire Lesson Talking with friends about golf "Where do you usually play?" "How much are the green fees?" "How much does it cost over there?" "What do you usually shoot?" "Do you have a handicap?" "What is your handicap?" "What's your average score?" "How did you play today?" "How was your round last Saturday?" "Did you play well on Sunday?" "What was your score yesterday?" "What did you shoot last time you were out?" "How far do you drive the ball?" "How far does your driver go?" "What club do you use to hit 150 yards?" "I usually play at Walter Hall." "I play all over, but mostly at Jackson Park Golf Course." "The green fees at Jefferson is twenty eight dollars." "It costs 35 dollars to play." "I'm a bogey player." "I'm not that good. I'm usually in the mid nineties." "I suck man. I'm still over a hundred." "I don't have a handicap, but I usually shoot in the low nineties." "My handicap is 17 right now." "My handicap is 14." "I'm a 5 handicap." "I shot a 95 yesterday." "I was 20 over on Saturday." "I did terrible on Sunday. I shot a hundred." "I was doing so good in the beginning, but on the back nine, I got three double bogeys." "I need to work on my putting. It sucks right now." "I need to practice my chip shots more." "I can't hit with my driver whatsoever." "I can hit my short irons pretty good, but I have a lot of problems with my 3 and 4 irons." "I hate my clubs. They are so old." "You need to buy some new clubs man." "Pro Golf Discount is having a sale right now." "I have a big problem slicing the ball." "I can't get rid of my hook." "He always slices the ball, so he aims left all the time." "He plays his slice." "He does a good job playing his hook." "Do you want to go golfing this weekend?" "When do you want to go out?" "When do you want to play?" "I'm going to play golf this Tuesday. Can you make it?" "We have a spot open. Do you want to play?" "You would get better if you go to the driving range once in a while." "You need to fix that swing of yours." "You need to go to the driving range." "If you want to improve, you should take some lessons. It really helps."Poker - Terminologies
Listen to the Entire Lesson Poker is a fun activity among your friends. Poker is also something a person can do in a casino without friends. I will cover all the things you need to say to be effective with your English at the poker table. There are many different poker games. I will not cover the different types of poker games, but feel free to learn about them through poker books or other poker web sites. For this lesson, I will use Texas Hold 'em as the example game because of its popularity. First, let's look at some terminologies: No Pair - A hand without anything. One Pair - Having two of the same card Two Pair - Having two sets of pair Three of a kind - Having three of the same card Straight - Having five number or face cards in a row Flush - Having all 5 cards with the same suit Full house (another name is 'boat') - Three of a kind and a pair together Four of a kind - Four of the same card Straight flush - Five number or face cards in a row all in the same suit Royal flush - 10, Jack, Queen, King, and Ace all in the same suit Wheel - A straight consisting of Ace, 2, 3, 4, and 5 Betting Check - When it is your turn and you don't want to bet anything Call - When someone in front of you bets and you want to match to stay in the game. Other terminology for call is 'see.' Fold - Dying or forfeiting your hand because you don't want to pay anymore. Other terminologies for this are, mucking your hand, dying, and out. "I fold." "He mucked his hand." "I'm out." Raise - When someone in front of you bets and you want to put in more money. "I see (call) your ten, and I raise you another ten."Poker - Texas Hold 'em Instructions
Listen to the Entire Lesson Texas Hold 'em is the most popular poker game in America. Here is a brief explanation on how to play Texas Hold 'em. 1. Everyone is given two cards 2. Betting takes place 3. Dealer burns (throws away) a card and then places three cards in the middle. Everyone can use the cards in the middle. 4. Betting takes place 5. Dealer burns another card and shows one more card 6. Betting takes place 7. Dealer burns another card and shows one last card 8. Final betting and then everyone shows their hand. You have 2 cards in your hand and a total of 5 cards in the middle. Out of the seven cards, you can use any 5 cards to make your poker hand. In step 3 above, the first three cards that are turned over is called the 'flop.' In step 5, the single card that is shown is called the 'turn.' In step 7, the final card that is shown is called the 'river.' This is all the explanation I will give. Don't rely on this to learn the game. I am only telling you this information so you can understand the lesson.Poker - Talking with Friends
Listen to the Entire Lesson Talking with friends "Let's play poker." "When do you guys want to play poker?" "I'm going to have people over at my place to play poker. Do you want to come?" "We're playing poker at Tim's place tonight." "Are you any good at poker?" "Have you played poker before?" "Do you know how to play poker?" "It's boring when people play so conservatively." "It takes too much time to play if people keep folding like this." Talking about poker "I had three Kings on the flop but I couldn't fill up. I got beat with a flush that showed up on the river." "I went 'all in' with a pair of aces before the flop. I lost to a guy who called with a pair of fours. Another four came out and I was out of the game." "I can't believe he got so lucky." "Jerry is so lucky. He always gets the cards he needs." "I shouldn't have called." "I shouldn't have folded. I would have won." "Where's the courtesy show." - This statement is commonly used when somebody wins because everyone else folded. Then the other people will ask to see the cards. Most of the time, the player will not show his hand. So a courtesy show is showing your hand when you don't have to. "He bought the pot." - When somebody wins because nobody called. They say he bought the pot because he bet very high and nobody wanted to risk it. So his high bid bought the pot. "I knew I won because I got a full house on the 'turn'." "I would have won this hand too. I am such a chicken." "What did you have?" "I can't believe I lost with a straight. The damn flush showed up on the river." "I had two aces and he had two kings. The last card was a king so he won." "Would you go all in with a pair of fours before the flop?" "Would you rather have a pair of fives or an Ace King suited." "You're so easy to read. You give your hand away every time."Talking About Guys
Listen to the Entire Lesson Talking about guys is a little different than talking about girls. When guys talk about girls, they mostly talk about their body and looks. Although girls talk about guys in this manner as well, we mostly talk about personality, job, status, and things unrelated to looks. So, in this lesson, we will cover both looks and character of guys and what girls say to each other. General questions "What do you look for in a guy?" "What kind of person do you want to meet?" "What type of person do you want to marry?" "Who is your ideal type?" "How important is looks to you?" "Do you think physical appearance is important?" "What is the first thing you look for in a guy?" General answers for General questions "I'm looking for a guy who will treat me well." "I want a guy who is romantic." "I want to meet a guy who is rich." "I want a type of person that will respect me." "I want someone responsible. He should be able to take care of the family both emotionally and financially." "I want a down to earth type of guy." "My ideal type is a guy who is smart and sensitive." "Looks are not that important to me." "The guy needs to be good looking to have a chance with me." "The first thing I look for in a guy is looks."Talking About Guys - Comments
Listen to the Entire Lesson Physical appearance One of the biggest factors in physical appearance is height. Let's work on a couple of sentences. "I want a tall guy." "I have always been attracted to tall guys." "I don't like short guys." "I'm not attracted to short guys." Looks "I like a guy with a cute face." "I want a guy that works out." Commenting about guys "He is so cute." A lot of girls use the word cute. It doesn't necessarily mean cute like a baby, but cute means good looking in this context. "He is very handsome." "He is good looking." "He's so handsome." "He is tall with dark hair and brown eyes."Talking About Guys - In Public
Listen to the Entire Lesson In a club or public place "Did you see the guy who just walked by? He was so cute." "I think the guy sitting at the bar is checking you out." "I'm going to stand next to the guy at the pool table. I hope he notices me." "What should I do to get his attention?" "Should I ask him to dance?" "You should ask that guy to dance." "Why don't you just start dancing next to him?" Other things "He is so nice to me." "He takes care of me so well." "He has good manners." "He is so smart." "He's so sensitive." "He is so sweet." "Bob is so romantic. He writes poems to his girlfriend all the time." "Mike is very spontaneous. I think he would be a great boyfriend if you want to have fun."Talking About Guys - Descriptions
Listen to the Entire Lesson Talking about your friends' boyfriend "She told me he was a good kisser." "Joanne is a dating a doctor from Harvard." "Suzy's boyfriend is so rich. He takes her to so many trips." "Jessica's boyfriend is in MBA at Wharton right now." "Her boyfriend is a jerk. He treats her like crap. I don't know why she doesn't break up with him." "I don't think he is that smart. He failed to get into college and he is doing manual labor right now." "I heard he hit her before. Someone should warn her before it's too late." "He's so cheap. He never pays for anything." "I think he is just using Martha because she has a lot of money. Why else would he date her?" Describing a guy you are dating "I met this guy and we started dating. He is so cute and he brought me flowers while I was at work. He is so romantic." "I'm seeing this guy name John now. He buys me a lot of stuff. I think I'm blinded by all the things he is buying me, but it's so fun." "We started dating after an 8 hour phone call. We just talked and talked and it was so great. We connected at a deep level and I think I really like him." "My boyfriend is in med school right now. He is going to specialize in surgery." "I'm dating a guy from work. I always had a crush on him because he was so nice." "On Valentines day, my boyfriend prepared a picnic and we had lunch by the river. He prepared all the food and even had music. It was a great day." "For my birthday, my boyfriend took me out to a nice restaurant. Afterwards, he took me out on a lake in a little boat. It was very romantic."Shopping - Clothes
Listen to the Entire Lesson A few guys like to shop. As for the girls, most of them enjoy shopping. Shopping can consist of grocery shopping, clothes shopping, or present shopping. I'm sure there are other types as well, but I will limit this lesson to these three types of shopping. Shopping for clothes 'Window Shopping' is a terminology used when you do not plan on buying anything. Basically, you are only looking. The term 'window shopping' was created because a lot of stores have mannequins on display in the window with clothes on them. So walking by the store and looking at the clothing through the window is a way to see what they have. This is called 'window shopping.' Mannequins are the fake life size figures that are used to put and display clothes. Most department stores show clothing with the mannequins. Here are some common statements and questions most commonly used in a clothing store. "Where is the dressing room?" "I can't find my size here. Can you check if you have this in a size 4?" "Do you have this in different colors?" "Where are your jeans located?" "Where is the red sweater on display in the window?" "How much is this skirt?" "Are you going to have a sale soon?" "Where is the matching shirt for this skirt?" "When are you going to get more sizes?" "I'm looking for a belt that will go with these pants." "Do you provide alteration here?" "How much will it cost to get alternation done on these pants?" "These pants are too long for me. Where can I get them altered?" "How long does it take?" "When do you start selling summer clothing?" "When will you be getting your summer line?" Some answers you might hear from workers "The dressing room is in the right back corner." "The dressing room is right over there." "All our jeans are located in the back wall." "We usually get a shipment every Thursday, so I would check back then." "We have alteration here." "It costs seven dollars." "It takes one day. You can pick them up tomorrow if you drop it off now." "We'll have our summer line on display in April."Shopping - Grocery
Listen to the Entire Lesson Grocery shopping is a common thing that is done at least on a weekly basis. I'll cover some general sentences that are commonly used. Before shopping "I'm going to the grocery store. Do you need anything?" "I'm going to QFC. Do you want to go?" "Did you create a grocery list?" "I'm going to Safeway tonight. Let me know if you need anything by 5:30." "Let's go to the grocery store together." Many large grocery stores have coupons they distribute through the newspaper. You cut them out and save money on items that are shown in the coupon. "I have a bunch of coupons I got from the newspaper." "There were a lot of coupons, but I didn't need any of them." "There are no coupons for anything I ever buy." During grocery shopping "Where is your bread section?" "Where can I find milk?" "Where are your beers?" "Do you sell alcohol here?" "I'm looking for pickles. Can you help me find them?" "Do you have a bakery section?" "I'm looking for cough medicine. Where is your medicine area?"Shopping - Presents
Listen to the Entire Lesson Shopping for presents Almost everyone needs to buy a present. Let's look at some sentences that you will need. It's common to ask a birthday person what they want. "What do you want for your birthday?" "Do you need anything?" Or, you can ask a friend of a birthday person. "What do you think John wants for his birthday?" "What do you think I should get for John?" "What are you getting John for his birthday?" Buying something for a girlfriend or boyfriend is a little different. If you don't have any ideas, then you can ask a sales person. Let's say you want to buy your girlfriend a piece of jewelry. "I want to buy my girlfriend a birthday present. Do you have any suggestions?" Or if you want to buy a boyfriend a tie or a shirt, you can go to a place like Banana Republic and ask them. "I'm shopping for my boyfriend's birthday. Can you help me pick out something?"Jewelry
Listen to the Entire Lesson There are many types of jewelry, but the ones I will focus on are the ring, necklace, earring, bracelet, and watch. Although watch can be in a category by itself, we will include it in this section until a separate section is created. Conversation is usually started with a person complimenting a piece of jewelry. Here are some examples. "That's a beautiful necklace." "What a magnificent ring." "I like the design of your ring." "Your bracelet is very nice." "I love your watch." "What a beautiful pair of earrings." "Where did you get your necklace from?" "What is the carat on your diamond ring?" "Is that your wedding ring?" "What type of diamond is that?" "What is the make of your watch?" "Is that white gold, silver, or platinum?" "Is your gold ring 14 carats or 18 carats?" Carat is a unit of measurement for gold or diamond. 24 carat is pure gold and 50 percent of pure gold is 12 carats. Diamonds use carat to determine size. One carat is considered to be pretty big. While getting past 3 carats will be uncommon for the general people because of the large size. Answering a compliment is very easy. All you need to say is, 'Thank you.' But if you want to elaborate, you can say the following things. "Thank you. My husband got it for me for our anniversary." "Thank you. It was a present from my boyfriend." "Do you like it? My grandmother gave it to me." "This is a Rolex. My husband and I got a matching pair for our wedding." "This is a Cartier. I bought it last summer."Jewelry - Jewelry Stores
Listen to the Entire Lesson Asking about jewelry stores "Where is the best place to buy jewelry?" "Where would you go to buy jewelry?" "Are all jewelry stores the same?" "What do you think about Tiffany's?" "Does the Shane Co. have good quality jewelry?" "Do they have high quality rings?" "What jewelry store do you recommend?" "It all depends on how much you want to spend." "The best place to buy jewelry is Tiffany's. Their service is great and the quality of all their stuff is amazing." "Jared's is a pretty good place for the price." "I like Costco because they are much cheaper than any other place." "If you want to buy an engagement ring, EE Robins is a great jewelry store." In a jewelry store Most or all jewelry items are behind a glass on display. You will need to work with a salesperson to view items directly. "I'm looking for a bracelet." "Can I see this one?" "Can I see that one?" "Can I try it on?" "How much does this bracelet cost?" "Do you have this in white gold?" "Do you have any bracelets with diamonds in them?" "I'm looking for clip on earrings. Do you carry any?" "Do you have diamond studded clip on earrings?" "What types of earrings do you carry?" "I like this one, but do you have the same one with a bigger diamond?" "Do you have this bracelet without the design on it?" "Do you engrave here?" "I would like to get this bracelet? How much is engraving here?" "I'm looking for a titanium ring." "Do you carry any titanium bands?" "Do you have a matching necklace for this ring?" "Could I get this diamond on that band?" "How long will it take to mount this diamond on this ring?" "This ring is too loose for me now. Can you make it smaller?" "This ring is too small. Can you make it larger?"Jewelry - General Statements
Listen to the Entire Lesson "You can tell she is rich by all the jewelry she is wearing." "Did you see the size of the rock on her finger?" "Her boyfriend buys her a lot of jewelry. He must be rich." "I want a necklace for my graduation gift." "My mom is going to give me her ring when I get married. It's a tradition we have in our family." "Girls love jewelry as much as guys love sports." "Not all girls like jewelry. Some of them think it is a waste of money." "Even the girls who don't like jewelry would buy a lot if they had a lot of money." "Do you think I should buy her a necklace or a ring?" "If you buy her a ring, she might think you are proposing to her." "How much do you think I will need to buy my fiancé a nice diamond ring?" "How much do I need to buy a decent diamond ring?" "Do girls like diamond earrings?"Guys - Girls - and Sports Review
Listen to the Entire Lesson Remember to send us regular voice files so we can see how you are doing. You should really be on your way to fluency. If you feel that you are not improving, let us know and we will work with you to help you more. The next Interactive Practice will cover topics we had in Guys - Girls - and Sports category. Keep up the good work and keep practicing.Happy and Feeling Good
Listen to the Entire Lesson It's common to talk to friends and family when you are happy. Most of the time, you want to express why you are happy and share with close people how you feel. In this lesson, let's take a look at many different ways you can express yourself when you are happy. General statements are usually short. Here are a few examples. "I'm very happy right now." "I'm happy." "I haven't been this happy in a long time." "I don't think I can be any happier right now." "He is very happy." "She is so happy right now." "My wife is pretty happy." "My husband is happy." These sentences are very basic. Most of the time, you will be explaining why you are happy. Let's incorporate the reason into the sentence. "I'm so happy I got a job offer." "I was happy when I received an A for my final report." "I'll be happy when that happens." "This semester is such a headache. I'll be so happy when it's over." "My brother was happy after passing the examination." "I think my mother was happier than I was when I got into the University." "If you find a job you are happy with, then that is the perfect job for you." "It's more important to be happy with your job than what other people think." "I don't think she will be happy if you do that." "My parents won't be happy if I drop out of school." "I think my professor was happy with my essay." "My grandmother is always happy when I come visit her." "My grandfather is always happy to see me." "I'm so happy for you. That's wonderful news." "Congratulations on your engagement, I'm so happy for you." "I want to find a gift that she will be happy with." "He never likes his presents, but he is happy with the fact that we tried." "Happiness is probably the most important thing in life." "My goal in life is to make other people happy."Happy and Feeling Good - Questions
Listen to the Entire Lesson Questions you might ask someone "Do you think he will be happy with this present?" "Do you believe money can buy happiness?" "Do you think she will be happy if I show up?" "What would make you happy?" "Was your brother happy with the results?" "When was your happiest time period?" "How can you put a price tag on happiness?" "How much money do you need to be happy?" "Would you be happy if that happened to you?" "Why are you so happy right now?" "Why are you in such a good mood?" "Did something good happen? You look so happy?" "Why do you have such a big smile on your face?"Happy and Feeling Good - Other Sentences
Listen to the Entire Lesson There are other ways to express you are happy without using the word happy. In the last half of this lesson, let's look at some of these sentences. "I'm feeling pretty good right now." "I'm in a very good mood." "I feel great!" "I'm so glad I didn't have to go to work today." "It feels so good taking a long vacation." "This is so awesome. I can't believe this happened." "I got everything I ever wanted. I feel so blessed." "My brother was jumping around everywhere when he heard he got into Stanford." Here are some slang terms you might hear. "I'm so stoked." Stoked basically means to be happy or to be excited. "I'm on cloud nine right now." This terminology represents feeling high. High is usually associated with drugs, but if something good happens and you are so happy, it can make you feel better than being on drugs. That is where this terminology came from. "I feel like I'm in paradise." "I feel like I'm on top of the world." "I feel like a king." "I feel like a champion." "I feel invincible."Anger
Listen to the Entire Lesson Different people react in different ways when they are angry. In this lesson, we will look at a variety of sentences people use when they are angry. When someone is angry in the real world, they use a lot of profanity or curse words. Because of this fact, this lesson will contain bad words. There are many ways a person can get angry. Let's first look at the situation where it involved a different person. "I'm so pissed. Roger just stabbed me in the back." "What was he thinking! I thought we were friends too." "I don't know what I'm going to do when I see him. I found out that he's been sleeping with my girlfriend." "Matt is dating my ex-girlfriend. I'm pretty upset about that. He knows I still have feelings for her." "Whenever I think about him, I get pissed. He treats his friends like crap." "I can't believe he was talking behind my back. Whenever he talks to me, he acts like we're close friends." "Matt borrowed my car and put a dent in it. He claims he didn't do it. I'm never trusting him again." "I told Scott a secret and made sure he never tells anyone. The next week, I heard it from three different people. I was so pissed."Anger - Understanding
Listen to the Entire Lesson There are only a few things you need to say when someone is talking to you about anger. The best thing to do is understand their feeling. "I can't believe that happened. I'd be so pissed." "I know how you feel. I was so angry when that happened to me." "I can't imagine how angry you must feel. That has never happened to me." "If that happened to me, I'd get revenge." "What are you going to do to get him back?" "That totally sucks, but I'm not surprised. I always knew he was a back stabber." "The best thing to do is stop being his friend. He doesn't deserve to have any friends."Anger - Confronting
Listen to the Entire Lesson When you are talking to the person that made you angry, it is common to lose control and say a lot of things. Here are some common sentences. "I thought you were a friend. I had so much trust in you. I can't believe you did this to me." "What were you thinking when you stabbed me in the back. Did it feel good?" "Why'd you do it?" "You know I still have feelings for Mandy. You didn't even consider my feelings. What? Am I not a friend or something?" "You're not the only one hurting for money. You owe me five hundred dollars. I need it now." "You didn't have to tell my parents that I owed you money. I said I would pay you back when I got my paycheck. I can't believe you would do this." Sentences you can ask or say if you feel a friend is angry with you "Are you mad at me?" "Are you angry?" "You're not disappointed are you?" "Don't be angry with me. I really didn't mean it." "I didn't know you were involved. I hope you're not mad at me." "I really didn't know it was going to make you upset."Anger - Other
Listen to the Entire Lesson If you make good friends, you can avoid these types of scenarios. However, there are times when the situation was out of your control. For example, a friend of mine had to landscape his back yard for his house, so he called a company to delivery a lot of top soil. As the driver was driving back to the house, he hit my friends house and damaged a pipeline. The driver claimed it wasn't his fault and said he wouldn't pay for the damages. When things like this happen, we use the court system to get payment. But my friend was so angry because they were not accepting fault. Here are some of the things I heard. "I was so pissed for a couple of weeks. During that time, I thought of twenty different ways I could hurt his business." "I'm going to screw with him so much." In the end, everything worked out. They went to court and my friend won. There are a couple of other emotions that are similar to being angry. I'll cover some of them here. "I'm so frustrated." "It's so frustrating working with him." "I was so frustrated, I stopped caring about the outcome." "He gets frustrated pretty easily." "It's easy to get frustrated when things are not fair." "I'm not really mad, just a little disappointed." "That really hurt me. I'm so disappointed." "I'm really disappointed in you. I didn't know you could stoop to that level." In boxing, a low blow is a hit below the belt that is considered unfair. The term low blow became widely used when someone did something unfair. Here are some sentences to give you an idea. "That was low." "I can't believe Jackie would do something so low." Now that we know what low means, stooping to that level means to do something that is low. You are basically lowering yourself to perform a bad or unfair task.Excited - General Sentences
Listen to the Entire Lesson Being excited is another positive emotion. I'm sure everyone knows what it feels like to be excited, so let's get right into learning sentences. The day before a big event, many people get excited. Here are some sentences you can use. "I'm getting excited for golf tomorrow." "I'm too excited to go to sleep now. Our trip tomorrow is going to be so fun." "We're leaving for our camping trip tomorrow. I'm getting really excited." "Tomorrow is going to be an exciting day." "We're finally moving into our first house. It's a very exciting time for us." "I have an interview tomorrow. Although I am scared, it's an exciting opportunity." Regular sentences "I'm excited to be here." "Your sister must be really excited about starting law school." "It's really exciting thinking about the benefits people will gain from our project." "It's exciting starting a small business." "I get excited thinking about how many people I will help." "Don't get too excited. It's not guaranteed yet." "I wouldn't get excited yet. You still have one more match to play." "You didn't get the job yet, so don't get too excited about it." Questions "I'm pretty fired up about tomorrow. Aren't you excited too?" "Are you feeling excited or scared about your interview tomorrow?" "Do you get excited every time you get a phone number from a girl?" "Is your brother excited about starting work?" "Are you excited about your date tomorrow?"Excited - Other Expressions
Listen to the Entire Lesson Sometimes, being too excited can be negative. Here are some examples. "I don't know what's wrong with him. He's always excited for no reason." "He's too hyper. I don't know why he's excited about every little thing." Hyper is usually used when someone has too much energy. "If you feel too excited, you won't be able to sleep. Then you won't perform that well tomorrow." "Calm down. You're over reacting." "My friend can never go to sleep the day before we go skiing. He always gets too excited." "My dog gets excited whenever the doorbell rings." "People with heart problems shouldn't get excited too often." "You should feel excited about this opportunity." "I don't understand why you're unhappy with your situation. I'd feel excited to have your opportunity." "Going to a concert is very exciting. There are many people there with so much energy and it's very fun." "It's exciting to see a great singer perform so powerfully." "I'm excited about my trip to Europe. It's going to be so fun." Being pumped up is another way you can say you are excited. "I'm pretty pumped up about my trip to Australia. I'm really looking forward to it." "I'm pumped up about working out. I joined a health club and set a good schedule to follow." Being thrilled about something is another way to say you are excited. "It's so thrilling skiing down the mountain real fast." "I'm thrilled thinking about buying a new car." When you are referring to an exciting person, the word most commonly used is enthusiastic. "He's a very enthusiastic person." "I wish I had as much enthusiasm as he does." "It's always fun to be around an enthusiastic person."Being Worried
Listen to the Entire Lesson Some people might say worrying is useless, but it is an emotion that everyone has. Worrying doesn't help the situation, but we can't help to feel worried when something happens. Let's look at some sentences that are commonly used. "I'm worried about my son." "I'm worried about the situation." "I'm so worried." "I'm a little worried." "He's very worried about work." "He's worrying about his financial situation." "She's worried about her dog." "Our dog has been missing for 2 days. My wife is very worried." "Our son slipped and hit his head. It's going to be a couple of days before we know how serious it is. I can't help but worry about it." "I'd be worried if I was in that situation." "I bet she's really worried." "The doctor said something was wrong with my wife's blood test. I'm so worried." "I lost my job and I'm having a hard time finding another one. I'm beginning to worry about how I'm going to take care of my family." "My husband lost his job. Although I'm worried, I can't put pressure on him because he feels really bad."Worry - Serious Situation
Listen to the Entire Lesson Sometimes, a person might not take a situation seriously. If something bad happened and they don't think it is bad, then a popular comment is to say something like this. "I would worry if I were you." "Do you think this is a joke? This is pretty serious." "This is one of your last chances. Aren't you worried at all?" When we are worried, the word doesn't have to be used to express that we are worried. Here are a few examples of what I am talking about. "I don't know how I'm going to pay for the medical bills." "I have so much debt. I don't know what to do." "I just took the exam and I don't know if I passed or not." "I only applied for three schools. What's going to happen if I don't get into any of them?" "I just had my interview. I don't know if I got it or not." "I hope they come out with the results soon. I hate the waiting." "The doctor said there are some complications with the pregnancy. I'm praying nothing bad happens." "My mother got into a car accident. She's in critical condition. I don't know what's going to happen." "So many people are counting on me. What if I let them down?"Being Worried - Talking to a Worried Person
Listen to the Entire Lesson When someone is worried, here are some sentences you might need to say. "Stop worrying. It's only making you feel worse." "You should try to think positive. Worrying is not going to help you." "Don't worry about the planning. I'll take care of it." "Don't worry about the money. I already took care of it." "I'm sure you passed the test. Don't worry about it." "You had a high GPA and you did well on your test. Don't worry about getting into school. I'm sure all of them will accept you." "You're over reacting. The situation is not that bad. I don't think you should be worried at all." "Worrying is not going to help your situation. Let's think of a step by step plan that will help your financial problem." "The hardest part of your situation is that you can't do anything about it. I hope everything works out." "Everything happens for a reason. I'm sure something good will come out of all this."Worry - Worried about Family
Listen to the Entire Lesson Parents worry a lot about their kids. And if you have a mom or dad that worries about you, then you can say these types of sentences. "Don't worry about me." "Stop worrying about me. I'm doing great." "My mom is always worried about me." "I wish my mom would stop worrying about me." "My dad is always worried about my future." "I wish my mom would stop saying how much she worries about me. It doesn't really help my situation." "Why do parents always tell us that they are worried about us." "If you weren't such a screw up, then your parents wouldn't have to worry about you." "Your parents only worry because they love you." "Your mom only wants what is best for you. That's why she's worrying so much." "Your dad wants you to have a better life than his. That's why he's worrying." Finally, when we get older, it is common to worry about marriage and kids. "I'm already 30 and I don't even have a boy friend. What if I don't ever get married?" "My mom is worried that I won't get married." "We've been trying to have a baby for 2 years now. I'm worried that we will never have one." "My parents are worried that we won't have any children."Stress - School
Listen to the Entire Lesson Unfortunately, stress is a common emotion that we all experience. Most of the time, stress is caused by pressure placed on us. We experience stress trying to live up to someone else's expectations. This is the same for school and work. We are given work to do and if there is so much, we experience stress. School "I'm stressing out. I have a mid term tomorrow and I haven't studied yet." "I have a paper due tomorrow and I didn't even read the book. I'm so stressed." "I always get stressed out during finals week. Even if I study a lot, there are always unexpected questions I don't know about." "My parents give me so much stress. They expect me to get straight A's all the time." "I would enjoy school a lot more if my parents didn't put so much pressure on me." "My dad gave me a beating when I brought home a C on my report card." "I'm so stressed. I'm taking the CPA exam next week and I'm not confident." "I've been stressed like this for two weeks now. I'll be happy when this semester is over." "I took too many classes this semester. I shouldn't have tried to do so much. Now I'm stressing like crazy." "My English professor is stressing me out. He wants me to help him write his article." "I'm having a lot of trouble in my political science class. It's stressing me out."Stress - Work
Listen to the Entire Lesson "I get a lot of stress from work." "I'm sick of all the stress I have to deal with." "The project I'm working on is giving me a lot of stress." "I have a lot of stress because of my manager. He wants me to finish my project in four days." "The most stressful thing about work is always making sure my manager is happy." "If I don't butt kiss, I might get fired. It's so stressful living like this." "Work is so stressful." "There's this guy at work. He's the biggest butt kisser. It's stressful competing against this guy." "I get a lot of stress from my coworkers. They're all way too competitive." "I volunteered for another project and it's stressful to say the least. I'm working 14 hours a day." "My company is over working me. They expect way too much from everybody." "If the work doesn't kill me, the stress will."Stress - Questions and Answers
Listen to the Entire Lesson "What do you do when you feel a lot of stress?" "What do you do when you feel stressed out?" "How do you relieve your stress?" "After work, I usually go out with some friends and have a few drinks." "We usually complain about our jobs over a bottle of Soju." "Drinking is the way we deal with stress." "On the weekend, my friends and I go out and drink a lot. It's the only way to stop thinking about work." Although drinking to relieve stress is a normal practice. It is a bad interview question. When you are talking to friends, it is normal to say that you drink to take care of the stress, but if you talk to someone important, make sure you give a simple answer. "I usually go to the river and relax by the water." "I like to rent a movie and relax on the sofa. This really helps me deal with my stress." "What stresses you out the most?" "What makes you stressed the most?" "Where do you get the most stress from?" "My company gives me the most stress." "My girlfriend gives me the most stress." "I get a lot of stress from my parents." "School is the most stressful for me." "Everything about life is stressful." "I have a lot of stress trying to pay all the bills."Stress - General
Listen to the Entire Lesson "My parents are putting pressure on me to get married. It's so stressful." "My husband wants to have a baby. I don't want one yet. It's very stressful." "I get so much stress before interviews." "I feel a lot of stress when I have to talk in front of a large group." "Learning English is the most stressful thing I ever had to deal with." "I get stress every time I think about speaking English." "He is always late with his work. It's beginning to stress me out." "It's stressful because if anything goes wrong, our whole project will be ruined." "It's so stressful because of the importance. So many people are dependent on our success."Sad or Depressed
Listen to the Entire Lesson It's unfortunate that there seems to be more negative emotion than positive ones. Being sad and depressed is a common emotion that we must deal with. While dealing with these negative emotions, it is good to talk about how you feel. Let's get started so you can say how bad you feel in English. I'm not going to cover feeling sad or depressed due to a broken heart in this lesson. Having a broken heart is a large topic so I will dedicate a whole lesson to the broken heart. There are several ways to express you are sad by using different words. Here is a small list of different words you might hear. Sad Down Gloomy Feeling Blue Depressed Let's use these words in sentences. "He's a little sad that Mark didn't invite him to his birthday party." "She's sad that she wasn't selected as the representative." "I always cry during sad movies." "I'm feeling a little down." "I got a bad grade in my final. I'm just a little down." "Jack is feeling pretty down. Let's take him out for a night of fun." "I feel so gloomy all the time." "I wish I was happy. I'm sick of feeling gloomy." "Let's go to a bar. I'm feeling a bit gloomy." "I'm feeling a little blue right now." "Jack hasn't come out in a long time. He's feeling a little blue. Let's try to cheer him up." "I didn't get my promotion from work. It's depressing me." "Let's go get drunk tonight. I'm feeling depressed." "Sometimes I feel depressed for no reason."Sad or Depressed - Reactions
Listen to the Entire Lesson Crying is one reaction to being sad. When someone is crying, you know it is because they are sad for some reason. Here are some questions you can ask. "Why are you crying?" "What's wrong?" "Why are you sad?" "What's bothering you?" "Why do you feel so bad?" "Why are you depressed?" "What's making you feel like this?" Because there are so many things in the world that can make us sad, it is hard to cover everything. I can only cover the tip of the iceberg on this subject. But feel free to ask any specific questions and we will let you know the proper sentence for your situation. "Our team lost the final match. We were second place." "My mother is very sick right now. I'm worried and sad." "My grandmother is in the hospital. I don't think she's going to make it." "My uncle was diagnosed with cancer. The doctors don't expect him to make it." "My cousin was killed in a car accident. It was the saddest thing in my life." "I trained so hard, but I didn't make the wrestling team. I'm a little down." "I didn't get into that University. I'm so depressed and my parents are going to be so disappointed." "My grandfather just passed away. I was so close to him." Sometimes sadness can turn into anger. For example, when the US gets away with gold medals at the cost of Koreans or other countries, it's sad to see. After the initial feeling, it turns into anger. "Korea lost the gold medal to the US. It was so depressing watching the US get away with another gold medal." "I'm getting sick of watching Korea get screwed by the Americans. It's really discouraging."Sad or Depressed - Situational Depression
Listen to the Entire Lesson Depression is classified as a disease. Many people suffer from depression and it is good to know how to say some sentences whether it is you or someone else. Situational depression When someone first comes to the United States, it is common to be depressed. This is usually due to loneliness, boredom, or feeling sad because you miss your friends and family. "I think I'm depressed because I have nothing to do here." "I'm depressed because I don't have anything here." "I'm so lonely here. I left all my friends to come here." Usually time heals these types of problems. Sometimes, whatever you say doesn't really help. They know the problem, but they can't control how they feel. Regardless, saying that you understand can show them that you care. "It must be really tough leaving your friends and family behind." "I have never experienced that, but I imagine it must be really hard." "Starting a new life someplace different is really hard. It's normal to feel this way. I think you'll get better with time." "If you surround yourself with people, you might find new friends." "Why don't you go to church. You can find peace there and even find great friends."Sad or Depressed - Doctor and Friend
Listen to the Entire Lesson Things to say to a doctor "I'm always depressed for no reason." "I suffer from depression constantly." "I'm always depressed and I don't know why." Depression can be so bad that suicidal thoughts can arise. That's what doctors are there for and they can really help. But it is important to let someone know about how you feel. "I'm so depressed that I don't know if it's worth living any longer." "Can you do anything to help my depression?" If a friend talks to you about these things, here are some sentences you can say. "It's not your fault and this is pretty serious. I think you should go see a doctor. I can go with you." "I think a doctor can really help your situation. We should go in and talk to one." "You know they have medication to help depression. I'll help you look into it. What do you say?"Love - Family
Listen to the Entire Lesson There are several types of love. There is the love you have for your parents or children, the love you have for your wife or husband, the love you feel for a new girlfriend or a boyfriend, and the love you have for a friend. These are the primary things I will cover here. If you are curious about other types, feel free to ask specific questions and we will tell you the English equivalent. For now, let's talk about love. Family love I heard that the most unselfish love is the love from the mother to her child. It must be powerful and if you are a mother, you will probably understand. It's not common to talk to your mother or father about how much they love you. It is more common to talk to friends about this. Here are some sentences for this conversation. Talking to friends about parents "I can't believe how much parents love their children." "Although my mother always nags at me, I know she loves me so much." "I'm amazed at how much my parents gave up to give me a better life." "I'm such a bad daughter. After realizing how much my parents gave me, I feel so sad that I didn't show my appreciation." "I think you will understand how much your parents love you when you get your own children." "When my parents can't take care of themselves, I will feel happy to take care of them. It's the least I can do to repay all that they gave me." Talking to friends about children "I don't know what I would do if I lost my child." "I finally understand how easy it was for my parents to give me so much after I got my daughter." "I love my son so much. I don't know what I would do without him." "Love is so powerful. Even before my son was born, I had this bond with him that I couldn't understand." "I'm going to do everything for my child."Love - Friend and Husband and Wife
Listen to the Entire Lesson Love for a Friend Some countries have a word for love between friends. For example, in Korean, the word is called Jung. The English language doesn't have this word. Basically when you feel love for a friend, you care for them deeply. You should understand that when someone says 'I love you' between friends, it doesn't imply anything sexual. "Jackie is my best friend. I love her so much." "You're such a good friend. I love you man." "Suzie is the sweetest person. I love her to death." Love between Husband and Wife Love between the husband and wife loses the initial bubbly feeling, but it becomes more powerful and more solid. It's easy to express how you feel by three simple words. "I love you." "After 5 years, I love you more than ever." "I love you more now than I ever have." Other ways to express your love without saying 'I love you.' "I don't know if I could go on with you." "You need to take care of yourself better. I don't want to lose you early." "You mean more to me than anything in the world." "I wouldn't be able to live if something happened to you."Love - Infatuation or Love
Listen to the Entire Lesson Between a new boyfriend or girlfriend Many people mistake infatuation for love. When you first meet someone and you feel you are in love with that person, it's not really love. Love takes time to grow. Your infatuation and lust can turn into love after you get to know one another. But if you feel this bubbly sensation inside and can't think about anything except the other person, then it's merely infatuation. However, this infatuation is so powerful that it drives people crazy. The next section will provide many different example sentences. Let's take a look at this powerful feeling. Things initially said "My days are empty without you by my side." "I can't say I love you because what I feel inside is more than love." "I don't think it's possible to feel more love than I have for you." "My feelings are so strong that even when we are apart, I think you can feel my love for you." "In the cold lonely night, the sound of your name comforts me." "My eyes are fixed on your picture when we are apart." "I take you everywhere with me. In my heart you are there." "I love you more than I love life. You mean more to me than you can understand." "I want you so much. I need you so much. I love you so much." "I think I'm in love. Whenever I'm not with her, I feel so weak." "I can't think of anything besides her." "She is the first thing on my mind, and the last thing before I sleep. Even in my sleep, I am with her." "I find myself banging a wall controlled by a strong desire to be with her."Love - Talking to Friend
Listen to the Entire Lesson Questions and Answers "When was your first love?" "I fell in love for the first time in high school. We only dated for 3 months, but I had the strongest feeling for her." "My first love was in college. We were together for 2 years. I loved him a lot, but it's over now." "My first love was in college. We ended up getting married." "What was your first love like?" "My first love experience was so powerful. It drove me crazy. I don't know if I could handle it again, but it was definitely an amazing experience." "My first love can be described like a romantic fairy tale. I would speak poems into her ear and kiss passionately in the night." General Statements "I think I'm in love with her." "I met this girl last week. We've been talking on the phone every night. I think I'm falling in love." "I'm crazy about her. What do you think I should do?" There are many more things to say about this subject. I encourage you to write down what you feel. If you are uncertain if it is grammatically correct, feel free to ask us. We will answer all your questions. For now, let's move on to practice.Broken Heart - Expressions
Listen to the Entire Lesson The most painful time period in my life was when my heart was broken by my first love. Even though I call it my first love, I don't know if it was love or not. I just know it was a powerful feeling. Especially when it ended. I was devastated. In this lesson, we will cover sentences you will need when you talk to people about your broken heart. Expressions "I wish I could sleep and not wake up. I can't take the pain any longer." "Sleeping is the only comfort I have. It's my only escape." "I wish God would take my life away. I wish I wasn't living anymore." "I'm never going to get over her. Even after 10 years, I'll still be thinking about her." "There's a hole in my heart and I don't think it's going to heal." "My heart is so heavy. It's so hard to even walk." "I don't have the strength to move. I can't stand up." "I lost my appetite and I can't fall asleep." "Maybe if she knew how much I loved her, she would come back to me." "Make it go away. Make the pain go away!" "I loved her so much. I loved her more than anything." "No. You don't understand. You don't understand how I feel." "Right when I came home from school, I would start to cry. I wouldn't even make it up the first step. I would fall on the ground and cry." "I remember in school, some classmates kept asking me if I was sick. That's how bad I looked. I was really sick in the heart." "I was crying one day and I fell asleep. When I woke up, I still had tears rolling down my face."Broken Heart - Asking Questions
Listen to the Entire Lesson Asking Questions "How long will I feel like this?" "When do you think I'll be over her?" "How long does the pain last?" "How am I supposed to go on without her?" "What am I supposed to do now that he's gone?" "What did you do to get over your first love?" "Do you still think about your first love?" "I can't do anything except cry. Is this normal?" "Have you ever cried yourself to sleep?" "Why did she leave me?" "What did I do wrong?" "Why doesn't he love me?" "Does he not know how much I love him?" "Why did this happen to me? It's not fair." "Should I ask her to come back to me?" "I'm willing to beg. I'm willing to do anything. Do you think it will help?"Broken Heart - Talking to Person with Broken Heart
Listen to the Entire Lesson Talking to someone with a broken heart "Time is the only thing that can heal your heart." "It takes a while, but eventually, you'll be yourself again." "I know it's painful, but it's only temporary." "It's normal to feel this way. It's one of the most painful things." "You have to move on." "You need to get over him." "There are plenty of girls for you." "There are a lot of fish in the sea. You shouldn't feel bad about losing one." "I'm confident that you'll find a better guy." If your friend is trying to get over a person, it is good to concentrate on the bad things. "He wasn't good to you. It's actually better that you guys broke up." "I know you're hurting, but it was for the better." "He was a jerk. You must realize that your situation is much better without him." "I don't know what you saw in her. She wasn't good to you." "I also know you must still have strong feelings for her, but try to think of the bad things. You know she didn't treat you that well. Is that the person you want to spend the rest of your life with?" It is also good to talk about your experience and how you overcame the pain. If they see that you experienced it too, they will be more receptive to what you have to say. "I remember my first break up. It was the worst feeling in the world. I was crying everyday for three months. And slowly, it got better. I know you'll feel better too." "My first break up was pretty painful. It took me two years to get over her. I was still crying after 6 months. But it felt good to move on. I knew there was a better girl for me. I know there is a better girl for you." "I sometimes had bad thoughts too. I thought that it would be easier to die than live with the pain. But you know it's wrong. I'm so glad that I dealt with the pain. I'm now a stronger and better person."Afraid or Scared
Listen to the Entire Lesson Some people really don't get scared that much. Others get scared all the time. Usually ladies will get more scared than the guys. But even if you don't get scared that much, it is still good to learn this lesson because you might be talking to someone who gets scared easily. Let's begin. There are several synonyms for scared that are commonly used. Frightened Freaked out Terrified Afraid Fear "I'm scared." "I get scared when I'm alone at night." "I get scared pretty easily." "I get scared watching a horror movie." "It's frightening walking home at night." "I didn't know the mirror was there so I was frightened when I saw my reflection." "My little daughter gets frightened easily, so we keep the light on for her until she goes to sleep." Freaked out is more of a slang term used among the guys. My friends think it is a little girlish to say they are scared. So instead, they use the word freaked out. "When I was at a public bath room, three guys surrounded my stall waiting for me to leave. I was so freaked out." "I got freaked out when I saw the bat fly across the room." "It's freaky walking through a dark park at night." "She was so terrified that she turned blue for a second." "It was a terrifying experience. We were both freaking out." "I was terrified watching that movie." "If you're afraid, then you don't have to do it." "My wife is afraid of the dark." "When I was little, I was afraid of everything." "I'm not afraid of death." "I fear that we'll lose the war." "I fear that he'll get away." "You shouldn't let fear control you." "He fears that you will be mad."Afraid or Scared - General Sentences
Listen to the Entire Lesson Questions "Do you get scared easily?" "Do you get scared watching horror movies?" "Are you afraid of the dark?" "What was the most terrifying experience you ever had?" "Do you get scared when you are at home by yourself?" "What do you do when you feel scared?" "Are you afraid of death?" "Hey Theresa, I just watched a movie and I'm scared. Do you want to get together?" "If you're not busy, do you want to come over? I just watched a movie and I'm afraid to be alone." General Sentences "My dog gets scared during fourth of July." "My dog gets scared when he hears a loud noise." "My wife hates watching scary movies. She's afraid of ghosts." "My little brother is afraid of his own room. He thinks there's a monster in the closet." "My sister is terrified of spiders. She screams every time she sees one." "I'm not afraid of ghosts and monsters. They're all fake." "When I was young, I used to get scared, but it all changed when I grew up." "I remember being afraid of a lot of things when I was younger." "The whole country was scared after the 9/11 attack." "The leaders of America said we shouldn't live in fear." When someone is scared, one instinct is to run away from the situation. The phrase, 'running scared' is used this way. "Why is he running scared?" "Is the government running scared?" "The revealed secret had the CEO running scared." Being scared does not always imply being frightened or afraid of monsters. A grown person can use this word if he or she is worried about something. Here are some examples. "My company is downsizing. It's a little scary going through this. I don't know if I will have a job next month." "I'm afraid my company is going to lay off our whole department." "It's a little scary waiting for the test results. This is so important to me. I really hope I pass." "If I tell her, I'm afraid she's going to blow up." "I'm afraid to tell her because she's going to be mad."Other Emotions - Emotional
Listen to the Entire Lesson In this lesson, we will cover several emotions we didn't cover yet. The ones I want to talk about are, being emotional, feeling no emotions, restlessness, proud, and anxiety. If you have questions concerning any emotion we didn't cover, feel free to ask questions anytime. Emotional If your emotions change easily, then you are an emotional person. An emotional person can also be described as one who is affected by things such as sad movies, criticism, or easily angered. In this lesson, we will go through some sentences talking about emotional people. "I know a lot of artists and many of them are emotional. I think it helps them with their creativity." "I saw a guy cry in a movie. He must be very emotional." "Emotional girls are high maintenance. It's really a headache dealing with them." "My last boyfriend was so emotional. His emotions would change drastically in the same day." When someone is way too emotional and it affects how they act in a negative way, some people will call them a psycho. "Your ex-girlfriend was a total psycho man." "He's a psycho. I saw him stalking you for a week." "My last girlfriend was a psycho. She would get upset at nothing and start crying the next minute." "I had a jealous boyfriend. He followed me around everywhere. I thought he was emotional because he would cry when I would yell at him, but I now think he's a psycho." Some people are only emotional when it is about something they are passionate about. If a person only gets emotional talking about one subject, then they are not an emotional person, rather, they are emotional about that topic. "He's pretty emotional about that topic." "I wouldn't say anything negative about blind people. She's very emotional about it." "Anytime we talk about it, he gets very emotional." "His voice started getting louder when we were talking about the war. I didn't know he was emotional about it." "My father had a friend who was killed in the Korean war. He gets emotional thinking about it."Other Emotions - Feeling Nothing
Listen to the Entire Lesson No emotions Feeling no emotions is one of the worst emotions. Many times it is described as being dead on the inside. Without emotions, it is hard to tell if you are a person. Here are some sentences I heard people say. "I don't feel anything. I don't know if I'm alive." "I hurt myself because it makes me feel alive." "I'd rather feel pain than feel nothing at all." "Not feeling anything is so depressing." "When my younger brother died, I didn't feel anything. It was worse than feeling sad." "I've never seen that guy laugh or cry. He's so emotionless." "I wonder if she feels anything. She's so cold."Other Emotions - Restless
Listen to the Entire Lesson Restless Being restless is an uncomfortable feeling. You feel like you want to do something, but there is nothing to do. It's hard to sit still and you have too much negative energy. "Being restless is having too much negative energy." "Being restless is terrible because it's being bored when your body wants to do something." "I don't know what's wrong with me. I'm so restless." "I can't fall asleep. I'm too restless." "I'm either bored or restless. I can't tell." "I gotta find something to do, or I'll die." "It's hard for me to relax when I'm restless." "He gets restless very frequently." "Why are you moving around so much? Are you restless?"Other Emotions - Proud
Listen to the Entire Lesson Proud You can either be proud of yourself or someone you care about, such as your children. When you are proud, it is the result of accomplishing something. Here are some sentences you can use. "I'm so proud of you." "I'm very proud of you." "You did a great job. I'm so proud of you." "My mother always tells me that she's proud of me." "I bet your parents are proud of you." "You should feel proud of your accomplishment." "That was awesome. You should feel proud of yourself." "I'm very proud of you, son." "I'm proud of my little brother. He did a great job." Proud can be used in a negative way. Proud can be seen as cocky or overconfident. "I don't know why he's so proud of himself."Other Emotions - Anxious and Anxiety
Listen to the Entire Lesson Anxiety / Anxious Anxiety is a pretty serious emotional problem. When you feel many different emotions or awkward emotions and can't control them, it is referred to as having an anxiety disorder. Many people suffer from this problem. "I feel weird all the time. I'm anxious about everything." "I feel anxious anytime I'm faced with uncertainty." "I heard it's very uncomfortable feeling anxious about everything." "I need to see a doctor about my anxiety problem." "Mike went to see a doctor and she told him that he has an anxiety disorder." "There are medication for anxiety disorders. You should ask your doctor about it." There are times you can use the word anxious and not refer to a medical or serious condition. "It's going to be fun. I'm anxious to get started." "The project is going to be great. I'm anxious to start on it." "Jill was anxious to start classes on Monday. She really likes school." "Jack is anxious to play. Let's have him go first."Feelings and Emotions Review
Listen to the Entire Lesson In this review portion we will cover all the previous lessons with emphasis on the lessons discussing emotions. Remember to upload your voice so we can give you feedback on your pronunciation and intonation. Feel free to go back and study the lessons you are still unsure about. Finally, it is always good to ask questions instead of assuming. Good luck with your review.TalkEnglish Milestone Review
Listen to the Entire Lesson If you have made it this far, you should really be proud of yourself. You are on your way to speaking English with ease. For this milestone, we are going to have conversation scenarios that incorporate everything we have learned up to this point. If you feel you are slow or having to think too much, feel free to return to previous lessons and review them again. You don't have to use the exact sentence or wording. There are numerous ways to say one thing. But make sure you are saying it correctly. The sentences here are all correct. If you have a sentence of your own, feel free to ask if it is correct.Dating - Asking for Second Date
Listen to the Entire Lesson Another way to get another date is by suggesting another restaurant. Janet likes Italian restaurants. But she chose Olive Garden. If the date went well, and you know of another Italian restaurant, you can suggest another date near the end of dinner. "Is Italian one of your favorite types of food?" "Yeah. I like all types of pasta." "I know this great little Italian restaurant on the waterfront. It's small but very authentic. I'd love to take you there next week or something." Or, if you know of another type of restaurant here is what you can say. "Have you ever had French food?" "I've had French Fries before." "I'm talking about real French food." "No. I don't even know what is considered French food." "I've been to this great French restaurant a couple of months ago. The food was amazing. I would like to take you there sometime. Would you be interested?"Office Basics - Interactive Practice
Click on Listen All and follow along. After becoming comfortable with the entire conversation, become Person A by clicking on the Person A button. You will hear only Person B through the audio file. There will be a silence for you to repeat the sentences of Person A. Do the same for Person B. The speed of the conversation is native speed. Use the pause button if the pause between each sentence is too fast for you. After practicing several times, you will be able to speak as fast as a native. B: "Did you check to see if it had paper?" A: "Yeah. That's the first thing I checked." B: "I don't know then. You might have to call the technician." A: "How do I do that?" B: "Just tell the admin and she should take care of it." A: "Is there another printer that I can use?" B: "Yeah. There's one down the hall next to the supply room." A: "Oh yeah... I remember that one. Thanks." B: "No problem." 2 Listen All | Person A | Person B A: "Do you have a lot of work?" B: "Yeah. I'm pretty busy. Why?" A: "Oh. I needed some help on documenting this process." B: "Does this have to be done right now?" A: "The manager wants it by Friday." B: "I'll try to free up my schedule. Remind me again tomorrow morning, and I'll help you in the afternoon." A: "Do you need to read the documents first?" B: "Yeah. That would help." A: "I'll print you a copy and then drop them off." B: "Make sure you drop it off before five because I have to leave early." A: "No problem. Thanks." 3 Listen All | Person A | Person BA: "Are you new here?" B: "Yeah. I just started yesterday." A: "Welcome aboard. I'm Jack." B: "I'm Mark. Nice to meet you." A: "What are you going to be working on?" B: "I'm going to work on the planning team. But I haven't started yet. I'm still in training." A: "The planning team is great. Our marketing team works with them closely. We'll end up working together sometimes." B: "That's great. Oh, can I ask you some questions?" A: "Sure." B: "Does this company have a casual Friday?" A: "Not really. You can get away with wearing slacks, but I've never seen anyone wear jeans." B: "That's alright. Do you know any good places to eat around here?" A: "Yeah there's a deli right across the street. They have fresh sandwiches and sometimes hot dishes like teriyaki. It's pretty good." B: "That sounds good. Thanks for the info." A: "No problem. If you need anything, I sit right around the corner here."Late for Work - Interactive Practice
Click on Listen All and follow along. After becoming comfortable with the entire conversation, become Person A by clicking on the Person A button. You will hear only Person B through the audio file. There will be a silence for you to repeat the sentences of Person A. Do the same for Person B. The speed of the conversation is native speed. Use the pause button if the pause between each sentence is too fast for you. After practicing several times, you will be able to speak as fast as a native. B: "Sure." A: "You have been late 3 times in the last 2 weeks. Is this going to be a continual problem?" B: "I'm so sorry. I really got unlucky this morning." A: "Being late once in a while is based on luck. If you are late frequently, it shows that you are irresponsible. How are you going to fix it?" B: "Last week, I had a lot of personal problems. I took care of all those problems and I don't have any excuse to be late anymore. I planned on coming in to the office early today, but there was an accident that held up traffic." A: "You better start anticipating all problems because I'm not going to tolerate your tardiness any longer. Is that clear?" B: "Perfectly clear. I will not be late again." A: "That's all." 2 Listen All | Person A | Person BA: "Hey Martha, is there anything urgent that needs to be done today?" B: "No. I don't believe so. Why?" A: "I have a terrible headache and I was wondering if it would be ok if I could leave a little early today." B: "I don't see why not. You can make up the time later in the week." A: "That's what I was thinking too. But as for today, I don't think I can be productive." B: "It's already two o'clock now. What time were you going to leave?" A: "I'm just going to wrap up and leave pretty soon. Probably in about thirty minutes." B: "Ok. Get some rest. If you are sick tomorrow, give me a call." A: "Alright. Thanks. I'll see you tomorrow." 3 Listen All | Person A | Person BA: "Hi Martha. This is Jack. I think I caught a flu or something. I feel worse than yesterday." B: "You better stay home today then." A: "I think that will be best. I'll log my sick day tomorrow when I get in." B: "No problem. Just get some rest. We have everything covered here so don't worry." A: "Ok. Just in case something happens, you can call me at home. I'll be here all day." B: "Ok. Thanks for calling. I'll see you when you get better." A: "Alright. Thanks. Bye."Computer Related - Interactive Practice
Click on Listen All and follow along. After becoming comfortable with the entire conversation, become Person A by clicking on the Person A button. You will hear only Person B through the audio file. There will be a silence for you to repeat the sentences of Person A. Do the same for Person B. The speed of the conversation is native speed. Use the pause button if the pause between each sentence is too fast for you. After practicing several times, you will be able to speak as fast as a native. B: "Yes. I just finished today." A: "I would like to review them before we send the report. Can you give me a copy?" B: "Sure. Would you like a hard copy?" A: "No. Just send me the path to the location of the report. I'll look them over on my computer." B: "Sure. I'll give you permission for the folder. You can find them at barbara01 slash XYZ. I'll give you permission right now." A: "Great. Thanks." 2 Listen All | Person A | Person BA: "John, are you having problems with your network?" B: "I think our whole network is down for upgrades. It should be back up in an hour." A: "That's too late. I need the review documents from the company network share." B: "I have a copy of that on my computer." A: "Really? Can I get a copy?" B: "Sure. But since the network is down, I'll have to put it on a disk for you." A: "That would be great." B: "Do you have a floppy disk?" A: "I think I have one on my desk. Here it is." B: "Ok. It's saving now. Here you go." A: "Thanks. You saved me a great deal of trouble. I'm so glad you had a copy of this on your machine." B: "No problem. I'm glad I could help." 3 Listen All | Person A | Person BA: "Don't we need a tax software to do this work?" B: "Yeah. Don't you have it installed on your computer?" A: "No. They said they would install it for me, but they didn't do it yet." B: "Go ask your manager. He probably forgot." A: "That's a good idea. Is there an instructional manual for this software?" B: "It's in the second file cabinet under Software Applications." A: "Thanks. I'll probably need it when I get the software." B: "Actually, it's not that difficult to use. I think you should be able to figure it out without the manual. The manual is only good for advanced options that we don't really need." A: "You're probably right. Many of the manuals I've read were not that helpful. Do you mind if I come to you for questions when I am using the software?" B: "Not at all. Feel free to ask any questions. If I know the answer, I'll let you know." A: "Great. I better go find the manager to get the software installed on my computer."Email - Interactive Practice
Click on Listen All and follow along. After becoming comfortable with the entire conversation, become Person A by clicking on the Person A button. You will hear only Person B through the audio file. There will be a silence for you to repeat the sentences of Person A. Do the same for Person B. The speed of the conversation is native speed. Use the pause button if the pause between each sentence is too fast for you. After practicing several times, you will be able to speak as fast as a native. B: "I'm not going to be in the office tomorrow. Can you email it to me? I'll look at it from home." A: "Sure. What's your email address?" B: "It is someone@hotmail.com." A: "The file is pretty big. Will the email allow me to send a file that big?" B: "If it is under one mega byte, you shouldn't have a problem." A: "I don't think it's that big. I'll send it tonight. Just get back to me when you finish the review tomorrow." B: "Ok. I should be done with it by noon." A: "That would be great. Thanks." 2 Listen All | Person A | Person BA: "The manager wants us to work on the data analysis together." B: "Did you get an email from her?" A: "Yeah. You were on the µto' line as well." B: "I never got it yet. When did you get the mail?" A: "I got it about 30 minutes ago. Should we have her send the mail again?" B: "No, I don't want to bother her right now. Can you just forward the mail to me?" A: "No problem. I'll do it now." B: "I'm still not getting it." A: "Maybe your exchange server is down." B: "I think you're right. Can you send it to my personal account? It is someone@hotmail.com." A: "Sure. Sending now." B: "I got it. Thanks for forwarding me the mail. After I read it, let's get together to discuss how we are going to work on the data analysis." A: "Perfect. Just ping me when ever." 3 Listen All | Person A | Person BA: "Hi Jack, this is Cindy from the audit team." B: "Hi Cindy." A: "I'm calling in regards to the 2003 bank statements you sent over to me last week. I cannot find the August statement. Can you resend that one by any chance?" B: "I can fax them over to you in about an hour. Will that be ok?" A: "That would be great. I also have questions on several of the withdrawals. Do you know who I should contact to straighten this out?" B: "You should talk to Joe Smith. He is our senior accountant over here. His number is 555-123-4567." A: "That was Joe Smith at 555-123-4567?" B: "That's correct." A: "Do you have his email address. I might need it later." B: "Sure. It's joesmith@ourcompany.com." A: "joesmith@ourcompany.com. Ok. Thanks for all your help." B: "No problem. Have a good day." A: "You too. Thanks again. Bye."Business Phone Call - Interactive Practice
Click on Listen All and follow along. After becoming comfortable with the entire conversation, become Person A by clicking on the Person A button. You will hear only Person B through the audio file. There will be a silence for you to repeat the sentences of Person A. Do the same for Person B. The speed of the conversation is native speed. Use the pause button if the pause between each sentence is too fast for you. After practicing several times, you will be able to speak as fast as a native. B: "Hi Steve, this is Mary from ABC Company. I'm returning your call." A: "Hi Mary. How are you doing?" B: "I'm doing great thanks." A: "Thanks for returning my call. I couldn't figure out why the ending balance on fiscal year 2003 didn't match the beginning balance on of 2004." B: "When I checked, it was matching. How much is the difference?" A: "The amount is exactly $42,000." B: "Oh. I know what the problem is. We opened another bank account at the end of fiscal year 2003. I might not have included the new bank statements when I sent over the information." A: "That makes sense. I'm just glad it wasn't out of my miscalculation. Can you send over the statements? I should be done by end of day since everything looks good." B: "Sure. I'll fax them to you immediately. Is 555-123-4567 the number I should fax it to?" A: "Yes. That is the correct number." B: "I'll do it right now." A: "Thank you for your help." B: "I should have sent them over to you the first time. I apologize for that." A: "No problem." B: "Thank you." A: "Thank you. Bye." 2 Listen All | Person A | Person BA: "Hello, ABC Company." B: "Hi, this is Janet from Consult R Us. May I speak with Alex please?" A: "He's in a meeting right now. Would you like to leave a message?" B: "Yes. Can you have Alex call me back when he is available? My name again is Janet, and he can reach me at 555-987-6543." A: "It's Janet at 555-987-6543. Can I tell him what this is regarding?" B: "He sent over a fax, and the last page didn't print out. I will need for him to resend the fax to me." A: "I'll let him know." B: "Thank you." A: "Thank you for calling ABC." B: "Good bye." A: "Bye." 3 Listen All | Person A | Person BA: "Microsoft, this is Steve." B: "Hi Steve, this is Richard from Third Hand Testing. I'm calling in regards to the MSN assignment. Do you have a minute to answer a couple of questions?" A: "Sure. What can I help you with?" B: "We originally agreed on 5 testing procedures, but our program manager received a mail indicating 4 testing procedures. Is 4 the correct number?" A: "Yes it is. We found that we can do the last one here." B: "Great. Does the timeline change because we reduced one of the testing procedures?" A: "We don't have to change the timeline. Our original timeframe was very aggressive." B: "That makes our job a little easier." A: "Do you have any other questions?" B: "No. That's all I had. Thanks for your time." A: "No problem." B: "Ok. Good bye." A: "Bye."Talking to CoWorkers - Interactive Practice
Click on Listen All and follow along. After becoming comfortable with the entire conversation, become Person A by clicking on the Person A button. You will hear only Person B through the audio file. There will be a silence for you to repeat the sentences of Person A. Do the same for Person B. The speed of the conversation is native speed. Use the pause button if the pause between each sentence is too fast for you. After practicing several times, you will be able to speak as fast as a native. B: "Just finishing the project. Other than that, not much. How about you?" A: "I'm just about finished for the day. I have one more task to do, but I wanted to take a break first." B: "Did you have to work with Jake on that project?" A: "Unfortunately, yes." B: "Oh my gosh. I feel so sorry for you." A: "Don't remind me. I'm just glad it's over." B: "Yeah. I remember when I worked on the data conversion tool with him. Everything he did, I had to re-do. It would have been faster if I did it alone." A: "That's exactly what happened to me. It took me longer because I had to re-do everything he did. That really pissed me off." B: "Next time the manager wants me to do a project with him, I'm going to tell him that I will do it myself." A: "That's a good idea. Hopefully, the manager will realize how useless he is." B: "Exactly. If you're not busy, you can do my work." A: "Ha ha. I got enough to do." B: "Yeah. I'm just kidding." A: "Alright dude. I better finish my work. I'll talk to you later." 2 Listen All | Person A | Person BA: "Hey Jordan, did you go to the team meeting this morning?" B: "Yeah. The manager presented a new project to us that we'll have to do." A: "Damn it. I shouldn't have missed that meeting, but I was stuck in another meeting. What else did you guys talk about?" B: "Everything else was the same. We talked about progress of current assignments, due dates, about hiring another worker, that's all." A: "What's the new project about?" B: "It's hard to explain. She sent out mail to all of us. You can just review the document she sent out." A: "Ok. I'll do that." 3 Listen All | Person A | Person BA: "Hey Bob, do you have a few minutes?" B: "Sure. What's up?" A: "I'm having problems with my computer. I don't know what's wrong with it." B: "Let's go take a look at it. Oh. Here is the problem. You have a boot sector virus. Install the anti-virus software. That should take care of the problem." A: "Great thanks. 4 Listen All | Person A | Person BA: "How is your day going?" B: "The same as usual. How about you?" A: "Me too. I'm getting sick of work man." B: "I'm already past that stage." A: "What are you still doing here then?" B: "It pays the bills." A: "Why don't you find another job?" B: "Well, I thought about it, but if I put in two more years, then I get a good pension. I can't give that up. Anyway, this job is boring, but at least it's easy." A: "Well, you've been here for eight years. You have something to stay for. I've only been here for two years. I can't see myself doing this for another two years. I want to gain more experience in other areas." B: "Have you brought this up to the boss? Maybe you can go into management." A: "They usually want a person with an MBA degree or a person willing to put in 80 hours a week." B: "That's what it takes man. Either this or that." A: "Yeah. I better think about what I want. Why didn't you go into management?" B: "It would have taken too much time. I have a family that I want to spend time with, so it wasn't worth it for me. But you're single. You can put in a few good years and put yourself in a good position before thinking about settling down." A: "You have a point. I'll see what my options are. Hopefully the manager will help me out with my career." B: "She's pretty cool about that. Just be honest with her and she'll show you some doors." A: "That sounds good. Thanks for the advice." B: "No problem. Good luck."Talking to the Boss - Interactive Practice
Click on Listen All and follow along. After becoming comfortable with the entire conversation, become Person A by clicking on the Person A button. You will hear only Person B through the audio file. There will be a silence for you to repeat the sentences of Person A. Do the same for Person B. The speed of the conversation is native speed. Use the pause button if the pause between each sentence is too fast for you. After practicing several times, you will be able to speak as fast as a native. B: "Yeah. I already reviewed them. It was pretty good." A: "Since it was my first project, I was wondering if I can get some feedback." B: "Well, you finished the project on time. And seeing how it was your first assignment, you did very well." A: "Thanks. If it wasn't my first assignment, where do you think I need to improve?" B: "That's a fair question... I think you could have spent a little more time documenting the difference between Process A and Process B. You showed a lot of the similarities, but lacking a little on the differences." A: "I'll keep that in mind. How about the structure? I changed the template a little because I wanted to add a section for recommendation." B: "I liked the addition. Usually people just enter it into the comment section on the bottom but having a clear section makes it stand out. That was good." A: "Was there anything else? I like to get feedback early so I can improve." B: "No problem. Everything else on the assignment was great. The only other tip I can give you is sending me more updates. If I knew you were stuck on section C for a while, I could have saved you a lot of time. So keep me aware on your status." A: "That makes sense. I'll do that. Thanks for the feedback." B: "Don't mention it. And good job on the assignment." A: "Thanks." 2 Listen All | Person A | Person BA: "Hi Mark. I completed Project A and didn't have anything else to work on. Should I find something to do, or did you have something lined up?" B: "I won't have another assignment for you until next Monday. What will you be doing until then?" A: "I'm not sure, I was thinking about investigating the reporting issue we are having, but that's a low priority now. But if there is nothing else to do, it might be good to finally fix that." B: "How about John? He told me that he needed a little help on Project C. Why don't you ask him if he still needs help? If not, then check out the reporting issue." A: "John? I've been meaning to talk to you about him." B: "What's the problem?" A: "I don't want to be out of line, but he's very difficult to work with. He looks over my shoulder all the time and doesn't like how I am doing things." B: "Yeah. He is like that. I appreciate your feedback, and you are not the first to bring this up. Although he is difficult, he does get a lot of work done around here." A: "I completely agree, and I will continue to work with him as well as I can. I just thought I should let you know instead of keeping it bottled up." B: "I appreciate your honesty. But for now, you're going to have to tolerate his methods a little longer. I'll see if the director is willing to have a talk with John about this problem." A: "Ok. Well, I'll go see what type of help John needs. If there is nothing, I'll work on the reporting problem. Either way, I'll send you an email letting you know what I am working on." B: "That would be perfect. Thanks." A: "Thanks. I'll talk to you later." B: "Ok. Bye."Talking to Directs - Interactive Practice
Click on Listen All and follow along. After becoming comfortable with the entire conversation, become Person A by clicking on the Person A button. You will hear only Person B through the audio file. There will be a silence for you to repeat the sentences of Person A. Do the same for Person B. The speed of the conversation is native speed. Use the pause button if the pause between each sentence is too fast for you. After practicing several times, you will be able to speak as fast as a native. B: "I am confident that I will have it done by this Friday." A: "How far along are you?" B: "I have completed the preliminary review, analyzed the data, and I am almost done writing the analytical review." A: "That's great. It looks like you are ahead of schedule. When you are done, send it to me for review." B: "I'll send it to you Friday morning. That should give you a day to review it." A: "That's great. Keep up the good work." 2 Listen All | Person A | Person BA: "Can you give me an update on your assignments?" B: "Yeah. I'm helping with the performance testing, I've met with the partners for the integration project, and I'm finishing up the documents on the internal tool." A: "That's good. Can you start sending me a weekly report? That will help me keep track of your progress regularly." B: "No problem. Do you want it by the start of Monday, or do you want it Friday evening." A: "I'm probably not going to read it until Monday, so just send it to me by Monday morning." B: "What do you want me to include in the weekly report?" A: "Include what you did for the week, what you're going to do for the next week, and include any other issues you have." B: "I'll start doing that this week." A: "Great. Thanks." 3 Listen All | Person A | Person BA: "John, can I see you in my office?" B: "I'll be right over." A: "Have a seat... I'm concerned about your performance lately. Is there something I should know about?" B: "I've been pretty occupied at home. I apologize for letting it affect work. I'll definitely pay more attention." A: "I understand, but I'm still having to take some heat on your work. You have been late numerous times, your projects are not as detailed as it used to be, and you missed a deadline last week." B: "I am really sorry, and I won't let it happen again. I understand that I have been underperforming, and I will step it up." A: "I hope so. I'll explain it to the director. But I don't know how much more he will tolerate. That's all I had so you'd better go back to work." B: "Ok. I really will change things around. Thanks for understanding."Business Trips - Interactive Practice
Click on Listen All and follow along. After becoming comfortable with the entire conversation, become Person A by clicking on the Person A button. You will hear only Person B through the audio file. There will be a silence for you to repeat the sentences of Person A. Do the same for Person B. The speed of the conversation is native speed. Use the pause button if the pause between each sentence is too fast for you. After practicing several times, you will be able to speak as fast as a native. B: "What is my objective over there?" A: "You have to review financial documents over there. If you find something missing, work with their accountants to get the documents you need to complete the analysis." B: "How large is this project?" A: "It's pretty big, so take someone with you. I think you can finish in a week if two of you are working on it." B: "Do we have to arrive there at a certain time?" A: "Not really, but you should get there before lunch to settle in. Then you can get in half a day." B: "Who should I contact when I get there?" A: "I'll email you the details, but you should go book your flight soon." B: "Will do. Do you have a recommendation on who should go with me?" A: "Either Seth or Josh." B: "Ok. I'll find out who has more time." A: "Great. Keep me informed." B: "Got it." 2 Listen All | Person A | Person BA: "Hey Seth, you wanna go for lunch soon?" B: "How about in 30 minutes. I'm almost done with this section." A: "Ok. Where do you want to eat?" B: "I'm ok with anything, but let's go to a fast food place." A: "There's a Burger King around the corner. Let's go there." B: "Sounds good. One quick question... I'm going to finish all my work tomorrow. If we finish tomorrow, I suggest we head back home tomorrow evening. What do you think?" A: "I think that's doable. We'll see how much we get done today, and if we're close, I'll let them know that we'll be done tomorrow." B: "Sounds good."Offices and Cubicles - Interactive Practice
Click on Listen All and follow along. After becoming comfortable with the entire conversation, become Person A by clicking on the Person A button. You will hear only Person B through the audio file. There will be a silence for you to repeat the sentences of Person A. Do the same for Person B. The speed of the conversation is native speed. Use the pause button if the pause between each sentence is too fast for you. After practicing several times, you will be able to speak as fast as a native. B: "It's not too bad. But I hate our office setting." A: "Are you in a cubicle?" B: "No. I would be happy with a cubicle. We have 10 desks all in a large room. The supervisor is at one end with a view of everyone." A: "That sucks. You have no privacy." B: "I know. I can't even take a small break because everyone is watching. But that's not the worst part. I can hear everyone talking all day long and it's so distracting." A: "I feel sorry for you." B: "I can't even complain about something to the supervisor because everyone can hear." A: "Why do they have the office set up like that?" B: "I'm not sure. Maybe they want to save money, or maybe they think it's more effective." A: "Is anybody in an office?" B: "Only the people above the supervisor." A: "Maybe if they got out of their office and worked in the open space they would realize how terrible it is." B: "I guess I'll just have to tolerate it for now." 2 Listen All | Person A | Person BA: "Do you have cubicles in your company?" B: "No. Everyone has their own office." A: "You're so lucky. I'm in a cubicle." B: "I'm so glad we have our own office. There is so much privacy and we can take breaks whenever we want." A: "How does management know if you are working or not?" B: "Our company doesn't really keep track of little details. Our performance is based on our assignments and projects. Management doesn't care when it's done, they just want the person to do a good job and turn it in on time." A: "I like that method. In our company, our manager wants to know every detail almost every hour. If we are a little behind, the manager gets mad and starts worrying." B: "I would hate that environment." A: "I agree. It's not a good work environment. Do you ever play video games in your office?" B: "Not when it is busy, but when we are experiencing a down time, I close the door and start a game of Star Craft. If someone comes in, I quickly switch the view on the monitor." A: "You're so lucky." B: "I don't take it for granted, but I wouldn't mind a window office soon." A: "Shut up you freak."Performance Review - Interactive Practice
Click on Listen All and follow along. After becoming comfortable with the entire conversation, become Person A by clicking on the Person A button. You will hear only Person B through the audio file. There will be a silence for you to repeat the sentences of Person A. Do the same for Person B. The speed of the conversation is native speed. Use the pause button if the pause between each sentence is too fast for you. After practicing several times, you will be able to speak as fast as a native. B: "Yeah. I always get nervous during this time." A: "It shouldn't go too bad." B: "So, how did I do this year?" A: "Let me first ask you how you feel about your performance?" B: "I think I improved a lot and made a lot of great contributions. I completed all my assignments ahead of schedule, I volunteered for two more extra projects, and mentored a couple of our newer employees." A: "I agree. You did great this year. I got your rating back from upper management and it's not bad, but it's not the best. You received a 3.5, a 4 percent raise, and an 8 percent bonus." B: "I got a 3.5? Why? I was really expecting a 4 this year. I really worked hard." A: "Unfortunately, we can't give everyone a 4. There were a lot of people who did great this year and we only had a few 4's to give. You barely missed the cut." B: "What could I have done to get a 4? I thought I did everything to deserve one." A: "I agree. I think you should have received a four, but the only thing I can suggest is for you to be more visible. The people who beat you this year didn't necessarily do better work than you, it's just that people knew the work they were doing more than yours. You need to stand out a little better." B: "How do I do that? It doesn't make sense. If I work my ass off and I do great work, why does it matter if I show off or not?" A: "If 3 people are equal in their work, the only deciding factor is how much of the work they know about. Since upper management cannot know the details of everything, they mainly see the people who are visible. You can do this by taking on projects that affect the whole team so everyone can see, or you can be pro-active in finding places for improvements and sending out a mail to management with your ideas." B: "If I did a great job, why did I only get a 4 percent raise?" A: "You got a high raise comparing to other people. The average raise throughout the company was 2 percent. They cut back a lot on raises due to the slow economy." B: "I'm a little disappointed, I'll see you tomorrow." A: "Ok. Think about what I said and we'll try to give you more assignments with more visibility."Quitting or Leaving Work - Interactive Practice
Click on Listen All and follow along. After becoming comfortable with the entire conversation, become Person A by clicking on the Person A button. You will hear only Person B through the audio file. There will be a silence for you to repeat the sentences of Person A. Do the same for Person B. The speed of the conversation is native speed. Use the pause button if the pause between each sentence is too fast for you. After practicing several times, you will be able to speak as fast as a native. B: "Come on in. What's on your mind?" A: "Well, I have decided to leave the company. I had a wonderful time here, but it is time to move on for me." B: "May I ask why?" A: "I got an offer from ABC Company. It's a management position and I really don't want to let this opportunity pass me by. You know I have been looking for a management position here, but all the positions here are full." B: "I understand your decision and you have my support." A: "Thanks for understanding. I can work here two more weeks." B: "Ok. Will you be able to finish your current assignment?" A: "Yes I will. And if you hire someone within two weeks, I would be happy to provide training on my areas." B: "That would be great. We're going to miss you here." A: "I'm going to miss this place too. Thanks." 2 Listen All | Person A | Person BA: "Hi Mary, I interviewed with another company and they offered me a position. I wanted to let you know before I made my decision." B: "I'm sorry to hear that. But I appreciate you telling me before you accepted the offer." A: "I really enjoy my work here, but I was concerned about the lack of opportunities. I put in effort to gain more experience here, but the projects are limited." B: "What would help you to decide to stay?" A: "I would consider staying more if I could change my position. I would love working in this same group, but I would like to be doing something different. And finally, they offered me 6 percent more than my current salary." B: "When do you have to make a decision by?" A: "They want me to respond in a week." B: "Let me see what I can do and I'll let you know tomorrow or on Wednesday. Can you wait until then?" A: "That's not a problem." B: "Great. I'm going to do everything I can to keep you on board." A: "I appreciate what you are doing for me." B: "It's the least I can do. You're a valuable asset here."Small Talk - Interactive Practice
Click on Listen All and follow along. After becoming comfortable with the entire conversation, become Person A by clicking on the Person A button. You will hear only Person B through the audio file. There will be a silence for you to repeat the sentences of Person A. Do the same for Person B. The speed of the conversation is native speed. Use the pause button if the pause between each sentence is too fast for you. After practicing several times, you will be able to speak as fast as a native. B: "How's it going? I'm meeting up with a friend here." A: "How have you been man?" B: "Not too bad. I'm still in school and having a little fun." A: "How are you enjoying Mr. Lee's history class?" B: "It's so boring." A: "Tell me about it. If it wasn't a requirement, I wouldn't have taken it." B: "How about you? What have you been up to?" A: "I finished school last spring. I'm searching for a job now, but I'm slacking off." B: "I heard the job market is not that hot right now." A: "I could always take a low end job, but I'm not that desperate yet." B: "Well, good luck to you." A: "Thanks. It was good seeing you again." B: "Yeah. I'll catch you later." A: "Have a good night." 2 Listen All | Person A | Person BA: "You're John right?" B: "Yes. Oh, you're in my English class right?" A: "Yeah. I'm Martha." B: "Well it's good to finally meet you." A: "How are you enjoying the class?" B: "I'm not sure. Some days it seems ok, but other days I am totally bored in class." A: "I know what you mean. Do you know what is wrong with the weather these days? I haven't seen the sun in 2 weeks." B: "The weather has been pretty terrible recently." A: "I'm really hoping the weather gets better." B: "Do you have something coming up?" A: "To tell you the truth, it's just depressing seeing so much rain." B: "I don't blame you. It has been pretty gloomy for some time now." A: "This is my stop. I'll see you later." B: "I'll see you in class. Bye."Greeting - Interactive Practice
Click on Listen All and follow along. After becoming comfortable with the entire conversation, become Person A by clicking on the Person A button. You will hear only Person B through the audio file. There will be a silence for you to repeat the sentences of Person A. Do the same for Person B. The speed of the conversation is native speed. Use the pause button if the pause between each sentence is too fast for you. After practicing several times, you will be able to speak as fast as a native. B: "I'm doing great. How about you?" A: "Not too bad." B: "Do you come to this restaurant often?" A: "I've been here a couple of times, but I don't come on a regular basis. What have you been up to?" B: "I'm pretty busy at work these days, but otherwise, everything is great." A: "Well, have a good evening." B: "You too." 2 Listen All | Person A | Person BA: "It's nice to meet you. My name is Jack." B: "I'm Steve. It's a pleasure to meet you." A: "What was your name again?" B: "Steve." A: "So Steve, What do you do for a living?" B: "I work at the public library. How about you?" A: "I'm a University student." B: "That's great. It was nice meeting you." A: "Yeah. It was a pleasure meeting you." 3Listen All | Person A | Person BA: "Hey Jack, it's good to see you." B: "Wow. How long has it been? It seems like more than a year. I'm doing pretty well. How about you?" A: "Not too bad." B: "What movie did you come to see?" A: "I came here to see Matrix Revolution. How about you?" B: "I'm going to watch Finding Nemo."How is your day - Interactive Practice
Click on Listen All and follow along. After becoming comfortable with the entire conversation, become Person A by clicking on the Person A button. You will hear only Person B through the audio file. There will be a silence for you to repeat the sentences of Person A. Do the same for Person B. The speed of the conversation is native speed. Use the pause button if the pause between each sentence is too fast for you. After practicing several times, you will be able to speak as fast as a native. B: "I'm watching TV." A: "What are you watching?" B: "I'm watching Friends. What are you doing?" A: "I'm doing my homework, but I really need to take a break." B: "You want to do something?" A: "Yes. But I shouldn't. I got to finish my assignment now." B: "Alright. Call me later then." A: "OK. Bye." 2 Listen All | Person A | Person BA: "Where are you going now?" B: "I'm going to the bank." A: "Aren't you supposed to be at work?" B: "I'm working now. I'm making a deposit for our company." A: "Where do you work?" B: "I work for a restaurant as a controller." A: "Wow. That's great." B: "Great seeing you. I have to go now. I'll talk to you later." 3Listen All | Person A | Person BA: "Hi Steve. What are you doing here?" B: "I'm meeting a friend here for dinner. How about you?" A: "I'm on my way home but I needed to stop by the book store to buy a text book." B: "Didn't you finish school yet?" A: "I have one more year, and then I'm done." B: "What are you majoring in?" A: "I'm majoring in Sociology" B: "How do you like your major?" A: "I really find the subject very interesting. I'm enjoying all my classes." B: "That's great." A: "I'd better go now. I don't want to miss the bus." B: "Alright, I'll talk to you later." A: "Okay. See you later."Tomorrow's Plan - Interactive Practice
Click on Listen All and follow along. After becoming comfortable with the entire conversation, become Person A by clicking on the Person A button. You will hear only Person B through the audio file. There will be a silence for you to repeat the sentences of Person A. Do the same for Person B. The speed of the conversation is native speed. Use the pause button if the pause between each sentence is too fast for you. After practicing several times, you will be able to speak as fast as a native. B: "I have class until 5 O'clock, but I'm free after that." A: "Do you want to grab dinner?" B: "I don't have any dinner plans so that sounds great." A: "What time should we meet?" B: "I need to go to the book store first, so let's meet at 6 O'clock." 2 Listen All | Person A | Person BA: "Let's go to Everland next week" B: "I can't. I'm way too busy." A: "What are you doing next week?" B: "On Monday, I'm going to meet my professor. Tuesday, I have a job interview. Wednesday, I'm going to the dentist. And on Thursday, I have to go visit my parents." A: "Why are you so busy?" B: "I've been procrastinating for a long time." 3Listen All | Person A | Person BA: "What are you doing over the weekend?" B: "I'm going to exercise, meet some friends, and then watch tv." A: "Who are you going to meet?" B: "My friend from middle school is visiting, so we are going to have dinner on Saturday." A: "How long is he going to stay?" B: "He is only here for a day." A: "Where are you going to eat dinner?" B: "I plan on taking him to an Italian restaurant."Yesterday - The Past - Interactive Practice
Click on Listen All and follow along. After becoming comfortable with the entire conversation, become Person A by clicking on the Person A button. You will hear only Person B through the audio file. There will be a silence for you to repeat the sentences of Person A. Do the same for Person B. The speed of the conversation is native speed. Use the pause button if the pause between each sentence is too fast for you. After practicing several times, you will be able to speak as fast as a native. B: "I met some friends and we had some drinks at a bar." A: "Did you drink a lot?" B: "I got so drunk that I don't remember how I got home." A: "Why did you drink so much?" B: "I was so depressed. I just wanted to forget about everything." 2 Listen All | Person A | Person BA: "How was the airplane ride?" B: "It was a twelve hour flight. It was so boring. I tried to sleep but it was too uncomfortable on the plane." A: "How about the movies they play on international flights?" B: "I saw both movies they played. I was just unlucky." A: "Did you take a book with you?" B: "I accidentally packed it with my luggage that I checked in." 3Listen All | Person A | Person BA: "What did you do last weekend?" B: "I went to a party." A: "How was the party?" B: "It was way too crowded and the food was gone before I got there." A: "What time did you get home?" B: "It was pretty boring so I left at ten and got home before eleven."Weather - Interactive Practice
Click on Listen All and follow along. After becoming comfortable with the entire conversation, become Person A by clicking on the Person A button. You will hear only Person B through the audio file. There will be a silence for you to repeat the sentences of Person A. Do the same for Person B. The speed of the conversation is native speed. Use the pause button if the pause between each sentence is too fast for you. After practicing several times, you will be able to speak as fast as a native. B: "Yeah. I wish it would be like this everyday." A: "Did you see the weather forecast?" B: "Unfortunately, it's supposed to start raining tomorrow night." 2 Listen All | Person A | Person BA: "Do you know what the weather is going to be like tomorrow?" B: "It's supposed to be the same as today. I don't think the weather will change much for the next week or so." A: "That's great." B: "Why are you so happy? Do you have anything planned?" A: "Yeah, I'm going to Everland with my family this weekend so I was hoping for good weather." 3Listen All | Person A | Person BA: "I can't believe it is raining so much." B: "It's not that bad. Last year we had floods in 4 different areas of the city." A: "Really? Does it always rain so much during this time of year?" B: "This is not as bad as usual. During the monsoon season, we usually have rain for 3 weeks."Movies - Interactive Practice
Click on Listen All and follow along. After becoming comfortable with the entire conversation, become Person A by clicking on the Person A button. You will hear only Person B through the audio file. There will be a silence for you to repeat the sentences of Person A. Do the same for Person B. The speed of the conversation is native speed. Use the pause button if the pause between each sentence is too fast for you. After practicing several times, you will be able to speak as fast as a native. B: "I have to eat dinner with my family tomorrow." A: "We can watch the late show. I think it starts at nine forty five." B: "That would be great." A: "What time can you be at the theater by?" B: "I can be there by 9:15." A: "Ok. I'll meet you there." 2 Listen All | Person A | Person BA: "What are you doing tomorrow?" B: "Nothing really." A: "Let's watch a movie or something." B: "What's on these days?" A: "I think they're playing Lord of the Rings" B: "That sounds pretty good. Let's watch that." A: "Where should we meet?" B: "How about at the subway entrance." A: "Alright. I'll meet you there at one o'clock." 3Listen All | Person A | Person BA: "Hey Steve, what are you doing these days?" B: "Just working. The same as usual." A: "Have you seen Shiri?" B: "No. I haven't seen that yet." A: "Let's go watch it tomorrow. It's a weekend and you should take a break." B: "Well, to think of it, that sounds great." A: "I'll give you a call tomorrow about noon and let you know the time." B: "Ok. I'll see you tomorrow." A: "See you." 4Listen All | Person A | Person BA: "What should we do this Saturday?" B: "Rocky six is suppose to come out this Friday." A: "Yeah, but I don't know if it is going to be any good." B: "The only reason I want to see it is because I have seen the previous five." A: "True. Ok. Let's see it this Saturday." B: "How about we hook up for lunch at 12:00, and then go see the movie afterwards." A: "Sounds like a plan. Let's meet in front of Tower Records at 12:00."Movie Types - Interactive Practice
Click on Listen All and follow along. After becoming comfortable with the entire conversation, become Person A by clicking on the Person A button. You will hear only Person B through the audio file. There will be a silence for you to repeat the sentences of Person A. Do the same for Person B. The speed of the conversation is native speed. Use the pause button if the pause between each sentence is too fast for you. After practicing several times, you will be able to speak as fast as a native. B: "I like comedies. How about you?" A: "I like action." B: "Action is fun too." 2 Listen All | Person A | Person BA: "What type of movies do you like?" B: "I like all sorts of movies, primarily drama and science fiction." A: "That's an interesting combination. How about western movies?" B: "Western and horror are the two types of movies I don't care for." A: "Why don't you like horror? They're entertaining." B: "Some are entertaining, but I find most of them stupid and childish. For example, I don't understand why a person always goes into the house alone when something is suspicious." A: "Ha ha. I know what you mean. But it's just a movie. They need for the characters to do that." 3Listen All | Person A | Person BA: "Hey, you wanna see a movie tomorrow?" B: "Sounds like a good plan. What do you want to see?" A: "How about Legally Blonde." B: "Ah, my girlfriend wanted to see that movie. I have to take her later so I don't want to watch it ahead of time. How about The Cube?" A: "Isn't that a scary movie?" B: "How scary can it be? Come on, it'll be fun." A: "Ok. I'll give it a try." B: "That's the spirit. I'll see you tomorrow after class." A: "Ok. See you tomorrow."Hobby - Interactive Practice
Click on Listen All and follow along. After becoming comfortable with the entire conversation, become Person A by clicking on the Person A button. You will hear only Person B through the audio file. There will be a silence for you to repeat the sentences of Person A. Do the same for Person B. The speed of the conversation is native speed. Use the pause button if the pause between each sentence is too fast for you. After practicing several times, you will be able to speak as fast as a native. B: "I'm at home painting." A: "I didn't know you paint. What type of painting is it?" B: "I enjoy oil painting. I learned it in one of my extra classes in college." A: "That sounds so interesting. I wish I learned a hobby." B: "Hobbies are never too late to learn. They offer a variety of classes at the local community college. You should look into it." A: "I think I will. Thanks for the info." 2 Listen All | Person A | Person BA: "Hey Joanne. What are you up to?" B: "I'm just watching some television." A: "I'm so bored. I don't know what I'm going to do today and it is only ten in the morning." B: "Me too. Do you think we are boring people?" A: "I don't think we are boring. It's just that we don't have any hobbies." B: "That's right. What do you think we should do as a hobby?" A: "That all depends on what you like to do. For example, I like to doodle on the notepad, so I'm thinking about doing some real drawings." B: "I like to play the piano for fun." A: "Yeah. That can be a good hobby." B: "Hobbies are great. I'm going to make a list of all the things I like to do." A: "That's a great idea. I'm going to do the same."Exercise Gym - Interactive Practice
Click on Listen All and follow along. After becoming comfortable with the entire conversation, become Person A by clicking on the Person A button. You will hear only Person B through the audio file. There will be a silence for you to repeat the sentences of Person A. Do the same for Person B. The speed of the conversation is native speed. Use the pause button if the pause between each sentence is too fast for you. After practicing several times, you will be able to speak as fast as a native. B: "When I have some time, I like to exercise." A: "Do you go jogging or do you go to a health club?" B: "I joined Samsung Health Club a couple of months ago." A: "How do you exercise?" B: "I usually spend 30 minutes on the bicycle for the cardio, and then I lift weights for about 45 minutes." A: "How often do you go?" B: "I want to go four times a week, but I'm too lazy. Last week, I only went to workout once." 2 Listen All | Person A | Person BA: "Hey Jimmy. Let's go workout later today." B: "Sure. What time do you want to go?" A: "How about at 3:30." B: "That sounds good. Today we work on Legs and forearm." A: "Hey. I just played basketball earlier, so my legs are a little sore. Let's work out on arms and stomach today." B: "I'm on a weekly schedule. You're messing everything up." A: "C'mon. We're only switching two days. You can do legs on Friday." B: "Alright. I'll meet you at the gym at 3:30 then." 3Listen All | Person A | Person BA: "Damn Scott. You got big." B: "Yeah, I've been working out a lot." A: "How long have you been lifting weights?" B: "For a year and a half." A: "Yeah. Last time I saw you, it was like 2 years ago." B: "Has it been that long?" A: "How often do you go to the gym?" B: "I usually go every other day for about 3 hours." A: "That's a lot." B: "Yeah, I used to work out for an hour a day 4 times a week, and I saw no results. This is what you have to do to get noticeable results." A: "I don't think I have the discipline for that." B: "Just think of it as a hobby. Then it's actually fun."General Things Review - Interactive Practice
Click on Listen All and follow along. After becoming comfortable with the entire conversation, become Person A by clicking on the Person A button. You will hear only Person B through the audio file. There will be a silence for you to repeat the sentences of Person A. Do the same for Person B. The speed of the conversation is native speed. Use the pause button if the pause between each sentence is too fast for you. After practicing several times, you will be able to speak as fast as a native. B: "I'm doing great." A: "What movies have you seen lately?" B: "I saw Forrest Gump the other day." A: "What type of movie is that?" B: "The movie type is drama." A: "I can't believe you are watching movies. The weather is great. You should be outside." B: "I hate the hot weather. I'd rather stay indoors with the air conditioner." A: "What else do you like to do besides watching movies?" B: "I like to play computer games, read books, go shopping, and play pool." A: "Out of those what is your favorite?" B: "My favorite is to play computer games." A: "What is your favorite computer game?" B: "My favorite is Diablo. It used to be Star Craft, but it is getting a little old." A: "If you like to play so much, when do you ever exercise?" B: "Although I hate to exercise, I go jogging at least twice a week." A: "That's pretty good. By the way, what are you doing next Saturday?" B: "I am going to go to the bookstore." A: "I am having a party Saturday night at my house. If you have time, you should come." B: "That sounds like fun." A: "Great. I'll see you on Saturday." B: "Ok. See you later." 2 Listen All | Person A | Person BA: "Hello?" B: "Hi Steve. This is Mike. What are you doing?" A: "Oh, hi. I was just watching TV." B: "There's nothing to watch right now." A: "I know. I was watching a re-run. I have nothing to do and I was bored." B: "Me too. Let's get together and do something." A: "I'd like to, but I have to meet my parents in an hour for dinner. How about tomorrow?" B: "Yeah. Let's plan something tomorrow." A: "Did you hear the weather forecast for tomorrow?" B: "I think it is going to be the same as today. Clear and sunny." A: "That's great. We can do something outdoors then." B: "Are there any special events going on tomorrow?" A: "Yeah. I think there's a live outdoor concert by the river tomorrow." B: "Oh yeah. I heard about that too. Let's go check it out." A: "Do you know what time it starts?" B: "It starts at one PM." A: "Let's meet for lunch at eleven thirty and afterwards, we can head over there." B: "Perfect. I'll see you in front of the apartment at eleven thirty." 3Listen All | Person A | Person BA: "Steve. Is that you?" B: "Yeah. What's going on?" A: "Not much. What a surprise to see you here." B: "Yeah. It's been a couple of months since I saw you." A: "What have you been up to?" B: "I just started working out." A: "Really? Where do you work out at?" B: "I joined the Samsung Health Club last month." A: "What do you mostly do during your workout?" B: "I concentrate mostly on my legs, chest, arms and stomach." A: "I should start exercising more." B: "It's hard work while exercising, but it is a great feeling when I get done." A: "I have a running machine at home. I used to use it, but I already got sick of it." B: "Exercising at home is hard. The environment is not suited for exercising." A: "If I want to exercise, I will need to join a gym." B: "I have a couple of guest passes. You want to check out my health club." A: "That's a good idea. Let's go over the weekend." B: "Great. I'll call you Saturday morning." A: "Alright. I'll talk to you later." B: "Ok. Bye." 4Listen All | Person A | Person BA: "The weather is terrible." B: "Yeah. It's been raining a lot these days." A: "I have been watching a lot of videos at home because of the constant rain." B: "Have you heard when it's supposed to get better?" A: "I saw the weather report, and it's going to rain for the next eight days." B: "That sucks so much. What are we going to do?" A: "I'm getting pretty bored. We should do something despite the rain." B: "I'm with you. What do you have in mind?" A: "I haven't been to the Mall in a long time. Let's go there." B: "That sounds good. They have a movie theater there, so if we get bored, we can watch a movie." A: "Great. I'll stop by your place now." B: "Ok. Don't forget to bring your umbrella. The rain can start up again anytime."University Classes - Interactive Practice
Click on Listen All and follow along. After becoming comfortable with the entire conversation, become Person A by clicking on the Person A button. You will hear only Person B through the audio file. There will be a silence for you to repeat the sentences of Person A. Do the same for Person B. The speed of the conversation is native speed. Use the pause button if the pause between each sentence is too fast for you. After practicing several times, you will be able to speak as fast as a native. B: "I register this Friday." A: "What classes do you plan on taking?" B: "I really want to take the communication class, but I don't know if it will be available." A: "Is that class really that popular?" B: "Yeah. I tried to get in last semester, but it was full by the time I registered." A: "What other classes are you going to take?" B: "I still need to take English 201, but I really don't like writing." A: "I took that class already. There is a lot of writing, but it's not that bad." B: "Oh really? Who was the instructor? There are like 4 different instructors to choose from." A: "I had Professor Mahoney." B: "Is he an easy grader?" A: "I'm not sure if he is or not, but I thought he was definitely fair." B: "Do you mind if I ask you what you got?" A: "Not at all. I got a 3.8." B: "Well, what did you get in English 101 last year?" A: "I got a 4.0 in that class." B: "Well, I can't compare to you. I got a 3.1 in English 101. That means if you got a lower grade in English 201, it must be harder." A: "It's not what it appears. I actually tried harder in the 101 class. If I put as much effort into the 201 class, I would have received the same grade." B: "Oh. That helps. Thanks." 2 Listen All | Person A | Person BA: "Hey Mike. I forgot about registration. I'm a day late, so all the classes are mostly full. What do you think I should do?" B: "You're screwed. You can't do anything about that. You have to hope that you get some classes that will be useful." A: "Do you think going to the registration building will help at all?" B: "No. They will tell you the same thing in a worse way." A: "Did you register yet?" B: "Of course. Registering for classes is not something you want to miss." A: "What classes do you think are still open?" B: "Well, I know psychology 101 is a big class, so there will always be seats in that class. You can also get into Sociology." A: "That's helpful. Thanks. But what do you think about philosophy? I wanted to take that class this semester." B: "I took that class last year. The professor is really cool, so if you go to his office, you can have him sign a card that will let you in even if the class is full." A: "He does that?" B: "I guess that's because so many people drop out of that class." A: "That makes sense. I think I'll do that. Thanks for all the help." B: "No problem man." 3Listen All | Person A | Person BA: "Did you get your grades yet?" B: "Yeah. My whole GPA is screwed up now." A: "Why? What happened?" B: "Well, I bombed my econ final and ended up with a 1.7." A: "Ouch. You must be very disappointed." B: "Well, it's my fault because I didn't study as much as I should have." A: "Why don't you re-take the class next year?" B: "That's what I plan on doing unless I keep screwing up. How did you do this semester?" A: "I didn't do that well either. I ended up with a 3.2 this semester. That drops my total GPA to 3.45." B: "My GPA is pretty similar to yours. I have a 3.1 now because of the stupid econ class." A: "What was your GPA before this semester?" B: "I was sitting happy with a 3.4." A: "Why did it go down so much?" B: "Let's just say I screwed up more than my econ class." A: "What happened to you?" B: "I started playing StarCraft and ended up wasting a lot of time." A: "You better stop slacking off." B: "You're right. I'm not going to play games during school anymore." 4Listen All | Person A | Person BA: "Did you ever take History 231?" B: "Yeah. Last semester." A: "Who was the professor?" B: "It was Professor Johnson." A: "I have him this semester. What do you think about him?" B: "He's a terrible instructor and demands a lot, but fortunately, he's an easy grader." A: "What did you end up getting?" B: "I got an A-. Sounds good, but none of my test scores were that high, so I don't know how I got a decent grade." A: "That's probably because he grades on a curve." B: "Are you enjoying the class so far?" A: "I hate it and I was about to withdrawal. But after hearing your experience, I think I will tough it out." B: "Yes. Definitely stay in the class. You will get a better grade than your test scores. He does that deliberately to make all the students study a lot." A: "Thanks for letting me know. I feel relieved now." 5Listen All | Person A | Person BA: "Hi Mark." B: "Oh, hi Stacy." A: "How was your summer vacation?" B: "I worked over the summer at a restaurant. Have to make tuition money right? What did you do?" A: "I took summer school. I withdrew from two of my classes last year so I wanted to make them up." B: "So are you officially a junior now?" A: "Yeah. And I have 5 credits to spare. I only needed to take 10 credits over the summer, but I took 15 because the price was the same." B: "That makes sense. So where is Nicole?" A: "She dropped out of school completely." B: "Really? Why?" A: "She worked at a startup company as an intern and since the business did well, they asked her if she wanted to work full time." B: "Wow. She's so lucky. She doesn't have a degree and she already has a job." A: "It sounds good now, but I'm traditional. I want the degree, so I wouldn't have accepted the offer." B: "Do you know how much they are paying her?" A: "I don't know. But I bet it must have been a good offer, or she wouldn't have accepted it."Examinations - Interactive Practice
Click on Listen All and follow along. After becoming comfortable with the entire conversation, become Person A by clicking on the Person A button. You will hear only Person B through the audio file. There will be a silence for you to repeat the sentences of Person A. Do the same for Person B. The speed of the conversation is native speed. Use the pause button if the pause between each sentence is too fast for you. After practicing several times, you will be able to speak as fast as a native. B: "Yeah. It was hard. When do you take it?" A: "I take it tomorrow morning. There is so much material, that I don't know what to emphasize on. What types of questions did you get?" B: "Mostly on the civil war. You should also study the impact Martin Luther King Jr. had on American society." A: "How about Abraham Lincoln? Did you get any questions about him?" B: "I only had 1 question about him. But you might get more. I don't know if he will have the same exam or not." A: "Hopefully he will use the same exam, cause I'm going to spend most of my time studying the civil war. It is a huge section and that is what he lectured the most on in class." B: "If you can't study everything, then that is probably the best way to go." A: "Alright. Thanks for the info. I gotta go to the library now." B: "Good luck." A: "Thanks. See ya." 2 Listen All | Person A | Person BA: "Hey Jack. You look tired. What's going on?" B: "It's finals week and I have been up all night studying." A: "How many exams do you have left?" B: "Three more to go?" A: "Have you been keeping up, or are you cramming everything?" B: "If I was keeping up, I wouldn't be needing to stay up all night." A: "Ha ha ha. Looks like you are in for a tough week." B: "Tell me about it. How about you? What have you been up to?" A: "I finished my last final this morning." B: "So you're completely done?" A: "No. I have one more report that is due this Friday. I haven't started it yet, but it shouldn't be too tough." B: "How many pages do you have to write?" A: "It's a 10 page paper on habitual behavior for psychology 211." B: "You wanna take one of my exams for me?" A: "I would if I could, but you know that's not possible." B: "Yeah, I know." A: "If you need help with your chemistry class, I can help you over the weekend." B: "That would be great." A: "Let's get together Saturday around lunch time." B: "You don't know how much this means to me. Thanks." A: "Don't mention it. I'll see you on Saturday."Roommate - Interactive Practice
Click on Listen All and follow along. After becoming comfortable with the entire conversation, become Person A by clicking on the Person A button. You will hear only Person B through the audio file. There will be a silence for you to repeat the sentences of Person A. Do the same for Person B. The speed of the conversation is native speed. Use the pause button if the pause between each sentence is too fast for you. After practicing several times, you will be able to speak as fast as a native. B: "Hey Jack. I'm Seth." A: "It's nice to meet you." B: "Looks like we're going to be roommates." A: "Yeah." B: "So where are you from?" A: "I'm from Tacoma. How about you?" B: "I'm from Ontario." A: "In Canada?" B: "No. It's in California. It's a smaller city in southern California." A: "So what made you come here?" B: "I wanted to go to a different state." A: "I see. Hey, if you don't mind, I took this side of the room." B: "No problem. They look the same to me." A: "Are you a morning person or a night person." B: "I'm a night person." A: "That's great. So am I. I like to sleep in the morning." B: "That should work out well then." 2 Listen All | Person A | Person BA: "Hi. I'm Sara." B: "My name is Jessica. It's nice to meet you." A: "Yes. It's nice to meet you as well." B: "Have you been here long?" A: "I got here about an hour ago. Do you want me to show you around?" B: "Yeah. That would be great. The most important is the bathroom right?" A: "Definitely. But we have to share the bathroom with the whole floor. The break room is over there. The bathroom is right across from the break room, and finally, the RA (resident advisor) is in room 315." B: "I'm glad there is a TV in the break room. I like to watch TV." A: "Me too. So I brought one. I haven't unpacked it yet, but it's a little TV that works." B: "Cool. I brought a refrigerator. I like to store some snacks in there. Feel free to use it." A: "That would be perfect. I think we're going to have a great time." B: "Do you sleep pretty late, or are you a morning person?" A: "I have never been either. I'm very flexible with sleeping times. Anyways, I'm a deep sleeper so a little noise never bothers me." B: "That's good to know. I'm usually a night person, but I'm very quiet if my roommate is sleeping." A: "As long as you don't blast the music while I'm sleeping, I should be fine. Did you eat lunch yet?" B: "No. Is there a cafeteria in the building?" A: "Yeah. I'll show you." 3Listen All | Person A | Person BA: "I'm calling about the available room. Is it still available?" B: "Yes it is. Do you know where we're located?" A: "Yeah. I drove by this morning and I liked the location. What's the rent?" B: "It's $850 a month. So you would pay $425 a month plus half of the bills." A: "How big is the place?" B: "It's a two bedroom, one bath and roughly about 800 square feet." A: "Is the complex pretty quiet? Can you hear a lot of noise or anything like that?" B: "They have a strict policy in the apartment complex concerning noise level. So it stays very quiet after 10 PM." A: "Are you the only person who lives there now?" B: "Yeah. I'm only looking for one roommate." A: "Everything sounds good. Can we schedule a time to meet so I can look at the place?" B: "I'm available anytime today or tomorrow." A: "How about if I come over now?" B: "That works with me. But what is your name?" A: "Oh, my name is Brad." B: "Ok. I'm Randy. So I'll see you in a bit?" A: "Should only take about 15 minutes to get there." B: "Sounds good."Fraternity and Sorority - Interactive Practice
Click on Listen All and follow along. After becoming comfortable with the entire conversation, become Person A by clicking on the Person A button. You will hear only Person B through the audio file. There will be a silence for you to repeat the sentences of Person A. Do the same for Person B. The speed of the conversation is native speed. Use the pause button if the pause between each sentence is too fast for you. After practicing several times, you will be able to speak as fast as a native. B: "I'm doing great. How about you?" A: "Me too. I just finished moving into the dormitory. It seems alright." B: "Oh man. You should have joined a fraternity." A: "You're in a fraternity? Which one?" B: "I'm with Delta Tau Delta. It is going to be so much fun." A: "How much does it cost?" B: "I have to pay $475 a month. It comes with two meals (a day) though." A: "Damn. That's the same price I'm paying for the dormitory. How often do they take new members?" B: "Every semester. When they start recruiting, I'll be sure to let you know." A: "That would be great." 2 Listen All | Person A | Person BA: "Hi, I was looking to join a sorority. Where can I find information about your sorority?" B: "What would you like to know?" A: "How many people are in this sorority?" B: "We have 72 ladies so far. We have enough room for 28 more girls." A: "How often do you have parties here?" B: "Only about once a month." A: "Do you provide meals here?" B: "We provide breakfast and dinner every Monday through Friday." A: "Can I take a tour of the place?" B: "Sure. I can show you around." A: "Wow. It looks great here. What do I need to do to get in?" B: "You need to fill out this application, and then we will call you for an interview. If you pass the interview, then you will have to go through initiation." A: "What is involved in the initiation?" B: "That's a secret."College Partying - Interactive Practice
Click on Listen All and follow along. After becoming comfortable with the entire conversation, become Person A by clicking on the Person A button. You will hear only Person B through the audio file. There will be a silence for you to repeat the sentences of Person A. Do the same for Person B. The speed of the conversation is native speed. Use the pause button if the pause between each sentence is too fast for you. After practicing several times, you will be able to speak as fast as a native. B: "Not much. Just having a good time." A: "That's all good. What year are you?" B: "I'm a sophomore. How about you?" A: "This is my third year." B: "Are you in this fraternity?" A: "No. I'm over at Beta Psi." B: "I have a friend over there. Do you know Johnny Parker?" A: "Yeah. He joined us last year. He a friend of yours?" B: "Yeah. We went to high school together." A: "Right on. What's your name?" B: "Roger Dunkin. How about you?" A: "Steve Leary. It's nice to meet you." B: "Yeah." A: "What have you been drinking?" B: "Just Heinekens" A: "Oh man. You have been missing the good stuff. Are you OK with shots?" B: "Hell yeah." A: "Cool. Follow me. I'll show you the good stuff." 2 Listen All | Person A | Person BA: "You come to a lot of these parties?" B: "As many as I can find." A: "Ha ha ha." B: "Any fine ladies around here?" A: "I just checked out a group of chicks heading towards the kitchen." B: "Were they with any guys?" A: "No, they were alone." B: "What are you doing just standing here then? Let's go see if they want any company." A: "Sounds like a good plan. Let's go." 3Listen All | Person A | Person BA: "Do you go to school here?" B: "No. I go to a different university." A: "So do you know Johnny?" B: "I came here with a friend who knows Johnny. I met him a couple of times. He's a cool guy. So you go to this school?" A: "Yeah." B: "What year are you?" A: "I'm a junior. How about you?" B: "Me too. But I bet I'll be in school for 4 more years. I still haven't decided on my major." A: "I'm in a similar boat. I'm in the English department, but I want to change majors. If I do that, then I'll have to go to school for another year." B: "That's life I guess." A: "I'm going to get another drink. It was nice meeting you." B: "Yeah. Nice meeting you too."Smoking - Interactive Practice
Click on Listen All and follow along. After becoming comfortable with the entire conversation, become Person A by clicking on the Person A button. You will hear only Person B through the audio file. There will be a silence for you to repeat the sentences of Person A. Do the same for Person B. The speed of the conversation is native speed. Use the pause button if the pause between each sentence is too fast for you. After practicing several times, you will be able to speak as fast as a native. B: "Just taking a smoke break." A: "I forgot my cigarette today. Do you have another one?" B: "Sure. Here you go." A: "Thanks." B: "I didn't know you smoked." A: "Really? I've been smoking for over a year now." B: "Oh. You're new to smoking still. I've been smoking for 7 years." A: "You ever tired to quit?" B: "Many times. I'm really addicted. It's harder to stop than you think." A: "Yeah. I tried to quit last month, and I thought it was going to be easy, but it turns out that I'm still smoking." B: "I highly recommend you quit soon. The longer you smoke, the harder it becomes to quit." A: "I think you're right. Alright. Gotta go to class. Thanks for the cigarette. I'll talk to you later." B: "No problem. I'll talk to you later." 2 Listen All | Person A | Person BA: "Hey Jane. How are you doing?" B: "Hi Jack. I'm doing great." A: "I hope you haven't been waiting too long." B: "No. I just got here a few minutes ago." A: "Do you know if smoking is allowed here?" B: "I think this is a no-smoking place. Do you want to go somewhere else?" A: "That's alright. I don't need to smoke." B: "Why don't you quit?" A: "I never thought about it. All my friends smoke, and we hang out a lot." B: "So do you smoke by yourself?" A: "When I started I didn't, but after a few months I started smoking at home. Usually when I'm bored." B: "Do you smoke cause your're bored?" A: "Yeah. It helps to kill the time. I also think it's out of habit. I'm so used to having a cigarette every now and then." B: "How much do you smoke in a day?" A: "I smoke about a half pack a day." B: "Well, I think you should quit. You know it's bad for you?" A: "I always knew it was bad, but I never thought about it." B: "You better start thinking about it now. You might not feel the difference now, but after 10 years of smoking, you might feel it and then it will be too late." A: "That's a good point. I'll try to quit." B: "Good. And if you need any support, I'll always be here for you." A: "Thanks."Drinking - Interactive Practice
Click on Listen All and follow along. After becoming comfortable with the entire conversation, become Person A by clicking on the Person A button. You will hear only Person B through the audio file. There will be a silence for you to repeat the sentences of Person A. Do the same for Person B. The speed of the conversation is native speed. Use the pause button if the pause between each sentence is too fast for you. After practicing several times, you will be able to speak as fast as a native. B: "Depending on what you consider a lot." A: "How frequently do you drink?" B: "Couple times a week. How about you?" A: "Only when I go out. I'm not a big drinker." B: "How much can you drink?" A: "I usually only have 2 beers." B: "You're a light weight." A: "How much can you drink?" B: "I'm usually drinking all night long. At least 10 drinks." A: "Don't you spend a lot of money then?" B: "No. We usually go to places that have specials. Dante's over on the Ave has $5.00 pitchers on Mondays. So for ten, fifteen bucks, I can get a lot of drinks." A: "That's true." B: "If you don't like beer, have you tried mixed drinks? Some of them are pretty good." A: "I like beer, it's just that I get a headache when I drink more than 3." B: "You just have to build up a tolerance. I used to be like that. But your body gets used to it." A: "It'll take awhile, but I'm working on it." B: "Hey let's go out tomorrow night. The Ram Bar and Grill is having a special on pitchers." A: "Alright."College Related Review - Interactive Practice
Click on Listen All and follow along. After becoming comfortable with the entire conversation, become Person A by clicking on the Person A button. You will hear only Person B through the audio file. There will be a silence for you to repeat the sentences of Person A. Do the same for Person B. The speed of the conversation is native speed. Use the pause button if the pause between each sentence is too fast for you. After practicing several times, you will be able to speak as fast as a native. B: "Yeah, what a coincidence. It's good to see you." A: "It's been a while, hasn't it?" B: "What have you been up to?" A: "Not much. Just school and stuff." B: "Where are you going now?" A: "I'm going to the registration building to see if I can withdrawal from one of my classes." B: "Are you bombing the class or something?" A: "Partially that, but mostly it's a boring class and I am getting nothing out of it." B: "Where are you off to?" A: "I finished class for today so I am meeting my girlfriend to watch a movie?" B: "What are you watching?" A: "The Lord of the Rings. I haven't seen it yet. Have you?" B: "Yeah, I saw it about a month ago. It was really good." A: "Don't tell me anything about it. I don't want to ruin the surprise." B: "No problem. Hey, what are you doing this weekend?" A: "Nothing really. I was going to rent a video and just hang out at home." B: "My fraternity is going to have a party on Saturday night. Wanna come?" A: "Hey, that sounds like fun. What fraternity are you in?" B: "I'm over at the Delta Fraternity house." A: "Cool. Give me your number and I'll call you Saturday." B: "It's 206-555-1212." A: "Alright. I'll see you on Saturday." B: "See you later." 2 Listen All | Person A | Person BA: "You're Jason right?" B: "Yeah. Tom right?" A: "Yeah. What's going on?" B: "Not much. Just hanging out. A bunch of guys are playing a game for shots." A: "You're not playing?" B: "I had enough to drink already." A: "I hear ya." B: "You in school or do you work?" A: "I work at a marketing company. How about you?" B: "I'm still in school. I have one more year left." A: "What are you majoring in?" B: "I'm majoring in computer science." A: "Where do you want to work?" B: "I would love to work at Microsoft. But it's pretty tough to get in." A: "So I hear. So you come to this club often?" B: "Every now and then. I usually hang out at Pioneer Square." A: "Yeah. That's a cool place. There are a ton of bars to hit in that area." B: "Are you here with Mike?" A: "No. Some of my work buddies. I haven't seen Mike in a while now. Do you know what he is up to?" B: "He's going to grad school." A: "What a surprise. I didn't know he was so studious." B: "Yeah. Surprised us all. Hey, I'm going to get another drink. You want one?" A: "It's alright. I still have to work on this one." B: "I'll catch you later." A: "Alright man." 3Listen All | Person A | Person BA: "Hi. My name is Robert." B: "I'm John. It's nice to meet you." A: "Do you know what this professor is like?" B: "I have no idea. This is my first year." A: "You a freshman? Me too. Where are you from?" B: "I'm from San Francisco." A: "I've been there a few times. It's a great city." B: "Where are you from?" A: "I grew up in this area all my life." B: "So you know where all the fun places to hang out right?" A: "Yeah. The best place is over by the water. They have a lot of clubs and bars." B: "I drove by that area before. I didn't know it was a college hang-out." A: "It gets pretty wild over there sometimes. You should go." B: "Sounds like a good idea. Do you know what you are majoring in yet?" A: "Not yet. I'm leaning towards business, but that's only if I can't get into computer science. How about you?" B: "I want to go to med school, so I'll probably end up majoring in biology." A: "That's cool." B: "Is the weather this bad all the time in the fall?" A: "Yap. This is a typical autumn. It gets worse though. At least it's not raining that much." B: "That sucks." A: "You'll get used to it. In the meantime, you'll have to watch a lot of movies. Seems like the only thing to do with the bad weather." B: "Too expensive. Can you believe how much movies cost these days?" A: "Yeah. It's crazy. It's like 9 bucks a movie. I remember when it was half that." B: "Unless it's a date, I'm not going to pay that much to watch a movie." A: "That makes sense." B: "Oh. The professor is coming. I'll talk to you later." A: "Alright."Health - Interactive Practice
Click on Listen All and follow along. After becoming comfortable with the entire conversation, become Person A by clicking on the Person A button. You will hear only Person B through the audio file. There will be a silence for you to repeat the sentences of Person A. Do the same for Person B. The speed of the conversation is native speed. Use the pause button if the pause between each sentence is too fast for you. After practicing several times, you will be able to speak as fast as a native. B: "Not much. I started exercising." A: "Trying to get in shape?" B: "Yeah, I need to start improving my health." A: "Me too. What are you doing besides exercising?" B: "That's about all." A: "I think if you eat better, it will help tremendously." B: "Sleep is good too. I heard people who sleep an average of eight hours a day have less health problems." A: "Looks like there are a lot of things to do to stay healthy." B: "True. But I think it is worth it. When you get old, you want to be healthy and active." 2 Listen All | Person A | Person BA: "Did your wife give birth yet?" B: "Yeah. She's a healthy beautiful girl." A: "Congratulations. How is your wife doing?" B: "She is tired, but getting a lot of rest now." A: "That's good to hear." B: "I'm just glad there were no complications." A: "If your wife and baby are both happy, what more can you ask for?" B: "It's been a week, and I haven't slept that well." A: "That's normal for anyone with a newborn." B: "Yeah, but it's so hard. I have to work, and then go home and take care of my wife and the baby. I'm going to get sick at this rate." A: "You'll get used to it. After everything stabilizes, you can regain your health." B: "That's true. I should make sure my wife and baby stay healthy during this time." 3Listen All | Person A | Person BA: "I haven't seen your father in like 5 years. How is he doing?" B: "He's not doing too well." A: "Why? What's wrong?" B: "About a year ago, he started feeling weak all the time." A: "Is it due to old age or is he sick?" B: "Maybe a little of both. The doctors can't point out anything specifically. I think it is because he didn't take care of himself during his youth." A: "That makes sense. It's important to take care of your health early in life." B: "That's what my father tells me almost everyday." A: "Well, I hope he starts feeling better. Say hi to him for me." B: "Thanks. I'll let him know."Body Parts - Interactive Practice
Click on Listen All and follow along. After becoming comfortable with the entire conversation, become Person A by clicking on the Person A button. You will hear only Person B through the audio file. There will be a silence for you to repeat the sentences of Person A. Do the same for Person B. The speed of the conversation is native speed. Use the pause button if the pause between each sentence is too fast for you. After practicing several times, you will be able to speak as fast as a native. B: "Oh. Hi Matt. I went snowboarding yesterday and my whole body aches." A: "Was it your first time?" B: "Yeah. And I never want to go again." A: "I remember the first time I went. My back was sore, I couldn't sit down because it hurt my butt, and my legs would cramp if I walked too fast." B: "That's exactly how I feel now." A: "It's only like that the first couple of times." B: "Ha. There won't be a next time." A: "You gotta give it a chance. It's fun after a while." B: "I'll think about it after I start feeling better. Right now, I don't even want to hear the word snowboarding." 2 Listen All | Person A | Person BA: "Ahhchooo!" B: "You've been sneezing a lot lately. Are you sick or something?" A: "No. Every spring time around April, I'm stricken with allergies." B: "I never have seasonal allergies." A: "Consider yourself lucky." B: "What are all the symptoms?" A: "Well, as you just saw, I sneeze a lot. Also, my nose becomes very runny, my throat sometimes itches, and my eyes start to water." B: "That doesn't sound good." A: "No it's not. So you don't have any type of allergies?" B: "Well, I have a severe allergic reaction to alcohol. It runs in the family." A: "Everyone to some extent is allergic to alcohol." B: "I get it pretty bad. My whole face turns red, including my ears. My eyes become bloodshot, and I start to itch all over my body." A: "That's pretty bad." B: "But that doesn't stop me from drinking. Hahaha."Dieting - Interactive Practice
Click on Listen All and follow along. After becoming comfortable with the entire conversation, become Person A by clicking on the Person A button. You will hear only Person B through the audio file. There will be a silence for you to repeat the sentences of Person A. Do the same for Person B. The speed of the conversation is native speed. Use the pause button if the pause between each sentence is too fast for you. After practicing several times, you will be able to speak as fast as a native. B: "Hi Julie. Yeah. I've been on a diet for a couple of months now." A: "Wow. You look great." B: "Thanks for noticing." A: "What type of diet were you on?" B: "I joined a health club and my trainer gave me tips on eating. With a combination of eating better and exercising, I managed to lose 15 pounds in 2 months." A: "That's amazing. What tips did your trainer give you?" B: "Mostly on how to exercise, but the best advice I got was changing my eating habits. Instead of eating 3 times a day, she told me to eat 5 times a day." A: "That doesn't make sense. If you eat more, than how do you lose weight?" B: "Actually, I'm eating the same amount. I eat 5 smaller meals a day. Basically, it naturally speeds up the metabolism and helps to burn fat at a faster rate." A: "That makes sense. I'm going to try that." B: "You don't need to lose weight." A: "I have a little gut I have been trying to get rid of." B: "Ah... but remember to incorporate a little exercise into your diet." A: "Thanks for the advice." B: "No problem." 2 Listen All | Person A | Person BA: "Can you believe her? She is not even a hundred pounds and she is going off on how she wants to go on a diet." B: "Tell me about it. If I was as small as her, I wouldn't think about going on a diet." A: "Me too. But what are we going to do? I have been on 4 different diets and I can't seem to lose weight." B: "That's because you don't exercise. If you were more active, you wouldn't have a dieting problem." A: "What do you know? You are over weight too." B: "I'm not on a diet though." A: "I know. But I don't have someone to diet with. If we help each other and motivate each other, then I think we can lose some weight." B: "I like ice cream too much though." A: "C'mon. You'll feel better and look better and as a reward you can eat a little bit of ice cream here and there." B: "It does sound appealing." A: "It's a great idea. I can't believe I didn't think of this earlier. Going on a diet with a friend to back you up is a great way to succeed." B: "Okay. I'm in. Let's do it." A: "Great. I'll get our plan started right away." B: "Can we start tomorrow though?"Dating - Interactive Practice
Click on Listen All and follow along. After becoming comfortable with the entire conversation, become Person A by clicking on the Person A button. You will hear only Person B through the audio file. There will be a silence for you to repeat the sentences of Person A. Do the same for Person B. The speed of the conversation is native speed. Use the pause button if the pause between each sentence is too fast for you. After practicing several times, you will be able to speak as fast as a native. B: "I'm a friend of Stacy." A: "Stacy Miller? I know her." B: "Really? How do you know her?" A: "We went to middle school together." B: "That's cool. What a small world." A: "So how do you know Stacy?" B: "We went to the same sorority." A: "What did you major in?" B: "I majored in Sociology." A: "Really? Me too. That's kinda cool." B: "Where did you go to school?" A: "I went to Berkley." B: "So what are you doing here in New York?" A: "I work at a consulting firm." B: "Isn't that hard work?" A: "It was in the beginning, but I got used to it. It's a lot of hours though." B: "I bet. I don't like working more than 40 hours. I need time to play." A: "I hear that. I wish I had more time to play. But I do like my job." B: "I think it is important to like your job." A: "I like talking with you." B: "Really? I feel the same way." A: "Do you wanna go out sometime, like dinner or something?" B: "I'd like that. Here, let me give you my number." 2 Listen All | Person A | Person BA: "You see that chick over there?" B: "The one in the red shirt?" A: "Yeah. Isn't she hot?" B: "She's alright." A: "Just alright?!? She's hot!" B: "Why don't you go talk to her?" A: "You think she's out of my league?" B: "Hell no! You're just a chicken that's all." A: "C'mon. I get nervous when I talk to girls." B: "Why don't you go stand next to her for a while and if an opportunity comes up, strike a conversation." A: "What do I talk about?" B: "It doesn't matter. You gotta find what she's interested in and go with that." A: "I don't know..." B: "Do you want me to go talk to her?" A: "No. Stay away from her." B: "If you don't do anything, I'll bet somebody else will." A: "Ok already. I'll try."Engagement - Interactive Practice
Click on Listen All and follow along. After becoming comfortable with the entire conversation, become Person A by clicking on the Person A button. You will hear only Person B through the audio file. There will be a silence for you to repeat the sentences of Person A. Do the same for Person B. The speed of the conversation is native speed. Use the pause button if the pause between each sentence is too fast for you. After practicing several times, you will be able to speak as fast as a native. B: "Hey Matt. I'm going to ask Martha to marry me?" A: "Really? When did you decide this?" B: "I always knew she was the one, but I decided to pop the big question about 2 weeks ago. I'm just debating on how to do it." A: "That's exciting man." B: "So how did you propose?" A: "You shouldn't use my example. It wasn't special. I kind of wish I made it more special but it's too late now." B: "What do you think I should do?" A: "There are a lot of options. You can surprise her over dinner, or ask her in a public area, or if you have the balls, ask her father in front of her." B: "I never thought about that." A: "Thought about what?" B: "Asking her father in front of her. How do you think she will react?" A: "I don't know. You should know how she's going to react. She is your girlfriend." B: "I think that's the idea I was looking for. Thanks man." A: "Don't mention it. Good luck. You're going to need it." 2 Listen All | Person A | Person BA: "Hey Sarah. How are you doing?" B: "I'm doing great. How about you Jessica?" A: "Nothing new. You look happy though. Something special happen recently?" B: "Yeah. I got engaged last week." A: "Really? No way. I'm so happy for you. Congratulations." B: "Thanks." A: "So tell me all about it? How did he propose to you?" B: "He took me to a very nice restaurant and when I opened the menu, there was a big message in the menu saying will you marry me. And then, he got on his knees and showed me a beautiful ring." A: "That's so nice. Were there a lot of people watching?" B: "Yeah. The whole restaurant was full. But I didn't care. Everyone applauded when we were hugging after I said yes." A: "When is the big date?" B: "We set the date for June 15th." A: "That's in eight months. You are going to be so busy preparing for the wedding." B: "I know. But I wanted to ask you if you would be one of my bride's maid." A: "Really? I'd love to."Honeymoon - Interactive Practice
Click on Listen All and follow along. After becoming comfortable with the entire conversation, become Person A by clicking on the Person A button. You will hear only Person B through the audio file. There will be a silence for you to repeat the sentences of Person A. Do the same for Person B. The speed of the conversation is native speed. Use the pause button if the pause between each sentence is too fast for you. After practicing several times, you will be able to speak as fast as a native. B: "I always wanted to go to Mexico. Cancun is supposed to be a great place." A: "That sounds pretty good. But how about the Caribbean?" B: "That doesn't sound too bad either. Do you know how much it would cost for airfare and hotel?" A: "If we go for 5 nights, then the total for airfare and hotel would be about one thousand seven hundred dollars. How much would it be to go to Cancun?" B: "I found a deal for only twelve hundred dollars." A: "That's a lot cheaper. Let's go to Cancun then." B: "Really? That sounds great. I picked up a lot of brochures. Let's take a look at all the things we can do." A: "That reminds me. I better make sure my passport is not expired." B: "You better make sure. If it's expired, you have to hurry and renew it." A: "We still have a couple of months. No rush." B: "What do you want to do in Cancun?" A: "I want to golf at least one day. And I also want to try surfing. Do they have instructors on the beach?" B: "Yeah. This brochure shows lessons and equipment rentals and everything. That shouldn't be a problem. I want to try snorkeling." A: "Do we need to buy snorkeling gear?" B: "No. We can just rent it there." A: "Sounds like we're going to have fun." B: "I know. I can't wait. It's going to be so fun." 2 Listen All | Person A | Person BA: "Where are you guys going for your honeymoon?" B: "We decided on Cancun, Mexico." A: "I've been there before. It's a great place." B: "What did you do there?" A: "There is so much to do. It's a big tourist place so there is access to everything." B: "That's good. I'm looking forward to our honeymoon. Especially after all the wedding plans I had to do." A: "How long are you going for?" B: "We decided on 6 days. We are leaving on Sunday and returning on Saturday." A: "That should give you plenty of time. Do you have all your travel plans in order?" B: "We just booked our flight and got our room. Everything is set." A: "You're going to have so much fun. I'm so jealous." B: "When you get married, you'll have your chance." A: "I need to find a guy first." B: "Where do you want to go for your honeymoon?" A: "Since I've been to Mexico and Hawaii before, I want to go to Australia." B: "That sounds great. It's a little out of our budget so we didn't even consider Australia." A: "For the price, Cancun is one of the best so don't have any regrets. It is a great place. So do you have a ride to the airport?" B: "My brother is going to drop us off." A: "Looks like everything is set. Just make sure to take a camera. I know many people who forgot to take a camera on their honeymoon." B: "Will do. Thanks."Married Life - Interactive Practice
Click on Listen All and follow along. After becoming comfortable with the entire conversation, become Person A by clicking on the Person A button. You will hear only Person B through the audio file. There will be a silence for you to repeat the sentences of Person A. Do the same for Person B. The speed of the conversation is native speed. Use the pause button if the pause between each sentence is too fast for you. After practicing several times, you will be able to speak as fast as a native. B: "Hi Martha. Everything is perfect." A: "Are you enjoying married life?" B: "It couldn't be better. My husband is so supportive with my work and he helps around the house so much." A: "You're so lucky. I hope to get married to a guy like that." B: "I'm so happy. Even though we are both working, we get to spend a lot of time with each other in the evening and on the weekends." A: "Do you guys do anything special?" B: "In the evening, we just sit and talk over dinner. But on the weekend, we try to go out to the beach or hit a nice restaurant, or go to a nice cafe." A: "Sounds like everything is great." 2 Listen All | Person A | Person BA: "Hey Stacy. What's going on?" B: "I'm pretty tired these days." A: "Why? You're not working so don't you have a lot of time on your hands?" B: "I have so much house work to do. I have to take care of the kids, cook, clean, laundry, and the cycle never ends." A: "How about your husband? Does he help much?" B: "Not at all. He comes home and complains about his hard day at work. He expects me to do everything. He even wants me to feed him sometimes. Can you believe that?" A: "That sucks." B: "If he wasn't so lazy, I think I wouldn't have any complaints. He mows the lawn, but can you believe he tried to convince me to do it?" A: "That's crossing the line." B: "Oh well. I'll have to live with it. What else can I do?"Health Review - Interactive Practice
Click on Listen All and follow along. After becoming comfortable with the entire conversation, become Person A by clicking on the Person A button. You will hear only Person B through the audio file. There will be a silence for you to repeat the sentences of Person A. Do the same for Person B. The speed of the conversation is native speed. Use the pause button if the pause between each sentence is too fast for you. After practicing several times, you will be able to speak as fast as a native. B: "Hey Jackie. I started dating this cute guy and decided to start exercising." A: "You're not out of shape. You look fine." B: "Well, this guy I am seeing is a personal trainer and he has a perfect body. Compared to him, I need some work." A: "How long have you seen him?" B: "We've been together for about a month and a half." A: "Did you sleep with him yet?" B: "Not yet. But before I get into bed with him, I want to look fit." A: "That's not the greatest reason to exercise, but I guess it is a valid one." B: "How about you? Anything new in your life?" A: "My father is a little ill. He has been to the doctor's quite a bit lately but they don't know what is wrong with him. He complains about stomach pains a lot these days." B: "I'm sorry to hear that. Any idea what could have caused it?" A: "He says it is because he didn't take care of himself when he was young. That's why I want to start thinking about my health." B: "I think it is important to take care of yourself while you are young too. Even though my reasons are not the best, at least I am working on it." A: "How are your parents doing?" B: "They're doing great. I'm thankful that they are healthy." A: "That's good to hear. Well, I gotta get running now. I'll catch you later." B: "Ok. Send my regards to your father." A: "I will. Thanks." 2 Listen All | Person A | Person BA: "Wow Billy. Looks like you lost a lot of weight. I could hardly recognize you." B: "Thanks. I've been on a diet for about 6 months. I'm going to ask Rachel to marry me soon and I want to be mentally and physically healthy." A: "What does being overweight have anything to do with marriage? If you love each other, that's enough right?" B: "Yeah, but I want to show her how much she means to me, and this is one way of proving it. I'm changing for the better." A: "Good for you. Hey, when do you plan on proposing to her?" B: "I think I am going to propose to her on our 2 year anniversary." A: "Is she expecting it, or will it be a surprise?" B: "I think she expects me to ask her one of these days, but not anytime soon." A: "You sure you want to settle down already? You're only 25 years old." B: "Yeah, I didn't think I would get married until I was 30, but when you know she is the one, why wait." A: "That's true. Hey, I hope everything works out. You're going to invite me to your wedding right?" B: "Of course man." A: "Gosh, I'm still shocked how much weight you lost. You're getting real skinny now." B: "I am working on a six pack now. I have two lines starting to show up. I've been spending a lot of time at the gym. It is hard work, but I feel so good after working out." A: "Where do you work out?" B: "I have a membership at Bally's. It's not too expensive and I like all the equipment they have." A: "I've been thinking about joining a gym. Are they having any specials right now?" B: "Yeah, they do. They have free enrollment and first month free. You should come by. I'll show you around. I can take in a guest so you can try it out before signing up." A: "That sounds good. Let's go this Saturday." B: "Cool. I'll call you in the morning." 3Listen All | Person A | Person BA: "Hey John. Who was that girl I saw you with last Friday night?" B: "Oh. That was Jessica. She's a girl I met the other week." A: "I thought you were seeing Patty?" B: "No. We broke up a couple weeks ago." A: "Are you getting pretty serious with this new girl?" B: "She's not long term. Just someone to chill with." A: "Ah... so you are boning her." B: "Damn right. But we don't have much in common. Oh well. At least we are compatible in bed." A: "She had a nice figure. You sure it's not going to work out?" B: "It works out well in bed, but if you try to have a conversation with her, it just dies out fast." A: "At least she is good for one thing. Ha ha ha." B: "How about you? You've been seeing Heidi for a long time now. When are you going to tie the knot?" A: "I don't know. She's been bugging me about marriage, but I don't see the need to rush it." B: "You guys have been seeing each other for like 3 years haven't you?" A: "Actually, it's been more than 4 years already." B: "Wow. That's a long time. Any problems with having a girlfriend for that long?" A: "Not really. It gets a little boring at times, but we grew to be great friends. I can totally be myself around her." B: "I think that is the best type of relationships. Good for you." A: "Well, if you put it that way." B: "I would love to be in your situation. You have a beautiful girl that you are in love with, and you are perfect for each other. What else do you want?" A: "Maybe a little more excitement." B: "So would you give up your girlfriend for what I have? A little excitement here and there? You can't have both you know. Unless you're a cheating dog." A: "I don't think I can go behind her back. We have a trusting relationship I don't want to risk." B: "Now you're making some sense." A: "It's always good talking to you man. You make me feel better." B: "Likewise. That's what friends are for right?" A: "So you coming out to play basketball this Saturday?" B: "Yeah. I'll be there." A: "Alright. I'll catch you then." B: "Alright man. Later." 4Listen All | Person A | Person BA: "Hey Stephanie. Guess what?" B: "What?" A: "Robert asked me to marry him. We're getting married." B: "Congratulations. I'm so happy for you. So when is the big day?" A: "We haven't set the date exactly, but it looks like it will be sometime in July." B: "How did he propose to you?" A: "On Valentines day, he got me a present. I thought it was an ordinary Valentines day present, but when I opened it, it was this big diamond ring. Right then, he got on his knees and proposed." B: "That's so cool. So you really got surprised?" A: "We talked about marriage a little, but I never knew he was serious." B: "You are going to be busy with wedding plans. But you have several months to prepare for it." A: "It's going to be pretty hectic for me. So I'm going to need some help. First of all, I was wondering if you would like to be my maid of honor." B: "I would be honored." A: "So you're going to help me with the planning right?" B: "Of course. How many bridesmaids are you going to have?" A: "Three. So we will have a total of four." B: "Let me guess. Susan, Tina, and Cindy." A: "Close. I'm going to have Cindy as the candle lighter. The third bridesmaid is going to be Lydia. She is a good friend from church." B: "I know her. She's sweet. I'll make sure we have the best wedding for you." A: "I hope so. I appreciate your help."Baseball - Interactive Practice
Click on Listen All and follow along. After becoming comfortable with the entire conversation, become Person A by clicking on the Person A button. You will hear only Person B through the audio file. There will be a silence for you to repeat the sentences of Person A. Do the same for Person B. The speed of the conversation is native speed. Use the pause button if the pause between each sentence is too fast for you. After practicing several times, you will be able to speak as fast as a native. B: "I like baseball the best." A: "Me too. Did you play when you were a kid?" B: "Yeah. I played until I graduated from high school." A: "What position did you play?" B: "I think I tried every position, but the last few years, I played third." A: "I hate third base. It's scary when the ball is coming at you so fast." B: "It was scary at first, but after a while, I got used to it. If you have fast reflexes, then it's not really a problem. What position did you play?" A: "I played outfield. I hated the infield because I never figured out the bounces." B: "I wish I could play again, but there isn't much opportunities around here." A: "I'm on a softball league. It's not fast pitch, but it's still fun. You wanna join our group?" B: "When do you guys play?" A: "We play either Tuesdays or Thursdays." B: "Sounds pretty fun. I'll come out and join you next time." 2 Listen All | Person A | Person BA: "Do you like to watch baseball?" B: "Yeah. I follow the Mariners every year." A: "I wonder how they will do this year." B: "I don't know if they have a chance. Did you hear that A-Rod went to the Yankees?" A: "I know. Their team was too good even before getting Alex." B: "Yeah. The richest team is usually the best team. They need to put a salary cap to make things fair." A: "I agree. I don't know why they haven't done so already." B: "But don't lose hope too soon. The Yankees don't have a good pitching staff this year. They might end up like the Texas Rangers. Great offense, no pitching." A: "I highly doubt that. Even though they lost Pettite, they still have a decent pitching rotation." B: "We'll see. I hope the Mariners do well this year." A: "Me too. Oh, did you buy any tickets this year?" B: "I got a couple of games with Oakland and Boston, but I couldn't get anything with the Yankees." A: "Same here. I went in on the second day and all the tickets with the Yankees were already sold out." B: "There's still plenty of other games though. We should go together one of these days." A: "Sounds good. Let's plan for late June."Basketball - Interactive Practice
Click on Listen All and follow along. After becoming comfortable with the entire conversation, become Person A by clicking on the Person A button. You will hear only Person B through the audio file. There will be a silence for you to repeat the sentences of Person A. Do the same for Person B. The speed of the conversation is native speed. Use the pause button if the pause between each sentence is too fast for you. After practicing several times, you will be able to speak as fast as a native. B: "It starts in October. How come?" A: "I like to keep up with the Lakers." B: "You keep up with baseball at all?" A: "Just a little. Not as much as basketball." B: "Who is your favorite player?" A: "Probably Kobe Bryant, but he has too many issues right now." B: "He's a great player, but his recent problem is really affecting his play." A: "Hope everything turns out ok. Do you play/like basketball much?" B: "I usually get into it during the playoffs. I'd rather play than watch." A: "I like to watch as much as I like to play. Do you play often?" B: "Every now and then with some friends." A: "I usually play twice a week at the health club. It's easy to round up 10 guys during the evening time." B: "That sounds pretty fun. But I'm too out of shape to play full court." A: "I get tired too, but I figure it's good for my health. And I'm having fun at the same time." B: "So you think the Lakers will do good this year?" A: "They better. They got a lot of good players now. If Malone can stay healthy, then I don't see how they can be beat." B: "I don't know... I think Sacramento has a strong team this year." A: "True, but I'm pulling for the Lakers all the way. It's going to be a great season."Football - Interactive Practice
Click on Listen All and follow along. After becoming comfortable with the entire conversation, become Person A by clicking on the Person A button. You will hear only Person B through the audio file. There will be a silence for you to repeat the sentences of Person A. Do the same for Person B. The speed of the conversation is native speed. Use the pause button if the pause between each sentence is too fast for you. After practicing several times, you will be able to speak as fast as a native. B: "A football game. Packers are playing the Chiefs." A: "I never understood this game." B: "It's not that hard. If you watch a couple of games, you'll start to understand it." A: "Do you watch a lot of football?" B: "I like the Packers, so I watch all their games." A: "Did you play football before?" B: "Only in high school. I was too small to play for college." A: "What position did you play?" B: "I was the corner back." A: "Is that the main guy in offense?" B: "No. That's the quarterback. The corner back is a defensive player covering passing plays and outside running plays." A: "I see. Do you think it is more fun than baseball?" B: "It's hard to compare the two because they're so different. I like both baseball and football. How about you? You like baseball a lot?" A: "Yeah. I'm a big baseball fan." B: "Baseball is fun, but you should also learn football. I'll explain as we watch." A: "Cool." 2 Listen All | Person A | Person BA: "What sports do you like to play?" B: "I like baseball and basketball." A: "How about football?" B: "In my country football is brand new, so I never learned the game when I was younger." A: "It's a very popular game in America." B: "Yeah. I heard a lot about it. Is it really that fun?" A: "For me, it's one of those games that are fun to both watch and play." B: "Are you a football player?" A: "No, just for fun with my friends. We play two hand touch or flag football. We're too old to play tackle football." B: "What is two hand touch and flag football?" A: "Instead of tackling somebody, you just have to touch them with two hands, or if it is flag football, grab the flag that the ball carrier is wearing." B: "I see. It's safer then right?" A: "Exactly. We play every Saturdays on the field by the tennis courts. If you want to learn and play a little, you're welcome to join us." B: "I'll give it a try. Give me a call and let's go down together." A: "Ok. I'll call you Saturday morning." B: "Great."Golf - Interactive Practice
Click on Listen All and follow along. After becoming comfortable with the entire conversation, become Person A by clicking on the Person A button. You will hear only Person B through the audio file. There will be a silence for you to repeat the sentences of Person A. Do the same for Person B. The speed of the conversation is native speed. Use the pause button if the pause between each sentence is too fast for you. After practicing several times, you will be able to speak as fast as a native. B: "I'm going out this Saturday." A: "Do you already have a foursome?" B: "Unfortunately, we do. Let's plan for something together for Wednesday. We can go right after work." A: "That sounds good. Where do you want to play?" B: "We won't have much time, so let's play somewhere close to work." A: "How about Bellevue? It's pretty close." B: "How much does it cost over there?" A: "Twilight rates are 21 dollars." B: "That's pretty good. Let's do it." A: "Alright. I'll get a tee time for Wednesday at about 4:00." B: "Make it 4:15. I won't get off until 4:00." A: "Ok. I'll call you later when I get a tee time." B: "Sounds good. I'll see you on Wednesday then." A: "Alright. Have fun on Saturday." B: "Will do." 2 Listen All | Person A | Person BA: "How did you golf on Saturday?" B: "I did pretty good. I shot a 13." A: "Not too bad. I thought you were going to break single." B: "I had a chance. I shot a 4 on the front nine, but the back nine killed me." A: "What happened?" B: "My drive was totally off. All of the sudden, I started hooking the ball. I hit two balls OB, and that killed me score right there." A: "That sucks. You could have broken single if it wasn't for the penalty strokes." B: "Yeah. I was so frustrated after that hole. But overall, I shot well, so I'm not too disappointed. How about you? How have you been hitting lately?" A: "I hit great on the range, but when I get on the course, I can't seem to hit the ball right." B: "That happened to me for the longest time. It just takes time and practice. When you go out on the course more often, that problem will fix itself." A: "I'm still trying to break 90. I've been hitting in the mid nineties for ever." B: "How far does your driver go?" A: "I don't use it that much. I use my 3 wood more. I'm not consistent with the driver to use it." B: "You gotta keep practicing with it. Eventually you'll get the hang of it." A: "Yeah. I practice with it on the range, but I'm not making any progress on it." B: "Let's go to the range together and I'll check out your swing." A: "That sounds good. Let's go tomorrow night." B: "Ok. That will give us practice for our round on Wednesday." A: "I'll meet you there at 6:30." B: "Ok. See you tomorrow then."Poker - Interactive Practice
Click on Listen All and follow along. After becoming comfortable with the entire conversation, become Person A by clicking on the Person A button. You will hear only Person B through the audio file. There will be a silence for you to repeat the sentences of Person A. Do the same for Person B. The speed of the conversation is native speed. Use the pause button if the pause between each sentence is too fast for you. After practicing several times, you will be able to speak as fast as a native. B: "Josh had a bunch of guys over at his house and we played poker." A: "Why didn't you guys call me?" B: "We did. But you weren't home. If you had a cell phone, maybe you wouldn't be left out." A: "Yeah. I need to get a cell phone. So, what games did you play?" B: "We only play Texas Hold'em." A: "That's all good. What was the bid amount?" B: "We started playing no limit. It's so much fun." A: "That sounds awesome. Let me join you next time." B: "No problem. Just get a cell phone so we can contact you." A: "Alright. Who won though?" B: "John. He always wins. He's damn good." A: "You only played one game?" B: "We played 2 games and he won both of them." A: "What is the buy in?" B: "Only 10 bucks." A: "That sounds fun. Ten bucks isn't that much money to have fun while chilling with your friends." B: "Exactly." A: "But what happens if you get out in the first ten minutes?" B: "Then you're screwed. You can watch tv or play the XBOX." A: "Better not die soon then. So, when is the next time you guys are playing?" B: "Probably this Friday. Give me a call Friday morning and I'll let you know the exact time." 2 Listen All | Person A | Person BA: "How long did you stay at Tim's playing poker last night?" B: "I stayed for a couple more hours after you left." A: "So you guys ended up playing one more game?" B: "Yeah." A: "How did you do on the second game?" B: "I was third. I had a pair of Kings and went all in. Albert had an Ace Queen and called me. When the cards came out, he ended up with a pair of aces and I lost." A: "I hate when that happens. So did Albert end up winning?" B: "No. He lost to Jerry. Anyway on the last game, it was me and Andrew. I had Ace King suited. On the flop, it was Ace, King, and Queen. Andrew went all in and I called. The next card was a King and I had a full house. It was nearly impossible for me to lose. Except another Queen came out and he had four of a kind. Can you believe that? I had a full house and I lost." A: "That sucks. He's so lucky. I can't believe he got four of a kind." B: "That's poker I guess." A: "I hear they are going to play again this Saturday? Are you going to play?" B: "Hell yeah. Do you know what time they're playing?" A: "I think they want to start a little earlier because it takes a long time to play. Probably around 7:00." B: "I get off at 6:30 so it's going to be tight. I'll come as soon as possible." A: "Alright. See you later."Talking about Guys - Interactive Practice
Click on Listen All and follow along. After becoming comfortable with the entire conversation, become Person A by clicking on the Person A button. You will hear only Person B through the audio file. There will be a silence for you to repeat the sentences of Person A. Do the same for Person B. The speed of the conversation is native speed. Use the pause button if the pause between each sentence is too fast for you. After practicing several times, you will be able to speak as fast as a native. B: "Yeah. His name is John. I started dating him a week ago." A: "That's so exciting. Tell me all about him. Is he good looking?" B: "I think he's cute, but not drop dead gorgeous." A: "How did you meet him?" B: "I go to this coffee shop a lot and this guy is always there. We started talking a couple of times, and he finally asked me out." A: "That's so cool. What does he do for a living?" B: "He works in the finance department in a manufacturing company." A: "Do you know if he makes a lot of money?" B: "I don't know for sure, but he drives a nice car and I heard he has a house." A: "How is his personality?" B: "He's very smart and a great person to talk to. In the beginning, we talked for about 30 minutes a day in the coffee shop before he asked me out. Besides that, he's very sweet and romantic." A: "How old is he?" B: "That's the problem. He is 2 years younger than me. What do you think about that?" A: "What's the big deal? I don't see anything wrong with that. If you were 23, then I might be worried he was immature, but you're almost 30 now. 2 years is no big deal." B: "Yeah. That's what I think." A: "When do I get to meet him?" B: "How about a double date? The four of us can go out to dinner and a drink or something." A: "That sounds great. How about next Saturday?" B: "I think Saturday will be good. Let's double check with the guys and get back to each other." A: "Great. I'll call you later then." B: "Ok. Talk to you later." 2 Listen All | Person A | Person BA: "Jane. Did you see that guy standing by the dance floor?" B: "Yeah. He's kinda cute." A: "Wait. Isn't that Beth's boyfriend?" B: "I'm not sure. I haven't met him before." A: "Look. He's dancing with another girl." B: "Are you sure that's him?" A: "No. It just looks like him." B: "I heard he was a nice guy. He wouldn't be cheating on Beth." A: "Yeah. You're right. How do you know about him if you never met him?" B: "I hear all this stuff from Beth. She is always going off on how nice and sweet he is." A: "I heard the same thing. What type of guy are you looking for?" B: "Someone who is understanding, responsible, sensitive, smart, and with a lot of money." A: "Don't we all. Get real. All those guys are probably already taken." B: "It doesn't hurt to have expectations. What type of guy do you want to find?" A: "All I want is someone who is going to treat me well." B: "You know Alex don't you? He likes you. I bet he'll take good care of you." A: "He's a dork. At least someone who is not an idiot ok?" B: "Got it."Shopping - Interactive Practice
Click on Listen All and follow along. After becoming comfortable with the entire conversation, become Person A by clicking on the Person A button. You will hear only Person B through the audio file. There will be a silence for you to repeat the sentences of Person A. Do the same for Person B. The speed of the conversation is native speed. Use the pause button if the pause between each sentence is too fast for you. After practicing several times, you will be able to speak as fast as a native. B: "Hi. I'm shopping for my boyfriend's birthday. Do you have any suggestions?" A: "Let's see. How about a nice shirt and tie? You can't go wrong there." B: "Well. He doesn't wear ties that often." A: "We have some nice pants. You can also get him a belt with it." B: "That sounds good. Which one do you recommend?" A: "These slacks are very popular. He can wear them to dress up a little or on a normal casual day." B: "I like them. Do you have matching belts?" A: "Yes. Right over here." B: "How much are they?" A: "The pants are on sale for $40, and the belt is $25." B: "What is your return policy just in case he doesn't like them?" A: "Just save the receipt and we will gladly return or exchange them for you." B: "That sounds great. I'll take them." 2 Listen All | Person A | Person BA: "Hey Jackie. What are you doing?" B: "Nothing much. I'm just relaxing today. Why? What's going on?" A: "I was thinking about heading to the mall. Do you want to go?" B: "Are they having a sale?" A: "Yeah. Both Bon and Nordstrom's is having there annual sale. It's a great time to buy some clothes you've been holding out on." B: "That sounds great. Where should we meet?" A: "I'll meet you in front of Nordstrom's in 30 minutes." B: "Sounds good. See you there." A: "What do you think about these shoes?" B: "They're cute. But do you think you'll really wear them?" A: "No. Not really." B: "This sweater is so pretty. I love the low neck design." A: "I bet it's expensive." B: "It's on sale for $80. What do you think? Should I try them on?" A: "For 80 bucks it looks great. Go try it on." 3 Listen All | Person A | Person BA: "Where is your dressing room?" B: "Right over there." Person A comes out of the dressing room B: "How did you like the sweater?" A: "I loved it. I'll take it." B: "Great. I can ring you up over here. It comes to $87.04." A: "Here you go?" B: "Do you have a credit card with us?" A: "No I don't." B: "If you open up a card, you can save 10% on all your purchases today." A: "Not today. Thanks though." B: "No problem. We always have this offer, so when ever you decide to, just let us know." A: "Sure." B: "Is there anything else I can help you with?" A: "Yeah. I was looking at some of your pants, but they are all a bit too long. Do you have alteration services here?" B: "Yes. It costs $7, and it takes one day." A: "Great. Thanks for your help." B: "Thank you, and have a great day."Jewelry - Interactive Practice
Click on Listen All and follow along. After becoming comfortable with the entire conversation, become Person A by clicking on the Person A button. You will hear only Person B through the audio file. There will be a silence for you to repeat the sentences of Person A. Do the same for Person B. The speed of the conversation is native speed. Use the pause button if the pause between each sentence is too fast for you. After practicing several times, you will be able to speak as fast as a native. B: "I got it a while ago, but I haven't worn it much. You really like it?" A: "Yeah. It's beautiful. Is it white gold or silver?" B: "It's white gold." A: "Where did you buy it?" B: "My boyfriend took me to the Shane Co. and he let me pick it out." A: "That's so sweet. What was the occasion?" B: "That's the best part. It wasn't for anything special. He just wanted to buy me something." A: "You're so lucky. If he bought you something for no special day, I wonder what he would buy you for your birthday." B: "My birthday is coming up. We'll find out pretty soon." A: "What do you want?" B: "I wouldn't mind a necklace. I was at the jewelry shop looking around, and they have a couple of beautiful necklaces I want." A: "Why not a ring?" B: "I don't think I'm ready for a ring from him yet." A: "But you're ready for everything else?" B: "Damn right." 2 Listen All | Person A | Person BA: "Hi. Can I help you with anything?" B: "Yeah. Can I look at this ring?" A: "Sure. Let me get it out for you. What is your size?" B: "I believe I am a six." A: "Here you go." B: "Would you have any necklace that would go well with this?" A: "Actually, we have a few to choose from. They are over here." B: "There's no price tag on this necklace." A: "Oh. I'm sorry. I'll check the price for you. It is $199." B: "This necklace is a little short. Do you have one that is longer?" A: "Yes. Why don't you try this one on." B: "This one is much better. Can I try on the ring with this necklace?" A: "Sure. Here you go." B: "Let me think about it." A: "Sure. Take your time." B: "Thank you for all the help." A: "No problem at all." 3 Listen All | Person A | Person BA: "What a beautiful watch. It goes very well with your ring." B: "Thank you." A: "Is that your wedding ring?" B: "I'm not married yet. It's my engagement ring." A: "Well, congratulations. When is the big date?" B: "In June." A: "Did you have the watch before getting the ring?" B: "Actually, we bought the ring together after I got the watch." A: "You did a fabulous job with the selection. It's gorgeous." B: "Thank you so much." A: "What kind of watch is it?" B: "It's a Tag Heuer." A: "If you don't mind me asking, how much do they cost?" B: "This one is $1500. But they range from $600 to $3000." A: "That's why it looks so nice. I should have figured. You always get what you pay for." B: "Yeah. I would rather get one nice watch instead of 20 mediocre ones."Guy, Girls, Sports - Interactive Practice
Click on Listen All and follow along. After becoming comfortable with the entire conversation, become Person A by clicking on the Person A button. You will hear only Person B through the audio file. There will be a silence for you to repeat the sentences of Person A. Do the same for Person B. The speed of the conversation is native speed. Use the pause button if the pause between each sentence is too fast for you. After practicing several times, you will be able to speak as fast as a native. B: "I'm going to go to the driving range because I'm playing golf on Saturday." A: "You're golfing without me? What's up with that?" B: "Sorry man, but we already have a foursome. I'm going with a couple of guys from work." A: "Where are you playing?" B: "Washington National. Have you been there yet?" A: "I've been there a couple of times. It's a great course. You know the Huskies play there right?" B: "I didn't know that. Is it a hard course?" A: "It's pretty challenging. But it all depends on which tee you play from." B: "What are you shooting these days?" A: "I'm still hovering around a bogey game." B: "Still better than me. I'm still trying to hit a bogey game. Do you want to hit the driving range with me?" A: "I can't this Friday. I'm playing basketball with the guys that night." B: "At night?" A: "Yeah. We're playing indoors at a school gymnasium." B: "What's the occasion?" A: "Just a small league I play on. Nothing special." B: "I'm too short to play basketball." A: "You're not that short. Plus, we have a couple of guys who are the same height as you. They're awesome players." B: "I never got into basketball. It's fun and all, but maybe I'm just not good at it." A: "It's still great exercise. I get a better workout from basketball than I do from the treadmill." B: "That's true." 2 Listen All | Person A | Person BA: "What do you think about Matt's new girlfriend?" B: "Samantha? She's pretty hot. I can't believe she fell for Matt." A: "I don't seem to have much luck with girls." B: "Why do you think that is?" A: "I say the stupidest things around girls. I don't know why I do that?" B: "It's because you're nervous. Best thing to do is not say a word until you know it's not stupid." A: "It doesn't work that way. I stop thinking around pretty girls." B: "I know. You got to date a girl who isn't that pretty then." A: "What's the story of your love life these days?" B: "It's only been a couple of months that I broke up with Sarah. But I think it's about time to start hunting again." A: "Who's your type?" B: "Anybody with a nice body and a pretty face." A: "How about their personality or their character?" B: "I'm not thinking about marriage, so those things don't matter." A: "You're so shallow." 3 Listen All | Person A | Person BA: "So Mark. What is your favorite hobby?" B: "Probably sports." A: "Anything specific? Or just sports in general." B: "Most sports. I like basketball, football, baseball, golf, tennis, so I guess most sports." A: "I like tennis. Did you play for your high school team?" B: "Yeah. I played on the varsity team starting from my sophomore year. How about you?" A: "I played my junior and senior year." B: "What other sports did you play?" A: "I played volleyball. I would have to say volleyball is my favorite." B: "What position did you play?" A: "I was the outside hitter." B: "That's so cool. I didn't know you were athletic." A: "I don't know if I would consider myself athletic, but I have fun playing." B: "I play on a co-ed volleyball team every Tuesday. We're always looking for more girls to play on our team. Would you be interested?" A: "Yeah. It sounds fun. Just call me anytime you need a player." B: "That's great. Since we are on the topic of sports, what sport do you like to watch on television?" A: "I never got into watching sports on TV. So I really don't know." B: "Not even the Super bowl?" A: "Only when the group of people I'm with is watching it. I just never had interest in TV that much." B: "Well, I like following the Mariners. They're pretty good." A: "I like to go watch them play. It's fun when you are actually there." B: "A bunch of us are going to watch them play this June. Do you want to join us?" A: "Yeah. I'll go. I like the new stadium. It's pretty cool." B: "Ok. I'll make sure to get you a ticket as well." 4 Listen All | Person A | Person BA: "What did Mike get you for your birthday Pam?" B: "He got me a watch. See." A: "That's beautiful. He must have spent a fortune on it." B: "He's so great. I think he might propose pretty soon." A: "How do you know? Did he give you any clues?" B: "He took me to a jewelry store and asked me what type of rings I like. It was a little obvious, but at least I got to pick the one I wanted." A: "That's not so romantic?" B: "He was never romantic. Silly and cute, but not romantic. I like all his quirkiness. He always makes me laugh." A: "I guess you can't ask for much more than that." B: "How is it going with you and Brad?" A: "We broke up a week ago." B: "I'm sorry to hear that. What happened?" A: "I think we both just started to grow apart. I wasn't surprised." B: "Are you doing ok?" A: "Actually, I'm feeling great. I guess I needed some freedom." B: "Have you started seeing other guys yet?" A: "Not yet, but I when I meet a decent guy, I wouldn't mind dating again." B: "What kind of guy are you looking for?" A: "Although my relationship with Brad wasn't that bad, I want a guy who likes to go out more. Brad always spent all his time studying and researching for school. It was quite boring." B: "You definitely need a guy who likes to have fun." A: "I wouldn't mind dating a romantic guy. Maybe I'm dreaming, but a nice walk down the beach, or dancing in the moonlight would be something I would love to do." B: "Hey. There are guys like that. All you have to do is find the right one." A: "But that's the hard part. I always fall for the guy who is smart. And then after a couple of months, I get bored." B: "Doesn't a tall, good looking guy turn you on?" A: "Not really. What should I do?" B: "We should go to a club this Saturday and find a smart romantic guy. How does that sound?" A: "That sounds like a plan. Let's do it." B: "Great. I'll see you at nine then." A: "Ok. See you later."Happy and Feeling Good - Interactive Practice
Click on Listen All and follow along. After becoming comfortable with the entire conversation, become Person A by clicking on the Person A button. You will hear only Person B through the audio file. There will be a silence for you to repeat the sentences of Person A. Do the same for Person B. The speed of the conversation is native speed. Use the pause button if the pause between each sentence is too fast for you. After practicing several times, you will be able to speak as fast as a native. B: "What happened?" A: "I got a job offer from Dell." B: "That's great. I thought you said you didn't get the job." A: "I thought I did bad on the interview, but I guess I was wrong. I'm so happy right now." B: "I bet. That's great news. I'm very happy for you." A: "Thanks. I feel like celebrating. Let's go have a beer. It's on me." B: "Sounds good." 2 Listen All | Person A | Person BA: "Mike, did you win the lottery or something? Why the big smile?" B: "I'm so relieved. I just passed the bar exam." A: "You did? That's great! You must be very happy now?" B: "That's an understatement. I'm on cloud nine. I couldn't be any happier." A: "Did you tell your parents yet?" B: "Not yet. I didn't get a hold of them. I'll try to call them again tonight." A: "They're probably going to be so happy." B: "I think so. It's turning out to be a great day." 3 Listen All | Person A | Person BA: "Life's so boring." B: "Well, most of the time it is, I guess." A: "What do you think will make you happy?" B: "I think money will make me happy." A: "You heard people say that money doesn't guarantee happiness." B: "It will for me. Then I can do all the things I want to do." A: "You'll get bored eventually." B: "Then I can find something new to do. If I don't have to worry about money, then I don't have to work." A: "That's true, I guess. If I didn't have to work, I think I would be happy." B: "You see... money doesn't equal happiness, but it takes away a lot of responsibilities."Anger - Interactive Practice
Click on Listen All and follow along. After becoming comfortable with the entire conversation, become Person A by clicking on the Person A button. You will hear only Person B through the audio file. There will be a silence for you to repeat the sentences of Person A. Do the same for Person B. The speed of the conversation is native speed. Use the pause button if the pause between each sentence is too fast for you. After practicing several times, you will be able to speak as fast as a native. B: "A tow truck was towing my car and put all those dents in my car." A: "Are they going to pay you for the damages?" B: "They're saying it was already there." A: "What the hell. That doesn't make sense. What are you going to do?" B: "I have to go to court. A cop was there so he can prove that the damage wasn't there." A: "That sucks. I'd be pissed if that happened to me." B: I got an estimate and it's four thousand dollars." A: "Oh my gosh. Damn... screw the court, I would burn down their store." B: "We'll see what happens after court." 2 Listen All | Person A | Person BA: "Jack, what's wrong?" B: "You!" A: "What are you talking about? What did I do?" B: "You told Martha that I was on a date? What was that all about?" A: "No... that's not what I meant. I didn't mean that. She asked me where you were and I jokingly said that you were on a date with Sara. I thought Martha knew that you and Sara were just friends." B: "She started feeling suspicious after you said that." A: "I'm sorry man. I didn't know. I didn't mean to screw anything up." B: "Martha gets jealous easily and it took a while to convince her that Sara was just a friend. Now, I have to explain to Sara that I can't hang around her because of you." A: "Look. I really didn't mean to, and next time I see Martha, I'll really tell her that you and Sara are really just friends." B: "Don't bother."Excited - Interactive Practice
Click on Listen All and follow along. After becoming comfortable with the entire conversation, become Person A by clicking on the Person A button. You will hear only Person B through the audio file. There will be a silence for you to repeat the sentences of Person A. Do the same for Person B. The speed of the conversation is native speed. Use the pause button if the pause between each sentence is too fast for you. After practicing several times, you will be able to speak as fast as a native. B: "I know. It's going to be so much fun." A: "I always get excited the day before." B: "I used to be like that. But I go skiing so often that I don't get excited anymore." A: "I only go skiing twice a year, so it's a real treat for me." B: "That makes sense." A: "What things make you excited?" B: "Whenever I go to Vegas, I get really excited." A: "Oh... that makes me excited too!" B: "Looks like anything fun makes you excited." 2 Listen All | Person A | Person BA: "Hey Jack. Are you excited about starting work?" B: "Yeah. I'm really looking forward to it." A: "What was more exciting, starting college or starting work?" B: "They're pretty similar, but in different ways. I really can't decide. How about you?" A: "For me, I think starting school was more exciting." B: "Does that mean work isn't that great?" A: "It's different for everyone, but because I knew school was going to be so much fun, I really got excited about it." B: "But work is a huge portion of our lives. I'm looking forward to making it fun." A: "That's a great attitude to have. I don't think you'll have any problems in the workforce." B: "I hope you're right." 3 Listen All | Person A | Person BA: "Hey Suzie. Guess what? I'm having a baby!" B: "Really? That's so great. Congratulations." A: "Thanks. I'm so excited. We've been trying for 8 months now." B: "That's really exciting. How many months are you pregnant?" A: "Three months." B: "Are you going to find out if it is a boy or a girl?" A: "I want to, but Bob doesn't. He wants to be surprised like the old fashioned way." B: "Maybe it's more exciting not knowing." A: "I'd rather know and buy all the baby things ahead of time." B: "There are so many things you have to prepare for." A: "I know I am going to be busy, but I know I can handle it. I have been looking forward to this day for a long long time." B: "It really must be an exciting time for you guys." A: "Thank you so much."Worry - Interactive Practice
Click on Listen All and follow along. After becoming comfortable with the entire conversation, become Person A by clicking on the Person A button. You will hear only Person B through the audio file. There will be a silence for you to repeat the sentences of Person A. Do the same for Person B. The speed of the conversation is native speed. Use the pause button if the pause between each sentence is too fast for you. After practicing several times, you will be able to speak as fast as a native. B: "I just lost my job. I'm just worried about how I'm going to pay the bills." A: "I'm sorry to hear that. Have you been looking for another job?" B: "I just started, but the job market is very bad right now. I'm not optimistic about it." A: "That's tough. What does your wife think about this?" B: "She's trying to be supportive, but I can tell she is very worried about our financial situation as well." A: "I have some friends who might be able to help you find a job. I'll see what they can do." B: "I really appreciate your help." A: "No problem. In the meantime, don't try to worry so much. You'll get through this." 2 Listen All | Person A | Person BA: "Jared, I just heard about your father. How is he doing?" B: "He's in the hospital resting. The doctor's didn't give a clear answer yet." A: "I'm so sorry to hear that. But this is a good hospital. I'm sure they will do whatever they can." B: "I hope so." A: "You must feel really worried right now. But you know your dad is a fighter." B: "Yeah. I think my mom is the most worried. I'm basically worried about how she is doing." A: "Where is she right now?" B: "She's in the hospital with my dad. I have to go back tonight." A: "Hey, I'll go with you." B: "You don't have to." A: "It's really no problem." B: "Ok. Let's go right after dinner."Stress - Interactive Practice
Click on Listen All and follow along. After becoming comfortable with the entire conversation, become Person A by clicking on the Person A button. You will hear only Person B through the audio file. There will be a silence for you to repeat the sentences of Person A. Do the same for Person B. The speed of the conversation is native speed. Use the pause button if the pause between each sentence is too fast for you. After practicing several times, you will be able to speak as fast as a native. B: "It's nothing. I'm just a little stressed out." A: "Why? What's stressing you out?" B: "School. Since I was working part time, I had a difficult time keeping up with class. Now that we have exams coming up, I'm totally freaking out." A: "The best thing to do is study as much as you can. I'm sure you'll do alright." B: "I hope so. I guess I won't be sleeping for the next 3 days. That's what it'll take." A: "I have to study for an exam too. Why don't we study together. We can encourage each other." B: "That will be great." 2 Listen All | Person A | Person BA: "Hey Mike. What are you doing tonight?" B: "Nothing planned. How about you?" A: "Work is kicking my ass. I'm so stressed. Let's go grab a drink." B: "I'm always up for a drink. To tell you the truth, it's been quite stressful here too." A: "I say we get drunk tonight. I don't want to think about all this stuff." B: "But we have to work tomorrow." A: "We won't stay out too late. I just need to forget about work." B: "I hear ya. Let's do it." 3 Listen All | Person A | Person BA: "What stresses you out the most?" B: "Probably my parents." A: "How so?" B: "Well, during school, they wanted good grades. Then after I got a job, they wanted me to get a better job. And finally, they want me to get married." A: "You have to deal with a lot of pressure from your parents." B: "Your parents are not like that?" A: "Ever since I brought home some bad grades in elementary school, they never expected much." B: "You're lucky." A: "What do you do to deal with the stress?" B: "Not much I can do. It's always there. I sometimes go out with some friends and drink, but that's only a temporary solution. The stress always returns in the morning." A: "That sucks. You wanna go grab a beer?" B: "Sure. Sounds great. Let's go."Sad and Depressed - Interactive Practice
Click on Listen All and follow along. After becoming comfortable with the entire conversation, become Person A by clicking on the Person A button. You will hear only Person B through the audio file. There will be a silence for you to repeat the sentences of Person A. Do the same for Person B. The speed of the conversation is native speed. Use the pause button if the pause between each sentence is too fast for you. After practicing several times, you will be able to speak as fast as a native. B: "Nothing much. What are you up to?" A: "I was just concerned about Sam. He hasn't been himself lately." B: "He took the civil service exam and failed." A: "That sucks. He must feel depressed." B: "Yeah. He's been sitting in his room everyday for the last 4 days." A: "Why don't we take him out? We can try to take his mind off of it. In the least show him that we're there for him." B: "That's a great idea. Why don't you call him? I already talked to him a couple of times and it might be good for him to hear from somebody else." A: "Ok. I'll call you back after I'm done." B: "Sounds good." 2 Listen All | Person A | Person BA: "Sarah. You look terrible. What's wrong?" B: "My grandmother just passed away." A: "I'm so sorry to hear that. When did this happen?" B: "A couple of days ago. I just got back from the funeral." A: "Is there anything I can do?" B: "No... not really. The sad thing is that I wasn't there when she died. I really wanted to be there one last time." A: "I'm sure she knew you loved her. Did she pass away in the hospital?" B: "Yeah. She died in her sleep." A: "I'm sorry she's gone." B: "At least she didn't suffer." A: "I think your grandmother would want you to think of all the good times you spent together." B: "I know. But I miss her." A: "When my grandmother passed away, I frequently visited her in the cemetery. I always talked to her. Even though she wasn't there, I somehow knew she heard what I said." B: "Yeah? That's what I was thinking too. Thanks." A: "It looks like you haven't eaten anything all day. We should get you something to eat." B: "You're right... I should eat something. Let's go."Love - Interactive Practice
Click on Listen All and follow along. After becoming comfortable with the entire conversation, become Person A by clicking on the Person A button. You will hear only Person B through the audio file. There will be a silence for you to repeat the sentences of Person A. Do the same for Person B. The speed of the conversation is native speed. Use the pause button if the pause between each sentence is too fast for you. After practicing several times, you will be able to speak as fast as a native. B: "I'm falling in love." A: "What! With who?" B: "That girl in my econ class. She is so hot." A: "Did you guys go on a date already?" B: "No. I didn't even talk to her yet. But I think I'm in love." A: "Does she have a boyfriend?" B: "I don't think so. I've been following her around campus and I haven't seen another guy." A: "Dude, you're a stalker man. Just ask her on a date." B: "I plan on running into her in the cafeteria when she's alone. I think I'll ask her then." A: "So why do you think you're in love?" B: "She's the only thing I can think of all day long." A: "That's called blind love. Well, I gotta run. Tell me how it goes next week." B: "Alright. I'll talk to you later." 2 Listen All | Person A | Person BA: "Happy anniversary honey." B: "Happy anniversary baby." A: "It's been one year since we got married. It was so fast." B: "Yeah. And I love you so much." A: "Really? What do you love about me?" B: "Well, you're beautiful, smart, with a wonderful personality." A: "What else?" B: "I also think you're sexy." A: "You're embarrassing me." B: "You asked." A: "I love you so much. I'm so happy and I think we have a wonderful marriage." B: "Me too. Let's make every year better and better."Broken Heart - Interactive Practice
Click on Listen All and follow along. After becoming comfortable with the entire conversation, become Person A by clicking on the Person A button. You will hear only Person B through the audio file. There will be a silence for you to repeat the sentences of Person A. Do the same for Person B. The speed of the conversation is native speed. Use the pause button if the pause between each sentence is too fast for you. After practicing several times, you will be able to speak as fast as a native. B: "It's more than I can bear. I don't think I can go on." A: "Come on Mike. It's not the end of the world." B: "It's the end of my world. She was everything to me. I loved her so much." A: "I remember my first breakup. I remember it was the hardest thing I ever went through. So I know it must be really tough right now." B: "Every night, I cry myself to sleep. Can you believe that I actually cry everyday?" A: "It's normal to cry. You shouldn't feel bad about it. It's the only way to let it out." B: "How long will I feel like this? How long is the pain going to last?" A: "It's different for everyone, but it took me four months to get over Jessica." B: "Four months... I have to live in hell for four months..." A: "But I'm ok now. I moved on and I'm dating other great people. I know you will be better." B: "Why do you think she left me?" A: "I really don't know. Some people change and they want to go in different directions." B: "But I loved her so much. I loved her more than anything in this world. She was my world." A: "I know you love her." B: "I don't think I'll be able to love anyone again." A: "I thought that too. I thought Jessica was the only person I would ever love. But it changes. It really does. You'll get better and become a stronger person." B: "I hope so." 2 Listen All | Person A | Person BA: "Why are you so quiet?" B: "My girlfriend just broke up with me." A: "You must feel terrible now." B: "Yeah." A: "I remember my first breakup. It was the worst feeling in the world. I was crying every day for three months. And slowly, it got better. I know you'll feel better too." B: "You've been through this too?" A: "Yeah. I remember it very clearly. The pain makes it easy to remember. I know you're really hurting right now, but you know many people experience breakups." B: "But it hurts too much." A: "I know it's painful, but it's only temporary. After the pain goes away, you'll find other girls." B: "What if I don't want to find another girl?" A: "You'll change your mind. Look at everyone in the world. They all break up and move on. The faster you understand this, the quicker you will recover." B: "You're right." A: "I also know you must still have strong feelings for her, but try to think of all the bad things. You know she didn't treat you that well. Is that the person you want to spend the rest of your life with?" B: "Yeah. Thanks for the talk." A: "I'll give you a call later. We should hang out. It's good to be around people." B: "Ok. I'll talk to you later."Afraid and Scared - Interactive Practice
Click on Listen All and follow along. After becoming comfortable with the entire conversation, become Person A by clicking on the Person A button. You will hear only Person B through the audio file. There will be a silence for you to repeat the sentences of Person A. Do the same for Person B. The speed of the conversation is native speed. Use the pause button if the pause between each sentence is too fast for you. After practicing several times, you will be able to speak as fast as a native. B: "Hey Tina. What are you doing?" A: "I was just watching TV. What's going on with you?" B: "I just watched a movie and I'm scared." A: "What did you watch?" B: "I saw the Sixth Sense. I didn't know it was going to be so scary." A: "I remember that. It was a great movie. But it was definitely scary." B: "If you're not busy, do you want to come over? I'm afraid to be alone." A: "Sure. I can come over. What should we do?" B: "How about if we watch a comedy. I need something to get my mind off the frightening images I have from the Sixth Sense." A: "Ok. I'll get ready and leave. I'll see you in about 20 minutes." B: "Hurry, ok. It's dark out." A: "Don't worry, nothings going to happen. I'll be there real soon." B: "Ok. See you soon." 2 Listen All | Person A | Person BA: "What are you afraid of?" B: "I'm not sure. I used to be scared of a lot of things when I was young, but not anymore." A: "Are you afraid of death?" B: "Only if I think about it so much. But death is inevitable, so there is no use thinking about it." A: "How about horror movies?" B: "No. I know they're all fake so there is nothing to be afraid of. How about you?" A: "I get scared pretty easily. I'm actually frightened of bee's." B: "Really? Why?" A: "I don't know. I got stung when I was young and ever since, I've always been afraid of them." B: "What other things are you afraid of?" A: "Sitting by the camp fire and telling horror stories is very scary." B: "Wow. You're afraid of many things huh?" A: "I guess so. Aren't you afraid of something coming out of the bushes?" B: "It's not going to happen. We probably went camping dozens of times and nothing ever came out of the bushes. What makes you think something will?" A: "I don't know. I guess I'm terrified at the possibility." B: "If you were realistic, you probably wouldn't be scared of everything. Maybe you have too much imagination." A: "I should try to think more realistically. I'll do that." B: "Good. After a while, you won't be afraid of so many things."Other Emotions - Interactive Practice
Click on Listen All and follow along. After becoming comfortable with the entire conversation, become Person A by clicking on the Person A button. You will hear only Person B through the audio file. There will be a silence for you to repeat the sentences of Person A. Do the same for Person B. The speed of the conversation is native speed. Use the pause button if the pause between each sentence is too fast for you. After practicing several times, you will be able to speak as fast as a native. B: "I don't know. A little bored and restless I guess." A: "Why is that?" B: "I have so much time on my hands and I have nothing to do." A: "Why don't you go out and have fun?" B: "I would like to, but I have to save some money so I can't go out all the time." A: "That sucks." B: "After a while, I start to feel anxious." A: "Try relaxing and reading a good book. That's always a good way to kill time." B: "That's true. How about you? How are you these days?" A: "I'm doing pretty good these days. My kid just finished kindergarten. I'm so proud of him." B: "That's great to hear. He must be big now. It's been a year since I saw your son." A: "Yeah. He grew a lot in the last year." B: "I bet you're very proud of your son." A: "Yes I am. Thanks." 2 Listen All | Person A | Person BA: "What happened to that girl you were seeing?" B: "Oh Jackie? We broke up last week." A: "That was a short relationship. You only started dating 2 months ago." B: "It was actually a long two months. She was a psycho." A: "What do you mean?" B: "She would be laughing one moment, and if I said something insensitive, she would start crying. I didn't want to deal with that." A: "She sounds very emotional." B: "She was a psycho man. One time we were suppose to get together. I was waiting for her call, and when she finally called, she was screaming why I wasn't at her place." A: "Were you suppose to be there?" B: "I thought she was going to call when she was done shopping. It was a misunderstanding. She was literally screaming on the phone over this." A: "Ok. You're right. She's a psycho." B: "I'm just glad it's over."Feelings Review - Interactive Practice
Click on Listen All and follow along. After becoming comfortable with the entire conversation, become Person A by clicking on the Person A button. You will hear only Person B through the audio file. There will be a silence for you to repeat the sentences of Person A. Do the same for Person B. The speed of the conversation is native speed. Use the pause button if the pause between each sentence is too fast for you. After practicing several times, you will be able to speak as fast as a native. B: "Congratulations. That's great!" A: "I'm so happy. I don't have to worry about finding a job and interviewing anymore." B: "When do you start?" A: "I start next Monday." B: "You're going to have to put in a lot of hours you know." A: "I know. I'm a little nervous, but it's pretty exciting." B: "I bet. You must be stoked." A: "Yeah. I'm going to celebrate tonight. Wanna hang out?" B: "Sure. It's on you right?" A: "Of course. How about Toby? Should we call him?" B: "I don't know. He's a little depressed. He's having a hard time finding a job right now." A: "I should still tell him. In the least, I can refer him to my company. It might help." B: "That sounds like a good idea." 2 Listen All | Person A | Person BA: "Why the long face?" B: "I'm getting sick of work man. I can't take the political bull in the company any more." A: "Did you just get your review or something?" B: "Yeah, but that's not why I am upset. I just found out another guy got a promotion. He doesn't know how to do anything. He sits there and kisses the managers butt all day long." A: "That sucks." B: "I'm just pissed that management can't see behind his smooth talking lies." A: "Look on the bright side. At least you have a job." B: "Yeah. I shouldn't stress about this anymore. It's not like I can do anything about it." A: "Exactly. Instead, we should have some drinks tonight." B: "How about a cold bottle of beer." A: "Now you're talking." 3 Listen All | Person A | Person BA: "Martha. What's wrong? Why are you crying?" B: "Jake just broke up with me." A: "I'm sorry. When did this happen?" B: "Yesterday. I didn't even know it was coming. He just told me he found someone else." A: "What a jerk. He doesn't deserve you." B: "But it still hurts. I thought I loved him." A: "He didn't treat you that well either. Maybe you don't want to hear this, but I think you can do better." B: "Better or worse, it doesn't matter. I had a lot of feelings for him. I really liked him" A: "It must be really painful. I remember when Josh and I broke up. I was crying for a week." B: "I know I'll get over him. My first breakup was painful because I was naive." A: "Exactly. You'll find someone again. You should get your mind off of this. Let's go shopping." B: "Maybe tomorrow. I don't feel like it tonight." A: "How about coffee down the street?" B: "Sure." 4 Listen All | Person A | Person BA: "What are you doing here on the bench? You've been here for an hour." B: "I'm just thinking about Lucy. I can't get her out of my mind. I think I'm falling in love." A: "Crazy boy. You barely know her." B: "It doesn't matter. I like everything about her. I like the way she talks, the way she walks, her hair and her lips. I would give anything to kiss her." A: "Did you tell her how you feel?" B: "No way. I'll scare her away." A: "You won't know until you tell her." B: "Maybe later. But right now, all I can think about is her legs and her face. She is so beautiful." A: "You're wasting your time. At least talk to her. You don't have to tell her how you feel." B: "Yeah. I started talking to her in my Poly Sci class. I try to sit next to her as much as I can." A: "That's a start. After a while, you'll find out if she is everything you make her out to be." B: "It won't matter because I love everything she does." A: "Dude, you're blind as a bat. You're just infatuated with her." B: "These feelings are too strong to be infatuation." A: "We'll see in a couple of weeks. Let's go grab something to eat. You're human aren't you?" B: "To think of it, I am a little hungry. Ok. Let's go."English Milestone Review - Interactive Practice
Click on Listen All and follow along. After becoming comfortable with the entire conversation, become Person A by clicking on the Person A button. You will hear only Person B through the audio file. There will be a silence for you to repeat the sentences of Person A. Do the same for Person B. The speed of the conversation is native speed. Use the pause button if the pause between each sentence is too fast for you. After practicing several times, you will be able to speak as fast as a native. B: "I think so. With Professor Robinson right?" A: "Yeah. I'm Nicole." B: "I'm George. It's nice to meet you." A: "How are you liking the class so far?" B: "I like the subject. I think it's pretty interesting." A: "Me too. But it's hard to sit in class when the weather is so nice." B: "Tell me about it. The weather has been so great lately." A: "So, what year are you?" B: "I'm a sophomore. How about you?" A: "I'm a freshman." B: "Where are you from around here?" A: "No. I'm from the east. I grew up in New York." B: "New York? That seems like a fun place." A: "More like a busy place. Everyone is always on the run over there." B: "I grew up in San Francisco." A: "That's not too far from here. Do you like living on the west coast?" B: "I haven't been to many other places, but the west coast is a great place." A: "Yeah. I like it too." B: "Are you ready for the mid term next Friday?" A: "I'm so behind. I've been going out a lot. I'm having so much fun, but I really need to catch up on my school work." B: "Where do you usually hang out?" A: "Nowhere specific. We always do different things." B: "Have you been to Alcatraz yet?" A: "Not yet. I want to go though." B: "I highly recommend it. It's an interesting place to visit." A: "Maybe you could take me there." B: "If you get a B or better on your midterm, I'll take you there." A: "Deal. It was great meeting you. I'll talk to you again tomorrow." B: "Ok. See you later." 2 Listen All | Person A | Person BA: "I can't believe it took you so long to ask me out on a date." B: "I always thought you like Mark, so I didn't think I had a chance." A: "I had this thing about him, but it's over. So, what do you like to do on your free time?" B: "I like sports, watching movies, reading books. Things like that." A: "What type of movies do you like?" B: "I like drama and comedy." A: "Me too. Mostly drama though. Have you seen Pay it forward?" B: "Yeah. I loved that movie." A: "It's one of my favorites. I cried so much at the end." B: "I thought the idea of paying it forward was awesome." A: "What was your favorite comedy?" B: "Do you remember the Three Amigos?" A: "Vaguely. I was pretty little when that came out." B: "I don't remember it much back then, but I saw it again the other day and it cracked me up." A: "Maybe I need to see that movie again." B: "I think it is a classic. So many funny scenes." A: "I really liked the Mask with Jim Carrey." B: "He is hilarious. I love that guy." A: "I like most of his movies. He is such a character." B: "What else do you like to do?" A: "Well, I like to exercise." B: "Where do you exercise?" A: "I go to a health club by my house. But on a nice day, I like to jog around the lake." B: "That's good. I like to stay in shape too. But I do that by playing a lot of sports. Do you play any sports?" A: "I played a little bit in high school, but nothing really these days." B: "Have you tried golf?" A: "Don't start with that. My dad always nagged at me to play, but I never got into it." B: "What do you usually do with your friends?" A: "We go out shopping a lot." B: "Where do you usually go?" A: "Usually downtown. It's more fun in the city than in the mall. Plus, there are too many high school students at the mall." B: "I know some girls like bags, and some like shoes, what do you like to shop for the most?" A: "I can never have too many pairs of shoes. I have like 30 pairs already, but I am always shopping for more." B: "Oh. The food's here." A: "Great. I'm so hungry." B: "After dinner, do you want to catch a movie?" A: "Sure. I'm always up for a good movie." 3 Listen All | Person A | Person BA: "Hey Mark. What are you doing?" B: "Just watching some TV." A: "Anything interesting on?" B: "Not really. Just watching the sports highlight on ESPN." A: "So I take it you're pretty bored too." B: "Just killing time until I find something to do. What are you up to?" A: "It's Saturday and we are sitting at home doing nothing. What's wrong with us?" B: "You wanna shoot some hoops?" A: "I already tried to call up some of the guys, but they are all busy." B: "Where's your girlfriend? I thought you were going out with her today." A: "She's out shopping with her friends." B: "Let's go to Starbucks and think of something to do then." A: "Alright. Do you have any cigarettes?" B: "I only have a couple left. Why don't you pick some up on the way." A: "Ok. See you there in about 30 minutes." B: "Alright. See you there." 4 Listen All | Person A | Person BA: "Damn Mark. I never noticed that belly of yours." B: "It's all the beer. I need to start working out again." A: "That reminds me. I should've hit the gym today." B: "Where do you work out?" A: "At Bally's. It's pretty close to home so it is convenient." B: "How much are you paying?" A: "I only pay 20 bucks a month." B: "That's pretty good. I think I should join." A: "If you join, we could work out together. It's so much better working out with another person. It's hard to motivate yourself when you are alone." B: "What do you usually do in the gym?" A: "I usually spend about 20 minutes on the step master, and then lift weights for about an hour." B: "Do you go everyday?" A: "No. I try to go 4 times a week, but lately, I've been only going about 2 times a week. That's why I need you there. You should join." B: "Will it help me to get some girls?" A: "If you get rid of that belly of yours, I promise you'll have a better chance with girls. Anyways, there are so many fine chicks working out at the club." B: "Really? I'm signing up tomorrow." A: "There are some girls with tight outfits. You can see the shape of their body and some of them are really fine." B: "As long as there are some ladies with nice legs, I don't mind." A: "So you're really going to join?" B: "Yeah. Let's go in tomorrow and I'll sign up. We can work out together." A: "Cool. Let's go hit some bars to celebrate." B: "I'm down with that."University Life - Interactive Practice
Click on Listen All and follow along. After becoming comfortable with the entire conversation, become Person A by clicking on the Person A button. You will hear only Person B through the audio file. There will be a silence for you to repeat the sentences of Person A. Do the same for Person B. The speed of the conversation is native speed. Use the pause button if the pause between each sentence is too fast for you. After practicing several times, you will be able to speak as fast as a native. B: "Mark? I'm Bill. Glad to meet you." A: "Yeah. So where are you from?" B: "I'm from Houston Texas." A: "Oh... I'm from Southern California." B: "There must be a lot of cute girls over there huh?" A: "Hell yeah. But most of them are hoochies." B: "That sucks. So, what year are you?" A: "I'm a freshman." B: "This is my first year too." A: "So what made you decide to come to California for school? I hear Austin is a good school." B: "It's alright, but I think Berkeley is better." A: "So is this where you wanted to come?" B: "To tell you the truth, I wanted to go to Stanford. I made it on the waiting list, but ninety nine percent of the people accepted to Stanford go there. Like, who wouldn't right?" A: "Very true. But this is still a good school." B: "I'm not complaining. I just know that I wanted to come to California. Texas is cool and all, but I wanted to experience different things." A: "That's good. Do you know what you plan on majoring in?" B: "I was thinking about political science, but now I'm leaning towards English literature. How about you?" A: "I plan on majoring in double E." B: "Do you know where the Smith building is? I have to pick up the syllabus for my psychology class. I missed the first day." A: "That's a great start. It's over there by the library." B: "It was nice meeting you." A: "Yeah. We should hang out later." B: "Cool. I'll see you tomorrow in class then." A: "Alright. Later." 2 Listen All | Person A | Person BA: "Hi. What's your name?" B: "My name is Jung Min. What's your name?" A: "My name is Jessica. It's nice to meet you." B: "Yes. It's nice to meet you too. Are you a new student too?" A: "No. I'm a sophomore. I take it you are a new student?" B: "Yeah. It's pretty exciting to be here." A: "Have fun while it lasts. The excitement wears off real quick. Especially after you see how much homework you get. Where are you from?" B: "I'm from Korea. My parents wanted me to go to an American university, so I came here." A: "I have never been to Korea. I've been to Japan before, but never Korea." B: "Why were you in Japan?" A: "My father thought it would be a good experience to take a vacation to a different country. He's so into learning about different cultures." B: "That's pretty cool." A: "I thought it would have been more fun if I went without my parents." B: "Well, if you ever want to visit Korea, I would be happy to show you around." A: "Thanks for the offer. I'll keep that in mind. Oh, the professor is coming. We'll talk more after class." B: "Ok."Bored - Interactive Practice
Click on Listen All and follow along. After becoming comfortable with the entire conversation, become Person A by clicking on the Person A button. You will hear only Person B through the audio file. There will be a silence for you to repeat the sentences of Person A. Do the same for Person B. The speed of the conversation is native speed. Use the pause button if the pause between each sentence is too fast for you. After practicing several times, you will be able to speak as fast as a native. B: "Nothing really." A: "How about your work?" B: "It's so boring there. I really wish I had a different job." A: "Is it really that bad?" B: "Yeah. Most of the time, I have nothing to do. But whenever I have something to do, it's boring work because it is the same old thing." A: "Why don't you find a different job then?" B: "Maybe I should." 2 Listen All | Person A | Person BA: "Hi Steve, what's your plan for tonight?" B: "I don't have any plans. Are you doing anything special?" A: "Well, if you're bored, let's plan on meeting up tonight." B: "That sounds like a good idea. Should we invite Bob?" A: "He's a little boring." B: "What do you mean?" A: "Well, he doesn't drink, play video games, pool, or really anything. The only thing he talks about is history." B: "You do have a point. We'll leave him out tonight." A: "Alright. Let's meet at 8:30 in front of the university bookstore." B: "Perfect. I'll see you later tonight." 3Listen All | Person A | Person BA: "Hello" B: "Hi Jane" A: "Oh, hi Jill." B: "What are you doing?" A: "I'm doing the laundry." B: "I'm so bored. I have nothing to do." A: "Why don't you come over and help me with the laundry?" B: "I'd rather do my own house chores. Hey, you wanna take a break from your house work and have coffee at Starbucks with me?" A: "Sure, that sounds great. I'll meet you there in thirty minutes."Favorite - Interactive Practice
Click on Listen All and follow along. After becoming comfortable with the entire conversation, become Person A by clicking on the Person A button. You will hear only Person B through the audio file. There will be a silence for you to repeat the sentences of Person A. Do the same for Person B. The speed of the conversation is native speed. Use the pause button if the pause between each sentence is too fast for you. After practicing several times, you will be able to speak as fast as a native. B: "I'm going to stay home and watch a video." A: "What are you going to watch?" B: "I rented Last of the Mohican. Have you seen it?" A: "That was one of my favorite movies. You will not be disappointed." 2 Listen All | Person A | Person BA: "What's your favorite food?" B: "I like Chinese food the most." A: "Have you been to the Chinese restaurant on 44th street." B: "No I haven't. Is it any good?" A: "It's my favorite Chinese restaurant. I believe you will like it." B: "That sounds great. Let's go." 3Listen All | Person A | Person BA: "Hey Jack. How were your classes this semester?" B: "They were not too bad. I really digged (liked) my poli-science class." A: "Would you consider it your favorite class?" B: "I don't know if I would call it my favorite, but it ranks up there." A: "What class was your favorite then?" B: "I took a business communication class last year and it was terrific." A: "I never took that yet. If that was your favorite, I think I will check it out."Exercise - Interactive Practice
Click on Listen All and follow along. After becoming comfortable with the entire conversation, become Person A by clicking on the Person A button. You will hear only Person B through the audio file. There will be a silence for you to repeat the sentences of Person A. Do the same for Person B. The speed of the conversation is native speed. Use the pause button if the pause between each sentence is too fast for you. After practicing several times, you will be able to speak as fast as a native. B: "Nowhere special. I was just taking a walk." A: "What for?" B: "To get a little exercise. I'm so out of shape." A: "Hey, I play basketball with a bunch of friends twice a week. It's great exercise and it's fun too. Why don't you come out and play with us?" B: "That sounds great. Give me a call next time you guys play." 2 Listen All | Person A | Person BA: "All I do all day is work and watch TV. I really should start thinking about my health." B: "I never thought about that, but you're right. What do you think we should do?" A: "For starters, we should start doing more outdoor activities. That way we'll get some exercise." B: "I was thinking about taking tennis lessons. I always have an hour to spare in the afternoon. What do you think about that?" A: "That's not a bad idea. How much is it?" B: "I heard it is only about one hundred twenty dollars a month for 8 lessons." A: "Playing tennis twice a week will be a good start. Count me in."Basic Listening Lesson #01
Step 1: Listen to Dialog Do not view the questions until after you have listened to the audio file. Reading the questions first will not help you improve your English listening skills. Step 2: Quiz - View Questions 1. What movie do these people plan on watching? Matrix Revolution The Two Towers Lord of the Rings The Last Samurai 2. When do they plan on watching the movie? On the Weekend Tomorrow Later in the evening today Next Friday 3. Where do they plan on meeting? At the subway entrance In front of the movie theater At starbucks next to the theater At home 4. What time do they plan on meeting? At 7:30pm after dinner At noontime At one o'clock At 3:45pm View Answers 1. Lord of the Rings 2. Tomorrow 3. At the subway entrance 4. At one o'clock If you are uncertain about the answers to the questions, listen to the audio file again after having read the questions. After you have made all your selections, you may view the answers to see how you did. Step 3: Show Conversation Dialog A: "What are you doing tomorrow?" B: "Nothing really." A: "Let's watch a movie or something." B: "What's on these days?" A: "I think they're playing Lord of the Rings" B: "That sounds pretty good. Let's watch that." A: "Where should we meet?" B: "How about at the subway entrance." A: "Aright. I'll meet you there at one o'clock." You should read the Conversation Dialog to help you study after going through the listening lesson. Do not view the Conversation Dialog prior to listening to the audio, or prior to answering all the questions.Basic Listening Lesson #02
Step 1: Listen to Dialog Do not view the questions until after you have listened to the audio file. Reading the questions first will not help you improve your English listening skills. Step 2: Quiz - View Questions 1. What day are they planning on seeing a movie? Friday Saturday Sunday Wednesday 2. When is the new movie supposed to come out? Friday Saturday Sunday Wednesday 3. What do they plan on doing before the movie? Nothing Eat Dinner Play pool Eat Lunch 4. Where do they plan on meeting? In front of the movie theater In front of McDonalds In front of Tower Records In front of the subway entrance View Answers 1. Saturday 2. Friday 3. Eat Lunch 4. In front of Tower Records If you are uncertain about the answers to the questions, listen to the audio file again after having read the questions. After you have made all your selections, you may view the answers to see how you did. Step 3: Show Conversation Dialog A: "What should we do this Saturday?" B: "Rocky six is suppose to come out this Friday." A: "Yeah, but I don't know if it is going to be any good." B: "The only reason I want to see it is because I have seen the previous five." A: "True. Ok. Let's see it this Saturday." B: "How about we hook up for lunch at 12:00, and then go see the movie afterwards." A: "Sounds like a plan. Let's meet in front of Tower Records at 12:00." You should read the Conversation Dialog to help you study after going through the listening lesson. Do not view the Conversation Dialog prior to listening to the audio, or prior to answering all the questions.Basic Listening Lesson #03
Step 1: Listen to Dialog Do not view the questions until after you have listened to the audio file. Reading the questions first will not help you improve your English listening skills. Step 2: Quiz - View Questions 1. What types of movies does this person like? Action and drama Drama and science fiction Suspense and horror Western and horror 2. Choose one type of movie this person dislikes? Suspense Comedy Western Action 3. Why does this person not like horror movies? Too scary Too boring Stupid and childish Predictable and obvious 4. How does the person asking the questions think about horror movies? Entertaining Funny Scary Suspenseful View Answers 1. Drama and science fiction 2. Western 3. Stupid and childish 4. Entertaining If you are uncertain about the answers to the questions, listen to the audio file again after having read the questions. After you have made all your selections, you may view the answers to see how you did. Step 3: Show Conversation Dialog A: "What type of movies do you like?" B: "I like all sorts of movies, primarily drama and science fiction." A: "That's an interesting combination. How about western movies?" B: "Western and horror are the two types of movies I don't care for." A: "Why don't you like horror? They're entertaining." B: "Some are entertaining, but I find most of them stupid and childish. For example, I don't understand why a person always goes into the house alone when something is suspicious." A: "Ha ha. I know what you mean. But it's just a movie. They need for the characters to do that." You should read the Conversation Dialog to help you study after going through the listening lesson. Do not view the Conversation Dialog prior to listening to the audio, or prior to answering all the questions.Basic Listening Lesson #04
Step 1: Listen to Dialog Do not view the questions until after you have listened to the audio file. Reading the questions first will not help you improve your English listening skills. Step 2: Quiz - View Questions 1. What movies was first suggested? Titanic Rocky V Last man standing Legally Blonde 2. Why did they not accept the first suggested movie? He already seen it He doesn't like that type of movie He needs to watch it with his girlfriend He doesn't like horror movies 3. What type of movie did they end up choosing? A scary movie An action packed movie An exciting movie A dramatic movie 4. When are they going to see the movie? On the weekend after lunch Next week after the final exams On Friday after class Tomorrow after class View Answers 1. Legally Blonde 2. He needs to watch it with his girlfriend 3. A scary movie 4. Tomorrow after class If you are uncertain about the answers to the questions, listen to the audio file again after having read the questions. After you have made all your selections, you may view the answers to see how you did. Step 3: Show Conversation Dialog A: "Hey, you wanna see a movie tomorrow?" B: "Sounds like a good plan. What do you want to see?" A: "How about Legally Blonde." B: "Ah, my girlfriend wanted to see that movie. I have to take her later so I don't want to watch it ahead of time. How about The Cube?" A: "Isn't that a scary movie?" B: "How scary can it be? Come on, it'll be fun." A: "Ok. I'll give it a try." B: "That's the spirit. I'll see you tomorrow after class." A: "Ok. See you tomorrow." You should read the Conversation Dialog to help you study after going through the listening lesson. Do not view the Conversation Dialog prior to listening to the audio, or prior to answering all the questions.Basic Listening Lesson #05
Step 1: Listen to Dialog Do not view the questions until after you have listened to the audio file. Reading the questions first will not help you improve your English listening skills. Step 2: Quiz - View Questions 1. What is the topic of discussion? Classes Movies Work Sports 2. What class did he really like? Economy 101 Poli-sci English Calculus 3. What was his favorite class? Biology Chemistry Business communication Philosophy 4. What word did he use to describe his favorite class? Amazing Terrific Educational Interesting View Answers 1. Classes 2. Poli-Sci 3. Business communication 4. Terrific If you are uncertain about the answers to the questions, listen to the audio file again after having read the questions. After you have made all your selections, you may view the answers to see how you did. Step 3: Show Conversation Dialog A: "Hey Jack. How were your classes this semester?" B: "They were not too bad. I really liked my poli-sci class." A: "Would you consider it your favorite class?" B: "I don't know if I would call it my favorite, but it ranks up there." A: "What class was your favorite then?" B: "I took a business communication class last year and it was terrific." A: "I never took that yet. If that was your favorite, I think I will check it out." You should read the Conversation Dialog to help you study after going through the listening lesson. Do not view the Conversation Dialog prior to listening to the audio, or prior to answering all the questions.Basic Listening Lesson #06
Step 1: Listen to Dialog Do not view the questions until after you have listened to the audio file. Reading the questions first will not help you improve your English listening skills. Step 2: Quiz - View Questions 1. Where is Bob? At school At work At home In class 2. What is Bob doing? Running Watching TV Painting Sleeping 3. Where did Bob learn how to paint? At the local community college From his father In high school painting class He learned by himself 4. What type of painging are they talking about? Abstract painting Regular painting House painting Oil painting View Answers 1. At home 2. Painting 3. At the local community college 4. Oil painting If you are uncertain about the answers to the questions, listen to the audio file again after having read the questions. After you have made all your selections, you may view the answers to see how you did. Step 3: Show Conversation Dialog A: "Hey Bob. Whatcha you doing?" B: "I'm at home painting." A: "I didn't know you paint. What type of painting is it?" B: "I enjoy oil painting. I learned it in one of my extra classes in college." A: "That sounds so interesting. I wish I learned a hobby." B: "Hobbies are never too late to learn. They offer a variety of classes at the local community college. You should look into it." A: "I think I will. Thanks for the info." You should read the Conversation Dialog to help you study after going through the listening lesson. Do not view the Conversation Dialog prior to listening to the audio, or prior to answering all the questions.Basic Listening Lesson #07
Step 1: Listen to Dialog Do not view the questions until after you have listened to the audio file. Reading the questions first will not help you improve your English listening skills. Step 2: Quiz - View Questions 1. Which of the following statement is true? Joanne called a friend A friend called Joanne Joanne is playing the piano Joanne is drawing right now 2. What is Joanne doing? Running Watching TV Painting Sleeping 3. What is the topic of discussion? Movies Surfing Computer Hobbies 4. What time of day is the conversation taking place? 8 am 10 am 8 pm 10 pm View Answers 1. A friend called Joanne 2. Watching TV 3. Hobbies 4. 10 am If you are uncertain about the answers to the questions, listen to the audio file again after having read the questions. After you have made all your selections, you may view the answers to see how you did. Step 3: Show Conversation Dialog A: "Hey Joanne. What are you up to?" B: "I'm just watching some television." A: "I'm so bored. I don't know what I'm going to do today and it is only ten in the morning." B: "Me too. Do you think we are boring people?" A: "I don't think we are boring. It's just that we don't have any hobbies." B: "That's right. What do you think we should do as a hobby?" A: "That all depends on what you like to do. For example, I like to doodle on the notepad, so I'm thinking about doing some real drawings." B: "I like to play the piano for fun." A: "Yeah. That can be a good hobby." B: "Hobbies are great. I'm going to make a list of all the things I like to do." A: "That's a great idea. I'm going to do the same." You should read the Conversation Dialog to help you study after going through the listening lesson. Do not view the Conversation Dialog prior to listening to the audio, or prior to answering all the questions.Basic Listening Lesson #08
Step 1: Listen to Dialog Do not view the questions until after you have listened to the audio file. Reading the questions first will not help you improve your English listening skills. Step 2: Quiz - View Questions 1. Where is the conversation taking place? In the office In a classroom At home over the telephone Outside 2. What is Michael currently doing? Studying for exams Listening to music Taking a walk Watching TV 3. Where is Michael going? No where special To a special party On his way home To his favorit restaurant 4. What sporting activity was suggested for exercise? Baseball Basketball Football Soccer View Answers 1. Outside 2. Taking a walk 3. No where special 4. Basketball If you are uncertain about the answers to the questions, listen to the audio file again after having read the questions. After you have made all your selections, you may view the answers to see how you did. Step 3: Show Conversation Dialog A: "Hey Michael. Where are you going?" B: "No where special. I was just taking a walk." A: "What for?" B: "To get a little exercise. I'm so out of shape." A: "Hey, I play basketball with a bunch of friends twice a week. It's great exercise and it's fun too. Why don't you come out and play with us?" B: "That sounds great. Give me a call next time you guys play." You should read the Conversation Dialog to help you study after going through the listening lesson. Do not view the Conversation Dialog prior to listening to the audio, or prior to answering all the questions.Basic Listening Lesson #09
Step 1: Listen to Dialog Do not view the questions until after you have listened to the audio file. Reading the questions first will not help you improve your English listening skills. Step 2: Quiz - View Questions 1. Person A works and watches TV all day. What is he starting to think about? His health Playing basketball The next great movie Work he didn't finish yet 2. What suggestion is made to get more exercise? Running or Jogging Doing more outdoor activities Going to the local gym Geting a health club membership 3. What type of lessons are they considering? Music lessons Piano lessons Tennis lessons English lessons 4. For $120, how often will they meet? Everyday for a month Once a week for two months Twice a week for one month 8 Weeks View Answers 1. Hi health 2. Doing more outdoor activities 3. Tennis lessons 4. Twice a week for one month If you are uncertain about the answers to the questions, listen to the audio file again after having read the questions. After you have made all your selections, you may view the answers to see how you did. Step 3: Show Conversation Dialog A: "All I do all day is work and watch TV. I really should start thinking about my health." B: "I never thought about that, but you're right. What do you think we should do?" A: "For starters, we should start doing more outdoor activities. That way we'll get some exercise." B: "I was thinking about taking tennis lessons. I always have an hour to spare in the afternoon. What do you think about that?" A: "That's not a bad idea. How much is it?" B: "I heard it is only about one hundred twenty dollars a month for 8 lessons." A: "Playing tennis twice a week will be a good start. Count me in." You should read the Conversation Dialog to help you study after going through the listening lesson. Do not view the Conversation Dialog prior to listening to the audio, or prior to answering all the questions.Basic Listening Lesson #10
Step 1: Listen to Dialog Do not view the questions until after you have listened to the audio file. Reading the questions first will not help you improve your English listening skills. Step 2: Quiz - View Questions 1. What is the main topic of discussion? Work Television Exercise Restaurants 2. How long ago did he join the health club? 1 year ago 1 month ago 2 months ago Last week 3. How long does he lift weights for? 30 minutes 45 minutes 1 hour 2 hours 4. What does he usually do before lifting weights? Stretch Walk around Jump rope for 15 minutes Bicycle for 30 minutes View Answers 1. Exercise 2. 2 months ago 3. 45 minutes 4. Bicycle for 30 minutes If you are uncertain about the answers to the questions, listen to the audio file again after having read the questions. After you have made all your selections, you may view the answers to see how you did. Step 3: Show Conversation Dialog A: "What do you do besides work and watching TV?" B: "When I have some time, I like to exercise." A: "Do you go jogging or do you go to a health club?" B: "I joined Samsung Health Club a couple of months ago." A: "How do you exercise?" B: "I usually spend 30 minutes on the bicycle for the cardio, and then I lift weight for about 45 minutes." A: "How often do you go?" B: "I want to go four times a week, but I'm too lazy. Last week, I only went to workout once." You should read the Conversation Dialog to help you study after going through the listening lesson. Do not view the Conversation Dialog prior to listening to the audio, or prior to answering all the questions.Basic Listening Lesson #11
Step 1: Listen to Dialog Do not view the questions until after you have listened to the audio file. Reading the questions first will not help you improve your English listening skills. Step 2: Quiz - View Questions 1. What does Jimmy's friend want to do later? Workout Eat lunch Sleep Play basketball 2. What time do that plan on meeting? After dinner At 3:30 Ten in the morning After lunch at 1:00 3. What did he do earlier that caused soreness in his legs? Lifted weights Skiing with friends Played soccer all day Played basketball 4. Where are they going to meet? At Jimmy's house At the coffee shop down the street By the bus stop At the gym View Answers 1. Workout 2. At 3:30 3. Played basketball 4. At the gym If you are uncertain about the answers to the questions, listen to the audio file again after having read the questions. After you have made all your selections, you may view the answers to see how you did. Step 3: Show Conversation Dialog A: "Hey Jimmy. Let's go workout later today." B: "Sure. What time do you want to go?" A: "How about at 3:30." B: "That sounds good. Today we work on Legs and forearm." A: "Hey. I just played basketball earlier, so my legs are a little sore. Let's work out on arms and stomach today." B: "I'm on a weekly schedule. You're messing everything up." A: "C'mon. We're only switching two days. You can do legs on Friday." B: "Aright. I'll meet you at the gym at 3:30 then." You should read the Conversation Dialog to help you study after going through the listening lesson. Do not view the Conversation Dialog prior to listening to the audio, or prior to answering all the questions.Basic Listening Lesson #12
Step 1: Listen to Dialog Do not view the questions until after you have listened to the audio file. Reading the questions first will not help you improve your English listening skills. Step 2: Quiz - View Questions 1. How would you describe Scott? Very tall and skinny Slender with broad shoulders Big and muscular Short and fat 2. How long has it been since these two last saw each other? 6 months ago 10 months ago A year and a half ago Two years ago 3. How often does Scott go to the gym? Never Once a month Every day for an hour Every other day for 3 hours 4. Why does Scott work out so much? To get noticeable results Because he will be bored To enter a competition To train for a marathon View Answers 1. Big and muscular 2. Two years ago 3. Every other day for 3 hours 4. To get noticeable results If you are uncertain about the answers to the questions, listen to the audio file again after having read the questions. After you have made all your selections, you may view the answers to see how you did. Step 3: Show Conversation Dialog A: "Damn Scott. You got big." B: "Yeah, I've been working out a lot." A: "How long have you been lifting weights?" B: "For a year and a half." A: "Yeah. Last time I saw you, it was like 2 years ago." B: "Has it been that long?" A: "How often do you go to the gym?" B: "I usually go every other day for about 3 hours." A: "That's a lot." B: "Yeah, I used to work out for an hour a day 4 times a week, and I saw no results. This is what you have to do to get noticeable results." A: "I don't think I have the discipline for that." B: "Just think of it as a hobby. Then it's actually fun." You should read the Conversation Dialog to help you study after going through the listening lesson. Do not view the Conversation Dialog prior to listening to the audio, or prior to answering all the questions.Basic Listening Lesson #13
Step 1: Listen to Dialog Do not view the questions until after you have listened to the audio file. Reading the questions first will not help you improve your English listening skills. Step 2: Quiz - View Questions 1. What topic are they talking about? Weather and rain Shopping at the mall Comedy movies at the theater Sports and activities 2. If they get bored at the mall, what will they do? Watch a movie Buy a game to play Go home and watch TV Go to the gym 3. What word is used to describe the weather? Amazing Depressing Great Terrible 4. What was mentioned in the weather report? It will stop raining in three days It will stop raining in eight days It will stop raining on Friday I will be sunny over the weekend View Answers 1. Weather and rain 2. Watch a movie 3. Terrible 4. It will stop raining in eight days If you are uncertain about the answers to the questions, listen to the audio file again after having read the questions. After you have made all your selections, you may view the answers to see how you did. Step 3: Show Conversation Dialog A: "The weather is terrible." B: "Yeah. It's been raining a lot these days." A: "I have been watching a lot of videos at home because of the constant rain." B: "Have you heard when it's supposed to get better?" A: "I saw the weather report, and it's going to rain for the next eight days." B: "That sucks so much. What are we going to do?" A: "I'm getting pretty bored. We should do something despite the rain." B: "I'm with you. What do you have in mind?" A: "I haven't been to the Mall in a long time. Let's go there." B: "That sounds good. They have a movie theatre there, so if we get bored, we can watch a movie." A: "Great. I'll stop by your place now." B: "Ok. Don't forget to bring your umbrella. The rain can start up again anytime." You should read the Conversation Dialog to help you study after going through the listening lesson. Do not view the Conversation Dialog prior to listening to the audio, or prior to answering all the questions.Basic Listening Lesson #14
Step 1: Listen to Dialog Do not view the questions until after you have listened to the audio file. Reading the questions first will not help you improve your English listening skills. Step 2: Quiz - View Questions 1. What university class are they talking about? Biology Chemistry History Geography 2. How did the student describe the professor? Smart and fun Easy and boring Demanding but an easy grader Easy but a hard grader 3. How did one student get an A- grade but all his scores were lower than that? The professor liked the student The professor graded on a curve The student did extra assignments The student talked to the professor 4. How did one student feel after hearing about the professor from the other student? The student felt worried The student felt relieved The student felt like crying The student felt angry View Answers 1. History 2. Demanding but an easy grader 3. The professor graded on a curve 4. The student felt relieved If you are uncertain about the answers to the questions, listen to the audio file again after having read the questions. After you have made all your selections, you may view the answers to see how you did. Step 3: Show Conversation Dialog A: "Did you ever take History 231?" B: "Yeah. Last semester." A: "Who was the professor?" B: "It was Professor Johnson." A: "I have him this semester. What do you think about him?" B: "He's a terrible instructor and demands a lot, but fortunately, he's an easy grader." A: "What did you end up getting?" B: "I got an A-. Sounds good, but none of my test scores were that high, so I don't know how I got a decent grade." A: "That's probably because he grades on a curve." B: "Are you enjoying the class so far?" A: "I hate it and I was about to withdrawal. But after hearing your experience, I think I will tough it out." B: "Yes. Definitely stay in the class. You will get a better grade than your test scores. He does that deliberately to make all the students study a lot." A: "Thanks for letting me know. I feel relieved now." You should read the Conversation Dialog to help you study after going through the listening lesson. Do not view the Conversation Dialog prior to listening to the audio, or prior to answering all the questions.Basic Listening Lesson #15
Step 1: Listen to Dialog Do not view the questions until after you have listened to the audio file. Reading the questions first will not help you improve your English listening skills. Step 2: Quiz - View Questions 1. There are several topics in this short discussion, what is the main topic? Exercising Eating Sleeping Health 2. How many hours is one person recommending to sleep? 7 hours 8 hours 10 hours 12 hours 3. Why did mike start exercising? To burn off fat A girl he likes joined the local gym Because he was bored To improve his health 4. When you get old, Mike recommends that you want to be what? Handsome and tall Smart and successful Healthy and active Rich and independent View Answers 1. Health 2. 8 hours 3. To improve his health 4. Healthy and active If you are uncertain about the answers to the questions, listen to the audio file again after having read the questions. After you have made all your selections, you may view the answers to see how you did. Step 3: Show Conversation Dialog A: "Hi Mike. What have you been up to?" B: "Not much. I started exercising." A: "Trying to get in shape?" B: "Yeah, and I need to start improving my health." A: "Me too. What are you doing besides exercising?" B: "That's about all." A: "I think if you eat better, it will help tremendously." B: "Sleep is good too. I heard people who sleep an average of eight hours a day have less health problems." A: "Looks like there are a lot of things to do to stay healthy." B: "True. But I think it is worth it. When you get old, you want to be healthy and active." You should read the Conversation Dialog to help you study after going through the listening lesson. Do not view the Conversation Dialog prior to listening to the audio, or prior to answering all the questions.Basic Listening Lesson #16
Step 1: Listen to Dialog Do not view the questions until after you have listened to the audio file. Reading the questions first will not help you improve your English listening skills. Step 2: Quiz - View Questions 1. Who are these two people talking about? A mutual friend Person A One person's father One person's brother 2. Why is that person always feeling weak? He is sick with a virus He didn't take care of himself when he was young He got food poisoning He never exercised 3. How long has it been since one person met his friend's father? 3 months 9 months 2 years 5 years 4. What did the doctor say about the father's condition? He has cancer He has a fever but will get better His depression is making him tired Couldn't find anything specific View Answers 1. One person's father 2. He didn't take care of himself when he was young 3. 5 years 4. Couldn't find anything specific If you are uncertain about the answers to the questions, listen to the audio file again after having read the questions. After you have made all your selections, you may view the answers to see how you did. Step 3: Show Conversation Dialog A: "I haven't seen your father in like 5 years. How is he doing?" B: "He's not doing too well." A: "Why? What's wrong?" B: "About a year ago, he started feeling weak all the time." A: "Is it due to old age or is he sick." B: "Maybe a little of both. The doctor's can't point out anything specifically. I think it is because he didn't take care of himself during his youth." A: "That makes sense. It's important to take care of your health early in life." B: "That's what my father tells me almost everyday." A: "Well, I hope he starts feeling better. Say hi to him for me." B: "Thanks. I'll let him know." You should read the Conversation Dialog to help you study after going through the listening lesson. Do not view the Conversation Dialog prior to listening to the audio, or prior to answering all the questions.Basic Listening Lesson #17
Step 1: Listen to Dialog Do not view the questions until after you have listened to the audio file. Reading the questions first will not help you improve your English listening skills. Step 2: Quiz - View Questions 1. What does limping mean? To crawl To cringe due to pain Walk that is unbalanced from injury or pain Walk that is faster than normal 2. Why was Sarah limping? She was running late for class and was in a hurry She went snowboarding and had body aches She was looking for her contacts that fell to the ground She was practicing a martial arts move 3. What would happen in the past when Matt walked too fast? He would trip and fall His leg would cramp He would start running He looked goofy walking fast 4. What is Sarah's impression on snowboarding? Loves it and wants to go again Loves it but it is too expensive Not sure yet so she will try again Hates it and doesn't want to think about it View Answers 1. Walk that is unbalanced from injury or pain 2. She went snowboarding and had body aches 3. His leg would cramp 4. Hates it and doesn't want to think about it If you are uncertain about the answers to the questions, listen to the audio file again after having read the questions. After you have made all your selections, you may view the answers to see how you did. Step 3: Show Conversation Dialog A: "Hey Sarah. Why are you limping?" B: "Oh. Hi Matt. I went snowboarding yesterday and my whole body aches." A: "Was it your first time?" B: "Yeah. And I never want to go again." A: "I remember the first time I went. My back was sore, I couldn't sit down because it hurt my butt, and my legs would cramp if I walked too fast." B: "That's exactly how I feel now." A: "It's only like that the first couple of times." B: "Ha. There won't be a next time." A: "You gotta give it a chance. It's fun after awhile." B: "I'll think about it after I start feeling better. Right now, I don't even want to hear the word snowboarding." You should read the Conversation Dialog to help you study after going through the listening lesson. Do not view the Conversation Dialog prior to listening to the audio, or prior to answering all the questions.Basic Listening Lesson #18
Step 1: Listen to Dialog Do not view the questions until after you have listened to the audio file. Reading the questions first will not help you improve your English listening skills. Step 2: Quiz - View Questions 1. What is the general mood of the ladies? Happy Sad Lonely Angry 2. Why is Jane enjoying married life? Husband makes a lot of money Husband is loving and caring Husband is supportive and helpful Husband is smart and handsome 3. What do Jane and her husband do in the evenings? Go bowling for fun Take walks around the neighborhood Have a nice dinner together Watch TV together 4. What is one thing that Jane and her husband do NOT do together on the weekend? Go out to the beach Go to a nice restaurant Go to watch a movie Go to a nice cafe View Answers 1. Happy 2. Husband is supportive and helpful 3. Have a nice dinner together 4. Go to watch a movie If you are uncertain about the answers to the questions, listen to the audio file again after having read the questions. After you have made all your selections, you may view the answers to see how you did. Step 3: Show Conversation Dialog A: "Hey Jane. How are you doing these days?" B: "Hi Martha. Everything is perfect." A: "Are you enjoying married life?" B: "It couldn't be better. My husband is so supportive with my work and he helps around the house so much." A: "You're so lucky. I hope to get married to a guy like that." B: "I'm so happy. Even though we are both working, we get to spend a lot of time with each other in the evening and on the weekends." A: "Do you guys do anything special?" B: "In the evening, we just sit and talk over dinner. But on the weekend, we try to go out to the beach or hit a nice restaurant, or go to a nice cafe." A: "Sound like everything is great." You should read the Conversation Dialog to help you study after going through the listening lesson. Do not view the Conversation Dialog prior to listening to the audio, or prior to answering all the questions.Basic Listening Lesson #19
Step 1: Listen to Dialog Do not view the questions until after you have listened to the audio file. Reading the questions first will not help you improve your English listening skills. Step 2: Quiz - View Questions 1. Why is Stacy so tired these days? Has to watch the kids, cook, clean, and laundry Has to work all day long Currently recovering from surgery and took pain medication She has the flu 2. Why is Stacy doing all the work herself? She is a single mom working 2 jobs Her husband is on business trips and is home to help Her husband helps a lot, but there is too much to do Her husband only complains about his day and doesn't help 3. What is one chore that the husband takes care of? Vacuuming Mowing the lawn Washing the car Dishes 4. What is one change Stacy wants to see from her husband? To be more loving To be less lazy To be home more often To change jobs that require less traveling View Answers 1. Has to watch the kids, cook, clean, and laundry 2. Her husband only complains about his day and doesn't help 3. Mowing the lawn 4. To be less lazy If you are uncertain about the answers to the questions, listen to the audio file again after having read the questions. After you have made all your selections, you may view the answers to see how you did. Step 3: Show Conversation Dialog A: "Hey Stacy. What's going on?" B: "I'm pretty tired these days." A: "Why? You're not working so don't you have a lot of time on your hands?" B: "I have so much house work to do. I have to take care of the kids, cook, clean, laundry, and the cycle never ends." A: "How about your husband. Does he help much?" B: "Not at all. He comes home and complains about his hard day at work. He expects me to do everything. He even wants me to feed him sometimes. Can you believe that?" A: "That sucks." B: "If he wasn't so lazy, I think I wouldn't have any complaints. He mows the lawn, but can you believe he tried to convince me to do it?" A: "That's crossing the line." B: "Oh well. I'll have to live with it. What else can I do?" You should read the Conversation Dialog to help you study after going through the listening lesson. Do not view the Conversation Dialog prior to listening to the audio, or prior to answering all the questions.Basic Listening Lesson #20
Step 1: Listen to Dialog Do not view the questions until after you have listened to the audio file. Reading the questions first will not help you improve your English listening skills. Step 2: Quiz - View Questions 1. Where is this conversation taking place? At an electronics store At a clothing store At a coffee shop Over the phone 2. What is the person shopping for? A tall vanilla latte A DVD player Her mother's birthday present For her boyfriend 3. What did she end up buying for her boyfriend? Pants and a belt Shirt and tie Leather jacket iPod 4. What is the return policy of this store? Only exchanges Return or exchanges allowed with receipt All sales are final with no returns or exchanges 3 days for returns or exchanges with receipt View Answers 1. At a clothing store 2. For her boyfriend 3. Pants and a belt 4. Return or exchanges allowed with receipt If you are uncertain about the answers to the questions, listen to the audio file again after having read the questions. After you have made all your selections, you may view the answers to see how you did. Step 3: Show Conversation Dialog A: "Welcome. Can I help you with anything?" B: "Hi. I'm shopping for my boyfriend's birthday. Do you have any suggestions?" A: "Let's see. How about a nice shirt and tie? You can't go wrong there." B: "Well. He doesn't wear ties that often." A: "We have some nice pants. You can also get him a belt with it." B: "That sounds good. Which one do you recommend?" A: "These slacks are very popular. He can wear them to dress up a little or on a normal casual day." B: "I like them. Do you have matching belts?" A: "Yes. Right over here." B: "How much are they?" A: "The pants are on sale for $40, and the belt is $25." B: "What is your return policy just in case he doesn't like them?" A: "Just save the receipt and we will gladly return or exchange them for you." B: "That sounds great. I'll take them." You should read the Conversation Dialog to help you study after going through the listening lesson. Do not view the Conversation Dialog prior to listening to the audio, or prior to answering all the questions.Basic Listening Lesson #21
Step 1: Listen to Dialog Do not view the questions until after you have listened to the audio file. Reading the questions first will not help you improve your English listening skills. Step 2: Quiz - View Questions 1. What is the great news in the dialog? He received a job offer He got a promotion at work He gave an interview He wants to celebrate 2. How did he feel about the interview? He thought he did bad He thought he did good He though he did perfect He didn't have an interview 3. What are they going to do to celebrate? Go to a party Go watch a movie Go drink beer Go play pool 4. Who is paying for the celebration? Doesn't mention anything about who is paying Both of them will pay equally The friend with the good news The friend who heard the good news View Answers 1. He received a job offer 2. He thought he did bad 3. Go drink beer 4. The friend with the good news If you are uncertain about the answers to the questions, listen to the audio file again after having read the questions. After you have made all your selections, you may view the answers to see how you did. Step 3: Show Conversation Dialog A: "Hey John. I have some great news." B: "What happened?" A: "I got a job offer from Dell." B: "That's great. I thought you said you didn't get the job." A: "I thought I did bad on the interview, but I guess I was wrong. I'm so happy right now." B: "I bet. That's great news. I'm very happy for you." A: "Thanks. I feel like celebrating. Let's go have a beer. It's on me." B: "Sounds good." You should read the Conversation Dialog to help you study after going through the listening lesson. Do not view the Conversation Dialog prior to listening to the audio, or prior to answering all the questions.Basic Listening Lesson #22
Step 1: Listen to Dialog Do not view the questions until after you have listened to the audio file. Reading the questions first will not help you improve your English listening skills. Step 2: Quiz - View Questions 1. Why is Mike so happy? He won the lottery His wife won the lottery He passed the bar exam He passed the civil service exam 2. Who will Mike call with this good news later? Hi brother His wife His parents His friend 3. What does "cloud nine" mean? A state of extreme happiness To be in an airplane To be in a high elevation To be very disappointed 4. How is the friend feeling after hearing this news from Mike? Sad and depressed Bitter and Jealous Happy for his friend Angry and surprised View Answers 1. He passed the bar exam 2. Hi parents 3. A state of extreme happiness 4. Happy for his friend If you are uncertain about the answers to the questions, listen to the audio file again after having read the questions. After you have made all your selections, you may view the answers to see how you did. Step 3: Show Conversation Dialog A: "Mike, did you win the lottery or something? Why the big smile?" B: "I'm so relieved. I just passed the bar exam." A: "You did? That's great! You must be very happy now?" B: "That's an understatement. I'm on cloud nine. I couldn't be any happier." A: "Did you tell your parents yet?" B: "Not yet. I didn't get a hold of them. I'll try to call them again tonight." A: "They're probably going to be so happy." B: "I think so. It's turning out to be a great day." You should read the Conversation Dialog to help you study after going through the listening lesson. Do not view the Conversation Dialog prior to listening to the audio, or prior to answering all the questions.Basic Listening Lesson #23
Step 1: Listen to Dialog Do not view the questions until after you have listened to the audio file. Reading the questions first will not help you improve your English listening skills. Step 2: Quiz - View Questions 1. What is the theme of this discussion? Happiness versus sadness Money and happiness Work and money Boring life 2. In this dialog, what can money do for someone? Buy fancy cars Take away a lot of responsibilities Go traveling around the world Open a nice restaurant 3. What is one draw back mentioned from having too much money? Person will become greedy Person will become bored eventually Person will be unhappy Person will lose friends 4. What conclusion can we come to from this dialog? Neither of them are rich Both of them are rich One person does not have a job Both of them do not have a job View Answers 1. Money and happiness 2. Take away a lot of responsibilities 3. Person will become bored eventually 4. Neither of them are rich If you are uncertain about the answers to the questions, listen to the audio file again after having read the questions. After you have made all your selections, you may view the answers to see how you did. Step 3: Show Conversation Dialog A: "Life's so boring." B: "Well, most of the time it is, I guess." A: "What do you think will make you happy?" B: "I think money will make me happy." A: "You heard people say that money doesn't guarantee happiness." B: "It will for me. Then I can do all the things I want to do." A: "You'll get bored eventually." B: "Then I can find something new to do. If I don't have to worry about money, then I don't have to work." A: "That's true, I guess. If I didn't have to work, I think I would be happy." B: "You see... money doesn't equal happiness, but it takes away a lot of responsibilities." You should read the Conversation Dialog to help you study after going through the listening lesson. Do not view the Conversation Dialog prior to listening to the audio, or prior to answering all the questions.Basic Listening Lesson #24
Step 1: Listen to Dialog Do not view the questions until after you have listened to the audio file. Reading the questions first will not help you improve your English listening skills. Step 2: Quiz - View Questions 1. Why is the person so angry? He lost his car He got into a car accident His car got damaged by a tow company No one is angry in this dialog 2. How is he going to solve the problem with his car? Go to a auto body shop Go to the company Go to court Nothing 3. How much will it cost to repair the car? $800 $1500 $4000 $6800 4. Who will be used as a witness? A stranger in the street A friend who witnessed everything A cop who was there His companies lawyer View Answers 1. His car got damaged by a tow company 2. Go to court 3. $4000 4. A cop who was there If you are uncertain about the answers to the questions, listen to the audio file again after having read the questions. After you have made all your selections, you may view the answers to see how you did. Step 3: Show Conversation Dialog A: "What happened to your car?" B: "A tow truck was towing my car and put all those dents in my car." A: "Are they going to pay you for the damages?" B: "They're saying it was already there." A: "What the hell. That doesn't make sense. What are you going to do." B: "I have to go to court. A cop was there so he can prove that the damage wasn't there." A: "That sucks. I'd be pissed if that happened to me." B: "I got an estimate and it's four thousand dollars." A: "Oh my gosh. Damn... screw the court, I would burn down their store." B: "We'll see what happens after court." You should read the Conversation Dialog to help you study after going through the listening lesson. Do not view the Conversation Dialog prior to listening to the audio, or prior to answering all the questions.Basic Listening Lesson #25
Step 1: Listen to Dialog Do not view the questions until after you have listened to the audio file. Reading the questions first will not help you improve your English listening skills. Step 2: Quiz - View Questions 1. Who is Jack angry at? His friend Sara His girlfriend Martha His brother The friend he is talking to 2. Why is Jack so angry? His friend told Martha that Jack was dating Sara His friend was angry he wasn't invited to a party Because he didn't tell him about the surprise exam His friend dated his girlfriend 3. Why did his friend cause this problem? To get revenge because he was also angry with Jack To make Jack and Martha break up He was just joking and didn't mean to cause this problem He knew it was a secret, but it just slipped out 4. What is Jack asking his friend to do? To talk to Martha about it To not say anything to Martha anymore To talk to Sara about it To apologize to Martha View Answers 1. The friend he is talking to 2. His friend told Martha that Jack was dating Sara 3. He was just joking and didn't mean to cause this problem 4. To not say anything to Martha anymore If you are uncertain about the answers to the questions, listen to the audio file again after having read the questions. After you have made all your selections, you may view the answers to see how you did. Step 3: Show Conversation Dialog A: "Jack, what's wrong?" B: "You!" A: "What are you talking about? What did I do?" B: "You told Martha that I was on a date? What was that all about?" A: "No... that's not what I meant. I didn't mean that. She asked me where you were and I jokingly said that you were on a date with Sara. I thought Martha knew that you and Sara were just friends." B: "She started feeling suspicious after you said that." A: "I'm sorry man. I didn't know. I didn't mean to screw anything up." B: "Martha gets jealous easily and it took a while to convince her that Sara was just a friend. Now, I have to explain to Sara that I can't hang around her because of you." A: "Look. I really didn't mean to, and next time I see Martha, I'll really tell her that you and Sara are really just friends." B: "Don't bother." You should read the Conversation Dialog to help you study after going through the listening lesson. Do not view the Conversation Dialog prior to listening to the audio, or prior to answering all the questions.Basic Listening Lesson #26
Step 1: Listen to Dialog Do not view the questions until after you have listened to the audio file. Reading the questions first will not help you improve your English listening skills. Step 2: Quiz - View Questions 1. What is the exciting event that is causing this excitement? They are going skiing tomorrow They are going to Las Vegas tomorrow They are going to have a big party over the weekend They just graduated from college 2. Why does he get so excited? This is his first time going to Las Vegas The party over the weekend is a special event He only gets to go skiing twice a year He doesn't have to go to school anymore 3. What event makes them both get excited? A ski trip Las Vegas vacation Big parties Any weekends 4. Why does one person not get excited from skiing? He doesn't enjoy skiing that much He has never gone skiing so he doesn't know He is too tired to be excited He goes skiing often so he is used to it View Answers 1. They are going skiing tomorrow 2. He only gets to go skiing twice a year 3. Las Vegas vacation 4. He goes skiing often so he is used to it If you are uncertain about the answers to the questions, listen to the audio file again after having read the questions. After you have made all your selections, you may view the answers to see how you did. Step 3: Show Conversation Dialog A: "I can't wait to go skiing tomorrow." B: "I know. It's going to be so much fun." A: "I always get excited the day before." B: "I used to be like that. But I go skiing so often that I don't get excited anymore." A: "I only go skiing twice a year, so it's a real treat for me." B: "That makes sense." A: "What things make you excited?" B: "Whenever I go to Vegas, I get really excited." A: "Oh... that makes me excited too!" B: "Looks like anything fun makes you excited." You should read the Conversation Dialog to help you study after going through the listening lesson. Do not view the Conversation Dialog prior to listening to the audio, or prior to answering all the questions.Basic Listening Lesson #27
Step 1: Listen to Dialog Do not view the questions until after you have listened to the audio file. Reading the questions first will not help you improve your English listening skills. Step 2: Quiz - View Questions 1. What is Jack excited about? Going on a vacation Starting school Finishing school Starting work 2. What does Jack think is more exciting between starting school or work? Neither is exciting Both are similar Work is more exciting School is more exciting 3. What is the best description about Jack's attitude toward work? He is depressed because he will have to work for 30 years He is sad that he can't have fun at school anymore He is looking forward to making work fun He doesn't care one way or another 4. Who started work first between Jack and his friend? Jack His friend Neither of them are working yet Both started at the same time View Answers 1. Starting work 2. Both are similar 3. He is looking forward to making work fun 4. His friend If you are uncertain about the answers to the questions, listen to the audio file again after having read the questions. After you have made all your selections, you may view the answers to see how you did. Step 3: Show Conversation Dialog A: "Hey Jack. Are you excited about starting work?" B: "Yeah. I'm really looking forward to it." A: "What was more exciting, starting college or starting work?" B: "They're pretty similar, but in different ways. I really can't decide. How about you?" A: "For me, I think starting school was more exciting." B: "Does that mean work isn't that great?" A: "It's different for everyone, but because I knew school was going to be so much fun, I really got excited about it." B: "But work is a huge portion of our lives. I'm looking forward to making it fun." A: "That's a great attitude to have. I don't think you'll have any problems in the workforce." B: "I hope you're right." You should read the Conversation Dialog to help you study after going through the listening lesson. Do not view the Conversation Dialog prior to listening to the audio, or prior to answering all the questions.Basic Listening Lesson #28
Step 1: Listen to Dialog Do not view the questions until after you have listened to the audio file. Reading the questions first will not help you improve your English listening skills. Step 2: Quiz - View Questions 1. What is the good news in this dialog? He just got a job He is going on a vacation He found a pretty girlfriend None of the above 2. What is the bad news in this dialog? His wife is worried about their finances The job market is bad right now He lost his job All of the above 3. What is the friend doing about the situation? Nothing he can do about it Contact other friends who might be able to help find a job Talk to his manager about openings in their company None of the above 4. What advice is the friend giving? To not worry as he will get through this To start saving money for the hard times To start working at a gas station temporarily All of the above View Answers 1. None of the above 2. All of the above 3. Contact other friends who might be able to help find a job 4. To not worry as he will get through this If you are uncertain about the answers to the questions, listen to the audio file again after having read the questions. After you have made all your selections, you may view the answers to see how you did. Step 3: Show Conversation Dialog A: "You don't look too well. What's going on?" B: "I just lost my job. I'm just worried about how I'm going to pay the bills." A: "I'm sorry to hear that. Have you been looking for another job?" B: "I just started, but the job market is very bad right now. I'm not optimistic about it." A: "That's tough. What does your wife think about this?" B: "She's trying to be supportive, but I can tell she is very worried about our financial situation as well." A: "I have some friends who might be able to help you find a job. I'll see what they can do." B: "I really appreciate your help." A: "No problem. In the meantime, don't try to worry so much. You'll get through this." You should read the Conversation Dialog to help you study after going through the listening lesson. Do not view the Conversation Dialog prior to listening to the audio, or prior to answering all the questions.Basic Listening Lesson #29
Step 1: Listen to Dialog Do not view the questions until after you have listened to the audio file. Reading the questions first will not help you improve your English listening skills. Step 2: Quiz - View Questions 1. Why doesn't Jackie look so well? She is sick She is stressed out She just had a fight with her boyfriend She just failed an exam 2. Why is Jackie having a hard time keeping up with class? She was working part time She had to take care of her mother who was sick She couldn't understand the material and didn't look for help early enough She had too many classes to take and got behind 3. What is the solution to get through this problem? Take her mother to the hospital Drop out of one class Find a tutor to help with this subject Study with a friend with encouragement 4. What statement is true from this dialog? A new semester is about to start for school The mother is sick but is getting better They are both working to pay for school They both have exams coming up View Answers 1. She is stressed out 2. She was working part time 3. Study with a friend with encouragement 4. They both have exams coming up If you are uncertain about the answers to the questions, listen to the audio file again after having read the questions. After you have made all your selections, you may view the answers to see how you did. Step 3: Show Conversation Dialog A: "Hi Jackie. You don't look too well. What's going on?" B: "It's nothing. I'm just a little stressed out." A: "Why? What's stressing you out?" B: "School. Since I was working part time, I had a difficult time keeping up with class. Now that we have exams coming up, I'm totally freaking out." A: "The best thing to do is study as much as you can. I'm sure you'll do alright." B: "I hope so. I guess I won't be sleeping for the next 3 days. That's what it'll take." A: "I have to study for an exam too. Why don't we study together. We can encourage each other." B: "That will be great." You should read the Conversation Dialog to help you study after going through the listening lesson. Do not view the Conversation Dialog prior to listening to the audio, or prior to answering all the questions.Basic Listening Lesson #30
Step 1: Listen to Dialog Do not view the questions until after you have listened to the audio file. Reading the questions first will not help you improve your English listening skills. Step 2: Quiz - View Questions 1. What do they plan on doing tonight? Go play basketball with friends Work all night long for tomorrow's presentation Drink and get drunk Stay home and rest 2. Why do they plan on going out tonight? To forget about work Because work is stressful To get drunk All of the above 3. How late do they plan on staying out tonight? Until the next morning Not too late After they are both drunk Until 3 in the morning 4. Where do they plan on going? To the local bar To a restaurant To a club in downtown None of the above View Answers 1. Drink and get drunk 2. All of the above 3. Not too late 4. None of the above If you are uncertain about the answers to the questions, listen to the audio file again after having read the questions. After you have made all your selections, you may view the answers to see how you did. Step 3: Show Conversation Dialog A: "Hey Mike. What are you doing tonight?" B: "Nothing planned. How about you?" A: "Work is kicking my ass. I'm so stressed. Let's go grab a drink." B: "I'm always up for a drink. To tell you the truth, it's been quite stressful here too." A: "I say we get drunk tonight. I don't want to think about all this stuff." B: "But we have to work tomorrow." A: "We won't stay out too late. I just need to forget about work." B: "I hear ya. Let's do it." You should read the Conversation Dialog to help you study after going through the listening lesson. Do not view the Conversation Dialog prior to listening to the audio, or prior to answering all the questions.Basic Listening Lesson #31
Step 1: Listen to Dialog Do not view the questions until after you have listened to the audio file. Reading the questions first will not help you improve your English listening skills. Step 2: Quiz - View Questions 1. What is the topic of this dialog? University classes A friend who is not himself lately Partying and drinking A friend with a pretty girlfriend 2. Why is Sam depressed? He failed an important exam His girlfriend broke up with him He wasn't invited to a big party He failed one of his university classes 3. What has Sam been doing for the last several days? Sitting in his room Exercising all day long Thinking about his girlfriend None of the above 4. What are they going to do about Sam? Try to take him out Talk to his girlfriend Help him study None of the above View Answers 1. A friend who is not himself lately 2. He failed an important exam 3. Sitting in his room 4. Try to take him out If you are uncertain about the answers to the questions, listen to the audio file again after having read the questions. After you have made all your selections, you may view the answers to see how you did. Step 3: Show Conversation Dialog A: "Hey Mike. What are you doing?" B: "Nothing much. What are you up to?" A: "I was just concerned about Sam. He hasn't been himself lately." B: "He took the civil service exam and failed." A: "That sucks. He must feel depressed." B: "Yeah. He's been sitting in his room everyday for the last 4 days." A: "Why don't we take him out? We can try to take his mind off of it. In the least show him that we're there for him." B: "That's a great idea. Why don't you call him. I already talked to him a couple of times and it might be good for him to hear from somebody else." A: "Ok. I'll call you back after I'm done." B: "Sounds good." You should read the Conversation Dialog to help you study after going through the listening lesson. Do not view the Conversation Dialog prior to listening to the audio, or prior to answering all the questions.Basic Listening Lesson #32
Step 1: Listen to Dialog Do not view the questions until after you have listened to the audio file. Reading the questions first will not help you improve your English listening skills. Step 2: Quiz - View Questions 1. Where is this dialog occurring? At a restaurant Over the phone At the park At a movie theater 2. Why is one of the person scared? Boyfriend is bothering her A stranger followed her into the store A movie she just watched was scary She had a nightmare 3. What is Tina going to do for her scared friend? Go over to her house and watch a comedy together Rent a DVD that is funny for Tina Keep talking to her until she is not scared anymore Have a party for her 4. What time of day is this dialog taking place? In the morning At lunch time In the afternoon In the evening View Answers 1. Over the phone 2. A movie she just watched was scary 3. Go over to her house and watch a comedy together 4. In the evening If you are uncertain about the answers to the questions, listen to the audio file again after having read the questions. After you have made all your selections, you may view the answers to see how you did. Step 3: Show Conversation Dialog A: "Hello?" B: "Hey Tina. What are you doing?" A: "I was just watching TV. What's going on with you?" B: "I just watched a movie and I'm scared." A: "What did you watch?" B: "I saw the Sixth Sense. I didn't know it was going to be so scary." A: "I remember that. It was a great movie. But it was definitely scary." B: "If you're not busy, do you want to come over? I'm afraid to be alone." A: "Sure. I can come over. What should we do?" B: "How about if we watch a comedy. I need something to get my mind off the frightening images I have from the Sixth Sense." A: "Ok. I'll get ready and leave. I'll see you in about 20 minutes." B: "Hurry, ok. It's dark out." A: "Don't worry, nothings going to happen. I'll be there real soon." B: "Ok. See you soon." You should read the Conversation Dialog to help you study after going through the listening lesson. Do not view the Conversation Dialog prior to listening to the audio, or prior to answering all the questions.Basic Listening Lesson #33
Step 1: Listen to Dialog Do not view the questions until after you have listened to the audio file. Reading the questions first will not help you improve your English listening skills. Step 2: Quiz - View Questions 1. What is Mark doing right now? Playing basketball Watching TV Studying for an exam Eating lunch 2. What day of the week is it? Wednesday Friday Saturday Sunday 3. What are they planning on doing? Planning to watch TV Planning to play basketball Planning on going to Starbucks Planning on shopping with their girlfriend 4. When are they going to meet? Tomorrow after lunch In 30 minutes In 1 hour On Sunday View Answers 1. Watching TV 2. Saturday 3. Planning on going to Starbucks 4. In 30 minutes If you are uncertain about the answers to the questions, listen to the audio file again after having read the questions. After you have made all your selections, you may view the answers to see how you did. Step 3: Show Conversation Dialog A: "Hey Mark. What are you doing?" B: "Just watching some TV." A: "Anything interesting on?" B: "Not really. Just watching the sports highlight on ESPN." A: "So I take it you're pretty bored too." B: "Just killing time until I find something to do. What are you up to?" A: "It's Saturday and we are sitting at home doing nothing. What's wrong with us?" B: "You wanna shoot some hoops?" A: "I already tried to call up some of the guys, but they are all busy." B: "Where's your girlfriend? I thought you were going out with her today." A: "She's out shopping with her friends." B: "Let's go to Starbucks and think of something to do then." A: "Aright. Do you have any cigarettes?" B: "I only have a couple left. Why don't you pick some up on the way." A: "Ok. See you there in about 30 minutes." B: "Aright. See you there." You should read the Conversation Dialog to help you study after going through the listening lesson. Do not view the Conversation Dialog prior to listening to the audio, or prior to answering all the questions.Basic Listening Lesson #34
Step 1: Listen to Dialog Do not view the questions until after you have listened to the audio file. Reading the questions first will not help you improve your English listening skills. Step 2: Quiz - View Questions 1. What does having a long face represent? The face is not short The face is narrow but long Represents happiness Represents unhappiness 2. What happened at work that caused the long face? He got a promotion A different person got a promotion He got a raise He lost his job 3. What topic are they talking about? Fun classes at school Being busy at work Stress from work Drinking and partying 4. What do they plan on drinking? Coke Whiskey Beer Water View Answers 1. Represents unhappiness 2. A different person got a promotion 3. Stress from work 4. Beer If you are uncertain about the answers to the questions, listen to the audio file again after having read the questions. After you have made all your selections, you may view the answers to see how you did. Step 3: Show Conversation Dialog A: "Why the long face?" B: "I'm getting sick of work man. I can't take the political bull in the company any more." A: "Did you just get your review or something?" B: "Yeah, but that's not why I am upset. I just found out another guy got a promotion. He doesn't know how to do anything. He sits there and kisses the managers butt all day long." A: "That sucks." B: "I'm just pissed that management can't see behind his smooth talking lies." A: "Look on the bright side. At least you have a job." B: "Yeah. I shouldn't stress about this anymore. It's not like I can do anything about it." A: "Exactly. Instead, we should have some drinks tonight." B: "How about a cold bottle of beer." A: "Now you're talking." You should read the Conversation Dialog to help you study after going through the listening lesson. Do not view the Conversation Dialog prior to listening to the audio, or prior to answering all the questions.Intermediate Listening Lesson #01
Step 1: Listen to Dialog Do not view the questions until after you have listened to the audio file. Reading the questions first will not help you improve your English listening skills. Step 2: Quiz - View Questions 1. What type of movie is Forrest Gump? Action Drama Suspense Comedy 2. Besides watching movies, what does this person like to do? Go shopping Swimming Drinking and partying Playing basketball 3. What does this person do for exercise? Golf once a week Basketball on the weekends Jogging twice a week No exercising 4. What is the favorite thing this person likes to do? Playing computer games Reading books Going shopping Playing pool View Answers 1. Drama 2. Go shopping 3. Jogging twice a week 4. Playing computer games If you are uncertain about the answers to the questions, listen to the audio file again after having read the questions. After you have made all your selections, you may view the answers to see how you did. Step 3: Show Conversation Dialog A: "How are you doing?" B: "I'm doing great." A: "What movies have you seen lately?" B: "I saw Forrest Gump the other day." A: "What type of movie is that?" B: "The movie type is drama." A: "I can't believe you are watching movies. The weather is great. You should be outside." B: "I hate the hot weather. I'd rather stay indoors with the air conditioner." A: "What else do you like to do besides watching movies?" B: "I like to play computer games, read books, go shopping, and play pool." A: "Out of those what is your favorite?" B: "My favorite is to play computer games." A: "What is your favorite computer game?" B: "My favorite is Diablo. It used to be Star Craft, but it is getting a little old." A: "If you like to play so much, when do you ever exercise?" B: "Although I hate to exercise, I go jogging at least twice a week." A: "That's pretty good. By the way, what are you doing next Saturday?" B: "I am going to go to the bookstore." A: "I am having a party Saturday night at my house. If you have time, you should come." B: "That sounds like fun." A: "Great. I'll see you on Saturday." B: "Ok. See you later." You should read the Conversation Dialog to help you study after going through the listening lesson. Do not view the Conversation Dialog prior to listening to the audio, or prior to answering all the questions.Intermediate Listening Lesson #02
Step 1: Listen to Dialog Do not view the questions until after you have listened to the audio file. Reading the questions first will not help you improve your English listening skills. Step 2: Quiz - View Questions 1. What are Steve and Mike planning on doing today? Nothing Watch a movie Play pool Drink beer 2. What does Steve have to do later today? Study for exams Watch a television show Meet parents for dinner Go to a party 3. What will the weather be like tomorrow? Same as today Clear and Sunny Neither A or B Both A and B 4. What are they planning to do tomorrow? Watch a movie after lunch Lunch together then watch a concert at 1pm Eat dinner together Go to a party at eleven thirty at night View Answers 1. Nothing 2. Meet parents for dinner 3. Both A and B 4. Watch a concert at 1pm If you are uncertain about the answers to the questions, listen to the audio file again after having read the questions. After you have made all your selections, you may view the answers to see how you did. Step 3: Show Conversation Dialog A: "Hello?" B: "Hi Steve. This is Mike. What are you doing?" A: "Oh, hi. I was just watching TV." B: "There's nothing to watch right now." A: "I know. I was watching a re-run. I have nothing to do and I was bored." B: "Me too. Let's get together and do something." A: "I'd like to, but I have to meet my parents in an hour for dinner. How about tomorrow?" B: "Yeah. Let's plan something tomorrow." A: "Did you hear the weather forecast for tomorrow?" B: "I think it is going to be the same as today. Clear and sunny." A: "That's great. We can do something outdoors then." B: "Are there any special events going on tomorrow?" A: "Yeah. I think there's a live outdoor concert by the river tomorrow." B: "Oh yeah. I heard about that too. Let's go check it out." A: "Do you know what time it starts?" B: "It starts at one PM." A: "Let's meet for lunch at eleven thirty and afterwards, we can head over there." B: "Perfect. I'll see you in front of the apartment at eleven thirty." You should read the Conversation Dialog to help you study after going through the listening lesson. Do not view the Conversation Dialog prior to listening to the audio, or prior to answering all the questions.Intermediate Listening Lesson #03
Step 1: Listen to Dialog Do not view the questions until after you have listened to the audio file. Reading the questions first will not help you improve your English listening skills. Step 2: Quiz - View Questions 1. What type of exercising are they talking about? Sporting activities Working out Running and jogging Golfing 2. What was the reaction of one person seeing his friend? Embarrased Excited Surprised Sad 3. How long has it been since they have seen each other? A month A couple of months Six months One year 4. When will they see each other again? A month later In a couple of days Not planned Next time they run into each other like this time View Answers 1. Working out 2. Surprised 3. A couple of months 4. In a couple of days If you are uncertain about the answers to the questions, listen to the audio file again after having read the questions. After you have made all your selections, you may view the answers to see how you did. Step 3: Show Conversation Dialog A: "Steve. Is that you?" B: "Yeah. What's going on?" A: "Not much. What a surprise to see you here." B: "Yeah. It's been a couple of months since I saw you." A: "What have you been up to?" B: "I just started working out." A: "Really? Where do you work out at?" B: "I joined the Samsung Health Club last month." A: "What do you mostly do during your workout?" B: "I concentrate mostly on my legs, chest, arms and stomach." A: "I should start exercising more." B: "It's hard work while exercising, but it is a great feeling when I get done." A: "I have a running machine at home. I used to use it, but I already got sick of it." B: "Exercising at home is hard. The environment is not suited for exercising." A: "If I want to exercise, I will need to join a gym." B: "I have a couple of guest passes. You want to check out my health club." A: "That's a good idea. Let's go over the weekend." B: "Great. I'll call you Saturday morning." A: "Aright. I'll talk to you later." B: "Ok. Bye." You should read the Conversation Dialog to help you study after going through the listening lesson. Do not view the Conversation Dialog prior to listening to the audio, or prior to answering all the questions.Intermediate Listening Lesson #04
Step 1: Listen to Dialog Do not view the questions until after you have listened to the audio file. Reading the questions first will not help you improve your English listening skills. Step 2: Quiz - View Questions 1. Where is the conversation taking place? In a high school cafeteria In a university classroom In front of a building In a department store 2. What grade is Jessica in? Freshman Sophomore Junior Senior 3. Where is the new student from? From Japan From China From Korea From Hong Kong 4. Why did Jessica go to Japan? For a school exchange program For a family vacation To learn Japanese For her father's business trip View Answers 1. In a university classroom 2. Sophomore 3. From Korea 4. For a family vacation If you are uncertain about the answers to the questions, listen to the audio file again after having read the questions. After you have made all your selections, you may view the answers to see how you did. Step 3: Show Conversation Dialog A: "Hi. What's your name?" B: "My name is Jung Min. What's your name?" A: "My name is Jessica. It's nice to meet you." B: "Yes. It's nice to meet you too. Are you a new student too?" A: "No. I'm a sophomore. I take it you are a new student?" B: "Yeah. It's pretty exciting to be here." A: "Have fun while it lasts. The excitement wears off real quick. Especially after you see how much homework you get. Where are you from?" B: "I'm from Korea. My parents wanted me to go to an American university, so I came here." A: "I have never been to Korea. I've been to Japan before, but never Korea." B: "Why were you in Japan?" A: "My father thought it would be a good experience to take a vacation to a different country. He's so into learning about different cultures." B: "That's pretty cool." A: "I thought it would have been more fun if I went without my parents." B: "Well, if you ever want to visit Korea, I would be happy to show you around." A: "Thanks for the offer. I'll keep that in mind. Oh, the professor is coming. We'll talk more after class." B: "Ok." You should read the Conversation Dialog to help you study after going through the listening lesson. Do not view the Conversation Dialog prior to listening to the audio, or prior to answering all the questions.Intermediate Listening Lesson #05
Step 1: Listen to Dialog Do not view the questions until after you have listened to the audio file. Reading the questions first will not help you improve your English listening skills. Step 2: Quiz - View Questions 1. When does John register for classes? He already registered last Friday He will register this Friday He doesn't need to register because he is graduating He doesn't know when he will register 2. Why is their a problem registering for the communications class? Because it is very popular and becomes full early Because nobody registers for the class and it becomes canceled due to lack of students Because the university doesn't have a professor for that class yet All of the above 3. In this dialog, what does the class English 201 concentrate on? Thesis Reading and Comprehension Writing Non fiction books 4. Why did the student get a lower grade in English 201 versus English 101? Because English 101 was easier Because he didn't study as much Because the class was much harder Because he was partying too much View Answers 1. He will register this Friday 2. Because it is very popular and becomes full early 3. Writing 4. Because he didn't study as much If you are uncertain about the answers to the questions, listen to the audio file again after having read the questions. After you have made all your selections, you may view the answers to see how you did. Step 3: Show Conversation Dialog A: "Hey John, did you register for classes yet?" B: "I register this Friday." A: "What classes do you plan on taking?" B: "I really want to take the communication class, but I don't know if it will be available." A: "Is that class really that popular?" B: "Yeah. I tried to get in last semester, but it was full by the time I registered." A: "What other classes are you going to take?" B: "I still need to take English 201, but I really don't like writing." A: "I took that class already. There is a lot of writing, but it's not that bad." B: "Oh really? Who was the instructor? There are like 4 different instructors to choose from." A: "I had Professor Mahoney." B: "Is he an easy grader?" A: "I'm not sure if he is or not, but I thought he was definitely fair." B: "Do you mind if I ask you what you got?" A: "Not at all. I got a 3.8." B: "Well, what did you get in English 101 last year?" A: "I got a 4.0 in that class." B: "Well, I can't compare to you. I got a 3.1 in English 101. That means if you got a lower grade in English 201, it must be harder." A: "It's not what it appears. I actually tried harder in the 101 class. If I put as much effort into the 201 class, I would have received the same grade." B: "Oh. That helps. Thanks." You should read the Conversation Dialog to help you study after going through the listening lesson. Do not view the Conversation Dialog prior to listening to the audio, or prior to answering all the questions.Intermediate Listening Lesson #06
Step 1: Listen to Dialog Do not view the questions until after you have listened to the audio file. Reading the questions first will not help you improve your English listening skills. Step 2: Quiz - View Questions 1. Mike forgot to register for classes. What is the consequence of missing your registration day? You have to wait until everyone registers He can register any time afterwards, but most of the classes will be full He can register and his seniority will allow him to choose any class He has to take this semester off 2. Why will psychology 101 be available to take? Because the class is very big with many seats Because nobody takes that class Because the subject is boring Because it is not a requirement 3. What recommendation is given if a class is already full? Go to the registration building Get on the waiting list Find the professor and get permission Show up to class on the first day without registering 4. Why does the professor accept more students than the class allows? Because he wants as many students to teach as possible Because he is a nice professor wanting to help Because many students drop out of the class None of the above View Answers 1. He can register any time afterwards, but most of the classes will be full 2. Because the class is very big with many seats 3. Find the professor and get permission 4. Because many students drop out of the class If you are uncertain about the answers to the questions, listen to the audio file again after having read the questions. After you have made all your selections, you may view the answers to see how you did. Step 3: Show Conversation Dialog A: "Hey Mike. I forgot about registration. I'm a day late, so all the classes are mostly full. What do you think I should do?" B: "You're screwed. You can't do anything about that. You have to hope that you get some classes that will be useful." A: "Do you think going to the registration building will help at all." B: "No. They will tell you the same thing in a worse way." A: "Did you register yet?" B: "Of course. Registering for classes is not something you want to miss." A: "What classes do you think are still open?" B: "Well, I know psychology 101 is a big class, so there will always be seats in that class. You can also get into Sociology." A: "That's helpful. Thanks. But what do you think about philosophy. I wanted to take that class this semester." B: "I took that class last year. The professor is really cool, so if you go to his office, you can have him sign a card that will let you in even if the class is full." A: "He does that?" B: "I guess that's because so many people drop out of that class." A: "That makes sense. I think I'll do that. Thanks for all the help." B: "No problem man." You should read the Conversation Dialog to help you study after going through the listening lesson. Do not view the Conversation Dialog prior to listening to the audio, or prior to answering all the questions.Intermediate Listening Lesson #07
Step 1: Listen to Dialog Do not view the questions until after you have listened to the audio file. Reading the questions first will not help you improve your English listening skills. Step 2: Quiz - View Questions 1. What is the main topic in this dialog? University classes University professors University registration University grades 2. What class was mentioned where the student received a 1.7? Psychology History Economics Calculus 3. Who does he blame for doing so terrible this semester? He blames his brother He blames his friend He blames himself He blames the professor 4. What was the cause for his GPA to go down so much? He spent too much time with his new girlfriend He started playing StarCraft He burned himself out from working too much and didn't study He had difficult classes this semester View Answers 1. University grades 2. Economics 3. He blames himself 4. He started playing StarCraft If you are uncertain about the answers to the questions, listen to the audio file again after having read the questions. After you have made all your selections, you may view the answers to see how you did. Step 3: Show Conversation Dialog A: "Did you get your grades yet?" B: "Yeah. My whole GPA is screwed up now." A: "Why? What happened?" B: "Well, I bombed my econ final and ended up with a 1.7." A: "Ouch. You must be very disappointed." B: "Well, it's my fault because I didn't study as much as I should have." A: "Why don't you re-take the class next year?" B: "That's what I plan on doing unless I keep screwing up. How did you do this semester?" A: "I didn't do that well either. I ended up with a 3.2 this semester. That drops my total GPA to 3.45." B: "My GPA is pretty similar to yours. I have a 3.1 now because of the stupid econ class." A: "What was your GPA before this semester?" B: "I was sitting happy with a 3.4." A: "Why did it go down so much?" B: "Let's just say I screwed up more than my econ class." A: "What happened to you?" B: "I started playing StarCraft and ended up wasting a lot of time." A: "You better stop slacking off." B: "You're right. I'm not going to play games during school anymore." You should read the Conversation Dialog to help you study after going through the listening lesson. Do not view the Conversation Dialog prior to listening to the audio, or prior to answering all the questions.Intermediate Listening Lesson #08
Step 1: Listen to Dialog Do not view the questions until after you have listened to the audio file. Reading the questions first will not help you improve your English listening skills. Step 2: Quiz - View Questions 1. What month or season do you think it is in this dialog? Summer Autumn Winter Spring 2. What did Mark do over the summer vacation? Traveled to Europe Played in a basketball league Worked at a restaurant Stayed home and watched TV 3. Why did Nicole drop out of school? She was depressed and needed a break Her mother got sick and needed time to take care of her She got a job offer that she couldn't refuse She finished school early 4. How many University years has Stacy completed? 1 2 3 4 View Answers 1. Autumn 2. Worked at a restaurant 3. She got a job offer that she couldn't refuse 4. 2 If you are uncertain about the answers to the questions, listen to the audio file again after having read the questions. After you have made all your selections, you may view the answers to see how you did. Step 3: Show Conversation Dialog A: "Hi Mark." B: "Oh, hi Stacy." A: "How was your summer vacation?" B: "I worked over the summer at a restaurant. Have to make tuition money right? What did you do?" A: "I took summer school. I withdrew from two of my classes last year so I wanted to make them up." B: "So are you officially a junior now?" A: "Yeah. And I have 5 credits to spare. I only needed to take 10 credits over the summer, but I took 15 because the price was the same." B: "That makes sense. So where is Nicole?" A: "She dropped out of school completely." B: "Really? Why?" A: "She worked at a startup company as an intern and since the business did well, they asked her if she wanted to work full time." B: "Wow. She's so lucky. She doesn't have a degree and she already has a job." A: "It sounds good now, but I'm traditional. I want the degree, so I wouldn't have accepted the offer." B: "Do you know how much they are paying her?" A: "I don't know. But I bet it must have been a good offer, or she wouldn't have accepted it." You should read the Conversation Dialog to help you study after going through the listening lesson. Do not view the Conversation Dialog prior to listening to the audio, or prior to answering all the questions.Intermediate Listening Lesson #09
Step 1: Listen to Dialog Do not view the questions until after you have listened to the audio file. Reading the questions first will not help you improve your English listening skills. Step 2: Quiz - View Questions 1. What school subject are they talking about? Physcial Education Geography History Math 2. What is the main purpose of this discussion? To get tips on the examination To learn about how Martin Luther King Jr. had on American society To talk about past presidents and leaders To discuss the best method to study in general 3. Where is one of the person going now? On his way home To the book store Going to eat lunch Going to the library 4. Why will he spend most of his time studying the civil war? Because the professor spent the most time lecturing on the civil war Because he already studied the other sections Because it is the most interesting Because it is his area of weakness View Answers 1. History 2. To get tips on the examination 3. Going to the library 4. Because the professor spent the most time lecturing on the civil war If you are uncertain about the answers to the questions, listen to the audio file again after having read the questions. After you have made all your selections, you may view the answers to see how you did. Step 3: Show Conversation Dialog A: "Did you already take the history exam?" B: "Yeah. It was hard. When do you take it?" A: "I take it tomorrow morning. There is so much material, that I don't know what to emphasize on. What types of questions did you get?" B: "Mostly on the civil war. You should also study the impact Martin Luther King Jr. had on American society." A: "How about Abraham Lincoln? Did you get any questions about him?" B: "I only had 1 question about him. But you might get more. I don't know if he will have the same exam or not." A: "Hopefully he will use the same exam, cause I'm going to spend most of my time studying the civil war. It is a huge section and that is what he lectured the most on in class." B: "If you can't study everything, then that is probably the best way to go." A: "Aright. Thanks for the info. I gotta go to the library now." B: "Good luck." A: "Thanks. See ya." You should read the Conversation Dialog to help you study after going through the listening lesson. Do not view the Conversation Dialog prior to listening to the audio, or prior to answering all the questions.Intermediate Listening Lesson #10
Step 1: Listen to Dialog Do not view the questions until after you have listened to the audio file. Reading the questions first will not help you improve your English listening skills. Step 2: Quiz - View Questions 1. What are these two people doing? Taking a smoke break At the cigarette store buying cigarettes At a bar drinking and smoking Talking over the phone 2. Why is he asking a friend for a cigarette? He forgot his cigarettes today He wants to try smoking He ran out of cigarettes earlier that day He needs one for later 3. Select the statement that is true from this dialog? Smoking is addicting It is hard to quit smoking The longer you smoke the harder it becomes to quit All of the above 4. Where is this conversation taking place? At work At school At home At a restaurant View Answers 1. Taking a smoke break 2. He forgot his cigarettes today 3. All of the above 4. At school If you are uncertain about the answers to the questions, listen to the audio file again after having read the questions. After you have made all your selections, you may view the answers to see how you did. Step 3: Show Conversation Dialog A: "Hey Bobby. What's going on?" B: "Just taking a smoke break." A: "I forgot my cigarette today. Do you have another one?" B: "Sure. Here you go." A: "Thanks." B: "I didn't know you smoked." A: "Really? I've been smoking for over a year now." B: "Oh. You're new to smoking still. I've been smoking for 7 years." A: "You ever tired to quit?" B: "Many times. I'm really addicted. It's harder to stop than you think." A: "Yeah. I tried to quit last month, and I thought it was going to be easy, but it turns out that I'm still smoking." B: "I highly recommend you quit soon. The longer you smoke, the harder it becomes to quit." A: "I think you're right. Aright. Gotta go to class. Thanks for the cigarette. I'll talk to you later." B: "No problem. I'll talk to you later." You should read the Conversation Dialog to help you study after going through the listening lesson. Do not view the Conversation Dialog prior to listening to the audio, or prior to answering all the questions.Intermediate Listening Lesson #11
Step 1: Listen to Dialog Do not view the questions until after you have listened to the audio file. Reading the questions first will not help you improve your English listening skills. Step 2: Quiz - View Questions 1. What is the main topic of this dialog about? Amount of drinking and alcohol tolerance Beer versus whiskey Drinking at parties Drink specials 2. What is the term "light weight" mean in this dialog? Someone who is small in size Someone who is skinny Someone who can't drink much An alcoholic 3. What happens when the light weight person has more than 3 drinks? He throws up He gets drunk He gets excited He gets a headache 4. How is one person able to drink so much without spending much money? He has friends buy him drinks He finds specials and buys cheap drinks He buys alcohol in bulk from the grocery store He spends a lot of money View Answers 1. Amount of drinking and alcohol tolerance 2. Someone who can't drink much 3. He gets a headache 4. He finds specials and buys cheap drinks If you are uncertain about the answers to the questions, listen to the audio file again after having read the questions. After you have made all your selections, you may view the answers to see how you did. Step 3: Show Conversation Dialog A: "Do you drink much?" B: "Depending on what you consider a lot." A: "How frequently do you drink?" B: "Couple times a week. How about you?" A: "Only when I go out. I'm not a big drinker." B: "How much can you drink?" A: "I usually only have 2 beers." B: "You're a light weight." A: "How much can you drink?" B: "I'm usually drinking all night long. At least 10 drinks." A: "Don't you spend a lot of money then?" B: "No. We usually go to places that have specials. Dante's over on the Ave has $5.00 pitchers on Mondays. So for ten, fifteen bucks, I can get a lot of drinks." A: "That's true." B: "If you don't like beer, have you tried mixed drinks? Some of them are pretty good." A: "I like beer, it's just that I get a headache when I drink more than 3." B: "You just have to build up a tolerance. I used to be like that. But your body gets used to it." A: "It'll take awhile, but I'm working on it." B: "Hey let's go out tomorrow night. The Ram Bar and Grill is having a special on pitchers." A: "Aright." You should read the Conversation Dialog to help you study after going through the listening lesson. Do not view the Conversation Dialog prior to listening to the audio, or prior to answering all the questions.Intermediate Listening Lesson #12
Step 1: Listen to Dialog Do not view the questions until after you have listened to the audio file. Reading the questions first will not help you improve your English listening skills. Step 2: Quiz - View Questions 1. What gender is the new baby? A boy A girl Twin boys Twin girls 2. What were the complications mentioned during birth? Had to do emergency C-Section Baby was inverted Baby was stuck No complications 3. What is the guy complaining about? That the baby was not a boy That the baby is too expensive That the baby is sick all the time That he doesn't get enough sleep 4. After the conversation, what will the guy do? Get some sleep Make sure wife and baby are healthy Take the baby to the hosptial Go to work to make more money View Answers 1. A girl 2. No complications 3. That he doesn't get enough sleep 4. Make sure wife and baby are healthy If you are uncertain about the answers to the questions, listen to the audio file again after having read the questions. After you have made all your selections, you may view the answers to see how you did. Step 3: Show Conversation Dialog A: "Did your wife give birth yet?" B: "Yeah. She's a healthy beautiful girl." A: "Congratulations. How is your wife doing?" B: "She is tired, but getting a lot of rest now." A: "That's good to hear." B: "I'm just glad there were no complications." A: "If your wife and baby are both happy, what more can you ask for?" B: "It's been a week, and I haven't slept that well." A: "That's normal for anyone with a newborn." B: "Yeah, but it's so hard. I have to work, and then go home and take care of my wife and the baby. I'm going to get sick at this rate." A: "You'll get used to it. After everything stabilizes, you can regain your health." B: "That's true. I should make sure my wife and baby stay healthy during this time." You should read the Conversation Dialog to help you study after going through the listening lesson. Do not view the Conversation Dialog prior to listening to the audio, or prior to answering all the questions.Intermediate Listening Lesson #13
Step 1: Listen to Dialog Do not view the questions until after you have listened to the audio file. Reading the questions first will not help you improve your English listening skills. Step 2: Quiz - View Questions 1. Why is one person sneezy? Seasonal allergies Got the flu Got a cold Ate something and went down the wind pipe 2. What other symptoms are mentioned with allergies? Runny nose Itchy throat Watery eyes All of the above 3. What is the other guy allergic to? Cat Dust Alcohol All of the above 4. What symptoms does he get from cats? Eyes become bloodshot Ears become red Body starts to itch all over None of the above View Answers 1. Seasonal allergies 2. All of the above 3. Alcohol 4. None of the above If you are uncertain about the answers to the questions, listen to the audio file again after having read the questions. After you have made all your selections, you may view the answers to see how you did. Step 3: Show Conversation Dialog A: "Ahhchooo!" B: "You've been sneezing a lot lately. Are you sick or something?" A: "No. Every spring time around April, I'm stricken with allergies." B: "I never have seasonal allergies." A: "Consider yourself lucky." B: "What are all the symptoms?" A: "Well, as you just saw, I sneeze a lot. Also, my nose becomes very runny, my throat sometimes itches, and my eyes start to water." B: "That doesn't sound good." A: "No it's not. So you don't have any type of allergies?" B: "Well, I have a severe allergic reaction to alcohol. It runs in the family." A: "Everyone to some extent is allergic to alcohol." B: "I get it pretty bad. My whole face turns red, including my ears. My eyes become bloodshot, and I start to itch all over my body." A: "That's pretty bad." B: "But that doesn't stop me from drinking. Hahaha." You should read the Conversation Dialog to help you study after going through the listening lesson. Do not view the Conversation Dialog prior to listening to the audio, or prior to answering all the questions.Intermediate Listening Lesson #14
Step 1: Listen to Dialog Do not view the questions until after you have listened to the audio file. Reading the questions first will not help you improve your English listening skills. Step 2: Quiz - View Questions 1. How many months has Julie been on a diet? 1 month 2 months 3 months 6 months 2. How much weight did Julie lose so far? 5 pounds 15 pounds 20 pounds 25 pounds 3. What was the main tip Julie got from her trainer? Eat less Exercise more Eat 2 times a day Eat 5 times a day 4. Does Julie think Barbara should try this? No. Julie thinks Barbara doesn't need to go on a diet No. It wouldn't work for someone like Barbara Yes. Barbara is much fatter than Julie and needs to go on a diet Yes. Barbara is similar to Julie so she should use the same plan View Answers 1. 2 months 2. 15 pounds 3. Eat 5 times a day 4. No. Julie thinks Barbara doesn't need to go on a diet If you are uncertain about the answers to the questions, listen to the audio file again after having read the questions. After you have made all your selections, you may view the answers to see how you did. Step 3: Show Conversation Dialog A: "Hi Barbara. Have you lost weight?" B: "Hi Julie. Yeah. I've been on a diet for a couple of months now." A: "Wow. You look great." B: "Thanks for noticing." A: "What type of diet were you on?" B: "I joined a health club and my trainer gave me tips on eating. With a combination of eating better and exercising, I managed to lose 15 pounds in 2 months." A: "That's amazing. What tips did your trainer give you?" B: "Mostly on how to exercise, but the best advice I got was changing my eating habits. Instead of eating 3 times a day, she told me to eat 5 times a day." A: "That doesn't make sense. If you eat more, than how do you lose weight?" B: "Actually, I'm eating the same amount. I eat 5 smaller meals a day. Basically, it naturally speeds up the metabolism and helps to burn fat at a faster rate." A: "That makes sense. I'm going to try that." B: "You don't need to lose weight." A: "I have a little gut I have been trying to get rid of." B: "Ah... but remember to incorporate a little exercise into your diet." A: "Thanks for the advice." B: "No problem." You should read the Conversation Dialog to help you study after going through the listening lesson. Do not view the Conversation Dialog prior to listening to the audio, or prior to answering all the questions.Intermediate Listening Lesson #15
Step 1: Listen to Dialog Do not view the questions until after you have listened to the audio file. Reading the questions first will not help you improve your English listening skills. Step 2: Quiz - View Questions 1. Why did they start talking about dieting? They looked at themselves in the mirror They need to lose weight for a school dance party They saw a skinny girl that was on a diet They saw a picture of a skinny model 2. How many different diets has one of the girl been on? 1 3 4 Too many to count 3. Why is one girl reluctant to go on a diet? Does feel she needs to Likes to eat ice cream too much Just completed one diet and wants a break Doesn't think she can benefit from a diet 4. When are they going to start? Very soon, probably tomorrow Very soon, next week Next month after school is over During summer break View Answers 1. They saw a skinny girl that was on a diet 2. 4 3. Likes to eat ice cream too much 4. Very soon, probably tomorrow If you are uncertain about the answers to the questions, listen to the audio file again after having read the questions. After you have made all your selections, you may view the answers to see how you did. Step 3: Show Conversation Dialog A: "Can you believe her? She is not even a hundred pounds and she is going off on how she wants to go on a diet." B: "Tell me about it. If I was as small as her, I wouldn't think about going on a diet." A: "Me too. But what are we going to do? I have been on 4 different diets and I can't seem to lose weight." B: "That's because you don't exercise. If you were more active, you wouldn't have a dieting problem." A: "What do you know? You are over weight too." B: "I'm not on a diet though." A: "I know. But I don't have someone to diet with. If we help each other and motivate each other, then I think we can lose some weight." B: "I like ice cream too much though." A: "C'mon. You'll feel better and look better and as a reward you can eat a little bit of ice cream here and there." B: "It does sound appealing." A: "It's a great idea. I can't believe I didn't think of this earlier. Going on a diet with a friend to back you up is a great way to succeed." B: "Okay. I'm in. Let's do it." A: "Great. I'll get our plan started right away." B: "Can we start tomorrow though?" You should read the Conversation Dialog to help you study after going through the listening lesson. Do not view the Conversation Dialog prior to listening to the audio, or prior to answering all the questions.Intermediate Listening Lesson #16
Step 1: Listen to Dialog Do not view the questions until after you have listened to the audio file. Reading the questions first will not help you improve your English listening skills. Step 2: Quiz - View Questions 1. What are the two guys talking about? A fat girl that walked by A pretty girl in a red shirt The swim suit models in the new magazine Movies stars with perfect bodies 2. What is the meaning of "chicken" in this dialog? To fly like a bird To speak with a chirp To be scared Someone who eats chicken every day 3. What feeling is used to describe how one guy feels when he talks to girls? He gets anxious He gets excited He gets nervous He gets emotional 4. What will the guy do after this conversation is over? Look for other pretty girls Try to talk to the pretty girl Go home depressed and drunk Drink more to get the courage to talk to girls View Answers 1. A pretty girl in a red shirt 2. To be scared 3. He gets nervous 4. Try to talk to the pretty girl If you are uncertain about the answers to the questions, listen to the audio file again after having read the questions. After you have made all your selections, you may view the answers to see how you did. Step 3: Show Conversation Dialog A: "You see that chick over there?" B: "The one in the red shirt?" A: "Yeah. Isn't she hot?" B: "She's alright." A: "Just alright?!? She's hot!" B: "Why don't you go talk to her?" A: "You think she's out of my league?" B: "Hell no! You're just a chicken that's all." A: "C'mon. I get nervous when I talk to girls." B: "Why don't you go stand next to her for awhile and if an opportunity comes up, strike a conversation." A: "What do I talk about?" B: "It doesn't matter. You gotta find what she's interested in and go with that." A: "I don't know..." B: "Do you want me to go talk to her?" A: "No. Stay away from her." B: "If you don't do anything, I'll bet somebody else will." A: "Ok already. I'll try." You should read the Conversation Dialog to help you study after going through the listening lesson. Do not view the Conversation Dialog prior to listening to the audio, or prior to answering all the questions.Intermediate Listening Lesson #17
Step 1: Listen to Dialog Do not view the questions until after you have listened to the audio file. Reading the questions first will not help you improve your English listening skills. Step 2: Quiz - View Questions 1. What is Jack going to ask Martha? To get married To be his girlfriend To go fishing with her father To borrow her father's car 2. What does it mean "to have balls"? To like sports To be frightened of everything To be brave To be a coach of a sporting team 3. How is Jack going to ask Martha? Ask her in a restaurant Ask her in a public area Ask her father in front of her None of the above 4. When did Jack decide to ask this question? About 2 weeks ago About a month ago Last night Today View Answers 1. To get married 2. To be brave 3. Ask her father in front of her 4. About 2 weeks ago If you are uncertain about the answers to the questions, listen to the audio file again after having read the questions. After you have made all your selections, you may view the answers to see how you did. Step 3: Show Conversation Dialog A: "Hey Jack. What's going on?" B: "Hey Matt. I'm going to ask Martha to marry me?" A: "Really? When did you decide this?" B: "I always knew she was the one, but I decided to pop the big question about 2 weeks ago. I'm just debating on how to do it." A: "That's exciting man." B: "So how did you propose?" A: "You shouldn't use my example. It wasn't special. I kind of wish I made it more special but it's too late now." B: "What do you think I should do?" A: "There are a lot of options. You can surprise her over dinner, or ask her in a public area, or if you have the balls, ask her father in front of her." B: "I never thought about that." A: "Thought about what?" B: "Asking her father in front of her. How do you think she will react?" A: "I don't know. You should know how she's going to react. She is your girlfriend." B: "I think that's the idea I was looking for. Thanks man." A: "Don't mention it. Good luck. You're going to need it." You should read the Conversation Dialog to help you study after going through the listening lesson. Do not view the Conversation Dialog prior to listening to the audio, or prior to answering all the questions.Intermediate Listening Lesson #18
Step 1: Listen to Dialog Do not view the questions until after you have listened to the audio file. Reading the questions first will not help you improve your English listening skills. Step 2: Quiz - View Questions 1. What sport are they talking about? Baseball Basketball Football Soccer 2. Until when did he play? Until he was 15 years old Until he graduated from high school Until he finished college He is still playing 3. What two positions are mentioned in this dialog? Quarterback and running back Midfielder and goalie Third base and outfielder Guard and forward 4. What does one guy in the dialog play every Tuesdays and Thursdays? Baseball Hockey Softball Golf View Answers 1. Baseball 2. Until he graduated from high school 3. Third base and outfielder 4. Softball If you are uncertain about the answers to the questions, listen to the audio file again after having read the questions. After you have made all your selections, you may view the answers to see how you did. Step 3: Show Conversation Dialog A: "What sport do you like the most?" B: "I like baseball the best." A: "Me too. Did you play when you were a kid?" B: "Yeah. I played until I graduated from high school." A: "What position did you play?" B: "I think I tried every position, but the last few years, I played third." A: "I hate third base. It's scary when the ball is coming at you so fast." B: "It was scary at first, but after awhile, I got used to it. If you have fast reflexes, then it's not really a problem. What position did you play?" A: "I played outfield. I hated the infield because I never figured out all the bounces." B: "I wish I could play again, but there isn't much opportunities around here." A: "I'm on a softball league. It's not fast pitch, but it's still fun. You wanna join our group?" B: "When do you guys play?" A: "We play either Tuesdays or Thursdays." B: "Sounds pretty fun. I'll come out and join you next time." You should read the Conversation Dialog to help you study after going through the listening lesson. Do not view the Conversation Dialog prior to listening to the audio, or prior to answering all the questions.Intermediate Listening Lesson #19
Step 1: Listen to Dialog Do not view the questions until after you have listened to the audio file. Reading the questions first will not help you improve your English listening skills. Step 2: Quiz - View Questions 1. What sport are they talking about? Baseball Basketball Football Soccer 2. Why does he like the sport they are talking about? It is fun to both watch and play It is a good form of exercise It is very challenging It is a great way to meet people 3. Why are there other forms of this sport such as two hand touch and the usage of flags? Because it makes the game more interesting Because it is a safer way to play Because it requires less people Because they don't know all the rules 4. Where do they play every Saturdays? In the high school field The field by the tennis courts In the apartment complex In the sports center View Answers 1. Football 2. It is fun to both watch and play 3. Because it is a safer way to play 4. The field by the tennis courts If you are uncertain about the answers to the questions, listen to the audio file again after having read the questions. After you have made all your selections, you may view the answers to see how you did. Step 3: Show Conversation Dialog A: "What sports do you like to play?" B: "I like baseball and basketball." A: "How about football?" B: "In my country football is brand new, so I never learned the game when I was younger." A: "It's a very popular game in America." B: "Yeah. I heard a lot about it. Is it really that fun?" A: "For me, it's one of those games that are fun to both watch and play." B: "Are you a football player?" A: "No, just for fun with my friends. We play two hand touch or flag football. We're too old to play tackle football." B: "What is two hand touch and flag football?" A: "Instead of tackling somebody, you just have to touch them with two hands, or if it is flag football, grab the flag that the ball carrier is wearing." B: "I see. It's safer then right?" A: "Exactly. We play every Saturdays on the field by the tennis courts. If you want to learn and play a little, you're welcome to join us." B: "I'll give it a try. Give me a call and let's go down together." A: "Ok. I'll call you Saturday morning." B: "Great." You should read the Conversation Dialog to help you study after going through the listening lesson. Do not view the Conversation Dialog prior to listening to the audio, or prior to answering all the questions.Intermediate Listening Lesson #20
Step 1: Listen to Dialog Do not view the questions until after you have listened to the audio file. Reading the questions first will not help you improve your English listening skills. Step 2: Quiz - View Questions 1. When do they plan on golfing together? This Saturday after lunch This Wednesday after work Sunday early morning Monday afternoon 2. How much does it cost to play? Fifteen dollars Twenty one dollars Thirty dollars Forty five dollars 3. What time will they play together? At 8:0apm At 8:15am At 4:00pm At 4:15pm 4. Where do they plan on playing? Somewhere close to home Somewhere close to work At the new golf course The golf course by the lake View Answers 1. This Wednesday after work 2. Twenty one dollars 3. At 4:15pm 4. Somewhere close to work If you are uncertain about the answers to the questions, listen to the audio file again after having read the questions. After you have made all your selections, you may view the answers to see how you did. Step 3: Show Conversation Dialog A: "Hey Steve. When's the next time you're going to play golf?" B: "I'm going out this Saturday." A: "Do you already have a foursome?" B: "Unfortunately, we do. Let's plan for something together for Wednesday. We can go right after work." A: "That sounds good. Where do you want to play?" B: "We won't have much time, so let's play somewhere close to work." A: "How about Bellevue? It's pretty close." B: "How much does it cost over there?" A: "Twilight rates are 21 dollars." B: "That's pretty good. Let's do it." A: "Aright. I'll get a tee time for Wednesday at about 4:00." B: "Make it 4:15. I won't get off until 4:00." A: "Ok. I'll call you later when I get a tee time." B: "Sounds good. I'll see you on Wednesday then." A: "Aright. Have fun on Saturday." B: "Will do." You should read the Conversation Dialog to help you study after going through the listening lesson. Do not view the Conversation Dialog prior to listening to the audio, or prior to answering all the questions.Intermediate Listening Lesson #21
Step 1: Listen to Dialog Do not view the questions until after you have listened to the audio file. Reading the questions first will not help you improve your English listening skills. Step 2: Quiz - View Questions 1. Why are they going to the department store? They are having a sale They need to shop for school clothes They are bored with nothing to do None of the above 2. When are they going to meet? On Friday On Saturday After dinner In thirty minutes 3. What are the two items they are looking at? Bags and pants Rings and necklaces Shoes and sweaters Jackets and belts 4. What is on sale for $80? Shoe Jacket Sweater Necklace View Answers 1. They are having a sale 2. In thirty minutes 3. Shoes and sweaters 4. Sweater If you are uncertain about the answers to the questions, listen to the audio file again after having read the questions. After you have made all your selections, you may view the answers to see how you did. Step 3: Show Conversation Dialog A: "Hey Jackie. What are you doing?" B: "Nothing much. I'm just relaxing today. Why? What's going on?" A: "I was thinking about heading to the mall. Do you want to go?" B: "Are they having a sale?" A: "Yeah. Both Bon and Nordstrom's is having there annual sale. It's a great time to buy some clothes you've been holding out on." B: "That sounds great. Where should we meet?" A: "I'll meet you in front of Nordstrom's in 30 minutes." B: "Sounds good. See you there." A: "What do you think about these shoes?" B: "They're cute. But do you think you'll wear them much?" A: "No. Not really." B: "This sweater is so pretty. I love the low neck design." A: "I bet it's expensive." B: "It's on sale for $80. What do you think? Should I try them on?" A: "For 80 bucks it looks great. Go try it on." You should read the Conversation Dialog to help you study after going through the listening lesson. Do not view the Conversation Dialog prior to listening to the audio, or prior to answering all the questions.Intermediate Listening Lesson #22
Step 1: Listen to Dialog Do not view the questions until after you have listened to the audio file. Reading the questions first will not help you improve your English listening skills. Step 2: Quiz - View Questions 1. What is the person trying on in the dressing room? Pants Jacket Sweater Shirt 2. How can this person save 10% off the sweater? Waiting until the sale happens this weekend Using a coupon in the catalog Filling out a survey Opening a department store credit card 3. What else is this person looking for? Pants Jacket Sweater Shirt 4. Why is the person not going to buy the second item? Jacket sleeves are too long Pants are too long Sweater is too bulky The shirt is too tight View Answers 1. Sweater 2. Opening a department store credit card 3. Pants 4. Pants are too long If you are uncertain about the answers to the questions, listen to the audio file again after having read the questions. After you have made all your selections, you may view the answers to see how you did. Step 3: Show Conversation Dialog A: "Where is your dressing room?" B: "Right over there." Person A comes out of the dressing room B: "How did you like the sweater?" A: "I loved it. I'll take it." B: "Great. I can ring you up over here. It comes to $87.04." A: "Here you go?" B: "Do you have a credit card with us?" A: "No I don't." B: "If you open up a card, you can save 10% on all your purchases today." A: "Not today. Thanks though." B: "No problem. We always have this offer, so when ever you decide to, just let us know." A: "Sure." B: "Is there anything else I can help you with?" A: "Yeah. I was looking at some of your pants, but they are all a bit too long. Do you have alteration services here?" B: "Yes. It cost $7, and it takes one day." A: "Great. Thanks for your help." B: "Thank you, and have a great day." You should read the Conversation Dialog to help you study after going through the listening lesson. Do not view the Conversation Dialog prior to listening to the audio, or prior to answering all the questions.Intermediate Listening Lesson #23
Step 1: Listen to Dialog Do not view the questions until after you have listened to the audio file. Reading the questions first will not help you improve your English listening skills. Step 2: Quiz - View Questions 1. What material is the bracelet? Platinum Silver White gold Gold 2. What was the occasion of the gift? No occasion A birthday present Anniversary present A wedding present 3. What does she want next? A ring A bracelet A necklace A pendant 4. When does she want a ring from her boyfriend? As soon as possible Next year Never A little later after she is ready View Answers 1. White gold 2. No occasion 3. A necklace 4. A little later after she is ready If you are uncertain about the answers to the questions, listen to the audio file again after having read the questions. After you have made all your selections, you may view the answers to see how you did. Step 3: Show Conversation Dialog A: "I love your bracelet. When did you get it?" B: "I got it awhile ago, but I haven't worn it much. You really like it?" A: "Yeah. It's beautiful. Is it white gold or silver?" B: "It's white gold." A: "Where did you buy it?" B: "My boyfriend took me to the Shane Co. and he let me pick it out." A: "That's so sweet. What was the occasion?" B: "That's the best part. It wasn't for anything special. He just wanted to buy me something." A: "You're so lucky. If he bought you something for no special day, I wonder what he would buy you for your birthday." B: "My birthday is coming up next month. We'll find out pretty soon." A: "What do you want?" B: "I wouldn't mind a necklace. I was at the jewelry shop looking around, and they have a couple of beautiful necklaces I want." A: "Why not a ring?" B: "I don't think I'm ready for a ring from him yet." A: "But you're ready for everything else?" B: "Damn right." You should read the Conversation Dialog to help you study after going through the listening lesson. Do not view the Conversation Dialog prior to listening to the audio, or prior to answering all the questions.Intermediate Listening Lesson #24
Step 1: Listen to Dialog Do not view the questions until after you have listened to the audio file. Reading the questions first will not help you improve your English listening skills. Step 2: Quiz - View Questions 1. What is this person looking for today? Ring, necklace, and bracelet Ring and necklace Bracelet and necklace Engagement ring 2. What size ring is this person looking for? Size 6 Size 6.5 Size 7 Size 7.5 3. What was the problem with the first necklace? It was too expensive It didn't match the ring It was too long It was too short 4. What happened after looking at all the items? The person bought them all The person will wait for a sale The person wants to think about it The person bought only the ring View Answers 1. Ring and necklace 2. Size 6 3. It was too short 4. The person wants to think about it If you are uncertain about the answers to the questions, listen to the audio file again after having read the questions. After you have made all your selections, you may view the answers to see how you did. Step 3: Show Conversation Dialog A: "Hi. Can I help you with anything?" B: "Yeah. Can I look at this ring?" A: "Sure. Let me get it out for you. What is your size?" B: "I believe I am a six." A: "Here you go." B: "Would you have any necklace that would go well with this?" A: "Actually, we have a few to choose from. They are over here." B: "There's no price tag on this necklace." A: "Oh. I'm sorry. I'll check the price for you. It is $199." B: "This necklace is a little short. Do you have one that is longer?" A: "Yes. Why don't you try this one on." B: "This one is much better. Can I try on the ring with this necklace?" A: "Sure. Here you go." B: "Let me think about it." A: "Sure. Take your time." B: "Thank you for all the help." A: "No problem at all." You should read the Conversation Dialog to help you study after going through the listening lesson. Do not view the Conversation Dialog prior to listening to the audio, or prior to answering all the questions.Intermediate Listening Lesson #25
Step 1: Listen to Dialog Do not view the questions until after you have listened to the audio file. Reading the questions first will not help you improve your English listening skills. Step 2: Quiz - View Questions 1. What type of ring are they talking about? A wedding ring A couples ring An engagement ring A lucky ring 2. When does this person plan on getting married? In March In June In July In September 3. What kind of watch are they talking about? A Rolex A Timex A Tag Heuer A Cartier 4. How much was the watch? $600 $1500 $2500 $3000 View Answers 1. An engagement ring 2. In June 3. A Tag Heuer 4. $1500 If you are uncertain about the answers to the questions, listen to the audio file again after having read the questions. After you have made all your selections, you may view the answers to see how you did. Step 3: Show Conversation Dialog A: "What a beautiful watch. It goes very well with your ring." B: "Thank you." A: "Is that your wedding ring?" B: "I'm not married yet. It's my engagement ring." A: "Well, congratulations. When is the big date?" B: "In June." A: "Did you have the watch before getting the ring?" B: "Actually, we bought the ring together after I got the watch." A: "You did a fabulous job with the selection. It's gorgeous." B: "Thank you so much." A: "What kind of watch is it?" B: "It's a Tag Heuer." A: "If you don't mind me asking, how much do they cost?" B: "This one is $1500. But they range from $600 to $3000." A: "That's why it looks so nice. I should have figured. You always get what you pay for." B: "Yeah. I would rather get one nice watch instead of 20 mediocre ones." You should read the Conversation Dialog to help you study after going through the listening lesson. Do not view the Conversation Dialog prior to listening to the audio, or prior to answering all the questions.Intermediate Listening Lesson #26
Step 1: Listen to Dialog Do not view the questions until after you have listened to the audio file. Reading the questions first will not help you improve your English listening skills. Step 2: Quiz - View Questions 1. What is the exciting news? She is pregnant She is getting married She passed the law exam She got a baby 2. How many months did they try to get a baby? 3 months 5 months 8 months 12 months 3. What is the gender of the baby? A boy A girl Do not know yet They are not talking about babies 4. Why does the lady want to find out the gender? Because she hates surprises So she can prepare ahead of time To figure out if they need another baby Because she wants a baby girl View Answers 1. She is pregnant 2. 8 months 3. Do not know yet 4. So she can prepare ahead of time If you are uncertain about the answers to the questions, listen to the audio file again after having read the questions. After you have made all your selections, you may view the answers to see how you did. Step 3: Show Conversation Dialog A: "Hey Suzie. Guess what? I'm having a baby!" B: "Really? That's so great. Congratulations." A: "Thanks. I'm so excited. We've been trying for 8 months now." B: "That's really exciting. How many months are you pregnant?" A: "Three months." B: "Are you going to find out if it is a boy or a girl?" A: "I want to, but Bob doesn't. He wants to be surprised like the old fashioned way." B: "Maybe it's more exciting not knowing." A: "I'd rather know and buy all the baby things ahead of time." B: "There are so many things you have to prepare for." A: "I know I am going to be busy, but I know I can handle it. I have been looking forward to this day for a long long time." B: "It really must be an exciting time for you guys." A: "Thank you so much." You should read the Conversation Dialog to help you study after going through the listening lesson. Do not view the Conversation Dialog prior to listening to the audio, or prior to answering all the questions.Intermediate Listening Lesson #27
Step 1: Listen to Dialog Do not view the questions until after you have listened to the audio file. Reading the questions first will not help you improve your English listening skills. Step 2: Quiz - View Questions 1. Who is in the hospital? Jared is in the hospital Jared's friend is in the hospital Jared's father is in the hospital Jared's wife is in the hospital 2. Who else is in the hospital right now? Jared's wife is also in the hospital Jared's cousin is also in the hospital Jared's mother is also in the hospital Jared's friend is also in the hospital 3. Why is that person in the hospital? Had a stroke Had a heart attack Has a high fever None of the above 4. When will Jared go to the hospital? Right away Right after dinner First thing in the morning After class tomorrow View Answers 1. Jared's father is in the hospital 2. Jared's mother is also in the hospital 3. None of the above 4. Right after dinner If you are uncertain about the answers to the questions, listen to the audio file again after having read the questions. After you have made all your selections, you may view the answers to see how you did. Step 3: Show Conversation Dialog A: "Jared, I just heard about your father. How is he doing?" B: "He's in the hospital resting. The doctor's didn't give a clear answer yet." A: "I'm so sorry to hear that. But this is a good hospital. I'm sure they will do whatever they can." B: "I hope so." A: "You must feel really worried right now. But you know your dad is a fighter." B: "Yeah. I think my mom is the most worried. I'm basically worried about how she is doing." A: "Where is she right now?" B: "She's in the hospital with my dad. I have to go back tonight." A: "Hey, I'll go with you." B: "You don't have to." A: "It's really no problem." B: "Ok. Let's go right after dinner." You should read the Conversation Dialog to help you study after going through the listening lesson. Do not view the Conversation Dialog prior to listening to the audio, or prior to answering all the questions.Intermediate Listening Lesson #28
Step 1: Listen to Dialog Do not view the questions until after you have listened to the audio file. Reading the questions first will not help you improve your English listening skills. Step 2: Quiz - View Questions 1. What causes stress the most for this person? Pressure from parents Too much school work Stressful work Demanding wife 2. Why does the other friend NOT have this same problem? Brought home bad grades Always got into trouble Never listened Never paid attention 3. How does this person deal with stress? Meditate Talk with a psychologist Drink with friends Ignore the stress 4. What are they going to do after this conversation? Grab a beer Go home Eat dinner Watch TV View Answers 1. Pressure from parents 2. Brought home bad grades 3. Drink with friends 4. Grab a beer If you are uncertain about the answers to the questions, listen to the audio file again after having read the questions. After you have made all your selections, you may view the answers to see how you did. Step 3: Show Conversation Dialog A: "What stresses you out the most?" B: "Probably my parents." A: "How so?" B: "Well, during school, they wanted good grades. Then after I got a job, they wanted me to get a better job. And finally, they want me to get married." A: "You have to deal with a lot of pressure from your parents." B: "Your parents are not like that?" A: "Ever since I brought home some bad grades in elementary school, they never expected much." B: "You're lucky." A: "What do you do to deal with the stress?" B: "Not much I can do. It's always there. I sometimes go out with some friends and drink, but that's only a temporary solution. The stress always returns in the morning." A: "That sucks. You wanna go grab a beer?" B: "Sure. Sounds great. Let's go." You should read the Conversation Dialog to help you study after going through the listening lesson. Do not view the Conversation Dialog prior to listening to the audio, or prior to answering all the questions.Intermediate Listening Lesson #29
Step 1: Listen to Dialog Do not view the questions until after you have listened to the audio file. Reading the questions first will not help you improve your English listening skills. Step 2: Quiz - View Questions 1. Why does Sarah look so terrible? Her dog died Her fish died Her grandmother passed away Her grandfather passed away 2. What was the cause of death? Natural Car accident Attacked by another dog Cat ate the fish 3. What recommendation did the friend give Sarah? To forget about everything To visit the cemetery often To look at old photos To buy another pet 4. Where are they going now? To the cemetery To the pet store To eat something To the hospital View Answers 1. Her grandmother passed away 2. Natural 3. To visit the cemetery often 4. To eat something If you are uncertain about the answers to the questions, listen to the audio file again after having read the questions. After you have made all your selections, you may view the answers to see how you did. Step 3: Show Conversation Dialog A: "Sarah. You look terrible. What's wrong?" B: "My grandmother just passed away." A: "I'm so sorry to hear that. When did this happen?" B: "A couple of days ago. I just go back from the funeral." A: "Is there anything I can do?" B: "No... not really. The sad thing is that I wasn't there when she died. I really wanted to be there one last time." A: "I'm sure she knew you loved her. Did she pass away in the hospital?" B: "Yeah. She died in her sleep." A: "I'm sorry she's gone." B: "At least she didn't suffer." A: "I think your grandmother would want you to think of all the good times you spent together." B: "I know. But I miss her." A: "When my grandmother passed away, I frequently visited her in the cemetery. I always talked to her. Even though she wasn't there, I somehow knew she heard what I said." B: "Yeah? That's what I was thinking too. Thanks." A: "It looks like you haven't eaten anything all day. We should get you something to eat." B: "You're right... I should eat something. Let's go." You should read the Conversation Dialog to help you study after going through the listening lesson. Do not view the Conversation Dialog prior to listening to the audio, or prior to answering all the questions.Intermediate Listening Lesson #30
Step 1: Listen to Dialog Do not view the questions until after you have listened to the audio file. Reading the questions first will not help you improve your English listening skills. Step 2: Quiz - View Questions 1. What description is used for a breakup? It is unpleasant but necessary It was the worst feeling in the world It was bearable It sucked 2. What time frame did the friend mention for the pain? It lasts a long time It is over before you know it It will never get better It is only temporary 3. What did his friend tell him to think about? Think about all the good memories Think of all the bad things Think how stupid the relationship was Think about a new girl 4. What final recommendation did his friend give him? To eat a lot of food To be around people To start old hobbies To watch a lot of TV View Answers 1. It was the worst feeling in the world 2. It is only temporary 3. Think of all the bad things 4. To be around people If you are uncertain about the answers to the questions, listen to the audio file again after having read the questions. After you have made all your selections, you may view the answers to see how you did. Step 3: Show Conversation Dialog A: "Why are you so quiet?" B: "My girlfriend just broke up with me." A: "You must feel terrible now." B: "Yeah." A: "I remember my first break up. It was the worst feeling in the world. I was crying everyday for three months. And slowly, it got better. I know you'll feel better too." B: "You've been through this too?" A: "Yeah. I remember it very clearly. The pain makes it easy to remember. I know you're really hurting right now, but you know many people experience break ups." B: "But it hurts too much." A: "I know it's painful, but it's only temporary. After the pain goes away, you'll find other girls." B: "What if I don't want to find another girl?" A: "You'll change your mind. Look at everyone in the world. They all break up and move on. The faster you understand this, the quicker you will recover." B: "You're right." A: "I also know you must still have strong feelings for her, but try to think of all the bad things. You know she didn't treat you that well. Is that the person you want to spend the rest of your life with?" B: "Yeah. Thanks for the talk." A: "I'll give you a call later. We should hang out. It's good to be around people." B: "Ok. I'll talk to you later." You should read the Conversation Dialog to help you study after going through the listening lesson. Do not view the Conversation Dialog prior to listening to the audio, or prior to answering all the questions.Intermediate Listening Lesson #31
Step 1: Listen to Dialog Do not view the questions until after you have listened to the audio file. Reading the questions first will not help you improve your English listening skills. Step 2: Quiz - View Questions 1. What feeling are they talking about? True love Blind love Mother's love Real love 2. Why does Jack like this girl? Because the girl is very sweet Because the girl is very nice Because the girl has a nice personality Because the girl is hot 3. Where does Jack plan on talking to this girl? In the hallway before class In front of the library In the cafeteria when she is alone At the bus stop 4. How does Jack know she doesn't have a boyfriend? Jack followed her around campus Jack asked her directly Jack asked one of her friends Jack read her profile on the Internet View Answers 1. Blind love 2. Because the girl is hot 3. In the cafeteria when she is alone 4. Jack followed her around campus If you are uncertain about the answers to the questions, listen to the audio file again after having read the questions. After you have made all your selections, you may view the answers to see how you did. Step 3: Show Conversation Dialog A: "Hey Jack. How's it going?" B: "I'm falling in love." A: "What! With who?" B: "That girl in my econ class. She is so hot." A: "Did you guys go on a date already?" B: "No. I didn't even talk to her yet. But I think I'm in love." A: "Does she have a boyfriend?" B: "I don't think so. I've been following her around campus and I haven't seen another guy." A: "Dude, you're a stalker man. Just ask her on a date." B: "I plan on running into her in the cafeteria when she's alone. I think I'll ask her then." A: "So why do you think you're in love?" B: "She's the only thing I can think of all day long." A: "That's called blind love. Well, I gotta run. Tell me how it goes next week." B: "Aright. I'll talk to you later." You should read the Conversation Dialog to help you study after going through the listening lesson. Do not view the Conversation Dialog prior to listening to the audio, or prior to answering all the questions.Intermediate Listening Lesson #32
Step 1: Listen to Dialog Do not view the questions until after you have listened to the audio file. Reading the questions first will not help you improve your English listening skills. Step 2: Quiz - View Questions 1. How does he feel after breaking up with his girlfriend? Depressed and sad Relieved and glad In extreme pain Crying all day long 2. How long did the relationship last? 1 month 2 months 1 year 2 years 3. Why did they break up? She was too emotional He didn't treat her well She found another guy He was going abroad to study 4. What other term was used that is similar to being too emotional ? A cry baby A psycho A mama's boy A freak View Answers 1. Relieved and glad 2. 2 months 3. She was too emotional 4. A psycho If you are uncertain about the answers to the questions, listen to the audio file again after having read the questions. After you have made all your selections, you may view the answers to see how you did. Step 3: Show Conversation Dialog A: "What happened to that girl you were seeing?" B: "Oh Jackie? We broke up last week." A: "That was a short relationship. You only started dating 2 months ago." B: "It was actually a long two months. She was a psycho." A: "What do you mean?" B: "She would be laughing one moment, and if I said something insensitive, she would start crying. I didn't want to deal with that." A: "She sounds very emotional." B: "She was a psycho man. One time we were suppose to get together. I was waiting for her call, and when she finally called, she was screaming why I wasn't at her place." A: "Were you suppose to be there?" B: "I thought she was going to call when she was done shopping. It was a misunderstanding. She was literally screaming on the phone over this." A: "Ok. You're right. She's a psycho." B: "I'm just glad it's over." You should read the Conversation Dialog to help you study after going through the listening lesson. Do not view the Conversation Dialog prior to listening to the audio, or prior to answering all the questions.Intermediate Listening Lesson #33
Step 1: Listen to Dialog Do not view the questions until after you have listened to the audio file. Reading the questions first will not help you improve your English listening skills. Step 2: Quiz - View Questions 1. Where did he get a job? At a computer software company At a marketing company At a consulting firm At an accounting firm 2. What things did he stop worrying about after getting a job? How to pay the bills How to explain to his mother Not having to job search and interview anymore Feeling like a loser 3. When does he start work? Next Monday Next month On June 1st On April 15th 4. How is he feeling about starting work? Relieved and happy Nervous and excited Scared and worried None of the above View Answers 1. At a consulting firm 2. Not having to job search and interview anymore 3. Next Monday 4. Nervous and excited If you are uncertain about the answers to the questions, listen to the audio file again after having read the questions. After you have made all your selections, you may view the answers to see how you did. Step 3: Show Conversation Dialog A: "Hey Matt. I just got a job at a consulting firm." B: "Congratulations. That's great!" A: "I'm so happy. I don't have to worry about finding a job and interviewing anymore." B: "When do you start?" A: "I start next Monday." B: "You're going to have to put in a lot of hours you know." A: "I know. I'm a little nervous, but it's pretty exciting." B: "I bet. You must be stoked." A: "Yeah. I'm going to celebrate tonight. Wanna hang out?" B: "Sure. It's on you right?" A: "Of course. How about Toby? Should we call him?" B: "I don't know. He's a little depressed. He's having a hard time finding a job right now." A: "I should still tell him. In the least, I can refer him to my company. It might help." B: "That sounds like a good idea." You should read the Conversation Dialog to help you study after going through the listening lesson. Do not view the Conversation Dialog prior to listening to the audio, or prior to answering all the questions.Intermediate Listening Lesson #34
Step 1: Listen to Dialog Do not view the questions until after you have listened to the audio file. Reading the questions first will not help you improve your English listening skills. Step 2: Quiz - View Questions 1. Why is Martha crying? Pat just broke up with her Jake just broke up with her She broke up with Pat She broke up with Jake 2. When did the break up occur? Earlier today Yesterday Last week Last weekend 3. What was the cause of the breakup? The guy found another girl Martha found another guy They weren't good for each other They had too many fights 4. How is Martha taking this? She doesn't know what to do because this is her first break up experience She is very logical and knows the pain will go away because she experienced this before She is very happy that she doesn't have to deal with her boyfriend anymore She feels like going shopping and will meet her friend right now View Answers 1. Jake just broke up with her 2. Yesterday 3. The guy found another girl 4. She is very logical and knows the pain will go away because she experienced this before If you are uncertain about the answers to the questions, listen to the audio file again after having read the questions. After you have made all your selections, you may view the answers to see how you did. Step 3: Show Conversation Dialog A: "Martha. What's wrong? Why are you crying?" B: "Jake just broke up with me." A: "I'm sorry. When did this happen?" B: "Yesterday. I didn't even know it was coming. He just told me he found someone else." A: "What a jerk. He doesn't deserve you." B: "But it still hurts. I thought I loved him." A: "He didn't treat you that well either. Maybe you don't want to hear this, but I think you can do better." B: "Better or worse, it doesn't matter. I had a lot of feelings for him. I really liked him" A: "It must be really painful. I remember when Josh and I broke up. I was crying for a week." B: "I know I'll get over him. My first break up was painful because I was naive." A: "Exactly. You'll find someone again. You should get your mind off of this. Let's go shopping." B: "Maybe tomorrow. I don't feel like it tonight." A: "How about coffee down the street?" B: "Sure." You should read the Conversation Dialog to help you study after going through the listening lesson. Do not view the Conversation Dialog prior to listening to the audio, or prior to answering all the questions.Advanced Listening Lesson #01
Step 1: Listen to Dialog Do not view the questions until after you have listened to the audio file. Reading the questions first will not help you improve your English listening skills. Step 2: Quiz - View Questions 1. What two states are the guys from? New York and Oregon California and New York Texas and California Texas and New York 2. What year are the two students in? Both are freshman One is a freshman and the other is a sophomore One is a sophomore and the other is a junior Both are senior 3. What university are they currently at? Austin Stanford Berkeley UCLA 4. What are all the majors that were brought up? Political Science, English Literature, and Electical Engineering Science, English Literature, and Mechanical Engineering Biology, English, and Chemical Engineering None of the above View Answers 1. Texas and California 2. Both are freshman 3. Berkeley 4. Political Science, English Literature, and Electical Engineering If you are uncertain about the answers to the questions, listen to the audio file again after having read the questions. After you have made all your selections, you may view the answers to see how you did. Step 3: Show Conversation Dialog A: "Hi. My name is Mark." B: "Mark? I'm Bill. Glad to meet you." A: "Yeah. So where are you from?" B: "I'm from Houston Texas." A: "Oh... I'm from Southern California." B: "There must be a lot of cute girls over there huh?" A: "Hell yeah. But most of them are hoochies." B: "That sucks. So, what year are you?" A: "I'm a freshman." B: "This is my first year too." A: "So what made you decide to come to California for school? I hear Austin is a good school." B: "It's aright, but I think Berkeley is better." A: "So is this where you wanted to come?" B: "To tell you the truth, I wanted to go to Stanford. I made it on the waiting list, but ninety nine percent of the people accepted to Stanford go there. Like, who wouldn't right?" A: "Very true. But this is still a good school." B: "I'm not complaining. I just know that I wanted to come to California. Texas is cool and all, but I wanted to experience different things." A: "That's good. Do you know what you plan on majoring in?" B: "I was thinking about political science, but now I'm leaning towards English literature. How about you?" A: "I plan on majoring in double E." B: "Do you know where the Smith building is? I have to pick up the syllabus for my psychology class. I missed the first day." A: "That's a great start. It's over there by the library." B: "It was nice meeting you." A: "Yeah. We should hang out later." B: "Cool. I'll see you tomorrow in class then." A: "Aright. Later." You should read the Conversation Dialog to help you study after going through the listening lesson. Do not view the Conversation Dialog prior to listening to the audio, or prior to answering all the questions.Advanced Listening Lesson #02
Step 1: Listen to Dialog Do not view the questions until after you have listened to the audio file. Reading the questions first will not help you improve your English listening skills. Step 2: Quiz - View Questions 1. Why is Jack so tired? He was up all night drinking at a party He was up all night studying He got sick and is feeling tired all the time None of the above 2. What does cramming mean in this dialog? To drink as much as possible in a short amount of time To pack for vacation using one small bag To do last minute studying To have muscle pain from running too much 3. What subject and how many pages does one student have to write? 5 pages for English literature 10 pages for English literature 5 pages for Psychology 10 pages for Psychology 4. Why are they going to meet on Saturday? Because one student will help the other in Biology Because one student will help the other in Chemistry To share notes in the history class they are taking To study together for the Psychology exam View Answers 1. He was up all night studying 2. To do last minute studying 3. 10 pages for Psychology 4. Because one student will help the other in Chemistry If you are uncertain about the answers to the questions, listen to the audio file again after having read the questions. After you have made all your selections, you may view the answers to see how you did. Step 3: Show Conversation Dialog A: "Hey Jack. You look tired. What's going on?" B: "It's finals week and I have been up all night studying." A: "How many exams do you have left?" B: "Three more to go?" A: "Have you been keeping up, or are you cramming everything?" B: "If I was keeping up, I wouldn't need to stay up all night." A: "Ha ha ha. Looks like you are in for a tough week." B: "Tell me about it. How about you? What have you been up to?" A: "I finished my last final this morning." B: "So you're completely done?" A: "No. I have one more report that is due this Friday. I haven't started it yet, but it shouldn't be too tough." B: "How many pages do you have to write?" A: "It's a 10 page paper on habitual behavior for psychology 211." B: "You wanna take one of my exams for me?" A: "I would if I could, but you know that's not possible." B: "Yeah, I know." A: "If you need help with your chemistry class, I can help you over the weekend." B: "That would be great." A: "Let's get together Saturday around lunch time." B: "You don't know how much this means to me. Thanks." A: "Don't mention it. I'll see you on Saturday." You should read the Conversation Dialog to help you study after going through the listening lesson. Do not view the Conversation Dialog prior to listening to the audio, or prior to answering all the questions.Advanced Listening Lesson #03
Step 1: Listen to Dialog Do not view the questions until after you have listened to the audio file. Reading the questions first will not help you improve your English listening skills. Step 2: Quiz - View Questions 1. Where is the conversation taking place? In an apartment At a friend's house At the dormitory In the classroom 2. Where is Ontario? In Canada In Washington State In California In Texas 3. Select the statement that is true about which state this dialog is occurring? Not mentioned, but definitely not in Washington Not mentioned, but definitely not in California Not mentioned, but definitely not in Texas It is definitely in California 4. From the dialog, what indicates that they will be good roommates? They both come from the same state They are both freshman They are both night people They both enjoy drinking View Answers 1. At the dormitory 2. In California 3. Not mentioned, but definitely not in California 4. They are both night people If you are uncertain about the answers to the questions, listen to the audio file again after having read the questions. After you have made all your selections, you may view the answers to see how you did. Step 3: Show Conversation Dialog A: "Hi. My name is Jack." B: "Hey Jack. I'm Seth." A: "It's nice to meet you." B: "Looks like we're going to be roommates." A: "Yeah." B: "So where are you from?" A: "I'm from Tacoma. How about you?" B: "I'm from Ontario." A: "In Canada?" B: "No. It's in California. It's a smaller city in southern California." A: "So what made you come here?" B: "I wanted to go to a different state." A: "I see. Hey, if you don't mind, I took this side of the room." B: "No problem. They look the same to me." A: "Are you a morning person or a night person." B: "I'm a night person." A: "That's great. So am I. I like to sleep in the morning." B: "That should work out well then." You should read the Conversation Dialog to help you study after going through the listening lesson. Do not view the Conversation Dialog prior to listening to the audio, or prior to answering all the questions.Advanced Listening Lesson #04
Step 1: Listen to Dialog Do not view the questions until after you have listened to the audio file. Reading the questions first will not help you improve your English listening skills. Step 2: Quiz - View Questions 1. Why is Sara showing Jessica around? Because Sara is the landlord Because Sara is collecting rent Because Sara was there first and is being friendly Because Jessica asked her 2. What is one thing they have in common? They both are morning people They both like music They both like watching TV They both like the same type of boys 3. Sara brought a TV for the room. What did Jessica bring with her? A Television also A stereo A microwave oven A refrigerator 4. Where is the cafeteria located? In the building next door In the building Across the street on campus There is no cafeteria View Answers 1. Because Sara was there first and is being friendly 2. They both like watching TV 3. A refrigerator 4. In the building If you are uncertain about the answers to the questions, listen to the audio file again after having read the questions. After you have made all your selections, you may view the answers to see how you did. Step 3: Show Conversation Dialog A: "Hi. I'm Sara." B: "My name is Jessica. It's nice to meet you." A: "Yes. It's nice to meet you as well." B: "Have you been here long?" A: "I got here about an hour ago. Do you want me to show you around?" B: "Yeah. That would be great. The most important is the bathroom right?" A: "Definitely. But we have to share the bathroom with the whole floor. The break room is over there. The bathroom is right across from the break room, and finally, the RA (resident advisor) is in room 315." B: "I'm glad there is a TV in the break room. I like to watch TV." A: "Me too. So I brought one. I haven't unpacked it yet, but it's a little TV that works." B: "Cool. I brought a refrigerator. I like to store some snacks in there. Feel free to use it." A: "That would be perfect. I think we're going to have a great time." B: "Do you sleep pretty late, or are you a morning person." A: "I have never been either. I'm very flexible with sleeping times. Anyways, I'm a deep sleeper so a little noise never bothers me." B: "That's good to know. I'm usually a night person, but I'm very quiet if my roommate is sleeping." A: "As long as you don't blast the music while I'm sleeping, I should be fine. Did you eat lunch yet?" B: "No. Is there a cafeteria in the building?" A: "Yeah. I'll show you." You should read the Conversation Dialog to help you study after going through the listening lesson. Do not view the Conversation Dialog prior to listening to the audio, or prior to answering all the questions.Advanced Listening Lesson #05
Step 1: Listen to Dialog Do not view the questions until after you have listened to the audio file. Reading the questions first will not help you improve your English listening skills. Step 2: Quiz - View Questions 1. Where is the conversation taking place? At an apartment complex At the dormitory At a fraternity house Over the phone 2. How much is the person asking for rent? $800 a month $800 a month plus half the bills $425 a month $425 a month plus half the bills 3. What concern did the person have regarding the place? How many kids were present How many parties they have The noise level The distance from school 4. When do they plan on meeting? In 15 minutes Later that evening Tomorrow Tomorrow evening View Answers 1. Over the phone 2. $425 a month plus half the bills 3. The noise level 4. In 15 minutes If you are uncertain about the answers to the questions, listen to the audio file again after having read the questions. After you have made all your selections, you may view the answers to see how you did. Step 3: Show Conversation Dialog A: "I'm calling about the available room. Is it still available?" B: "Yes it is. Do you know where we're located?" A: "Yeah. I drove by this morning and I liked the location. What's the rent?" B: "It's $850 a month. So you would pay $425 a month plus half of the bills." A: "How big is the place?" B: "It's a two bedroom, one bath and roughly about 800 square feet." A: "Is the complex pretty quiet? Can you hear a lot of noise or anything like that?" B: "They have a strict policy in the apartment complex concerning noise level. So it stays very quiet after 10 PM." A: "Are you the only person who lives there now?" B: "Yeah. I'm only looking for one roommate." A: "Everything sounds good. Can we schedule a time to meet so I can look at the place?" B: "I'm available anytime today or tomorrow." A: "How about if I come over now?" B: "That works with me. But what is your name?" A: "Oh, my name is Brad." B: "Ok. I'm Randy. So I'll see you in a bit?" A: "Should only take about 15 minutes to get there." B: "Sounds good." You should read the Conversation Dialog to help you study after going through the listening lesson. Do not view the Conversation Dialog prior to listening to the audio, or prior to answering all the questions.Advanced Listening Lesson #06
Step 1: Listen to Dialog Do not view the questions until after you have listened to the audio file. Reading the questions first will not help you improve your English listening skills. Step 2: Quiz - View Questions 1. What question did Jack ask Jane? If she wanted to smoke with him If she has an extra cigarette If smoking is allowed here If they sell cigarettes here 2. Why does Jack smoke? Because all his friends smoke and they spend a lot of time together Because he started smoking in the Army and couldn't quit Because his friends pressured him into smoking None of the above 3. How many cigarettes does Jack smoke in a day? Half a pack a day One pack a day One and a half packs a day Two packs a day 4. What is Jane trying to do in this conversation? To get a cigarette from Jack To learn more about Jack To convince Jack to quit smoking To have small talk to kill time View Answers 1. If smoking is allowed here 2. Because all his friends smoke and they spend a lot of time together 3. Half a pack a day 4. To convince Jack to quit smoking If you are uncertain about the answers to the questions, listen to the audio file again after having read the questions. After you have made all your selections, you may view the answers to see how you did. Step 3: Show Conversation Dialog A: "Hey Jane. How are you doing?" B: "Hi Jack. I'm doing great." A: "I hope you haven't been waiting too long." B: "No. I just got here a few minutes ago." A: "Do you know if smoking is allowed here?" B: "I think this is a no-smoking place. Do you want to go somewhere else?" A: "That's alright. I don't need to smoke." B: "Why don't you quit?" A: "I never thought about it. All my friends smoke, and we hang out a lot." B: "So do you smoke by yourself?" A: "When I started I didn't, but after a few months I started smoking at home. Usually when I'm bored." B: "Do you smoke cause you're bored?" A: "Yeah. It helps to kill the time. I also think it's out of habit. I'm so used to having a cigarette every now and then." B: "How much do you smoke in a day?" A: "I smoke about a half pack a day." B: "Well, I think you should quit. You know it's bad for you?" A: "I always knew it was bad, but I never thought about it." B: "You better start thinking about it now. You might not feel the difference now, but after 10 years of smoking, you might feel it and then it will be too late." A: "That's a good point. I'll try to quit." B: "Good. And if you need any support, I'll always be here for you." A: "Thanks." You should read the Conversation Dialog to help you study after going through the listening lesson. Do not view the Conversation Dialog prior to listening to the audio, or prior to answering all the questions.Advanced Listening Lesson #07
Step 1: Listen to Dialog Do not view the questions until after you have listened to the audio file. Reading the questions first will not help you improve your English listening skills. Step 2: Quiz - View Questions 1. What statement is true? The two people met last week at a fraternity party The two people knew each other before college The two people are strangers being friendly The two people was introduced by their girlfriends 2. Why is John's friend going to the registration building? To try to switch classes To register for a different class To withdrawal out of one class To complain about a professor 3. From this dialog which statement is true? John has a girlfriend John's friend has a girlfriend They both do not have girlfriends They both have girlfriends 4. Before being invited to a party on Saturday, what did he plan on doing? Study for exams Watch TV at his girlfriend's house Rent a movie Go to a club View Answers 1. The two people knew each other before college 2. To withdrawal out of one class 3. John's friend has a girlfriend 4. Rent a movie If you are uncertain about the answers to the questions, listen to the audio file again after having read the questions. After you have made all your selections, you may view the answers to see how you did. Step 3: Show Conversation Dialog A: "Hey John. I didn't know you were coming to this school." B: "Yeah, what a coincidence. It's good to see you." A: "It's been a while hasn't it?" B: "What have you been up to?" A: "Not much. Just school and stuff." B: "Where are you going now?" A: "I'm going to the registration building to see if I can withdrawal from one of my classes." B: "Are you bombing the class or something?" A: "Partially that, but mostly it's a boring class and I am getting nothing out of it." B: "Where are you off to?" A: "I finished class for today so I am meeting my girlfriend to watch a movie?" B: "What are you watching?" A: "The Lord of the Rings. I haven't seen it yet. Have you?" B: "Yeah, I saw that about a month ago. It was really good." A: "Don't tell me anything about it. I don't want to ruin the surprise." B: "No problem. Hey, what are you doing this weekend?" A: "Nothing really. I was going to rent a video and just hang out at home." B: "My fraternity is going to have a party on Saturday night. Wanna come?" A: "Hey, that sounds like fun. What fraternity are you in?" B: "I'm over at the Delta Fraternity house." A: "Cool. Give me your number and I'll call you Saturday." B: "It's 206-555-1212." A: "Aright. I'll see you on Saturday." B: "See you later." You should read the Conversation Dialog to help you study after going through the listening lesson. Do not view the Conversation Dialog prior to listening to the audio, or prior to answering all the questions.Advanced Listening Lesson #08
Step 1: Listen to Dialog Do not view the questions until after you have listened to the audio file. Reading the questions first will not help you improve your English listening skills. Step 2: Quiz - View Questions 1. Where is the conversation taking place? Over the phone At a party At a company meeting In the classroom 2. What type of company is one person working at? At a computer company At Microsoft At a consulting firm At a marketing company 3. The person who is not working is studying what major? Computer Science Marketing Information Systems MBA 4. Mike is someone they both know. What is Mike doing now? He is working at an accounting firm He is in a PHD program He is in grad school He is almost done with his Computer Science degree View Answers 1. At a party 2. At a marketing company 3. Computer Science 4. He is in grad school If you are uncertain about the answers to the questions, listen to the audio file again after having read the questions. After you have made all your selections, you may view the answers to see how you did. Step 3: Show Conversation Dialog A: "You're Jason right?" B: "Yeah. Tom right?" A: "Yeah. What's going on?" B: "Not much. Just hanging out. A bunch of guys are playing a game for shots." A: "You're not playing?" B: "I had enough to drink already." A: "I hear ya." B: "You in school or do you work?" A: "I work at a marketing company. How about you?" B: "I'm still in school. I have one more year left." A: "What are you majoring in?" B: "I'm majoring in computer science." A: "Where do you want to work?" B: "I would love to work at Microsoft. But it's pretty tough to get in." A: "So I hear. So you come to this club often?" B: "Every now and then. I usually hang out at Pioneer Square." A: "Yeah. That's a cool place. There are a ton of bars to hit in that area." B: "Are you here with Mike?" A: "No. Some of my work buddies. I haven't seen Mike in a while now. Do you know what he is up to?" B: "He's going to grad school." A: "What a surprise. I didn't know he was so studious." B: "Yeah. Surprised us all. Hey, I'm going to get another drink. You want one?" A: "It's aright. I still have to work on this one." B: "I'll catch you later." A: "Aright man." You should read the Conversation Dialog to help you study after going through the listening lesson. Do not view the Conversation Dialog prior to listening to the audio, or prior to answering all the questions.Advanced Listening Lesson #09
Step 1: Listen to Dialog Do not view the questions until after you have listened to the audio file. Reading the questions first will not help you improve your English listening skills. Step 2: Quiz - View Questions 1. Where is this conversation taking place? Over the phone At a party At a company meeting In the classroom 2. Where are all the fun clubs and bars? In downtown Over by the water Down the street On University Ave 3. One student is will major in business unless something happens. What is that something? If he gets a job offer soon If he decides to go to med school If he gets into the computer science department None of the above 4. What do many people tend to do when the weather is always bad? Watch movies Go on a road trip Study in the library Rent movies View Answers 1. In the classroom 2. Over by the water 3. If he gets into the computer science department 4. Watch movies If you are uncertain about the answers to the questions, listen to the audio file again after having read the questions. After you have made all your selections, you may view the answers to see how you did. Step 3: Show Conversation Dialog A: "Hi. My name is Robert." B: "I'm John. It's nice to meet you." A: "Do you know what this professor is like?" B: "I have no idea. This is my first year." A: "You a freshman? Me too. Where are you from?" B: "I'm from San Francisco." A: "I've been there a few times. It's a great city." B: "Where are you from?" A: "I grew up in this area all my life." B: "So you know where all the fun places to hang out right?" A: "Yeah. The best place is over by the water. They have a lot of clubs and bars." B: "I drove by that area before. I didn't know it was a college hang-out." A: "It gets pretty wild over there sometimes. You should go." B: "Sounds like a good idea. Do you know what you are majoring in yet?" A: "Not yet. I'm leaning towards business, but that's only if I can't get into computer science. How about you?" B: "I want to go to med school, so I'll probably end up majoring in biology." A: "That's cool." B: "Is the weather this bad all the time in the fall?" A: "Yap. This is a typical autumn. It gets worse though. At least it's not raining that much." B: "That sucks." A: "You'll get used to it. In the meantime, you'll have to watch a lot of movies. Seems like the only thing to do with the bad weather." B: "Too expensive. Can you believe how much movies cost these days?" A: "Yeah. It's crazy. It's like 9 bucks a movie. I remember when it was half that." B: "Unless it's a date, I'm not going to pay that much to watch a movie." A: "That makes sense." B: "Oh. The professor is coming. I'll talk to you later." A: "Aright." You should read the Conversation Dialog to help you study after going through the listening lesson. Do not view the Conversation Dialog prior to listening to the audio, or prior to answering all the questions.Advanced Listening Lesson #10
Step 1: Listen to Dialog Do not view the questions until after you have listened to the audio file. Reading the questions first will not help you improve your English listening skills. Step 2: Quiz - View Questions 1. How do they both know Stacy? They all grew up together in the same town One person knows her from elementary school and the other from middle school One person knows her from middle school and the other from high school One person knows her from middle school and the other from university 2. What is one thing they have in common besides knowing Stacy? They went to the same university They majored in the same subject They work at the same place They both went to grad school 3. What conclusion can we come to regarding the work ethics of the lady? She wouldn't make it as a consultant because she doesn't want to work many hours She sounds like she doesn't want to work but would rather play Neither A or B Both A and B 4. Where is this conversation leading to? Just a friendly conversation A love triangle might form here Possibly a start of a relationship A new job might be coming for someone View Answers 1. One person knows her from middle school and the other from university 2. They majored in the same subject 3. Both A and B 4. Possibly a start of a relationship If you are uncertain about the answers to the questions, listen to the audio file again after having read the questions. After you have made all your selections, you may view the answers to see how you did. Step 3: Show Conversation Dialog A: "Hi there. Do you know anyone here?" B: "I'm a friend of Stacy." A: "Stacy Miller? I know her." B: "Really? How do you know her?" A: "We went to middle school together." B: "That's cool. What a small world." A: "So how do you know Stacy?" B: "We went to the same sorority." A: "What did you major in?" B: "I majored in Sociology." A: "Really? Me too. That's kinda cool." B: "Where did you go to school?" A: "I went to Berkley." B: "So what are you doing here in New York?" A: "I work at a consulting firm." B: "Isn't that hard work?" A: "It was in the beginning, but I got used to it. It's a lot of hours though." B: "I bet. I don't like working more than 40 hours. I need time to play." A: "I hear that. I wish I had more time to play. But I do like my job." B: "I think it is important to like your job." A: "I like talking with you." B: "Really? I feel the same way." A: "Do, you wanna go out sometime, like dinner or something?" B: "I'd like that. Here, let me give you my number." You should read the Conversation Dialog to help you study after going through the listening lesson. Do not view the Conversation Dialog prior to listening to the audio, or prior to answering all the questions.Advanced Listening Lesson #11
Step 1: Listen to Dialog Do not view the questions until after you have listened to the audio file. Reading the questions first will not help you improve your English listening skills. Step 2: Quiz - View Questions 1. Why are these people planning a trip to Cancun? For a family vacation For their honeymoon For a business trip For a bachelor party 2. Why did they decide on Cancun over the Caribbean? One person has been to the Caribbean before Cancun is supposed to have better weather that weekend Cancun was much cheaper Caribbean hotels were all full 3. They have a lot of information about Cancun. Where did they get this information? They are looking at brochures They are getting a lot of information from the Internet They had a friend who told them everything about Cancun She has been there before so she knows many of the activities 4. When do they plan on going to Cancun? Next summer In the fall In a couple of months In a couple of weeks View Answers 1. For their honeymoon 2. Cancun was much cheaper 3. They are looking at brochures 4. In a couple of months If you are uncertain about the answers to the questions, listen to the audio file again after having read the questions. After you have made all your selections, you may view the answers to see how you did. Step 3: Show Conversation Dialog A: "Hey honey, where do you think we should go for our honeymoon?" B: "I always wanted to go to Mexico. Cancun is supposed to be a great place." A: "That sounds pretty good. But how about the Caribbean?" B: "That doesn't sound too bad either. Do you know how much it would cost for airfare and hotel?" A: "If we go for 5 nights, then the total for airfare and hotel would be about one thousand seven hundred dollars. How much would it be to go to Cancun?" B: "I found a deal for only twelve hundred dollars." A: "That's a lot cheaper. Let's go to Cancun then." B: "Really? That sounds great. I picked up a lot of brochures. Let's take a look at all the things we can do." A: "That reminds me. I better make sure my passport is not expired." B: "You better make sure. If it's expired, you have to hurry and renew it." A: "We still have a couple of months. No rush." B: "What do you want to do in Cancun?" A: "I want to golf at least one day. And I also want to try surfing. Do they have instructors on the beach?" B: "Yeah. This brochure shows lesson and equipment rentals and everything. That shouldn't be a problem. I want to try snorkeling." A: "Do we need to buy snorkeling gear?" B: "No. We can just rent it there." A: "Sounds like we're going to have fun." B: "I know. I can't wait. It's going to be so fun." You should read the Conversation Dialog to help you study after going through the listening lesson. Do not view the Conversation Dialog prior to listening to the audio, or prior to answering all the questions.Advanced Listening Lesson #12
Step 1: Listen to Dialog Do not view the questions until after you have listened to the audio file. Reading the questions first will not help you improve your English listening skills. Step 2: Quiz - View Questions 1. What country is Cancun in? Canada Australia United States Mexico 2. What type of place is Cancun considered from the dialog? A big tourist place An adventurous place A small local city A dangerous place 3. How many days are they going to Cancun for? 3 days 5 days 6 days 7 days 4. Where does the friend want to go for her honeymoon? Canada Australia United States Mexico View Answers 1. Mexico 2. A big tourist place 3. 6 days 4. Australia If you are uncertain about the answers to the questions, listen to the audio file again after having read the questions. After you have made all your selections, you may view the answers to see how you did. Step 3: Show Conversation Dialog A: "Where are you guys going for your honeymoon?" B: "We decided on Cancun, Mexico." A: "I've been there before. It's a great place." B: "What did you do there?" A: "There is so much to do. It's a big tourist place so there is access to everything." B: "That's good. I'm looking forward to our honeymoon. Especially after all the wedding plans I had to do." A: "How long are you going for?" B: "We decided on 6 days. We are leaving on Sunday and returning on Saturday." A: "That should give you plenty of time. Do you have all your travel plans in order?" B: "We just booked our flight and got our room. Everything is set." A: "You're going to have so much fun. I'm so jealous." B: "When you get married, you'll have your chance." A: "I need to find a guy first." B: "Where do you want to go for your honeymoon?" A: "Since I've been to Mexico and Hawaii before, I want to go to Australia." B: "That sounds great. It's a little out of our budget so we didn't even consider Australia." A: "For the price, Cancun is one of the best so don't have any regrets. It is a great place. So do you have a ride to the airport?" B: "My brother is going to drop us off." A: "Looks like everything is set. Just make sure to take a camera. I know many people who forgot to take a camera on their honeymoon." B: "Will do. Thanks." You should read the Conversation Dialog to help you study after going through the listening lesson. Do not view the Conversation Dialog prior to listening to the audio, or prior to answering all the questions.Advanced Listening Lesson #13
Step 1: Listen to Dialog Do not view the questions until after you have listened to the audio file. Reading the questions first will not help you improve your English listening skills. Step 2: Quiz - View Questions 1. Why did Samantha start exercising? To look good in bed Started dating a personal trainer Wants to look perfect All of the above 2. How long have they been dating? A week A month and a half 3 months 6 months 3. What area is the father suffering from? Back pains Stomach pains Chest pains Leg pains 4. What is the diagnosis that the father received from the doctors? Hasn't been to the doctors yet He has stomach flu Doctors do not know yet None of the above View Answers 1. All of the above 2. A month and a half 3. Stomach pains 4. Doctors do not know yet If you are uncertain about the answers to the questions, listen to the audio file again after having read the questions. After you have made all your selections, you may view the answers to see how you did. Step 3: Show Conversation Dialog A: "Hey Samantha. You've been so busy lately. What have you been up to?" B: "Hey Jackie. I started dating this cute guy and decided to start exercising." A: "You're not out of shape. You look fine." B: "Well, this guy I am seeing is a personal trainer and he has a perfect body. Compared to him, I need some work." A: "How long have you seen him?" B: "We've been together for about a month and a half." A: "Did you sleep with him yet?" B: "Not yet. But before I get into bed with him, I want to look fit." A: "That's not the greatest reason to exercise, but I guess it is a valid one." B: "How about you? Anything new in your life?" A: "My father is a little ill. He has been to the doctor's quite a bit lately but they don't know what is wrong with him. He complains about stomach pains a lot these days." B: "I'm sorry to hear that. Any idea what could have caused it?" A: "He says it is because he didn't take care of himself when he was young. That's why I want to start thinking about my health." B: "I think it is important to take care of yourself while you are young too. Even though my reasons are not the best, at least I am working on it." A: "How are your parents doing?" B: "They're doing great. I'm thankful that they are healthy." A: "That's good to hear. Well, I gotta get running now. I'll catch you later." B: "Ok. Send my regards to your father." A: "I will. Thanks." You should read the Conversation Dialog to help you study after going through the listening lesson. Do not view the Conversation Dialog prior to listening to the audio, or prior to answering all the questions.Advanced Listening Lesson #14
Step 1: Listen to Dialog Do not view the questions until after you have listened to the audio file. Reading the questions first will not help you improve your English listening skills. Step 2: Quiz - View Questions 1. Why is Billy on a diet? Wants to be mentally and physically healthy prior to proposing Wants to look sexy for her girlfriend Feels sick all the time and wants to improve his health Because he has diabetes and the doctor told him to lose weight 2. What is a six pack in this conversation? 6 cans of cold beer 6 bottles of coke 6 packs of cigarettes 6 muscles in the stomach showing up 3. What type of special is available at the gym? No specials right now, but will have one in the winter Free for the first three months Free enrollment and first month free Free enrollment and half price on the first month 4. What time are they going to meet? In the morning In the afternoon At 3pm Undecided. He will call in the morning View Answers 1. Wants to be mentally and physically healthy prior to proposing 2. 6 muscles in the stomach showing up 3. Free enrollment and first month free 4. Undecided. He will call in the morning If you are uncertain about the answers to the questions, listen to the audio file again after having read the questions. After you have made all your selections, you may view the answers to see how you did. Step 3: Show Conversation Dialog A: "Wow Billy. Looks like you lost a lot of weight. I could hardly recognize you." B: "Thanks. I've been on a diet for about 6 months. I'm going to ask Rachel to marry me soon and I want to be mentally and physically healthy." A: "What does being overweight have anything to do with marriage? If you love each other, that's enough right?" B: "Yeah, but I want to show her how much she means to me, and this is one way of proving it. I am changing for the better." A: "Good for you. Hey, when do you plan on proposing to her?" B: "I think I am going to propose to her on our 2 year anniversary." A: "Is she expecting it, or will it be a surprise?" B: "I think she expects me to ask her one of these days, but not anytime soon." A: "You sure you want to settle down already? You're only 25 years old?" B: "Yeah, I didn't think I would get married until I was 30, but when you know she is the one, why wait." A: "That's true. Hey, I hope everything works out. You're going to invite me to your wedding right?" B: "Of course man." A: "Gosh, I'm still shocked how much weight you lost. You're getting real skinny now." B: "I am working on a six pack now. I have two lines starting to show up. I've been spending a lot of time at the gym. It is hard work, but I feel so good after working out." A: "Where do you work out?" B: "I have a membership at Bally's. It's not too expensive and I like all the equipment they have." A: "I've been thinking about joining a gym. Are they having any specials right now?" B: "Yeah, they do. They have free enrollment and first month free. You should come by. I'll show you around. I can take in a guest so you can try it out before signing up." A: "That sounds good. Let's go this Saturday." B: "Cool. I'll call you in the morning." You should read the Conversation Dialog to help you study after going through the listening lesson. Do not view the Conversation Dialog prior to listening to the audio, or prior to answering all the questions.Advanced Listening Lesson #15
Step 1: Listen to Dialog Do not view the questions until after you have listened to the audio file. Reading the questions first will not help you improve your English listening skills. Step 2: Quiz - View Questions 1. How did Robert propose? Took her to the restaurant and had the ring in the food Took her to a baseball game and the announcer displayed the words on the big screen Had a ring inside a Valentines day present Ask her in front of her father 2. How many people are mentioned as a either maid of honor, brides maid, or candle lighter? 3 4 5 6 3. When do they plan on getting married? On July 4th - Independence Day On July 7th - A special 7/7 day Sometime in July On September 7th 4. How does the lady getting married know Lydia? A friend from elementary A friend from church A friend from work A friend from the dormitory View Answers 1. Had a ring inside a Valentines day present 2. 5 3. Sometime in July 4. A friend from church If you are uncertain about the answers to the questions, listen to the audio file again after having read the questions. After you have made all your selections, you may view the answers to see how you did. Step 3: Show Conversation Dialog A: "Hey Stephanie. Guess what?" B: "What?" A: "Robert asked me to marry him. We're getting married." B: "Congratulations. I'm so happy for you. So when is the big day?" A: "We haven't set the date exactly, but it looks like it will be sometime in July." B: "How did he propose to you?" A: "On Valentines day, he got me a present. I thought it was an ordinary Valentines day present, but when I opened it, it was this big diamond ring. Right then, he got on his knees and proposed." B: "That's so neat. So you really got surprised?" A: "We talked about marriage a little, but I never knew he was serious." B: "You are going to be busy with wedding plans. But you have several months to prepare for it." A: "It's going to be pretty hectic for me. So I'm going to need some help. First of all, I was wondering if you would like to be my Maid of Honor." B: "I would be honored." A: "So you're going to help me with the planning right?" B: "Of course. How many brides maids are you going to have?" A: "Three. So we will have a total of four." B: "Let me guess. Susan, Tina, and Cindy." A: "Close. I'm going to have Cindy as the candle lighter. The third brides maid is going to be Lydia. She is a good friend from church." B: "I know her. She's sweet. I'll make sure we have the best wedding for you." A: "I hope so. I appreciate your help." You should read the Conversation Dialog to help you study after going through the listening lesson. Do not view the Conversation Dialog prior to listening to the audio, or prior to answering all the questions.Advanced Listening Lesson #16
Step 1: Listen to Dialog Do not view the questions until after you have listened to the audio file. Reading the questions first will not help you improve your English listening skills. Step 2: Quiz - View Questions 1. What is the best description of the girl they are talking about? Has a pretty face Is a little chubby Nice personality All of the above 2. What is the friend looking for in a girl? Someone who is compatible in bed Someone who is fit and likes to exercise Someone who has a pretty face Someone he wants to marry 3. What does "out of my league" mean? In a different class Living in a different city Living in a different country Someone too good for someone 4. What statement is true? They both are looking for someone with a nice personality They both want to meet someone they will eventually marry The friend is not even thinking about marriage right now Personality is the best trait for a woman to have View Answers 1. All of the above 2. Someone who is fit and likes to exercise 3. Someone too good for someone 4. The friend is not even thinking about marriage right now If you are uncertain about the answers to the questions, listen to the audio file again after having read the questions. After you have made all your selections, you may view the answers to see how you did. Step 3: Show Conversation Dialog A: "Yo Matt. How goes it man?" B: "Pretty good. What have you been up to?" A: "You know that chick in psychology class?" B: "Yeah. You only talk about her every other day." A: "I can't get her out of my mind. She is damn fine." B: "Why don't you go talk to her then?" A: "I think she is out of my league." B: "Chicken. Somebody is only out of your league if you think so. What do you see in her anyway? She is a little chubby dude." A: "She is not. She has a nice figure. And she has such a pretty face." B: "Whatever. If you think so." A: "You like skinny girls or something?" B: "I like normal girls without any flab hanging out." A: "Now you're exaggerating you freak." B: "Seriously, I like a girl who is fit and likes to exercise." A: "How about personality?" B: "It doesn't matter until you are thinking about marriage and I'm not thinking about that yet." A: "Well, I'm looking so I don't care that much about figure. As long as she is nice and sweet." You should read the Conversation Dialog to help you study after going through the listening lesson. Do not view the Conversation Dialog prior to listening to the audio, or prior to answering all the questions.Advanced Listening Lesson #17
Step 1: Listen to Dialog Do not view the questions until after you have listened to the audio file. Reading the questions first will not help you improve your English listening skills. Step 2: Quiz - View Questions 1. What is one possible weakness the Yankees might have from one of the guy in the conversation? No other good players besides A-Rod The team is too young Yankees do not have a good pitching staff Many players are injured 2. What team was mentioned as an example of what the Yankees might end up like? Seattle Mariners Texas Rangers Boston Red Sox New York Mets 3. What team tickets were sold out and are the most popular to watch? Seattle Mariners Texas Rangers Boston Red Sox New York Yankees 4. What sport are the talking about? Baseball Basketball Football Soccer View Answers 1. Yankees do not have a good pitching staff 2. Texas Rangers 3. New York Yankees 4. Baseball If you are uncertain about the answers to the questions, listen to the audio file again after having read the questions. After you have made all your selections, you may view the answers to see how you did. Step 3: Show Conversation Dialog A: "Do you like to watch baseball?" B: "Yeah. I follow the Mariners every year." A: "I wonder how they will do this year." B: "I don't know if they have a chance. Did you hear that A-Rod went to the Yankees?" A: "I know. Their team was too good even before getting Alex." B: "Yeah. The richest team is usually the best team. They need to put a salary cap to make things fair." A: "I agree. I don't know why they haven't done so already." B: "But don't lose hope too soon. The Yankees don't have a good pitching staff this year. They might end up like the Texas Rangers. Great offense, no pitching." A: "I highly doubt that. Even though they lost Pettite, they still have a decent pitching rotation." B: "We'll see. I hope the Mariners do well this year." A: "Me too. Oh, did you buy any tickets this year?" B: "I got a couple of games with Oakland and Boston, but I couldn't get anything with the Yankees." A: "Same here. I went in on the second day and all the tickets with the Yankees were already sold out." B: "There's still plenty of other games though. We should go together one of these days." A: "Sounds good. Let's plan for late June." You should read the Conversation Dialog to help you study after going through the listening lesson. Do not view the Conversation Dialog prior to listening to the audio, or prior to answering all the questions.Advanced Listening Lesson #18
Step 1: Listen to Dialog Do not view the questions until after you have listened to the audio file. Reading the questions first will not help you improve your English listening skills. Step 2: Quiz - View Questions 1. What is affecting Kobe Bryant's performance? Too many issues to deal with He is in a temporary slump He is getting old Another good player joined the team 2. What statement is true? They both like to play basketball They both like to play baseball Only one of them likes to play basketball They both play full court basketball often 3. What positive reasons are mentioned to play basketball? Healthy and fun Competitive and challenging Healthy and challenging Competitive and fun 4. Besides basketball, what other sport was briefly mentioned? Baseball Golf Football Soccer View Answers 1. Too many issues to deal with 2. They both like to play basketball 3. Healthy and fun 4. Baseball If you are uncertain about the answers to the questions, listen to the audio file again after having read the questions. After you have made all your selections, you may view the answers to see how you did. Step 3: Show Conversation Dialog A: "Do you know when basketball season starts?" B: "It starts in October. How come?" A: "I like to keep up with the Lakers." B: "You keep up with baseball at all?" A: "Just a little. Not as much as basketball." B: "Who is your favorite player?" A: "Probably Kobe Bryant, but he has too many issues right now." B: "He's a great player, but his recent problem is really affecting his play." A: "Hope everything turns out ok. Do you play basketball much?" B: "I usually get into it during the playoffs. I'd rather play than watch." A: "I like to watch as much as I like to play. Do you play often?" B: "Every now and then with some friends." A: "I usually play twice a week at the health club. It's easy to round up 10 guys during the evening time." B: "That sounds pretty fun. But I'm too out of shape to play full court." A: "I get tired too, but I figure it's good for my health. And I'm having fun at the same time." B: "So you think the Lakers will do good this year?" A: "They better. They got a lot of good players now. If Malone can stay healthy, then I don't see how they can be beat." B: "I don't know... I think Sacramento has a strong team this year." A: "True, but I'm pulling for the Lakers all the way. It's going to be a great season." You should read the Conversation Dialog to help you study after going through the listening lesson. Do not view the Conversation Dialog prior to listening to the audio, or prior to answering all the questions.Advanced Listening Lesson #19
Step 1: Listen to Dialog Do not view the questions until after you have listened to the audio file. Reading the questions first will not help you improve your English listening skills. Step 2: Quiz - View Questions 1. What is the sport they are talking about? Baseball Basketball Football Soccer 2. Comparing baseball and football, which one is more fun? Baseball Football Both are equally fun Too different to compare 3. What does the corner back do? Main guy in offense The guy next to second base Defensive player covering passing plays and outside running plays The guy who shoots the ball 4. Why does one guy not follow football at all? Has no interest in the game Never understood the game Got hurt in high school and avoided it since Boring to watch View Answers 1. Football 2. Too different to compare 3. Defensive player covering passing plays and outside running plays 4. Never understood the game If you are uncertain about the answers to the questions, listen to the audio file again after having read the questions. After you have made all your selections, you may view the answers to see how you did. Step 3: Show Conversation Dialog A: "What are you watching?" B: "A football game. Packers are playing the Chiefs." A: "I never understood this game." B: "It's not that hard. If you watch a couple of games, you'll start to understand it." A: "Do you watch a lot of football?" B: "I like the Packers, so I watch all their games." A: "Did you play football before?" B: "Only in high school. I was too small to play for college." A: "What position did you play?" B: "I was the corner back." A: "Is that the main guy in offense?" B: "No. That's the quarterback. The corner back is a defensive player covering passing plays and outside running plays." A: "I see. Do you think it is more fun than baseball?" B: "It's hard to compare the two because they're so different. I like both baseball and football. How about you? You like baseball a lot?" A: "Yeah. I'm a big baseball fan." B: "Baseball is fun, but you should also learn football. I'll explain as we watch." A: "Cool." You should read the Conversation Dialog to help you study after going through the listening lesson. Do not view the Conversation Dialog prior to listening to the audio, or prior to answering all the questions.Advanced Listening Lesson #20
Step 1: Listen to Dialog Do not view the questions until after you have listened to the audio file. Reading the questions first will not help you improve your English listening skills. Step 2: Quiz - View Questions 1. One guy did pretty good in golf last Saturday. What area did he not do well? His putting was off that day His approach shots were slicing His drives were hooking His chipping was terrible 2. "Breaking single" means to shoot a score under 10. What caused him to not break single? He couldn't hit the ball well all day His 3 putted four times Penalty strokes on two holes for Out of Bounds He was stuck in the sand trap that caused 4 additional strokes 3. The other friend who doesn't golf as well shoots in the 90's. How far does he hit his driver? 250 yards 200 yards 175 yards Doesn't use the driver 4. What are they going to work on when they go to the driving range? Putting Short irons Long irons Driver View Answers 1. His drives were hooking 2. Penalty strokes on two holes for Out of Bounds 3. Doesn't use the driver 4. Driver If you are uncertain about the answers to the questions, listen to the audio file again after having read the questions. After you have made all your selections, you may view the answers to see how you did. Step 3: Show Conversation Dialog A: "How did you golf on Saturday?" B: "I did pretty good. I shot a 13." A: "Not too bad. I thought you were going to break single." B: "I had a chance. I shot a 4 on the front nine, but the back nine killed me." A: "What happened?" B: "My drive was totally off. All of the sudden, I started hooking the ball. I hit two balls OB, and that killed my score right there." A: "That sucks. You could have broken single if it wasn't for the penalty strokes." B: "Yeah. I was so frustrated after that hole. But overall, I shot well, so I'm not too disappointed. How about you? How have you been hitting lately?" A: "I hit great on the range, but when I get on the course, I can't seem to hit the ball right." B: "That happened to me for the longest time. It just takes time and practice. When you go out on the course more often, that problem will fix itself." A: "I'm still trying to break 90. I've been hitting in the mid nineties for ever." B: "How far does your driver go?" A: "I don't use it that much. I use my 3 wood more. I'm not consistent with the driver to use it." B: "You gotta keep practicing with it. Eventually you'll get the hang of it." A: "Yeah. I practice with it on the range, but I'm not making any progress on it." B: "Let's go to the range together and I'll check out your swing." A: "That sounds good. Let's go tomorrow night." B: "Ok. That will give us practice for our round on Wednesday." A: "I'll meet you there at 6:30." B: "Ok. See you tomorrow then." You should read the Conversation Dialog to help you study after going through the listening lesson. Do not view the Conversation Dialog prior to listening to the audio, or prior to answering all the questions.Advanced Listening Lesson #21
Step 1: Listen to Dialog Do not view the questions until after you have listened to the audio file. Reading the questions first will not help you improve your English listening skills. Step 2: Quiz - View Questions 1. What did Jack do last weekend? Talked on the phone with his girlfriend Had a drinking party with his friend Josh Played poker with a bunch of guys Went to the casino 2. Why didn't Jack include his friend that he is talking to? He forgot to call him They already had too many people He knew his friend didn't have any money for gambling He tried calling, but he wasn't home 3. What does Jack's friend have to do to get included into the games? Get more money Get a cell phone Stop being so boring Stop playing so much video games 4. What happens if you lose all your chips early in the game? Pay more money to buy more chips Do a dare that makes people laugh to get more chips Bring more beer Sit out until the next game starts View Answers 1. Played poker with a bunch of guys 2. He tried calling, but he wasn't home 3. Get a cell phone 4. Sit out until the next game starts If you are uncertain about the answers to the questions, listen to the audio file again after having read the questions. After you have made all your selections, you may view the answers to see how you did. Step 3: Show Conversation Dialog A: "Hey Jack. What did you do last weekend?" B: "Josh had a bunch of guys over at his house and we played poker." A: "Why didn't you guys call me?" B: "We did. But you weren't home. If you had a cell phone, maybe you wouldn't be left out." A: "Yeah. I need to get a cell phone. So, what games did you play?" B: "We only play Texas Hold 'em." A: "That's all good. What was the bid amount?" B: "We started playing no limit. It's so much fun." A: "That sounds awesome. Let me join you next time." B: "No problem. Just get a cell phone so we can contact you." A: "Aright. Who won though?" B: "John. He always wins. He's damn good." A: "You only played one game?" B: "We played 2 games and he won both of them." A: "What is the buy in?" B: "Only 10 bucks." A: "That sounds fun. Ten bucks isn't that much money to have fun while chilling with your friends." B: "Exactly." A: "But what happens if you get out in the first ten minutes?" B: "Then you're screwed. You can watch tv or play the XBOX." A: "Better not die soon then. So, when is the next time you guys are playing?" B: "Probably this Friday. Give me a call Friday morning and I'll let you know the exact time." You should read the Conversation Dialog to help you study after going through the listening lesson. Do not view the Conversation Dialog prior to listening to the audio, or prior to answering all the questions.Advanced Listening Lesson #22
Step 1: Listen to Dialog Do not view the questions until after you have listened to the audio file. Reading the questions first will not help you improve your English listening skills. Step 2: Quiz - View Questions 1. Where did Cindy meet John? At a manufacturing company At school At a coffee shop At a restaurant 2. What does John do for a living? He works in the IT department He works in the marketing department He works in the Ops He works in the finance department 3. How old is John? 23 25 27 29 4. When will Cindy's friend meet John? When they get to know each other more Maybe after a month Next Saturday on a double date On Friday night View Answers 1. At a coffee shop 2. He works in the finance department 3. 27 4. Next Saturday on a double date If you are uncertain about the answers to the questions, listen to the audio file again after having read the questions. After you have made all your selections, you may view the answers to see how you did. Step 3: Show Conversation Dialog A: "Hey Cindy. I heard you are seeing someone." B: "Yeah. His name is John. I started dating him a week ago." A: "That's so exciting. Tell me all about him. Is he good looking?" B: "I think he's cute, but not drop dead gorgeous." A: "How did you meet him?" B: "I go to this coffee shop a lot and this guy is always there. We started talking a couple of times, and he finally asked me out." A: "That's so cool. What does he do for a living?" B: "He works in the finance department in a manufacturing company." A: "Do you know if he makes a lot of money?" B: "I don't know for sure, but he drives a nice car and I heard he has a house." A: "How is his personality?" B: "He's very smart and a great person to talk to. In the beginning, we talked for about 30 minutes a day in the coffee shop before he asked me out. Besides that, he's very sweet and romantic." A: "How old is he?" B: "That's the problem. He is 2 years younger than me. What do you think about that?" A: "What's the big deal? I don't see anything wrong with that. If you were 23, then I might be worried he was immature, but you're almost 30 now. 2 years is no big deal." B: "Yeah. That's what I think." A: "When do I get to meet him?" B: "How about a double date. The four of us can go out to dinner and a drink or something." A: "That sounds great. How about next Saturday?" B: "I think Saturday will be good. Let's double check with the guys and get back to each other." A: "Great. I'll call you later then." B: "Ok. Talk to you later." You should read the Conversation Dialog to help you study after going through the listening lesson. Do not view the Conversation Dialog prior to listening to the audio, or prior to answering all the questions.Advanced Listening Lesson #23
Step 1: Listen to Dialog Do not view the questions until after you have listened to the audio file. Reading the questions first will not help you improve your English listening skills. Step 2: Quiz - View Questions 1. Who does the two girls see on the dance floor? A friend dancing with two boys They see Beth's boyfriend A boy dancing with Beth None of the above 2. What type of guy is Beth's boyfriend? A cheater and a liar Someone who is tall and handsome A smart and intelligent man A nice and sweet person 3. What is not listed as a trait that one of the girls want in a guy? Good looking Sensitive Smart Rich 4. Why is Alex out of the question? He is a dork and an idiot He already has a girlfriend He is not the friendly type He is immature and stupid View Answers 1. None of the above 2. A nice and sweet person 3. Good looking 4. He is a dork and an idiot If you are uncertain about the answers to the questions, listen to the audio file again after having read the questions. After you have made all your selections, you may view the answers to see how you did. Step 3: Show Conversation Dialog A: "Jane. Did you see that guy standing by the dance floor?" B: "Yeah. He's kinda cute." A: "Wait. Isn't that Beth's boyfriend?" B: "I'm not sure. I haven't met him before." A: "Look. He's dancing with another girl." B: "Are you sure that's him?" A: "No. It just looks like him." B: "I heard he was a nice guy. He wouldn't be cheating on Beth." A: "Yeah. You're right. How do you know about him if you never met him?" B: "I hear all this stuff from Beth. She is always going off on how nice and sweet he is." A: "I heard the same thing. What type of guy are you looking for?" B: "Someone who is understanding, responsible, sensitive, smart, and with a lot of money." A: "Don't we all. Get real. All those guys are probably already taken." B: "It doesn't hurt to have expectations. What type of guy do you want to find?" A: "All I want is someone who is going to treat me well." B: "You know Alex don't you? He likes you. I bet he'll take good care of you." A: "He's a dork. At least someone who is not an idiot ok?" B: "Got it." You should read the Conversation Dialog to help you study after going through the listening lesson. Do not view the Conversation Dialog prior to listening to the audio, or prior to answering all the questions.Advanced Listening Lesson #24
Step 1: Listen to Dialog Do not view the questions until after you have listened to the audio file. Reading the questions first will not help you improve your English listening skills. Step 2: Quiz - View Questions 1. Why is Jason's friend surprised that Jason is going golfing? Because they were supposed to go hiking that day Because he wasn't invited Because Jason never golfed before None of the above 2. What was Jason's friend going to ask Jason if he wasn't busy that day? To come out to a party To help him move out of his apartment To drive him to school To play basketball with him 3. What does the word "hovering" mean in this dialog? It means "to fly" It means "to ride in a car" It means "to be right around" It means "to hit the ball" 4. When are they going to meet? Friday night Saturday for golf Sunday for brunch No current plans to meet View Answers 1. Because he wasn't invited 2. To play basketball with him 3. It means "to be right around" 4. No current plans to meet If you are uncertain about the answers to the questions, listen to the audio file again after having read the questions. After you have made all your selections, you may view the answers to see how you did. Step 3: Show Conversation Dialog A: "Hey Jason. What are you doing this Friday?" B: "I'm going to go to the driving range cause I'm playing golf on Saturday." A: "You're golfing without me? What's up with that?" B: "Sorry man, but we already have a foursome. I'm going with a couple of guys from work." A: "Where are you playing?" B: "Washington National. Have you been there yet?" A: "I've been there a couple of times. It's a great course. You know the Huskies play there right?" B: "I didn't know that. Is it a hard course?" A: "It's pretty challenging. But it all depends on which tee you play from." B: "What are you shooting these days?" A: "I'm still hovering around a bogey game." B: "Still better than me. I'm still trying to hit a bogey game. Do you want to hit the driving range with me?" A: "I can't this Friday. I'm playing basketball with the guys that night." B: "At night?" A: "Yeah. We're playing indoors at a school gymnasium." B: "What's the occasion?" A: "Just a small league I play on. Nothing special." B: "I'm too short to play basketball." A: "You're not that short. Plus, we have a couple of guys who are the same height as you. They're awesome players." B: "I never got into basketball. It's fun and all, but maybe I'm just not good at it." A: "It's still great exercise. I get a better workout from basketball than I do from the treadmill." B: "That's true." You should read the Conversation Dialog to help you study after going through the listening lesson. Do not view the Conversation Dialog prior to listening to the audio, or prior to answering all the questions.Advanced Listening Lesson #25
Step 1: Listen to Dialog Do not view the questions until after you have listened to the audio file. Reading the questions first will not help you improve your English listening skills. Step 2: Quiz - View Questions 1. What is a true statement about Samantha? She is a tall She is dating Matt She is very smart All of the above 2. One of the guys in this conversation doesn't have a girlfriend. What is the reason? He doesn't know how to talk to girls He is shy and nervous around girls He says stupid things around girls All of the above 3. If the guy has a problem around pretty girls, what is his friend recommending? That he needs to work on it and practice To prepare things to say ahead of time To date ugly girls To bring a friend with him when he talks to girls 4. What does being shallow represent in this dialog? It represents a persons inner depth It represents that the water is not deep It represents that he is thinking only skin deep Both A and C View Answers 1. She is dating Matt 2. All of the above 3. To date ugly girls 4. Both A and C If you are uncertain about the answers to the questions, listen to the audio file again after having read the questions. After you have made all your selections, you may view the answers to see how you did. Step 3: Show Conversation Dialog A: "What do you think about Matt's new girlfriend?" B: "Samantha? She's pretty hot. I can't believe she fell for Matt." A: "I don't seem to have much luck with girls." B: "Why do you think that is?" A: "I say the stupidest things around girls. I don't know why I do that?" B: "It's because you're nervous. Best thing to do is not say a word until you know it's not stupid." A: "It doesn't work that way. I stop thinking around pretty girls." B: "I know. You got to date a girl who isn't that pretty then." A: "What the story of your love life these days?" B: "It's only been a couple of months that I broke up with Sarah. But I think it's about time to start hunting again." A: "Who's your type?" B: "Anybody with a nice body and a pretty face." A: "How about their personality or their character?" B: "I'm not thinking about marriage, so those things don't matter." A: "You're so shallow." You should read the Conversation Dialog to help you study after going through the listening lesson. Do not view the Conversation Dialog prior to listening to the audio, or prior to answering all the questions.Advanced Listening Lesson #26
Step 1: Listen to Dialog Do not view the questions until after you have listened to the audio file. Reading the questions first will not help you improve your English listening skills. Step 2: Quiz - View Questions 1. What sports does Mark like? He likes only basketball, football, golf, and tennis He likes volleyball the most He likes most sports, so just about everything He likes only tennis and volleyball 2. Is the girl considered athletic? No. She doesn't like to play sports She doesn't think so, but it sure sounds that way. Yes. She plays every sport and watches every sport. None of the above 3. What fact do we know about the Mariners from just this dialog? They are a baseball team They are a team based in Seattle They play in a new stadium All of the above 4. Does Mark like watching the Super bowl? No. He only watches when other people are watching it No. He never watches the Super bowl Yes. He definitely likes to watch the Super bowl He doesn't explicitly say so, but he probably likes to watch the Super bowl View Answers 1. He likes most sports, so just about everything 2. She doesn't think so, but it sure sounds that way 3. They play in a new stadium 4. He doesn't explicitly say so, but he probably likes to watch the Super bowl If you are uncertain about the answers to the questions, listen to the audio file again after having read the questions. After you have made all your selections, you may view the answers to see how you did. Step 3: Show Conversation Dialog A: "So Mark. What is your favorite hobby?" B: "Probably sports." A: "Anything specific? Or just sports in general." B: "Most sports. I like basketball, football, baseball, golf, tennis, so I guess most sports." A: "I like tennis. Did you play for your high school team?" B: "Yeah. I played on the varsity team starting from my sophomore year. How about you?" A: "I played my junior and senior year." B: "What other sports did you play?" A: "I played volleyball. I would have to say volleyball is my favorite." B: "What position did you play?" A: "I was the outside hitter." B: "That's so cool. I didn't know you were athletic." A: "I don't know if I would consider myself athletic, but I have fun playing." B: "I play on a co-ed volleyball team every Tuesdays. We're always looking for more girls to play on our team. Would you be interested?" A: "Yeah. It sounds fun. Just call me anytime you need a player." B: "That's great. Since we are on the topic of sports, what sport do you like to watch on television?" A: "I never got into watching sports on TV. So I really don't know." B: "Not even the Super bowl?" A: "Only when the group of people I'm with is watching it. I just never had interest in TV that much." B: "Well, I like following the Mariners. They're pretty good." A: "I like to go watch them play. It's fun when you are actually there." B: "A bunch of us are going to watch them play this June. Do you want to join us?" A: "Yeah. I'll go. I like the new stadium. It's pretty cool." B: "Ok. I'll make sure to get you a ticket as well." You should read the Conversation Dialog to help you study after going through the listening lesson. Do not view the Conversation Dialog prior to listening to the audio, or prior to answering all the questions.Advanced Listening Lesson #27
Step 1: Listen to Dialog Do not view the questions until after you have listened to the audio file. Reading the questions first will not help you improve your English listening skills. Step 2: Quiz - View Questions 1. What was the obvious clue Mike gave to Pam regarding a possible proposal? Gave her a watch Asked her what type of ring she likes Showed her a wedding catalog Acted silly and cute around her 2. How does the other girl feel after breaking up with Brad? She is a little depressed She is actually feeling good She doesn't have any feelings right now She hated Brad, so she is happy 3. What was her biggest complaint about Brad? He was boring and didn't like to go out He was too wild and wanted to party all the time He was a romantic that wasn't very realistic He was too weird wanting to go on walks down the beach all the time 4. Where are the ladies going to find a guy? Going to a bar this Friday night Going to a club this Saturday night Going to the library tomorrow night Going to the mall after school View Answers 1. Asked her what type of ring she likes 2. She is actually feeling good 3. He was boring and didn't like to go out 4. Going to the club this Saturday night If you are uncertain about the answers to the questions, listen to the audio file again after having read the questions. After you have made all your selections, you may view the answers to see how you did. Step 3: Show Conversation Dialog A: "What did Mike get you for your birthday Pam?" B: "He got me a watch. See." A: "That's beautiful. He must have spent a fortune on it." B: "He's so great. I think he might propose pretty soon." A: "How do you know? Did he give you any clues?" B: "He took me to a jewelry store and asked me what type of rings I like. It was a little obvious, but at least I got to pick the one I wanted." A: "That's not so romantic?" B: "He was never romantic. Silly and cute, but not romantic. I like all his quirkiness. He always makes me laugh." A: "I guess you can't ask for much more than that." B: "How is it going with you and Brad?" A: "We broke up a week ago." B: "I'm sorry to hear that. What happened?" A: "I think we both just started to grow apart. I wasn't surprised." B: "Are you doing ok?" A: "Actually, I'm feeling great. I guess I needed some freedom." B: "Have you started seeing other guys yet?" A: "Not yet, but I when I meet a decent guy, I wouldn't mind dating again." B: "What kind of guy are you looking for?" A: "Although my relationship with Brad wasn't that bad, I want a guy who likes to go out more. Brad always spent all his time studying and researching for school. It was quite boring." B: "You definitely need a guy who likes to have fun." A: "I wouldn't mind dating a romantic guy. Maybe I'm dreaming, but a nice walk down the beach, or dancing in the moonlight would be something I would love to do." B: "Hey. There are guys like that. All you have to do is find the right one." A: "But that's the hard part. I always fall for the guy who is smart. And then after a couple of months, I get bored." B: "Doesn't a tall, good looking guy turn you on?" A: "Not really. What should I do?" B: "We should go to a club this Saturday and find a smart romantic guy. How does that sound?" A: "That sounds like a plan. Let's do it." B: "Great. I'll see you at nine then." A: "Ok. See you later." You should read the Conversation Dialog to help you study after going through the listening lesson. Do not view the Conversation Dialog prior to listening to the audio, or prior to answering all the questions.Advanced Listening Lesson #28
Step 1: Listen to Dialog Do not view the questions until after you have listened to the audio file. Reading the questions first will not help you improve your English listening skills. Step 2: Quiz - View Questions 1. Mike is feeling pretty bad right now. What conclusion can we draw from this dialog? He hasn't experienced many break ups He is down to earth He is going to win her back He is going to take a quarter off from school 2. What is a true statement from this dialog? The girl broke up with Mike Mike broke up with the girl It was a mutual break up None of the above 3. Why did they end up breaking up? She found a different guy He found a different girl They didn't break up He was probably over bearing and suffocated her 4. How many months does Mike have to go through this pain? Forever 1 month 2 months 4 months View Answers 1. He hasn't experienced many break ups 2. The girl broke up with Mike 3. He was probably over bearing and suffocated her 4. 4 months If you are uncertain about the answers to the questions, listen to the audio file again after having read the questions. After you have made all your selections, you may view the answers to see how you did. Step 3: Show Conversation Dialog A: "Hey Mike. I heard about your break up. You must be devastated." B: "It's more than I can bear. I don't think I can go on." A: "Come on Mike. It's not the end of the world." B: "It's the end of my world. She was everything to me. I loved her so much." A: "I remember my first break up. I remember it was the hardest thing I ever went through. So I know it must be really tough right now." B: "Every night, I cry myself to sleep. Can you believe that I actually cry everyday?" A: "It's normal to cry. You shouldn't feel bad about it. It's the only way to let it out." B: "How long will I feel like this? How long is the pain going to last?" A: "It's different for everyone, but it took me four months to get over Jessica." B: "Four months... I have to live in hell for four months..." A: "But I'm ok now. I moved on and I'm dating other great people. I know you will be better." B: "Why do you think she left me?" A: "I really don't know. Some people change and they want to go in different directions." B: "But I loved her so much. I loved her more than anything in this world. She was my world." A: "I know you love her." B: "I don't think I'll be able to love anyone again." A: "I thought that too. I thought Jessica was the only person I would ever love. But it changes. It really does. You'll get better and become a stronger person." B: "I hope so." You should read the Conversation Dialog to help you study after going through the listening lesson. Do not view the Conversation Dialog prior to listening to the audio, or prior to answering all the questions.Advanced Listening Lesson #29
Step 1: Listen to Dialog Do not view the questions until after you have listened to the audio file. Reading the questions first will not help you improve your English listening skills. Step 2: Quiz - View Questions 1. Why is this person afraid of bee's? Because they sting and it hurts Because the person had a bad experience when that person was young Because they are weird looking Because they make a scary buzzing sound 2. Where do they usually tell horror stories? In the movie theater At a camp fire In a funeral Behind the bushes 3. What is one possible reason this person is afraid of many things? Watched too many scary movies Heard too many horror stories Has too much imagination Went outside in the dark alone too many times 4. What recommendation is give to be less scared of things? To be with many people To leave the lights on at night To not watch scary movies To think more realistically View Answers 1. Because the person had a bad experience when that person was young 2. At a camp fire 3. Has too much imagination 4. To think more realistically If you are uncertain about the answers to the questions, listen to the audio file again after having read the questions. After you have made all your selections, you may view the answers to see how you did. Step 3: Show Conversation Dialog A: "What are you afraid of?" B: "I'm not sure. I used to be scared of a lot of things when I was young, but not anymore." A: "Are you afraid of death?" B: "Only if I think about it so much. But death is inevitable, so there is no use thinking about it." A: "How about horror movies?" B: "No. I know they're all fake so there is nothing to be afraid of. How about you?" A: "I get scared pretty easily. I'm actually frightened of bee's." B: "Really? Why?" A: "I don't know. I got stung when I was young and ever since, I've always been afraid of them." B: "What other things are you afraid of?" A: "Sitting by the camp fire and telling horror stories is very scary." B: "Wow. You're afraid of many things huh?" A: "I guess so. Aren't you afraid of something coming out of the bushes?" B: "It's not going to happen. We probably went camping dozens of times and nothing ever came out of the bushes. What makes you think something will?" A: "I don't know. I guess I'm terrified at the possibility." B: "If you were realistic, you probably wouldn't be scared of everything. Maybe you have too much imagination." A: "I should try to think more realistically. I'll do that." B: "Good. After awhile, you won't be afraid of so many things." You should read the Conversation Dialog to help you study after going through the listening lesson. Do not view the Conversation Dialog prior to listening to the audio, or prior to answering all the questions.Advanced Listening Lesson #30
Step 1: Listen to Dialog Do not view the questions until after you have listened to the audio file. Reading the questions first will not help you improve your English listening skills. Step 2: Quiz - View Questions 1. What are all the feelings the bored guy is feelings? Restless and anxious Tired and restless Anxious and tired Tired and bored 2. What recommendation is given to solve this problem? Meditate for 30 minutes a day Watch more movies Rent more DVD's Read a book 3. Is the other guy bored at all? He is too busy with his son to be bored He also gets bored frequently He watches a lot of TV so he isn't bored None of the above 4. How old do you think the son is? Around 3 Around 5 Around 7 Around 8 View Answers 1. Restless and anxious 2. Read a book 3. He is too busy with his son to be bored 4. Around 5 If you are uncertain about the answers to the questions, listen to the audio file again after having read the questions. After you have made all your selections, you may view the answers to see how you did. Step 3: Show Conversation Dialog A: "How are you feeling these days?" B: "I don't know. A little bored and restless I guess." A: "Why is that?" B: "I have so much time on my hands and I have nothing to do." A: "Why don't you go out and have fun?" B: "I would like to, but I have to save some money so I can't go out all the time." A: "That sucks." B: "After awhile, I start to feel anxious." A: "Try relaxing and reading a good book. That's always a good way to kill time." B: "That's true. How about you? How are you these days?" A: "I'm doing pretty good these days. My kid just finished kindergarten. I'm so proud of him." B: "That's great to hear. He must be big now. It's been a year since I saw your son." A: "Yeah. He grew a lot in the last year." B: "I bet you're very proud of your son." A: "Yes I am. Thanks." You should read the Conversation Dialog to help you study after going through the listening lesson. Do not view the Conversation Dialog prior to listening to the audio, or prior to answering all the questions.Advanced Listening Lesson #31
Step 1: Listen to Dialog Do not view the questions until after you have listened to the audio file. Reading the questions first will not help you improve your English listening skills. Step 2: Quiz - View Questions 1. How does the friend know how long he has been sitting on the bench? He told him He probably saw him earlier in the same spot He does that regularly so he made an assumption He asked his friend how long he's been there 2. What has he been doing on the bench for an hour? Reading a book Texting a bunch of friends on his phone Talking to Lucy on the phone Thinking about Lucy 3. What is the relationship between the guy on the bench and Lucy? They are a couple They are close friends They are classmates They don't know each other 4. What are his feelings toward Lucy? True love Likes her as a friend Infatuation None of the above View Answers 1. He probably saw him earlier in the same spot 2. Thinking about Lucy 3. They are classmates 4. Infatuation If you are uncertain about the answers to the questions, listen to the audio file again after having read the questions. After you have made all your selections, you may view the answers to see how you did. Step 3: Show Conversation Dialog A: "What are you doing here on the bench? You've been here for an hour." B: "I'm just thinking about Lucy. I can't get her out of my mind. I think I'm falling in love." A: "Crazy boy. You barely know her." B: "It doesn't matter. I like everything about her. I like the way she talks, the way she walks, her hair and her lips. I would give anything to kiss her." A: "Did you tell her how you feel?" B: "No way. I'll scare her away." A: "You won't know until you tell her." B: "Maybe later. But right now, all I can think about is her legs and her face. She is so beautiful." A: "You're wasting your time. At least talk to her. You don't have to tell her how you feel." B: "Yeah. I started talking to her in my Poly Sci class. I try to sit next to her as much as I can." A: "That's a start. After awhile, you'll find out if she is everything you make her out to be." B: "It won't matter because I love everything she does." A: "Dude, you're blind as a bat. You're just infatuated with her." B: "These feelings are too strong to be infatuation." A: "We'll see in a couple of weeks. Let's go grab something to eat. You're human aren't you?" B: "To think of it, I am a little hungry. Ok. Let's go." You should read the Conversation Dialog to help you study after going through the listening lesson. Do not view the Conversation Dialog prior to listening to the audio, or prior to answering all the questions.Advanced Listening Lesson #32
Step 1: Listen to Dialog Do not view the questions until after you have listened to the audio file. Reading the questions first will not help you improve your English listening skills. Step 2: Quiz - View Questions 1. Where do they know each other from? From a class they take together From New York From high school From a party last week 2. What is the probable age difference between the two? They are the same age They are 1 year apart They are 2 years apart They are 3 years apart 3. Who showed the first interest of seeing one another outside of class? The girl The boy Neither of them Both of them 4. What is the condition that the guy has set to go out together? To get a B or better on the midterm To get at least an A on the midterm To simply pass the midterm No conditions were stated. They will go out after the midterm View Answers 1. From a class they take together 2. They are 1 year apart 3. The girl 4. To get a B or better on the midterm If you are uncertain about the answers to the questions, listen to the audio file again after having read the questions. After you have made all your selections, you may view the answers to see how you did. Step 3: Show Conversation Dialog A: "Hi. Aren't you in my sociology class?" B: "I think so. With Professor Robinson right?" A: "Yeah. I'm Nicole." B: "I'm George. It's nice to meet you." A: "How are you liking the class so far?" B: "I like the subject. I think it's pretty interesting." A: "Me too. But it's hard to sit in class when the weather is so nice." B: "Tell me about it. The weather has been so great lately." A: "So, what year are you?" B: "I'm a sophomore. How about you?" A: "I'm a freshman." B: "Where are you from around here?" A: "No. I'm from the east. I grew up in New York." B: "New York? That seems like a fun place." A: "More like a busy place. Everyone is always on the run over there." B: "I grew up in San Francisco." A: "That's not too far from here. Do you like living on the west coast?" B: "I haven't been to many other places, but the west coast is a great place." A: "Yeah. I like it too." B: "Are you ready for the mid term next Friday?" A: "I'm so behind. I've been going out a lot. I'm having so much fun, but I really need to catch up on my school work." B: "Where do you usually hang out?" A: "No where specific. We always do different things." B: "Have you been to Alcatraz yet?" A: "Not yet. I want to go though." B: "I highly recommend it. It's an interesting place to visit." A: "Maybe you could take me there." B: "If you get a B or better on your midterm, I'll take you there." A: "Deal. It was great meeting you. I'll talk to you again tomorrow." B: "Ok. See you later." You should read the Conversation Dialog to help you study after going through the listening lesson. Do not view the Conversation Dialog prior to listening to the audio, or prior to answering all the questions.Advanced Listening Lesson #33
Step 1: Listen to Dialog Do not view the questions until after you have listened to the audio file. Reading the questions first will not help you improve your English listening skills. Step 2: Quiz - View Questions 1. Why did it take so long for the guy to ask the girl on a date? Because he didn't like her earlier Because she was dating a different guy Because he thought she was interested in a different guy Because he already had a girlfriend 2. What drama did they like so much? The three amigos Pay it forward The mask Stand by me 3. What does the girl like to do for exercise besides going to the health club? Likes to play sports Likes to run on the tread mill at home Likes to jog around the lake Doesn't like to exercise 4. Why does the girl like to shop in downtown versus the mall? Outdoor walking is better than the indoor mall More sales are offered in downtown Because she lives closer to downtown More fun with less students View Answers 1. Because he thought she was interested in a different guy 2. Pay it forward 3. Likes to jog around the lake 4. More fun with less students If you are uncertain about the answers to the questions, listen to the audio file again after having read the questions. After you have made all your selections, you may view the answers to see how you did. Step 3: Show Conversation Dialog A: "I can't believe it took you so long to ask me out on a date." B: "I always thought you liked Mark, so I didn't think I had a chance." A: "I had this thing about him, but it's over. So, what do you like to do on your free time?" B: "I like sports, watching movies, reading books. Things like that." A: "What type of movies do you like?" B: "I like drama and comedy." A: "Me too. Mostly drama though. Have you seen Pay it forward?" B: "Yeah. I loved that movie." A: "It's one of my favorites. I cried so much at the end." B: "I thought the idea of paying it forward was awesome." A: "What was your favorite comedy?" B: "Do you remember the Three Amigos?" A: "Vaguely. I was pretty little when that came out." B: "I don't remember it much back then, but I saw it again the other day and it cracked me up." A: "Maybe I need to see that movie again." B: "I think it is a classic. So many funny scenes." A: "I really liked the Mask with Jim Carrey." B: "He is hilarious. I love that guy." A: "I like most of his movies. He is such a character." B: "What else do you like to do?" A: "Well, I like to exercise." B: "Where do you exercise?" A: "I go to a health club by my house. But on a nice day, I like to jog around the lake." B: "That's good. I like to stay in shape too. But I do that by playing a lot of sports. Do you play any sports?" A: "I played a little bit in high school, but nothing really these days." B: "Have you tried golf?" A: "Don't start with that. My dad always nagged at me to play, but I never got into it." B: "What do you usually do with your friends?" A: "We go out shopping a lot." B: "Where do you usually go?" A: "Usually downtown. It's more fun in the city than in the mall. Plus, there are too many high school students at the mall." B: "I know some girls like bags, and some like shoes, what do you like to shop for the most?" A: "I can never have too many pairs of shoes. I have like 30 pairs already, but I am always shopping for more." B: "Oh. The foods here." A: "Great. I'm so hungry." B: "After dinner, do you want to catch a movie?" A: "Sure. I'm always up for a good movie." You should read the Conversation Dialog to help you study after going through the listening lesson. Do not view the Conversation Dialog prior to listening to the audio, or prior to answering all the questions.Advanced Listening Lesson #34
Step 1: Listen to Dialog Do not view the questions until after you have listened to the audio file. Reading the questions first will not help you improve your English listening skills. Step 2: Quiz - View Questions 1. How did Mark get such a big belly? From watching too much TV From eating too much food From drinking too much beer From eating too much potato chips 2. What motivation is the guy with the belly using to start working out? To get some girls To get rid of the belly To get healthier To get in shape 3. Why is one guy asking if the other guy will join the health club if he already said he would? He didn't hear it the first time He thought it was a joke so he didn't take him seriously He doesn't want him to join the health club He doesn't want to share the girls 4. What are they going to do after this conversation? They are going to eat dinner They are going to drink beer They are going to hunt for some girls They are going to work out at the health club View Answers 1. From drinking too much beer 2. To get some girls 3. He thought it was a joke so he didn't take him seriously 4. They are going to drink beer If you are uncertain about the answers to the questions, listen to the audio file again after having read the questions. After you have made all your selections, you may view the answers to see how you did. Step 3: Show Conversation Dialog A: "Damn Mark. I never noticed that belly of yours." B: "It's all the beer. I need to start working out again." A: "That reminds me. I should've hit the gym today." B: "Where do you work out?" A: "At Bally's. It's pretty close to home so it is convenient." B: "How much are you paying?" A: "I only pay 20 bucks a month." B: "That's pretty good. I think I should join." A: "If you join, we could work out together. It's so much better working out with another person. It's hard to motivate yourself when you are alone." B: "What do you usually do in the gym?" A: "I usually spend about 20 minutes on the step master, and then lift weights for about an hour." B: "Do you go everyday?" A: "No. I try to go 4 times a week, but lately, I've been only going about 2 times a week. That's why I need you there. You should join." B: "Will it help me to get some girls?" A: "If you get rid of that belly of yours, I promise you'll have a better chance with girls. Anyways, there are so many fine chicks working out at the club." B: "Really? I'm signing up tomorrow." A: "There are some girls with tight outfits. You can see the shape of their body and some of them are really fine." B: "As long as there are some ladies with nice legs, I don't mind." A: "So you're really going to join?" B: "Yeah. Let's go in tomorrow and I'll sign up. We can work out together." A: "Cool. Let's go hit some bars to celebrate." B: "I'm down with that." You should read the Conversation Dialog to help you study after going through the listening lesson. Do not view the Conversation Dialog prior to listening to the audio, or prior to answering all the questions.I'm
Listen to the Entire Lesson 'I'm' is an abbreviation for the word 'I AM.' It is used in combination with other words to tell someone about yourself or to describe something you are doing. Here are some examples: "I'm so tired." "I'm confused." "I'm happy." "I'm twenty three years old." "I'm hungry." "I'm nervous." "I'm excited." "I'm leaving work." "I'm thirsty." "I'm from Seattle." You can also add descriptive words with 'I'm' such as: "I'm extremely tired." "I'm very happy." "I'm terribly hungry." "I am super excited." "I'm very nervous."I'm in/at/on
Listen to the Entire Lesson Describes an action you are doing. Most commonly, you would use the word 'in' when entering a physical location such as a room or a building. Here are some examples: "I'm in the shower." "I'm in the lobby." "I'm in a car." "I'm in a house." "I'm in a school." Using the word 'at' helps tell someone where you currently are. The difference between 'at' and 'in' is that the physical location is general. Here are some examples: "I'm at the grocery." "I'm at the mall." "I'm at the doctor's office." "I'm at the park." "I'm at the airport." However, in some cases you can use 'at' and 'in' interchangeably. Here are some examples: "I'm at the mall." "I'm in the mall." "I'm at the park." "I'm in the park." "I'm at the grocery." "I'm in the grocery." Using the word 'on' is referring to a non physical location such as your time being utilized by something else. Here are some examples: "I'm on the phone." "I'm on my computer." "I'm on a bus."I'm good at
Listen to the Entire Lesson Again, 'I'm' is used here as 'I am.' 'Good at' informs someone what you excel at and are comfortable doing. Here are some examples: "I'm good at drawing." "I'm good at video games." "I'm good at swimming." "I'm good at driving." "I'm good at reading." "I'm good at sports." "I'm good at writing." "I'm good at math." "I'm good at dancing." "I'm good at chess."I'm + (verb)
Listen to the Entire Lesson 'I'm' is a contraction of the words 'I am.' By adding a verb to 'I'm' this lets you express an action or occurrence about yourself. Here are some examples: "I'm eating lunch." "I'm brushing my teeth." "I'm scared." "I'm driving to work." "I'm crying." "I'm typing an email." "I'm cooking dinner." "I'm combing my hair." "I'm hanging a picture." "I am texting." "I am dancing." "I am interested in the job." "I am exercising." "I am sad." "I am learning."I'm getting
Listen to the Entire Lesson When combining the words 'I am' and 'getting' you are telling someone 'you' are gaining possession, being affected by or have plans to seek out and obtain a particular thing. Here are some examples: "I'm getting better." "I'm getting ready for bed." "I'm getting a tooth ache." "I'm getting a cold." "I'm getting married." "I'm getting tired." "I'm getting good at reading." "I'm getting a new car." "I'm getting a job." "I'm getting a puppy."I'm trying + (verb)
Listen to the Entire Lesson 'I am trying' informs someone that you are attempting to accomplish something using bodily, mental, or spiritual strength. By adding a verb to 'I'm trying' you are pointing out exactly what it is you are attempting to do. Here are some examples: "I'm trying to get a job." "I'm trying to call my family." "I'm trying to enjoy my dinner." "I'm trying to educate myself." "I'm trying to explain myself." "I'm trying new food." "I'm trying to eat healthy." "I'm trying to understand." You may also hear the word 'trying' used to express a way someone is feeling. In this manner, it expresses strain or distress. Here are some examples: "Learning new things can be trying on you." "That marathon was very trying on me."I'm gonna + (verb)
Listen to the Entire Lesson The word 'gonna' is incorrect grammatically. The equivalent in proper grammar would be 'going to.' When using the word 'gonna' you are telling someone what you are planning to do at that moment or in the near future. Here are some examples: "I'm gonna have some coffee." "I'm gonna go to work." "I'm gonna eat some cake." "I'm gonna send out my resume." "I'm gonna run a marathon." "I'm gonna ask her out for dinner." "I'm gonna stop smoking." "I'm gonna help my friends." "I'm gonna take swim lessons." "I'm gonna read a book."I have + (noun)
Listen to the Entire Lesson By using the words 'I have' you are informing someone of something you have possession of or have acquired. Here are some examples: "I have a cat." "I have a nice car." "I have a house." "I have a computer." "I have a headache." You may hear the words 'cannot' and 'won't' used with 'I have.' By adding these you can express what you will not put up with or allow. Here are some examples: "I cannot have that behavior in my house." "I cannot have you over tonight." "I won't have anything to do with that." "I won't have it any other way."I have + (past participle)
Listen to the Entire Lesson Again, 'I have' shows possession or something acquired. By adding a past participle you are informing someone of a past or completed action done by you. Here are some examples: "I have done it." "I have heard that before." "I have driven a car." "I have forgotten the words." "I have read that book." "I have eaten at that restaurant before." "I have flown in an airplane." "I have forgiven you." "I have seen you before." "I have written a letter."I used to + (verb)
Listen to the Entire Lesson 'Used to' expresses something that was done in the past, and is not usually done now. Here are some examples: "I used to develop websites." "I used to jog every day." "I used to paint." "I used to smoke." "I used to work from home." "I used to live in California." "I used to go to the beach every day." "I used to sing in a choir." "I used to like vegetables." "I used to start work at 6 o'clock."I have to + (verb)
Listen to the Entire Lesson The words 'have to' describe something that needs to take place soon. It expresses certainty, necessity, or obligation. Here are some examples: "I have to switch schools." "I have to use the telephone." "I have to go to the bathroom." "I have to leave." "I have to unpack my bags." You can also add the word 'don't' to suggest that someone is not required to do something. "I don't have to switch schools." "I don't have to use the telephone." "I don't have to go to the bathroom." "I don't have to leave." "I don't have to unpack my bags."I wanna + (verb)
Listen to the Entire Lesson The word 'wanna' is incorrect grammatically. It is equivalent to 'want to.' When combined with the word 'I' it helps communicate something you want to do. Here are some examples: "I wanna talk." "I wanna search for a job." "I wanna order some food." "I wanna marry her." "I wanna listen to that song." By adding the word 'don't' you can change the meaning of what you are saying to something you 'want' to do to something you 'do not' want to do. Here are some examples: "I don't wanna talk." "I don't wanna search for a job." "I don't wanna marry her." "I don't wanna listen to that song." "I don't wanna order some food."I gotta + (verb)
Listen to the Entire Lesson 'I gotta' is grammatically incorrect. It is more of a spoken form. If you want to say this with proper grammar, the equivalent would be, 'I have got to' or 'I've got to'. In the spoken form, 'got to' is shortened to 'gotta' and the word 'have' is dropped. Here are some examples: "I gotta manage my money." "I gotta obey the laws." "I gotta move to a bigger house." "I gotta impress my boss." "I gotta brush my teeth." By adding the word 'have' you can change what you are saying to express something that needs to be done in the near future. Here are some examples: "I have got to be on time to work." "I've gotta try harder at school." "I've gotta tell my wife I'll be late." "I've gotta learn more about the laws." "I've gotta clean my house today."I would like to + (verb)
Listen to the Entire Lesson This sentence lets someone know what you would be interested in doing. This can be a physical, mental or verbal action. Here are some examples: "I would like to answer that question." "I would like to compete in a cooking contest." "I would like to explain myself." "I would like to invite you over." "I would like to practice." "I would like to become a doctor." "I would like to see you more often." "I would like to thank you." "I would like to learn about animals." "I would like to meet the President."I plan to + (verb)
Listen to the Entire Lesson 'Plan to' describes something that you would like to do in the near future. Here are some examples: "I plan to find a new apartment." "I plan to relax on vacation." "I plan to surprise my parents." "I plan to wash my car." "I plan to adopt a child." "I plan to impress my boss." "I plan to watch a movie." "I plan to save more money." "I plan to read a book." "I plan to learn new things."I've decided to + (verb)
Listen to the Entire Lesson 'I've' is short for 'I have' and including the word 'decided' you are stating that you have made a decision or come to a conclusion. Here are some examples: "I've decided to accept the job." "I've decided to complete my degree." "I've decided to change my bad habits." "I've decided to extend my membership at the gym." "I've decided to form a chess club." "I've decided to hand over my responsibilities." "I've decided to help you move." "I've decided to interview for the job." "I've decided to increase my work load." "I've decided to manage a store."I was about to + (verb)
Listen to the Entire Lesson When stating 'I was about to' you are informing someone that you were going to do something, but another event prevented you from doing it. It is similar to 'I am about to' but the difference is that you will not do it any longer. Since you will not do it any longer, it becomes a past event. That is why we use 'was' instead of 'am' Here is an example conversionsation to help you understand. A: Hi Mike. I need to ask you a favor. B: Hey Bob. What do you need? A: Can you drive me to the convenient store? My car is in the shop and we really need to get milk. B: Sure. I can do that. A: Were you in the middle of something? I don't want to bother you. B: I was about to watch a movie, but that can wait. In this case, he cannot say, "I am about to watch a movie" because he will not be watching it because he has to drive his friend. You use "I was about to" when you will not be doing something immediately because of some other event. Here are some examples: "I was about to go out." "I was about to go to dinner." "I was about to go to bed." "I was about to go to work." "I was about to say the same thing." "I was about to call you." "I was about to send you an email." "I was about to mow my grass." "I was about to order us some drinks." "I was about to watch television."I didn't mean to + (verb)
Listen to the Entire Lesson The word 'didn't' is a contraction of the words 'did not'. When using it in a sentence with the words 'mean to' you are informing someone that you did something you regret or are sorry for. This could have been a physical, mental or verbal action. Here are some examples: "I didn't mean to hurt your feelings." "I didn't mean to call you so late." "I didn't mean to lie about what happened." "I didn't mean to embarrass you." "I didn't mean to stay out so late." "I did not mean to say those things." "I did not mean to leave you out." "I did not mean to make you confused." "I did not mean to think you were involved." "I did not mean to cause trouble."I don't have time to + (verb)
Listen to the Entire Lesson The word 'don't' is a contraction of the words 'do not.' When adding 'have time to' you are simply stating that you have other obligations and all other things considered must wait. Here are some examples: "I don't have time to explain." "I don't have time to eat." "I don't have time to exercise." "I don't have time to watch my favorite TV show." "I don't have time to talk." You can also use the phrase 'I don't' to express things you do not like, things you do not understand, or things you do not do. Here are some examples: "I don't eat meat." "I don't like the rain." "I don't understand Spanish." "I do not understand what you are saying." "I do not like scary movies." "I do not like sports."I promise not to + (verb)
Listen to the Entire Lesson When using the word 'promise' you are giving your word that what you are saying is true. You might also be assuring someone a guarantee that you will follow thru on what you are saying to them. When using 'promise not to' you are stating you will not do a particular thing. Here are some examples: "I promise not to tell." "I promise not to leave without you." "I promise not to be so late." "I promise not to hurt your feelings." "I promise not to wake you up." You can also just use the word 'promise' to assure someone of your intentions. Here are some examples: "I promise I am telling the truth." "I promise to practice my math." "I promise to call you." "I promise I will tell you." "I promise I will come to your party."I'd rather + (verb)
Listen to the Entire Lesson 'I'd' is a contraction of the words 'I had' or 'I would.' When using it with the word 'rather' you are suggesting you would like to do or prefer one thing more than another. Here are some examples: "I'd rather talk about this later." "I'd like to eat at home than go get fast food." "I'd rather ski than snowboard." "I'd rather stay late than come in early tomorrow." "I'd rather handle the problem myself." "I had rather go home than stay out too late." "I had rather listen to my parents or get in trouble." "I would rather exercise than sit on the couch all day." "I would rather complete my task early." "I would rather know the answer."I feel like + (verb-ing)
Listen to the Entire Lesson Here you are expressing to someone something you would enjoy doing. Here are some examples: "I feel like going for a bike ride." "I feel like going to the beach." "I feel like having a snack." "I feel like talking." "I feel like dancing." "I feel like having friends over to my house." "I feel like watching TV." By adding 'don't' or 'do not' you can change what you are saying to express something you would not enjoy or express a concern about something. Here are some examples: "I don't feel like leaving yet." "I don't feel like explaining." "I don't feel like going to bed." "I do not feel comfortable talking about it." "I do not feel like we are going in the right direction."I can't help + (verb-ing)
Listen to the Entire Lesson The word 'can't' is contraction for 'cannot.' Combined with 'help' you are communicating something you are unable to control or having a hard time gaining a grasp for. This can be a physical or mental action. Here are some examples: "I can't help thinking about it." "I can't help shopping so much." "I can't help working all the time." "I can't help smiling when I see her." "I can't help eating so much." "I can't help loving you." "I can not help biting my nails when I am nervous." "I can not help smoking when I have been drinking." "I cannot help feeling so sad." "I cannot help remembering the things you did."I was busy + (verb-ing)
Listen to the Entire Lesson When using the word 'was', you are referring to something in a past tense, or something that happened before. Combining it with the word 'busy' you can express something that was occupying you in a past time. Here are some examples: "I was busy thinking." "I was busy working." "I was busy cooking dinner." "I was busy talking on the phone." "I was busy cleaning the house." "I was busy studying for my test." "I was busy thinking of ideas for our website." "I was busy entertaining our neighbors." "I was busy completing my housework." "I was busy learning new things." By changing 'was' to 'am' you change your message from past tense to present tense and refer to something you are doing 'now.' Here are some examples: "I am busy working." "I am busy cooking dinner." "I am busy studying for my test." "I am busy completing housework." "I am busy talking on the phone."I'm not used to + (verb-ing)
Listen to the Entire Lesson Here you are using 'not used to' to inform someone that you are unfamiliar or uncomfortable with a topic at hand. Here are some examples: "I'm not used to talking English." "I'm not used to studying so much." "I'm not used to being around new people." "I'm not used to talking in front of groups of people." "I'm not used to having so much stress." "I'm not used to traveling so much." "I'm not used to working so early." "I'm not used to having so much responsibility." "I'm not used to drinking so much."I want you to + (verb)
Listen to the Entire Lesson I want you to' is telling someone that you have a desire or would like for them to do something. Here are some examples: "I want you to clean the dishes." "I want you to come home right after school." "I want you to call once you get there." "I want you to explain yourself to me." "I want you to educate me." By using the word 'need' instead of 'want' you are expressing something that is required or wanted. Here are some examples: "I need you to study harder in school." "I need you to stop and listen to me." "I need you to greet our guests." "I need you to introduce me to your family." "I need to request a refund."I'm here to + (verb)
Listen to the Entire Lesson You are informing someone that you are at a particular place to accomplish something. Here are some examples: "I'm here to apply for the job." "I'm here to take a test." "I'm here to receive my gift." "I'm here to support all your decisions." "I'm here to watch a movie." "I'm here to work on your computer." "I'm here to welcome you to the neighborhood." "I'm here to raise awareness for cancer." "I'm here to start the job." "I'm here to receive the award."I have something + (verb)
Listen to the Entire Lesson When using the expression 'I have something' you are communicating that you possess something or need to do something that is unspecified or undetermined. Here are some examples: "I have something to complete." "I have something to share with you." "I have something important to tell you." "I have something to encourage you." "I have something to explain to you." "I have something special planned for your birthday." "I have something else to consider." "I have something to apologize about." "I have something to attend tonight." "I have something to ask you." "I have something fun for us to do."I'm looking forward to
Listen to the Entire Lesson When telling someone that you are 'looking forward to' you are saying that you are waiting or hoping for something, especially with pleasure. Here are some examples: "I'm looking forward to meeting you." "I'm looking forward to talking with you." "I'm looking forward to going on vacation." "I'm looking forward to spending time with my family." "I'm looking forward to learning the English language." "I am looking forward to visiting another country." "I am looking forward to having a family." "I am looking forward to graduating from college." "I am looking forward to watching the baseball game." "I am looking forward to running in a race."I'm calling to + (verb)
Listen to the Entire Lesson When using the words 'I'm calling' you are stating that you are actually using the phone to call and relay information. Here are some examples: "I'm calling to tell you about my day." "I'm calling to accept your invitation." "I'm calling to answer your question." "I'm calling to book a reservation at your restaurant." "I'm calling to complain about something." "I'm calling to thank you." "I'm calling to support your decision." "I'm calling to remind you of our dinner plans." "I'm calling to report a lost wallet." "I'm calling to receive my prize."I'm working on + (noun)
Listen to the Entire Lesson 'I'm' is a contraction for the words 'I am.' The phrase 'working on' relays a physical or mental effort towards an accomplishment. Here are some examples: "I'm working on a big project." "I'm working on training my dog." "I'm working on making new friends." "I'm working on educating myself." "I'm working on my homework." "I am working on painting a house." "I am working on a new idea." "I am working on my computer." "I'm working on my website."I'm sorry to + (verb)
Listen to the Entire Lesson Saying you are 'sorry to' expresses a feeling of sympathy or regret. Here are some examples: "I'm sorry to be so late." "I'm sorry to hear about your sick mother." "I'm sorry to waste your time." "I'm sorry to make you feel so sad." "I'm sorry to frighten you." "I'm sorry to disagree with your decision." "I'm sorry to call so late." "I'm sorry to admit what I did." "I'm sorry to end this relationship."I'm thinking of + (verb-ing)
Listen to the Entire Lesson 'Thinking' refers to a process of thought, forming an opinion or judgment. When expressing 'I am thinking of' you are letting someone know what you are personally thinking. Here are some examples: "I'm thinking of checking out the new movie." "I'm thinking of filming my vacation." "I'm thinking of following a healthy diet." "I'm thinking of handing out flyers describing our business." "I'm thinking of increasing my work load." "I am thinking of introducing myself to him." "I am thinking of launching a new website." "I am thinking of moving to a new city." "I am thinking of offering her the position." "I am thinking of opening up a store."I'll help you + (verb)
Listen to the Entire Lesson This lets you inform someone that you are willing to provide assistance. This could refer to something physical or mental, like helping someone to 'think' or 'remember' something. Here are some examples: "I'll help you cook dinner tonight." "I'll help you raise money for your charity." "I'll help you register for your class online." "I'll help you move to your new house." "I'll help you prevent that from happening again." "I will help you park your car." "I will help you provide all the information you need." "I will help you realize your potential." "I will help you stop smoking." "I will help you shop for groceries."I'm dying to + (verb)
Listen to the Entire Lesson When using the word 'dying' in this manner you are referring to wanting or desiring something greatly. Here are some examples: "I'm dying to relax on the beach." "I'm dying to pick some fresh fruit." "I'm dying to order some desserts." "I'm dying to find out if I got the job." "I'm dying to move to a bigger house." "I'm dying to look at all the work you've done." "I'm dying to learn more about you." "I'm dying to introduce you to my parents." "I'm dying to expand my business." "I'm dying to check my score on the test."It's my turn to + (verb)
Listen to the Entire Lesson The word 'It's' is a contraction of the words 'it is.' When stating 'my turn' you are telling someone that it is time to change position or position focuses on to you. Here are some examples: "It's my turn to walk you home." "It's my turn to do laundry." "It's my turn to work late." "It's my turn to take out the trash." "It's my turn to choose where we eat." "It is my turn to pay for dinner." "It is my turn to roll the dice." "It is my turn to provide an answer." "It is my turn to try and play the game." "It is my turn to attempt solving the problem."It's hard for me to + (verb)
Listen to the Entire Lesson When saying that something is 'hard for me' you are informing someone that what you are talking about is difficult or challenging for you. Here are some examples: "It's hard for me to accept what you are telling me." "It's hard for me to argue your point." "It's hard for me to balance my check book." "It's hard for me to concentrate on the task." "It's hard for me to consider your other options." "It's hard for me to depend on you." "It is hard for me to decide where to go tonight." "It is hard for me to explain my actions." "It is hard for me to guarantee your success." "It is hard for me to handle so much pressure."I'm having a hard time + (verb-ing)
Listen to the Entire Lesson By stating you are having a hard time you are letting someone know you are having difficulty with something. This could be something physical or mental and something that could be overcome with effort. Here are some examples: "I'm having a hard time writing." "I'm having a hard time understanding you." "I'm having a hard time answering your question." "I'm having a hard time downloading songs to my iPod." "I'm having a hard time agreeing to the terms." With the addition of an adverb you can express in more detail just how difficult something is for you. Here are some examples: "I'm having an extremely hard time trusting you." "I'm having an extremely hard time with my wife." "I'm having a very hard time finding a job." "I'm having a very hard time finding parts for my car."I think I should + (verb)
Listen to the Entire Lesson Here you are telling someone that you feel strongly about doing a particular action. Here are some examples: "I think I should practice my reading." "I think I should join a study group." "I think I should handle this as soon as possible." "I think I should earn my degree." "I think I should explain myself." By adding the word 'don't' you have changed what you are conveying from something you are thinking of doing, to something you are against. Here are some examples: "I do not think I should complain so much." "I do not think I should attend that event." "I do not think I should borrow more money." "I do not think I should doubt you." "I do not think I should decide until later."I've heard that + (subject + verb)
Listen to the Entire Lesson You are letting someone know that you are aware of something or that you have been informed of something that is taking place. This could be something that has already happened or something happening in the near future. 'I've' is a contraction of the words 'I have.' Here are some examples: "I've heard that you got a new job." "I've heard that you want to leave your job." "I've heard that you got a new car." "I've heard that you like to jog." "I've heard that you fix computers." "I've heard that you've never been to Canada." "I've heard that you like to shop." "I've heard that you and your boss don't get along." "I've heard that there is no school next week." "I've heard that your wife is a yoga instructor."It occurred to me that (subject + verb)
Listen to the Entire Lesson The word 'occurred' informs someone that something has come to mind or has been found. You are letting someone know that you suddenly have thought or remembered about something. Here are some examples: "It occurred to me that I forgot your birthday." "It occurred to me that we both belong to the same gym." "It occurred to me that we enjoy a lot of the same things." "It occurred to me the price for homes are more expensive here." "It occurred to me that eating healthy makes me feel better." Using the word 'had' or 'has' can change what you are saying to represent something remembered in a past time. Here are some examples: "It had occurred to me that I forgot something at the grocery." "It had occurred to me I might need to change my email address." "It has occurred to me I forgot my mom's birthday." "It has occurred to me before."Let me + (verb)
Listen to the Entire Lesson 'Let me' is suggesting that you are asking for permission or an opportunity to do something. Here are some examples: "Let me make my own decisions." "Let me offer to help you." "Let me open the door for you." "Let me pause and think about what we are doing." "Let me welcome you to the neighborhood." "Let me save you the trouble." "Let me make a suggestion." "Let me try and fix your car." "Let me taste the soup before you add more spices." "Let me treat you to some ice cream."Thank you for
Listen to the Entire Lesson Saying 'thank you' is telling someone you appreciate what they have done. This can either be something they did for you or for someone else. Here are some examples: "Thank you for inviting me." "Thank you for helping me move." "Thank you for informing me about the job opening." "Thank you for mailing that package for me." "Thank you for working so hard." "Thank you for stopping by to visit." "Thank you for replying to my email." "Thank you for providing me with the answers." "Thank you for heating up dinner." "Thank you for hurrying to get here."Can I + (verb)
Listen to the Entire Lesson When ending a sentence with a question mark (?) you are asking the person or people you are talking to a question for which you would like an answer. Here you are asking permission to do a particular action. Here are some examples: "Can I answer your question?" "Can I attend the event?" "Can I move to another spot?" "Can I call you tomorrow?" "Can I complete this later?" "Can I explain myself?" "Can I help you with your homework?" "Can I include you in our plans?" "Can I introduce you to my co-workers?" "Can I inform you of some bad news?"Can I get + (noun)
Listen to the Entire Lesson The phrase 'Can I get' can be used in a couple different ways. You can use it to ask a question. Here are some examples: "Can I get a cup of water?" "Can I get a dog?" "Can I get lunch?" "Can I get sugar in my coffee?" "Can I get popcorn at the movie?" You can also use it when offering to help someone or do something for them. Here are some examples: "Can I get you another drink?" "Can I help you move that?" "Can I recommend a good place to eat?" "Can I take you home?" "Can I help you finish your project?"I'm not sure if (subject + verb)
Listen to the Entire Lesson 'I'm not sure' expresses a feeling of uncertainty or lack of confidence on a particular matter. Here are some examples: "I am not sure if they will offer me the job." "I'm not sure if she'll return my call." "I'm not sure if my wife will understand." "I'm not sure if we will go out tonight." "I'm not sure if I understand your question." "I am not sure if I can handle it." "I am not sure if it will happen." "I am not sure if it will matter." "I am not sure if my mom will notice." "I am not sure if they will permit us to park there."Do you mind if I + (verb)
Listen to the Entire Lesson You are asking someone in present tense if they object to something you are asking. Here are some examples: "Do you mind if I excuse myself?" "Do you mind if we left early?" "Do you mind if I take a nap?" "Do you mind if I ask your mom?" "Do you mind if it snows?" You could also use the word 'would' Here are some examples: "Would you mind if we went out to eat?" "Would you mind if I opened the window?" "Would you mind telling me what you're doing?" "Would you mind being quiet for a minute?" "Would you mind if I changed the channel?"I don't know what to + (verb)
Listen to the Entire Lesson You are letting someone know that you are not sure about what is being asked. You may also have no knowledge or opinion on a topic. Here are some examples: "I don't know what to eat for dinner." "I don't know what to buy you for your birthday." "I don't know what to say." "I don't know what to do with my spare time." "I don't know what to do for vacation." "I do not know what to do to make you happy." "I do not know what to do to help you understand." "I do not know what to think." "I do not know what to do to prevent this." "I do not know what to order."I should have + (past participle)
Listen to the Entire Lesson Should' is the past tense of the word 'shall.' When using the words 'should have' you are talking about something in the past that you 'ought to' or 'might have' done. Here are some examples: "I should have gone with you." "I should have studied more for my test." "I should have read the directions before starting." "I should have eaten breakfast this morning." "I should have listened to your advice." "I should have married her when I had the chance." 'Shall' is something that will take place or exist in the future. Here are some examples: "I shall leave tomorrow." "I shall finish the job next week." "I shall see it tomorrow." "I shall go outside if it's nice out." "I shall pay for this later."I wish I could + (verb)
Listen to the Entire Lesson You are expressing a desire to do something. Here are some examples: "I wish I could sing better." "I wish I could settle the argument." "I wish I could sail around the world." "I wish I could remain calm during all of this." "I wish I could remember his name." "I wish I could replace my old car with a new one." "I wish I could play outside." "I wish I could go to the game with you." "I wish I could write better." "I wish I could own my own business."You should + (verb)
Listen to the Entire Lesson Here you are suggesting an obligation or duty that needs to take place either now or in the near future. Here are some examples: "You should go to bed." "You should do your homework before going outside." "You should replace your headlights on your car." "You should request a raise at work." "You should stop smoking." "You should smile more." "You should slow down when driving in a neighborhood." "You should talk to him about it." "You should train your dog." "You should trust what they say."You're supposed to + (verb)
Listen to the Entire Lesson 'You're' is a contraction of the words 'you are.' When using 'You're' with the words 'supposed to' you are making a suggestion that something you strongly believe ought to happen. Here are some examples: "You're supposed to keep that secret." "You're supposed to let me know when you leave." "You're supposed to stop when at a red light." "You're supposed to unpack once you get there." "You're supposed to return the movies you rent on time." "You are supposed to remain calm." "You are supposed to fasten your seat belt." "You are supposed to invite all your friends." "You are supposed to encourage one another." "You are supposed to decide before next Thursday."You seem + (adjective)
Listen to the Entire Lesson When stating 'you seem' you're referring to the person you are talking to and expressing that they are giving the impression of or appear to be. Here are some examples: "You seem bored." "You seem unhappy with the results." "You seem eager to begin." "You seem easy to get along with." "You seem elated to hear the good news." "You seem deeply in love." "You seem afraid of roller coasters." "You seem confused about the rules of the game." "You seem embarrassed about what happened." "You seem decisive about your choice."You'd better + (verb)
Listen to the Entire Lesson 'You'd' is a contraction of 'you had' or 'you would.' You are making a suggestion to someone for a particular action. Here are some examples: "You'd better exercise." "You'd better help out." "You'd better invite your brother." "You'd better impress the judges." "You'd better listen to your parents." "You had better not come home late." "You had better hope for the best." "You had better change your attitude." "You would be good at teaching." "You would do well at math."Are you into + (noun)
Listen to the Entire Lesson Here you are asking a question about an interest they might have or something they might enjoy doing. Here are some examples: "Are you into soccer?" "Are you into trying new things?" "Are you into wine tasting?" "Are you into working out at home or at the gym?" "Are you into scary movies?" "Are you into playing games?" "Are you into jogging?" "Are you into painting?" "Are you into traveling?" "Are you into fixing cars?"Are you trying to + (verb)
Listen to the Entire Lesson You are asking someone if they are attempting to do something. This can be something mentally or physically. Here are some examples: "Are you trying to ignore me?" "Are you trying to manage your money?" "Are you trying to memorize that song?" "Are you trying to offer your help?" "Are you trying to program your new phone?" "Are you trying to pretend like it never happened?" "Are you trying to remain calm?" "Are you trying to remember her name?" "Are you trying to reflect on the past?" "Are you trying to switch flights?"Please + (verb)
Listen to the Entire Lesson 'Please' is generally used in a polite request when asking someone to do something. Here are some examples: "Please pass me the salt." "Please order me the steak and potatoes." "Please stop bothering me." "Please wash your hands before dinner." "Please wait outside until we are ready." "Please zip up your coat before you go outside." "Please stand back." The word 'please' can also mean to give enjoyment or satisfaction to. Here are some examples: "The smell of the flowers was very pleasing." "May it please the court to admit this into evidence?" "I was very pleased with how the children behaved in class." "You cannot please everyone all the time." "She was pleased with the dress."Don't + (verb)
Listen to the Entire Lesson The word 'don't' is a contraction of the words 'do not.' It is said to convey a message of what NOT should be done. Here are some examples: "Don't try and fool me." "Don't allow this to happen." "Don't watch scary movies before you go to bed." "Don't cause any more trouble." "Don't chew gum in class." "Do not concern yourself with other people's problems." "Do not behave that way." "Do not announce your decision until you're ready." "Do not argue with me." "Do not arrive late for your meeting."Do you like
Listen to the Entire Lesson With this question you are asking someone what they prefer or enjoy. Here are some examples: "Do you like traveling on a plane?" "Do you like watching baseball on TV?" "Do you like skiing or snowboarding?" "Do you like going to bed early?" "Do you like spending time with me?" "Do you like repeating the class?" "Do you like playing video games?" "Do you like listening to music?" "Do you like practicing playing the piano?" "Do you like jogging with me?"Bored to death
Meaning/Usage: Very bored Explanation: Death is the worst thing, so using it to compare how you feel is telling someone that you are very bored. "I have nothing to do. I'm bored to death." "I hate it when I'm bored to death." "Would you rather be super busy or bored to death?" A: "Hey Seth, what are you doing?" B: "I'm reading a book. What are you doing?" A: "I'm bored to death. Let's do something." B: "Sure. Come over and we can play some games." Other Common Sentences "I'm so bored, I could die." "I'm dying of boredom."You've got to be kidding
Meaning/Usage: This is used when a true statement is ridiculous. Explanation: "Kidding" is the same as joking. When a person hears something that is true, but it is not expected, the person will use this idiom to express that the statement is ridiculous. A: "Hey Jared. Mom told me to tell you that you shouldn't stay out too late." B: "You've got to be kidding me. I'm 30 years old." A: "Patrick won the school election by two votes." B: "He's not that popular how did this happen?" A: "Nobody voted because they expected Jason to win." B: "You've got to be kidding me." Other Common Sentences "I really hope you're wrong." "Please tell me it ain't so."Sick and Tired
Meaning/Usage: Used when you no longer enjoy something because you have done it too many times. Explanation: It is common to say, "I'm sick of it" or "I'm tired of it." Both of these are negative terms. If you have to do something again, it will either make you feel sick or tired because you do not enjoy it. "I'm sick and tired of eating the same thing for lunch everyday." "I'm getting sick and tired of this song. They play it way too often at this club." "I'm sick and tired of listening to him nag all the time." A: "Where are you going for lunch today?" B: "I don't know... how about a burger?" A: "No. I eat that almost everyday. I'm getting sick and tired of them." B: "Let's go eat teriyaki then." Other Common Sentences "I'm getting sick of this phone. I think I'll buy a new one." "I'm tired of the same routine. I need to find something new and different."Call it a day
Meaning/Usage: Used to express that the work day is over. Explanation: "Call it" is often times used to make a decision. When you add "day" to this, then a person is making a decision to say that the day is over. This is mostly used to end a working day. "Let's call it a day. I'm too tired to continue working." "We can't continue working without Mike, so let's call it a day." "It's already nine o'clock. Let's call it a day." A: "How much more work do we have for tonight?" B: "I think we finished everything for the day." A: "Good. Let's call it a day then." Other Common Sentences "Let's turn in for the night." "I think we should pick it up from the morning." pick it up = continueGet on one's nerves
Meaning/Usage: Used when someone or something is bothering you. Explanation: Your body uses your "nerves" to feel any sensation such as a tap on the shoulder, a poke, a hot fire that is too close, or anything else. In this phrase, "nerves" is not used in a physical way, but to express that they are feeling bothered by what is happening. "You're beginning to get on my nerves." "Will you please stop doing that? It's getting on my nerves." "His whining is getting on my nerves." A: "He doesn't like his birthday present." B: "He's starting to get on my nerves. It's one thing to not like it, but it's another to complain about it. We tried our best to get him a good present." A: "Yeah. It's bothering me too." Other Common Sentences "You're beginning to annoy me." "His complaints are starting to bother me."Couch potato
Meaning/Usage: Used when someone watches too much television. Explanation: This was created for someone watching too much television because in some western countries, a person usually sits on the "couch" and eats "potato" chips while watching television. "My husband is a couch potato. He sits in front of the TV all day long." "You have a huge belly because you're a couch potato." "I should be more active and less of a couch potato." A: "James. We're going to play basketball. Do you want to play?" B: "No, I'm going to watch TV today." A: "You did that all day yesterday. You better stop being a couch potato or you're going to get a big fat belly." Other Common Sentences "Good luck trying to get his attention. He's glued to the television."Read one's mind
Meaning/Usage: When someone says something that you were also thinking about. Explanation: This is a stronger way of saying, "I was thinking of that too." "You read my mind." "I was going to suggest that. You must have read my mind." A: "Do you want to go play pool?" B: "You read my mind. That's exactly what I was thinking too."Feel blue
Meaning/Usage: Feel sad Explanation: Long time ago, blue was related to the rain. Whenever the fictional god Zeus was sad, he would make it rain (crying). "What a gloomy day. It makes me feel blue." "Whenever I feel blue, I like to listen to upbeat music." "Matt's feeling a little blue right now. Let's go cheer him up." A: "Where is Matt these days? I haven't seen him in a while." B: "He feels a little blue because he can't find a girlfriend." A: "Let's go cheer him up." Other Common Sentences "I feel a little depressed right now." "I don't know why, but I just feel sad." "Even though it's a nice day, I feel gloomy inside."Fender bender
Meaning/Usage: A small car accident Explanation: "Fender" is the car body part that is right above the tire. "Bender" is derived from bend. Since the fender is a small part compared to the hood and door, and bend is not as bad as break or crack, combining these two indicates that the accident is very small. Like a small dent or scratch. "I got into a small accident. It was just a fender-bender." "I got into a fender bender in the parking lot." "I can’t believe the damage is going to cost me 800 bucks. It was just a fender bender." A: "I got into a car accident." B: "That sucks. You didn’t get hurt did you?" A: "No. It was just a fender bender." Other Common Sentences "It was a small accident." "I rear ended him, but luckily there was no damage."Get foot in the door
Meaning/Usage: Taking or passing the first step of a longer process; Generally used when referring to an entry level position that will eventually lead to better opportunities. Explanation: There is no use trying to get to the 10th floor if you can't even get through the door. So getting through the door is extremely important. This statement expresses optimism. "It's not a great position, but at least my foot is in the door." "I need to find a way to get my foot in the door." "I'm doing an internship for SK Telecom. It's an opportunity to get my foot in the door." A: "Did you find a job yet?" B: "No. I'm still looking." A: "With the sagging economy, it's hard to find a job." B: "Yeah. I'm even considering a lower position. At least I'll have my foot in the door." Other Common Sentences "I'm working in the mail room. But I'm hoping I can change positions now that I'm in the company." "I hate my position, but it's the only way I could start in this company."Chicken
Meaning/Usage: Being afraid or scared Explanation: Chickens are very timid, afraid or scared of many things. It is common to use animals to express traits such as "sly as a fox" or "strong as a bear." "There's nothing to be scared of. Don't be a chicken." "Everyone thinks I'm a chicken because I didn't go bungee jumping with them." "Stop being a chicken and just go." A: "Did you ask Martha on a date?" B: "No. I was about to, but I got a little nervous." A: "You're such a chicken." Other Common Sentences "I didn't know you were afraid of insects. You're a scaredy cat." "He's a coward. He wouldn't even go on the rollercoaster ride." "Jack is scared of everything. He's such a sissy."Give somebody a hard time
Meaning/Usage: Make someone feel bad for making a mistake. Explanation: This can be done by complaining to the person a lot, ignoring the person, giving them a punishment, or anything that will make the person go through a hard or difficult time. "Suzie gave him a hard time for not showing up to her recital." "Stop giving me a hard time. There was nothing I could do about it." "If you don't finish your project, the manager is going to give you a hard time." A: "My mom gave me a hard time for one bad grade on my report card." B: "That's a tough situation. My parents never gave me a hard time for bad grades." Other Common Sentences "Albert is making it difficult for me." "He's getting on my case about my comment."Make up one's mind
Meaning/Usage: Make a decision Explanation: This is usually used when someone can't make a decision. Not only does it mean to make a decision, it also implies to do it quickly. "We don't got all day, make up your mind." "Make up your mind, we don't have much time." "I can't make up my mind. Can you help me decide?" "If you don't make up your mind, I'll choose for you." "Both of them look really good. I can't make up my mind." A: "I don't know which one to get." B: "They're both pretty good, so just pick one." A: "I always regret it when I pick the wrong one." B: "You're picking between white chocolate or regular chocolate. There is no wrong answer so hurry up and make up your mind." Other Common Sentences "I can't decide which one to take." "I don't know if I should get the Volvo or the Ford." "I like both of them too much to decide."Go Dutch
Meaning/Usage: Each person paying for themselves. For example, going Dutch on a date is indicating both guy and girl will pay for themselves instead of one buying for the other. Explanation: Why "Dutch" is used in this way is not completely confirmed. One reason is because of Dutch doors that contained two equal parts. Another reason was due to the rivalry between the English and Dutch in the 17th century. "You don't have to pay for me. Let's go dutch today." "I can't believe John didn't pay for me. We ended up going dutch on the whole date." "I actually prefer going dutch because I don't want to feel indebt to anyone." A: "How was your date with Sarah?" B: "I'm not sure. It was just ok." A: "Why do you say that?" B: "She didn't let me pay for her share. She insisted that we go dutch for everything." Other Common Sentences "I'll pay half of it." "Let's pay together." "I didn't pay for her. We paid our own share."Throw in the towel
Meaning/Usage: Give up; quit; surrender Explanation: When a boxer was getting beaten so badly, the coach or manager would throw a towel in to stop the fight. This phrase can be used outside of boxing to simply express quitting. "I was ready to throw in the towel, but I stayed with it." "He's not a quitter, so he's not going to throw in the towel." "I saw a fight last almost two hours before one guy threw in the towel." A: "The boxing match is great." B: "One guy is really getting beat up." A: "Do you think he's going to give up?" B: "He's not going to throw in the towel, they rarely do that these days." Other Common Sentences "There's no chance for me to win. I'm calling it quits." "I don't think I can win, so I'm going to give up." "I'd rather surrender than get the hell beaten out of me."Goose bumps
Meaning/Usage: The literal tiny bumps you get all over your body when you are experiencing intense emotions. Explanation: In some countries, they call it chicken skin because the tiny bumps on the arm looks like chicken skin. But in the US, they use "goose bumps." "I was so touched by the movie that I started getting goose bumps all over my arms." "When she told me that she loved me, I got goose bumps." "I get goose bumps anytime I'm scared." "John told us a story and everyone got goose bumps." A: "Did you watch the speech?" B: "No, I missed it. Was it good?" A: "It was so touching that I got goose bumps everywhere." Other Common Sentences "I was so inspired by the speech that I had a tingling sensation run across my body." "I felt a jolt of excitement when I heard the good news." "My arms were tingling when I heard that story."Stay in touch
Meaning/Usage: To stay connected Explanation: When you can touch someone, you are literally close to that person. "Stay in touch" is indicating that the person wants to keep communicating so they will be "close" as friends. "Call me more often man. We got to stay in touch." "I hope you stay in touch with me. I'll give you my contact information." "Let's stay in touch. I'll email you whenever I can." "Are you staying in touch with her, or are you guys not talking any more?" A: "Since you are moving to England, I'm really going to miss you." B: "Yeah. I'm going to miss you a lot too." A: "You promise that you'll stay in touch?" B: "Of course. We'll always keep in touch." Other Common Sentences "Keep in touch. I'll want to know how you're doing." "Julie told me that she would keep in touch with me."Have the guts
Meaning/Usage: Brave; courage Explanation: "Guts" is the stomach area. Having "guts" is representing you have a strong stomach. When you have "guts" you are saying you are brave or have a lot of courage. "I don't have the guts to go bungee jumping." "He doesn't have the guts to ask her on a date." "He has a lot of guts to be hunting by himself." A: "I heard you went to Sky Mountain Park. How was it." B: "It was pretty fun." A: "Did you go on the monster ride?" B: "No. I didn't have the guts to go on that ride. It was too scary." Other Common Sentences "He's very courageous." "He's got balls to be doing that." "He isn't afraid of anything."Rain or Shine
Meaning/Usage: Not allowing the weather to prevent you from doing something. Explanation: For outdoor activities, rain can stop someone from doing something. This phrase is used to express determination of doing something no matter what external forces try to stop them. "We're going camping this weekend rain or shine." "Rain or shine, the protesters are out there every day." "I don't care about the weather. I'm going golfing rain or shine." A: "I'm going hiking this Saturday. Do you want to come?" B: "That sounds good. Rain or shine, count me in." A: "If it's raining, looks like you're going by yourself, because I'm staying home." Other Common Sentences "I'm going to go even if it's a downpour." "Are you still going to go even if it's raining cats and dogs?" "Unless it's pouring out, let's meet at seven in the morning."I'm beat
Meaning/Usage: Very tired Explanation: "Beat" can mean to lose. It can also mean to be hit over and over again. When someone loses or they are hit over and over again, they are either mentally tired or physically tired. This phrase is saying you are very tired for whatever reason. "I had a tough day today. I'm totally beat." "I don't want to go out tonight. I'm beat." "I'm beat so I'm going to sleep early today." A: "Hey Steve, we're going to go to a club tonight. Wanna come?" B: "I worked a 12 hour shift today. I'm beat so I'm going to just stay home tonight." Other Common Sentences "I'm very tired." "I'm exhausted."Easier said than done
Meaning/Usage: This is used when something is easy to say but very hard to do. Explanation: This phrase is very literal. Often times people tell you to do something that sounds easy, but it is actually hard. So in response, you can say this phrase. "That's easier said than done." "It's a lot tougher than that. It's one of those things that are easier said than done." "Michael thinks everything is so easy. He doesn't realize it's easier said than done." A: "Do you do any stock trading?" B: "No, but how hard could it be. Just buy when it goes down and sell when it goes up." A: "It's easier said than done." Other Common Sentences "It's harder than you think." "It's not as easy as you think." "If you think it's that easy, why don't you do it?"It's about time
Meaning/Usage: When you want to express that you waited a long time. A synonym of this would be, "finally." Explanation: When you wait for something, the time on a clock is the biggest factor. "It's about time." "It's about time. I waited two hours for you." "It's about time I got a chance to play." A: "I've been waiting for 3 weeks to try out the new laptop. Isn't it my turn yet?" B: "Yes. It's your turn. I'll get it for you." A: "It's about time."Jump to conclusions
Meaning/Usage: Making a conclusion without having all the details Explanation: If you need five pieces of information to come to a conclusion, jumping (or skipping) over 3 of them will cause you to make an incorrect conclusion. This term is often used when an incorrect conclusion is made by someone who didn't have all the information. "I incorrectly blamed Jeff for breaking my phone. I shouldn't have jumped to conclusions." "I thought you took my book. I shouldn't have accused you. I jumped to conclusions." "Will you stop jumping to conclusions. You should get all the facts before you make any decisions." A: "I'm so mad at Jake. I think he told my girlfriend that I was on a date." B: "What makes you think Jake told her?" A: "Because he's like that." B: "He sometimes does stupid things, but you shouldn't jump to conclusions."Keep an eye on
Meaning/Usage: To watch after; to supervise; to take care of Explanation: When you have your eye on something or you are watching something, then you are paying attention to something or someone. "Can you keep an eye on my daughter while I go get the car?" "Don't worry about your luggage. I'll keep an eye on it." "My mom will keep an eye on our equipment while we go get the truck." A: "Excuse me sir." B: "Yes." A: "I have to go to the bathroom. Can you keep an eye on my suitcase for a minute?" B: "No problem." Other Common Sentences "Can you watch my bag for me?" "Can you watch my suitcase while I go to the bathroom."Out of the blue
Meaning/Usage: Out of nowhere; spontaneously Explanation: Although "blue" represents being sad, it is also commonly used to represent the ocean or the sky. Both are extremely big. If someone says to look for something that is in the sky or the ocean, there is no way to know where. Therefore, this phrase was created to represent coming out of nowhere. "He's pretty funny because he will crack a funny joke out of the blue." "Grace started crying for no reason. It was totally out of the blue." "I don't know why he started getting mad. It was out of the blue." A: "Did you hear what happened with Tiffany?" B: "She broke up with her boyfriend last night." A: "What? I thought they had a great relationship." B: "So did I. It was totally out of the blue." Other Common Sentences "She showed up out of no where." "He pulled a rabbit out of nowhere. That's why it was so impressive."Know something inside out
Meaning/Usage: Have knowledge of every detail of something. Explanation: There are two sides of a flat object like a coin. There is also an inside or outside to many objects. This phrase is saying you know both sides, which indicates knowing everything about it. "Ask Mary to help you with your homework. She knows calculus inside out." "If you got the answer from Matt, I would trust it. He knows that stuff inside out." A: "I'm having trouble with my car. I can't seem to figure out what's wrong with it." B: "You should ask James about it." A: "Does he know a lot about cars?" B: "He's a mechanic. He knows the car engine inside out." Other Common Sentences "I know that theory like the back of my hand." "I can perform those steps with my eyes closed." "I know each step by heart."Give someone a hand
Meaning/Usage: To help someone Explanation: A physical task is usually done with the hands. Giving someone a hand is letting them borrow your hands, or in other words, helping them out. "Give a hand" also represent applauding, but this section is about helping someone. "Can you give me a hand setting up the dining table?" "I'm going to need a hand changing the tire on the car." "Are you going to have time to give me a hand tomorrow?" "Let me know if you need help. I'll have time all day today to give you a hand." A: "When are you going to move into your new apartment?" B: "I want to, but I'm going to need some help." A: "I have time this weekend. Do you want me to give you a hand?" B: "That would be great." Other Common Sentences "Can I get your help on this?" "Can you help me out?" "Do you need any help?" "Let me know if you need any help."Now and then
Meaning/Usage: Once in a while Explanation: "Then" is an unspecific time in the future. When a person does not do something regularly, they can use this phrase to imply once in a while. "I go on a hike every now and then." "My mother calls me every now and then to see if I'm doing well." "It's not something I can do all the time, but I do it every now and then." A: "Do you like skiing?" B: "I really enjoy skiing. It's one of my favorite sports." A: "You must go very frequently then." B: "I wish I could, but it's too expensive, so I only go every now and then." Other Common Sentences "I like to go bowling once in a while." "I can't go often, but I go golfing with my friends from time to time."Nuke - Microwave
Meaning/Usage: To cook something in the microwave oven. Explanation: "Nuke" is a shortened terminology of nuclear. Because the microwave is powerful, this idiom was created. "Don't nuke an egg. It will explode in the microwave." "If I can't finish my dinner at a restaurant, I just take it home and nuke it when I want to eat it." "The best way to heat up food is to nuke it." A: "What are you going to eat for lunch?" B: "I have some pasta in the fridge. You want some?" A: "Sure. How are you going to cook it." B: "It's already cooked. I'm just going to nuke it." Other Common Sentences "Throw it in the microwave." "The microwave will heat it up real fast." "Do you like microwavable food?"On the dot
Meaning/Usage: The exact time Explanation: A dot is seen as a very small target. It is like hitting the very center of a dart board or the bulls-eye. When it refers to time, it means exactly that time not a minute after or before. "I don't want to be waiting for you, so you'd better be there at three o'clock on the dot." "He's supposed to show up at four on the dot. If he is late even a minute, I'm taking off." "You'd better be here by 1:30, because we're leaving at two o'clock on the dot." A: "We have to go to Los Angeles tomorrow. What time should we meet?" B: "We have to be at the airport at 4:00 o'clock, so let's meet at two o'clock on the dot." Other Common Sentences "Meet me at the bus station at six o'clock sharp." "Let's meet at the book store exactly at 1:00."Keeping my fingers crossed
Meaning/Usage: Hoping for good luck Explanation: In recent days, children would cross their fingers when they lie to avoid punishment for telling a lie. Another way this is used is to cross the fingers while making a promise to invalidate the promise. Christians used the gesture of crossing fingers to recognize one another in times of persecution. Therefore, people cross their fingers wishing for good luck from God. "Their team is not favored to win. But I hope they do. I'm keeping my fingers crossed." "I have a one in ten chance of winning the television. I better keep my fingers crossed." "I hope it works. Let's cross our fingers." A: "The championship game is tonight. Are you going to watch it?" B: "Yeah. My favorite team lost their best player. I don't think they will win." A: "You never know. They can get lucky." B: "I'm keeping my fingers crossed."Out of this world
Meaning/Usage: Amazing Explanation: When something is of this world, it is not normal. This phrase is used to indicate that it is not normal in a positive way. It is so different and amazing that it is not a part of this world. "That's the coolest thing I've ever seen. It's really out of this world." "It's totally out of this world. You're going to be impressed." "The concert was out of this world. It was an awesome experience." A: "Did you see the new 3D movie at the IMAX theater?" B: "No. Was it any good?" A: "It was better than good. It was out of this world." Other Common Sentences "The movie totally blew me away. It was awesome." "The essay was very creative and original. I was very impressed." "I've never seen anything like that before."Over one's head
Meaning/Usage: When something is mentally too difficult to understand. Explanation: To understand something, information needs to go inside the brain. This is used to say that the information failed to go inside. "I don't know the answer to that problem. The subject is over my head." "Don't bother explaining it to him. It's way over his head." A: "I have to write a paper on the theory of relativity. Do you know anything about it?" B: "I won't be able to help you. The theory of relativity is way over my head." Other Common Sentences "I don't understand the meaning. It might be too deep for me." "It's beyond my comprehension, so don't bother trying to explain it."Pain in the ass
Meaning/Usage: A source of trouble or annoyance; used to indicate that something bothers you very much. "Ass" can be seen as profanity, so another way of saying this would be "Pain in the butt" or "Pain in the neck." Explanation: When something gives you trouble and bothers you a lot, it gives you pain. To look for more colorful ways to express this, people started saying "pain in the neck." Another variation came out when people started to say "Pain in the rear end." This later became "Pain in the butt" or "Pain in the ass." "What a pain in the ass." "I had a customer who kept asking easy questions. It was a total pain in the ass." "I have a meeting at 7:00 in the morning. It's a pain in the ass waking up that early." "Having to deal with traffic every day is a pain in the ass." A: "I have to go to the post office." B: "I thought you went yesterday?" A: "They made a mistake on the postage so the package was returned." B: "What a pain in the ass." Other Common Sentences "Going to get a health check up is a pain in the neck." "I hate mowing the lawn. It's a real drag." "I have to pick up my brother at the airport every week. It's a serious burden because I'm busy these days."Piece of cake
Meaning/Usage: Describes something that is easy to do. Explanation: In the 1870's, cakes were given as prizes for winning competition. To the winner, it was an easy task. Therefore, "cake" started representing something easy. Another phrase that is similar is "cake walk," which also represents something that is easy. "You won't have any problems with it. It's a piece of cake." "It's not that difficult. Actually, it's a piece of cake." "Learning to type is a piece of cake. It just takes persistence." "Sociology 101 is a piece of cake. You should get an A in that class." A: "I have an interview for citizenship tomorrow. Do you know what they ask?" B: "The only questions they ask are in the manual they provide." A: "Was it difficult?" B: "Since all the questions and answers are already provided, it was a piece of cake." Other Common Sentences "My homework today was as easy as pie." "The assignment was a breeze."Sooner or later
Meaning/Usage: Eventually Explanation: When something should happen, but you don't know when it will happen, you can use this term to express that it will eventually happen. "Don't keep waiting for him to confess. He'll tell you sooner or later." "He'll come to his senses sooner or later." "She'll realize that she's doing something wrong sooner or later." A: "Why does Sarah date so many guys. Doesn't she know most of them are jerks?" B: "I know. She needs to get hurt before she'll realize what's going on." A: "I guess she'll figure it out sooner or later." B: "Yeah... but I'm hoping it is sooner than later." Other Common Sentences "I'm not worried about it. He'll eventually return my CD." "I'll graduate from school eventually."Pull someone's leg
Meaning/Usage: Making someone believe something that is not true. Explanation: This came from London long time ago where criminals would trip someone to make them fall. After they fall, another criminal acting like they are helping the fallen person would take valuables out of their pocket. Although pulling a leg is not tripping, it can be seen as falling away from the truth. "You expect me to believe that? Stop pulling my leg." "I'm just kidding. I was just pulling your leg." "I didn't know you believed me. I was just pulling your leg." A: "I was eating at a restaurant and this lady next to me started eating my food right in front of me." B: "What? You can't be serious. Nobody would ever do that." A: You're not gullible at all. I was trying to pull your leg."Put oneself in one's place
Meaning/Usage: To think from another point of view. Explanation: To get a better understanding by thinking from the view of the other person. Another way of saying this is to "put yourself in one's shoe." "What was I supposed to do? Try to put yourself in my place." "It's easy to be understanding if you always put yourself in the other person's place." "If you put yourself in my place, you would understand why I did that." A: "You know I didn't mean to hurt you, but I had no choice." B: "That's no excuse for what you did to me." A: "Try to put yourself in my place. What would you have done?" B: "I see your point." Other Common Sentences "If I were in your shoes, I would have done the same thing." "I can't blame you because I would have done the same thing if I were in your situation."I can eat a horse
Meaning/Usage: To express the desire to eat a lot of food. Explanation: One explanation is that there is a lot of meat on a horse. Also not many people eat horses, but they would if they are very hungry. Combining the willingness to eat a large quantity of meat, and the willingness to eat meat that is not normally eaten suggests that the person is extremely hungry. "I'm so hungry that I can eat a horse." "I feel like I can eat a horse right now." "If I didn't eat anything for two days, I would feel like I can eat a horse too." A: "I didn't eat anything all day." B: "You must be really hungry." A: "I can eat a horse right now." Other Common Sentences "I'm starving. I think I can eat a whale." "I'm famished. I could eat anything right now."Read between the lines
Meaning/Usage: To understand the underlying meaning of something that is not completely clear. Explanation: There are no words between the lines. However, there are many written text like poetry, proverbs, or riddles that require you to understand more than what is written to completely understand it. This phrase became popular so people started using it to refer to understanding hidden meaning. "If you read between the lines, you would have understood what he was implying." "Steve isn't very good at reading between the lines. You have to tell him exactly what you want." "Martha can read between the lines very well. She picks up on everything." A: "Did you read chapter three for our English class?" B: "Yeah. I think the author was indicating that he was supporting the war." A: "Even though he said one thing, he meant another. You have to read between the lines to fully understand his stance." B: "That might be true. I should go read it again."Rings a bell
Meaning/Usage: To remember something Explanation: A bell is used to alert us of many things such as a door bell, telephone bell, school bell, clothes dryer bell, etc. When we hear the bell, we know what the bell represents. To ring a bell became a way of saying that you remember something. Another explanation comes from Pavlov. He created an experiment where he rang a bell before he gave food to a dog. He did this repeatedly and the dog started to drool before he saw any food because the dog knew the food would come after the bell rang. "I can't put my finger on it, but it definitely rings a bell." "It rings a bell, but I'm not one hundred percent sure." "Oh, oh, oh... that rings a bell. Where did I see that from?" A: "Did you go to Martha Lake High School?" B: "Yeah. Why?" A: "I met this girl. Her name is Jane Summerland. Do you know her?" B: "That name rings a bell, but I don't remember for sure." Other Common Sentences "That reminds me of something." "That sounds so familiar." "I know what you're talking about but I can't pin point it."Bug
Meaning/Usage: To annoy Explanation: Bugs, like mosquitoes can be annoying when they are buzzing around your ear, or bothering you in some other way. "I need to concentrate on this, so stop bugging me." "I need to get out of the house. My little brother has been bugging me all day." "Let's go bug John." "If you bug me one more time, I'm going to kick your butt." A: "Johnny, will you play Star Craft with me?" B: "I can't. I'm doing my homework." A: "Come on. I need someone to play with." B: "Stop bugging me. I said I'm busy." Other Common Sentences "Stop pestering me." "Stop bothering me."Sleep on it
Meaning/Usage: To take time to think about something. Explanation: Some people report that they think more clearly after a good night sleep. Also, some people say they often times regret a decision they have made. When something is important, making a decision after a good night sleep is a good practice. "I've been thinking about this problem for two hours. I think I will sleep on it. It might come to me in the morning." "I don't think I can decide now. Let me sleep on it and I'll tell you my answer tomorrow." "I'm going to need to sleep on it. I don't want to rush my answer right now." A: "Do you know if you are going to buy the leather set or the cashmere set?" B: "I've been thinking about it for three hours. I really can't decide." A: "Why don't you sleep on it."Play it by ear
Meaning/Usage: To decide to do something as the situation develops; choosing to deal with a situation as more events unfold. Explanation: The original meaning is to play music without using a score or music sheet to look at. Just as a musician will play something unplanned without looking at something, this idiom is to do something unplanned depending on the situation. "I'll have to play it by ear because I don't know how long they want me to work." "We'll have to play it by ear for next Friday because everything is uncertain." "Should we plan something for this Saturday or should we play it by ear?" A: "What are you doing next weekend?" B: "Nothing. Did you want to do something?" A: "Yeah, but I might have to give my dad a ride to the train station. I don't know the exact time yet." B: "Let's play it by ear then. Just call me when you find out for sure." Other Common Sentences "I don't have any reservations tonight so let's just wing it." "We'll just do things as they come along."Speak of the devil
Meaning/Usage: When someone appears just as you are talking about that person. Explanation: This is from English and is shortened from the original phrase, "Speak of the Devil and he doth appear." The shortened form presented in this lesson became popular. "I was at a party last night, and I saw Jake play the guitar in front of an audience... speak of the devil, there's Jake right now." "Joanne did great on her presentation. Speak of the devil... Hi Joanne." A: "Andy was walking down the street and he tripped over beggar." B: "I was there too. It was so funny. He just got up and pretended nothing happened." A: "Speak of the devil. There's Andy now."Grab a bite
Meaning/Usage: To get something to eat Explanation: "A bite" refers to food. This is a pretty literal so it is simply saying to get something to eat. "When do you want to go grab a bite?" "I don't have much time, so let's grab a quick bite." "If you didn't have lunch yet, let's grab a bite to eat." A: "Did you have lunch yet?" B: "Not yet. I'm swamped with work." A: "You have to eventually eat so let's just grab a bite somewhere close." Other Common Sentences "Let's go eat." "Where should we have lunch today?" "Let's have lunch together."Take it easy
Meaning/Usage: To relax; to stop working so hard; to calm down Explanation: Usually used to calm someone down when they are too excited, or when you want to tell someone to relax because they are working too much. "You're pushing yourself too hard. Take it easy." "Take it easy man. You're putting too much pressure on yourself." "I don't want to take it easy so stop telling me to take it easy." A: "Work has me working seventy hours a week." B: "You should take it easy. You're going to get sick at this rate." A: "I wish I could, but I have deadlines to meet." Other Common Sentences "Relax a little. You're overworked." "Take a little break. You need it."Go with the flow
Meaning/Usage: To do things as other people are doing it because it is easier to do; to not go against the common way of doing things Explanation: Rowing up the river is very difficult to do. If you go with the flow, you are following the path of the least resistance. "Why do you do everything differently? You should just go with the flow." "If you don't know where the shuttle is, just go with the flow. Everyone is going in that direction." "If you don't want to stand out, go with the flow." A: "I got a speeding ticket. Do you think I should go to court to fight it?" B: "What are you going to tell the judge?" A: "That I was basically going with the flow." B: "That's not going to work. I would just pay the fine." Other Common Sentences "Do it like everyone else does it." "If you're unsure how to do it, see how everyone else is doing it." "The best way not to stand out is to blend in with everyone."Twenty-four seven
Meaning/Usage: Constantly; always available; every minute of the day and night Explanation: There are 24 hours in a day and seven days in a week. "7-11 is a great store because they are open twenty-four seven." "If a business doesn't provide twenty-four seven customer support, they will not succeed." "You better be careful because I'm going to be watching you twenty-four seven." "They're available twenty four hours a day, 365 days a year." A: "What web hosting place do you recommend?" B: "Most of them are pretty good. Just make sure they have twenty-four hour technical support." A: "All of them have twenty-four seven support. It's a necessity these days." Other Common Sentences "The cops are watching this area all-day every-day." "There's no way to cross the border because they're constantly monitoring all the passage ways."Under the weather
Meaning/Usage: Feeling sick; not well Explanation: When a sailor gets sick on a boat, they would go under the deck and away from the weather to get better. This phrase became popular to express sickness. "I'm going to stay home because I'm feeling under the weather today." "I told my boss that I was under the weather. She told me to stay home for the day." "My wife is feeling under the weather, so I need to get home early today." A: "Why didn't you come to school today?" B: "I was under the weather this morning. I need to get some rest." A: "Well, I hope you start feeling better." Other Common Sentences: "I'm feeling a little sick today." "I don't feel too well." "I'm not feeling that great. I think I should get some rest."Don't sweat it
Meaning/Usage: To tell someone not to worry Explanation: When people worry a lot, they can sweat. This became a popular way to tell someone not to worry. "You can't do anything about it, so don't sweat it." "You tried your best, so stop sweating it." A: "I'm worried about my final examination." B: "You didn't take it yet?" A: "I took it yesterday. I'm not sure how I did." B: "If you tried your best, there's nothing you can do about the results, so don't sweat it." Other Common Sentences "Don't worry about it." "Nothing you can do about it."You can say that again
Meaning/Usage: Completely agreeing with a statement Explanation: When you hear something you agree with, you can simply agree. But if you completely agree, then you wouldn't mind hearing it again. This is not literally telling the person to say it again, but to tell the person that you "really" agree. A: "Britney Spears is so hot!" B: "You can say that again." A: "It was a long year. We accomplished quite a bit." B: "I'm just glad that we're almost done." A: "You can say that again." Other Common Sentences "I hear ya." "You got that right." "Damn right."Broke
Meaning/Usage: To have no money Explanation: "Broke" is an informal way of saying "broken." Long time ago broken was defined as "having no money" or to "become bankrupt, to fail." Although the meaning long time ago meant bankrupt, it is used regularly just to express you don't have any money at that moment. "I'm flat broke." "I can't afford to buy that television. I'm totally broke." "I can't pay my bills. I'm broke." A: "Let's go see a movie." B: "I can't. I barely have enough money for food. I'm broke until my next paycheck." Other Common Sentences "I don't have any money." "I don't even have a dime to spare."Beats Me
Meaning/Usage: To not know; to not understand Explanation: Not many resources on this phrase, but could come from beating information out of someone. When someone is holding back information, they would get beat until they tell the answer. In this case, the person could be saying that even if I was beaten, I wouldn't know. Therefore, it became popular to say "beats me" to indicate you do not know. "It beats me how they finished before us." "Beats me why he was so mean to you." "Beats me how she found out we did it." A. "So how did you and Tim do in your race?" B. "I finished in third and Tim finished in second." A. "You got third? How did Tim beat you?" B. "Beats me, I guess he has been training really hard." Other Common Sentences "I have no idea how to do this." "I don't know what he's talking about."I Don't Buy it
Meaning/Usage: Disagree; to not be convinced Explanation: This phrase comes from a popular way of getting agreement, which is "buy in." For example, a company director can say, "we need buy in from all the board members to proceed." In this statement, "buy in" is getting agreement. Therefore, if you "don't buy it," then you are not agreeing. "He said he didn't do it but I don't buy it." "Their prices are supposed to be better but I don't buy it." "She said she was sorry but I don't buy it." A. "So what were you guys arguing about?" B. "He said some mean things to me the other day." A. "Did he apologize to you?" B. "Yes, but I don't buy it." Other Common Sentences "I don't believe it."Keep Your Cool
Meaning/Usage: To act normal Explanation: "Cool" is described as composure and the absence of excitement in a person. To maintain composure, you wouldn't get excited and you would act normally. "I know you're upset but you have to keep your cool." "Here she comes, keep your cool." "Keep your cool. You don't want to mess this up." A. "Are you ready for your job interview?" B. "Yes, but I'm a bit nervous about it." A. "Just keep your cool and you will do fine." Other Common Sentences "You need to stay calm." "Don't let it bother you."Sort Of
Meaning/Usage: A little; kind of Explanation: Usually used to express a lesser degree. "Dinner was sort of expensive." "I sort of like her." "I sort of know how to cook." A. "Do you know how to get to the airport?" B. "Sort of. But it's hard for me to explain." A. "Never mind then, I will just look the directions up." B. "Sorry I couldn't be more help." Other Common Sentences "A little bit." "I kind of know."Good For You
Meaning/Usage: Expressing that you are happy for a person Explanation: This is pretty literal. However, this can be used sarcastically. "Good for you, you finally passed your test." "I heard you got accepted to college, good for you." "I heard you got married recently, good for you." A. "I was really surprised when I was offered the promotion." B. "Why is that?" A. "I just figured it would go to someone with more experience." B. "Good for you, you deserve it as much as anyone." Other Common Sentences "I am proud of you." "All credit goes to you."Good Luck
Meaning/Usage: Wishing someone well. Also can mean that it is not possible. Explanation: The literal definition of wishing someone well is very literal. It is used very frequently in this way. However, another popular way this phrase is used is when you don't think a person can do something. The third sentence below is an example of this. "Good luck on your interview tomorrow." "I heard you're going to look for a new house, good luck." "Good luck trying to find a better deal than this one." A. "My son has his first baseball game tonight." B. "Is he nervous?" A. "He is actually very excited for it." B. "Tell him we said good luck!" Other Common Sentences "I wish you the best." "Hope you do well."Shotgun
Meaning/Usage: To claim the front seat in a car. Explanation: Instead of people fighting over who will sit in the front seat, people would decide who gets the front seat by whoever shouts out "shotgun" first. "Why does he always get to ride shotgun?" "If we go to the store with mom I call shotgun." "I am heading out to the party. Do you want to ride shotgun?" A. "Hey James, mom said she would give us a ride home?" B. "I call shotgun!" A. "That's not fair you always sit in the front seat." B. "You just need to say it before me next time." Other Common Sentences "I will sit in the front passenger seat." "I get to sit in the front seat next to the driver."Who Cares
Meaning/Usage: To express something is not important to you. Explanation: This phrase is usually used by itself when you are responding to a statement someone made. The example sentences below show a full sentence to provide more context, but it is normally used by itself. "Who cares if they win or lose?" "Who cares whether or not it rains." "Who cares about what they think." A. "Did you happen to watch the game last night?" B. "No I was not home." A. "I was just wondering who won?" B. "Who cares, I don't really like either teams." Other Common Sentences "It doesn't matter." "I do not care."Big Deal
Meaning/Usage: Something really important. Often times used with "no" to express that the event is not as important as they think. Explanation: This phrase is also used sarcastically. For example, if someone says "I did 30 push-ups this morning." Someone else can respond, "Big deal. I did 50 push-ups!" "Passing my driver's test was no big deal." "He thinks he is such a big deal." "It's no big deal if we don't go tonight." A. "I think I might have lost that screwdriver you let me borrow last week." B. "It's no big deal, I have another one." Other Common Sentences "He thinks he is all that matters." "It's not that important."What a Small World
Meaning/Usage: Used when a person knows someone you know by chance Explanation: The world is very large with a lot of people in it. When two people know the same person by chance, then the world doesn't seem so big. In this case, the phrase "what a small world" is commonly used. "I didn't know that you knew my uncle. What a small world." "You have family in Florida too? What a small world." "I went to high school with his mom, what a small world." A. "Do you see that guy over there?" B. "Yes, what about him." A. "We used to play football together in high school." B. "Wow, what a small world!" Other Common Sentences "What are the chances of that?"What's going on?
Meaning/Usage: To ask what is happening Explanation: This is fairly straightforward and is used more in spoken English. "What's going on tonight?" "I'm not sure why she is upset, what's going on?" "What's going on with your job?" A. "It seems like she is a bit upset." B. "What's going on?" A. "I think she got into an argument with her husband." B. "That's too bad. Hopefully they can work things out." Other Common Sentences "What is happening?"Now You're Talking
Meaning/Usage: Used to agree with someone Explanation: This is similar to "you can say that again." When someone talks and talks and talks, and then finally says something you really like or agree with, you can say, "now you're talking." "A cold drink sounds great, now you're talking!" "Now you're talking, the beach sounds relaxing." "Now you're talking, I would love to go out to the club tonight." A. "I say instead of staying home for vacation we go to Mexico." B. "Now you're talking!" Other Common Sentences "I agree." "I like what you're saying."Over My Dead Body
Meaning/Usage: Disallow absolutely Explanation: This is usually used when a teenager asks a parent something that is absolutely not allowed. Instead of just saying no, this phrase is used to tell the teenager that they can do it when I am dead. This became popular when knights would protect something and wouldn't give up unless they were killed. The other person would literally have to kill the knight and walk over the body to get what they want. "There is no way I will let you do that, not over my dead body." "You want a tattoo? Over my dead body." "You're moving in together? Over my dead body." A. "So I hear your son wants to go on spring break with that girl Sally." B. "I told him over my dead body." Other Common Sentences "I won't let that happen." "I will not allow it."Coming Right Up
Meaning/Usage: Used frequently by restaurant servers to tell customers the food is almost ready Explanation: This can be used in a sentence, but is commonly used by itself. "Your order is coming right up." "It's coming right up!" "Your food is coming right up." A. "Did you order the cheeseburger with french fries?" B. "I sure did." A. "It's coming right up." Other Common Sentences "Your food will be right out." "Your order is coming out quickly."Good Thinking
Meaning/Usage: To tell someone they did a good job to avoid a problem Explanation: This is fairly straightforward. "I am glad you brought an umbrella. That was good thinking." "Good thinking to call ahead and reserve tickets." "It was good thinking to send out invitations sooner than later." A. "I hear the restaurant we are going to is really popular." B. "It's pretty good... and I already reserved a table for us." A. "Good thinking!" Other Common Sentences "You did well remembering that." "I'm glad you thought of that."Shoot
Meaning/Usage: A type of exclamation Explanation: Substitute for the profanity word "shit" "Shoot, I forgot my grocery list at home." "Oh shoot that was awkward." "Shoot, he asked Jenny to the prom instead of me." A. "Didn't you say we need to go to the grocery?" B. "Yes I did, do you want to come with me?" A. "Sure, but did you make a grocery list to take with us?" B. "Shoot I forgot. Hold on a few minutes while I make one for us." Other Common Sentences "Oh no."Nothing Matters
Meaning/Usage: To express nothing else is important Explanation: Usually used before expressing what is actually important. The below example sentences will illustrate this. "Nothing matters more than being happy." "Don't worry about what she said. Nothing matters but what you think." "Nothing matters if we can't start getting along better." A. "My husband told me I need to make a decision about getting a job." B. "Nothing matters but you being happy with what you are doing." A. "You are right. I will need to find something I love to do." B. "Good luck." Other Common Sentences "Nothing else is important at this time."Come On
Meaning/Usage: Urging someone; also used to try and speed things up Explanation: There are many definitions of "come on." This is only one common way of using it. "Come on, you can tell me." "Oh come on, you have to be kidding me." "Come on man, be serious for once." A. "I heard the movie is sold out for tonight." B. "Oh come on! I've been waiting weeks to see it." Other Common Sentences There are not many other sentences that are similar to this. The meaning is basically to allure or attract.Never mind
Meaning/Usage: To forget about it; to express you don't need an answer any longer Explanation: Although the sentences below are used in full sentences, this phrase is most commonly used by itself. For example, A: "Can you grab that pen for me?" B: "What did you say?" A: "Never mind." "Never mind what you were going to do, we need to leave now!" "Never mind what I said before, I was wrong." "Never mind cooking dinner for me, I will be home too late." A. "So what would you like me to fix for dinner tonight?" B. "Never mind cooking anything for me, I will not be home until late." A. "OK I will just cook for myself and the kids then." Other Common Sentences "You don't have to think about it."If You Insist
Meaning/Usage: To agree after the other person demands it Explanation: "Insist" means to demand something and that they will not accept refusal. It became common to say this phrase by itself when the other person insisted on something. "We will stay longer if you insist." "We can go another night if you insist." "I will call her if you insist." A. "Thanks for meeting us out for dinner." B. "It was nice of you to ask." A. "Tonight is our treat. I insist." B. "If you insist." Other Common Sentences "If that's what you really want." "If you are firm with your decision."Stop It!
Meaning/Usage: To ask someone to stop what they are doing. Explanation: This is a common way of telling a person to stop something that is bothering you. It is more aggressive way of say, "please dont do that." "Please stop it! You're giving me a headache." "Stop it before you get hurt!" "You had better stop it or you will get in trouble!" A. "Tommy! Stop it right now!" B. "Why? I saw other kids doing it." A. "That's not how we behave in a restaurant." B. "OK, I'm sorry." Other Common Sentences "Quit what you are doing." "Don't do that!"It's Nothing
Meaning/Usage: To tell someone that the task you did was not a big deal. Explanation: It is commonly used when you are being thanked for something that wasn't difficult. "It's nothing. It didn't take long for me to do this." "No need to thank me. It's nothing." "Oh, it's nothing to call and let you know what I find out." A. "I had no idea you guys were getting together tonight." B. "Really? I sent an email inviting everyone." A. "I didn't receive it." B. "You're more than welcome to come. I will add you to my email list for next time." A. "Thanks. I hope it's not too much to ask." B. "No, it's nothing to add you on." Other Common Sentences "No problem."What gives?
Meaning/Usage: Used to ask what is the matter or what went wrong Explanation: The only explanation I found was that this could have come from German borrowing. Germans used the phrase "was gibt es?" as "What is the matter?" or "What's up?" But to be honest. I am not sure about this. However, I do know that in English, it is commonly used to ask "What is the matter?" "It's not like you to get so upset, what gives?" "I had no idea you were leaving? What gives?" "Your mom said you stopped taking piano lessons. What gives?" A. "I heard that you did not pass your test?" B. "Yeah, it was harder than I thought." A. "You studied really hard for it though, what gives?" B. "I guess I will just have to try harder next time. Other Common Sentences "What's the problem?" "What happened?"Fair Enough
Meaning/Usage: Used after two people agree on something Explanation: "Fair" means to be legitimate or to be in accordance with the rules. When something is fair, no cheating is happening and nobody has a better advantage. Therefore, this term became popular in spoken English to agree to something. "It's a fair enough question for me to answer." "You want a rematch because you were sick when you lost? Fair enough." "Fair enough, I will try it once to see if I like it." A. "If you do not finish your homework you will not be able to go outside to play." B. "Fair enough." Other Common Sentences "I agree with what you said."Cat Got Your Tongue
Meaning/Usage: Used when someone has nothing to say Explanation: One explanation is that a long time ago, a witches cat would steal the tongue of a person to prevent them from telling others. However, this is only a tale and there are many guesses where this idiomatic phrase came from. Regardless, it is frequently used by someone who has the upper hand in a conversation. If a person cannot counter, or has nothing to say, then the other person can ask "don't you have anything to say?" or "Cat got your tongue?" "What's the matter? Cat got your tongue?" "You're being awfully quiet, cat got your tongue?" "She usually always has an opinion, cat must have gotten her tongue." A. "What's the matter? You're usually full of advice. Cat got your tongue?" B. "No I'm just keeping my opinions to myself." Other Common Sentences "You have nothing to say?" "Why are you so quiet?"My Pleasure
Meaning/Usage: Happy to do something for someone Explanation: "Pleasure" is to feel happy. When you use this term, you are telling the other person that you are happy to do it. "It is my pleasure to introduce you to our guests." "It was my pleasure to work with you." "It is my pleasure to be involved in something so important." A. "I really appreciate all you did helping me finish my project." B. "No problem at all, it was my pleasure." Other Common Sentences "Don't mention it." "No problem."It Totally Slipped My Mind
Meaning/Usage: To forget something that you had to do Explanation: When you "slip," you fall. When it falls from the mind, it is no longer there. So when you forget about something, it is common to say, it "slipped my mind." "I was meaning to call you but it totally slipped my mind." "There was something I needed to do today but it totally slipped my mind." "Sorry I forgot about your birthday. It totally slipped my mind." A. "Did you call your mom and dad and wish them Happy Anniversary?" B. "Oh no! It totally slipped my mind." Other Common Sentences "I completely forgot."Give It to Me Straight
Meaning/Usage: Used when you want to hear the truth Explanation: "Straight" is referring to straightforward. When people had to tell someone bad news, they would try to find ways to make it sound less bad. To do so, it would require a lot more words and a lot of creativity. However, when people want to hear bad news, they don't want to hear something without additions made by the speaker. Therefore, it was common for the listener to be firm and tell the speaker to speak be straightforward and to speak the truth without adding things. "Just give it to me straight, I can take the news." "This is hard for me to say so I'm just going to give it to you straight." "Just give it to me straight. How bad can it be?" A. "I have your test results back." B. "How bad is it? Just give it to me straight." Other Common Sentences "I will tell you honestly." "I will tell you directly."It's written all over your face
Meaning/Usage: Used to tell someone that their face expression is giving a message Explanation: Face expressions show sadness, happiness, fear, and many other emotions. It also shows when someone is lying or not telling the truth. This phrase is commonly used when the other person is not saying anything, but their face expression is speaking for them. "I know you did it, it's written all over your face." "I know that you're sad, it's written all over your face." "I can tell you are upset. It's written all over your face." A. "I am not the one who made the mess in the kitchen." B. "Come on, it's written all over your face." Other Common Sentences "Your facial expression is showing your true thoughts." "I can tell you're lying by your face expression." "The look on your face is making things obvious."Go For It
Meaning/Usage: To encourage someone to do something that they have planned Explanation: The literal meaning is to "decide on" or "choose." However, it is commonly used informally to encourage them to take action on something they are thinking about doing. "I know you want that job. Go for it!" "If you want to ask her out you're going to have to just go for it." "Don't let anyone stand in the way of your dreams. Go for it!" A. "I really like her. Should I ask her for her phone number?" B. "Go for it man!" You have nothing to lose." Other Common Sentences "Just do it." "Take action on it." "Be proactive."It's a Deal
Meaning/Usage: Agreeing on a proposal Explanation: Commonly used by itself when agreeing to a proposal made by someone. "So if I take the kids to swim lessons, you will clean the house? It's a deal!" "It's a deal. I will clean the garage if you stop bothering me about it." "If I stop eating donuts, I don't have to run every day? It's a deal!" A. "If you do my yard work, I will buy you candy." B. "No thanks. I shouldn't eat too much candy." A. "If you mow my grass, I will pay you ten dollars." B. "Sounds good. It's a deal." Other Common Sentences "I agree to your proposal." "Let's agree to that."Don't Be a Stranger
Meaning/Usage: Commonly used to tell someone to stay in touch Explanation: This is commonly used when you are talking to someone you don't meet or see often. "It was really nice seeing you again. Don't be a stranger." "We need to keep in touch. Don't be a stranger." "Now that we live so close to one another don't be a stranger." A. "Hey John, I don't see you around here these days." B. "I moved down south several months ago." A. "Keep in touch man. Don't be a stranger." B. "Definitely. I'll buzz you every time I come up." Other Common Sentences "Keep in touch." "Ping me once in awhile."Let's Go Fifty- Fifty
Meaning/Usage: Used when you are planning to pay half of something. Explanation: To pay 50% of the bill with another person who will pay the other 50% of the bill. "Thanks for having dinner with us. Let's split the bill fifty-fifty." "Let's split our winnings fifty-fifty." "Let's split the tab for drinks fifty-fifty." A. "That was a fun night. How much is our bill?" B. "I'm not sure. Did we order the same number of drinks?" A. "The difference is not going to be big. Let's just split it fifty-fifty." B. "OK sounds good." Other Common Sentences "Let's divide it equally." "Let's do it evenly." "Let's split it in half."Good for Nothing
Meaning/Usage: Negative statement to indicate someone has no value; useless Explanation: Another way to look at this statement is to say "There is nothing good about that person." "That guy is good for nothing." "That girl is a good for nothing troublemaker." "I would not let anything he says bother you, he is good for nothing." A. "How come you don't like Tim hanging out with Mike?" B. "Mike is good for nothing. He is always is in some sort of trouble." Other Common Sentences "He is no good." "He is worthless."You're Telling Me
Meaning/Usage: Agreeing with someone Explanation: In a statement form, this is agreeing with someone. In a question form, it can be a sarcastic remark related to hypocrisy. For example, a person who is fat tells a less fat person, A: "You need to go on a diet." B: "You're telling me?" "You're telling me, that book was one of the best I've ever read." "You're telling me, I already knew that was going to happen if he did not listen." "You're telling me, if she keeps it up she will lose 20 pounds." A. "She sure is a good teacher." B. "You're telling me! She taught me everything I know." A. "That girl sure is beautiful." B. "You're telling me. She is the hottest girl in our school!" Other Common Sentences Semi sarcastic way of saying, "I agree with you."Get a Life
Meaning/Usage: A negative way of telling someone to stop bothering you; to tell someone to stop being a loser Explanation: This is a rude statement, so please be careful how you use this. It can be similar to saying "f**k off" to someone. "I wish Terry would get a life." "Would you stop bothering me and get a life!" "Come on! Get a life and start taking care of yourself." A. "I noticed that man was bothering you. What did you say to him?" B. "I told him to get a life and quit bothering people he does not know!" Other Common Sentences "Go bother someone else." "Start paying attention to other matters that are more important."Don't Joke With Me
Meaning/Usage: Used when asking someone to be serious Explanation: "Joke" is defined as something that is said to cause amusement. In this phrase, the person does not find it funny because that person is involved in some way. So they can ask the person to be serious using this phrase. "He told me she likes me but I said don't joke with me." "My sister told me I was in trouble and I told her don't joke with me." "He said I had won a million dollars and I said don't joke with me!" A. "I heard that Dave asked the new girl at work out on a date." B. "Don't joke with me! You know I really like her." Other Common Sentences "Stop messing around." "Please be serious."I Can't Thank You Enough
Meaning/Usage: To be very thankful Explanation: This is commonly used when you feel that simply saying thank you is not enough. If someone did something very special for you, then you are expressing that no words can repay what they did. So this phrase is used to convey this message. "I can't thank you enough for all that you have done for me." "Thanks for everything. I can't thank you enough." "You were a big help today watching the kids. I can't thank you enough." A. "So how is your car running since I worked on it?" B. "It is running great! I can't thank you enough. You were such a big help!" Other Common Sentences "I really appreciate all that you have done." "Thank you very much!"My Two Cents
Meaning/Usage: To give or share your opinion Explanation: This came from the original expression, "my two pennies worth." It has been shortened recently to just "my two cents." This is a way of offering your opinion and saying that is only worth two pennies. It can be seen as a humble way of giving your opinion because you are valuing it at only two cents, but that is not the case these days. "I don't agree with what's happening. That's just my two cents." "You didn't ask for my two cents but I'll tell you anyway." "Just to add my two cents, but I believe changing the design will be a better idea." A. "So you don't think I should spend that much money on a car?" B. "You can spend whatever you want but that's my two cents." Other Common Sentences "That's my opinion." "That's what I think about it."Just Name It
Meaning/Usage: Used to express that you are offering to do or give anything the other person asks Explanation: A shortened way of saying, "tell me anything you want or need." "I will help you with whatever you need, just name it." "We can do whatever you want, just name it." "Just name it and we can do it." A. "There is so much to get done today." B. "I will help you with whatever you need. Just name it!" Other Common Sentences "Anything you need." "Tell me what you need and I'll do it."No Worries
Meaning/Usage: Used to tell the person not to worry about it; also used to say you're welcome Explanation: This is very commonly in both regular daily life and in the work place. It can be used after an apology or after someone says thank you. In both cases, it is telling the person that the event was no big deal and it does not require an apology or a thank you. "No worries, we can get it done tomorrow." "No worries, I didn't need it after all." "No worries, I need to go to bed early anyways." A. "I'm sorry for picking you up later than we planned." B. "No worries. We still have time to get there." A. "Thanks for giving me a ride to work today." B. "No worries. I was heading this direction anyways." Other Common Sentences "Don't worry about it." "It's OK." "No problem."Why so Blue?
Meaning/Usage: Asking someone why they are so sad. Explanation: The "blue" in this phrase is the same "blue" of being sad. "Why so blue, is everything ok?" "You look so depressed. Why so blue?" "Why so blue? Did he hurt your feelings?" A. "You seem a bit sad, why so blue?" B. "My girlfriend and I got into an argument and I'm sad." Other Common Sentences "Why are you so sad?" "Why do you look depressed?"Nature Calls
Meaning/Usage: This is used when you have to go to the bathroom. Usually referred to pee (#1) and not poop (#2). Explanation: Having to go pee is natural. So it became popular to say "nature calls" instead of saying, "I need to go pee." "Can you pull the car over at a rest stop as soon as you can? Nature calls!" "I have to go to the restroom. Nature calls." "That little boy is crossing his legs, nature must be calling." A. "I should not have drunk all that water before we got into the car." B. "Why? What's wrong?" A. "We just left and nature is already calling." Other Common Sentences "I need to go to the restroom." "I need to pee."What's Eating You?
Meaning/Usage: Used to ask someone what's bothering them Explanation: When something is eating at you, it is consuming your thoughts, time, and energy. It makes you depressed and you suffer from it. This phrase is asking someone who looks depressed why they are not happy. "You're in a bad mood today. What's eating you?" "It seems like something is wrong. What's eating you?" "What's eating you? You don't seem like yourself." A. "You seem really upset. What's eating you?" B. "My mom told me I cannot go out with you guys because we already have plans." A. "That's ok. There's always next time." Other Common Sentences "What's bothering you?" "What is troubling you?"Shame on You
Meaning/Usage: Used to tell someone that they did something wrong Explanation: Having "shame" is very negative. This is frequently used to tell children that they did something wrong. "You know better than to do that, shame on you." "I thought I asked you not to make a mess? Shame on you?" "Shame on you, you know not to eat so much candy before dinner." A. "Did you tell a lie to your sister?" B. "Yes daddy. I did." A. "Well shame on you. You know better than to do something like that." Other Common Sentences "You should be ashamed of yourself." "What you did was wrong."Hang In There
Meaning/Usage: Used to tell someone to not give up; to be persistent; to not lose hope Explanation: Another term that is often used is "hanging by a thread." In both phrases, the word "hang" is referring to holding to something. If you are holding on to a branch, then letting go indicates that you fall down and fail. Hanging by a thread is barely holding on. So when you tell someone to "hang in there," you are telling them to not let go and keep on fighting even though it is hard. "Hang in there. I am sure things will work out in the end." "I know things are tough right now, just hang in there." "Hang in there. Things will get a lot better." A. "Work is not going well right now. They are talking about laying people off soon." B. "Just try and hang in there and hopefully things get better." Other Common Sentences "Be patient." "Don't lose hope." "Keep going, don't give up."I Owe You
Meaning/Usage: Similar to giving someone a debt coupon Explanation: The literal meaning is exactly as it appears. However, this expression is merging all the words together to create a noun phrase. The closest meaning is a debt coupon. The coupon would be a piece of paper that would be a promise to pay back what was borrowed. "I don't have any money so can I get an I owe you." "I'll need an I owe you because I don't have any money." "I used up an I owe you already so he won't let me borrow again!" A. "Do you want to grab a steak tonight?" B. "I'd love to, but I won't have any money until payday?" A. "I'll give you an I owe you until you get your paycheck!" B. "Thanks man. I appreciate that." Other Common Sentences "Can I borrow it from you?" "Can I pay you back later?"Take a Hike
Meaning/Usage: To tell someone to go away in a negative way Explanation: This is a negative way of telling someone to go away, but not as bad as "f**k off." This can be used when you hear something that upsets you and you want to make sure the other person knows you are upset. "He asked for my phone number and I told him to take a hike." "He said he would only give me $200 for my car so I told him to take a hike." "Take a hike, I am not interested." A. "So I hear you tried to sell your car?" B. "Yes, I had a few people look at it." A. "Did anyone make you an offer?" B. "Yes, one guy offered me $200 and I told him to take a hike." Other Common Sentences "Get out of here." "Go away."It's a Piece of Cake
Meaning/Usage: Describes something that is easy to do. Explanation: In the 1870's, cakes were given as prizes for winning competition. To the winner, it was an easy task. Therefore, "cake" started representing something easy. Another phrase that is similar is "cake walk," which also represents something that is easy. "That test we took was a piece of cake." "I put the whole thing together myself. It was a piece of cake." "I told them I had never done this before and they said it would be a piece of cake." A. "So I heard you got an A on your math test." B. "Yeah, it was a piece of cake for me." Other Common Sentences "It's very easy." "You should have no problem."I'm On My Way
Meaning/Usage: Common way of telling someone that you are going to the person. Explanation: This is very straightforward. It is very commonly used. "Don't worry I'm on my way." "Just be patient, I'm on my way." "I got your message saying you needed my help. I'm on my way." A. "I thought you were going to come over right after work?" B. "Sorry, I had to stay late. But don't worry I'm on my way home now." Other Common Sentences "I'm coming now." "I'm currently going there."I'm Hosed
Meaning/Usage: To be screwed; to be out of luck Explanation: Early findings of this word came from a saying "to drink water from a fire hose." Basically, if you don't drink water, you are out of luck, and if you drink water from a fire hose, you are out of luck. It is bad in both cases. Therefore, you are out of luck. "I didn't finish my report on time. I'm hosed." "I am hosed. My mom found out I skipped school last week." "I'm hosed. My boss has given me tons of extra work to finish." A. "So I hear you got in trouble for getting bad grades." B. "Yeah, I'm hosed. I cannot drive my car until I get my grades up." A. "That's too bad man." B. "Looks like I'll just have to start studying more." Other Common Sentences "I'm in a difficult situation." "I'm not in a good situation."It's a Long Story
Meaning/Usage: Used when you don't want to talk about something, if it is difficult to talk about; or if it is hard to explain Explanation: This expression is straightforward, but can be used to say you don't want to talk about it, even if the story is not very long. "I know you want to know what happened but it's a long story." "It's a long story about what happened between us." "We used to be friends but it's a long story." A. "Hey there's Tim. Didn't you guys used to be good friends?" B. "Yes, we were friends a few years ago but not anymore." A. "Why, what happened?" B. "It's a long story." Other Common Sentences "It's hard to explain." "It will take a while to explain."Since When
Meaning/Usage: Asking from when Explanation: This one is a little difficult to explain. It is usually used when you are surprised by someone's action or words. When you know a person does not usually do something, you can start with "since when." This would indicate to the person that you know that they usually don't do this, but want to know when they started doing it. "Since when have you been interested in my opinion?" "Since when have you been coming to this gym?" "Since when did you become so good at tennis?" A. "I will have to go home soon, I have chess club tonight." B. "Since when did you become so interested in chess?" A. "I tried it with my uncle and loved it." B. "Well, we'll have to play soon, I like playing too!" Other Common Sentences "From then until now."Got It
Meaning/Usage: Asking someone if they understand; telling someone you understand Explanation: To "get" something is to understand something. So it became common to simply ask or say "got it." "You will need to follow the directions if you want to do it right, got it?" "If you're not home before 8 o'clock you will be in trouble, got it?" "This is how you put the puzzle together, got it?" A. "You're going to have to studying more if you plan on passing your test." B. "Ok. I got it." A. "I hope so. I don't want you to fail the class." Other Common Sentences "I understand what you are saying." "Do you understand what I'm saying?"You Wish
Meaning/Usage: Used to tell someone that they will not get what they want. Explanation: Many wishes do not come true. This expression is telling the person that what they want will be only a wish and not reality. "You want straight A's like her? You wish!" "You think she'll go on a date with you? You wish!" "You think you're going to beat my high score? Don't you wish." A. "I really need to win the lottery so I can retire." B. "Ha! You wish!" Other Common Sentences "In your dreams." "It's not going to happen."You're Dressed to Kill
Meaning/Usage: Being dressed in a way to make people notice you; dressed very nicely; dressed to attract sexual attention Explanation: This can be a compliment to some people, but it might not be to others. The reason is because it contains some level of sexuality in the meaning. "I really like your outfit! You're dressed to kill." "She must be trying to impress him. She is dressed to kill." "That girl is dressed to kill tonight." A. "Wow! Did you see Jennifer's dress?" B. "I did. She is dressed to kill." A. "Yeah. She sure looks sexy." Other Common Sentences "She is dressed really nice." "She is dressed attractively."Behave Yourself
Meaning/Usage: To tell someone to stay out of trouble Explanation: Normally this is used to tell children to behave appropriately. However, friends use it with one another like they use "stay out of trouble." "If you're going to have dinner at their house you'd better behave yourself." "Oh behave yourself, your being naughty." "Behave yourself when you're at school." A. "I'm going to go out with the guys this Friday night." B. "You'd better behave yourself. I know how you guys like to party." A. "Don't worry, I will be on my best behavior." Other Common Sentences "Stay out of trouble." "Have good manners."That Figures
Meaning/Usage: Another way of say, "that makes sense" or "I'm not surprised to hear that." Explanation: "Figures" are related to numbers. When numbers add up, it is logical. When something is logical it makes sense and you are not surprised. This expression is commonly used when a person hears something they have not heard before, but is not surprised by it even though it was alarming, because other pieces of information made it logical. "He said he did not like your ideas? That figures." "She only asked her closest friends to the party? That figures." "He won't talk to you after that incident? That figures." A. "Did I tell you what happened to John and Amy?" B. "No you didn't, please tell me." A. "They decided to get divorced!" B. "That figures. They never seemed happy with each other anyways." Other Common Sentences "That's no surprise."Do Tell
Meaning/Usage: A slang way of telling someone to tell you what they know. Explanation: This was seen in movies and is primarily used in informal speaking. "You heard about that rumor already? Do tell." "Martha and Jake are breaking up? Do tell." "Do tell. I'm dying to know what he said about me." A. "I heard a rumor the other day about what really happened at work." B. "Oh do tell! I really want to know what happened." Other Common Sentences "I want to know." "Please tell me what you know."No Sweat
Meaning/Usage: Telling someone it is "no problem" Explanation: "Sweat" refers to the water that comes from your pores after hard work or exercise. This phrase became popular to tell someone that the task is not a problem and that it will not cause any sweat. "I can finish it for you, no sweat." "No sweat. We can always get together another time." "No sweat. It's not that big of a deal." A. "Can you have my computer fixed by tomorrow? I really need it for work." B. "No sweat. I should be able to have it to you by then." Other Common Sentences "No problem." "It's not a big deal."I Blew It
Meaning/Usage: Used to tell someone that you made a big mistake Explanation: When something blows up, it is destroyed. Therefore, blow up implies in this context means to make a big mistake to damage any opportunities. Because making mistakes are very common, a simple way of saying this was needed so people started saying, "I blew it." "I really thought I was going to get the promotion, but I blew it." "I thought he really liked me but I blew it." "I was trying to surprise her for her birthday, but I blew it." A. "How did your interview go?" B. "Not so good, I was very nervous." A. "Why were you nervous?" B. "I think I might have messed up on a few questions so I think I blew it." Other Common Sentences "I messed up." "I missed my opportunity."Maddening
Meaning/Usage: Extremely annoying; to make you very mad Explanation: This is a straightforward. "Trying to make you happy sometimes is maddening." "Trying to figure out the answers to this test is maddening." "There was a maddening delay at the train station." A. "So what caused them to cancel flights at the airport?" B. "I'm not sure but it was maddening! People were angry trying to figure out what to do." A. "I'm glad your flight finally made it." B. "Me too, I could not stand to be in the airport any longer." Other Common Sentences "It was frustrating." "It was irritating."I Messed Up
Meaning/Usage: Used to tell someone that you made a mistake Explanation: This is a very common phrase. It is not as bad as "I blew it" but it also means to make a mistake. However, "I blew it" refers to making a big mistake to lose out on an opportunity, while "I messed up" can be used more freely to indicate any sort of mistake. "I messed up. I got a ticket for speeding on the highway." "I messed up, I lost my wallet at the airport." "He is really upset with me. I messed up." A. "Why did it take you so long to get here?" B. "I messed up and got lost." A. "Really, how did that happen?" B. "I was not paying attention and took the wrong exit to get here." Other Common Sentences "I made a mistake." "I did the wrong thing."I Beg to Differ
Meaning/Usage: A polite way of disagreeing Explanation: Sounds very British for an American. And British English is seen as more polite. "I beg to differ. I don't think that is the right way to handle the situation." "I beg to differ. You did a really nice job and deserved the promotion." "I beg to differ. What he did was inexcusable." A. "I still think we should get a new car." B. "I beg to differ. The car we have works fine." A. "I guess you're right. We can wait." Other Common Sentences "I disagree with you." "I politely disagree."Rise and Shine
Meaning/Usage: Phrase used to wake someone up nicely Explanation: "Rise" means to get up and "shine" in this context means to "act lively and do well." "It's time to rise and shine sweetheart." "You'd better rise and shine or you'll be late for work." "Rise and shine sleepy head, it's time for breakfast." A. "Rise and shine! It's time to get up!" B. "Can't I just stay in bed a bit longer?" A. "If you do you will be late for work." Other Common Sentences "It's time to wake up." "Get out of bed."You Bet
Meaning/Usage: Telling someone yes in a definite way Explanation: When you "bet" on something, you are placing a wager that you are right. In this context, "bet" is being absolutely sure. "You bet" is usually used when someone asks for something. Instead of saying "yes," saying "you bet" is more positive and makes the listener feel better. "You bet I'll be at your game. I would not miss it." "I can help you with your project, you bet." "You bet I'm going to talk to her, she is beautiful." A. "I'm moving in a few weeks and was wondering if you could help?" B. "You bet. Just let me know when, and I'll be there." A. "Thanks! That would be great." Other Common Sentences "Of course." "Definitely."Pie in the Sky
Meaning/Usage: Pleasant to imagine but impossible to attain Explanation: Comes from a song written by Joe Hill. It indicated that you will get heavenly rewards after death. However, people who did not believe in heaven turned this phrase into an idiom to express something pleasant that is unattainable. "Her desire to be an actress ended up just being a pie in the sky." "His dreams of becoming a famous singer are just a pie in the sky." "Their ideas about living in space are just a pie in the sky." A. "I thought she moved to California to become a model?" B. "She did, but it didn't work out for her." A. "Seems like her dreams were just a pie in the sky after all." B. "That's how it seems." Other Common Sentences "That's an impractical wish." "That's an unrealistic dream."No Strings Attached
Meaning/Usage: Without any conditions Explanation: Imagine that you see a money on the ground. When you go pick it up, it disappears. It was too good to be true. What happened is that someone had a piece of string on the bill and when you went to pick it up, the person pulled on the string so you could get it. So when a string is attached to something, it must be a trick of some sort that requires you to do additional things to get what you want. Because tricking people was popular, the phrase "no strings attached" because common by salesmen to indicate that they are not tricking you to buy something. "We are giving away free t-shirts, no strings attached." "He said he would finish the work for free, no strings attached." "The grocery store is giving away free candy, no strings attached." A. "Have you been to the new electronics store down the street?" B. "No, I haven't been there yet, why?" A. "If their prices are not the lowest they will give it to you for free! No strings attached." B. "Wow, that's a great deal. I will have to check them out." Other Common Sentences "There are no hidden clauses." "There is nothing you have to do."Sleep Tight
Meaning/Usage: Get a good nights sleep Explanation: Comes from the saying, "Good night, sleep tight, don't let the bed bugs bite." "Sleep tight, you have a lot to get done tomorrow." "I hope you sleep tight after an exhausting day." "Not sure if she will sleep tight after watching that scary movie." A. "Our daughter woke up 2 times during the night." B. "Is she ok?" A. "Yes, she just had a tummy ache and could not sleep well." B. "Tell her I said sleep tight and I hope that she feels better soon." Other Common Sentences "Get a good night sleep." "Hope you sleep well."It Can't Hurt
Meaning/Usage: Hoping nothing will go wrong to try or do something Explanation: Whenever there is action, there is reaction. Sometimes the reaction or the result can be negative on you. Because of this, people became cautious about changing to things that they are not familiar with. However, after thinking for a long time and not being able to find anything negative, people would use this common phrase. "I'm trying a new diet, it can't hurt, right?" "It can't hurt to get another opinion." "I say it can't hurt to let him know how you feel." A. "I'm thinking of trying out a new gym." B. "Really? Why?" A. "The one I go to now is too expensive. I found another one that is cheaper." B. "Go ahead and do it, it can't hurt to try it." Other Common Sentences "You might as well." "There is no harm trying."I Couldn't Agree With You More
Meaning/Usage: To completely agree with someone Explanation: This is the highest level of agreeing with someone because they can't agree more than they do. It is straightforward and very common. "I couldn't agree with you more, this place is beautiful." "I couldn't agree with you more, spending more time with each other would be nice." "You didn't like that movie either? I couldn't agree with you more." A. "I really don't like shopping around the holidays." B. "I couldn't agree with you more. It's always so busy." Other Common Sentences "I totally agree with you."Thank Goodness
Meaning/Usage: Expression to indicate relief Explanation: Another popular way people indicate relief is to say "Thank God" "Thank goodness this dress still fits, I have nothing else to wear." "Thank goodness we got our tickets early, the concert is now sold out." "Thank goodness he doesn't suspect anything. I really want it to be a surprise." A. "Thank goodness we found out about this sale." B. "I know! They have such good deals." A. "Thanks for letting me know about it." B. "You're welcome." Other Common Sentences "I am so glad." "What a relief."You Made It
Meaning/Usage: To succeed at something; to arrive Explanation: The literal meaning to say a person arrived. But another common meaning is to say they succeeded at something. "I can't believe you made it. It was a difficult task." "You made it! I didn't think you were going to show up." "I heard you made it a whole week without smoking?" A. "You made it! I thought you were out of town?" B. "I was, but I got home last night and thought I'd surprise you." A. "What a great surprise! I'm so happy you are here." B. "Me too! Thanks for having me." Other Common Sentences "You did it." "You arrived."Whatever
Meaning/Usage: An expression used to indicate you don't believe the other person Explanation: This is also commonly used as an expression by itself. For example, when someone says something outrageous, you can simply respond with "Whatever!" "Whatever, I know you like him." "You're saying I can't go out tonight with my friends? Whatever!" "Whatever! You know I don't believe you." A. "He told me the window was already broken when he got home." B. "Whatever, I saw him throw a ball with my own eyes." A. "Ok. I will talk to him about it." B. "You should because he is lying." Other Common Sentences "I don't agree with you." "I don't believe you."I'm Sick of It
Meaning/Usage: To express that you are tired of something; to express you don't like something anymore Explanation: This is commonly used when something happens so often that you are tired of it. "I'm not sure about you, but I'm sick of it!" "I don't know why she's acting that way, but I'm sick of it." "I'm sick of it. We need to stop arguing so much." A. "Why has he been acting so mean to everyone?" B. "I don't know, but I'm sick of it." A. "Me too, I'm going to say something to him." B. "Let me know what he says." Other Common Sentences "I'm tired of it." "I don't like it anymore."Get Out of Here
Meaning/Usage: Common way to express disbelief Explanation: You are not telling someone to literally get out. This is a common idiomatic phrase to express disbelief. Often times it is used in a positive way as in the first example sentence below. "Get out of here! We actually finished in first place?" "Get out of here. She would never say such a thing about me." "Get out of here. That's hard to believe." A. "Jen told me that Ryan got an A on his test." B. "Get out of here! He didn't even study!" A. "I'm telling you the truth, he got an A." B. "What a surprise." Other Common Sentences "Are you joking with me?" "Are you serious?"You Made It Big
Meaning/Usage: Used when someone succeeded financially Explanation: Very similar to the idiom "you made it" but includes the word "big" The word "big" is talking about money so it is expressing to someone that they have succeeded financially. "I can't believe you have your own business! You made it big!" "I can't believe how nice your house is. You made it big." "You made it big! Your parents will be proud of you." A. "So how have you been?" B. "I've been good. I live in Beverly Hills with my wife." A. "Wow you live in Beverly Hills? You made it big!" Other Common Sentences "You've done well." "You really succeeded!"In Your Dreams
Meaning/Usage: Used to tell someone that they will not get what they want. Explanation: Although the sentences below are used in full sentences, this phrase is commonly used by itself. "Sure you will be a millionaire one day, in your dreams." "You will be as good as me in your dreams." "You think you will beat me? In your dreams." A. "I've been practicing shooting basketball with my dad." B. "Are you getting any better?" A. "I can beat you now." B. "In your dreams, buddy!" Other Common Sentences "You wish."Hold On a Sec
Meaning/Usage: To tell someone to wait; to slow down; an expression used before providing a different point of view or opinion Explanation: This is fairly straightforward. "Sec" in this context is one "second." You're basically telling someone to wait because you are about to say something else. "Hold on a sec, I thought you were staying home tonight?" "Hold on a sec, are you serious?" "Hold on a sec. This is different from what you told me yesterday." A. "Chip is going to draft a quarterback in the first round?" B. "Hold on a sec. I swore he was going to draft a running back first." A. "It's a surprise for me too, but I'm pretty sure about it." Other Common Sentences "Not so fast." "On the contrary."That's easier said than done
Meaning/Usage: This is used when something is easy to say but very hard to do. Explanation: This phrase is very literal. Often times people tell you to do something that sounds easy, but it is actually hard. So in response, you can say this phrase. "I want to quit smoking but that's easier said than done." "She wants me to be more romantic but that's easier said than done." "I wish I could just retire a wealthy man but that's easier said than done." A. "I really want to learn how to take good photographs." B. "Maybe you should take a class?" A. "My sister learned how to do it all by herself." B. "I don't doubt it but that's easier said than done." Other Common Sentences "That's more difficult than it sounds." "It's easy to say something, but difficult to do."You Never Know
Meaning/Usage: Expressing that the unlikely could happen Explanation: This is short for "You never can be certain of anything." "I don't think I'll get the job but you never know." "You never know. Some people don't mind the rain." "You never know. He still could change his mind." A. "I don't think my husband wants to go with us." B. "You never know. Have you asked him?" A. "Not yet, but I will tonight." B. "I think that might be a good idea." Other Common Sentences "It could happen." "Things still can change."Back to the grind
Meaning/Usage: Going back to work after a break Explanation: "Back" is going back to something. Grinding something is hard work, so going back to the "grind" is going back to hard work. "Ok everyone break time is over, get back to the grind." "Back to the grind for me. I'll catch you later." "Time to get back to the grind. I need to finish so I can leave on time." A. "I really need to finish this project before my deadline." B. "If that's the case, you'd better stop talking and get back to the grind." A. "I agree, I need to finish it before I leave." B. "Good luck." Other Common Sentences "I better get back to work." "You'd better get back to what you were working on."It Serves You Right
Meaning/Usage: Expressing that justice happened because the person got what they deserved Explanation: This is usually said when something bad happens to someone who continually did something bad. "It serves you right. You were not nice to him." "It serves him right. He can't expect to win when he cheats during the game." "It serves you right. You got what you deserved." A. "Can you believe Kim got fired from work?" B. "Serves her right. She was always late or calling in sick." A. "I guess you're right, but I hope she finds a new joB." B. "Me too." Other Common Sentences "You got what you deserved."I Can't Wait
Meaning/Usage: Being excited about something Explanation: This is very literal. This phrase is usually used by itself and does not need to be in a full sentence. "We only have 7 more days until vacation! I can't wait!" "I can't wait. They are going to announce the contest winners today." "I can't wait for summer to get here, I don't like the cold weather." A. "I can't wait to see my parents this weekend!" B. "Are they coming in town to visit?" A. "Yes, I haven't seen them for a year." B. "Have a fun time visiting with them." Other Common Sentences "I am eager for it to happen." "I'm waiting with excitement."Lighten Up
Meaning/Usage: Telling someone to not be depressed Explanation: This is very similar to "cheer up." It can also be used to tell someone not to be negative. "Lighten up. Things could be worse." "Lighten up. We can go to the movies another day." "Lighten up. There will be another chance to play." A. "I'm so upset that we didn't get to go to the game yesterday." B. "Lighten up. We can go some other time." A. "I know, I just feel bad I had to work." B. "Like I said, it's ok. We can try again next week." Other Common Sentences "Cheer up." "Don't be so depressed."Good Point
Meaning/Usage: Used to tell someone that they had a good comment, thought, or suggestion Explanation: "Point" can be seen as an idea, a statement, or a thought. "Good point, I should have followed the instructions while building it." "Good point, I will call her to explain what happened." "That is a very good point." A. "I really think you should have called him first before stopping by his house." B. "Good point. I will remember that next time." Other Common Sentences "Good thought." "Good suggestion."Just My Luck
Meaning/Usage: Expression used when something bad happens to you Explanation: This is commonly used to tell someone that you are unlucky. "That's just my luck, I never win at anything." "Just my luck, my boss asked me to work late tonight." "Just my luck, I got a speeding ticket on the way home." A. "I hear you had to change your plans for this weekend?" B. "Yeah, I have to work so we can't go to the beach with you." A. "That's too bad." B. "Yeah, it's just my luck." Other Common Sentences "I am so unlucky." "Something went wrong for me." "I have back luck."It's Up To You
Meaning/Usage: Used to tell a person that they are the one to make a decision Explanation: "Up to" is commonly used to indicate a decision. It is common to say, "up to her," or "up to them," or "up to me." "It's up to you, but I don't think we should bother him." "I don't care what we do tonight, it's up to you." "It's up to you whether we invite them to the party." A. "What time do you think we should leave to go to the airport?" B. "It's up to you. Our flight is at 7 o'clock." A. "I think we should leave by 5 then." A. "Ok. Sounds good to me." Other Common Sentences "You can decide." "You can make the decision."Hop In
Meaning/Usage: Used to tell someone to get in the car Explanation: "Hop" is like a small jump. So this phrase is pretty straightforward. "Hop in. You can ride with me to the grocery store." "Hop in. We need to leave right away." "If you need a ride home, hop on in." A. "I can't believe my car broke down again." B. "Hop in, and I'll give you a ride home." A. "Thanks man." B. "You're welcome." Other Common Sentences "Get in the car." "Jump in the car."I Told You So
Meaning/Usage: This is used when you already told someone something and it came true Explanation: This is commonly used when you give someone advice and they don't listen to you. Afterwards, the person you gave advice to did not get what they wanted, and if they had listened to you, they would have succeeded. In this case, you can use this expression. "I knew that was a bad idea, I told you so." "I told you so. You should have listened to me." "You shouldn't be surprised, because I told you so." A. "I should have listened to your advice." B. "Why do you say that?" A. "I tried that new restaurant and it was terrible." B. "What did I tell you? I told you so." Other Common Sentences "I warned you."You Know Better Than That
Meaning/Usage: Used when someone makes a mistake that they shouldn't have made Explanation: This is used more commonly with children, but can also be used to adults. However, this can make the person feel a little bad because you are speaking to them like a child. "Mary said you were rude to her, you know better than that." "You know better than that. Now pick up the mess you made before going outside." "Come on, you know better than that." A. "Did you yell at your sister for playing with your toys?" B. "Yes, she didn't ask me." A. "Well you know better than that. Next time use your manners and ask her nicely." B. "Ok mom, I'm sorry." Other Common Sentences "You know the right thing to do." "You know what you were supposed to do."Has Been Burned
Meaning/Usage: To get screwed; to get a bad deal; to be tricked Explanation: When you are burned, it hurts. When you are screwed, get a bad deal, or get cheated, that hurts too. So it became common to use "burned" in this manner. "I don't know why he keeps calling her. He's been burned by her numerous times." "I have been burned by making bad decisions before." "I got burned on that used car we bought." A. "So did you end up going on a date with her?" B. "Man, I got burned! She ended up going out with someone else instead." A. "That's too bad. Don't let it bother you." B. "I won't, I didn't like her anyways." Other Common Sentences "I've been swindled." "I got a bad deal."Keep Me in the Loop
Meaning/Usage: To be informed about everything regarding that subject Explanation: "Loop" is a cycle or a continual circular motion. When you are not in the circle, then you don't know what is going on. So being in the loop is indicating that you are aware of the situation. Being kept in the loop is asking someone to keep you informed about what is happening. "I really want to know what happens so keep me in the loop." "Keep me in the loop so I'm included." "Thanks for the update. Keep me in the loop." A. "I am meeting with my boss tomorrow about the presentation." B. "Keep me in the loop and let me know what he says." A. "Ok, I will let you know." Other Common Sentences "Keep me informed." "Make sure I am included."I'll Be Down
Meaning/Usage: To agree to participate in the plan Explanation: "Down" comes from "down to earth." When you are down to earth, you are realistic and not imagining things. Therefore, when you are "down," you are basically legitimate or a real. This is an informal way of saying you are in for the plan. "If you don't want to go to the pool, I'll be down for whatever." "I'll be down with whatever you guys want to do tonight." "Going to the movies sounds good, I'm down." A. "Just wanted to let you know we all might go skating tonight." B. "I'm down. Sounds like fun to me." A. "Ok then, we will pick you up around 7 o'clock." B. "Sounds good." Other Common Sentences "I'm in." "I agree with that."Get to the Point
Meaning/Usage: Used when someone is not providing the piece of information that is the most important. Explanation: When someone is telling you something and they are going around in circles without coming to any conclusion or without providing the main point, you can use this by itself to tell someone to stop going around in circles and to tell you what they mean. "Can you please get to the point? You're taking forever." "Get to the point, you're making no sense." "If you can just get to the point maybe I can help you." A. "I am having a hard time trying to tell you what happened." B. "Just get to the point and maybe I will understand better." Other Common Sentences "Tell me what you mean."Down to Earth
Meaning/Usage: Realistic; reasonable; sensible Explanation: When you are down to earth, you are realistic, reasonable, and does not imagine unnecessary things. "I really like them. They are so down to earth." "They are really down to earth and easy to get along with." "They live their life very down to earth." A. "I really like how you handle different situations." B. "I just try and deal with them the best I can." A. "But you're so down to earth and deal with them very realistically." B. "Thank you for your compliments." Other Common Sentences "You are very sensible." "You are very reasonable and realistic."Sure Thing
Meaning/Usage: To express that you will do something Explanation: If someone asks you for help, you can respond with "sure thing" to indicate certainty. "You want me to call you tomorrow? Sure thing." "Sure thing. I'll be there!" "I can help you move. Sure thing." A. "Sorry to hear your mom is in the hospital." B. "Thanks, they are still doing some tests to find out what is wrong with her." A. "Well let me know once you find out anything." B. "Sure thing, I will call you once they let me know." Other Common Sentences "Of course I will." "Certainly."Tell me a little about yourself.
"Tell me a little about yourself." You should take this opportunity to show your communication skills by speaking clearly and concisely in an organized manner. Because there is no right or wrong answer for this question, it is important to appear friendly. Short Answers "I attended MIT where I majored in Electrical Engineering. My hobbies include basketball, reading novels, and hiking." "I grew up in Korea and studied accounting. I worked at an accounting firm for two years and I enjoy bicycling and jogging." "I’m an easy going person that works well with everyone. I enjoy being around different types of people and I like to always challenge myself to improve at everything I do." "I’m a hard worker and I like to take on a variety of challenges. I like pets, and in my spare time, I like to relax and read the newspaper." "I’ve always liked being balanced. When I work, I want to work hard. And outside of work, I like to engage in my personal activities such as golfing and fishing." Long Answer "I went to the University of Washington and majored in English Literature. I went to graduate school because I really enjoyed learning. Afterwards, I started my career at Boeing as a web content editor. I’ve been there for 3 years now. Although my emphasis is in writing, I like numbers. I think solving logic problems and riddles are quite fun. I also enjoy jogging, reading, and watching movies." There is no right or wrong answer for this question. Most important thing you should remember is how you deliver the message. The example above shows a short answer telling a little bit about the person. The answer went from education to career, and then to personal interests all in a smooth flow.What are your strengths?
"What are your strengths?" This is a popular interview question. They want to know what you think of yourself. Although this is a general question, there is a wrong and right answer. The wrong answer is a generic answer saying you are organized and friendly. Although it will not hurt you during the interview, it will certainly not help you either. Answer this question based on the type of job you are applying for. Short Answers "I believe my strongest trait is my attention to detail. This trait has helped me tremendously in this field of work." "I've always been a great team player. I'm good at keeping a team together and producing quality work in a team environment." "After having worked for a couple of years, I realized my strength is accomplishing a large amount of work within a short period of time. I get things done on time and my manager always appreciated it." "My strongest trait is in customer service. I listen and pay close attention to my customer's needs and I make sure they are more than satisfied." Long Answers Let's say I am interviewing for a management position. You should mention traits that are important for managers. "A couple strengths I have are planning and execution, and working with people. I've always been very good at planning and detailing all the steps. Even in college, I would spend time organizing my week and planning a strategy to tackle each class or assignment. Executing a plan has always come easy for me as well. I believe it's due to proper planning. I also work with people very well in a way where I use the strengths of each individual in a team to produce the best results. Because of my easy going personality, I've been told by my directs that it's easy to approach me." If you are applying for an accounting position, you should mention strong traits an accountant should have and claim them to be yours. "I'm very detail oriented, good at managing time, and very honest. I always incorporate managing time and being detailed together. By nature I've been detail oriented, and that resulted in taking too much time on a particular task. After incorporating time management into the mix, I found that my work and efficiency increased dramatically. I plan better and produce higher quality work in a time constraint environment. Finally, I'm a very honest person. When I was working as a valet attendant during college, a lady gave me a twenty dollar bill to pay for the three dollar fee. She almost drove off the lot, but I stopped her and said here is your change. My co-workers said I should have considered the change as tip, but I know what I did was honest and right. You can fool other people, but you can't fool yourself. That's what I believe." The second example can seem a little wordy. But the power of an example is greater than any great words you can string together. Everyone can claim they are honest, but with an example, it is much more believable.What are your weaknesses?
"What are your weaknesses?" For this answer, you should display a weakness that can be seen as a strength. There are many types of answers that will work. Some answers will be good answers for certain jobs, while the same answer will be a bad answer for a different job. Select an answer that will work for the position you are applying for. Here are a few examples. Short Answers "This might be bad, but in college I found that I procrastinated a lot. I realized this problem, and I'm working on it by finishing my work ahead of schedule." "I feel my weakness is not being detail oriented enough. I'm a person that wants to accomplish as much as possible. I realized this hurts the quality and I'm currently working on finding a balance between quantity and quality." "I feel my English ability is my weakest trait. I know this is only a temporary problem. I'm definitely studying hard to communicate more effectively." "The weakest trait I struggled with was not asking for help. I always try to solve my own problems instead of asking a co-worker who might know the answer. This would save me more time and I would be more efficient. I'm working on knowing when it would be beneficial to ask for help." Long Answers "I think my weakest trait is my impatience. Whenever I work in a team and a member is not performing up to my expectations, I can get impatient and annoyed. I understand if they are working hard and their portion is difficult, but sometimes a person can't do the assignment due to incompetence or laziness. A while back I would get frustrated and start complaining, but I realized that I can help out by explaining things to some people and encouraging lazy people by reminding them of deadlines. I know it's bad to be impatient, but I'm definitely working on it." "I'm too detail oriented. I never want to leave anything out and I want everything to be perfect. This is bad because it slows down my work. Initially, I tried to work faster to compensate, but that only made me sloppy. So I decided to put more emphasis on priority and planning. By doing so, I'm hoping that I can make the proper decisions on what to work on and what to intentionally leave out." Both of these examples show an answer that is acceptable. Although being impatient is not good, it shows that you are a quick learner and that you like efficiency. The second displays a person that is detail oriented, which can be seen as a good trait. Finally, both answers identify the weakness and show the actions of correcting it.What are your short term goals?
"What are your short term goals?" This question primarily depends on where you are in your career. A person with 5 years of experience will have different short term goals than a person with no work experience. I'll give an example for both scenarios. But first, here are some short answers. Short Answers "My short term goal is to find a position where I can use the knowledge and strengths that I have. I want to partake in the growth and success of the company I work for." "I've learned the basics of marketing during my first two years. I want to take the next step by taking on challenging projects. My short term goal is to grow as a marketing analyst." "As a program manager, it's important to understand all areas of the project. Although I have the technical abilities to be successful in my job, I want to learn different software applications that might help in work efficiency." "My goal is to always perform at an exceptional level. But a short term goal I have set for myself is to implement a process that increases work efficiency." Long Answers "My short term goal is to learn everything I can about marketing. I want to find a position where I can contribute what I've learned through education and to gain real life experience. I believe the next couple of years will be very important to me and my immediate goal is to learn and become skilled in all aspects of marketing." "My short term goal is to get into a management position. The last five years of my career, I've concentrated on learning and acquiring all the skills needed to perform excellent work. Recently, I've taken more responsibilities in management because I eventually want to become a sales manager. I'm excited about the last few assignments I completed because it involved working with vendors and partners while managing a small group of workers. So I hope to be in a management position within a year or two and I feel I'm doing a diligent job by volunteering for extra work to gain more experience." The first example is a person straight out of school. Learning is a good short term goal to have because it shows that you will be trying hard in your job. The second example is more detailed because that person has several years of experience. Anybody can say they want a management position, but this candidate is taking it a step further by showing the steps he is taking to achieve the short term goal. Thus, it becomes a stronger answer.What are your long term goals?
"What are your long term goals?" This question is asked to see how serious a candidate is about his or her career. Some people might not know their long term goals, and some people might have long term goals of becoming rich and retiring early. Those are incorrect answers for this question. The type of answer you want to give is an ambitious answer that shows you really love your career. A good interviewer will read between the lines and find out if a person is going to be a hard worker or just a mediocre one. Being descriptive and shooting for a big goal is something interviewers want to hear. Short Answer "I would like to become a director or higher. This might be a little ambitious, but I know I'm smart, and I'm willing to work hard." "After a successful career, I would love to write a book on office efficiency. I think working smart is important and I have many ideas. So after gaining more experience, I'm going to try to write a book." "I've always loved to teach. I like to grow newer employees and help co-workers where ever I can. So in the future, I would love to be an instructor." "I want to become a valued employee of a company. I want to make a difference and I'm willing to work hard to achieve this goal. I don't want a regular career, I want a special career that I can be proud of." Long Answer "My long term goal is to become a partner for a consulting firm. I know the hard work involved in achieving this goal, and I know that many people fail to become a partner. That's not going to stop me from working hard, learning everything I can, and contributing to a company where I'll become a valuable asset. I know it's not a guarantee, but becoming a partner is a long term goal of mine, and I am going to work towards this goal throughout my career." This example shows a candidate with a big goal. This person identifies the difficulty of the goal and shows the steps required to achieve this goal. Despite the difficulty, this candidate shows he or she will not get discouraged with difficult situations and will never give up. It is a short answer that goes a long way.What do you want to be doing five years from now?
"What do you want to be doing five years from now?" "Where do you see yourself in five years?" This is a similar question to the short term question, but you should answer it a little differently. Here are some examples. Short Answers "In five years, I see myself as a valued employee of a company. I want to be an expert at my position and start training to be a manager." "In five years, I want to be a senior analyst. I want my expertise to directly impact the company in a positive way." "My goal is to become a lead in five years. Although not everyone gets promoted to this level, I believe I can achieve this goal through hard work." "Although I really enjoy working hands on as a mechanical engineer, I want to eventually become a manager. I want to continue gaining experience, and after learning many different aspects, I see myself in management." Long Answers "Five years from now, I would like to see myself in a management position. I'm going to be learning and gaining practical experience until then, but eventually, I want to become a marketing manager. I know there are a lot of things to learn, but I'm going to be working hard for the next five years. I believe opportunities come to great workers and I'm going to try to be one of them." "Five years from now, I want to be a senior sales manager. I'm currently training to become a manager, and if I continue to work hard, I feel I'll have a management position soon. After gaining several years of experience as a sales manager, I want to be in a position where I can train and provide my expertise to newer sales managers." Both answers display characteristics of working hard. The second example also mentions that he or she wants to train newer managers. This is a good answer because it targets one good trait about upper management... the ability to train managers.If you could change one thing about your personality, what would it be and why?
"If you could change one thing about your personality, what would it be and why?" This question is another variation to the weakness question. You can provide a similar type of question unless it is the same person asking them. To answer this question, think of a person you respect and the trait they have that you really like. I used to have a manager that was very patient and explained things very carefully. I really liked this trait, so I'm going to provide the long answer by using this example. But first, let's look at some short answers. Short Answers "I get easily frustrated at people who don't work very hard. But I know people have different work styles and different work habits. So if I could change something, I would like to be more understanding." "I have high expectations and I have these expectations on others. I think if I was more understanding, I could help other workers improve instead of being disappointed." "I would like to be more of a risk taker. I always do my work and complete it at an exceptional level, but sometimes taking a risk can make the work even better. I'm working on this by thinking the issue through and weighing the pros and cons." "I would like to be more of an extrovert. I'm a little quiet and a little closer to the introvert side. I would like to change this because I would appear more friendly." Long Answer "I wish I was more patient with people. I remember a manager I had a couple of years ago. He was very patient with everyone. Even workers that were not that smart and failed to understand a concept to perform the job. I remember thinking how can this person who can't understand this concept continue to work here. My manager took a different approach. He was understanding of this worker and explained the concept in a different way. He even explained how to view problems from a different perspective. That helped this worker and in time that worker became a strong contributor. So if I could change one thing about me, I would like to be more patient and understanding. I'm taking the steps to change for the better by remembering the actions of my past manager whenever I'm in a similar situation." This is a little long, but if you can speak smoothly, it shows off your communication skills. Also, the content of the answer is not that bad. They want a personality problem, and this answer is showing impatience while indicating that you understand difficult concepts easily. It also shows that you are working on correcting the bad behavior.What does success mean to you?
"What does success mean to you?" There are many things you can say. This type of question doesn't have a wrong answer. All answers will be correct. So the best answer is how good you can make the answer. A mediocre answer will be something like completing a project on time. You can say this, but add another twist to make the answer a little better. Here is an example. Short Answers "To me, success means to have a goal, plan the steps to achieve the goal, implement the plan, and finally achieve the goal." "Success means to achieve a goal I have set for myself." "Success means to produce high quality work before the deadline." "Success to me is knowing that my contributions positively impacted my company." Long Answer "Success to me means completing a task and when looking back, thinking I couldn't have done it better. To succeed is to complete a task or assignment on time in an excellent manner. But that's only half of it. The results should be good and the people involved should gain a valuable lesson or experience. For example, if it was a group project, and only two people out of four really did the work, I wouldn't call that success. If everyone participated and worked together providing a valuable deliverable then it's a success. So I think both the result and the process should be great to call something a success." This answer is showing that you believe in delivering great quality work. Moreover, it is implying how much you value team work. If you value teamwork highly, then it is safe to assume that you would make a great team player.What does failure mean to you?
"What does failure mean to you?" This is quite simple. I don't see many right answers so this is what I suggest. You can believe in two of the following. One, you believe that failure is not achieving your goal no matter what. Or two, you can believe failure is only when nothing is learned from the failure. I believe in the latter, but you don't have to agree with me. Short Answers "Failure is when I do not reach my goal." "I think to fail at something is making a mistake and not learning anything from it." "To me, failure means to have a goal and not do anything about it." "I think failure is not reaching your potential. If you do not use the resources you have and the resources around you, that's failure because the work or goal could have been done better." Long Answer "I think it's harder to fail than it is to succeed. The reason is, if you fail in a project, you can learn a valuable lesson from your mistake. Learning from the mistake will allow you to improve future projects, or to simply not repeat them. Just because I believe this, doesn't mean I believe it's acceptable to fail at a project, but just in case, I would try to learn everything I can... even when the end result wasn't that good. So, failure to me means making a mistake and having learned nothing from it." Nobody wants a failure. So you can feel that answering like this will be risky. However, this is a solid answer that most people agree with. If the person doesn't like this answer, then you might not want to work for this person. Everyone fails and if you work for someone who doesn't tolerate failure, then you will be in a difficult situation. Even vice presidents of large corporations will believe that learning from mistakes is a valuable lesson. This answer also states that you will do you best not to fail, but just in case, you want to gain something from your experience.Are you an organized person?
"Are you an organized person?" You can think that this question is stupid. Actually, I do. Everyone will say they are organized. Who will admit otherwise? You should know that everyone will say similar things. Take this time to be creative with your answer. You can use these types of questions to leave a strong impression with a creative answer. Or, if you are not creative, then the best way to answer this question is with an example. Using a story is more believable and easier to remember. Feel free to mix in a little humor to make it more memorable. Short Answers "I'm a very organized person. I like to know exactly what I'm going to do for the day and the week. So I outline my tasks and organize my work load. By doing so, I can organize my time and work better." "I believe I'm very organized. I like to organize my work by priority and deadlines. I do this so I can produce the highest quality work in the amount of time I have." "I think I'm quite organized. I like my documents and papers in a way where I can retrieve them quickly. I also organize my work in a way where it's easy to see exactly what I'm doing." "Organization has always come easy to me. I naturally organize things like my desk, time, assignments, and work without thinking about them. This helps me tremendously during times when I'm approaching a deadline." Long Answer "I'm actually a very organized person. It's funny that you mention this because just the other day, my roommate wanted to borrow my suitcase and saw my closet. He made fun of me for organizing my clothes by length and color. I'm like that with everything. It's just so much easier to manage things. However, I'm not picky and don't need to have things in a certain way. I just want things to be organized. So yes, I consider myself organized." This example should only be done if you are confident with your communication abilities. If you appear awkward or if you sound like you are reading this type of answer, it could have a negative effect. Instead, you should make a generic answer if you are uncomfortable with this type of answer.In what ways are you organized and disorganized?
"In what ways are you organized and disorganized?" This is another variation to the previous question. This question is a little better because the question wants you to identify an area you are disorganized. Make sure to emphasize the organized portion of the answer. If you are truly an organized person, then it is really tough thinking about an area you are disorganized. So thinking ahead of time will allow you to make a good impression with a solid answer. Short Answers "I'm very organized with my time and work, but my desk is a little disorganized." "Since I work with many files, I like to keep my desk organized. I always have everything in a certain place so I can find things easier. The area I'm disorganized is probably my computer desktop. I usually have so many icons everywhere. I should organize it a little, but I've never needed to." "I organize my schedule the best. I'm used to many meetings so it's important for me to be organized with my schedule and time. The area I need to improve is probably my file cabinet. I started to sort things alphabetically, but when I'm busy, I start putting things in there. It started getting hard to find things, but this is something I'm going to fix." Long Answer "Oh... that's a good question. Well, I'm organized in almost everything I do. I'm very organized with my schedule and time. I like to work efficiently, and being organized with my time helps me. The area I feel I'm disorganized is probably my desk. I like to work fast and don't keep my desk area as tidy as some people I know. This however doesn't prevent me from doing my job well. You know some people can have files and paper all over their desk but some how know exactly where everything is located. I think I'm one of those people. However, if I know I'm having a client or a guest, then I would definitely make things more tidy." This answer brings a little humor to the question. It lightens the mood and makes a person seem real instead of appearing to be perfect. However, if the job you are applying for requires constant customer interaction, then this answer will not be good. This answer would be better for an office job where not many people will see your desk.Do you manage your time well?
"Do you manage your time well?" "In what ways do you manage your time well?" The first question is a little easier. The second question is more difficult because it requires an example. I'm going to give an example for the second question and you should be able to use it for the first question as well. Short Answer "I know I manage my time well because I'm never late to work, and I've never missed a deadline." "I'm good at managing my time. I stay busy both at home and at work and being able to manage my time is necessary for me to do everything that I want to do." "I manage my time well by planning out what I have to do for the whole week. It keeps me on track and evens helps me to be more efficient." Long Answer "Managing my time is one of my strong traits. I prioritize my tasks and this allows me to stay ahead of schedule. Each day I manage my time so I can achieve more than I set out to do. So managing my time in a goal oriented way is what I feel very comfortable doing."How do you handle change?
"How do you handle change?" "Are you good at dealing with change?" Dealing with change is common in the work place. A simple yes will not be sufficient to impress the interviewer. This is another type of question where everyone will have similar answers. Of course everyone is going to claim being excellent dealing with change. You got to communicate that you are really good at dealing with change. Here are some examples for you. Short Answers "I'm good at dealing with change because I'm a quick thinker. If new information makes us change our marketing strategy for example, I'll be quick to analyze the information and create a plan to make the changes." "I've experienced many changes previously. I handle the situation by quickly coming up to speed on the changes and applying myself to make them a success." "I'm good at dealing with change because I'm flexible with my work and abilities. I'm not afraid of learning new and difficult things. Whenever I'm faced with a change, I'll put in extra effort to make the change a smooth transition." "I handle changes smoothly. Whenever there's a change of any sort, I analyze the situation and I always try to find ways I can contribute to the change in a positive way." Long Answer "I believe dealing with change is a requirement in the workplace. The mission statement can change to introduce a new market segment, or the company might need to change direction. Whatever it is, as a member of this team, I would be expected to do my share by absorbing the new information, analyzing it thoroughly, sharing my ideas, and really being a valued team member. Dealing with change is a necessary trait. I think I'm also good at anticipating change by being attentive and observant." Overall, this is a good answer. The last statement is a bold statement of being able to anticipate change. If the interviewer is impressed, they might follow up by asking for an example of how you anticipate change. If you use an answer like I provided, make sure you have an example. If you don't have one, then the answer you gave will be seen as a lie and you probably failed.How do you make important decisions?
"How do you make important decisions?" There are many ways to answer this question, and if you have a reasonable method of making decisions, it will probably be sufficient. One answer I thought of included not being afraid of asking your manager. You can follow up by saying even the best needs mentoring, and you always want to improve. So basically, this could work as an answer, but depending on the job, you might have a better shot with an answer like my example. Short Answers "I make important decisions by examining all the details and then weighing the pro's and con's for each decision." "I gather all the information I can find and based on the information, I'll come to the best decision I can. If I know a coworker was in a similar situation, I wouldn't hesitate to find out the results to make sure my decision is the best one." "I believe all decisions should be made by having all the information. If you are missing an important detail, it's easy to make a bad decision. So I make important decisions by having all of the information." "Important decisions are made by knowledge through information and wisdom through experience. I'll gather all the information I can find and then apply my experience while analyzing the information. With this combination, I'm confident I'll make the correct important decisions." Long Answer "I think all decisions are important, and having as much information about the decision is one of the most important aspects. After examining all the facts, I would think about the outcome and consequences of each action and after weighing the pro's and con's, I would come to the best decision possible. However, I'm aware that some decisions are not as black and white. In this situation, I would rely on my experience, or even work with my team members to come up with the best decision." This is a decent answer, but I think you might be able to think of a better one. Feel free to be creative with your answers because those are the answers the interviewer will remember the most.Do you work well under pressure?
"Do you work well under pressure?" In most cases, the best answer to this question is answering yes. Working well under pressure is a good trait to have. However, I think if you answer that you work the same with pressure and without pressure, the interviewer will be more impressed. However, you will need to explain in words why this is better. Here are some of my answers. Short Answers "I work well under pressure because I use the pressure to help me work more efficiently." "I enjoy working under pressure because I believe it helps me grow. In my previous experience, I always worked well during deadlines, and I always learned how to work more efficiently afterwards." "I work well under pressure because I don't panic. I maintain self control and work as efficiently as possible. In all my experiences, I did well and I always enjoyed the experience." Long Answers "To tell you the truth, I think I work the same if there's pressure or if there's no pressure. I try and take out negative emotional factors and work hard regardless of down time or busy time. I always prioritize and organize my work, and from there, work efficiently. If the situation involved pressure due to a lack of time, then the only difference in my work would be the extra time I would need to put in to meet the deadline on time. Since I believe my normal work is great work, then I suppose I work well under pressure." I like this answer because it is different than the standard answer. If you are not comfortable with this answer, then you can use the next one. "I have a couple of friends who hate working under pressure. I don't know if it's odd, but I really enjoy working under pressure. I use the feelings of pressure as a tool to motivate me to work harder and more efficiently. In my last job, I remember we had a project to complete in 4 days where it usually took 10 days. There was a lot of panic by some team members, but I ensured everyone that if we concentrate on the task and work real hard, we can complete the project. It took a lot of overtime, and the last day we were in the office until two AM, but we managed to finish. It was hard work, but I really enjoyed that experience." You might not have experienced this example before, but what is preventing you from making something up? To tell you the truth, I never experienced it before either. There are some things you shouldn't lie about because they can find out about it such as your GPA or what school you attended, but a story such as the one I included above cannot be verified by the interviewer. The only thing you have to be careful about is being able to answer follow up questions.Are you better at anticipating or reacting to problems
"Which category do you fall under? A person who anticipates a problem well, or a person who reacts to a problem well?" This is a tough question because both options look pretty good. My recommendation would be to answer depending on the position you are applying for. For example, if you are applying for a type of analyst or upper management position, then anticipating a problem would be more useful. However, if you are applying to be a nurse for a hospital emergency room, then reacting to a problem well is stronger. Short Answers "I think it's good to be good at both. But in my experience, I realized I react to problems better. Whenever I'm faced with a new problem, I know what steps to take to deal with the problem." "I believe I'm strong in both, but I try to work more on anticipating problems. In this profession, it's very important to anticipate a problem and fix it before it becomes a real problem." "I'm very observant and aware of what's going on, so I'm stronger at anticipating problems." "I'm good at dealing with problems, so I'm a person who reacts to a problem well." Long Answers "I feel I react to problems well, but I'm much stronger at anticipating them. I'm a type of person that pays attention to detail, inconsistencies, and subtle signs. Basically, I want to find a potential problem and put measures in place to correct it before it happens. It's interesting to see how the people who deal with problems get rewarded for resolving the issue. What about the people who put the fire out before it even started? So anticipating problems before it happens is what I've always done and I believe it's important in any work environment." "Being a nurse requires many skills. One of the important traits is to be able to react to problems well. Reacting to a problem well requires the ability for quick thinking, ability to think of all the options available, and maintaining self control in hectic times. In my spare time, I even think about creative problems that might come up. Since a problem can arise at any time and in any form, I try to be as creative as I can and I walk through the situation as if I'm dealing with the problem. So this has helped me to become very good at reacting to problems." The answer gets stronger with examples, so if you have experienced something that you can explain, feel free to use include it in the answer. Also, if you are unsure about how to say it, remember that you can ask us.Are you a risk taker or do you like to stay away from risks?
"Are you a risk taker or do you like to stay away from risks?" This also depends on the position. But in most cases, I believe someone who likes to take risks is a better candidate. If you choose to answer saying you are a risk taker, you should include why and how you take risks. Short Answers "I consider myself to be in the middle, but if I were to choose from my past experience, I would think I would call myself a careful risk taker." "I'm reliable and believe in stability and guarantees. My work will be based on facts without assumptions or guesses, so I tend to stay away from risks." "I think it's important to take some risks. I keep the options open and if the reward justifies the risks, I would definitely try. So I'm more of a risk taker." "I take risks because through planning and working smart, it's possible to reduce some of the risk. So if there's a reasonable chance of success, I would take the opportunity." Long Answer "I see myself as a risk taker. But before taking the risk, I always evaluate all other options, weigh the pro's and con's of success and failure, and after careful consideration, I would definitely take a risk if the rewards were high enough. I view staying away from risks similar to staying away from a gold mine surrounded by dynamite. Of course if you don't know what triggers the dynamite, it would be unwise to take that risk. But if you study the situation and know the location of all dynamite and the way they are triggered, then the risk is minimized. Some people would not explore the options to reduce the risk, but I would definitely study each situation and take a risk that would improve my personal or company's situation." You don't have to use the dynamite example. You can think of any other example. But I used this to clearly explain what I feel about taking risks. Not only did I choose to be a risk taker, but I also explained how and when I would take risks.Why should I hire you?
"Why should I hire you?" I don't know if this is a common question, but I heard many people use this question. In all the interviews I've been through, I never received this question, nor did I ask this question in any interviews I gave. But, there are a lot of people asking this question, so preparing for it is a must. To answer this question, you need to know exactly what they are looking for. With this information, tie it in with your strong traits. This will verify that you are completely qualified for the job. Second and more importantly, you need to stand out more than the other people interviewing for this position. I will give two examples for the long answers, one for a person with a lot of experience, and the other for a recent college graduate. Short Answers "I'm a perfect fit for this position. I have the experience and the traits you are looking for. On top of that, I'm a great team player that gets a long with everyone." "I should be hired because I'm efficient, smart, and friendly. I'm great at solving problems and love challenges. Most importantly, I'm dependable and reliable." "There are two reasons I should be hired. First, my qualifications match your needs perfectly. Second, I'm excited and passionate about this industry and will always give 100%." "You should hire me because I'm confident and I'll do the best job. I have a proven track record of success starting from high school until now. I'm responsible and smart. This position requires someone that will work well without supervision. I know how to manage my time and organize my work well. So, I'm confident I'll be the best candidate for this position." Long Answers "This position is for a quality assurance manager, I'm confident I'm the best person for this job because of my past experience. At ABC Software Company, I was in charge of a team that was responsible for the quality of three different applications. I have intimate knowledge of quality assurance, product support, and even some creative processes that will benefit a quality assurance team. I've built a team from scratch and fully understand the product development cycle. Finally, one of my traits is in developing and mentoring junior employees. I believe in transferring knowledge to everyone in the company and investing a little more effort into the people who work for me. So I strongly believe that I'll be the best candidate due to the combination of my experience, my managerial skills, and my desire to provide growth in employees." "The reason I applied for this position is because the qualifications matched my strengths perfectly. I'm good at juggling multiple tasks, I'm very detail oriented, and I organize my time very efficiently. But the truth is that many people have these traits. But if I were in your position, I would hire myself because of the passion I have for this industry, and my optimistic personality. My education background and my strengths show that I can do this job. But I want to make more of an impact than just doing my job. I don't want to blend in with the company, I would rather want my addition to improve it." The first answer is using experience and skills to convince the interviewer to hire him or her. In addition to talking about past experiences, this example also emphasizes the strong ability to mentor people. The second example is more on the personal level and definitely more creative. Everyone one will claim to have all the good traits. So this candidate says it by saying, "... the truth is that many people have these traits." On top of these traits, this candidate is including passion and excitement. This is very important during interviews. Finally, the last sentence is a good line that the interviewer will remember. It is creative and bold.Tell me about Q's... / Tell me about a time you made a mistake.
'Tell me about...' type of questions are very popular. It is more effective because it is asking for an answer that comes from experience. If you don't have a particular experience in one of the questions below, make one up. You should prepare ahead of time because you don't want to make up a story during the interview. It will be too hard to sound believable. Finally, you should know that some questions will not be asked to certain job types. For example, if you are not in a management position, you probably won't be asked how you saved the company money. Or if you are not in sales, you won't be asked about making a great sale. These types of answers are usually long because it is explaining an experience. If you want the interviewer to understand the significance of your story, they will need to understand it. So all my examples will be a little longer than regular interview questions. Finally, a lot of these are my own experiences. I encourage you to think back to your experience and create one. I'm providing my answers so you can see the structure and learn from my answers. "Tell me about a time you made a mistake." The best answer for this question involves learning something from a mistake. If you are having difficulty thinking about a mistake you made that will be an effective answer, try to think of a lesson you learned that improved a good trait. Making a mistake is not good, but since you have to tell them something, you should tell them something that makes you look good. For an example, let's create a scenario where you learned how to be someone who anticipates problems. Short Answer "I was given a project to complete in a week. I understood the project, but I misinterpreted one section. After completing the project, I was told by my manager that it was done incorrectly. I really made a mistake by assuming incorrectly in one of the sections instead of asking for clarification. I learned not to assume through the mistake I made." Long Answer "I had a project I was working on, and while I was in the middle of typing up my documentation, my computer started acting weird. It froze for a while and so I rebooted. After 10 minutes, the computer showed a blue screen saying that there were problems and recommended that I reboot the computer again. After another reboot, everything appeared to be ok. I continued my work and finished for the day. I spent two days on this assignment and when I went to retrieve my data the next day to double check my work, my computer wouldn't start up. A technician came and found that my hard drive malfunctioned. I lost all the data and lost two days of work. I was disappointed and thought I would never trust a computer again, but there was a great lesson to be learned. I had a couple of warnings and I ignored them. From then on, I practiced being someone who can anticipate problems. I now think of potential problems ahead of time and pay attention to details along the way. If I applied this sooner, I would have saved the data on another computer and I wouldn't have lost a couple days of work. But I can't say I regret making the mistake because it made me someone who can anticipate problems better." This is a minor mistake, and you can say it is really the computer's fault. But this is a good example because I wasn't really at fault. The computer was. But this example is wording it so it looks like the person's fault and it explains how a great lesson was learned. In the end, this candidate became a better person through this mistake. Learning from a mistake is probably the key point here, and this example demonstrates that.Tell me about a time you made a good decision.
"Tell me about a time you made a good decision." "Tell me about a time you found a solution to a problem." This is a little easier than thinking about a mistake. You should make sure to include why it was a good decision and the result should be obviously meaningful. I also want to use this as an example of answering multiple questions. I would use this same answer for either of the two questions above. It was a good decision, and I fond a solution to a problem. Preparing for every interview question in the world will be too much work. Think of key experiences and apply them to multiple answers. In the case where it is the same interviewer, then you might be forced to think of a new answer. So it might be good to think of couple of answers. Short Answer "During my last project, we ran into a difficult problem. This was high priority so everyone was instructed to find a solution. I started looking for more information on the Internet, I even talked to a different manager on a different team. This helped tremendously and our problem was solved. I made a decision to use every resource I could find, and in the end, it solved the problem." Long Answer "In my last position at Microsoft, there was a time period where our group was going to slip reaching our milestone by one day. This was because the day before exiting the third milestone, we found a problem in the program. Since we created a new build with all bug fixes each morning, we had two choices. We could either fix the problem and verify the program the next day after we build again, or we could postpone the problem and fix it in the next milestone. Both options didn't sound very appealing. I suggested fixing the program now, and perform another build to verify the fix instead of waiting for tomorrow. Many times people are used to following a process, but in this case, I challenged the process of building in the morning and requested another build to verify the last bug fix. In the end, we were able to complete milestone 3 on time and fixed the important problem. This was significant because if we didn't exit milestone 3, then everyone waiting to start work on the next milestone would have to wait another day. In essence, this saved a days work for more than 30 people." For this example, I was careful not to use too many technical jargons that might not be understood. I also explained the situation carefully and explained why the decision was a good one. Remember that some of these answers will not work for you. In this case, if you never worked at Microsoft and never experienced this, just follow the steps of stating the problem, explaining the choices, why you made the decision, and finally why it was a good decision.Tell me about a time you made a poor decision.
"Tell me about a time you made a poor decision." This question is similar to the mistake question. So first, let's think about what lesson we want to learn. A common mistake is when people make assumptions. I'll give an example where a poor decision was made due to making a bad assumption. The answer will also include what was learned and how the poor decision was used as a tool to become a better worker. Short Answer "When I was doing an audit for a small company, there was a problem with one of the accounts. I tried to contact the company to ask questions, but they were not there. I made the decision to keep looking for the answer. Four hours later, they returned my call and I realized it was a simple typo. I wasted 4 hours of my day. In this case, I was too sensitive about detail. So I learned how not to be so detailed and picky." Long Answer "In my first month working at Tiffany's selling jewelry, I made a poor decision by making an assumption. A person buying an engagement diamond wanted to see some rings. It's not polite to immediately ask for a price range, so I showed the person a variety of rings. He pointed to a ring that was about twelve thousand dollars. The diamond ring he pointed to was one of the more expensive ones I showed him. Eager to sell him the ring, I explained the quality of the ring, explained our satisfaction guarantee policy to him, and made sure he was comfortable with making a purchase at Tiffany's. He bought the ring, and I thought I made a great sell. However, it turns out that on my day off, he came in and exchanged the ring for one that was twenty five thousand dollars. It was one of the rings that I didn't show him. So basically, I made a bad decision on selling him what he first pointed out instead of showing him more options. I assumed that the initial ring he selected was the price range he was looking for. I never made that mistake again and I learned that I shouldn't assume so much." This example is geared towards sales, but like I said earlier, make sure to clearly explain the situation, identify the decisions, explain why it was a bad decision, and most importantly what you learned by making a poor decision.Tell me about a time you fired someone.
"Tell me about a time you fired someone." Firing someone is a difficult task. Usually you will not be asked this question unless it is for a management position. You should emphasize a couple of key things when you answer this question. First, you should be very professional about firing someone. Second, you should mention the procedures you took so the action of firing is justified. I'll give an example for someone who has never fired someone and an example for having fired someone. Short Answers "In my last position, I had four people reporting to me. One of my direct reports failed to show up on time, complete assignments, and really didn't care about the work. I tried to encourage the employee, assign different types of work to him, and even sat down and showed him how to do things. After 2 months of trying, I had to let him go." "Our company was down sizing and I had to let two people go. It's easier when a person does a terrible job, but if everyone is doing there job, it's more difficult. I had to select the bottom two performers and explained why they were being let go." Long Answers "During my second year as a manager, I had to fire one of my directs. I can't say it was a difficult task because not only did he not do his job well, he didn't want to try. Initially, we put him on probation monitoring his work, we tried to give him different types of work that he might do better at, and we even assigned a mentor to him. However, even through all this, he was a weak performer. I consulted with other management members and we all agreed it was best for the company to let him go. I got together with an HR representative and told him that he no longer has a job here. He wasn't surprised at all. He just picked up his things and left." "I've never had to fire somebody yet. I believe that a manager should mentor and lead all team members to be a solid performer. But I know that there are some people who can't or won't perform despite management's best effort. So in that case, I would have to let someone go in a professional manner following the procedures set by the company." Both of these are good answers. They mention that a manager should take actions to make the worker better, but sometimes turning something bad to something good is impossible, so the only action is to fire someone. The person with experience outlines the steps taken. For example, the probation, assigning different work, providing a mentor, etc. Then in the end he was fired. The second example shows despite experience, that he or she would fire someone in a professional manner following procedure.Tell me about a time you hired someone.
"Tell me about a time you hired someone." If you hired somebody before, you know you could have hired someone great, or someone bad. If you have both experiences, you can ask if they want to hear a bad hire experience or a good hire experience. Sometimes the question will be, tell me about the time you made a bad hire. In that case, then you don't have to ask. I'll give an example of a good hire and a bad hire. Short Answers "I found a resume on the Internet that was a perfect match for one of our open positions. I contacted the person and we talked for about 10 minutes. During that call, I explained why our company was a great place to work and the opportunities we offered. After a couple more calls, he agreed to come in for an interview and we made an offer. He became a great employee." "I received a resume but it didn't have all our requirements. I initially thought she wasn't a fit, but after looking over the education background and the previous work experience, I thought this person would have more potential than other candidates. After interviewing her, we extended an offer. She was a quick learner and performed at an exceptional level. Sometimes it's important to see potential and in this instance, it was a great hire." Long Answers "In the last company I worked for, we had a recruiting team. They go through all resumes and submit the ones that would be a good fit for a particular team. I received a resume and after looking it over, I was quite impressed. I called him for a phone interview and after that we scheduled a full interview. He aced almost every question given to him by 5 different interviewers. We made a reasonable and fair offer. He mentioned that he was considering another company. I called him to touch bases with him and reiterated the opportunities, the great environment here, and ultimately that we all looked forward to having him join our team. I tried to make the phone call more personal and warm to show him that our group was a place to be comfortable. He joined our team and became one of our strongest performers. It took a little extra work, but it's important to take extra steps when you see someone who is going to be great." "I had one bad experience when hiring someone. I remember I was following procedures and verifying everything I could from past experience, checking communication skills, personality, work ethic, technical skills, and some tough logic problems. We even had 4 different people interviewing this candidate. Everything looked great. But when the person started, he had a hard time understanding new concepts. I originally thought it was because he was new and had to ramp up on many things, but as months past by, this employee was still unable to work alone. He always had to ask how to do even simple tasks. I remember going through his resume and looking over his background and even thinking about where we missed this flaw in the interview. Using this same interviewing procedure, we hired many great people. But this one turned out a little sour." The first question is straight forward. This person took it one step farther by making a phone call and encouraging the candidate to join his team. But the second answer is an example of doing everything right, but seeing bad results. You can use something like this, but if you do, you must think of follow up questions such as, 'what did you do to this employee? What happened in the long run? Did you end up firing this person' But I recommend you think of a situation that you personally experienced. Then you can answer all follow up questions easily. But if you never hired anyone before, then simply say that. It shouldn't hurt unless it is for a recruiting position.Tell me about a time you failed to complete an assignment on time.
"Tell me about a time you failed to complete an assignment on time." If you are a good worker, then you probably haven't failed to complete an assignment on time. But if you have a lot of experience, you might have some situations where external factors caused you to miss a deadline. This is what my example will be about. But if you have an example where you failed to complete an assignment, make sure you give clear reasons why you failed and what you learned from it. Also, if you can't think of any, then use an example from your university days stating. But if you do, make sure you tell them that so far in your job experience, you completed all assignments on time or ahead of schedule. Short Answer "One time, I had a project that was due on Tuesday. On Friday I analyzed our progress and I was ahead of schedule. I didn't have to work over the weekend to complete the assignment. On Monday, my manager was sick so I had to attend several meetings that took all day. Because of that, I didn't complete my assignment until Wednesday. Now, I try to finish my assignments a day or half a day early because something unexpected could come up." Long Answer "With proper planning and good execution, I think it's hard to fail at meeting a deadline. But I remember one time in the middle of the project, our clients wanted to change one aspect of the assignment that we already completed. I analyzed the change request and told them that we wouldn't be able to make the date. I estimated that it will take three additional days. They insisted that we finish on the agreed upon time schedule. I told them we'd try but could not promise anything. Even with hard work and overtime, we missed the due date. We did however, finish one day late. In this situation where I didn't feel we could reach the deadline, I specifically told them that we couldn't, I continually sent updates on the progress to keep the clients informed. Since we missed the deadline, they were not too happy, but overall they were satisfied because I effectively communicated the progress regularly." I like this answer because they want a situation that should make you look bad. Instead, you gave them a scenario where you failed to complete an assignment, but really it wasn't your fault. In the end, this answer makes you look good because you did everything right from communicating properly, giving them a new time frame, and reaching the goal two days ahead of schedule despite missing the original date by one. But just in case they ask what you could have done better, you can say something like, "I feel I should have been more firm with the three additional days I requested. I like to meet difficult deadlines, but I knew the additional work was too large to finish on time."Tell me about a time you found a solution to save the company money.
"Tell me about a time you found a solution to save the company money." This question is also for a management level position. If you are not in management, then you probably won't face this question. But just in case, here are a couple of answers. If you are not in a position to save the company money, then you could think of something small. Short Answer "Hmmm... I wasn't really in any position to save the company money, but I have one small example. When we were a smaller company, we didn't get a significant corporate discount on our hardware. After we grew in size, we qualified for the larger discount, but nobody realized that we now met the quota. I pointed this out and we started saving 5% more on our hardware." Long Answer "We were outsourcing a portion of our work to a 3rd party company. We had two phases for this project. After the first phase, I was given the task to complete the work because the original worker responsible for this project left our group. I quickly got up to speed on the details of the work. I analyzed the information and realized that one portion of the work given to them could've been done by our group because we already had the infrastructure in place. So I only spent half a day to set this up and in turn, we were charged 35% less for the second phase from the first one." This is a simple story of an experience. It doesn't include every detail on the type of work that was outsourced, or what I specifically did during the half days of work. If they choose to ask this, then I will be prepared to answer it, but this answer gives enough details to allow the interviewer to understand how you contributed in saving the company money. Also, depending on the field of work, answers will vary. If your job specifically oversees the finance, then it is probably important to think of a much better answer specifically for that position. Think of some scenarios, write them down, and feel free to ask us if the grammar is correct.Tell me about a time you aimed too high.
"Tell me about a time you aimed too high." This is another question where you can turn this answer into a good experience. I am going to be using the answer as the one where you failed to complete an assignment on time. This is good practice to use a similar answer by changing only a few sentences to answer another tough interview question. But first, I'll give an example of a different short answer. Short Answer "We had a new project that I was interested in. Even though I was busy, I volunteered to take on the assignment. I had to work so much more. Although I managed to complete the assignment, it really burned me out. I feel I aimed too high and I would have benefited by doing a better job on my current assignments instead of wanting more challenges." Long Answer "I believe aiming high is a good practice. Aiming high keeps me focused and forces me to grow by trying to reach high goals I have set for myself. But I know there are times where aiming too high is not good. For example, one time in the middle of the project, our clients wanted to change one aspect of the assignment that we already completed. I analyzed the change request and told them that we will not be able to make the date. I estimated that it will take three additional days. They insisted that we finish on the agreed upon time schedule. I told them we would try but we could not promise anything. Even with hard work and overtime, we missed the due date. We did however, finish one day later. I challenged myself to complete on time, but with the large change request, it was too high of a goal to reach. In this case, I really aimed too high. I should have been more firm telling them that we will need a few more days." This is a similar experience we already used, but you changed the beginning and the end to tailor it to this question. Remember that you can use one answer for multiple questions. This answer should make you look good instead of looking like you made a terrible mistake.Tell me about a time you aimed too low.
"Tell me about a time you aimed too low." I have never been in sales, but the example answer I want to give is an example of answering the question while displaying good traits. Remember to be clear when explaining your experience and don't assume that they will understand everything. You should explain it step by step. Short Answer "There was a new project that I was interested in. Because I had other responsibilities, I didn't volunteer. I wasn't too busy, but I was worried I wouldn't complete the assignment on time. I realized I missed a wonderful opportunity because I aimed too low." Long Answer "When I was selling cell phones for Verizon Wireless, I had a great month where I reached the quota in just two weeks. My goal is to always break quota by more than 10 percent, and this month, I new it was going to be easy. I scheduled to take a week off to relax, and at the end of the month I surpassed the quota by 31%. I had an opportunity to break the location's record, but I didn't jump on the opportunity. I was basically thinking that having achieved my original goal of 10% was sufficient. But I think when opportunities arise, I should be flexible and willing to change my goal. I aimed too low and I missed a rare opportunity." This is not a bad mistake. You can say you were burned out, or needed to take some time off, or wanted to rejuvenate yourself. This answer doesn't show a failure, but shows a great success. In this example, aiming too low resulted in great numbers and great results at the end of the month, so there is no harm done. In the end you are indicating that you could have done even better, that you are willing to re-evaluate your goals, and that you are now able to see and jump on opportunities.Tell me about a time you made a great sale.
"Tell me about a time you made a great sale." This is similar to the question, 'what does it mean to make a great sale' You can change the words a little and use the answer for both questions. The key to this answer is explaining what it means to make a great sale, and then giving a good example of a great sale that you made. Short Answer "I had a customer come in that was a little rude. He had many questions and cut me off very frequently. I stayed patient and explained everything to his satisfaction. He ended up representing a medium sized business that required a large order. I feel this was a great sale because I treated this customer with respect and patience." Long Answer "Making a great sale can be measured by how much the company made, but I think making a great sale is how satisfied the customer is. A satisfied customer will return and continue to be a valued customer, so it's important to make sure that the customer is satisfied. One day, a customer was debating on two different types of watches. One was $1200 and the other was $400. This was a huge difference. I believe I could have sold him the $1200 watch, but instead, I laid out all the pro's and con's for him, and asked him questions to find out the purpose of the watch, if it was for casual wear or formal wear, and eventually helped him realize exactly what he was looking for. He ended up buying the $400 watch. Some people might think that was not a great sale, but I felt as a salesman and a person representing the company that I did a great job in satisfying this customer. In the next couple of years while I was working there, he came and bought many more items and had other friends come in to buy more products. I can confidently say that the $800 in missed sale resulted in thousands more for the company." This example has several key points. First, this answer is telling the interviewer what you believe is a great sale. Second, it is giving a good example. Finally, it is showing a good sign of an employee by saying, 'a person representing the company' All salesman or someone who works with customers is representing their company in some way. Saying this casually in an example is definitely powerful.Tell me about a time you went over budget.
"Tell me about a time you went over budget." If you go over budget, it is a bad sign. It can mean you are not organized, do not plan well, or are not good with finance. So when you think of an answer, make sure you justify it with a good reason. Here is an example of what I am talking about. Short Answer "During our marketing campaign, we realized how many customers we were gaining through the radio advertisements. Although we didn't have budget for more radio advertisement, I still made the decision to place our ad on three more stations. We increased sales by 25% for that month, but I ended up going over budget by 5%." Long Answer "There was a project that had a strict 4 month deadline. I didn't have enough employees to complete the task, so I had to hire temporary workers. I was given a budget to either hire three extra heads for four months or to hire four extra heads for three months. Because of the importance of the project and the strict deadline, I chose to hire 4 temporary workers for 3 months to give us a time cushion at the end. We had a couple of unexpected obstacles and it turned out that we needed the temporary workers for another two weeks. We completed the project on time and everything turned out well, but in this instance, I went over budget by 5%. Due to the importance of this project, I didn't want to risk slipping the date. Even though everyone was congratulating me on this accomplishment, I feel I could have done better if I calculated a cushion for unexpected obstacles." This answer is admitting to going over budget, but the reason was good enough. The answer indicates that by saying how everyone was happy and making sure to say how important the project was. In the end you say you learned something. But you can change this answer a little. If you want to be more clear on the importance of the project, you can say a monetary value, like it was a two million dollar deal, and going over budget by $10,000 was acceptable by upper management.What extracurricular activities were you involved in?
"What extracurricular activities were you involved in?" If you don't have any work experience, then a company wants to know what extra activities you did in school to see if you are active. It is best to list a couple of things describing what the group is and what role you had in the group. If you were not a part of any group, it might be ok to make something up. It is hard to verify this so they will not find out. But it could back fire, if the interviewer happened to be in the same group at the same university. Short Answers "I was involved in our school newspaper. I was one of the writers for three years." "I was very active in our university politics. In my senior year, I was the vice president of the University." "Besides studying, I played baseball for our school. I really like to study and to stay physically active." "I was involved with a group that helped awareness of environmental problems such as pollution. I was on a team that educated people about driving alternatives such as buses and carpooling." Long Answer "I was very active in the university magazine committee. I was a member of that group for four years. I helped write articles about events occurring in school. In my senior year, I was the editor and did less writing and more managing in regards to the magazine structure, what contents to add, and distributing work among the junior members of the group. I really enjoyed my experience there and learned about working closely together as a group to deliver a quality magazine." If you don't have work experience, then you will need to say something to show them that you learned some valuable lessons such as team work. I suggest you to reflect on what you did during school and create a list of what you learned.Why did you choose your major?
"Why did you choose your major?" "Why did you choose to major in History?" If you are a computer science major interviewing for a computer position, then they will not ask you this question. But if you are an English Literature major and interview for a computer position, then they might want to know why you chose to major in English Literature. To create an answer for English Literature, you can say things learning to be a better communicator, having better reading comprehension, and say how skills learned from English Literature can be applied towards many fields. But something like History is different. Unless you are going to be a Historian, it's hard to justify how your major is going to help you in your job. Short Answers "I majored in History because I enjoyed learning about the past. I always try to apply my history knowledge in many things I do. This knowledge allowed me to study many different experiences." "I majored in English because it was a major that would make me more skilled in reading, writing, and communicating. I believe English is a tool that is used everywhere, so I thought it was the best major for me." "I majored in Psychology because I was interested in seeing how the mind works. I also found it useful because it helped me to work with people better by understanding differences in everyone." "I majored in Biology because I initially wanted to go to med school. Although I decided not to go to med school, I still wanted to complete my bachelor's degree." Long Answer "I majored in History because I always had a strong interest in historical facts. I grew up very close to history and chose this major because I really enjoyed the subject. I planned on becoming a high school history teacher or even a professor, but then I started to get into computers. It's totally different from history but it really fascinated me. Now, instead of looking in the past, I'm always looking into the future through all the technological changes." It doesn't connect the major to the job but at least it gives an explanation. It's not bad to say you majored in something because you liked the subject. The only bad answer is to say you didn't know what else to do and you couldn't get into a better department.If you redo college again, what would you major in?
"If you redo college again, what would you major in?" I already explained this a little in another question about restarting your career. You can use the same answer here if you want, but I will give one more example of not changing your major in the long answer section. Short Answers "I didn't realize I was so interested in computers until I graduated college. So if I could select a different major, I would major in Computer Science." "I liked the fact I completed my degree in English. But if I could redo college again, I would like to double major in English and Business." "I would liked to have majored in Engineering. I have a strong interest in hardware so I believe Engineering would have helped." "I would choose to major in Marketing in the Business School. I really enjoy this type of work and having more background would have helped me to excel more." Long Answer "If I were to redo college again, I don't think I would change my major. I liked the fact that I majored in Business and I believe it will help me with my career. I'm pretty good with the computer, but I would like to have taken more computer classes. Because technology is growing so quickly, I think I would have benefited from having a deeper understanding in computers." This answer demonstrates a good choice in the beginning. I included the portion about computers because they want to see something you would have done differently. And making the comment about computers shows the interviewer your understanding about technology to some degree. But don't say this answer without first stating that you are pretty good with the computer.What course did you like the most?
"What course did you like the most?" "What was your favorite subject?" When you answer this question, use a subject that helped you become a better person or a better worker. Although this question is asking for you opinion and there is no wrong answer, you should take advantage of this question by showing your strengths. Short Answers "I really enjoyed an English writing class I took. This class taught me to write more clearly and concisely." "My favorite subject was Physics. It really helped my logic abilities and I use this knowledge to solve problems in a variety of ways." "There was a speech class I took that I really enjoyed. It helped me to speak in groups better and I learned to speak professionally in front of an audience." "My favorite subject was applied science. I really enjoyed learning different ways of applying science into ordinary things." Long Answer "I really enjoyed majoring in electrical engineering and it really helped me to prepare for my career, but the class I enjoyed the most is probably a couple of psychology classes I took. Although it didn't help me in any technical way, I learned a little bit about human behavior and learned how the brain works. I started to understand the reasons for my strengths and weakness instead of just knowing them. Also, it helped me to understand people who are different than me." This is a simple answer but a very good one. An engineer is mostly technical and they might lack skills in human interaction. So an engineer saying their favorite course was psychology demonstrates that this person has both technical skills and the ability to work with others better. It lists several good examples such as understanding both strengths and weakness along with understanding different people.What course did you like the least?
"What course did you like the least?" "What course did you struggle in the most?" This is an easier answer because you don't have to show off your strength here. All you have to do is make sure you don't pick a subject that relates to your job. It is also safer to pick something that most people do not enjoy. Finally, picking something that you are not good at is acceptable if it is not a skill required on the job. My long example will be about a drama class. Short Answers "I didn't enjoy history that much. It wasn't that difficult, but it didn't allow me to think creatively. Most of the classes I took were about memorizing dates and facts. So history is my least favorite subject." "I struggled in a music class the most. I really enjoy listening to music so I tried to learn a little about it. But it was a disaster. My tone was off and I couldn't tell if something was flat or not." "My least favorite class was probably poetry. During that course I struggled writing a real poem. I realized I am not a poet." "I disliked my geography class. It wasn't difficult, but I simply didn't find it very interesting." Long Answer "For me, I had a tough time in my drama class. I didn't realize that I was a terrible actor. I didn't think it would be that hard, but week after week, my instructor would point out problem after problem. He gave me a B, but I think it was because of my effort, not because of my abilities. I say this because when I saw myself on video, oh my gosh, it was terrible." You are putting yourself down a lot here, but in this example it is actually good. Interviewers are worried that a person who can act well will be able to lie about many things during the interview. A person without acting skills will not be able to hide automatic body gestures that the interviewer is looking at. Also, this answer is good because it shows that this person never gives up and puts in a lot of effort.How will your performance in your worst class affect your performance on this job?
"How will your performance in your worst class affect your performance on this job?" This question is another opportunity to show many good traits. You can display traits such as endurance, effort, and willingness to work on things you don't like. This is very important because during your career, you will have to do many boring things. This long answer will display that you are a person that will do good at any task. Short Answers "No matter if I liked the class or not, I always tried my hardest. As a result, the lowest grade I ever received was a B. So I'm confident that I'll be good at any task." "I had one class where I really struggled. I asked more questions and studied more. As a result, I did very well. So even if I'm struggling, I feel I can find ways to do a good job by putting in more effort." "My performance in my worst class will positively impact my performance on this job. I struggled with a logic class, but I studied harder, researched more information, and I never gave up." Long Answers "I remember I did terrible in my astrology class. I didn't have much interest in the subject and I really didn't know that I would struggle in it. I thought about just doing enough to make it through, but I decided that I was going to put some effort into it. I continually asked questions and studied more for this class than I did in others. I got a B for all my effort, but at least I didn't give up and I kept pushing forward. So now I know that whether I like a project or not, I'll do the best I can because it's my responsibility." This answer shows maturity and the interviewer should like it.How would your best friend describe you?
"How would your best friend describe you?" This answer can be short. Use key words that show how you are a good fit for this position. If it if a salesperson, mention things like, an easy person to talk, good personality, and dependable as the traits. But if it is for a manager position, then you can use different words like organized, helpful, considerate, and smart. So it all depends on the position. Most people will be honest and say what the best friend will actually say, but it is more effective to choose the words so it relates to the job. Here are some examples. "Oh, let's see... I think my best friend would describe me as honest, detailed, and very organized." "I think my best friend would say that I'm very responsible. Whenever our group of friends had to coordinate an activity, they always relied on me." "My best friend would probably say that I'm warm, friendly, and understanding." It doesn't have to be long, but don't blurt out the answer without thinking. Then it makes it appear as you are thinking about it instead of saying an answer you already prepared.How would your professor describe you?
"How would your professor describe you?" Same thing here, but you can't choose any words. You have to choose one that relates to school work. Select words that are general and that applies to most types of jobs. "I think my professor would describe me as a great team member and consistent in my school work." This is good because school has group projects. It shows team work experience and it also mentions consistency. "My professor told me one time that I was like a fireball. I always had a good attitude that positively affected other students in group activities." "My professor always told me that I was very creative. He liked my papers because it showed that I really thought about the problem and tackled it in a different way."How would your mother describe you?
"How would your mother describe you?" You can use more personal words here because your mother knows you in a different way. "I think my mother would say I'm very friendly because I had a lot of friends and that I'm very focused because I always finish what I start." This answer is showing two different types of characteristics. One is more personal and one is a good work trait. It also shows reasons by saying because... Overall, these types of questions are not that significant and a short answer that is good should be fine. "Since I was the oldest out of three, I think my mother would describe me as responsible and someone who is looked to for answers." "My mother told me I was always smart. When I was younger, she was surprised to see A's in my report card. After awhile, she would be surprised when I didn't receive an A."Why are you applying for a job that you didn't major in?
"Why are you applying for a job that you didn't major in?" "Why didn't you pursue a career in your major?" In the United States the statistics for a person changing career paths is very high. It's something like an average person will change careers five times. Changing jobs is one thing, but completely changing careers is a big move. So this question is not that significant. If everyone worked in the industry as their major, then this question is more important, but because everyone changes jobs frequently, it's no big deal. You just have to use this opportunity to show them how much you like the current industry you are in. Short Answers "I majored in English because I liked to write. Because I didn't know exactly what I wanted to do, I majored in something I was very interested in. After working for a year on the marketing team, I realized that this is what I want to be doing." "I majored in History, but during my senior year, I had an opportunity to work at an accounting firm. After seeing first hand at the work they were doing, I really wanted to become an accountant." "I was planning on going to Dental School so I majored in Biology. After working with computers, I realized how interesting and challenging it was. So I studied computers on the side because I wanted a career working with computers." Long Answer "I enjoyed majoring in psychology, but I didn't want to become a psychologist. I just found the subject to be very interesting. It also helped me to understand a wide variety of things. For my career, I wanted to be doing something I was good at and what I enjoyed doing. I had an opportunity to work at a smaller logistics company as an administrative assistant. During that time period they were short handed and I actually got to do some planning and organizing for one of the smaller clients. I didn't lead anything, but I realized how much I enjoyed the work. Ever since then, I've been studying up on planning, logistics, and business." This example does three things. It explains why this person is not going into a field related to their major, it is explaining why this person is going into logistics, and finally it is showing passion for the industry and a desire to learn. Since you are probably competing against people who majored in logistics, you need to make an impression with your answer. So you should definitely show enthusiasm here.During college, how did you spend your summer vacations?
"During college, how did you spend your summer vacations?" The best answer is to have spent your summer productively such as working as an intern. Even if you did only one intern, the interviewer will like that. The worst answer is to say you didn't do anything. Or say you worked in the supermarket to get some money so you can party at night. So think of something productive, and if you don't have an intern experience, you can say that you spent your summer learning something new. "My last two summers of college, I did an intern for a consulting firm. I gained experience working on office solutions for large companies." "I have a strong interest in traveling, so I used my summer to travel. I went to Europe, Australia, Brazil, and China." "Every summer, I took extra English classes. I also took some drawing classes because it's one of my hobbies. So I spent my summers learning more things." "My first two summers, I had to work to save money for tuition. But after saving enough money, I had a free summer. I actually ended up taking some computer classes to prepare myself for the business world. These days it's a requirement to know computers, so I prepared for that." Although I said don't mention useless work, it is ok if it is for tuition. It shows financial responsibility. Finally, taking some computer classes for the summer is a great way to prepare for work life and it was a summer well spent. Make sure you have an answer that shows productivity.What did you learn from your internship?
"What did you learn from your internship?" If you worked as an intern, your resume will say it. Your resume should also include a list of what you learned during your internship. You can answer this question repeating what was on the resume, but using full sentence and with more enthusiasm. "In my final summer vacation, I had the opportunity to work as an intern for a public accounting firm. It was only for 3 months, but I learned a lot about performing quarterly tax services for small and medium size companies. I also learned to deal with time pressure and learned how to prioritize work to be more efficient. It was a great experience that I know will help me when I start my career."Did you do any internships?
"Did you do any internships?" You should be asked this question if your resume doesn't have any internship experience, or if they didn't look at your resume. If you do have internship experience, then you can answer, that you do and say the same answer as the one provided with the question, what did you learn from your internship. But if you don't, you can simply answer that you didn't do any internship but give a good excuse. "Yes. I did two internships. The first internship was for Johnson and Johnson. I worked in the distribution team, and my second internship was for Starbucks. At Starbucks, I had the opportunity to work on overseas venture." "I did one internship for IBM. I was on the development team creating applications for business solutions." "I love to travel and I realized that when I start my career, I won't be able to travel for long durations. So I used my summers to travel a lot. I spent one summer in Europe for 2 months. I spent another summer traveling between China and some South East Asian countries, and finally, I took a road trip through the United States." Traveling is not a bad answer. It is not as good as doing an internship, but definitely better than nothing. It is definitely not a wasted summer. Also, if the internship was useless and generic, then the interviewer will not remember this answer as a good answer. So it didn't do any good. In this case, traveling could be better because the example I gave is significant and interesting. Something different always stands out more.If you could learn something such as a new skill, what would it be?
"If you could learn something such as a new skill, what would it be?" "What's the next thing you want to learn?" This is another type of question that has no wrong or right answer. That means you need to make your answer a little more creative so it stands out. Short Answers "I would love to learn more about auditing. As a tax accountant, I primarily work on tax. But I like all aspects of accounting and I think auditing would be very interesting." "The next thing I want to learn is how to make web pages. I think this skill can be used anywhere. If I want a personal web site, I would make it myself. And if my group at work needed an internal web site to organize activities, I would be able to make one." "I want to learn the different ways to market globally. In my marketing team, I learned everything about marketing on a local level, but I would really love to learn about marketing to different countries." Long Answer "I use the computer on a daily basis and know how to use everything I need to be good at my job. But sometimes something goes wrong with the computer for no reason at all. Because I'm not a computer engineer, I have no idea what's going on. Basically, I have to wait for a technician to fix it. During these times, I want to kick the computer out of frustration. Mostly, it ends up being a problem I could have fixed if I new the details of how a computer works. So even though it's not in my job description, I want to know how to fix computers at a basic level." I heard from many people who don't know computers that well that they get frustrated with them. So wanting to kick the computer is understandable and it is a little humorous. Wanting to learn a little more about the computer is always good and it would definitely help out with future work by not having to wait for a technician.If you could start your career over again, what would you do differently?
"If you could start your career over again, what would you do differently?" This depends on several factors. If your university major is different than your career choice, then you could answer that you would choose a different major to prepare you for your choice in career. Or if you started at a small company and didn't have many opportunities, you can say that you would have started at a larger company. This is not a significant question so a regular answer should suffice. Short Answers "I started my career at a small company. I feel I would have benefited more if I started at a larger company. A large company usually provides training that I didn't receive, so I would like to have started my career in a larger company." "I didn't know how much I liked working with computers until I finished college. If I had known earlier, I would have liked to have worked with computers earlier in my career." Long Answer "Well, I majored in chemistry and now I'm working in the marketing department for a telecommunications company. I had a lot to learn in the beginning, but I quickly learned what I needed to know to be an effective member of the marketing team. However, I always felt that if I majored in business or marketing, I would have started off with a better foundation. I'm great at what I do, but if I could start over again, I would probably choose to have majored in business administration." This is an acceptable answer because the answer doesn't display any problems in the work history. Many people change careers or go into a field that is unrelated to their major. This is common, so answering this question using this answer is common. If you don't want to use this common answer, then thinking about a scenario early in your work career that you would have done differently might be more effective.During your performance reviews, what criticism do you hear the most?
"During your performance reviews, what criticism do you hear the most?" This question is primarily for people with work experience. If you are fresh out of college, then you will not be asked this question. The answer to this question should not disclose any real faults. Instead, try to think of something that doesn't sound too bad. Here is what I hear at my reviews and this is how I would answer this question. Short Answers "I heard that I need to be proactive. I always perform at an exceptional level, but I didn't volunteer for additional work. I wasn't accustomed to it so I'm glad that I received this criticism. I now practice keeping an eye out for additional projects I can take on." "During my review, my manager told me to voice my opinions more frequently. He always liked my suggestions when I told him, but in group meetings, I usually let my manager speak. Now, I feel more confident that I can suggest my ideas in groups." "My manager told me that I should send more updates. He told me I did my projects well, and that I was never late, but he would like more updates so he can report to his manager." Long Answer "I actually like to receive criticism because it gives me information on how to improve. But the most common criticism I hear is hard to correct because I disagree with the comment. I'm told that I should be more visible. I'm told that I do great work and I do a lot of extra work, but in a large organization, it's important to visibly stand out. I'm not a person who likes to be secluded in the office. I like to go out and collaborate, I like to work with people, and I email my co-workers with valuable information that will help with their job, so I can't say I agree, but I always try to be more visible." This criticism is actually a common comment used by managers if they can't give you a good review score but have nothing bad to say about you. In large organizations, you are measured against your peers. That means if you do well, you might get a bad review score because everyone did better. Likewise, if you are just mediocre and everyone else is terrible, you will get a good review score. Because of this system, I'm regularly told to be more visible. So when I answer this question, I make sure to back up my disagreement with examples of being visible.Tell me about your last three positions?
"Tell me about your last three positions?" This type of question is generally asked by lazy interviewers who want to hear you talk for a while. A better question would be to separate the three positions and ask them one by one. But some people will ask this question, so you should definitely prepare for it. You can use this as your advantage. If you don't have many good things to say about your second position, you can briefly comment on it and spend more time talking about the other two positions. I'll give an example in the long answer, but here are some short answers first. Short Answers "I've only had one position. In my last position, I worked as a marketing analyst for South American markets. I worked closely with partners in Chile and Argentina." "I've only held two different positions. In my first job, I was a lab manager for ABC Software company. I monitored 50 computers and performed diagnostics regularly. In my last position, I was a network engineer fixing network problems and trouble shooting bottlenecks." "I worked as a translator for the King County court house. Afterwards, I worked as a translator for hospitals. My last position was translating help documents for a software company." Long Answer "The first position I held was working at Radio Shack as a salesman. I learned a great deal about retail stores, about sales and working with customers, and became more independent. I thought I learned a great deal and enjoyed my work, but I wanted to experience different types of work. So I started working for Verizon. I had an office job and did a variety of different tasks such as planning, data entry, and organizing projects. I learned a little about the office setting, but I wanted to get back into sales. So I was given an opportunity to sell cell phones for Verizon at a retail store. I used my past sales experience and worked hard becoming one of the top sales person three years in a row. I've been there ever since." I haven't worked at three different positions, so I just made one up. The question is pretty general, so the answer is pretty general. It does emphasize sales skill and coming back to the type of work that this person enjoys. But you should think of something that is related to the position you are interviewing for. Only thing you should be concerned about it clearly explaining your past three positions, what you learned there, and if you did something notable, include that as well.Tell me about your last position?
"Tell me about your last position? What did you do and how did you do it? Include the people you worked for and the people you worked with." This question is a little better than asking about the last three positions. It is more direct and focuses on getting more information about the last position. You might not get this question with so much detail. It might just be, "Tell me about your last position." But you can use the other questions as a guide when answering this question. You should mention what you did, how you did it, how you work in a team, what you learned, how well you did your job, etc. Short Answers "I was a staff auditor for a small accounting firm. I performed audits for small to medium size businesses. This involved meeting the clients and retrieving data required to complete the audit. I worked closely with my supervisor that presented my findings of the audit to the clients." "I worked for a large insurance company as an agent. I made sales to new customers and provided customer service to existing customers. I worked with three other people in my group and we helped each other by sharing ideas and experiences." "I was a program manager for a manufacturing company. I was in charge of cost analysis concerning different quantities of manufacturing. I also worked on planning the procedure for the next deliverables." Long Answer "In my last position, I was a senior auditor. My duties included auditing governmental businesses and Native American tribes. For all the audits I was conducting, I was the in charge auditor overseeing the audits of other team members and doing a portion of the audit myself. I have experience in conducting an audit from beginning to end without supervision and I worked with controllers and senior accountants on a regular basis. Along with working with experienced and knowledgeable client's, I also had to work with junior level accountants that didn't know all the details of auditing. I was clear and concise in asking for what I needed. In the last year I was working as the senior auditor, I planned and organized each visit to our client's site. I regularly trained and managed new members of our team and I was the go to person for technical auditing questions." The question wanted detail so the answer has to be a little long detailing some of the highlights of the last job. I included the type of people I worked for, the people I work with, the job description, and included that I was a great team member and a leader at the last position. Most of you will not be in the accounting field, so you can't use this example. But you should follow the steps of being detailed and showing off your strengths.What is your management philosophy?
"What is your management philosophy?" This is another question only for managers and above. You can make this short or long, but in the least it should be an answer that stands out. Think of a guideline that you follow as a manager that you think is a good philosophy to follow. Short Answers "I think management should provide guidance, direction, leadership, and finally set an example to subordinates." "My management philosophy is to provide an environment that leads to productive employees. I achieve this through conflict management, keeping the morale high, providing encouragement to low performers, and also rewarding the strong performers." "I believe in setting an example. My favorite managers in the past were the ones that worked smart and efficiently. I learned a great deal and found that leading by example is a strong way to influence directs to work diligently." Long Answer "Before I was in management, I had many types of managers. I learned a lot from observing their management styles. I also learned a lot from the bad managers I had. I had a manger who was never there, another that didn't care, and another that had a phrase similar to, 'do as I say, not as I do.' So the traits I acquired are from my good managers such as working smart instead of working long, but the philosophy I always think about is from my bad managers. So I believe I should lead by example, provide guidance and growth by giving important feedback, and to be accessible to everyone." If you want a shorter answer that is to the point, you can consider this one. "I believe management should provide guidance for employees to do their job well. This includes several meanings. First, it means management should provide challenging tasks related to the job that gives employees experience. This also stretches their abilities and brings growth. Also, by guiding employees to do their job well, it benefits the company by having productive employees." Questions that are related to what you think should differ person to person. So think what your management philosophy is and write it down. Put more thought into it and then you will be able to explain exactly what you mean. If you have no idea, then consider what I wrote down in my two examples above.What was your favorite job?
"What was your favorite job?" I have never been asked this question, but I know some people who ran into it. That means you should at least give it a little thought so you can think of a good answer ahead of time. The best way to answer this question is to select a job that is most similar to the job that you are applying for. For example, if a person who is applying to be a financial analyst says their favorite job was being a salesman, then the answer is basically useless and not effective at all. Rather, you should say that you like your last marketing job because you have passion for it and you really enjoy it. Many people fail interviews based on lack of enthusiasm. So make sure you show them that you love the job you are applying for. "My favorite job was working as a financial analyst. I wanted to pursue other areas of finance so I accepted a position as a financial consultant. After a while, I realized how much I enjoyed my work as a financial analyst so I'm looking for a financial analyst position." "The last position I held was my favorite job. I really enjoy all aspects of accounting and auditing. However, I don't want to limit myself to just governmental accounting so I want a position where I can be doing similar type of work but in a larger setting." "My favorite job was the last position I held in the marketing department. That's why I'm applying for this job. It's similar to my last position and I really enjoyed it. Even though I really like my job, I want to experience the same work for a larger company. That's the primary reason for wanting to leave my current job." This answer is brief but effective. It states that this person loves marketing. The second part of the answer is basically answering a question before it is asked. If you love your job, why are you leaving? You can answer this in several ways, but my example is using the excuse of wanting to work for a larger company because it shows that I want to take the next step in my career. It shows that I want to grow and that I want to go to bigger and better opportunities. Basically, it is showing a little ambition without saying it directly.Tell me about the best manager you ever had.
"Tell me about the best manager you ever had." This question is primarily used to see what you value in a manager. The best way to answer this question is to explain a little bit about the manager and list the things you respect. Also include that you learned how to become a good manager through your experience with your good manager. Short Answers "My favorite manager was a person with a lot of knowledge. She stood her ground firmly and knew the best process to take by analyzing all the information." "My favorite manager was very trusting and easy to approach. I grew in many ways under this manager and I valued his method of dealing with directs. I believe in growing employees and this manager did a great job." "I had a manager that worked efficiently. Instead of bossing everyone around, he set an example of hard work through his actions. I respected that trait and learned to be more like him by working smarter." Long Answer "The best manager I had was during my first year at Microsoft. Since then, I have been under many different managers, but nobody matched up to his level. I respected him the most because of two reasons. He spent a great deal of time mentoring me and teaching me many work related things. I became a great employee because of him. And second, he produced the greatest amount of quality work among all the other managers. I always wondered how he could spend so much time with me and still find ways to out perform other managers. But that is where I learned how to work smart and efficiently. He showed me how to be the best employee through his action and through the individual lessons he gave me. I was so happy to have had a great manager early in my career." This is an easy answer for me because I was truly amazed at my first manager. I made sure to explain why he was the best manager and what I learned from him. Another reason why it is important to be able to answer this question is because most great employees were taught by a great manager.Tell me about the worst manager you ever had.
"Tell me about the worst manager you ever had." Just like learning from a good manager, you should learn from bad managers as well. When you tell the reason why your manager was bad, make sure to include that you learned not to be like that. Short Answers "In my last position, I had a manager who didn't like to give instructions. I managed to figure a lot of it out, but I would have saved a lot of time if my manager gave a simple 5 minute overview on the project." "I had one manager that was very disorganized. Whenever I ask a question, he would look around his desk for a couple minutes looking for information to give to me. I like to be organized so this trait really bothered me." "One manager didn't like talking to people. He always had his office door closed and whenever anyone asked a question, he seemed disturbed. He was very intelligent and produced a great deal of work, but as a manager, I believe you should be approachable by your directs." Long Answer "The worst manager I had was when I was working at a database company. I didn't like my manager because he was never available. When ever he was given an assignment, he always delegated the work without explaining the details. We were told to figure it out. I believe that you can learn from figuring some things out by ourselves, but it was obvious that this wasn't his intention. But the worst thing about it was that I didn't know that he was bad until I changed to a different manager. He kept feeding us false hope saying we are close to being promoted. Basically it was a way to keep us motivated to work extra hard. Sure it worked for a while, but I didn't gain anything else out of it except what not to be as a manager." This is a pretty easy answer that just explains the behavior of a bad manager. If you haven't had many managers, then it might be difficult to think of one. But you should definitely think of an answer even if you have to bend the truth a little. Although my example was ordinary, you can make a better answer by listing out what you learned through your bad manager.What could you have done to improve your relationship with a manager you didn't like?
"What could you have done to improve your relationship with a manager you didn't like?" This question could be a follow up to the question about having a bad manager. In my case, I didn't know he was a bad manager until I switched managers. But here is a generic answer that shows professionalism. Short Answers "If I communicated my problems earlier, I feel we both would have benefited. I waited several months before approaching my manager, and after our talk, our relationship got much better. So I could have improved my relationship by talking about problems sooner than later." "I feel I should be more understanding of different work styles. I didn't like my manager not communicating enough, but that didn't mean we couldn't approach him. So I'm learning to work seamlessly with different types of people." "One of my managers gave too much criticism. I value criticism, but hearing something negative every other day was difficult. I think I could have communicated how the criticism affected me in order to improve our relationship." Long Answer "I had a manager in the past I didn't like that much, but I couldn't say he was a bad manager. Our personalities conflicted and we had some arguments. This affected my performance and willingness to work in the beginning, but I asked myself this same question. I thought I should try to get along with my manager despite my personal feelings. I set them aside and maintained a professional relationship. Taking this approach really helped. Because I was willing to look past minor differences, our work relationship got stronger and I performed at a higher level." This answer shows that this person took proper actions before it was too late. It shows that this candidate has the ability to work with managers and team members despite personal differences or feelings of dislike. When you think of your own answer, make sure you answer this question showing that you dealt with this problem before and that you overcame the situation.What were the most memorable accomplishments in your last position?
"What were the most memorable accomplishments in your last position?" "What were the most memorable accomplishments in your last career?" Both of these questions can be answered with the same question. If you do not have much experience, it might be hard to think of a good answer. Also, if your previous job was very simple or followed a regular routine, then a memorable accomplishment might be hard to think about. So take a lot of time to think of anything. Because answering this question with nothing to say is basically the only wrong answer. Here are some ideas. Did you save the company money? Did you create a new process and put it into place? Did you break a sales record? Did you meet a difficult deadline? You can use all of these types of experience for this answer. Short Answers "I remember the day I completed an audit from beginning to end all by myself. Since I was an entry level auditor, this accomplishment really felt good because it was my first major step." "One day our director came out of his office asking who wrote up the documentation for ABC firm. I didn't know if he was upset or impressed. I said I did it and he basically said, great job and went back to his office. This was memorable because the director never did this before." "The most memorable accomplishment I had as a sales associate for a software company was closing a deal worth $17 million. This was the second largest order our company ever had and it felt like hitting a grand slam." Long Answer "My last position was selling copy machines. I had one month where I broke the sales record for a given month. I think that was a great accomplishment. However, throughout the calendar year, I exceeded the average number of sales by 20% ten out of twelve months. Having a great month is good, but I feel it is a greater accomplishment maintaining solid numbers throughout the whole year." "I think the greatest accomplishment in my last position was implementing a simple process that reduced the number of broken builds by 20%. Whenever we have a broken build, it slows down work for 20 different people. That puts risk on slipping the ship date. But my process involved following 25 steps prior to building to ensure a successful build. The 25 steps only took 15 minutes to complete and we reduced the number of build breaks significantly. It worked for our product and upper management instructed other groups in our organization to put this process in place. I really felt excited about that accomplishment." These two examples are different. One is for a sales position and the second is for a technical engineer position. Both of them are great accomplishments. Sales is easy to answer because you can just throw out numbers and it sounds good. The second is a little more difficult because you have to explain the situation a little. But make sure you explain your scenario enough so the interviewer can see the significance of your contribution.Why do you want to leave your current job?
"Why do you want to leave your current job?" There are many wrong answers to this question. Some of them include saying things like, I hate my job, I hate the company, I'm not appreciated there, I hate my boss, I'm sick of working there, etc. Basically, anything negative is a bad answer. If you say something negative, they will think you will eventually get into that situation again while working for them. So I highly recommend you have a good answer that leaves a positive impression while displaying good traits. Short Answers "I want to find a company with more opportunities. My previous company was very small and didn't have opportunities for growth. After learning about the work environment here, I felt this is exactly the type of place I want to work." "My current company is very large and it's difficult to do different tasks. We have routine work that never changes. I want to work in an environment where I can utilize more of my skills." "Our family moved to live near a better school district for our children. This area is great and I want to find a job closer to my new home. My previous job was too far away to commute." Long Answer "I really enjoy what I'm doing, but I feel I'm following a routine. I looked around for more opportunities to grow, but because the company is small, I'm very limited. I want to work in an environment that will help me realize my full potential and a place I can contribute everything I'm capable of doing. My current job doesn't provide these things for me and that's why I want to work here. I know ABC Company has a lot of opportunities for growth and encourages employees to take on challenging projects to learn more. That is what I'm looking for." This answer shows a couple of good traits. It also shows excitement and mentions the company name. It is personal and direct. This is a generic answer so you can use this if you want. If you decide to think of your own, make sure it displays good traits and the reason for wanting to leave your current job is not a negative reason.Where did you tell your boss you were going?
"Where did you tell your boss you were going?" "Where does your boss think you are?" I highly doubt you will be asked this question. But it is true that interviews are conducted during office hours. That means if you are employed, then you will have to have a reason for not working. There are a couple of options. If the interview is less than two hours, you can schedule one during lunch time. If so, you can say you told your boss that you had to take care of some personal matters and you are taking an extended lunch. Another option is to tell the interviewer that your boss is aware of your interview schedule. But make sure it is true. I don't know what the best way to answer this question. But if I had to respond to this question, I would answer by saying I'm taking a personal day, or a vacation day. But make sure you don't say you are using a sick day. That is a complete lie and the interviewer will see that you are willing to lie for your personal gain. "I wasn't required to tell my boss because I used one of my vacation days to be here. I'm really excited to have this interview opportunity and using a vacation day was very well worth it." This answer is turning an awkward question into an opportunity to show enthusiasm for the interview and the company. This is a key example where little things count. By adding the last sentence, the interviewer is sure to remember your answer more. That is because he or she will see your enthusiasm and excitement. If all the answers are the same, this one will be sure to stand out. When interviewing, everyone has similar answers. The key is to find opportunities to put in little extra comments to give you the advantage.Are you currently employed at the last place listed on your resume?
"Are you currently employed at the last place listed on your resume?" This is a simple yes or no answer. I do not recommend lying. They can find out and if they catch you lying, then you lost your chance at this job. The reason this question is important is because someone who is currently employed appears to be a better candidate than someone who doesn't have a job. I do not believe it is true that an employed person is better qualified for any job, but it is one of those things that most people grew up with. If you are currently employed, then simply answer yes. You don't have to say anything else. If no, then you can say something to justify your reason for not having a job. But make sure it is a good reason. Otherwise, it might be better to simply answer, "No, I'm not currently employed."What is the title of the person you report to?
"What is the title of the person you report to? What responsibilities does he or she have?" This is a trick question for people who are giving them a bigger title. An interviewer will know what you really did by finding out what your manager does. For someone who didn't prepare for this question, he or she will fall into a trap. Let's say a person said he or she was a manager. If the interviewer asks this question and the person responds by saying similar types of responsibilities, then something is wrong. Why do you have the same responsibilities as your manager? To prepare for this question, make sure you answer that your manager did higher level work than your own. The work that you mention you did should be showing off your skills, but your manager should have even greater responsibilities. Then it really shows how high you are. The example I'm going to give represents me as a Group Program Manager. Short Answers "He was a sales manager. His duties included scheduling, customer support, and managing a group of 15 sales associates." "My manager had a supervisor title. He was in charge of distributing work to staff auditors, reviewing final audits, scheduling business trips, and he also performed audits as well." "My manager had the title Test Manager. She was in charge of delivering high quality features for each software application. She planned each project giving a timeline of completion, worked with management from different groups to make sure quality is assured, and provided direction to our team of 20 testers." Long Answer "The title of the person I report to is Product Unit Manager. The Product Unit Manager is responsible for overseeing the entire project. He uses the information from Test, Development, and Program managers to make sure the project is on line. He also is the person representing our whole group and reports progress to the vice president of our organization. He provides high level guidance and direction making sure we are following our mission statement. Other people who report to him are the Development manager and the Group Program manager." The more details you provide the better your answer. It ensures you are telling the truth and that you are aware of what you need to be able to do to take the next step up. Finally, a great way to answer this question is to know what position you are applying for and then list off the responsibilities of the person you would be reporting to if you got hired. That will make the interviewer think that you have very similar or exact experience for the job you are applying for.In your previous position, how much time did you spend ...
"In your previous position, how much time did you spend on the phone?" "In your previous position, how much time did you spend in meetings?" "In your previous position, how much time did you spend working by yourself?" "In your previous position, how much time did you spend working in a team?" These questions all depend on the type of position you are applying for. If the position is a product support position, then time spent on the phone is going to be large. Let's say your previous work involved working alone a lot, and the position you are applying for requires a lot of teamwork. Even though you worked by yourself a lot, you should emphasize the work you did in teams. If this is the situation, then I would say I did a combination of both. "In my last position, we had large projects that involved multiple people. We had meetings to discuss the project and worked in teams whenever it involved overlap of feature. After the meetings and working with the team, I was required to finish my work by myself. So it was quite balanced between meetings, team work and working by myself." This is not an extravagant answer, but it definitely shows that this person is capable of working in groups and working alone. Most office work requires a combination of working in groups and alone, but if your situation is different, then answer according to what the interviewer wants to hear.If you don't leave your current job, what do you imagine you will be doing in several years?
"If you don't leave your current job, what do you imagine you will be doing in several years?" There are several things the interviewer wants to learn from this question. The interviewer knows you are looking for another job because you are not happy with where you are at. Knowing this, they want to find out how you react to situations where you are not happy. Most people who do not prepare for this question will have a generic answer that doesn't stand out. You can use this opportunity to give a solid answer. "I'm confident I'll be in a management position several years from now. In my current position, junior employees ask me many questions and I like to mentor people. My work is very routine and I'm very efficient. I want to find more challenges my work currently doesn't offer." "To tell you the truth, I feel I'll be doing the same thing I'm doing now. I always look for more work and different opportunities, but my current company doesn't have many opportunities for advancement." "I'm a very proactive person and I'll continue to do my job well. I'll always look for opportunities and even create places where I can improve my work. I know if I continue to perform well, I'll have more opportunities to get promoted when a position opens. So hopefully, in several years, I'll be managing people that are in my current position now." Despite having some negative feelings about work, this answer shows that he or she will continue to do hard work regardless of being unhappy. You shouldn't say you are unhappy, but looking for another job is one indication of not being happy.If you're very happy with your current job, why do you want to leave?
"If you're very happy with your current job, why do you want to leave?" If you portray that you are very happy with your current job, then they might ask you this question. I was in a very similar situation and I will include my answer as the example. You can use other reasons, but make sure it doesn't contradict you being happy. Short Answers "I like the work I'm doing and I like everyone on my team, but I have a strong desire to learn other aspects I can't learn in my current position." "I have been in my current position for four years and I want to gain experiences in other areas. I love my job, but I want to grow more as a professional." "I love to learn new things and after several years in my current position, I realized I was doing the same thing over and over again most of the time. So the only reason I want to leave my current job is to broaden my knowledge by gaining other experiences." Long Answer "I have been with my previous group for more than three years. I was doing the same thing on a regular basis. Although we received different projects from time to time, it was very similar to my previous work. So I had a desire to gain new experiences and learn from different products. I believe having a variety of experience is good for my career so I made the decision to leave my current job." This is simple and direct. It answers the question without including unnecessary excuses. It also shows my desire to grow, learn more, and improve myself. This is a good indication of a good employee so using an answer like mine is a safe answer.If you have problems or complaints with your current job, why haven't you brought it to their attention?
"If you have problems or complaints with your current job, why haven't you brought it to their attention?" If the interviewer knows you have complaints about your current job, then they might ask you this question. Make sure the complaints are things that do not make you look bad. For example, having no opportunities is a good complaint, but not getting a good raise is a bad complaint. After you decide on the complaint, then you can create your answer around it. It is better to answer that you did bring this up multiple times. That way, you are displayed as honest. Short Answers "I actually told my manager several times. I told him about my desire to learn new things and take on new challenges, but there aren't many opportunities in my current group." "I believe in being straightforward, and I told my manager on numerous occasion that I was interested in taking on more responsibilities. However, my current group doesn't have opportunities I'm looking for." "After working the night shift for a couple of years, I wanted normal working hours. I told my manager about this, but there was no positions available for regular hour shifts." Long Answer "My biggest complaint is that there are no opportunities to grow. My manager tells me I'm doing great work, but I feel I am stuck at this level. I spoke with my manager for more work so I can grow and gain more experience, but unfortunately, there isn't any work to give. I even had a discussion about changing roles, but because there is no open headcount in other divisions, it was hard to do that. So I definitely conveyed my desire for more work or for change, but it was something they couldn't provide." Having an employee that complains about a lot of things is an employee you do not want to hire. However, if an employee complains about not having enough work, it could be seen as a good complaint. Most work places have more work than resources, so giving more work isn't a problem. So this complaint shows that you are a person who wants to work and wants to learn. These are good traits and that makes this answer a good one.Give me a specific example at your last position where...
"Give me a specific example at your last position where reduced cost." "Give me a specific example at your last position where you made things more efficient." These are very similar to the 'Tell me about' type of questions. They want a specific example from your work experience. But if the position is an engineer position, you will not get questions about revenue and cost, but you might get one about efficiency. In other questions, I gave an example of reducing cost, so I will use this time to give an example of increasing revenue. Short Answers "As a sales associate, I do my part in increasing revenue by making more sales. Even if I'm having a good month, I continue to work hard to make sure our company is continually increasing its revenue." "It's something small, but in our office, everyone left there monitors and lights on. I simply put up signs to turn off their monitors and to turn off office lights. This really helped and our VP even told me he appreciated the small effort." "We provide many different brochures for our clients, and when we get low on a specific brochure, we have to order each one separately. I created a small tool that automates this process and saved about 30 minutes of work each time we ordered brochures. It was something small, but my manager appreciated it." Long Answer "In my last position, I was the manager for a Japanese restaurant. We were located in downtown and realized that not everyone had a full hour for a lunch break. I created a system to turn 5 of our dishes into meals that would be ready in three minutes. We put up a sign indicating that we would have meals in less than three minutes and revenues jumped 30%. I considered the location of the restaurant and saw an opportunity to provide meals to customers that would've never considered our meal due to their lack of time. The store owner was really proud of this accomplishment." All examples will be different because everyone has different experiences. When you think of your own, you should primarily be concerned about how clear you are. Think of something you did and put them into words. Having answers ahead of time will keep you organized during the interview.What do you feel an employer owes an employee?
"What do you feel an employer owes an employee?" This purpose for this question is basically to see what you expect from the company. It is a simple answer, but you should also mention what you will give, in return for what you are expecting. Short Answers "I believe an employer should provide a good work environment and opportunities for growth in return for hard work." "I believe an employer should respect their employees and treat them fairly. I plan on working hard and I should be recognized for my contributions." "I believe an employer should provide an environment where everyone can succeed. I also believe that opportunities for growth and advancement should be provided by the employer." Long Answer "I have a lot of expectations from my employer. Financial compensation is a given, but there are other things I expect. I feel an employer should provide a good work environment, opportunities for growth, reward and recognition for excellence, and guidance in career development. I know I will be giving everything I can to help my employer succeed, and in return these are some of the expectations I have." If you look at the list of things I mentioned, all of them are strong indicators of a good employee. If a person is wanting to grow and guidance in career development, then that worker is serious about improving him or herself. Also, wanting reward and recognition for excellence indicates that this person is going to try to achieve excellence to get the reward. I would try to avoid saying things like, having a good sick day policy, or an understanding of missed days due to miscellaneous issues, or mentioning a good maternity leave plan. These things are all provided by large companies, but mentioning them indicates that you are a person who gets sick easily, or a person planning on having a baby, or an unlucky person that misses work due to bad luck.What do you expect from your manager?
"What do you expect from your manager?" This question should be answered that shows what type of worker you are. Mention things that will help you to become a better worker instead of mentioning that you want an understanding manager. Short Answers "The most important thing I want from my manager is constructive feedback so I know where I need to improve. I want to continually grow and having a good manager will help me achieve my goal." "I expect my manager to provide work that is relevant to both the company and my growth. My manager should know my strengths and also help me work on my weaknesses." "I expect my manager to be a smart person who works hard. If my manager is setting a positive example, I believe I'll be more encouraged to work harder. Having a manager that bosses people around without doing any work is very discouraging. So I expect my manager to lead by example." Long Answer "I expect my manager to give me relevant work, to be accessible, setting an example through action, providing both positive and negative feedback so I can improve, and finally a manager that will help me succeed. Ultimately, I know it's my responsibility to be a great performer, but having a manager that I can learn from can help me grow that much more. That's what I'm looking for." This example shows the use of key words such as, succeed, great performer, improve, and grow. Each item listed demonstrates a desire to work hard and to improve. If you want to think of your own answer, keep this in mind.Would you like to have your boss's job?
"Would you like to have your boss's job?" Unless you have a better answer, the best answer for this question is a yes. However, you should clearly state that you want to learn everything and eventually move into a similar position. Do not sound like you are a person who is going to steal the job, but rather someone who is going to work hard to earn the position. Short Answers "When I gain a little more experience, I'll be looking to find a position that is similar to my managers job. But for now, I want to continue to learn as an employee while helping the company grow." "I'm always learning new things and in time, I would like to have my boss's position. I believe I'm on track to become a manager and I'll continue to work hard to prove my abilities to the company." "Yes. I have several years of experience and I also took on projects to learn more about management. I don't necessarily want to replace my manager, but I would like to learn more about management so I can be ready when a position is available." Long Answer "I would definitely like to have my boss's job. However, before taking on that role, I want to gain more experience and learn from my manager. I believe in thorough preparation and I am doing everything I can to learn more about management and taking on more difficult projects. I know through my hard work I will eventually have the opportunity to have a similar position to my boss." Being ambitious is important and this answer shows that. It also shows that this person has a strong understanding on the steps to become a manager by learning about management and taking on more responsibilities. Finally the last sentence displays confidence. If you are creating your own answer, make sure use a similar structure as this one or if not, make sure it is better.What did you hear about us?
"What did you hear about us?" "What do you know about us?" "What do you think we do at this company?" I feel this question is not to quiz you about your knowledge about the company. It also doesn't test if you researched this company or not. I feel that this question is to find out what you know before they explain some things about there company. You should understand that if you are a strong candidate and you are doing well on your interview, then they will start sharing some things about the company to entice you to take the position. However, it could turn out to be a quiz so make sure you do your research before interviewing for a position. Short Answers "I heard that ABC Company is the leader in copy machine distribution. ABC Company is a global company in 18 different countries, and finally, it's one of the best companies to work for." "I heard ABC Company has a great work environment and a place where strong contributors are rewarded. I want to work for a company with opportunities and I know ABC Company provides these things." "I read on your website that ABC Company provides accounting services to small and medium size corporations. I also know ABC Company is the leader in tax services in this area. That's why I'm excited to have the opportunity to join this company." Long Answer "I heard a lot of good things about ABC Company. I know this company provides financial services to small and medium size corporations. Specifically, ABC Company focuses on creating automation for routine financial transactions. Besides what the company provides, I heard that the office environment is great and the employees are well taken care of." You don't have to list everything you know... just enough to let them know that you did your homework. Also, take a little time to give the company a compliment such as the last sentence. It is a psychological tool that you should use to your advantage. This type of compliment is directed at the company and the interviewer will be happy to hear this.What do you know about our product?
"What do you know about our product?" "Do you know what our team is making?" This is another type of question they ask to find out what you know so they don't tell you something that you already know. If it is an existing product, then you should definitely know what it is. If not, and after you researched as much as you could, tell them the little that you know. For example, I interviewed for a group within Microsoft that was very new. I had no idea what the team was creating but I was interested because it was a new technology. I found out as much as I could and when they asked me this question, this is how I answer. "There isn't much information about your products yet, but I heard you are creating new technology to create a more secure database. I worked with databases most of my career and the thought of more security really interested me." "I heard this company is creating a camera lens for deep sea photography. Because my major was in engineering and my hobby is in photography, I believe this is the perfect position for me." "I hear this group has several functions. It has an incubation team that grows new ideas and if the product has potential a new product is formed. I also hear this group creates solutions for companies to entice them to buy more Microsoft products." I didn't know much, but after researching, this is all I could find. This is exactly what I said and they responded by telling me more detail. It wasn't wrong, but at least I said enough about the group to sound like I researched a little bit. That's basically all you have to do for this question.Have you managed people in any of the positions you've held?
"Have you managed people in any of the positions you've held?" If your resume states that you are a manager or states that you manage people, then they won't ask you this question. It is for those that are not in a defined management position. Basically, they want to know if you have any experience managing people. I do not recommend lying. They can keep asking questions until they find you in a lie. I would recommend telling the truth. I'll give two examples. One is my experience of managing two temporary workers. And another is an example that would show some managing experience without actually saying you managed people. Short Answers "Yes. I have one year experience in managing three people. I distributed work to each member of my team, provided assistance and guidance, and mentored each employee to be a better employee." "I have three years of experience managing people. I managed a team from 3 people to a group of 10. Most of my duties as a manger was to make sure our projects were on track and that each employee was completing their work." "I've never managed people yet, but I have 2 years of experience mentoring new employees. I took several courses on management and I feel I'm ready to take the next step of managing people." "I didn't hold a management position, but I was in charge of several projects where I had to manage a group of 4 workers to complete projects for a three month duration each. These projects gave me great experience in managing people." Long Answers "I've never been in a management position yet, but I did manage two temporary employees for a one year duration. During that time, I was given a large area of work to cover. I planned and organized the work to distribute to the two extra workers. I managed their work and kept track of how many hours they worked each week. I met with them on a regular basis and provided feedback on where they are doing well, and where they needed improvement. Their time in our team ended after we completed the project. It wasn't a management position, but I gained experience in managing people." "I never held a position where I was managing people, but I had a lot of experience where I was in charge of large projects. Although it was my co-workers, I had the experience of taking the lead on projects where I had to manage people for a specific time period. Although I didn't experience the full aspect of managing people, I learned how to bring people together, how to use individual strengths of each worker, and how to organize and break down a large task to distribute to several people." If you have management experience, then you can tell them about your experience. But if you haven't, then it might be good to show them that you have some experience in managing people as I illustrate in my example.What types of people do you have trouble getting along with?
"What types of people do you have trouble getting along with?" Even if you believe you get along with everyone, the interviewer will not believe you so don't say that you do. I recommend thinking about a type of person that is a bad worker. Use that person as an example and then explain what you do to put effort into the troubled relationship. Short Answers "I get along with almost everybody, but I tend to get frustrated at people who always say yes and end up not delivering. I expect honesty and integrity, and saying yes should mean yes." "I'm very understanding of different people and different work styles, but I have a hard time with people who only do work that is seen by management. There's so much work that needs to be done and not everything is seen by the manager. So I get upset when work is neglected." Long Answers "I get along with almost everyone, but I think I have the hardest time tolerating people who think they're always right. Not everything is black and white and many times there are multiple ways of doing something. In my last group, I had a coworker that believed his way was the correct way. That's fine, but when you try to explain another view point, he doesn't listen, starts to talk louder and he begins to think it's a debate. I avoided him for a while, but realized I should put in an effort to deal with his personality." For a follow up question, the interviewer can ask you what you did in this situation. Here is an example of dealing with this type of person. "Basically, I had to change the way I talked to him. I was very careful with my words and always said something like, 'that's a great idea, but could we add this to it' or 'I definitely agree with you, but can I get your opinion on this method.' To tell you the truth, I would rather not deal with a person like that, but I thought the right thing to do was find a way to deal with him so that is what I did." The reason why it is acceptable to say you have a difficult time dealing with people like this is because everyone will have a hard time dealing with this type of person. So it doesn't make you look bad because you can't get along with this person, however, this is a good answer because it shows taking initiative to correct the relationship.Who do you think are our two major competitors?
"Who do you think are our two major competitors?" I never received this question, but it is very likely if it is important to know competitors. Make sure during your research, you also investigate the competitors of the company you are interviewing for. You can make your answer if you know more details such as market percentage of each company, or if it is a product company, what products they make. For the long answer, I'll give an example of a person interviewing for a marketing position for McDonalds. This is a good example, because one of the competitors is obvious. It is Burger King. But what is the second competitor. That is the significance of this example. It gives you an opportunity to explain your opinion of the second competitor. But the figures I'm giving for all the answers are fake. You should make sure you research numbers so you can use them in your answers. Short Answers "The number one competitor to Verizon is Cingular. After they merged with AT&T, they became the largest cell phone provider with a 19% market control. The next competitor is Nextel. Although they only have 10% of the market, they are increasing in strength." "The two competitors of Nokia are Motorola and Samsung. Motorola has a strong presence in the United States where Samsung is more global." "Microsoft is competing with many different companies because Microsoft provides many different software. MSN is growing and AOL is the number one competitor for this business, while the Microsoft OS is challenged by Linux because it's free." Long Answer "The biggest competitor is Burger King. Where ever you see a McDonalds, it's common to see Burger King near by. They specialize in flame broiled burgers and use that as their marketing strategy. The Whopper is their number one selling burger selling approximately 30% more than all their other burgers. The second competitor is Wendy's. Although in some regions other hamburger stores sell more, if you take international sales into consideration, Wendy's clearly is a strong competitor. They advertise opening late and concentrate on their dollar menu luring people in to buy other more expensive items." This example clearly demonstrates knowledge about the industry instead of just McDonalds. Knowing the industry is important because and this question gives you the opportunity to show that off. This example also demonstrates an understanding of the international aspect of selling burgers. Finally, their marketing strategy is included in the answer. When you are interviewing for a position, make sure you know as much detail as you can to show that you are knowledgeable about the whole industry.Why do you like sales?
"Why do you like sales?" You can answer this question in numerous ways. But to make your answer effective, you should think of an answer that will show your strong points as a salesman. Make sure to cover your own traits that are important to sales. Here is an example. Short Answers "I like sales because I like talking with people and I'm good at making people feel comfortable." "I enjoy sales because it requires strong communication skills and that's one of my strong traits. I like the challenge of making a sale and I feel good whenever I make a good sale." "I like sales because it fits my personality. I enjoying working with all sorts of people and I like to provide great customer service by answering questions about products professionally." Long Answer "I've always liked sales. I enjoy working with and talking to people. I'm good at making people comfortable and I also like the challenge. In the past with my friends, I heard comments frequently that I would make a good salesman even before I got into sales. So basically, I like sales because it fits my personality and I really enjoy it." This is a simple short answer. Not everyone can be a salesperson. They need to have the right personality such as good communication skills. You don't have to have a great answer for this question. But the most important aspect is showing that you enjoy sales.Do you see that stapler? Convince me to buy it.
"Do you see that stapler? Convince me to buy it." This is a test to see if you are an experienced salesperson. I do not have much sales experience but I would answer this question by thinking of salesman I encountered in the past that I felt was good. Think about your experience with sales people and list what they did. For example, they probably follow a format. First, they explain what the product is. Then they tell you the functionalities and where you can use it. Third, they should tell you how much easier it will make your work. Fourth, it should have a good warranty. The question didn't give you details. So feel free to make something up. It will show your creativity. Continuing, the product should have a good return policy. Finally, you can talk about the reduced price, or the price guarantee. Short Answers "This stapler is the newest model with easier to use features such as quick loading and safety protection. It also comes with a money back guarantee for any reason if you are not satisfied." "This stapler is on sale for 30% off. The manufacturer is a new company so their prices are great right now. They have a great warranty program and it will save your company a lot of money with the substantial discount." "This stapler has the best value. With a 15% lower sticker price, it provides identical functionality with the more expensive brands. It's durable and staples through more paper than the other brands." Long Answer "We are proud to carry this stapler. It's very durable and easy to use. Loading the staples is as simple as clicking this button on the bottom to open the top. The design is made with more curves to make it more appealing on the desk. It also is designed with more safety in mind. If you accidentally drop the staple on your foot or hit it with your hand, the curves are smooth enough where it will not break the skin. The warranty on the stapler is great too. It comes with a five year guarantee. We are currently offering this stapler for a low price of $19.99, and we have a low price guarantee. If you find a lower price in the next thirty days, we will gladly pay you the difference." If you are applying for a sales position, you have to be ready to be able to sell anything in the room. I would recommend thinking about an outline. Get that in your head. Then use the outline to practice selling variety of things. You can use my answer as an outline covering features, functionality, safety, design, warranty, and price. But don't limit it to just these, if you have another idea, add it to this, or make up your own.How long have you been looking for a job?
"How long have you been looking for a job?" I don't know if this is legitimate question for an interviewer to ask, but it is definitely possible. I don't like the question, but at least we should think about it and prepare an answer. If you have been looking for a job for like eight months, it could sound like you are a bad candidate because nobody wants to hire you. Instead, I would take a different approach than answering honestly. If the resume shows you have been out of work for a year, then you have to explain the one year. You have two options. First, you can be honest and say you have been looking for one year, or you can think of a good excuse. It's hard to lie and sound believable so I'm going to give an honest answer. If you have a good excuse for not working for a long duration, feel free to use that as an excuse. Short Answers "I sent out my resumes just last week. I'm very excited to join a company where I can help out." "I've been looking for about a month now. Because of the slow economy it's taking a little longer than I expected, but I'm confident that I can be a valuable asset to any company." "It's been about 2 months now. I wasn't as aggressive in the beginning because I was taking some classes, but now that I'm done with class, I'm really trying now." Long Answers "To be honest, I've been looking for a job for quite a long time. The job market hasn't been that great and it's been a little rough. But I spent my year productively by reading up on new technologies, self studying, and trying to challenge myself with small projects. I definitely learned a lot and I'm really ready to start working again." If you have a real excuse such as a sick mother you have to take care of, here is an example. "I have been out of work for a year, but I have only been looking for a job for about 3 weeks now. My mother had cancer and I wanted to spend the final months with her. She passed away and I can starting work again." I don't recommend lying for this question. It could turn bad if they find out the truth later. Telling them the truth like my first example shows honesty and shows that you tried to stay productive.Why haven't you received any offers so far?
"Why haven't you received any offers so far?" "What offers have you received so far?" This is another type of question that most interviewers will not ask. But just in case, I'll provide an example. For the question asking what offers have you received so far, you can simply list the ones you have received without details. For example, "I received offers from Boeing and InfoSpace." But if they ask you why haven't you received any offers, then your answer will depend on if you have an offer or not. If you do, then you can politely correct them by saying, "Actually, I received an offer from Intel. But I didn't respond with my answer yet because this company is my first choice." If you do not have any offers, then you can say something like this example. "I just started interviewing this past week, so it's a little too early to tell." "I recently started looking for a job, but I'm hoping that I'll receive offers soon." "I received one offer from a smaller company, but I want to see what else is out there. I like what this company has to offer so I'm hoping everything turns out well today." "I've only interviewed with two other companies so far and I have a second interview with one of them. It's too early to tell if I'll be receiving any offers right now, but I'm confident that I will get a couple." This answer is suggesting that you are actively interviewing. Mentioning a second interview with another company also shows that you passed the first interview stage. You are not admitting to any fault by not receiving any offers, but simply saying it is too early because you haven't been searching for a job that long. If you have been looking for a job for a long time, then you will not be able to use an answer like I just showed. Instead, you might have to be honest and try to put the blame somewhere else. More likely you will not receive this answer, but just in case, here is one more example. This example admits directly to not receiving any offers but shows diligence and shows that this person doesn't give up. "Most of the jobs I have been applying for require more experience than I have. Also, because the job market is rough right now the competition has been pretty tough. But I plan on self studying continually and I know through my diligence that I will get a job soon."If you don't understand your assignment and you can't reach your boss, what would you do?
"If you don't understand your assignment and you can't reach your boss, what would you do?" This question is seeing how you react to ambiguous situations. Also it checks to see how resourceful you are. The best way to answer this question is to provide step by step actions you would take in this situation. Short Answers "I would investigate the assignment deeper by searching for more information, asking coworkers or other managers and make the smartest decision on how to tackle the assignment." "There are many places I can look for clarity. I would look through some books, or the Internet, or my peers, or even other managers. If I try to look for answers, most of the time I can find them." "I would first see what the deadline is and if my manager will be back before the deadline. If not, then I would leave a message on my managers phone. Afterwards, I would ask my peers or other managers to see if they know the assignment. I believe investigating the assignment further will help me understand it." Long Answer "First, I would read the assignment again thoroughly to see if I missed a clue or anything. I could even turn to the Internet and look up other documentation if it was something like a difficult process I didn't know. After investigating this assignment, and I still don't understand it, then I could turn to my peers and see if anyone has done an assignment similar to the one I received. If my peers do not know either, then I could ask my boss's manager and verify with him. After exhausting these options, then I would have to make a decision on how to do the assignment and make the best decision I can on how to tackle the assignment. Before engaging in the assignment, I would leave a message on my boss's cell phone." There might be a better answer, but in my experience many interviewers are looking for a process of reaching a goal. In this example, it shows each step from beginning to end. Feel free to add or change these steps after thinking about it.If everyone on the team is a veteran, what will you do to fit in?
"If everyone on the team is a veteran, what will you do to fit in and be a beneficial team member instead of a person who appears to be in training?" This is actually an easy question. Everyone should have a similar answer because there are only a few things that you can do. I'm going to be giving an example of preparing and reading up on information more than usual. Short Answers "In this situation, I'll have to ramp up quickly and study notes from previous meetings before attending any. I'll also do a lot of studying to catch up so I can participate in discussions instead of appearing to be in training." "In the beginning, I'll put a lot of effort into catching up on any existing projects I join. I believe studying a lot in the beginning to be aware of what is going on is very important." "I'll study as much as I can to fit into a group of veterans. I know I'll have many questions along the way, but listening carefully and putting pieces together will allow me to catch up quickly. I know I'll be able to be an effective team player in a short time by following this method." Long Answer "Even if everyone is a veteran, I feel confident I can fit right in. I would prepare as much as I can by reading existing material to catch up on the project. I would plan for meetings by making a list of questions I have and finding the answers to these questions before the meeting. I would also create a list of ideas through the documents I have read. A fresh mind could help with creative solutions. I know that I would be required to study a lot in the beginning, but I would be able to do so at home or by working late in the office." This answer shows steps of becoming a team member that doesn't appear to be in training. It is describing ways to limit training times in meetings, and includes that a new worker could benefit an existing team by making a list of ideas.How do you intend to learn what you need to know to perform well for this job?
"How do you intend to learn what you need to know to perform well for this job?" We have a similar question here, but we can use this opportunity to see another example. Short Answers "I have experience in learning new concepts without training. I usually look through books or manuals to find answers. Because I'm good at learning, I'll study relevant material to help me do my duties well." "I have experience in this area so I won't need much training. However, I know different companies have different ways of doing things, so I'll learn company policies and methods quickly to apply my existing knowledge to do a good job." "The first couple weeks are important. I think it's important to study the correct material, ask the right questions, and put in extra effort to learn what I need to know. This is what I usually do to make sure I'll be performing well." Long Answer "If the company provides training, I'll utilize the training to learn. If not, then I'll learn by being attentive to what other people do, read up on the documentation, and be willing to ask questions when necessary. I know the first couple of weeks are important and I'm willing to put in extra effort to start off on the right track." This example is shorter and more to the point. It is not an answer that will astonish the interviewer, but it is an answer that will show couple good traits about yourself.If your supervisor tells you to do something that you believe can be done in a different way, what would you do?
"If your supervisor tells you to do something that you believe can be done in a different way, what would you do?" This question is designed to see how you would react to your manager when you disagree. It is important to trust your manager, but at the same time, not follow blindly. That means I should ask questions to clarify, make suggestions, and after a discussion, follow the instructions of your manager. This is the steps I would take to answer this question. Short Answers "I will tell my supervisor of an alternate way and explain the benefits. If my supervisor is not convinced, then I'll follow his instructions." "I'll suggest a different way of doing the assignment along with the benefits. If my supervisor disagrees and insists I do it a certain way, I'll follow the instructions." "I'll suggest a different method and ask my supervisor if I can do this work the new way. If the result will be the same but would potentially save more time, then I believe my manager will allow it. However, if my manager wants it done a certain way for other reasons, I'll follow his or her instructions." Long Answer "I would question my supervisor why he or she wants it done this particular way. If I still don't agree with the method, I would suggest alternate ways of tackling the assignment and explain how my suggestion would be better. After having a good conversation, if we still can't see eye to eye, then I would have to trust my superior and follow his or her instructions." This is a solid answer because it is showing independence by having my own suggestion and thought, it shows I can think for myself, and finally, shows that I would be an employee that trusts the supervisor. Ultimately, this answer shows that I'm a smart person willing to make adjustments. I'll take a moment here to clarify something. How does this answer show that I'm smart and a person willing to make adjustments? Well, many times, the interviewer will not see exactly what you want them to see. However, even if they don't see all your good intentions, they will at least get a good feeling about you through your solid answers.If you're told to do something that you feel is illegal, what would you do?
"If you're told to do something that you feel is illegal, what would you do?" This is an easy answer. Unless you are interviewing to be a gangster, you should have a similar answer to mine. Short Answers "I would first verify if it's legal or not. If it is legal, then I would continue with the work. If it's illegal, I would not do the work and tell my manager that this work is illegal. I would also let Human Resources aware of the situation." "I'd verify if the work was legal or not. If it wasn't legal, then I'd confront my manager and my manager's manager with this incident." "I wouldn't jump to any conclusions. I would rather question my manager to verify if it is illegal or not. If I'm not convinced through facts, then I would investigate through other means. If I find it is illegal, I will not continue with the work and inform Human Resources of this incident." Long Answer "If I'm not sure, I would verify whether it's legal or illegal before performing the task. If I find it is legal, then I would continue with the task. If not, then I would report the request to the boss of the person who asked me to do it. If the boss does not take appropriate action, I would find out why and report the incident to Human Resources myself." This is making you sound firm and stubborn. But in this situation, you have to be bold with your answer. You cannot let them think that you would hide the fact. This is especially true if you are interviewing for a finance or accounting position that deals with money or other important information.If you were unfairly criticized, what would you do?
"If you were unfairly criticized, what would you do?" This is the hardest question I have to answer here. Being unfairly criticized is one of my biggest pet peeves. I hate it when it happens and I usually blow up. I get mad and start to argue. But as you know, this is a bad answer to this question. They are asking you this question because they want to see if you will react professionally. Any answer that shows professionalism will be good. Short Answers "I'd probably ask for clarity on the criticism. I think it's important to accept criticism for self improvement, but if it's unfair, then I will clear things up by asking for clarity." "When I'm unfairly criticized, I usually think about the criticism and try to view it from a different angle. If I still can't see why I was criticized, then I'll approach the person and initiate a dialog to resolve the unfair criticism." "I usually use all criticism to help me grow. If I was criticized unfairly, there must be a little truth to it. I'll learn as much as I can from it, but if it was really out of line, I would definitely approach the person and ask for clarity." Long Answers "If I was unfairly criticized in private, then I would initiate dialog asking why he or she thought this way. I would try to understand their point of view and explain my point of view. If I was unfairly criticized in public, then I would be a little upset but I would wait to address the problem until the person criticizing me was alone. I would do this because if I'm upset, I wouldn't want to start an argument without thinking. So after some time, I would approach the person and ask him or her why I was criticized. If it was justified, then I would use that as constructive criticism to improve myself. If not, then I would tell that person that it isn't good to publicly criticize someone when they are not sure if it is correct." This is a professional answer, but it could sound like you are a weak person. If you want an example of becoming upset, then this is how I would get upset in a professional way. "If I'm publicly criticized unjustly, I would immediately ask that person on what grounds he or she is saying that. One of my pet peeves is putting someone down in public and if I don't say anything there, then this person is getting away with something terrible, and everyone there will think I did something wrong. I would keep my temper in check but make sure that people know the criticism wasn't justified."What are you looking to gain from your next job?
"What are you looking to gain from your next job?" The answer will depend on where you are in your career. If you are new, then you want to gain more experience and learn a wide variety of things. If you have a lot of previous experience, you might want to find something challenging and more opportunities for growth. Short Answers "I want a position where I'll be challenged. I want to learn a lot of new things and I want to continually grow. So I'm looking for a job that will provide these things for me." "I want to gain experience in many areas of accounting. I want a position where things are not routine and where many of my accounting skills are utilized." "In my next job, I want more opportunities to write automation. In my previous position, we didn't have these opportunities because we outsourced this work to other groups." Long Answer "For the last several years, I have done a wide variety of things. I have set my goals and continually moved forward. I have worked in a time constraint environment, juggled many tasks at one time, and even managed several people. However, one of my goals is to improve my creative side of design. Working for a large company demands a lot of work from each designer. So although creating graphics came naturally for me, I never had the luxury of creating work without being pulled in four different directions. So I want to find a position where I can use more of my creativity." This is a stronger answer than the generic one about learning and finding something challenging. This answer displays a lot of experience, ability to work hard, and the ability to deliver items quickly. This person answers by saying he wants to find a position where he can use more creativity, while showing off his credentials as a good worker.What aspects of this job interest you the most?
"What aspects of this job interest you the most?" This is a question to see how interested you are in the position. For this question, how you talk will be more important than what you say. Many people fail interviews due to the lack of enthusiasm, so make sure you sound excited when you answer this question. Short Answers "I'm very excited about this job because of the variety of different work. I'm well rounded and it's always exciting when I can use many of my skills for a job." "The most interesting aspect of this job is the product you're working on. I think it's so exciting working on a product that twelve million people use. I want to be on a team where my work will make many people enjoy our product more." "I like the fact that this position requires someone who is detail oriented. Because we're working with sensitive data, it's important that all the information is perfect. This type of challenge always interested me." Long Answer "Ever since I was studying mechanical engineering in college, I had a strong interest in automobile engines. This position is to help the engine design team to create better fuel efficient cars. When I read that, it really jumped out to me. I knew I really wanted this position because it combined my interest and my experience into one. So being on a team where I can work on something I love is what appeals to me the most." Listen to how this example is said more than the words. You really have to convey the message that you are interested in the job.If you are given work from your manager that is boring and tedious, what will you do?
"If you are given work from your manager that is boring and tedious, what will you do?" This is an important question for the manager. If you are hired on as a analyst and you have to do some data entry, you might not be happy about it. But if there it has to be done, then the manager has to assign the work to someone. They want to find out if you are the type of person who is willing to work on boring and tedious things. The long answer is the answer I gave when I was asked this question. Short Answer "If it's helping the company in any way, I don't mind doing boring work." "My responsibility as an employee is to help the company succeed. If the work I'm given will help the company, then I'll do the best that I can no matter if it's boring or tedious." "I don't mind doing boring and tedious work. As long as I don't have to do it for a long duration such as six months, then I really wouldn't have a problem." Long Answer "I trust that management knows what is best for the project. Whatever work I'm given, I'm going to do my best knowing that it's helping the entire company. I'm more oriented towards the success of the company and I'll do whatever it takes to help out. So I wouldn't mind doing boring and tedious work for awhile." This answer is showing loyalty and being able to sacrifice personal interest for the success of the company. Maybe it was this question that helped me pass my third interview.How long do you plan on staying with this company?
"How long do you plan on staying with this company?" This question is usually asked to the people who move between jobs frequently. They do not want to hire someone who will leave after several months. The hiring process costs the company money and time and they want to hire someone who is looking to stay for awhile. I recommend saying you want to stay for a long time. Short Answers "To tell you the truth, I have been working and gaining experience to get into this company. This is where I want to be and I plan on staying a long time if I'm offered the job." "The only time I get bored is if there is no work to do. As long as there's a lot of work, then I'll be happy and stay a long time. I'm a busy body and I need to do work." "This company has everything I'm looking for. It provides the type of work I love, the employees are all happy, and the environment is great. I plan on staying a long time." "One of my goals is to obtain a position in this company. I know that once I start working here, it'll be for a long time." Long Answer "As far as I can tell, this company has everything I'm looking for. I enjoy this type of work and the benefits at this company are great. I'm looking for a long term position and if there are opportunities for advancement and growth here, then I want to stay for a long time." This is another question you can answer in a short way. You don't want to answer with a single line answer because it doesn't sound believable. So a couple of sentences explaining what you want will convince them that you want to stay for a long time.How do you explain the fact that you frequently change jobs?
"How do you explain the fact that you frequently change jobs? I see that you haven't stayed with a company for more than 2 years." To pass this question, you have to convince them that you are going to stick around. This isn't a question to see what you know or what your philosophy is, it is a concern they have that you have to address. Your persuasion skill will be required for this answer. But if you can't be persuasive, convince them through step by step facts that leads to the fact that you are going to stay with this company if they hire you. Short Answers "I have been gaining experience and knowledge to have the minimum requirements to work for this company. My goal is to work for this company, and I'll be working here a long time because this is where I want to be." "I planned on staying with my current job for a longer time period, but when this position opened up, I really wanted to apply because this company has everything I need. So even though I change jobs frequently, I'm certain that I love this industry and that this is a great company to work for. I plan on staying a long time." "I want to work for a large company that has many opportunities. I didn't receive this in my other companies because they were smaller, but I learned this company has a lot of great work to do and a lot of different opportunities." Long Answer "To tell you the truth, early in my career, I didn't know what I wanted to do. I've been in a couple different industries, and it wasn't until my last position that I found exactly what I wanted to be doing. I stayed with my previous company for more than a year but there weren't enough opportunities. I finally found what I love to do and now I want to find a company where I can be a part of the company instead of a worker that has no interest in the overall company. I'm being careful to choose my next job because I want to establish my career in my next job, and after researching, I found that ABC Company can provide everything I'm looking for. So I'll definitely be here for the long term." This answer is a little long, but if you don't convince them that you are going to stay long, then you have a very little chance of being hired. So take whatever time you need to convince them. If you think of your own answer, write it down and be able to say it smoothly so they can fully understand that you are serious about staying.Tell me about a time you had a big disagreement with your boss.
"Tell me about a time you had a big disagreement with your boss. What did you do and what was the outcome?" Here is another 'tell me about' question. You will have to think of an example of your own. The items you need to include in your answer should consist of you showing proper communication, taking appropriate action, and ending with a good outcome. It's perfectly natural to disagree with your boss. It is important how you react when you have a disagreement. Show the interviewer that you are professional about disagreements. "I never really had a big disagreement with my manager. The only thing I can think of was when I recently got back from a business trip, my manager told me I had to go on another one the next day. In my previous company, it wasn't common to send someone on a business trip immediately, but another employee got sick so I had to fill in." "I had a disagreement with my boss on how to do an assignment. It was easy to resolve by having a discussion on the pro's and con's of both methods. We didn't come to any conclusion which way was better, and I ended up performing the work the way my manager wanted. This was because in case I couldn't finish the assignment, he could easily pick up where I left off." "I don't think I've had a large disagreement with my boss before, but I do remember a small disagreement. I received an email from my boss telling me that he wants me to stop the work I was doing on my project and give it to a co-worker. He wanted me to start on a new project immediately. I spent two and a half weeks on this project and I only had three days left. I really wanted to finish this and it didn't make sense for me to hand this project off to someone else. So I put some thought into it, went over to my boss's office, and asked him why this project couldn't wait three days. He made his argument and I still didn't agree. We discussed this for a while and we compromised by having someone help me finish the project I was working on so I can have some time to kick start the next project. That's the only experience I had with a disagreement, but I learned that it only takes simple dialog and a little compromise to overcome a disagreement." I know this answer is long, but all types of 'tell me about' questions are long. You have to tell a story in the shortest way for them to understand while explaining the disagreement along with the outcome. It's a huge question and it will take a long time to master 'tell me about' questions. That is why you should diligent on these types of questions.What do you do when there is no work to do?
"What do you do when there is no work to do?" The interviewer wants to find out what type of person you are. Are you a busy body looking for work, or are you a lazy person doing only the work that they tell you to do? This question will determine just that so make sure you give them an answer showing your great work habits. Short Answers "I always try to be productive even if there isn't much work to do. I use my time to find areas of improvement within the office, take time to study new things that will help me on future projects, and volunteer to help other coworkers that might have too much work." "Usually when I have nothing to do, I ask my manager if any of my peers need help. If not, then I usually spend time studying material that will help me on my next project." "As a sales associate, there are many times when there is no work. But I always stay busy by cleaning and rearranging the items I'm selling before customers come in." "When I have no direct work, I always find side project such as thinking about a process of some sort that helps with office efficiency. One time, I created a small tool using MS Word that helped our team speed up the mailing process." Long Answer "I'm a type of person who hates not having work to do. In my last position, I frequently asked my supervisor for more work when I finished early. And in times when there really is no work, I go around searching for work and if I'm still unsuccessful, I'll try to make work that will make existing processes more efficient. So I believe there never is a time when there is no work to do." Would you want a person like this? I think most companies will love an employee who wants to continually work. So the example is the type of answer you should give.What do you do when there are too many things to do?
"What do you do when there are too many things to do?" When someone is busy, it is important to take some time to organize and prioritize the work. Many people just try to work faster, but that doesn't really help. Planning and working smarter is the best answer when times get busy. Short Answers "I usually plan, organize, prioritize and then work real hard. I always keep my cool and work on one item after another. I found that this is efficient instead of worrying about how much work there is to do." "I really like it when there is so much work. I'm a fast and efficient worker and I like taking challenges that are big. With proper planning and execution, I have always managed to complete all my tasks." "I regain my composure, take a deep breath, and work diligently. If there is a chance that I might not finish something due to the size of the work item, I'll inform my manager and make sure my manager is aware of my situation." "I believe in hard work. A lot can get accomplished by working diligently. In a situation where there are many things to do, I'll reprioritize my work, plan and organize as much as I can and work hard." Long Answer "For me, the busier it gets, the more I organize and plan. Some people might think I could use the time I spend in planning out my day to work on something, but I realized how efficient I can work when I organize my work ahead of time and plan out my day thoroughly. Also, it prevents me from panicking or from blowing up from the pressure. I learned from my previous manager that when there are many things to do, you should work smarter instead of faster." You can answer by saying that you will work harder or work faster or even work overtime, but people with experience knows that working smarter by planning and organizing comes from experience. So even if you don't have much experience, this type of answer can make you look like you have been in this type of position many times and overcame them.What do you do when you feel burned out?
"What do you do when you feel burned out?" If you never burn out, then you are either superman or you don't work that hard. It is ok to admit to burning out at times, and you should provide an answer that shows how you deal with the times when you do get burned out. Short Answers "I think it's important to anticipate being burned out before it happens. But if a deadline requires me to work so much that I end up being burned out, I try to relax myself and get reenergized by not thinking about work at home and watching a good movie." "When I feel burned out, I go to the gym and work out. This actually helps me because it moves the focus from my mind to my body. After a good work out, I really feel mentally rejuvenated." "I usually use the weekends to engage in my personal hobbies to prevent me from burning out. I like to play tennis and golf, and these activities keep me mentally energized to work hard in the office." Long Answer "I try to prevent burning out by maintaining a healthy balanced life. I try to engage in personal hobbies outside of work such as playing the guitar or going for a hike. They keep me energized to work hard in the office. But if I do feel burned out, I like to rent a movie and relax for the night." As you can tell, this is an easy answer. Many times a person who constantly works without a break can eventually become a bad employee by burning out. Being able to communicate exactly what you do during burnouts or how to prevent them indicates that you have balance. So simply listing a couple of hobbies and adding, 'keeps me energized to work hard in the office' is a good enough answer that the interviewer will accept.How do you balance both your family and your job?
"How do you manage having so many things to do such as work, family, and school?" "How do you balance both your family and your job?" This is another easy answer where you can show your willingness to work hard. But it is unlikely you will get this question. Most of the time, the interviewer will ask this during small talk. When interviewing in America, I noticed there are many times where small talk is important. For example, walking together to the office could take two minutes. Are you going to say nothing during those two minutes? What if the interviewer asks how your day is going? He or she is basically initiating small talk. So it is definitely possible you will engage in small talk, and you should definitely practice small talk. "With my kids in school, it's really easy to manage my time. I have the full day to myself and I want to be productive by helping a company grow." "I'm very organized and I plan everything I do. This helps me to easily find a balance between family and work." "Well, during the day while my kids are in school, I like to work. And in the evenings we spend time together doing homework. I really enjoy being busy and managing multiple things in my life." This is a short answer that shows the ability of multi-tasking. Also, a person who enjoys being busy is a good sign. So even if you receive questions during small talk, make sure to give answers that show good traits.You've been with one company your entire career. Don't you think you will have a tough time adjusting to a new environment?
"You've been with one company your entire career. Don't you think you will have a tough time adjusting to a new environment?" If this is the case and you have been with only one company your entire career, then the best way to answer this question is to say how many changes you experienced in your previous position. Then it will sound like you are good with change and can adapt to new situations easily. Short Answers "In my company, my projects changed very frequently and I was required to ramp up on new technologies. I'm also very friendly and like to meet new people. So I think I'll have an easy time adjusting to a new environment." "I actually like being in new environments. I like to travel a lot and even when I'm in a different country, I have always blended in smoothly." "I don't think it will be very difficult. I learned that this company is very diverse and has a great office environment. I feel I'll blend right in and make solid contributions to this company." Long Answer "Although I've been with one company, I have experienced many changes and new roles in my career. For example, during the middle of a long project, the vice president sent out a group wide mail completely changing our direction. We had to basically start from scratch with half the time left. It felt like I was a new employee again having to ramp up on new technology, reading up on instructional documentation, and learn new applications. So through my experience dealing with change and adjusting to new projects, I am confident I will not have a tough time adjusting to this new environment." Saying this confidently is the key. It's not an important question, but more like a question verifying that you are willing and capable of new things. But the more you convince them of your abilities to change, then the better you will appear.What have you heard about our company that you didn't like?
"What have you heard about our company that you didn't like?" This is an unusual question but just in case you will need an answer. After researching and you find out that everything is good, you can basically say that you couldn't find anything wrong. Try to mix in humor if you can since this is an odd question. Also, take a moment to pretend to be thinking about the question before answering immediately. "From my research, I didn't find anything I disliked. This company provides great benefits, works on exciting products, and is listed in the top 100 companies to work for." "When I search for a job, I always look for negative things. However, I didn't find anything that I didn't like. That's why I'm very excited to have this opportunity to work here." "Hmmm... I read up on this company thoroughly and even spoke with a friend who works here. I didn't hear anything negative about ABC Company. Is there something I should know before working here?" The last sentence in the answer is a question you should say with a slight smile. That should lighten the tension a little and show that you are fully confident.Do you want to work for a small or large company and why?
"Do you want to work for a small or large company and why?" This all depends on what size company you are interviewing for. Usually, large companies will not ask this question. But if they do, make sure you mention you want to work for a large company because of the resources, the training, and other things you can think of. More likely, a smaller company will ask you this wondering why you would choose a small company. The best way to answer this question is to first think about what a small company can provide over a big company. The most significant advantage of working for a small company is having the opportunity to work on a variety of tasks. "I want to work for a large company because there are different opportunities within the company. I also feel a larger company provides better training. Finally, a larger company already has key processes in place to provide employees tools to work efficiently." "I worked for a small company for a year and missed out on a lot of benefits a larger company provides such as training, structured work environment, and a wider variety of work. So I want to work for a large company." "I want to work for a small company because I feel I'll have more opportunities to gain valuable experience. I know some friends in large companies and they have specific roles that limit what they're capable of doing. I'm hoping that a small company will have more variety and challenges for each employee." This is pretty short but to the point. It displays wanting to learn and an eagerness to try a variety of things.What do you do when you're having difficulty solving a problem?
"What do you do when you're having difficulty solving a problem?" There are many different ways to approach this answer. So there are many right answers. Just remember to explain yourself step by step. Short Answers "I usually take a short break. I found that this helps me think clearer and often times I end up solving the problem." "I break down the problem piece by piece and try and solve difficult problems step by step. This approach helps me not to get overwhelmed by difficult problems." "I always do my best solving difficult problems. If I have trouble, I'll use resources around me such as looking through the Internet, asking co-workers, asking my manager, or looking through some books." Long Answer "There are couple things I do when I'm having a problem. Sometimes I try to focus so hard that I miss a point that would help me solve the problem. So I take a 2 minute break to help me approach the problem in a different way. I could either go get a drink of water, or stand up and move around. I find that this helps me at times. But if I still continue to have problems, I don't mind asking a co-worker for some assistance. I believe in using all the resources around me and I think co-workers should use me as a resource as well." This answer first tries to solve the problem without bothering another person. But if everything fails, it is ok to ask questions to someone else.What do you do when you have a problem with a direct?
"What do you do when you have a problem with a direct?" This is more of a question for management. There are multiple ways you can answer this, but you should show that you are responsible and that you know how to resolve these types of problems. Short Answers "I believe in open communication. I always analyze the problem and then tell my direct clearly. I always provide steps that we both can take to deal with the problem. This approach helps me because it shows my respect." "In this situation, I believe communication is very important. I'll usually have a meeting with my direct on the problems I have. It's easier to work on a problem together when everyone involved is aware, so I always communicate the problems that I see." "I believe feedback is important to solve problems with a direct. I meet with my directs regularly and always provide suggestions on how to improve. I also use this time to work out problems we might have. It's important to let my directs know where I stand so they don't have to make assumptions." Long Answer "Because I'm the manager, I feel it's my responsibility to improve the relationship. If the problem is work related, I'll narrow the problem down whether it's with his working style or another type of problem and assist in anyway I can. This would also involve providing feedback and suggestions on how to approach problems. But if our personality's conflict then I would try to be more understanding."What do you do when you have a problem with your boss?
"What do you do when you have a problem with your boss?" This question is a little easier for me because I haven't had many directs I didn't like. It is easier to tell a manager your problems because they are in a position where they should accept listening to your problems. So in this case, I would answer it by showing some honesty trait. Short Answers "I'm very open with my manager. I feel it's important that my manager knows about how I feel. I always start a conversation and try and solve our differences through professional conversation." "When I have a problem with my boss, I don't like to keep it bottled up. I want to resolve problems so I can work efficiently without distractions. So I always talk to my manager about the problems that I have openly." "I deal with different types of people very well, but if I have a problem that affects my work, I will openly tell my manager and the reason why it's bothering me." Long Answer "I'm a very honest and open person. So anytime I have a problem with my boss, I always let him or her know. I make a list of things that bother me. I ask my boss for time to chat and I reveal these problems and the reasons for them. I want to make sure I'm not being offensive or sound like I'm accusing my boss of anything."What do you do when you have a problem with your job?
"What do you do when you have a problem with your job?" Nobody likes to be working when there is a problem with the job. You can hate it, or you could be too busy and too tired. What ever the reason, it is best to show that you will look for the problem and take measures to solve it. Short Answers "In this situation, I ask myself why I'm having the problem. After identifying it, I work on solving the problems so I can be more efficient in my work." "It depends on the specific problem, but in most cases, I'll face the problem that I have with my job and find a solution. If I avoid the problem, it will always be there and my work quality will decrease. So I found that solving the problems immediately helps me in the long term." "If I have a problem that I can solve, I'll do everything I can to correct it. If the problem is out of my control, I feel it's important to let my manager know what my problems are." "Whether I'm happy or unhappy, I'll always do my best work. If the problem I have with my job is affecting the quality of my work, I'll identify the problem and then take steps to find solutions."What do you do when you have a problem with a co-worker?
"What do you do when you have a problem with a co-worker?" Usually when two co-workers have a problem, then they will just hate each other and try to be better than the other. You can't say this because it is the wrong way to handle it. I would probably not deal with the problem and hate the other person, but that is not what I would say in an interview. You can mention that you believe having to deal with a problem with a co-worker is difficult because competitiveness comes into factor. Along with this statement, follow up with how you would try to look beyond that to make your relationship better. Short Answers "If I have a problem with a co-worker, I believe it's so important to talk to them. Even if I'm the one with the problem, I want to know so I can be a better team mate." "If I have a problem, I try to approach my co-worker and let them know as professionally as possible. If I'm the one with the problem, I'll politely ask what I can do to improve the relationship. I found that proper communication solves many problems." "I've always been told that I'm a great person to work with, but if I were in a situation where I was having a problem, I believe I would work on our relationship by being more understanding." Long Answer "Well it all depends on if it's a personality conflict or an issue that is causing the problem. An issue is easy to deal with. I think I'd go and talk with the co-worker saying something like, 'If you have some time, I think it will be good for us if we talk about this issue.' Starting a conversation to deal with the problem with a co-worker is the hardest step, and if it's done properly, then the issue can easily be resolved. If it is a personality issue, then I would try to be more understanding and at worst deal with the problem by anticipating conflicts ahead of time to put myself in a position to either avoid it or to make it less of a problem." This is showing answers by using scenarios. It is a solid answer but if you disagree, feel free to think of a good scenario that will fit you better.How do you handle conflict?
"How do you handle conflict?" This is a general question. It doesn't ask if you are the one with the conflict, if it is a conflict with another person, if it is a conflict of schedule, or if it is a conflict with changes at work. If you want, you can ask a question to clarify. But if you want to answer in a general way, try to think of an answer that will work for all types of conflict. Short Answers "I treat most conflicts the same. I analyze the conflict and create a list of steps I can take to resolve it. By thinking about these steps and taking action, I found that most conflicts are easy to handle." "I handle conflicts by analyzing them. I'm a very analytical person and I feel all problems have a solution. I usually think about the conflict and find ways to deal with it." "Whenever I'm confronted with a conflict, I always follow a simple process. I think about what the current conflict is, think of several ways I can deal with this conflict, and then take the best action after my analysis." Long Answer "Whenever I have a conflict I have to deal with, I like to follow a simple process. I first identify the problem causing the conflict, think about solutions or ideas that will solve the problem, and then try to implement a solution. Although it's very simple, it makes sure that I'm not panicking, losing my temper or losing control of the situation. And it prevents me from rushing into a decision that might make the problem worse." This is an answer that could be applied to all types of conflicts. It doesn't state the exact situations of each conflict, but it does state why following a process is good. The interviewer will not think this is an original idea. However, the answer provides reasons why it helps. These reasons are the key to the answer and it shows that you are organized and in control. This answer, without the last sentence is just mediocre. But the last sentence makes is very strong.Have you fired anyone?
"Have you fired anyone? And if so, why?" If you fired someone before, then that means you are a manager or hire. If your answer is no, then this is an easy question. But if you answer yes, then you have to give a reason why. If you say I fired one of our employees because he or she couldn't do the work properly, then this is a regular answer that will not help you. Large corporations have a procedure they follow to fire someone. If you can incorporate using the process of firing into your own experience, then the answer will be stronger. Here is an example. Short Answers "I've never had to fire anyone yet, but if I'm in this situation, I would follow company policy and do it professionally." "I had to fire one employee who continually failed to complete projects. Before firing this employee, I tried to work with him by motivating, encouraging, and even providing different work. In the end, nothing worked and I had no choice but to let him go." "The only time I had to fire someone was when an employee was continually late. We have a company policy of giving a verbal warning for the first three offenses, and then a written warning after the 3rd offense. I had many discussions about this problem with this employee, but it didn't help. In the end, we had to let him go." Long Answers "When I was a managing a group of 4 people in my last position, I unfortunately had to fire one of them. The person was unable to perform at an acceptable level for a long period of time. Our company has a process in place of trying to grow our employees, empower them, and help them find their strengths, but nothing helped. I put the person on probation and explained that he will have to try harder. But after seeing bad performance due to a lack of effort for a long time, I had to fire him." Another approach to this question is to take a strong stance on performance. As I said before, if the answer is different and creative, the interviewer will remember it more and that means they will remember you more. Then your chances of getting the job increase more than others. Here is an example of an answer that the interviewer will remember. "Oh yeah, I fired a lot of people. All of the reasons were the same. They were not performing their jobs. I believe in good management. I believe I should mentor and help grow our employees. This is a business and we need to do whatever we can to help our company grow. One of the biggest factors on the success of a company is having great employees. So I won't hesitate to fire someone that isn't performing their job. It leaves more room to bring in someone who will benefit the company." This is an answer I would be willing to use. But before using this answer, you must first look at the type of person asking this question and determine if he or she will like it. If the person is a strong person that shows no emotion, then it might be good. But if a person is very friendly, then that person might not like it. Even though it is a good answer, a friendly person might not like it because it could indicate that you are a cold person. Basically friendly people don't like cold people and if you have to work together, they might not want to work with you. So be careful on using this type of answer.What do you do when a worker is giving the team more problems than helping?
"What do you do when a worker is giving the team more problems than helping?" If you have a lot of team work experience, you know that there are a lot of people like this. It is a fact that some people actually slow down the work than help the work. That is why this is a good question to ask. A good employee will know how to handle this situation. A bad employee will do all the work themselves. Although doing the work is good, it doesn't show that you can deal with different types of people. Short Answers "I follow a process of helping my coworker out in any way I can. This can include assistance in their portion of the work or by encouragement. If that doesn't work, then we redistribute the work to make sure everything is covered. I believe it's important to let my manager know of the problem as well." "If the problem is related to a difficult task that a coworker cannot solve, then I'll get all the team members to help out. But if the problem is due to laziness or unwillingness to work, then I'll inform my manager of the problem." "It's hard to deal with a worker that puts in great effort but slows down the team. I noticed it is best to tackle the problem early. One way I found that was helpful was to be more firm. This way, the project continues to move forward without so many interruptions due to small arguments." Long Answer "I've been in this situation a couple of times. One time, we organized and distributed easier work to the worker with problems. But this is only a short term solution. Most of the time, I end up spending a lot of time helping the person out. It might have been quicker if the rest of the team members did all the work, but I figure helping this person now will benefit us in our next project. Although this method doesn't work all the time, I really get excited when it does work. Then I know I really helped another person succeed and this in turn helps the company." This answer will also work if you leave out the last two sentences. But I included the last two sentences to emphasize that helping other people succeed is really the truth instead of just words. If you choose the right way to say something, it sounds much more believable.When do you know enough is enough when dealing with a subordinate that doesn't seem to be helping?
"When do you know enough is enough when dealing with a subordinate that doesn't seem to be helping?" This is another good management question. The best way to answer this question is with a procedure in mind. Basically after you tried everything, then enough is enough. But what exactly is everything. You can't use everything because that shows you really don't know. Instead of the word everything, list out all the steps so the interviewer believes you know what to do in this situation. "I know enough is enough when I've exhausted all measures to help this employee grow. I would do my part by providing encouragement, giving extra instructions, mentoring, and giving different types of work. If I exhaust all of these steps, then I know I can't do anything further and that is when enough is enough."Do you like to work by yourself or with others?
"Do you like to work by yourself or with others?" Even if you have a strong preference to work alone or with others, the best answer is to say both. Even if a job is mostly about working alone, there might be some team work involved. Most employers want someone who can work well in a team and work well alone. "That's a tough question... I like the combination of the two. It's great working in teams while getting and sharing ideas with each other, but it's also nice to sit at your desk and work hard productively. I like to do both so it's hard to choose one over the other." If they insist on choosing one, then choose the one that is relevant to the job you are interviewing for. Make sure you pause a little before saying so. "If I had to choose just one, then... I'd probably choose to work alone."How do you get along...
How do you get along... This isn't a very popular question because it's hard to learn about the person answering. The answers are all going to be the same. It's just a matter of how you say it. Because there isn't anything exciting to say here, you should show friendly characteristics so it is believable. These answers can be short. It really doesn't matter how long the answer is but you have to make sure you show your friendliness through your voice. "How do you get along with your subordinates?" "My relationship with my directs is very good. They're very open and honest with me and I'm sure they feel they can come to me with any problems." "How do you get along with your co-workers?" "I've always had an easy time getting along with different types of people. So I never had a problem getting along with my co-workers. I consider many of them my friends." "How do you get along with your superiors?" "I've had my share of great managers and mediocre managers, but I've always gotten along with all of them very well. I've rarely had conflicts with them and if there was an issue, I always talked it over with them."Do you have any physical problems that may limit your ability to perform this job?
The questions and answers in the miscellaneous section are rather short. It doesn't fit into a specific category, but they are possible interview questions. Most of the questions are more like small talk questions and they are used to get to know you in a personal way. It is important to find out the personality of a candidate as well as their abilities, so you will probably be asked some of the questions in the miscellaneous section. "Do you have any physical problems that may limit your ability to perform this job?" If it is a construction job, then of course you have to be physically fit. But even an administrative job will require some physical abilities. For example, an administrative assistant working in a computer company will have to be able to lift a computer. Answering this question is pretty straight forward. You don't have to impress them with anything special. "No. I believe I'll be able to physically perform all tasks for this position."What do you do to stay in shape?
"What do you do to stay in shape?" Staying in physical shape also helps the brain function better. It really doesn't matter if you are completely in shape or not. But being active indicates that you are not a lazy couch potato. "I like to take long walks with my dog on a regular basis, and I also go on weekly hikes at a trail near my house." "I work out at a gym a couple times a week. I like to stay active." "I play for a co-ed softball team. It's fun and it gives me a little exercise." All these examples will work. It doesn't have to be long but you should answer with something that indicates that you are active.What do you like to do when you're not in the office?
"What do you like to do when you're not in the office?" This is another question where they want to find out some of your hobbies. Basically, you can answer this question similar to how you would answer, what are your hobbies. "When I'm not in the office, I like to play golf, read magazines, and spend time with my wife." "Well, I like the piano so I have piano lessons on a weekly basis. I also like gardening, so I work on my yard a lot. But if I want to relax, I like to watch videos at night." Something short and simple is the best answer. No need to elaborate on why.What's the most recent book you read?
"What's the most recent book you read?" If you are interviewing for a marketing position, don't say you are reading a book called International Marketing Strategies. Rather, answer with a novel such as Michael Crichton books or John Grisham books. It is more realistic and shows other interests that you have. "I just finished The Runaway Jury by John Grisham. I find all of his books very entertaining." "I have a strong interest in World War II, so I was reading a book about Hitler. It's quite interesting to see how he grew up and what lead him to his hatred towards the Jews." Something simple like this will be good enough.What is the most recent movie you saw?
"What is the most recent movie you saw?" You can either answer by using a similar answer to the recent book question, or you can say that you don't watch movies that much. "The last movie I saw was The Last Samurai. I thought it was great." "Oh gosh... it's been a while since I've seen a movie. I think it was Spider Man. I like to spend my time outside, so I don't see movies that often." Both of these answers are fine. Whether you like to see movies or not, just tell them exactly what you think. Your answers will be more natural. If you answer these types of questions awkwardly, they might get the impression that you are uncomfortable or that you are not capable of small talk. So answer without thinking too much about these questions.Did you have any trouble finding this place?
"Did you have any trouble finding this place?" This question is not an interview question, but a question usually asked by an interviewer right when you see them. This is especially common if the building location is hard to find. Here is another question you should tell exactly what happened. "No problem at all. I checked for directions on the Internet and found it pretty easily." "A little bit. I didn't realize that there was another building back here, so I drove by a couple times, but that's ok, I eventually found it." With the first answer, they will say something like, that's good. Then they will move on to other questions. If you answer with the second question, they will probably talk a little more about how he or she agrees that this building is hard to find. Either answers are acceptable.Will working on weekends be a problem?
"Will working on weekends be a problem?" If the interviewer is asking this question, then this position is probably going to requires some weekend work. Maybe it's not a lot, but they want to make sure that if something goes wrong and more work is required, you will be able to work on weekends. I recommend answer by saying it will not be a problem. If you want to find out how often you will have to work weekends, you can ask it after answering the question. "It shouldn't be a problem at all. I frequently worked on weekends in my other position, especially during tax season. How often is weekend work required here on average?" This answer is stating that it is no problem. It also supports the answer by saying I have worked on weekends in my previous group. And the last sentence is an example how you can ask them about weekend work.How do you feel about overtime?
"How do you feel about overtime?" If this is an hourly job, then pay is given to employees working extra hours. If it is a salary position, most of the time they will not ask this question because they expect you to work overtime. But expect this position to have some overtime requirements if the interviewer is asking this question. "I don't mind working overtime at all. I know during busy times people are expected to work more, and I'm flexible with my hours so I won't have a problem."Have you filed for bankruptcy?
"Have you filed for bankruptcy?" This question is for positions that deal with finance and money. You might see this question if you are interviewing for a banker position, a financial analyst position, or a stock broker. If money is a factor, then they want someone who is responsible with money. Just simply tell them the truth. If you have filed for bankruptcy, then you probably shouldn't be applying for this job anyway. So I'm going to give only one answer of no. "No. I'm very responsible with money and I have great credit."Do you own or rent your home?
"Do you own or rent your home?" Renting or owning a home sometimes indicates your financial status. Renters are usually people who do not have enough down payment for a house or people with bad credit who cannot get a loan. So it is best to have your own home, but if you don't, then give them an answer that shows you are preparing to buy a home. "I'm currently renting, but I plan on buying my own place next year." "I'm renting right now, but I'll probably buy a house when I get married." If you own your house, then a simple, "I own my house." will be a good enough answer.Do you have any outside income?
"Do you have any outside income?" This might be a job interview question, or it could be a question when you are talking to a creditor. In either case, you can simply reply with a yes or no. If it is a yes, then briefly tell them the other source of income. "I get paid child support from my ex-husband." "I have a rental property." "No. I do not."Do you earn any income from investments or hobbies?
"Do you earn any income from investments or hobbies?" If you are active in the stock market, then you can mention something like that. Another income from investment is from your savings account or mutual funds. Whatever it is, simply tell them what it is. "I have a savings account that I earn a little extra income from." "I have some mutual funds that perform about 8% a year." "I have some investments in the stock market."Are you willing to travel?
"Are you able to make frequent business trips?" "Are you willing to travel?" If they are asking this, then this position probably requires some traveling. If you say no, then you probably won't get hired because they want someone who is able to travel. But depending on your job, you will already know if it requires traveling or not. "I know as an auditor that I'll have to make business trips. So I'm definitely willing to travel." "I don't have any problems with traveling."Are you willing to relocate?
"Are you willing to relocate?" This is a tough question because relocating means moving to a completely new area. It might be ok to answer with a no, but I would answer with a maybe. Here is an example. "I guess it would depend on the location and the pay. If everything is the same, I would rather stay here because this is where I grew up. But I would be willing to consider it." This answer is not saying yes or no. This is saying maybe in a polite way. Don't answer with a direct maybe. That is bad. Instead use something similar to my example. If you are willing to relocate, it is an easy answer. "I love change and I'd definitely be willing to relocate."May I contact your current employer?
"May I contact your current employer?" This all depends on if your current employer knows that you are searching for another job. If you are not employeed, they might ask if they can contact your former employer. Regardless, the best answer is to say yes. If not, then they will think you have something to hide. "Yes. Do you have their contact information?"May I contact your references?
"May I contact your references?" The only correct answer to this question is a yes. If they have your references, then a simple yes will be enough. If they do not, then answer yes and offer them a list. "Sure. After the interview, I can email or fax you a list of references. Will that be ok?"Is there anything else you want to add?
"Is there anything else I should know?" "Is there anything else you want to add?" Adding one more sentence to state one more thing never hurts. But choose carefully because it is their last impression of you. If you felt you didn't show that much enthusiasm, here is your chance. Or if you feel that they didn't ask you about one of your strong traits, you have a chance to state it. "I don't know if I expressed it that well, but I'm very excited about this position. I'm confident that I can do very well here." "One final trait that I have that would be perfect for this position is my organizational skills. I'm very detailed and plan very well."What kind of salary are you looking for?
"What kind of salary are you looking for?" "What pay range are you looking for?" There are a couple of ways to answer this. If you state a figure, you risk stating something that is too high, or something that is too low. Either case, you will not benefit from this question. A lot of people suggest saying something like, "I'm sure whatever I'm offered will be a fair price." But I don't agree. It is a safe answer, but if I was the interviewer, I would appreciate numbers instead of a safe answer. So I recommend answering this question with a range. I'll explain this more in the negotiation portion, but just in case you skip that section, here are some examples. "I'm expecting somewhere between $50,000 - $60,000." If you know the pay for the position you are applying for. Then giving a figure is not that bad. Just state something a little higher with a small range included "I know that the average pay for this position is roughly around $45,000, but because I have a couple years more experience, I would want something around $48,000 to $50,000." If the salary range is already included in the job description, then you can answer that you are willing to consider any offers stated in the job description. "The job description says that the salary will be around $45,000 to $53,000. I think it's a fair range."That's a high salary for this position! Where did you come up with that figure?
"That's a high salary for this position! Where did you come up with that figure?" If you said a figure that was too high, you might hear this question from the interviewer. This is not good because they would only ask this if the figure you stated was too high. So I would first justify the larger figure and explain that would consider a little less. "I have three more years of experience that will help a lot. I also have a college degree that is not stated as a requirement. But if the figure is too high, I would consider something a little less."How much do you currently get paid?
"How much do you currently get paid?" I don't think you can lie about this question. It's easy to find out the truth. I would recommend saying exactly how much you made. "I was paid $50,000 a year plus an 8% bonus." "I received $27.50 an hour at my last position."When are you able to start?
"When are you able to start?" If you are not working, then you are able to start immediately. But saying immediately sounds too desperate so tell them next Monday or something. If you are currently employed, then you have to show that you are responsible by giving your current employer a two week notice. "I'll be able to start as early as next Monday." "I have to give my current employer a two week notice so I could start immediately after that."Are you considering any other offers right now?
"Are you considering any other offers right now?" This question is not asking if you got an offer or not. It is asking if you are considering it. Regardless, you can tell them the truth. "I'm not considering any of my offers right now." "I was considering an offer I received last week, but I don't think I will be accepting that position." "I'm thinking about an offer I have, but I want to keep my options open."Asking Questions
Asking Questions Most of the time, the person interviewing you will ask if you have any questions. It is important that you ask intelligent and relevant questions. Make sure you prepare some questions before you interview so you can learn more about the company and the position. Here is a small list of questions you can ask. Feel free to create more of your own. "Do you have any questions?" "Does this job usually lead to other positions at the company?" "Tell me some of the skills that you want in a candidate for this position." "What are the people I'll be working with like?" "What do you like the most about this company and why?" "How is this company doing in comparison with competitors?" "I know of products x and y, does the company plan to introduce any new products?" "What is the company doing to maintain its market strength?" "How many employees work for this company?" "What has been the company's layoff history in recent years?" "Do you know of any anticipated cutbacks in any departments in the near future?" "What major problems has the company recently faced?" "What type of training do you provide here?" "What do you like best about this company?" "What position title will I be reporting to?" "What other departments does this department work closely with?" "What kind of training should I expect?" "How long is the training program?" "How did this position become available?" "Is a written job description available?" "Please describe a typical day for this position." "How long has this position been available?" "How many candidates have you interviewed for this position?" "How many total candidates will you be interviewing for this position?" "Do you interview a large number of people before making an offer to a person, or do you make an offer to the first person who is qualified?" "What type of hardware and software will I be working with?" "What will my workstation be like? Will it be an office, a cubicle, or a desk?" "What opportunities for advancement are available here?"1. Greetings
1.audio A: Hi, how are you doing? B: I'm fine. How about yourself? A: I'm pretty good. Thanks for asking. B: No problem. So how have you been? A: I've been great. What about you? B: I've been good. I'm in school right now. A: What school do you go to? B: I go to PCC. A: Do you like it there? B: It's okay. It's a really big campus. A: Good luck with school. B: Thank you very much. 2.audio A: How's it going? B: I'm doing well. How about you? A: Never better, thanks. B: So how have you been lately? A: I've actually been pretty good. You? B: I'm actually in school right now. A: Which school do you attend? B: I'm attending PCC right now. A: Are you enjoying it there? B: It's not bad. There are a lot of people there. A: Good luck with that. B: Thanks. 3.audio A: How are you doing today? B: I'm doing great. What about you? A: I'm absolutely lovely, thank you. B: Everything's been good with you? A: I haven't been better. How about yourself? B: I started school recently. A: Where are you going to school? B: I'm going to PCC. A: How do you like it so far? B: I like it so far. My classes are pretty good right now. A: I wish you luck. B: Thanks a lot.2. Weather (1)
1.audio A: It's an ugly day today. B: I know. I think it may rain. A: It's the middle of summer, it shouldn't rain today. B: That would be weird. A: Yeah, especially since it's ninety degrees outside. B: I know, it would be horrible if it rained and it was hot outside. A: Yes, it would be. B: I really wish it wasn't so hot every day. A: Me too. I can't wait until winter. B: I like winter too, but sometimes it gets too cold. A: I'd rather be cold than hot. B: Me too. 2.audio A: It doesn't look very nice outside today. B: You're right. I think it's going to rain later. A: In the middle of the summer, it shouldn't be raining. B: That wouldn't seem right. A: Considering that it's over ninety degrees outside, that would be weird. B: Exactly, it wouldn't be nice if it started raining. It's too hot. A: I know, you're absolutely right. B: I wish it would cool off one day. A: That's how I feel, I want winter to come soon. B: I enjoy the winter, but it gets really cold sometimes. A: I know what you mean, but I'd rather be cold than hot. B: That's exactly how I feel. 3.audio A: I wish it was a nicer day today. B: That is true. I hope it doesn't rain. A: It wouldn't rain in the middle of the summer. B: It wouldn't seem right if it started raining right now. A: It would be weird if it started raining in ninety degree weather. B: Any rain right now would be pointless. A: That's right, it really would be. B: I want it to cool down some. A: I know what you mean, I can't wait until it's winter. B: Winter is great. I wish it didn't get so cold sometimes though. A: I would rather deal with the winter than the summer. B: I feel the same way.3. Weather (2)
1.audio A: It's such a nice day. B: Yes, it is. A: It looks like it may rain soon. B: Yes, and I hope that it does. A: Why is that? B: I really love how rain clears the air. A: Me too. It always smells so fresh after it rains. B: Yes, but I love the night air after it rains. A: Really? Why is it? B: Because you can see the stars perfectly. A: I really hope it rains today. B: Yeah, me too. 2.audio A: Isn't it a nice day? B: It really is. A: It seems that it may rain today. B: Hopefully it will. A: How come? B: I like how clear the sky gets after it rains. A: I feel the same way. It smells so good after it rains. B: I especially love the night air when it rains. A: Really? Why? B: The stars look so much closer after it rains. A: I really want it to rain today. B: Yeah, so do I. 3.audio A: Don't you think it's nice out? B: Yes, I think so too. A: I think that it's going to rain. B: I hope that it does rain. A: You like the rain? B: The sky looks so clean after it rains. I love it. A: I understand. Rain does make it smell cleaner. B: I love most how it is at night after it rains. A: How come? B: You can see the stars so much more clearly after it rains. A: I would love for it to rain today. B: I would too.4. Weather (3)
1.audio A: I really want to go to the beach this weekend. B: That sounds like fun. What's the weather going to be like? A: I heard that it's going to be warm this weekend. B: Is it going to be perfect beach weather? A: I believe so. B: Good. I hope it doesn't cool off this weekend. A: I know. I really want to go to the beach. B: But you know that California weather is really unpredictable. A: You're right. One minute it's hot, and then the next minute it's cold. B: I really wish the weather would just stay the same. A: I do too. That way we can have our activities planned ahead of time. B: Yeah, that would make things a lot easier. 2.audio A: I would like to take a trip to the beach this weekend. B: A trip to the beach would be fun. How is the weather going to be? A: The forecast says that it will be warm on the weekend. B: So do you think it'll be perfect weather for the beach? A: It sounds like it will be. B: I really hope it doesn't get cold. A: That would ruin things, I want to go so badly. B: The weather in California is unpredictable, so you never know. A: That is true. The weather is constantly changing. B: It would be nice if the weather would never change. A: That would be great, then we could plan things sooner. B: True. Predictable weather would make life easier. 3.audio A: It would be nice to go to the beach sometime this weekend. B: What's the weather going to be like? I may want to go too. A: The weather this weekend is supposed to be warm. B: Will it be good beach weather? A: I think it will be. B: It wouldn't be good if it got cold this weekend. A: I want this trip to be perfect, I hope it stays warm. B: This California weather is so uncertain, it's impossible to know what'll happen. A: I know. Every day the weather seems different. B: I would love it if it wasn't always so unpredictable. A: That would make it easier for us to make plans. B: I know. Things are easier when you know what the weather's going to be like.5. Calling a Friend
1.audio A: Hello, may I speak to Alice please? B: This is she. How's it going? A: I've been trying to call you all day. B: Sorry about that. I was cleaning up. A: It's okay. B: So what were you calling me about? A: Oh, I just wanted to see if you wanted to hang out tomorrow. B: Sure, what did you want to do? A: Maybe we can go see a movie or something. B: That sounds like fun. Let's do it. A: I'll see you tomorrow then. B: See you then. Goodbye. 2.audio A: Hi, how are you. Is Alice there? B: Speaking. What's up? A: Why haven't you answered the phone? B: My bad, I had chores to do. A: That's all right. B: What was the reason for your call? A: I want to do something tomorrow with you. B: Sounds good. What did you have in mind? A: I was thinking about seeing a movie. B: Okay, let's go see a movie. A: Until then. B: Talk to you later. 3.audio A: Is Alice available? B: You're talking to her. A: I've called you a hundred times today. B: I was busy doing something. I apologize. A: No problem. B: Did you need something? A: Do you want to do something tomorrow? B: Is there somewhere special you wanted to go? A: How about a movie? B: A movie sounds good. A: Call me tomorrow then. B: I will see you tomorrow.6. Describing People
1.audio A: Have you seen the new girl in school? B: No, I haven't. A: She's really pretty. B: Describe her to me. A: She's not too tall. B: Well, how tall is she? A: She's about five feet even. B: What does she look like, though? A: She has pretty light brown eyes. B: I may know which girl you're talking about. A: So you have seen her around? B: Yes, I have. 2.audio A: There's a new girl in school, have you seen her yet? B: I haven't seen her yet. A: I think that she is very pretty. B: Tell me how she looks. A: She's kind of short. B: What height is she? A: She's probably about five feet. B: That's nice, but tell me what she looks like. A: The first thing I noticed was her beautiful brown eyes. B: I think I might've bumped into her before. A: Are you telling me that you've seen her before? B: I believe so. 3.audio A: Have you met the new girl? B: No. Have you? A: She's one of the prettiest girls at the school. B: What does she look like? A: Well, she's quite short. B: How tall would you say that she is? A: I would say she's only five feet. B: What about her facial features? A: She has light brown eyes, absolutely beautiful. B: I think I know who you're talking about. A: Have you seen her? B: I think that I have.7. Expressing Concern for Someone
1.audio A: Why weren't you at school yesterday? B: I wasn't really feeling well. A: What was wrong with you? B: My stomach was upset. A: Do you feel better now? B: I don't really feel too well yet. A: Do you want anything to make you feel better? B: No, thanks. I already took some medicine. A: I hope you feel better. B: Thank you. 2.audio A: What reason do you have for missing school? B: I was sick. A: How were you sick? B: I had a stomachache. A: Did it get any better? B: I'm still feeling under the weather. A: Would you like anything for your stomach? B: I took something earlier. A: Get better. B: Thanks a lot. 3.audio A: Why didn't you go to school yesterday? B: I stayed home because I wasn't feeling well. A: What was your problem? B: My stomach was bothering me. A: Are you feeling any better? B: I'm still feeling a little sick. A: I'm going to the store, would you like any Pepto Bismol? B: That's okay. A: I hope you feel better. B: I'd appreciate that.8. Expressing Joy at Someone's Success
1.audio A: Did you hear the good news? B: No, I haven't. A: I got a promotion at my job. B: Did you really? A: Seriously, I am so excited. B: Well, congratulations. A: Thank you. B: I'm so happy for you. A: Really? B: Yes. You really deserved this. A: You think so? B: Yes. Good for you. 2.audio A: Have you heard my good news? B: You haven't told me anything yet. A: I got a promotion at work earlier this week. B: Is that right? A: It's the truth. I am really happy. B: Congratulations on your promotion. A: Thank you very much. B: I am really excited for you. A: Are you really? B: I'm serious. You deserved this promotion. A: Is that what you really think? B: Yes, I do. 3.audio A: I haven't told you what happened yet, have I? B: I haven't heard anything. A: My boss offered me a promotion, and I took it. B: Are you serious? A: Yes, I am really excited. B: That's great. Congratulations. A: I appreciate that. B: You have no idea how happy I am for you. A: For real? B: I believe you were the best choice for that promotion. I really do.9. Complimenting Someone's Clothes
1.audio A: You look really nice today. B: Thank you. I just got this outfit the other day. A: Really, where did you get it? B: I got it from Macy's. A: It's really nice. B: Thanks again. You look nice today, too. A: Thank you. I just got these shoes today. B: Really? What kind of shoes are they? A: These are called All Star Chuck Taylors. B: I really like those. How much did they cost? A: They were about forty dollars. B: I think I'm going to go buy myself a pair. 2.audio A: I absolutely love what you're wearing today. B: You do? I just bought this outfit a couple days ago. A: Seriously, it looks really nice on you. Where did you buy it from? B: I bought it from the Macy's at the Santa Anita mall. A: I really like that outfit. B: Thanks. I think you look nice today, too. A: Thank you. I just bought these new shoes earlier today. B: Those are nice. What are they? A: These are some Chucks. B: Those are great. How much were they? A: I got them for forty. B: I think I might go and find me my own pair of Chucks. 3.audio A: I think that you look very cute today. B: Is that right? This is a brand new outfit. A: What store did you get it from? B: I went to Macy's and picked it out. A: I love your outfit right now. B: Well, I think you look nice today too. A: Thanks. I found these new shoes earlier at the store. B: I think that those are some really nice shoes. What kind are they? A: These are Chucks. B: Your shoes look really nice. How much did you get them for? A: They only cost me about forty dollars. B: I'm going to go get a pair for myself.10. Leisure Activities
1.audio A: Tell me, what do you enjoy doing in your spare time? B: I enjoy drawing and painting. A: You know how to draw and paint? B: Yes, I do. A: When did you learn how to do that? B: I learned back in high school. A: Oh, so you took an art class? B: Yeah, I loved that class. A: I see that you're pretty talented. B: Thank you very much. A: I wish I had a talent like that. B: I'm sure you have a talent. It's just hidden. 2.audio A: What kinds of things do you like to do? B: I've always liked to draw and paint. A: I didn't know you knew how to draw and paint. B: I do it every once in a while. A: How long have you known how to do that? B: I first learned how to do it in high school. A: Did you take some sort of art class or something? B: That was my favorite class. A: You have got to be talented. B: Thanks. A: If only I was talented. B: You have a talent. You just don't know what it is yet. 3.audio A: Are there any hobbies you do? B: When I have time, I sometimes draw and paint. A: Oh, you actually do that? B: Every so often, I do. A: Did you always know how to draw and paint? B: I was taught in high school how to draw and paint. A: You had an art class? B: Exactly, it was my favorite class. A: Well, it's good that you're so talented. B: I appreciate that. A: Talent is a great thing, I wish I had one. B: Everyone has a talent. They just need to find it.11. Favorite Movie
1.audio A: What's your favorite movie? B: My favorite movie is Superbad. A: Oh, why is that? B: It's the funniest movie that I've ever seen. A: That's true. It is a very funny movie. B: You've seen it before? A: Yes, I saw that movie the first day it came out in theaters. B: Didn't you laugh through the whole movie? I did. A: Me too. That movie brought tears to my eyes. B: Mine too. A: I have it on DVD at my house if you want to come over and watch it. B: Sure, let's go. 2.audio A: Which movie is your favorite to watch? B: I have to say, my favorite movie is Superbad. A: Is that right? Why? B: Honestly, it is one of the funniest movies I've seen in a long time. A: You're right. That movie is hilarious. B: I didn't think you saw that movie. A: I went to see it the day it came out. B: I was laughing through the whole movie. A: I couldn't help laughing, either. B: Same here. A: I bought the movie. Would you like to come to my house and watch it? B: Of course. 3.audio A: Out of every movie that you've seen, which one is your favorite? B: I'm going to have to say that Superbad is the best movie ever. A: You think so, how come? B: Well, Superbad is super funny. A: You're not lying, I found that movie absolutely hilarious. B: I didn't know that you saw Superbad before. A: I made sure to be in line to see it the first day it came out. B: I couldn't keep from laughing throughout the whole movie. A: I was laughing hysterically the whole time; my stomach muscles hurt afterwards. B: That's exactly how I felt. A: I got the movie when it came out on DVD, do you want to come over? B: I would love to.12. Favorite Music
1.audio A: What type of music do you like to listen to? B: I like listening to different kinds of music. A: Like what, for instance? B: I enjoy Rock and R&B. A: Why is that? B: I like the different instruments that they use. A: That's a good reason to like something. B: Yeah, I think so too. 2.audio A: What kind of music do you enjoy listening to? B: I enjoy listening to all kinds of music. A: What kind? B: I like to listen to Rock and R&B. A: Why do you like that type of music? B: I like the kinds of instruments that they use. A: I think that's an excellent reason to like something. B: Thanks, I feel the same way. 3.audio A: What is your favorite kind of music? B: I listen to various types of music. A: What genres? B: I enjoy listening to both Rock and R&B. A: What interests you in that type of music? B: I enjoy the different types of instruments that they use. A: That is a perfect reason to like a certain kind of music. B: That's exactly what I think too.13. Sports
1.audio A: Did you go to the basketball game on Friday? B: No, I couldn't make it. A: You missed a really good game. B: Oh, really? Who won? A: Our school did. They played really well. B: Too bad I was busy. I really wanted to go. A: Yeah, you should have. It was really exciting. B: So what was the score? A: The score was 101-98. B: Man, that was a really close game. A: That's what made it so great. B: I'll make sure and make it to the next one. 2.audio A: Were you able to attend Friday night's basketball game? B: I was unable to make it. A: You should have been there. It was intense. B: Is that right. Who ended up winning? A: Our team was victorious. B: I wish I was free that night. I'm kind of mad that I didn't go. A: It was a great game. B: What was the score at the end of the game? A: Our team won 101-98. B: Sounds like it was a close game. A: That's the reason it was such a great game. B: The next game, I will definitely be there. 3.audio A: I was meaning to ask you if you saw the basketball game on Friday. B: I wanted to go, but I couldn't. A: It was a great game. B: It's too bad that I couldn't make it. Who won? A: Our team played hard and won. B: I really wish I went to the game. A: It was the best game ever. B: So tell me the final score. A: The other team lost by three points, 101-98. B: It must've been a close game. A: It really was. You should've gone. B: Hopefully, I'll make it to the next one.14. Invitation to a Movie
1.audio A: What are you doing this weekend? B: I'm going to the movies with a friend. How about you? A: I'm not sure yet. B: Well, did you want to go see a movie with me? A: What movie are you going to see? B: I'm not sure yet. Is there something you want to see? A: There's nothing I can think of. B: So, did you want to go? A: No, thanks, maybe another time. B: Okay, sounds good. 2.audio A: Do you know what you're going to do this weekend? B: I am going to see a movie with a friend of mine. What about you? A: I don't know. B: Would you like to see a movie with me and my friend? A: Do you know what movie you're going to watch? B: I don't know, but was there a certain movie you wanted to see? A: None that I can think of. B: Well, would you like to go? A: Thank you for inviting me, but I think I'll pass. B: All right. Another time then. 3.audio A: You have any ideas as to what you want to do this weekend? B: I'm going to the movie theater with my friend. What are you going to do? A: I'm not quite sure yet. B: How about you see a movie with me and my friend? A: What movie are you and your friend planning on watching? B: Not sure. Is there a movie out that catches your eye? A: No good movies come to mind. B: Have you decided whether or not you would like to go? A: No, thanks. Maybe another time. B: For sure another day.15. A Sick Classmate
1.audio A: Did you go to school today? B: Yeah, I went to school today. Were you there? A: No, I didn't go, I've been sick. B: That sucks. Did you want the assignments from English class? A: That would be nice, thank you. B: No problem, you're welcome. A: I will be glad to do the same for you when you're sick. B: Well, thank you. I hope to see you at school tomorrow. 2.audio A: Have you attended school today? B: I attended school today. Did you? A: I wasn't able to attend school because I was feeling ill. B: I'm sorry to hear that. Would you like the assignments from English class? A: I would really appreciate that, thanks. B: It's no trouble at all. A: If you get sick, I'll return the favor. B: Thanks. See you at school tomorrow if you feel better. 3.audio A: Have you gone to school today? B: I went to school today. Did you go to school? A: I couldn't go to school today, I was sick. B: That's horrible. I'd be happy to give you the assignments from English class. A: Thank you very much, that's kind of you. B: Don't mention it. A: When you miss a day of school, I'll be happy to give you the English assignments. B: That is greatly appreciated and I hope you feel well enough to go to school tomorrow.16. Sharing News and Information
1.audio A: Did you hear the news? B: What happened? A: Our cousin went into labor and had her baby last week. B: She did? Why didn't anyone tell me? A: I would've thought that somebody would have told you. B: No, I had no idea. A: Well, she did, her baby was 8 pounds 6 ounces. B: Oh my God, that's great! A: Are you going to go and visit her and the baby? B: I think that I might. A: Good! I just thought I'd let you know. B: Thanks for telling me. 2.audio A: Have you heard what happened? B: Heard what? A: Debrah already had her baby. B: I didn't know that. A: I thought you knew. B: I honestly didn't know. A: The baby was 8 pounds 6 ounces. B: That's good to hear. A: Will you go and visit them? B: Of course I will. A: I just wanted to give you the good news. B: Thanks for letting me know. 3.audio A: Have you heard the news? B: I haven't heard anything. A: Debrah had her baby last week. B: Nobody told me. A: I thought you heard. B: I really wasn't told anything. A: She was a cute 8 pounds 6 ounces. B: Wow, how exciting. A: I know, you should really go and see her and the baby. B: Of course I will. A: I just wanted to let you know what happened. B: I appreciate that.17. Changing the Subject
1.audio A: Did you go to school today? B: Of course. Did you? A: I didn't want to, so I didn't. B: That's sad, but have you gone to the movies recently? A: That's a switch. B: I'm serious, have you? A: No, I haven't. Why? B: I really want to go to the movies this weekend. A: So go then. B: I really don't want to go by myself. A: Well anyway, do you plan on going to school tomorrow? B: No, I think I'm going to go to the movies. 2.audio A: Did you make it to school today? B: I always do. Did you go to school today? A: No, I didn't. B: You should have, but have you seen any movies lately? A: That was an odd change of subject. B: Maybe it was, but answer the question. A: No, not recently. B: I want to go to see a movie this weekend. A: What's stopping you then? B: I don't want to go alone. A: So, will you be at school tomorrow? B: No, I want to go to the movies instead. 3.audio A: Did you even bother to go to school today? B: Yeah, I went. Did you go? A: No, I didn't feel like it. B: That's nice, have you been to the movies lately? A: No, but that was a random change of subject. B: It may have been random, but have you? A: I haven't lately. B: I would love to catch a movie this weekend. A: So then, why don't you just go? B: I don't want to see a movie by myself. A: Okay, so are you going to school tomorrow? B: I think I might just go to the movies.18. Receiving Visitors
1.audio A: Thanks for coming to see me today. B: It's no problem. I was really missing you anyway. A: I missed you too. B: Why haven't you tried to come see me then? A: I've been really busy. B: Doing what? A: Working. B: I would've come to see you sooner, but I've been busy too. A: What have you been doing? B: I've been working too. A: Well regardless, I'm very happy that you came to see me. B: I am too. 2.audio A: I'm really glad that you came to see me. B: I had to. I was missing you a lot. A: I was missing you too. B: So, why haven't you visited me? A: I've actually been busy lately. B: What have you been doing? A: I've just been working really hard. B: I've also been busy. A: Tell me what you've been doing. B: Basically, I've been working too. A: Well whatever, I'm glad you came. B: So am I. 3.audio A: I'm really happy that you came to visit me. B: I really missed you a lot. A: I've been missing you like crazy. B: I don't understand why you haven't come to visit me. A: Lately, I've been quite busy. B: Tell me what you've been up to. A: I've really been working a lot lately. B: I've been pretty busy myself. A: So what have you been up to? B: I've just been working a lot. A: Whatever the reason may be, I'm glad you visited me. B: I'm glad I did too.19. Waiting for an Invitation
1.audio A: Hey, did you hear about Jessica's party this weekend? B: Yeah, but I'm still waiting for my invitation. A: Oh really? She gave me mine earlier today. B: Well, she'll probably just give me my invitation later on today. A: Yeah, so are you planning on going? B: I think so. It sounds like it's going to be a lot of fun. A: It really does, I can't wait. B: What time does the party start? A: It starts at 8 o'clock. B: Oh, well, how many people has she given invites to so far? A: I'm not sure, but I don't think she's given out that many. B: Well, hopefully she'll give me my invite later on today. 2.audio A: Have you heard about Jessica's party on Saturday? B: I've heard about it, but I'm still waiting for my invitation. A: Really? I got mine from her this morning. B: I'm guessing that she's going to give me my invite today or tomorrow. A: You're probably right, do you intend on going to the party? B: I want to. I heard it's going to be really fun. A: I know, it does sound pretty awesome. B: Well, when does the party start? A: It's supposed to start at about eight. B: How many invitations has she given out? A: I really don't know, but I don't think she gave out that many yet. B: I really want to go, so I hope that she gives me my invite soon. 3.audio A: Has anyone told you about Jessica's party coming up? B: I was told about it already. I'm just waiting for my invitation. A: Is that right? I already got my invitation from her earlier. B: I believe that she will give me the invitation today. A: Are you even going to go? B: Yeah, it sounds like it's going to be the best party of the year. A: Exactly, it seems like it's going to be loads of fun. B: When exactly does the party start? A: The invitation says it starts at 8:00 p.m. B: Has she given out a lot of invitations yet? A: I have no idea, she hasn't given out many though. B: I'm planning on going, but I really need her to give me my invitation.20. Accepting an Invitation to a Party
1.audio A: Hey, what's up? B: Nothing really. A: I'm throwing a party on Friday. B: I didn't realize that. A: You didn't? B: Nobody has told me anything about your party. A: Did you want to go? B: When does it start? A: At 8:00 p.m. B: I'll be there. A: I'd better see you there. B: Of course. 2.audio A: What's going on with you? B: Fine. What's going on with you? A: I'm having a party this Friday. B: I had no idea. A: Is that right? B: I didn't hear anything about it. A: Can you go? B: What time? A: It starts at 8 o'clock. B: I'll go. A: I hope that I'll see you there. B: No doubt. 3.audio A: What's going on? B: Not much. A: This Friday, I'm throwing a party. B: Oh really? I didn't know that. A: Are you serious? B: I haven't heard anything about it. A: Can you make it? B: What time does it start? A: The party starts at 8. B: Yeah, I think I'll go. A: Am I going to see you there? B: You will.21. Declining an Invitation to a Party (1)
1.audio A: What's going on? B: Nothing really, you? A: I'm throwing a party next Saturday. B: Is that right? A: Yeah, are you going to come? B: I'm sorry, I can't. A: Why not? B: I don't really want to. A: Well, why don't you? B: I hate going to parties. A: Well, that's okay. B: Yeah, sorry. 2.audio A: What's up? B: Nothing, how about you? A: Next Saturday, I'm going to have a party. B: Oh, really? A: You are coming? B: Probably not. A: Why is that? B: I don't feel like going. A: Why not? B: I really can't stand going to parties. A: I understand, I guess. B: Sorry about that. 3.audio A: What's happening? B: Not a lot, what about you? A: I'm having a party next Saturday. B: That's nice. A: Are you going to be there? B: I don't think so. A: Is there a reason why? B: I just really don't want to go. A: How come? B: I don't really like parties. A: I wish you would go, but that's okay. B: I'm sorry.22. Declining an Invitation to a Party (2)
1.audio A: What's up? B: Nothing much, what's going on? A: I'm having a party this Friday. B: Oh, really? That's nice. A: I wanted to see if you wanted to come. B: This Friday? Sorry, I already have plans. A: Doing what? B: I'm going to dinner with my family. A: I really wanted you to come, but I understand. B: Yeah, maybe next time. A: I'll hold you to that. B: Sounds like a plan. 2.audio A: Hey, what's good with you? B: Not a lot. What about you? A: I'm throwing a party on Friday. B: That sounds like fun. A: Do you think you can come? B: I'm sorry. I'm already doing something this Friday. A: What are you going to be doing? B: My family and I are going to dinner. A: I was hoping you would come. B: I'll definitely try to make it the next time. A: I'd better see you there. B: All right. I'll see you next time. 3.audio A: What's going on? B: Nothing really. How about you? A: A lot, like the party I'm having on Friday. B: Well, that's cool. A: Will you be able to make it? B: I'm busy this Friday. I'm sorry. A: What do you have to do? B: I'm having dinner with my family A: Maybe you can come next time. B: I'll make sure and come to your next party. A: I'll look for you at my next party. B: I'll be there.23. Ending a Conversation
1.audio A: It was nice talking to you. B: Why are you trying to rush me off the phone? A: I really have to go. B: Why? I still wanted to talk to you. A: I have things to do. B: Like what? A: Don't be nosey. B: I'm not. I just want to know. A: Well, it's really none of your business. B: That's harsh. A: I'm sorry, but I have to go. B: Fine. 2.audio A: I've enjoyed conversing with you. B: Is there a reason why you're trying to get off the phone so fast? A: I've got to go. B: I wasn't done talking to you. A: I have to do some things, and besides, it's not polite to be nosey. B: I'm not being nosey. I'm just asking. A: I really don't think it's any of your business. B: That's not nice. A: I apologize, but I'm getting off the phone now. B: Okay. 3.audio A: I'll talk to you later. B: What's the rush? A: I have to get off the phone now. B: I'm not ready to get off the phone with you. A: There are other things I need to take care of. B: What is it that you need to do? A: Please don't be nosey. B: I'm not being nosey, it's just a question. A: You don't need to worry about that. B: That was mean to say. A: I am very sorry, but I must go. B: I guess.24. Leave-Taking
1.audio A: Well, it was nice talking to you. B: It was nice talking to you too. A: We should really hang out again. B: That would be fun. A: Where do you want to go? B: I think we should go out to eat. A: That sounds good. B: All right, so I'll see you then. A: I'll call you later. B: Okay, I'll talk to you later then. A: See you later. B: Bye. 2.audio A: I enjoyed talking to you. B: I enjoyed talking to you too. A: We should hang out some time. B: I think that would be nice. A: Is there anything you would like to do next time? B: Do you want to go out to eat? A: I'd like that. B: So I'll see you next time. A: I'm going to call you soon. B: I'll talk to you later. A: See you soon. B: Goodbye. 3.audio A: I had fun talking to you. B: It was really nice talking to you also. A: I think we should really do something sometime. B: That should be loads of fun. A: What do you want to do next time? B: Would you like to go to dinner or something? A: Yeah, let's do that. B: Okay, until next time then. A: I'll call you so we can set that up. B: Talk to you then. A: All right, see you. B: See you.1. Calling to Get a Reservation
1.audio A: I'd like to reserve a hotel room. B: That should be no problem. May I have your full name, please? A: My name is John Sandals. B: Hello, Mr. Sandals. My name is Michelle. What days do you need that reservation, sir? A: I'm planning to visit New York from Friday, April 14 until Monday, April 17. B: Our room rates recently went up. Is that okay with you, Mr. Sandals? A: How much per night are we talking about? B: Each night will be $308. A: That price is perfectly acceptable. B: Wonderful! Do you prefer a smoking or nonsmoking room? A: Nonsmoking, please. B: Next question: Is a queen-size bed okay? A: That sounds fine. B: Okay, Mr. Sandals. Your reservation is in our computer. All we need now is a phone number. A: Certainly. My phone number is 626-555-1739. B: Thank you, Mr. Sandals. We look forward to seeing you in New York! 2.audio A: Hi there, I want to reserve a hotel room. B: No problem at all. Could I have your full name, please? A: Sure, John Sandals. B: Hi, Mr. Sandals. I'm Michelle, at your service. When do you need the room? A: My plans are to be there April 14th to the 17th. B: We have new room rates, sir. Will that be acceptable to you? A: It depends on the price, of course. What is it? B: It's $308 a night. A: I have no problem with that. B: Great! Would you prefer smoking or nonsmoking? A: Definitely nonsmoking. I can't handle that smell. B: Nonsmoking. Now, is a queen-size bed okay? A: No problem. B: Great, Mr. Sandals. Your reservation is confirmed. Now all I need is your phone number. A: Of course! It's area code 626-555-1739. B: Thank you so much, Mr. Sandals. We look forward to seeing you! 3.audio A: I need to reserve a room. B: Not a problem. May I have your name, please? A: Of course. I'm John Sandals. B: Hi, sir. My name is Michelle. Could you tell me when you need the room? A: Right now. I plan to be there in April from the 14th to the 17th. B: Perhaps you didn't know that we have new room rates. Do you find that acceptable, sir? A: Maybe. How much is a room? B: The price per night is $308. A: That sounds fine to me. B: Fantastic! Would you like a smoking or nonsmoking room? A: I hate cigarettes! Nonsmoking. B: That'll be nonsmoking. Now, do you approve of a single queen-size bed? A: That'll be no problem. B: I'm happy to hear that, sir. Your reservation is all set except for your phone number. A: Sure! My number is 626-555-1739. B: 626-555-1739. Thank you for doing business with us, Mr. Sandals. 4.audio A: I need a hotel room. B: That's no problem at all. May I have your name, please? A: Certainly. My name is John Sandals. B: It's a pleasure, Mr. Sandals. My name is Michelle. What days will you need a room? A: Friday afternoon, April 14 through Monday morning, April 17. B: One minor problem, sir. Our prices are now slightly higher. Is that acceptable, sir? A: Please tell me the price, so I can make a decision. B: It'll be $308 nightly. A: That's a reasonable price. B: Good! Now, sir, do you have a preference for smoking or nonsmoking? A: I quit smoking, so nonsmoking. B: I hear you, sir. Nonsmoking. Now, about the bed, is a queen-size okay? A: A queen sounds great. B: Okay, sir, let me reserve those dates, there. Now, if you'll just tell me your phone number. A: That would be 626-555-1739. B: That's 626-555-1739. Thank you so much for choosing our hotel, sir! 5.audio A: I need a room for a few days. B: That won't be a problem. Could you please tell me your name? A: John Sandals. That's S A N D A L S. B: Sir, I'm Michelle, and I run the front desk. Please tell me the days you'll be here. A: I'll be there in April: Friday through Monday, the 14th through the 17th. B: We recently changed many things here, sir, including our prices. Do you mind, sir? A: Possibly. What's the actual price? B: The price will be $308 a night. A: $308! That's not bad. B: Very good. Now, Mr. Sandals, about the room, smoking or nonsmoking? A: Nonsmoking, definitely! B: Most of our clients prefer nonsmoking. Now, does a queen sound okay? A: Yes, that'll be just fine. B: One more second, sir. Your reservation is now verified, so all I need is your phone number. A: It's 626-555-1739. B: Let me repeat that: 626-555-1739. Okay, sir, we look forward to seeing you in April! 6.audio A: Can I reserve a hotel room? B: I assure you, that's not a problem. What is your full name, please? A: My name's John Sandals. B: It's a pleasure to assist you. Please tell me when you'll be needing the room, sir. A: If my plans don't change, I'll need a room April 14 till April 17. B: Sir, our room prices are slightly higher than you may have thought. Will that be okay? A: Tell me how much it will be, and I can tell you if it's okay. B: Only $308 per night, before taxes, of course. A: $308 a night? That's a fair price. B: Now, as for the room, sir, do you prefer smoking or nonsmoking? A: Nonsmoking, please. B: Nonsmoking. Now, sir, does a single queen-size bed meet your approval? A: I have absolutely no problem with that. B: Queen, nonsmoking. Okay, sir, your room is reserved. Now if you'll just give me your phone number. A: Not a problem. The number is 626-555-1739. B: Thank you for making a reservation with us. We look forward to seeing you in April!2. Checking into the Hotel
1.audio A: I have a reservation. My name is John Sandals. B: May I see your ID, please, Mr. Sandals? A: Certainly. Here it is. B: Thank you. Do you have a credit card, Mr. Sandals? A: Yes, I do. Do you accept American Express? B: Sorry, sir, just VISA or MasterCard. A: Here's my VISA card. B: Okay. You're in room 507. It's a single queen-size bed, spacious, and nonsmoking. Is that suitable? A: Yes, it sounds like everything I expected. B: Here's your key, sir. If you need anything, just dial 0 on your room phone. 2.audio A: I have a reservation under the name of Sandals. B: Could I see your ID, please, sir? A: Of course! Let me take it out of my wallet. B: Thank you, sir. Now, do you have a credit card, sir? A: Yes, of course. Is American Express okay? B: I'm sorry, sir. Only VISA or MasterCard. A: In that case, here's my VISA. B: Thank you. Your room number is 507, queen bed, nonsmoking. Is that agreeable to you, sir? A: Yes, I'm easy to please. B: Very good. Here is your room key, sir. If you need anything at all, please dial 0. 3.audio A: My name is Sandals, I have a reservation. B: May I see your identification, please, sir? A: Here you are. B: Thanks. Do you have a credit card, sir? A: Of course. Will American Express do? B: I'm very sorry, sir. We accept only VISA or MasterCard. A: No problem. Here's my VISA. B: Thanks. Room 507 is a spacious, nonsmoking room, with a queen bed. Does that meet your expectations? A: Yes, that sounds like what I want. B: That's wonderful, sir. Now, here's your key. Should you need anything, just dial 0. 4.audio A: I'm John Sandals, and I have a reservation. B: Would you show me your ID, sir, please? A: Here you go. B: Thank you very much. Now, sir, do you have a credit card? A: Certainly! Would you like my American Express card? B: Regrettably, Mr. Sandals, we accept only MasterCard or VISA. A: I thought American Express was accepted everywhere. Never mind. Here's my VISA. B: Thanks. You're in room 507, a big, nonsmoking room, with a queen bed. Is that okay, sir? A: Yes, that's just fine. B: I'm happy to hear that. Here is your key. Just dial 0 if you need anything. 5.audio A: My name is John Sandals, and I've got a reservation. B: May I see some identification, sir, please? A: Sure. Here you are. B: Thank you so much. Have you got a credit card, Mr. Sandals? A: I sure do. How about American Express? B: Unfortunately, at the present time we take only MasterCard or VISA. A: No American Express? Okay, here's my VISA. B: Thank you, sir. You'll be in room 507, nonsmoking, with a queen-size bed. Do you approve, sir? A: Yes, that'll be fine. B: That's great. This is your key, sir. If you need anything at all, anytime, just dial zero. 6.audio A: I've got a reservation here. My name is John Sandals. B: Mr. Sandals, may I see your ID, please? A: One second, please, while I dig it out here. B: Now, sir, do you have a credit card? A: Yes, I do. Do you accept American Express? B: I'm sorry, Mr. Sandals, but we accept only MasterCard or VISA. A: That's okay, I've got plenty of cards. Here's my VISA. B: Okay. You're in room 507. It's a single queen-size bed, spacious, and nonsmoking. Is that suitable? A: Yes, that's just what I wanted. B: Here's your key, sir. If you need anything, just dial 0 on your room phone.3. Requesting a Wake-Up Call
1.audio A: I need to request a wake-up call for tomorrow morning. B: What time do you want the call? A: I need two calls, one at 7 and another at 7:15. B: We can certainly do that. Expect a call from us at 7:00, and then again at 7:15. A: Actually, can I change the latter wake-up call to 7:30 am? B: I can certainly do that. Is there anything else? A: I can't think of anything. If I do think of something, I'll be sure to call again. B: Okay. Good night, sir. 2.audio A: I need a wake-up call tomorrow morning. B: Of course. When would you like the call? A: Actually, I need two calls, one at 7 and the other at 7:15. B: No problem. We'll give you both calls. A: Do you know what, let's change the second call to 7:30. B: No problem. Anything else, sir? A: Not at the moment, thank you. B: Let me know if you do need anything. 3.audio A: Can you give me a wake-up call tomorrow? B: Certainly. What time would you like us to call you? A: I need two wake-up calls, if you don't mind, one at 7 and the other at 7:15. B: Not a problem. We'll call you tomorrow morning at 7, and again at 7:15. A: On second thought, you'd better make that second call at 7:30 instead of 7:15. B: Said, and done. Will there be anything else? A: No, that gets it for now, thank you. B: Well, give us a call if there's anything more we can help you with. 4.audio A: Tomorrow I'm going to need a wake-up call. B: Not a problem. What time shall we call you? A: I always hit the snooze button, so give me two calls, one at 7 and another at 7:15. B: It'll be our pleasure. We'll call you at 7 and then at 7:15. A: Oops, cancel that. Change the second call to 7:30, will you, please? B: No sooner said than done. Can I help you with anything else? A: No, that's about it for now. B: Okay, sir. Have a pleasant evening. 5.audio A: I need a wake-up call tomorrow. B: What time would you like your wake-up call? A: I need two calls, one at 7 and another at 7:15. B: That is no problem at all, of course. You'll get a call at 7:00, and another at 7:15. A: Then again, I think 7:15 is too early. Change 7:15 to 7:30, please. B: So, that'll be a call at 7 and another at 7:30. Do you have any other requests? A: Not just now, but if I do think of something later, I'll give you a ring. B: Okay, sir. Sleep well. 6.audio A: I've got to get up early tomorrow, so please give me a wake-up call. B: Of course. We can give you a call anytime you like. A: Actually, I need two calls, one at 7 and the other at 7:15. B: Your wish is our command. Expect a call at 7, and another one at 7:15. A: Wait a minute! I don't like 7:15, now that I think about it. Change it to 7:30. B: The second call is now changed to 7:30. Is there anything else we can help you with? A: Nothing that I can think of right now. If something comes up, though, I'll call you. B: We're here all night long if you need anything.4. Asking the Concierge for Sightseeing Advice
1.audio A: The front desk told me to ask you for sightseeing advice. B: Of course. I'd be more than happy to help. I am, after all, the hotel's concierge. A: Concierge? What exactly is that? B: We advise you on where to visit, eat, or shop during your stay here in New York. A: Great! So where should I start my sightseeing? B: The Statue of Liberty is always a good place to begin. A: I saw the Statue of Liberty on my last visit here. Can you recommend somewhere else? B: Hmm. What type of interests do you have? A: In my spare time, I really like to view art and go running. B: Aha! Have you been to Central Park or the Museum of Modern Art? A: No, but I've heard a lot about both. B: Well, Central Park is wonderful for running. Afterwards, you should head to the Museum to enjoy the art. A: Great! That sounds like a plan. Thanks a lot. B: I'm sure you'll have a good time there. 2.audio A: I was told to see you about going sightseeing. B: It's my pleasure. I'm the hotel's concierge, at your service. A: Concierge? Could you explain that to me? B: We help direct hotel visitors to popular places to visit, eat, and shop. A: Very good. So where shall I begin my sightseeing? B: I would suggest the Statue of Liberty. A: Gee, I've already seen the Statue of Liberty. What about another site? B: Let me see. What do you like to do in your spare time? A: I really like to run. And I like art. B: Well, there you go! Have you ever visited either Central Park or the Museum of Modern Art? A: No, but I've been meaning to. B: Well, Central Park is fantastic for running. Then you can go to the Museum to look at the beautiful art. A: That sounds like a great plan. I'll do that. B: Enjoy your run and your visit! 3.audio A: I need some sightseeing advice. B: That's what I'm here for, sir. Every good hotel has a concierge like me. A: I don't travel a lot. What exactly is a concierge? B: A concierge helps visitors like you find great places to visit, shop, and eat. A: That's great! So tell me, where should I go first? B: I'd suggest that you start at the Statue of Liberty. A: You know, I've already been there. Can you suggest another place? B: Maybe. Tell me what you like to do in your spare time. A: When I have some free time, I often spend it running or at museums. B: Well, have you ever been to either Central Park or the Museum of Modern Art? A: No, but I sure would like to. B: Central Park is great for just about everything outdoors. Then you can visit the Museum of Modern Art. A: Both places sound great. I'll try to do that today. B: Enjoy the views at both places. 4.audio A: I'm going sightseeing, but I'd like to get your advice first. B: I'm only too happy to help. Tourists should always check with their concierge first. A: Concierge? I'm not familiar with that word. B: A concierge directs visitors to the city's great tourist, shopping, and eating places. A: That sounds great. Now, is there any place that I should hit first? B: Well, if you're like most people, you'll want to go to the Statue of Liberty. A: I've already seen it, I loved it, but today I want to go somewhere else. B: Sure! Tell me about your interests. A: I like to run and I like to see the works of the masters. B: You'll get along fabulously at Central Park and the Museum of Modern Art! Have you been to either? A: No, I just haven't had the opportunity. B: You'll love Central Park for running. Later on, you can go to the Museum of Modern Art. A: Thank you. That's what I'll do. B: This might be the best day of your visit. 5.audio A: I need some sightseeing advice. I was told to come to see you. B: As your concierge, it is my pleasure to help you, sir. A: Concierge? Are we speaking English here? B: A concierge helps you find all the great places for visiting, shopping, and eating. A: What would you suggest that I visit first? B: How about starting at the Statue of Liberty? Many people like to begin there. A: The last time I was here, I visited the Statue. So do you have another place in mind? B: I think so. Tell me what interests you. A: I'm big on running, although maybe I like art even more than running. B: Then you must go to Central Park and the Museum of Modern Art! Have you been to either one? A: No. I haven't had a chance to go to either of them. B: Both places are usually crowded with natives and tourists. You'll love the Park and the Museum. A: Thank you. That's great advice. B: This might be the best day of your visit. 6.audio A: Can you give me some advice about going sightseeing? B: Your concierge, sir, is the right person to ask when you need sightseeing advice. A: What in the world is a concierge? B: We direct visitors to all the great tourist, shopping, and eating spots in the city. A: Then what would you recommend as a starting point for my sightseeing? B: Definitely the Statue of Liberty. I think that that is everyone's favorite first stop. A: Actually, I've already been there twice. Do you have another suggestion? B: I think I can come up with something. How do you spend your spare time? A: I keep my body healthy by running and my mind active by visiting museums. B: Well, the Museum of Modern Art and Central Park were made for you! Have you gone to either one? A: No, although I've heard great things about both of them. B: You don't want to miss either place. Central Park and the Museum of Modern Art are big and beautiful. A: Sounds great! I'll get my running gear and then I'm out of here. B: This is a day you're going to remember for a long time.5. Asking the Concierge for Restaurant Advice
1.audio A: I need a suggestion for a restaurant here in Manhattan. B: Certainly! How much are you planning to spend on dinner, sir? A: My date's very sophisticated, so I'm sure she would expect nothing but the best. B: May I suggest our own hotel restaurant? It got three stars in the latest restaurant review. A: No, thank you, I want to go out on the town. What other ideas do you have? B: There's always Gramercy Tavern. They have live jazz. The food is delicious, but very expensive. A: That sounds like a good place to take a date. Can you make a reservation for me? B: As you wish, sir. You'll have a wonderful time there. 2.audio A: Can you tell me about a nice restaurant to go to? B: Of course! How much would you like to spend on your meal? A: My date is quite sophisticated. She would expect nothing less than the best. B: Well, how about our own hotel restaurant? It's conveniently located and has a three-star rating. A: That's a good idea, except I want to go out, not stay in. Something else, maybe? B: Well, how about Gramercy Tavern? It's a very popular tourist spot, with great food and music. A: That sounds good! Could you call them to see if I can get a reservation? B: Of course, sir. You've made a good choice. 3.audio A: So, now I need your help again, if you don't mind. I'm taking a date to a restaurant. B: I'd love to help you! What is your budget for the dinner? A: She strikes me as being very sophisticated. Only the best will do for her. B: Well, what do you think about our very own hotel restaurant? It is very upscale, with a three-star rating. A: I don't want to be cooped up in my own hotel tonight. How about another restaurant? B: The Gramercy Tavern is highly rated. It has great food and live jazz, but it's not cheap. A: Yes, that sounds like a winner. Would you please call them to reserve a table? B: I'm already dialing, sir. 4.audio A: I'm taking a date to a restaurant, so could you please direct me to a good one? B: But of course! How much are you thinking of spending on dinner? A: She deserves nothing but the best, of course. B: In that case, I would suggest our own hotel restaurant. The chef, the food, and the service are outstanding. A: I promised her I would take her out to a restaurant. Do you have another one in mind? B: You can always go to Gramercy Tavern. It's quite popular, despite its expensive entrees. A: Great food and lots of patrons? What more could I want? Please reserve a table for me. B: Yes, sir. You're going to have a great time. 5.audio A: I'm taking my date to a restaurant. Could you tell me about one or two good ones? B: My pleasure! How much would you like to spend on your date? A: She will want an excellent restaurant, of course. B: You should know that our hotel chef was trained in Paris. The service and food are world-class. A: I wanted to go out somewhere, not stay here. Do you know of another good restaurant? B: You can't go wrong with Gramercy Tavern. It's famous for its food, service, and live jazz. A: I like that! Could you please call them to see if we can get in tonight? B: At once, sir. You'll love this place, I assure you. 6.audio A: Well, I've got a date. Now I need to find a restaurant. Can you help me? B: No problem, of course! How much would you like to spend to impress the lady? A: Nothing but the best for a pretty woman! B: Sir, the restaurant you seek is right here. This hotel has a three-star restaurant. A: I sort of suggested that we would go out on the town. Do you have another suggestion? B: Gramercy Tavern is at least as good as our own hotel restaurant. Plus, they have live jazz. A: Gramercy Tavern? I think I've heard of that before. Call to get us a table, okay? B: Right away, sir. She will be impressed with your local knowledge.6. Talking to Room Service
1.audio A: I'd like to order dinner. B: What would you like? A: I'd like to order a bottle of champagne, lobster tail, and filet mignon, medium rare. B: I'm sorry. We're currently out of filet mignon. May I suggest the porterhouse instead? A: I'd prefer the filet, but the porterhouse will do. B: And may I suggest chocolate-covered strawberries with the champagne? A: Normally, I would take you up on that suggestion, but just the champagne will do for tonight. B: Okay, no strawberries. Room service will be charged to your amenities account. Is that all right? A: That's fine. B: It will be up shortly. Enjoy your food, sir. 2.audio A: Could I order dinner? B: Of course. What would you like? A: I want a bottle of champagne, lobster tail, and filet mignon, medium rare. B: I'm so sorry. We ran out of filet mignon. May I suggest the porterhouse instead? A: That's too bad, but the porterhouse will be okay. B: May I be so bold as to suggest chocolate-covered strawberries with the champagne? A: Not tonight, thank you. B: No strawberries. We'll charge your amenities account, if that's okay. A: Charge it to whatever account you like. B: Your meal will be delivered as soon as it's all ready. Enjoy! 3.audio A: Could you bring me some food, please? B: Sure. What do you fancy? A: Can I have a bottle of champagne, lobster tail, and filet mignon, medium rare? B: Sir, the filet mignon was so popular tonight that we ran out. May I suggest the porterhouse? A: No filet? Okay, porterhouse will be fine then. B: Perhaps you would like chocolate-covered strawberries with the champagne? A: Not tonight, but thank you for the suggestion. B: Okay. This will be charged to your amenities account, okay? A: No problem. B: Your food will be brought to you momentarily. I hope you enjoy it. 4.audio A: I'd like you to bring me some food. B: Just name it, sir. A: Please send up a bottle of champagne, lobster tail, and filet mignon, medium rare. B: Regrettably, we're currently out of filet mignon. May I suggest the porterhouse instead? A: Sure, I love porterhouse, too. B: Would you be interested in chocolate-covered strawberries with the champagne? A: I'd love to, but I'm allergic to strawberries. B: Okay, no strawberries tonight. The items will be charged to your amenities account. A: Go right ahead. B: Our staff will bring you your order in as short a time as possible. 5.audio A: I need something to eat, please. B: Tell me what you're hungry for. A: I feel like champagne, lobster tail, and filet mignon, medium rare. B: Unfortunately, we're out of filet mignon at the moment. May I suggest the porterhouse instead? A: I prefer filet, but porterhouse is good, too. B: Perhaps I could interest you in chocolate-covered strawberries with the champagne? A: Just the champagne will be fine, thank you. B: You'll see this charge on your amenities account. A: That's fine. B: It won't be long until your food is delivered. I know you'll enjoy it. 6.audio A: Can I order something from the kitchen? B: Just tell me what you'd like, please. A: A bottle of champagne, lobster tail, and filet mignon, medium rare would hit the spot. B: I hate to tell you this, but we have no more filet mignon. May I suggest the porterhouse instead? A: Sure! Right now, I would even eat hamburger! B: Have you ever tried chocolate-covered strawberries with champagne? A: Thank you, but I just finished eating some chocolate-covered cherries. B: That'll be a bottle of champagne, lobster tail, and porterhouse, all charged to your amenities account. A: Not a problem. B: Please call if you have any other requests. Your food will be delivered promptly.7. Calling to Report a Cockroach Problem (1)
1.audio A: I have a little problem with room 507. B: What exactly seems to be the problem, Mr. Sandals? A: I found cockroaches in my room. B: Cockroaches, sir? That's unbelievable. A: I've seen at least nine different cockroaches in my room. B: Sir, are you sure you haven't seen the same silverfish nine times? A: There are nine cockroaches in my room. I don't have time for your disbelief! B: I apologize. One moment, please, while I transfer you to my supervisor. 2.audio A: I'm in 507. I have a few problems with my room. B: What is that problem, sir? A: There are cockroaches in my room. B: Are you sure, sir? Flies I could believe, but cockroaches? A: I've counted nine different cockroaches, and I accidentally stepped on another one. B: Sir, we run a spotless and cockroach-less hotel. A: You dare to doubt me? B: I'm sorry, sir. Let me transfer you to my supervisor. 3.audio A: There's a big problem with my room. I'm in 507. B: Would you tell me the nature of the problem, sir? A: I have cockroaches crawling in my room. B: Perhaps you saw a silverfish, sir. A: I've seen nine more cockroaches than I wanted to see. B: Sir, you haven't been drinking by any chance, have you? A: How dare you question my statement! B: Forgive me. You're 100 percent correct. Allow me to transfer you to my supervisor. 4.audio A: There's a major problem with room 507. B: I'm sorry to hear that. Please tell me the exact problem. A: This room is overrun with cockroaches. B: There has been an occasional silverfish in the hotel, sir. A: I stopped counting at nine. B: Sir, this hotel just passed a thorough insect inspection with flying colors. A: Your inspector needs spectacles. The fact is that cockroaches are running rampant. B: I apologize, sir. Just a second, while I transfer you to my supervisor. 5.audio A: I'm in 507, and I have a big problem. B: I'm so sorry. Kindly tell me what the problem is, sir. A: Everywhere I look, I see cockroaches. B: Perhaps you could look again, sir, to double-check. A: The next cockroach I see will be number ten. B: Mr. Sandals, I've worked here five years without seeing one cockroach. A: I've already suffered enough without listening anymore to you! B: You're right, sir. Please let me transfer you to my supervisor. 6.audio A: I have a little problem with room 507. B: Problems are what we're here for, sir. Please tell me your problem. A: This room is filthy with cockroaches. B: Were you wearing your glasses when you noticed them, sir? A: I've already seen nine of them and, as they say, eight is enough! B: Sir, sometimes a fast elevator ride makes our guests see spots. A: You are not in a position to question my vision or my statement! B: I'm very sorry, sir. Will you please hold while I transfer you to my supervisor?8. Calling to Report a Cockroach Problem (2)
1.audio A: I want to change rooms. In fact, I want a refund for tonight! B: And the problem is, sir? A: Cockroaches have taken over my room! B: My apologies, sir. We'll give you a new room and refund the value of your current room. A: Thank you. I want to continue to be able to recommend this hotel to others. B: We always try to serve our guests in the most agreeable way possible. 2.audio A: I want to change rooms immediately, plus a refund for tonight. B: I'm sorry, sir. Exactly what is the problem? A: I'm knee-deep in cockroaches! B: I'm so sorry, sir. We'll give you a new room immediately, and give you a refund also. A: Thank you. I'm glad that this hotel strives to keep its reputation intact. B: Sir, we always try to please our guests. 3.audio A: I'm quite upset! I want a new room and a refund for tonight. B: Forgive me, sir, I haven't been told what the problem is. A: I'm about to be swept away by millions of cockroaches! B: My apologies, sir. We'll transfer you to a new room at once and give you a full refund. A: Thank you. I didn't want to have to take this to court. B: Sir, we never want a guest to stay here mad or unhappy. 4.audio A: This room is unacceptable. I want a new one, and I want a refund for tonight. B: Would you please tell me the exact problem, sir? A: I'm being attacked by hordes of cockroaches! B: Oh, my gosh, they're back? Another room at once, sir, plus a full refund, of course. A: Thank you very much. This has been a most unsettling experience. B: Sir, our guests are our reason for being. 5.audio A: This room is unfit for humans. I want another room, and I want a refund for tonight. B: Perhaps if you would be kind enough to tell me the problem, sir. A: In a word, cockroaches! B: Oh, no, are they back? I'll give you another room immediately, sir, and a refund for tonight. A: Thank you. I'm glad that you don't believe that your guests are liars. B: Sir, without happy guests, we are nothing. 6.audio A: I want to change rooms. In fact, I want a refund for tonight! B: If you tell me the exact problem, I can be more helpful. A: Cockroaches have declared war on my room! B: Allow me to apologize. I'll give you another room right now, and a full refund for tonight. A: Thank you for not asking me to collect the roaches in a jar as evidence. B: Sir, only your mother wants to please you more than we do.9. Asking about the Hotel Gym
1.audio A: Excuse me. Does this hotel have a fitness facility? B: Yes, we try to accommodate all needs of our patrons, including fitness. A: Where is your fitness facility located? B: The gym is just below the lobby. Take the elevator or the stairs. You can't miss it. A: Is there an additional surcharge for the gym? B: No, the gym is free to guests. Take your room key, however, so you can get in. A: What time is the gym open, and what time does it close? B: The gym is open seven days a week, twenty-four hours a day. A: Do you offer trainer services along with the gym? B: Unfortunately, no. If you want a trainer, you'll have to use another gym. 2.audio A: Pardon me. Does your hotel have a fitness facility? B: Yes, sir. We try to anticipate all our guests' needs, including fitness. A: Great! Where is it? B: Sir, the gym is just below the lobby. You can take the elevator or the stairs. A: Do I have to pay extra? B: No, sir. It's gratis. Just take your room key so you can get in. A: What are the gym hours? B: You'll be happy to know that it's open 24/7. A: Great! Is a trainer available? B: I'm sorry, but no. We used to have a trainer, but then he had an unfortunate accident. 3.audio A: Does this hotel have an exercise facility? B: But of course! We have a great exercise facility. A: Good. Now exactly where is it? B: It's located right under our lobby. Just take the elevator or the stairs one flight down. A: Is this going to cost me anything? B: No, sir. The gym is absolutely free. However, be sure to take your room key with you. A: When does the gym open and close? B: The hours couldn't be better, 24/7. A: Very good. Now, is there a trainer down there? B: I wish I could tell you yes, but no, there isn't. 4.audio A: Do you have a place where I can exercise? B: Yes, sir. We have a fine exercise facility. A: I'm happy to hear that. Now, would you tell me where it is? B: You're actually standing above it. Just take the elevator or stairs down one level. A: Is the hotel going to charge me a dollar a minute for gym use? B: No, sir. There's no extra charge. All you need is your room key to open the door. A: And the gym hours are? B: Sir, you'll be pleased to know that our gym never closes. A: One more question: Do you have a trainer? B: We might be getting one in the near future. But at the present time, no. 5.audio A: Excuse me. Do you happen to have a gym here? B: Yes, sir. I think you'll find our gym quite satisfactory. A: So, where do I go to exercise? B: It's only one flight down, sir. Just take the elevator or the stairs. A: Am I going to be charged extra for using the gym? B: Sir, you can use the gym for free. All you need is your room key. A: Great! Now tell me, what are the hours of this gym? B: Sir, our gym is open around the clock, every day of the week. A: Do you have a trainer to help me work out? B: I'm sorry, sir, but we have no trainer.10. Asking for More Amenities
1.audio A: I'd like to request some more amenities. B: Amenities? What do you mean by amenities, sir? A: The free stuff, you know, the soap, lotion, shampoo, etc. B: I see. Sir, if I may ask: Have you used up all the amenities in your room? A: Not at all. I still have enough for the next few days. B: Then what is the problem, sir? A: I need some to keep as souvenirs! B: Souvenirs? A: Yes, souvenirs. Trinkets to remember my trip by! B: We do have a souvenir shop on the first floor, sir. A: That's not the same. I never pay for hotel souvenirs! B: I'll call housekeeping. Someone will be up with more amenities shortly. 2.audio A: I need more amenities, please. B: Could you be a little more specific, sir? A: To be more specific, the free stuff, like soap, lotion, and shampoo. B: I understand. Now, you're saying that you've already used up all your amenities? A: No! I've got all I need for my stay here. B: So, what's the problem? A: I need souvenirs! B: You want some souvenirs! A: Yes, yes. Souvenirs. B: But, sir, our souvenir shop carries all those items. A: That's not the same thing. If you buy hotel souvenirs, they have no sentimental value. B: I understand, sir. I'll call housekeeping. You'll have your souvenirs shortly. 3.audio A: How do I get more amenities? B: I'm sorry, sir. I'm not sure I understand. A: I'm talking about the free stuff, like soap and shampoo. B: Oh, I see. So, you're saying that you've already run out of your amenities. A: No, no. I've got plenty left. B: Now I'm confused again! What is the problem? A: What am I going to do about souvenirs? B: Oh, I get it! You want souvenirs! A: Yes, I've got enough soap for my use, but no extra soap for souvenirs. B: Sir, our souvenir shop carries all those items, and as a guest you get a discount. A: Please! Free souvenirs are the only true souvenirs. B: I understand completely, sir. Housekeeping will bring you souvenirs in just a moment. 4.audio A: Yes, I need more amenities. B: By amenities, exactly what do you mean, please? A: You know, the things that are free, like the soap and the shampoo. B: Okay, I got it. You've already run out of all your amenities? A: No, I still have plenty left, even if I took three baths a day. B: I'm more confused now than before. How is there a problem? A: I need to take home some souvenirs! B: Okay, finally I understand. You would like souvenirs! A: Yes, souvenirs that I can take home and add to my collection. B: If it's souvenirs you want, sir, just visit our souvenir shop. It has everything. A: Are you kidding? Whoever heard of paying for hotel souvenirs? B: No problem at all, sir. Housekeeping will deliver you all the amenities you like in a bit. 5.audio A: I need some more amenities, please. B: I'm not sure I'm following you, sir. A: Specifically, I'm talking about the little things, like soap and shampoo. B: Oh, now I understand! So, you've already used up all your amenities? A: No, I'm not even halfway through my supply. B: I'm losing you, sir. What's the problem? A: What's the use of going to a hotel if you don't take home souvenirs? B: Okay, I got it. You're collecting souvenirs! A: There you go. My friends expect me to bring home souvenirs. B: Have you visited our souvenir shop, sir? It's loaded with all kinds of items. A: I've never paid for a hotel souvenir in my life, and I don't intend to start now. B: Sir, housekeeping will bring you a basketful of amenities momentarily.11. Asking Where to Make a Copy
1.audio A: I need to copy a document immediately. B: We have a copy machine in our computer lab, located on the first floor. A: Great! How much is it for a copy? B: The price per copy is ten cents. A: That sounds reasonable. I'll be down there immediately. B: THere shouldn't be any long lines, sir. 2.audio A: I need to copy something right now. B: Our computer lab on the first floor has a copy machine, sir. A: Great! How much per copy? B: Sir, one copy is ten cents. A: I'll be down there shortly. B: You probably won't have to wait for anyone, sir. 3.audio A: I need to make a copy of something at once. B: There's a copy machine on the first floor in our computer lab, sir. A: Fantastic! Is there a charge? B: It's ten cents a copy, sir. A: I'm only making one copy, so I guess I can afford it. B: A dime is still a bargain, sir. 4.audio A: I need to make a copy of a document as soon as possible. B: No problem, sir. There's a copy machine in our computer lab. A: Very good. How much does each copy cost? B: Each copy will cost you a dime, sir. A: A dime? I remember when copies used to cost a nickel. B: There aren't many things you can get for a nickel, sir. 5.audio A: Can you tell me where I could make a copy of a document right now? B: Sir, you can come downstairs right now to the computer lab. A: That's great. I don't suppose the copy machine is free for guests? B: Sir, each copy is ten cents or one dime, whichever you prefer. A: In the good old days, it was only five cents a copy. I'll be right down. B: Those were the good old days, sir, indeed.13. Calling for a Wireless Connection
1.audio A: I'd like to order broadband internet for my laptop. B: Just plug the Ethernet cable into your computer, and a prompt will tell you the payment options. A: I don't have an Ethernet port. My computer runs entirely on wireless service. B: That's too bad. But there are several alternatives, if you want to hear them. A: Yes, please! Tell me about the alternatives. B: We run a fully equipped computer lab on the first floor. A: Very good. How much does that cost? B: The service is free to hotel patrons. However, printing costs ten cents per page. A: I see. And the other alternatives? B: Alternatively, we do offer wireless in our lobby. You can bring your laptop down here. A: Great! What if I need to print something in the lobby? B: You would have to use the computer lab. I'm sorry for the inconvenience. 2.audio A: I need broadband for my computer. B: No problem. Just plug the Ethernet cable into your computer, and you're good to go. A: That's a problem. My laptop has no Ethernet port, it's wireless only. B: Hmm. Well, we have some alternatives, if you're interested. A: Go ahead. I'm all ears. B: We have a computer lab on the first floor. A: That's great! How much is it? B: It's absolutely free to guests. Except for printing, of course. A: What about the other alternatives? B: You could use your wireless right here in our lobby. A: Yes, that's the ticket! And if I need to print something there? B: Well, we don't have a printer in the lobby yet. You'll have to use the lab. 3.audio A: I'd like to get busy on my computer, but I need some broadband. B: There's an Ethernet cable in your room. Just plug it into the back of your laptop. A: I can't use Ethernet. My computer is wireless only. B: That's okay. I can tell you about some alternatives we have. A: Any alternative that works will be great. B: Well, there's our computer lab on the first floor. A: That sounds good. What's the charge? B: The lab and the computers are no charge, but you have to pay for whatever you print. A: That sounds good. Now, how about the other alternatives? B: Of course. Our lobby is set up for wireless, so just bring your computer down here. A: Use my laptop in the lobby? That's great! Now, if I need to print something there? B: They plan to install a printer here. But until then, you'll have to use the lab. 4.audio A: I can't get going on my computer until I get a broadband hookup. B: Just plug the Ethernet cable into your computer, and you'll be off and running. A: That would be okay if I had an Ethernet port. Unfortunately, my laptop uses wireless only. B: In that case, let me tell you about some alternatives. A: Anything to get me up and running. B: For starters, we have a computer lab. A: Fantastic! What do I have to pay per hour? B: The lab is completely free. But you do have to pay a dime a page for printing. A: That's fine. Now tell me about the other alternatives. B: Just bring your laptop down here to the lobby. We're set up for wireless right here. A: Great! I like that suggestion, but what if I need to print something there? B: Unfortunately, you'll have to go to the computer lab for your printing needs. 5.audio A: How do I get online with my laptop? B: Just plug the Ethernet cable into your computer, and you'll be online in a heartbeat. A: I see the cable. But my computer runs on wireless only. B: No problem. I'll tell you about our alternatives. A: Yes, I'd love to hear what the alternatives are. B: Our state-of-the-art computer lab is on the first floor. A: Great! But is it free? B: Sir, the computers are free to guests, but you do have to pay a nominal printing fee. A: You said there were other alternatives? B: Just use your computer here in the lobby. It's set up for wireless. A: That sounds like a winner. Now if I need to print something in the lobby? B: We might have a printer here next month. But for now, you'll have to go to the lab.14. Requesting More Supplies for the Minibar
1.audio A: I'd like to order a restock on my minibar. B: You finished everything in there, sir? A: Absolutely everything. B: What would you like to order? A: Three bottles each of Perrier and Jim Beam. B: Uh-huh. What else do you want? A: The apples were great. Could you bring a couple more up? B: No problem. Is there anything else I can get for you? A: Some grape juice would also be nice. B: I'll get all of that for you right away. Someone should be up shortly. 2.audio A: I need my minibar restocked. B: Everything is gone, sir? A: There's not a drop left of anything. B: Is there anything in particular you'd like? A: Yes, the Perrier and the Jim Beam hit the spot. Let me have three more of each. B: Got it. Anything else? A: I really liked the apples. Bring me a couple of apples, please. B: Not a problem. Anything else? A: Yes, one more thing: some grape juice. B: Someone will be up shortly with your order, sir. 3.audio A: My minibar is empty. B: You already finished off everything, sir? A: I finished off everything. B: Would you like anything in particular? A: The Perrier and the Jim Beam. Let me have three more of each. B: Beam and Perrier. Anything else, sir? A: I really loved the apples in my room. Bring me a few more, please. B: Sure thing. Might there by anything else? A: Yes, speaking of fruit, bring me some grape juice, too. B: Perrier, Jim Beam, apples, and grape juice. It will all be there shortly, sir. 4.audio A: How do I restock my minibar? B: You've drunk everything, sir? A: I finished it all. B: Do you want the whole minibar, or just certain items? A: Send me up three bottles each of Perrier and Jim Beam. B: That's three Jim Beams and three Perriers. Anything else, sir? A: The apples in my room were delicious. Bring me a few more, please. B: Okay. Are you sure there isn't anything else? A: You know, some grape juice would be really nice, too. B: Be patient for just a few minutes, sir, and someone will be at your door. 5.audio A: My minibar is completely empty. B: Everything in that minibar has been consumed, sir? A: Everything's gone. B: Is there anything special you'd like? A: Just bring me three bottles each of Jim Beam and Perrier. B: Okay, sir. Three of each. Would you like anything else? A: The fruit basket was great. I need a few more apples, please. B: Perrier, Jim Beam, and apples. Is that it for now? A: Yes, one last thing: I could use some grape juice. B: Your order will be brought to you momentarily, sir.15. Asking about the Swimming Pool
1.audio A: Is there a swimming pool in this hotel? B: We don't have a full-sized swimming pool, but we do have individual swim stations. A: What exactly does that mean? B: Basically, a swim station is like a treadmill, except instead of running, you swim. A: That sounds really neat. Is there an extra charge for these swim stations? B: If you're a registered guest, you have free access to our swim stations. A: Are the swim stations open 24 hours, like the rest of the gym? B: To conserve electricity, the stations operate only from 7:00 a.m. till 10:00 p.m. A: I'll go down there as soon as I can! B: I don't think you'll be disappointed. People really seem to like the swim stations. 2.audio A: Does this hotel have a pool? B: I'm sorry, sir, we don't have one. However, in our gym, we do have swim stations. A: I'm not sure I understand. B: Think of a deep bathtub that you can swim in, but against a current. A: Cool. What will they think of next? How much are they? B: Sir, guests pay nothing to use the stations. A: Excellent! Now what are the hours? B: The gym is open 24/7, but the stations are open from 7 a.m. to 10 p.m. only. A: I'm going to change into my trunks right now! B: I think you'll like the experience, sir. It's a great workout. 3.audio A: Do you have a swimming pool in this hotel? B: We don't have a pool, sir, but we do have swim stations in the gym. A: I never heard of a swim station. Is that like a train or bus station? B: It's just a deep bathtub with a current of water that you swim against. A: Holy cow! I never heard of such a thing. How much do they cost? B: As a guest, sir, you pay nothing. A: This sounds better every second. Now, when can I use the stations? B: If you want to swim, you can visit the gym any day between 7 a.m. and 10 p.m. A: Oh, boy! This is going to be great. I'm going to the gym right now! B: I'm sure you'll enjoy your workout, sir. Everyone seems to like the swim stations. 4.audio A: I think I've looked everywhere, but I haven't seen a swimming pool here. B: This hotel has no full-size pool, but we do have swim stations in our gym. A: Swim stations? Whoever heard of such a thing? B: You swim in a swim station just like you run on a treadmill. A: All that exercise in a little pool! Do I have to pay anything? B: The swim stations are available to all guests for no charge. A: Very good. Now can you tell me the hours of operation? B: They're available anytime between 7 a.m. and 10 p.m., seven days a week. A: Wow! I can't wait to change into my trunks! B: The swim stations are very popular, sir. I hope you don't find a line down there. 5.audio A: I've been looking for a swimming pool, but I haven't found one yet. B: We have no pool, sir, but we do have swim stations in our gym. A: Swim stations? Could you be a little more explicit? B: You know how you run on a treadmill but don't go anywhere? Well, it's the same thing. A: Gee, that's a great idea. Now, how much do I have to pay? B: The stations are absolutely free to guests, sir. A: Great! Now, when can I go down there and use the stations? B: The swim stations are open daily from 7 a.m. to 10 p.m. A: Boy, oh boy! I can't wait to change into my swim trunks. B: Be warned, sir. At certain hours the swim stations are very crowded.16. Getting a Taxi via the Front Desk
1.audio A: I need to get a taxi. B: We have a variety of transportation services. Would you prefer a private vehicle to a taxi? A: No, that won't be necessary. I just need a taxi. B: Perhaps you'd prefer a limousine. That's such a stylish way to travel. A: Just a taxi, please. B: And what is your destination? A: I'm going to Rockefeller Center. B: I see. What time do you want to depart from the hotel? A: I want to leave as soon as possible. B: Okay, a taxi will arrive in seconds, sir. A: Thank you, I'm coming down now. B: It won't be but a few seconds, sir. 2.audio A: I need a taxi, please. B: We have various transportation services. Would you prefer a private vehicle? A: No, thanks. A taxi is just fine. B: May I suggest a limo? It's nice to pamper yourself once in a while. A: I don't want anything except a taxi, thank you. B: I understand. And where will you be going? A: Rockefeller Center. B: And what time would you like to be picked up? A: The sooner the better. B: A taxi will be here shortly, sir. A: Great! And remember, a taxi, not a limo. B: A taxi it is, sir. 3.audio A: Can you get me a taxi? B: We offer various types of transportation. Perhaps you'd like to upgrade to a private vehicle? A: Thanks, but no thanks. A taxi will do just fine. B: In that case, how about a limo? Then you can travel in style. A: No, I hate limousines. They're gas guzzlers. B: Got it, sir. Where would you like the taxi to take you? A: My destination is Rockefeller Center. B: What time do you want to leave the hotel? A: As soon as possible. B: I'll call the taxi immediately, sir. A: I'm coming downstairs now. B: A brand new taxi is pulling up now, sir. 4.audio A: I'm going to need a taxi. B: You don't have to restrict yourself to a taxi. We can offer you a private vehicle. A: A private vehicle, huh? No, a taxi is okay. B: Some people find a limo to be much more comfortable than a taxi. A: No, I wouldn't be caught dead in a limo. B: No upgrade of any kind. And where might you be going? A: I'm headed to Rockefeller Center. B: When shall I tell the taxi to be here? A: Right now. B: The taxi will be here immediately, sir. A: Good, I'm leaving my room in about one minute. B: You won't have to wait a second, sir. 5.audio A: I need a taxi. B: We could easily provide you with a private vehicle, if you'd prefer. A: No, the taxi will do. B: Perhaps you'd like to take a beautiful limousine. A: No, thank you. Taxis and I get along just fine. B: No private vehicle, no limo. Got it. Where are you going? A: I'm seeing a show at Rockefeller Center. B: What time should the taxi be here to pick you up? A: I'm ready to go right now. B: I'll have a taxi for you momentarily, sir. A: Great! As soon as I brush my teeth, I'll be downstairs. B: You'll enjoy our new, clean taxis, sir. 6.audio A: Could you please reserve a taxi for me? B: Do you think a private vehicle might be more to your liking? A: A private vehicle? No, thanks, I won't need one. B: Even better than a private vehicle is a limo. How does that sound? A: T A X I, please. B: A taxi it is. Where will you be headed? A: Rockefeller Center. Can you get the taxi here immediately, please? B: A taxi will be here in just a minute, sir. A: Good. I'll get my coat and come downstairs. B: The taxi will be ready when you are, sir.17. Checking Out
1.audio A: I am checking out. Here is the key to my room. B: Thank you. I'll just print out your receipt, and then you're free to go. Here you go! A: Thanks. B: If you don't mind me asking, how did you enjoy your stay at New York Hotel? A: This hotel could use some insecticide, but my time in New York was thoroughly delightful. B: That's very honest of you. Rest assured that this hotel will have no insects next time. 2.audio A: I want to check out. Here is my room key. B: One second, sir, while I print out your receipt. Here you are. A: Thanks. B: May I ask, sir, if you enjoyed your stay? A: Except for one night, I enjoyed the hotel. And I loved New York, of course. B: Thank you for your honesty. I assure you there will be no cockroaches next time. 3.audio A: I'm leaving. Here is my key. B: Just one second, sir, and I'll give you your receipt. Here you go. A: Thank you very much. B: Sir, did you enjoy your stay here? A: Most of my time here was pleasant. And New York itself is fantastic. B: I'm glad you enjoyed the city, anyway. But please don't think too unkindly of us. 4.audio A: I'm out of here. Here's my key. B: Give me just a few seconds, sir, and I'll hand you your receipt. Here you are. A: I thank you. B: I hope you enjoyed your stay, sir. A: I only had nine little problems here. Other than that, I enjoyed my stay, and I loved the city. B: I apologize again for the cockroaches, sir. I hope you have a nice trip home. 5.audio A: My stay is over. Here's the key to my room. B: Thank you. And here's your receipt, sir. A: Many thanks. B: I hope your stay here was satisfactory, sir. A: This could be a great hotel, once you get rid of the insects. The city itself is great. B: I'm glad that the little problem didn't ruin your visit. Please have a pleasant trip home. 6.audio A: This visit is over for me. Here's your room key. B: Thank you for that, and in return, here's your receipt. A: And thanks to you. B: I hope you'll visit us again, sir. A: I'd be willing to try this hotel again, if you can promise me no more cockroaches. B: I guarantee you that our little “friends” won't be back. I hope your trip home is pleasant.18. Disputing the Bill
1.audio A: My amenities bill says that I owe $10 for a movie, but I never ordered one. B: Let's see. It says that you were charged Monday at 9:00 p.m. for the movie "Titanic." A: That's absolutely wrong! I was out exploring the city Monday night. B: Okay, let me see what I can do. A: Thank you. I didn't think it would be this simple. B: I can take the $10 off your bill, but I need to charge you $2 for the service. A: Are you serious? I have to pay $2 for a movie I never watched? B: Unfortunately, sir, it's how the computer is programmed. A: This is outrageous! I'm never coming back to this hotel again! B: I'm sorry, sir. Perhaps you'd like to write a letter to headquarters. 2.audio A: I just discovered that I owe $10 for a movie that I never ordered. B: Let me check, sir. You were charged for watching "Titanic" Monday night. A: That is absolutely incorrect! I was out on the town Monday night. B: Okay, sir, bear with me a moment. A: Thank you for taking my word over the computer's word. B: One slight problem, sir. I need to charge you $2 to remove this error from your file. A: You can't be serious. You're making me pay $2 for a movie I never watched? B: I feel your pain, sir. A: Absolutely unbelievable! You people should be ashamed of yourselves. B: I agree with you, sir, but all I do is work here. 3.audio A: You guys are charging me $10 for a movie that I never ordered or saw. B: Let's see, sir. According to your file, you watched "Titanic" Monday evening. A: The wrong information is in my file. I was at a concert Monday night. B: Well, your word overrules the file, sir. One moment, please. A: I knew you'd see it my way. B: Sir, I deleted the $10, but I had to add a $2 service charge to your bill. A: Am I in the Twilight Zone? You're charging me for a movie I never saw? B: Please don't blame me, sir. Blame the computer programmer. A: This is highway robbery. I've got a good mind to call the police! B: If it makes you feel any better, other guests feel the same way. 4.audio A: Why am I being charged $10 for a movie that I never ordered? B: Sir, according to your file, you spent Monday evening watching "Titanic." A: The file is wrong. I was at a great concert that night. B: Well, this wouldn't be the first time that a file was wrong. Just a moment, please. A: Thank you for taking care of it so quickly. B: Sir, when I deleted the $10, the program automatically added a $2 service charge. A: You can't do that! You can't charge me for a mistake that you made! B: Sometimes you can't win for losing, sir. A: Now I've seen it all! What a rip-off this place is! B: I don't blame you, sir. Two dollars is a lot of money. 5.audio A: I need to know why I'm being charged $10 for a movie that I never ordered. B: Hmm. Your file shows that you watched "Titanic" Monday night. A: Monday night? Monday night I was at a great concert. B: Well, as they say, garbage in, garbage out. Let me correct this error, please. A: Thank you. It's very nice when problems can be solved quickly. B: When I deleted the $10, the computer automatically added a $2 service charge. A: Are you crazy? You made the mistake and now you're charging me for your mistake? B: Sir, if it makes you feel any better, the $2 service fee used to be $5. A: Why don't you just stick a gun in my ribs and take everything I have? B: Unfortunately, sir, you'll have to pay the $2, whether you like it or not.19. Storing Luggage for a Few Hours
1.audio A: I'm checking out in about half an hour. B: Whenever you're ready to check out, I'll be ready, sir. A: Great! As you know however, the day in New York has hardly begun. B: You're right. It's only 9:00 a.m. A: Therefore, I think I'll explore New York some more. But I need to store my bags. B: Sir, our storage facility is merely $5 an hour. You also need to leave a deposit. A: My luggage isn't enough of a deposit? B: Unfortunately, it isn't. VISA or MasterCard will suffice, though. A: Let me put on my thinking cap for a moment. B: Better hurry, sir. Remember you have to check out in less than half an hour. 2.audio A: I should tell you that I'm checking out in about 30 minutes. B: I'm ready when you are, sir. A: Very good! Now, it's still morning here in New York. B: You are so right, sir. The clock just struck nine. A: I'm going to spend some time exploring the city. What can I do with my luggage? B: Sir, right here we have a storage site. Its only $5 an hour, but you need to leave a deposit. A: A deposit? Isn't my luggage a deposit? B: I'm sorry, sir, but it isn't. Your MasterCard or VISA will take care of things nicely. A: Let me think about this. B: Okay, sir. But don't take too long. You only have 30 minutes. 3.audio A: Do you know that I'm checking out in about 30 minutes? B: Just say the word, sir. A: Excellent! Now, as you know, the day has barely begun. B: I agree. The dew is still on the grass. A: I want to hit a few more places in the city, but I need a place to put my luggage. B: We do have a storage space for your bags. There's a small charge, plus a deposit. A: Leave a deposit? Isn't leaving the luggage enough of a deposit? B: Regrettably, no. But simply present your VISA to cover your deposit. A: I'll have to think about this for a second. B: Okay, sir, but don't think too long. Your checkout is only 30 minutes away. 4.audio A: In case you didn't know, I'm checking out in half an hour. B: That won't be a problem, sir. A: That's good to hear. Now there's still a whole New York day ahead of me. B: You're right, sir. Your whole day is still ahead of you. A: I still have time to explore more of New York, but I need a place to secure my baggage. B: We have a storage place here, but you have to leave a deposit. A: A deposit, huh? I would think my baggage would be enough of a deposit. B: Just present your VISA card, and there won't be any problems. A: That deposit bothers me. Give me a minute. B: Okay, sir, but remember how close it is to your checkout time. 5.audio A: I'll be checking out of the hotel in about 30 minutes. B: Thirty minutes or 30 seconds, sir, it doesn't matter, I'm ready for you. A: Great! As you know, however, the day in New York has hardly begun. B: There's nothing like getting an early start, sir. A: What can I do with my baggage while I visit a few more tourist spots? B: You can leave your baggage in our storage space, with a deposit. A: Isn't my baggage enough of a deposit? B: I wish it was, but it isn't. They will still want a credit card. A: It's always something, isn't it? Let me think about this for a second. B: Don't forget that you have very little time, sir, before you have to check out.20. To Hold a Parcel for Pick-up
1.audio A: I'd like to leave a parcel for one of my friends. Is that okay? B: All I need is your name, the name of your friend, and the time of pick-up. A: All of that's on the package. Can I just bring it down to your desk? B: That would be most convenient for me. Thanks for your consideration! 2.audio A: I want to leave a parcel for a friend to pick up. Can I do that? B: Just tell me your name, your friend's name, and when your friend is coming by. A: I'll put all that information on the package and just bring it down to you. Is that okay? B: That sounds great, sir. Thank you. 3.audio A: Can I leave a parcel with you for one of my friends to pick up later? B: I just need your name and your friend's name. Also, tell me when he is coming by. A: How about if I write all that on the package and then bring it down to you? B: Perfect. Thank you for doing that. 4.audio A: I've got a parcel here that a friend is going to pick up. Can I leave it with you? B: No problem. Just tell me your name, his name, and when he's coming by. A: I'll just write all that info on the parcel itself and then bring it to you. B: Sir, you make my work too easy. Thank you. 5.audio A: A friend is picking up a parcel. Can I leave the parcel with you? B: By all means, sir. Just give me your name, his name, and when he will be coming by. A: I can put all of that right on the package and then bring it down to you, if that's okay. B: Well, thank you for doing that, sir. I wish all guests were like you.21. Calling to Cancel a Reservation
1.audio A: I'm calling to cancel a reservation I made earlier in the week. B: To cancel your reservation, I need your name, phone number, and date of trip, please. A: Rudy Randolph, 818-555-1234. My reservation begins on the second Monday of April. B: I see your reservation on my computer. Let me just cancel it, and you'll be all set! A: Thanks. I'll call again when things get better at home. B: You're welcome. 2.audio A: I need to cancel my reservation. I have personal matters that need fixing. B: That's not a problem. Just give me your name, phone number, and date of visit. A: Rudy Randolph, 818-555-1234, April 9 through 15. B: I see your info here on the screen. I'll hit just one button, sir, and you're cancelled. A: Thank you. I'm glad that wasn't too much of a bother. B: It's a pleasure. 3.audio A: I made a reservation earlier this week, but I have to cancel it. B: No problem, sir. Just tell me your name, phone number, and date of reservation. A: Great! I'm Rudy Randolph, 818-555-1234, and my reservation was for April 9 to 15. B: Sir, let me hit the delete button, and your reservation will be cancelled. A: That was nice and fast. Thanks. B: Not at all. 4.audio A: I hate to do this, but I've got to cancel a reservation I made earlier this week. B: All I need is your name, phone, and reservation date. A: My name is Rudy Randolph. I'm at 818-555-1234. The reservation was for April 9. B: Randolph, Rudy. Let me hit one button, sir, and now your reservation is cancelled. A: Thank you. I'll make another reservation as soon as I can. B: It's been my pleasure to help you. 5.audio A: My wife is sick, so I have to cancel a reservation I made. B: If you'll just give me your name, phone, and date of visit, I can cancel your reservation. A: I'm Rudy Randolph at 818-555-1234, April ninth to the fifteenth. B: Mr. Randolph. Okay, one second, sir, and there you go. Your reservation is now cancelled. A: I wish everything in life was so simple, thank you. B: Not a problem, sir. Please remember us in the future.1. Choosing a Good Restaurant
1.audio A: Devi, have you thought about where would you like to go to dinner on Friday for your birthday? B: I am not sure. I don't know that many restaurants around here. A: You know, we could look online at the local Internet sites. B: Good. Let's take a look! A: What kind of food would you like for your birthday? B: I enjoy Thai or Japanese the best. A: This one, Shogun, looks good. B: Oh yes, I've heard of that one. Everyone I've spoken with says that it is great! A: Would you like to go there then? B: I think that that would be a really good choice! Let's call and make a reservation. 2.audio A: Devi, do you have any preference for where you would like to go for dinner for your birthday? B: I don't really know where I want to go. I am having trouble thinking of a particular restaurant. A: There is a great restaurant directory here in the weekend section of the newspaper. B: OK, we could look at that. A: Do you have a particular type of food that you would like? B: I really like Japanese or Thai food. A: That Japanese restaurant, Shogun, got good reviews. B: Oh yeah! I saw a review of that restaurant on television. The reviewer loved it! A: Would that be a place that you might like to go to for your birthday? B: That would work out great! Why don't we call and get a reservation? 3.audio A: Devi, do you have a favorite place that you would like to go to for your birthday dinner? B: I am kind of at a loss right now to think of some place special. A: I've got a great guidebook here of local restaurants. B: That would be a good place to look. A: What is your favorite type of restaurant food? B: I like a lot of things, but Thai or Japanese would be good. A: Shogun looks pretty good! B: Oh, I remember that restaurant. I went there years ago. I really enjoyed it! A: Would that be a good choice for your birthday dinner then? B: I would enjoy going there. Let's call ahead to make sure that we can get a table for that night.2. Making a Reservation
1.audio A: Shogun Restaurant. B: Hi, I would like to make a dinner reservation. A: Of course, what evening will you be joining us on? B: We will need the reservation for Tuesday night. A: What time would you like the reservation for? B: We would prefer 7:00 or 7:30. A: How many people will you need the reservation for? B: There will be 4 of us. A: Fine, I can seat you at 7:00 on Tuesday, if you would kindly give me your name. B: Thank you. The last name is Foster. A: See you at 7:00 this Tuesday, Mr. Foster. B: Thank you so much. I appreciate your help. 2.audio A: This is Shogun Restaurant. B: Hello, I need to make a dinner reservation. A: Can you tell me what night you will be coming? B: We will be coming to your restaurant on Tuesday night. A: What time will you be dining with us? B: Our first choice would be 7:00, or perhaps 7:30. A: How many guests will be in your party? B: Four of us will be coming. A: Please just give me your name, and at 7:00 on Tuesday we will have a table for you! B: Great! Our last name is Foster. A: Thank you, Mr. Foster, see you this Tuesday at 7:00. B: I look forward to having dinner at your restaurant. Thank you for your help. 3.audio A: Shogun Restaurant of Pasadena. B: Hi, could you help me? I need to make a dinner reservation. A: I can help you if you can just tell me what evening you like the reservation for. B: Tuesday night is when we need the reservation for. A: What time do you think that you would like to have dinner? B: 7:00 would be best, or maybe 7:30. A: How many diners will be in your group? B: We need a reservation for four. A: I have a table for four available at 7:00, if you would just give me your name. B: My last name is Foster. Thank you for the reservation. A: Mr. Foster, we will be expecting you this Tuesday at 7:00. B: We will be there! Thanks for the help!3. Being Seated at the Restaurant
1.audio A: Good evening, sir, and welcome to Chez Attitude. B: We have a dinner reservation for four at 7:00 under the name of Foster. A: Yes, Mr. Foster, if you would please be seated over in the waiting area, our hostess will be with you in a moment. B: Thank you. Would it be OK if we have a cocktail while we are waiting? A: Of course, I will tell her. B: I would really prefer an outside table. Would that be possible? A: Sure, if you would like one of those tables, I could seat you right away. B: Sure, that would be great! Thank you! A: Here are your menus and the wine menu, and would you like to order your drinks now? B: Yes, I would like a vodka gimlet, please. A: Sure, no problem, sir. B: Thank you very much. 2.audio A: Welcome to our restaurant, Chez Attitude! B: Our reservation is under the name of Foster at 7:00 for four people. A: Yes, Mr. Foster, our hostess will be with you in just a moment. B: We would like to begin with a cocktail while we are waiting. Would you tell the hostess to please come and let us know when our table is ready? A: I will let her know where you are. B: The patio tables look really nice. Could we be seated there, please? A: I could seat you right away at an outside table if you would like. B: Thanks! We'll sit out there then. We will just order our drinks out there. A: Can I start you off with some cocktails while you are looking over the menu? B: Yes, why don't you bring us a bottle of the house Chablis with four glasses to start with? A: I'll get on that right away! B: We appreciate your help. 3.audio A: Thank you for joining us this evening at Chez Attitude. B: I am Mr. Foster, and we have a 7:00 dinner reservation tonight for four people. A: Welcome, Mr. Foster, if you would have a seat in the lounge area, our hostess will be ready to seat you in just a moment. B: We are going to have a drink while we are waiting. Please let the hostess know that she can find us there. A: She will come and let you know when your table is prepared. B: Those patio tables are new, aren't they? Would it be possible to be seated out there? A: An outside table is available right now if you would like to be seated immediately. B: We would love to sit outside. Thanks for your help! A: Here is your table, and now may I take your drink order while you are considering what to have for dinner? B: Yes, could you please bring us a pitcher of margaritas and four glasses while we are figuring out our dinner order? A: I'll put your drink order in and be right back to get your dinner order. B: We'll be ready to order by the time you get back!4. Ordering Food and Drinks
1.audio A: Can I start you off with anything to drink? B: Yes, may I have some water, please? A: Sure, would you like any appetizers today? B: May I get an order of barbeque wings? A: No problem, can I get you anything else? B: No, thank you, that'll be all for now. A: Let me know when you're ready to order your food. B: I'm ready. A: What can I get you? B: May I have the fettuccini Alfredo? A: Will that be all? B: Yes, that's it. 2.audio A: May I get you anything to drink? B: Yes, please. May I get a glass of lemonade? A: Would you like an appetizer? B: May I get an order of barbeque wings? A: Sure, would you like anything else? B: That'll be fine for now, thank you. A: Tell me when you want to order the rest of your food. B: Excuse me. I'm ready to order. A: What would you like? B: Let me have the baby-back ribs. A: Sure, will there be anything else that I can get you? B: That will be it for now. 3.audio A: Good evening, can I get you a drink? B: Sure, I would like a Coke. A: Would you like to order anything off the appetizer menu? B: Let's see, can I get some fried zucchini, please? A: Would you like to order anything else? B: No, that's it, thank you. A: No problem, call me when you're ready to place the rest of your order. B: I would like to order my food now. A: What did you want to order? B: Can I get a cheeseburger and some fries? A: Can I get you anything else? B: That's all, thank you.5. Ordering Appetizers
1.audio A: I am your waitress, Mary. B: Hello, Mary. We are all pretty hungry tonight! A: While you are looking over the menu, can I interest you in an appetizer? B: An appetizer sounds good. Do you have a special menu? A: They are listed on the first page of the menu. B: The coconut shrimp looks good. Have you ever had that? A: Yes, it is excellent! B: Good, I'll take that then. A: Would you like to split that and choose another appetizer for half price to share? B: Good. In that case, we'll also take an order of onion rings. Thank you! 2.audio A: My name is Mary, and I will be your waitress tonight. B: Thank you, Mary. We have been looking forward to trying out this restaurant. A: Before your main course, would you like to order an appetizer? B: Sure, that sounds great. Where are your appetizers listed? A: There is a special appetizer menu right here in the center of the table. B: The chicken and cheese quesadilla looks good. Is that pretty good? A: You know, that is one of my favorites! B: OK, I'll take one order of that. A: You could choose another appetizer for half price to share. B: Perfect! Please add on an order of onion rings. 3.audio A: My name is Mary, and I will be your server this evening. B: Hi Mary. We are really looking forward to a great meal here. A: Can I interest you in an appetizer to start out? B: I would love an appetizer. Are they listed in the menu? A: We have our daily appetizers listed on the board over there on the wall. B: I am thinking about the popcorn shrimp. How is that? A: That would be a great choice! B: I'll trust your taste and take one order of that. A: We have a special where you can order a second appetizer for half price. B: In that case, we'll take an order of onion rings with our first choice.6. Ordering Main Entree
1.audio A: Have you had enough time to look over the menu? B: Yes, we are almost ready to order. A: Let me remind you of the specials of the day, which are posted on the board. B: Oh, that all sounds so good! Can we get the sauce on the side? A: Yes, we would be happy to prepare the food to meet your special needs. B: I was wondering if you have any vegetarian choices. A: Yes, the roasted vegetable salad is good, and the portabella mushroom burger is also a good choice. B: I think that I would like to order the broccoli noodles, please. A: That is an excellent choice, and I could bring you your salads now or bring them with your dinner. B: Please bring our salads to us now. We are hungry! 2.audio A: Are you ready to order? B: I think that we have a pretty good idea of what we would like to order. A: Let me tell you about the specials of the day, which are chicken in a wine sauce with capers, and grilled garlic shrimp. B: I was wondering if the chef could leave off the sauce. A: The chef would be happy to accommodate your special requests. B: I am a vegetarian. Do you have any vegetarian selections? A: You could choose the roasted vegetable and garlic pizza or the goat cheese and candied walnut salad. B: I think that we will split the roasted vegetable and garlic pizza. A: That is a good selection, and I can bring your salads now or serve them with your entree. B: You can bring us our salads when you bring us our entree. 3.audio A: Would you like to order now? B: This all looks good! I think we know what we want. A: Please let me point out the chef's special, which is blackened catfish. B: I am dieting, so could the chef prepare the food with no extra sauce? A: We are always happy to adjust our cooking to meet your needs. B: Could you tell me if there are any entrees that are vegetarian? A: The cashew broccoli noodles or the cheese and veggie enchiladas would be an excellent choice. B: I am going to go with the grilled shrimp with garlic sauce. I would like the garlic sauce on the side. A: Would you like your salad brought to you with your entr?, or would you like it served now? B: You can serve our salads with our dinner.7. Ordering Drinks
1.audio A: May I take your drink order while you are looking over your menu? B: Yes, do you have a wine list? A: The wine list is on the second page of your menu. B: Do you have mixed drinks in this restaurant? A: Yes, we have a full bar here. B: I am not sure what I want. Do you have any house specials? A: Actually, we are famous for our Cuervo Gold margaritas. B: That sounds good! Please bring me one of those. A: Would you like that drink blended or on the rocks? B: I would like it blended. A: Would you like it with salt or no salt? B: I would like my margarita with no salt, thank you. 2.audio A: While you are thinking about what you might like to order for dinner, would you like to order your drinks? B: Can you tell me where your wine list is? A: The wine list is posted right there on the board. B: Can we order a mixed drink in this restaurant? A: Yes, we have a wide selection of mixed drinks available from our bar. B: Do you have any house specials that you could recommend? A: Our most popular drinks are our Cuervo Gold margaritas. B: That sounds like a good choice for me. May I have one, please? A: Can I bring that to you on the rocks, or would you like it blended? B: Please bring it to me on the rocks. A: Salt or no salt? B: I would like it with no salt, please. 3.audio A: Can I take your drink order? B: Where is your wine list? A: The wine choices are posted on the little menu in the middle of the table. B: Do you have any mixed drinks available here? A: We can make a number of mixed drinks at our bar. B: I heard that you are famous for your drinks. What are your specials? A: Our house special is our Cuervo Gold margarita. B: I would love a margarita right now! That is what I am going to order. A: Can I prepare your drink on the rocks, or would you prefer it blended? B: I prefer my margarita on the rocks, please. A: Do you like your margarita with salt or no salt? B: No salt, please.8. Ordering Dessert
1.audio A: Did you enjoy your meal? B: Yes, we really enjoyed it. A: May I interest you in some dessert? B: Yes, that sounds great. A: We have chocolate mousse cake, and a spicy rum apple crisp for our specials. B: The apple crisp sounds great. A: Since there are four of you, would you like to split a second dessert? B: Good suggestion. Could you please bring us a chocolate mousse cake and four dessert forks, please? A: Would you like coffee or tea with your dessert? B: Let's have four coffees, please. A: OK. I will be right back with your desserts and drinks. B: Thank you! We have really enjoyed our meal here. 2.audio A: So how was your meal? B: Our meal was wonderful! A: Would you like to finish your evening with us with some dessert? B: I am full, but maybe we could split a few desserts. A: Tonight's dessert specials include chocolate mousse cake, and a spicy rum apple crisp. B: I would love the apple crisp. A: That is a good choice, but would you like to split a second dessert for the four of you? B: Add in a chocolate mousse cake and we're good. We will also need four dessert forks, please. A: Can I bring you some coffee or tea with your dessert? B: We would like two coffees and two teas. A: I will put your dessert order in and be right back with your drinks. B: Thanks, and may we have our check when you come back? We have theater tickets and need to leave soon. 3.audio A: Did your meal meet with your approval? B: Our meal was absolutely perfect! A: How about a dessert to top off that wonderful meal? B: Dessert sounds perfect, but I would like to split something with my friends. A: On this evening's dessert list, we have chocolate mousse cake, and a spicy rum apple crisp. B: I think that the apple crisp would be wonderful. A: One dessert will serve two, so would you like to split a second one? B: We would also like a piece of chocolate mousse cake. Could you bring us four dessert forks, please? A: How about some coffee and tea with your dessert? B: We are all tea drinkers. Please bring us four teas. A: I will prepare your desserts and have someone bring you your drinks right away. B: The hot drinks first would be great. Thanks!9. A Mistake by the Waitress
1.audio A: Here is your breakfast! B: Thanks so much. Miss, I believe I ordered my eggs scrambled, and these are fried. A: Sorry, your friend over there ordered fried eggs, and I gave you his by mistake. B: Oh yeah. Here, I will just trade with him. A: Here are your pancakes, sir. B: But I ordered waffles! A: I am so sorry! B: That's OK. I will eat my eggs and bacon, and you can take my pancakes back. A: Good, sir. I will take care of that right away. B: Thank you so much! 2.audio A: I believe you ordered the Grand Slam breakfast. B: Oh, good! You know, I am looking at my plate and I ordered scrambled eggs, not fried. A: I just noticed that I accidentally brought you your friend's breakfast. B: I can just trade with him, thank you. A: And pancakes for you, sir. B: I am sorry, but I think I ordered waffles. A: I am sorry that I misheard you. B: Just please take my pancakes to trade for waffles. While I am waiting, I will eat my bacon and eggs. A: I will get straight back to you with your waffles. B: I would appreciate that. 3.audio A: One Grand Slam breakfast for you! B: Thanks. You know, I just noticed that these eggs are fried, and I ordered scrambled. A: Thank you for pointing that out. I mistakenly gave you your friend's breakfast. B: Not a problem. I can just trade my plate with his. A: A special order of banana pancakes for you! B: Pancakes? I don't like pancakes. I ordered waffles. A: I am so sorry, sir! B: I can eat my bacon and eggs while you are exchanging my pancakes for waffles. A: I will go trade those pancakes for waffles right now. B: That would take care of it, thank you.10. Making Positive Comments on Food
1.audio A: What a wonderful dinner! B: Thank you. I am glad that you are enjoying it. A: Where did you get your fantastic recipes? B: I grew up cooking. My mother shared her recipes with me. A: I especially like the wonderful chicken dish. B: That is a special coconut ginger chicken with rice dish. A: Is that shrimp in the soup? B: Yes, do you like it? I added a little extra lemon grass and some sea vegetables. A: I am happy that the wine I brought for you works well with this meal. B: Yes, thank you for bringing the wine. It really complements the meal. 2.audio A: This is a great meal! B: Thank you. I am glad that everything turned out so well. A: Who taught you how to cook this well? B: I took a cooking class at the Culinary Institute. A: Wow, what is in this chicken dish? B: Isn't that great? That is coconut ginger chicken with rice. A: Is the soup a shrimp soup? B: Yes, there is shrimp in there along with sea vegetables and lemon grass. A: I think I got lucky in choosing a wine that blends with this meal. B: I appreciate you bringing the wine. It goes well with the chicken. 3.audio A: I really love this meal. B: Thanks. I was hoping that you would all enjoy this meal. A: Where did you learn to cook these amazing dishes? B: I got a really wonderful cookbook for my birthday and decided to try out a few of the recipes. A: The chicken is out of this world! B: I love that dish as well. It is coconut chicken with rice. A: I was wondering if there was shrimp in the soup. B: Yes, that soup has a shrimp base. I also added sea vegetables and lemon grass. A: It worked out well that the wine that I brought to share seems to blend well with this meal. B: I love this wine! It goes very well with the chicken.11. Making Negative Comments on Food
1.audio A: George, how is your chicken? B: My chicken tastes all right, but it is pretty dry. How is your fish? A: My fish is pretty dry too. B: It's almost as if this food has been sitting a little too long. It doesn't seem fresh. A: Yes, it seems that way to me also. B: How are your vegetables? A: My vegetables are very soggy. B: Mine are the same way. It seems like they've been overcooked. A: I don't usually complain, but I think that we should mention this to the waiter. B: I agree. Maybe they can bring us some better food. 2.audio A: George, is your chicken OK? B: It tastes great, but it is really dry. Is your fish all right? A: My fish is very dry. B: I wonder if they left it sitting around too long before they served it. A: That's exactly what I was thinking had happened. B: Are your vegetables OK? A: The vegetables are kind of mushy. B: So are mine. I think they left them cooking too long. A: The food here is usually good, so I think that we should tell the waiter that there is a problem. B: I think that you are right. Maybe they can give us a free dessert or something. 3.audio A: Does your chicken taste all right? B: The chicken tastes wonderful, but it is kind of dry. Is your fish OK? A: My fish has good seasoning but is a little dry. B: It seems as if they got busy and left it sitting before it got to us. A: Yes, maybe they are short-handed in the kitchen tonight. B: Are your vegetables a little mushy? A: The vegetables seem to not be very fresh. B: Mine aren't so good, either. A: I usually enjoy the meals here, so I think that we should tell the waiter that there is something wrong with this meal. B: I think that we should let someone know. They will probably want to fix the problem.12. Good Tips for Good Service
1.audio A: Do you want some dessert? B: No thanks. We just need our check. Have you seen the waitress? A: Here comes our waitress with our check. B: The service here has been really great, don't you think? A: Yes, the service was quite good. B: So, let's look at the check. The total is $36.00. A: How much do you think we should leave for a tip? B: Usually people leave 15 percent, but this was exceptional service. I am thinking that maybe 20 percent would be appropriate. A: I agree that 20 percent would be just about right. B: OK, so that will bring her tip to $7.20. Add it to the $36.00 and the total is $43.20. A: Yes, what a nice dinner that was! B: We'll have to make sure to come back here again real soon. 2.audio A: Would you like some more coffee? B: No thanks. I'm full. We need to find our waitress and get our bill. A: The waitress is bringing the bill right now. B: This waitress has really been on top of things, hasn't she? A: Yes, this waitress did a great job. B: OK, let's see what the damage is. The total for our meal is $36.00. A: What do you think would be the right amount to leave for a tip? B: Fifteen percent is a normal tip, but she really did a great job. What do you think about 20 percent this time? A: Yes, 20 percent would be perfect. B: Her tip will end up being $7.20 plus the bill of $36.00. The total will be $43.20. A: Yes, that was one fantastic meal! B: I agree. Maybe we can come back again next week. 3.audio A: Would you like to order anything else? B: No, I'm good. All we need now is our check. A: The waitress is walking over here with our check even as we speak. B: I have never had bad service at this restaurant, but this time was really exceptional. A: Yes, she really went out of her way to make this a pleasant dining experience. B: Let's take a look at our bill. The total price for our dinner is $36.00. A: How much money should we leave for a tip? B: I know that 15 percent is a normal tip, but I really thought that this waitress went out of her way for us. What do you think about tippingher 20 percent? A: She definitely deserves 20 percent for a tip. B: So we can add her tip of $7.20 to the bill of $36.00 and the total will be $43.20. A: Yes, what a wonderful meal! B: It absolutely was a great meal. We'll have to return here for lunch sometime.13. Little Tips for Bad Service
1.audio A: Do you want some dessert? B: No thanks. We just need our check. Have you seen the waitress? A: Where is our waitress anyway? B: Yes, the service hasn't been the best. Is that our waitress over there? A: I'll walk over and get the bill, since I don't think the waitress is coming over here any time soon. B: Good idea. Just bring it back and we'll figure it out together. A: So the bill is $36.00. B: How much do you think we should leave for a tip? A: My first inclination is to leave nothing for a tip. B: I agree, but we don't really know the whole story. There may have been problems in the kitchen beyond her control. A: Let's leave 10%, so that we at least leave something for the service. B: I agree. We will leave $3.60 for the tip. 2.audio A: Would you like some more coffee? B: No thanks. I'm full. We need to find our waitress and get our bill. A: Good luck finding the waitress! B: The service this evening has kind of sucked. Is that our server over there? A: I'll go get the check, since our server doesn't seem to be headed this way. B: Good. I'll just stay here until you get back. A: So the total is $36.00 for our dinner. B: How much of a tip do you think our waitress deserves? A: I wonder if no tip would be appropriate in light of the service. B: I kind of feel the same way, but they may have just been really short-staffed tonight. A: I think that we should leave 10%. B: $3.60 will be the right amount for the tip. 3.audio A: Would you like to order anything else? B: No, I'm good. All we need now is our check. A: Our waitress has been kind of scarce tonight, hasn't she? B: I think that is our waitress over by the bar. Boy, the service has not been good this evening. A: She doesn't appear to be headed this way, so I will go get the check. B: Good. Just bring it back and we'll total it together. A: Our total for dinner is $36.00. B: What do you think would be the right amount to tip? A: I kind of don't want to leave any tip for the lousy service we received. B: I agree that it was bad service, but I heard one of the other waiters mentioning that it was our server's first night on the job. A: I believe that 10% is just about right. B: I think that a tip of $3.60 will be the right amount to leave.14. Talking Positively About the Restaurant
1.audio A: So, how did you like the restaurant? B: I thought that it was very good. A: I felt the food was excellent. B: What did you like the best? A: I liked the fish the best. B: I liked the fish also, but I really enjoyed the dessert the most. A: Yes, the macadamia cakes were wonderful. B: Wasn't the service top-notch? A: Yes, the waiter was very attentive. B: I hope to be able to come back to this restaurant soon. 2.audio A: Did you like the restaurant? B: It was pretty good. A: The food was wonderful. B: What was your favorite dish? A: The fish was my favorite. B: Yes, the fish was great, but the dessert was awesome. A: I agree that the macadamia cake was awesome. B: Didn't you think that the service was the best? A: Yes, our waiter really went out of the way for us. B: I would like to return to this restaurant soon. 3.audio A: How do you feel about this restaurant? B: I really liked it! A: I really enjoyed the food. B: What did you enjoy the most? A: I enjoyed the fish the most. B: The fish was pretty special, but I loved the dessert. A: The macadamia cake was out-of-this-world! B: I really felt that the service was exceptionally good. A: Yes, the service really added to the experience. B: I am looking forward to returning to this restaurant.15. Talking Negatively about the Restaurant
1.audio A: So how did you like the restaurant? B: Actually, it could have been better. A: What didn't you like about it? B: It is a new restaurant. I don't think they have their act together yet. A: What did you think about the food? B: I felt that the food was pretty mediocre. A: The service wasn't that great, either. B: I agree. The service was not good. A: Do you think that you want to try this restaurant another time? B: No, I think that I've had enough of this restaurant. 2.audio A: Did you enjoy the restaurant? B: I didn't really like it all that much. A: What do you think the problem was? B: Well, they are pretty new. I just didn't feel that they were ready to open yet. A: How did you feel about the food? B: The food wasn't all that exciting. A: I didn't think that the service was good, either. B: Yes, the service certainly didn't add to the experience. A: Would you like to return to this restaurant? B: Maybe we could try it again in a few months when things have settled down. 3.audio A: How do you feel about that restaurant? B: It wasn't all that great. A: What did you dislike the most? B: I don't think that they had their act together. They didn't seem well prepared. A: Did you think that the food was any good? B: I wasn't all that impressed by the food. A: The service certainly could have been better. B: The service did not help the situation. A: Is this a restaurant that you want to come back to? B: I am not really interested in trying this restaurant again.16. Ordering Fast Food
1.audio A: Welcome, what would you like to order? B: I would like to get a double cheeseburger. A: Would you like everything on it? B: I would like everything on it, thank you. A: Do you want any fries? B: Let me get some large curly fries. A: Can I get you anything to drink? B: Sure, how about a medium Pepsi? A: Is that everything? B: That'll be all. Thanks. A: You're welcome, and your total is $5.48. B: Thank you. Here you go. 2.audio A: What can I get for you? B: Hello, may I have a double cheeseburger? A: With everything on it? B: That sounds great. A: Did you want fries with your order? B: May I get a large order of curly fries? A: Did you want something to drink? B: Get me a medium Pepsi. A: Would you like anything else? B: No, thank you. That's it. A: No problem, that'll be $5.48. B: Thanks a lot. Keep the change. 3.audio A: How may I help you? B: A double cheeseburger sounds good. A: Everything on it? B: Yes, please. A: Would you like fries with that? B: I would love large curly fries. A: Would you like anything to drink? B: Yes, let me have a medium Pepsi. A: Will that be all? B: Yeah, that's it. Thank you. A: Your total comes to $5.48. B: Here you go. Thank you very much.1. Setting up a Bank Account
1.audio A: How are you doing today? B: Great. Thanks. A: What can I help you with? B: I would like to open a bank account. A: What kind would you like to open? B: I need a checking account. A: Would you also like to open a savings account? B: That's fine. A: In order to open these accounts, you need to deposit a minimum of $50. B: I want to deposit $300. A: I'll set up your accounts for you right now. B: Make sure to put $150 in each account. 2.audio A: How are you? B: I'm well. Thank you for asking. A: What can I do for you? B: I need to open a bank account. A: What kind of account? B: I just need a checking account. A: You can open a savings account, too. B: All right. Open both. A: You need to deposit at least $50 into both accounts. B: I will be depositing $300 today. A: I will set your accounts up right now. B: Would you please put $150 in both accounts? 3.audio A: How are things with you? B: I'm fine. Thank you. A: May I help you with something? B: I want to open a bank account. A: Do you know what kind of account you want to open? B: I want to open a checking account. A: You should also open a savings account. B: That would be great. A: To open these accounts, you will need to make a deposit of at least $50. B: I would actually like to deposit $300 today. A: Let me do that for you now. B: Please put $150 in each account for me.2. Asking about Checks
1.audio A: How are you doing today? B: Great. Thanks. A: What can I do for you today? B: I just have one question. A: What's your question? B: How do I order checks? A: You can order them right now, if you'd like. B: That would be great. A: Just fill out this application. B: Then what? A: Give it about 5 to 7 business days, and you should receive them in the mail. B: Here's my application. Thanks for your help. 2.audio A: How are you? B: I'm fantastic. A: What can I help you with? B: Could you answer a question for me? A: What would you like to know? B: I need to order checks. How do I do that? A: You can do that right now, if you want to. B: Let me do that now. A: I'm just going to need you to fill out this application. B: What do I do next? A: You will receive your checks in the mail in about a week. B: I've finished my application. Thank you so much. 3.audio A: How's it going? B: I'm fine. Thank you. A: May I help you? B: I have a question. A: Ask away. B: How can I order new checks? A: If you want, you can order some right now. B: I would like to do that right now. A: First, you need to fill out this application. B: What else do I have to do? A: Give it about a week, and you should get your checks in the mail. B: I appreciate your help. Here's my application.3. Making a Deposit
1.audio A: How are you doing? B: Great. Thanks for asking. A: What can I do for you today? B: I would like to deposit some money. A: Are you depositing cash or a check? B: I want to deposit cash. A: How much are you depositing? B: I would like to deposit $300. A: What account do you want your money in? B: I want to deposit it into my checking account. A: Do you need anything else? B: No. That's all. Thank you. 2.audio A: How are you? B: I'm fantastic! A: What can I help you with? B: I want to make a deposit today. A: Cash or check? B: It will be cash today. A: How much do you want to deposit? B: I need to deposit $300. A: What account will you be depositing this money into? B: Deposit it into my checking account. A: What else can I do for you today? B: That's all I need today. Thanks. 3.audio A: How are things with you? B: I'm fine. Thank you. A: How may I help you? B: I need to make a deposit. A: Will you be depositing cash or a check? B: I will be depositing cash. A: How much would you like to deposit? B: It's going to be $300. A: What account would you like to deposit that into? B: Could you deposit that into my checking account, please? A: Can I do anything else for you today? B: That'll be all. Thank you very much.4. Making a Withdrawal
1.audio A: How are you doing today? B: Great. Thank you. A: What can I do for you? B: I need to withdraw some money. A: How much would you like to take out? B: I need to withdraw $300. A: Which account would you like to take the money from? B: I want to take it from my checking account. A: Here you go. B: Thank you very much. A: Can I do anything else for you? B: No. That'll be all. 2.audio A: How are you? B: I'm fabulous. A: What can I help you with? B: I need to make a withdrawal. A: How much are you withdrawing today? B: I need $300. A: What account would you like to take this money from? B: Take it from my checking account. A: Here's your $300. B: Thank you so much. A: Will you be needing anything else? B: That's it for today. 3.audio A: How's it going? B: I'm fine. Thanks for asking. A: What did you need? B: I would like to make a withdrawal. A: How much money would you like to withdraw? B: I want to take out $300. A: Which account are you making this withdrawal from? B: I want it taken from my checking account. A: All right, here is your $300. B: Thanks a lot. A: Is there anything else that I can do for you today? B: No. That's everything. Thank you.5. A Check Bounces
1.audio A: What can I help you with today? B: I have a problem. A: What is the problem? B: I wrote a check for $100 and it bounced. A: Do you have enough money in your account? B: I think so. A: Let me check that for you right now. B: Okay. Thank you. A: Apparently there is only $57 left in your account. B: You can't be serious! A: That's what my records show. B: I see. Thanks for your help. 2.audio A: How may I help you? B: There's a problem with my check. A: What problem? B: My check for $100 bounced. A: Are you sure you have $100 in your checking account? B: I thought I did. A: I'll check for you. B: Thank you very much. A: It looks like you only have $57 left in your account. B: That can't be right! A: That's what my computer is showing. B: All right. Thank you very much. 3.audio A: What can I do for you? B: I have a problem with this check. A: What's wrong? B: I wrote out a check for $100 and it bounced. A: Do you have enough money in your checking account? B: I believe so. A: Give me a moment, and I'll check. B: All right. Thanks. A: You only have $57 left in your checking account. B: That's impossible. A: I'm sorry, but that's what our records show. B: Okay. Thanks. Have a nice day.6. Transferring Money
1.audio A: How are you doing? B: Great. Thanks. A: May I help you with something? B: I would like to transfer some money. A: Where would you like to transfer money from? B: Take it from my savings account. A: Where would you like the money transferred? B: I want it transferred into my checking account. A: How much would you like to transfer? B: I would like to transfer $200. A: Will that be all today? B: That's it for today. Thank you. 2.audio A: How are you today? B: Very well. A: Do you need help with something? B: I need to make a transfer. A: What account would you like to transfer the money from? B: I want to transfer money from my savings account. A: Where do you want the money to go to? B: I want the money to be transferred into my checking account. A: How much money are you going to transfer today? B: $200 will be fine. A: Is that all I can do for you today? B: I won't be needing anything else. 3.audio A: How's everything with you today? B: I'm fine. Thank you. A: What can I do for you? B: I need to transfer money. A: Do you know which account you want to take the money from? B: From my savings account. A: Where are you transferring the money to? B: I would like it transferred to my checking account. A: How much? B: I want to transfer $200. A: Will that be all? B: Yes. That will be all.7. Canceling an Account
1.audio A: Can I help you with something? B: I need to cancel one of my accounts. A: Is there a problem with it? B: I don't need it anymore. A: What would you like to do with all the money in this account? B: Just transfer it over to my remaining account. A: I can do that. B: That would be great. A: Do you want to take any money out? B: Not today. A: It's going to take a moment for me to cancel your account. B: That's fine. Take your time. 2.audio A: What can I do for you? B: I would like to cancel one of my accounts. A: Is there a problem with your account? B: I only need one. A: What about all your money in that account? B: Could you please transfer that money to my remaining account? A: That's fine. B: I appreciate it. A: Would you like to make a withdrawal? B: That's all for today. A: I'll just cancel your account right now. B: I greatly appreciate your help. 3.audio A: Did you need help with something? B: I need to cancel an account. A: Do you have a problem with your account? B: I don't need two different accounts anymore. A: What are you going to do about the money in your account? B: Can I transfer it to my remaining account? A: I'll do that for you. B: That's lovely. A: Would you like to withdraw any money? B: No. That's fine. A: It'll just take me a moment to cancel your account. B: Thank you very much.8. Cashing a Check
1.audio A: What can I help you with today? B: I would like to make a deposit. A: Will that be cash or check? B: I'm depositing a check. A: Could you sign the back of the check, please? B: All right. Here you go. A: Would you like any cash back? B: That would be great. A: How much would you like? B: I would like $150. A: Here is your $150. B: Thanks for everything. 2.audio A: How may I help you? B: I'm making a deposit today. A: Cash or check? B: I would like to deposit a check. A: You need to sign the back. B: Okay. Here you go. A: Would you like cash back? B: Yes, I would. A: How much? B: Let me get $150 back. A: Here you go. B: Thank you. Have a good one. 3.audio A: What can I do for you? B: I need to make a deposit. A: Are you depositing cash or a check? B: I'm depositing a check. A: Please sign the back of the check. B: There you go. A: Do you want cash back? B: Yes, please. A: How much cash would you like? B: I want $150. A: Here is your $150. B: Thank you, and have a nice day.9. Canceling a Check
1.audio A: How are you doing today? B: I'm fine. A: What can I do for you? B: I would like to cancel a check. A: Is there a problem? B: I wrote the check out for too much. A: How much did you write it out for? B: I wrote it out for $150. A: How much was it supposed to be? B: It was supposed to be for $100. A: I'll cancel that check for you. B: I really appreciate your help. 2.audio A: How are you? B: I'm doing well. A: How may I help you? B: Could you cancel a check for me? A: What's the problem? B: I wrote the check out for way too much. A: How much? B: I wrote the check out for $150. A: What were you supposed to write it out for? B: I was supposed to write the check out for $100. A: I'll just cancel it for you right now. B: That's great. You're a lifesaver. 3.audio A: How's it going? B: Great. Thank you. A: What can I help you with? B: I need to cancel a check. A: What's wrong with the check? B: I accidentally wrote the check for too much. A: How much did you write the check for? B: The check was written for $150. A: How much were you supposed to write it for? B: I needed to write it for $100. A: I can cancel it for you right now. B: Thank you so much.10. Using the ATM
1.audio A: I need to use the ATM. B: What's stopping you? A: I'm not sure how. B: I don't understand. A: I've never used one before. B: I can help you figure it out. A: What do I have to do? B: Slide your card into the machine. A: Then what? B: You need to type your PIN in. A: What do I have to do next? B: Click on whichever option you want, and you're done. 2.audio A: I have to use the ATM. B: Is there a problem? A: I don't know how to use it. B: What are you talking about? A: I have never used an ATM before. B: I can show you how to use it. A: How do I use it? B: You need to push your card into the machine. A: What's next? B: Enter your PIN. A: What else do I have to do? B: Every option you can choose will appear on the screen. That's about it. 3.audio A: I need to go to the ATM. B: So, why don't you? A: I have no idea how to use the ATM. B: What do you mean? A: This will be my first time using an ATM. B: I can help you with that. A: Explain to me how to use it. B: Just put your card into the machine. A: Now what do I do? B: Then you need to type in your PIN. A: Now what? B: Just click on one of the choices they give you, and that's it.11. The Card Gets Declined
1.audio A: Your total comes to $36.78. B: Put it on my VISA. A: There's a problem with your card. B: What's wrong with it? A: I believe it was declined. B: You're kidding me! A: Do you have another card I could try? B: I only have one card. A: Do you have cash, perhaps? B: I don't have any cash on me. A: You're not going to be able to take these items today. B: I'll be back tomorrow. 2.audio A: The total for all these items comes to $36.78. B: Take my VISA. A: There is something wrong with your card. B: What's going on? A: Your card was declined. B: That can't be right! A: Would you like me to try another card? B: I don't have another one. A: What about cash? B: I didn't bring cash with me today. A: I'm sorry, but you can't take the items until you can buy them. B: I'll come back for them tomorrow. 3.audio A: You owe $36.78. B: Here's my VISA card. A: I'm sorry, but your card isn't working. B: What's the problem? A: The machine says your card was declined. B: It was? A: Do you have another card? B: That's my only one. A: Maybe you can just pay in cash? B: No cash today. A: I guess you won't be able to purchase these items today. B: I'll come tomorrow with cash.12. Asking about Fees
1.audio A: Do you have any other questions? B: I want to know about fees. A: Which fees? B: Overdraft fees. A: You will be required to pay a small fee for every time you overdraft. B: How much is the fee? A: You'll have to pay $25 every time you overdraft. B: That's a small fee? A: It should stop you from overdrafting. B: You would think it would, but it most likely won't. A: Can I help you with anything else? B: That's it for today. Thank you. 2.audio A: Do you have any questions? B: Tell me about fees. A: What fees are you referring to? B: I want to know about overdraft fees. A: We charge a small fee every time you overdraft. B: How much? A: For each time you overdraft, you have to pay $25. B: That's not a small fee. A: You shouldn't overdraft. B: That's for sure. A: Do you need help with anything else? B: That's all I needed to know. Thanks. 3.audio A: Would you like to ask any questions? B: I need to know about the fees. A: What kind of fees? B: I'm asking about overdraft fees. A: You have to pay a small fee every time you overdraft. B: What's the fee? A: The fee is $25 every time you overdraft. B: How is that a small fee? A: That fee should keep you from overdrafting. B: I'll say. A: Do you have any more questions? B: I don't need to know anything else. Thank you.13. Paying Fees
1.audio A: How are you doing today? B: Very well. Thank you. A: What can I help you with? B: Do I have any fees to pay? A: As a matter of fact, you do. B: How much? A: You owe $235.13. B: That's unbelievable. A: Will you be paying some of that off today? B: I want to pay all of it off today. A: How will you be paying? B: I'll be paying with cash. 2.audio A: How are you? B: I'm great. Thank you for asking. A: What can I do for you? B: Do I owe any fees? A: You sure do. B: Could you tell me how much I owe? A: You owe $235.13 in fees. B: I can't believe that. A: When will you be paying these fees off? B: I'll pay them off right now. A: Cash or check? B: I will pay with cash. 3.audio A: How's it going? B: I'm great. Thanks. A: What do you need? B: I need to know if I have any fees to pay. A: Actually, you do owe some fees. B: How much do I owe? A: Your fees total $235.13. B: That's crazy! A: You need to pay these fees soon. B: Can I do that right now? A: Will you be paying with cash or check? B: I think I'll be paying with cash.14. Minimum Balance Requirements
1.audio A: I would like to open an account today. B: What kind? A: I want to open a checking account. B: You need to keep a minimum balance. A: How much is it? B: You need at least $100 in your account. A: Is that all? B: Yes. That's the minimum. A: What happens if I don't meet that requirement? B: You will get a fine. A: How much? B: It's going to be $25. 2.audio A: I need to open an account. B: Do you know what kind you want to open? A: I want a checking account. B: Do you know what the minimum balance is? A: What is that? B: You need to keep it at $100. A: That's it? B: That's the least amount you can have. A: What'll happen if I don't maintain that? B: We will fine you. A: How much will I be fined? B: You will be fined $25. 3.audio A: I want to open an account. B: What kind of account do you want to open? A: I want to open a checking account. B: Do you know the minimum balance you're required to keep? A: How much is that? B: You have to maintain a minimum balance of $100. A: Really? B: Yes, really. A: What if I can't meet that requirement? B: You will be fined. A: How much is the fine? B: It's going to cost you $25.15. Not Getting a Bank Statement
1.audio A: How may I help you? B: I'm having a problem. A: What is it? B: I apparently owe some fees, but I never got the bank statement. A: I do apologize for that. B: My fees went up, but I didn't even know I had fees to pay. A: I see your problem. B: What are you going to do about it? A: I will cancel the fees you owe. B: I don't have to pay any fees? A: You'll only have to pay the initial fee. B: That's fine. I appreciate your help. 2.audio A: What can I do for you? B: I have a serious problem. A: Explain it to me. B: I never got a bank statement for fees that I owe. A: I'm sorry, but I guess we didn't send a statement out. B: My fees increased, because I didn't know about my fees. A: I see where that is a problem. B: Can you fix it? A: I will cancel the fees that you owe. B: You're canceling all the fees? A: You still need to pay the initial fee. B: That'll be fine. 3.audio A: May I help you? B: I have a problem. A: What's your problem? B: I owe fees, but a bank statement never came in the mail about it. A: I apologize for the inconvenience. B: I have no idea about the fee, so my fees went up. A: I understand your problem. B: Will you be able to solve my problem? A: I'm going to cancel the fees you owe. B: So, I don't have to pay any of it? A: The initial fee still must be paid. B: That's fabulous. Thank you very much.16. Reporting Wrong Charges
1.audio A: What can I do for you today? B: I have an issue. A: What is your problem? B: There were charges on my debit card that I never made. A: Do you have a statement for your debit card? B: I do. A: Which charges are you talking about? B: It's the last four charges. A: We're going to have to do an investigation. B: Is that going to take long? A: I'm not sure, but in the meantime we will freeze these charges. B: That's wonderful. Thank you. 2.audio A: How may I help you? B: I'm having a problem. A: What problem are you having? B: There have been charges made on my debit card that I didn't make. A: Do you have the statement for your card? B: Here it is. A: What are the charges you're referring to? B: The last four charges on the page. A: I'm afraid we're going to have to investigate these charges. B: How long will an investigation take? A: I honestly don't know, but we will freeze payment on these charges. B: That sounds absolutely fantastic. 3.audio A: May I help you? B: I have a problem. A: What's the problem? B: Someone else is making charges on my debit card. A: I need to see a statement for your debit card. B: I have it right here. A: Can you show me which charges you're referring to? B: The last four charges. A: We will need to do an investigation on this. B: How long will that take? A: We'll have to freeze payment on those charges until the investigation is finished. B: I really appreciate your help.17. Opening Another Account
1.audio A: How may I help you today? B: I need to open a second account. A: What kind of account would you like to open? B: I need another savings account. A: Do you have another account with us? B: I sure do. A: Would you like to transfer money from that account into your new one? B: That's fine. A: How much would you like to transfer? B: Transfer $100. A: Give me a moment while I complete your transaction. B: That's fine. Thank you. 2.audio A: How can I help you? B: I want to open another account. A: What kind would you like to open? B: I would like to open a savings account. A: Do you already have an account with us? B: I have another savings account open already. A: Do you want to transfer money from that account? B: I would like to do that. A: How much? B: I only want to transfer $100. A: It'll only take me a minute to complete your transaction. B: Great. Thank you very much. 3.audio A: What can I do for you? B: I would like to open another account. A: What kind do you want to open? B: I want to open a savings account. A: Do you have an account opened with this bank already? B: Yes, I do. A: You can always transfer money from that account into your new one. B: That would be great. A: How much money do you want to transfer? B: I want to transfer $100. A: I'll do that right now. B: All right. Thanks.1. Applying for a Library Card
1.audio A: What can I help you with today? B: I need to check out this book. A: Do you have your library card? B: I don't have one. A: Would you like to apply for one right now? B: That's fine. A: I'm going to need you to fill out the application. B: All right. All done. A: All right, now please sign the back of the card. B: Okay. I've signed it. A: That's all there is to it. B: Great. Now can I check out this book? 2.audio A: May I help you? B: Could I check out this book? A: Let me see your library card. B: I need to get one. A: You can apply for one right now, if you'd like. B: Okay. Let me do that right now. A: Could you fill out this application? B: I'm finished. Here you go. A: Could you please sign the back of the card? B: All right. A: That's it. B: Now may I check this book out? 3.audio A: What do you need? B: I would like to check out a book. A: I'm going to need your library card. B: I don't have a library card. A: Why don't you apply for one right now? B: Sure. That would be great. A: Please fill out this application. B: Okay. Here you go. A: Now, sign your name on the back of the card. B: Here you go. A: Here's your library card. B: Thanks. Now I'd like to check out this book.2. Applying for a Passport
1.audio A: What may I do for you? B: I need to get a passport. A: You will need to apply for one. B: When will I be able to do that? A: You can do it right now, if you'd like. B: That's fine. A: Please fill out this application. B: Then what do I do? A: I just need to take your picture. B: How long will it take for my passport to be ready? A: You will get it in a few weeks. B: That's perfect. 2.audio A: How may I help you? B: I want to get a passport. A: You need to apply for a passport. B: When can I apply for it? A: You can apply right now. B: I'd like to do that. A: Fill this out, please. B: What's next? A: I will need to take your passport picture. B: When will my passport be ready? A: It will take about three weeks. B: That's great. Thank you. 3.audio A: What can I do for you? B: I need a passport. A: You can apply for one here. B: When can I do that? A: If you like, you can apply right now. B: That would be great. A: I'm going to need you to complete this application. B: What else do I have to do? A: Then I will take your picture for your passport. B: How long will it take? A: Your passport will be ready in a few weeks. B: Thank you. That's perfect timing.3. Asking Questions at the Information Desk
1.audio A: What can I help you with today? B: When does the library close? A: The library closes at six o'clock. B: Does it close at that time every day? A: Not always. B: Is the library open on Saturdays? A: Yes. B: What time do you open and close on Saturday? A: The hours are from 9 am to 6:30 pm. B: Okay. Thank you very much. A: Do you need anything else? B: No, that's all. Thanks. 2.audio A: May I help you? B: What time will the library be closing? A: It closes at six. B: Does it always close at six? A: No, not every day. B: Will the library be open on Saturday? A: Absolutely. B: What are your hours on Saturday? A: Saturday's hours are from nine in the morning to six-thirty at night. B: All right. Thank you. A: What else can I help you with? B: That's it. Thank you. 3.audio A: What can I do for you? B: I need to know what time the library closes. A: The library will be closing at six. B: Does it close at six every day? A: No, it doesn't. B: Are you guys open on Saturdays? A: Yes, we're open on Saturdays. B: What time does the library open and close on Saturday? A: We open at 9 am and close at 6:30 pm. B: That's cool. A: Can I help you with anything else? B: That's everything. Thanks.4. Asking the Librarian for Assistance
1.audio A: How are you doing today? B: Good. Thanks for asking. A: What may I do for you? B: I need help with something. A: What do you need help with? B: I am looking for a newspaper article. A: Have you looked in the periodicals? B: I didn't even think about that. A: I can show you where they are. B: That would be a lot of help. A: Follow me, please. B: Thank you so much. 2.audio A: How are you? B: I'm great. Thanks. A: Did you need something? B: I need your help. A: How may I help you? B: I need to find this newspaper article. A: Have you checked the periodicals section yet? B: I forgot about that section. A: If you'd like, I can show you where to find it. B: Could you do that? A: Follow me. B: Thank you for all your help. 3.audio A: How's it going? B: I'm fine. Thank you. A: Do you need anything? B: I need you to help me. A: What can I do for you? B: I am looking for an article in a newspaper. A: Did you check the periodicals? B: I didn't even bother to think of that. A: I'll show you where to find your article. B: I get lost in this library. A: It's right this way. B: Thanks a lot for your help.5. Reserving a Book
1.audio A: How may I help you? B: I couldn't find the book I was looking for. A: Have you checked the database? B: I checked. A: Was it on the shelf? B: It should have been, but it wasn't. A: Maybe someone took it. B: Will you be getting another copy anytime soon? A: I'm sure we will. B: Would you be able to reserve it for me? A: I sure will. B: Thank you very much. 2.audio A: May I help you? B: I can't find the book I want. A: Why don't you try looking at the database? B: I checked it already. A: Do we have it available? B: It wasn't there. A: I guess it is lost. B: Will you be getting another copy? A: Yes, we will. B: Could you reserve a copy for me? A: I can do that. B: That's great. Thanks a lot. 3.audio A: What can I do for you? B: I was looking for a book, but I couldn't find it. A: Did you check our database to see if it was on the shelf? B: I already did. A: Is it on the shelf? B: I didn't see it. A: Apparently somebody took that book out of the library. B: Will you ever get another copy? A: We will definitely be getting another. B: Could you please reserve it for me? A: That won't be a problem. B: Thanks. I really appreciate that.6.Late Fees
1.audio A: How may I help you? B: I need to check these books out. A: Do you have your library card? B: Here it is. A: It appears that you have late fees. B: Really? A: Yes, really. B: How much do I owe? A: You owe $24.50 in late fees. B: I don't have that much today. A: I'm sorry, but until you pay it, you won't be able to check out any more books. B: I'll pay it as soon as possible. 2.audio A: What can I do for you? B: I want to check out these books. A: I need your library card. B: I have it right here. A: It seems you have late fees. B: Are you sure? A: Yes, I'm sure. B: How much? A: Your late fees come to $24.50. B: I don't have that right now. A: You have to pay it off before you can check out more books. B: I'll do that soon. 3.audio A: May I help you? B: I would like to check out these books. A: May I see your library card, please? B: Yes. Here you go. A: Apparently, you have unpaid late fees. B: I do? A: You owe some money. B: Exactly how much do I owe? A: You owe $24.50. B: I won't be able to pay that right now. A: Until you pay it, you can't check out books. B: I will pay it. Don't worry.7. Borrowing a Book from Another Library
1.audio A: What can I do for you? B: I am trying to find this book. A: What's the problem? B: It doesn't seem like this library has it. A: Have you checked the computer? B: I have already. A: What did it say? B: It says the book is on the shelf, but I didn't find it there. A: I can always borrow the book from another library. B: You can do that? A: I'll make the call and contact you when it gets in. B: That's fantastic. Thank you. 2.audio A: May I help you? B: I would like to find this book. A: Is there a problem? B: I don't think you guys have it. A: You should look it up on our computer. B: I did that. A: What came up? B: It should be on the shelf, but I didn't see it. A: I can try to get the book from a different library. B: I didn't know you could do that. A: I will call you when I find it. B: I appreciate your help. 3.audio A: Do you need help with something? B: I'm looking for this book. A: Is there something wrong? B: I don't see it on the shelf. A: Did you check the computer? B: I already looked. A: Did it say anything? B: It said that the book is on the shelf, but it isn't. A: I'm sure I can get it from another library. B: Could you do that? A: I'll let you know when I get the book in. B: That's great. Thank you so much.8. Checking Out a Book
1.audio A: What can I do for you today? B: I need to return a book. A: Can I do anything else for you? B: I want to check these books out. A: Is that all? B: That's all. A: May I see your library card, please? B: It's right here. A: Will that be all for today? B: Yes. That's it. A: These are due back in two weeks. B: All right. Have a good night. 2.audio A: How may I help you? B: I want to return this video. A: Is that all you need? B: I also need to check these books out. A: Anything else? B: That's everything. A: I need your library card. B: I have it. Here you go. A: Do you need anything else? B: That's everything. A: Your books are due back two weeks from today. B: Thank you. Good night. 3.audio A: May I help you? B: I would like to return this book. A: May I do anything else for you? B: I would also like to check out these books. A: Will that be all? B: That's it. A: Do you have your library card? B: Oh, yeah. Here you go. A: Will that be all for today? B: That'll be all. A: Your books are due back in two weeks. B: Thanks. Have a good one.9. Checking Out a Magazine
1.audio A: What can I do for you today? B: I need to return a book. A: Can I do anything else for you? B: I want to check this magazine out. A: We don't allow people to check out magazines. B: Why not? A: It's just a policy of ours. B: So what am I allowed to check out? A: You may check out books or videos. B: I need to check out this magazine. A: You will have to just read it in the library. B: That doesn't make any sense. 2.audio A: How may I help you? B: I want to return this video. A: Is that all you need? B: I also need to check this magazine out. A: You're not allowed to do that. B: I don't understand. A: It's our policy. B: What can I check out? A: Only books or videos. B: I need this magazine. A: You will have to read it here. B: That's weird. 3.audio A: May I help you? B: I would like to return this book. A: May I do anything else for you? B: I would also like to check out this magazine. A: I can't let you do that. B: Why is that? A: Our policy doesn't allow anyone to check out the magazines. B: What things am I allowed to check out? A: You are only allowed to check out books or videos. B: I really need to check out this magazine. A: I'm sorry, but that's our policy. B: That's stupid.10. Checking Out a Video
1.audio A: What can I do for you today? B: I need to return a book. A: Can I do anything else for you? B: I would also like to check out this video. A: Is that all? B: Yes, just the video. A: May I see your library card? B: Here you go. A: You have to take care of this video. B: Oh, I will. A: You will be fined if you damage it. B: I understand. Thank you very much. 2.audio A: May I help you? B: I'm returning a book. A: Do you need anything else? B: I also need to check out this video. A: This is all you want to check out? B: Just the video. A: I'm going to need your library card. B: I have it right here. A: You'll need to take care of the video. B: I will. A: We will fine you if you damage it. B: I get it. Thank you. 3.audio A: How may I help you? B: I would like to return this book. A: Is that all you need? B: I also want to check out this video. A: Is that all you would like to check out? B: That's all I need. A: Do you have your library card? B: Here it is. A: Make sure to take proper care of this video. B: That won't be a problem. A: If you damage the video, you will be fined. B: I won't damage it.11. Paying for Damage Made to a Book
1.audio A: How may I help you? B: I need to return these books. A: What happened to this one? B: The cover came off. A: You're going to need to pay for the damage. B: How much are you talking? A: It's going to be five dollars. B: That's not bad at all. A: It really isn't. B: Here you go. A: Thank you very much. B: You're welcome. Have a nice day. 2.audio A: What can I do for you? B: I am returning these books. A: What did you do to this book? B: I accidentally ripped the cover. A: You will need to pay for the damage. B: How much do I need to pay? A: I'm going to need five dollars. B: That's not too expensive. A: It isn't. B: Here's the five dollars. A: Thank you. B: No problem. Have a good one. 3.audio A: May I help you with something? B: I would like to return these books. A: What happened to this book? B: I dropped it, and the cover tore off. A: I'm going to have to charge you for the damage. B: How much? A: It's only five dollars. B: That's not too bad. A: I know it's not. B: Here's the money for the book. A: Thank you for your payment. B: You are very welcome.12. Returning Books Late
1.audio A: How may I help you? B: I need to return these books. A: Give them here. B: Here they are. A: It appears these books are two weeks late. B: I forgot they were due. A: You do realize you are going to have to pay late fees, right? B: How much is the late fee? A: The late fee is 25 cents a day. B: So I have to pay 25 cents for each day the books are late? A: It's 25 cents for each book. B: That's a lot of money. 2.audio A: What can I do for you? B: I'm returning these books. A: Let me have them. B: Here are all of them. A: These books are two weeks late. B: I didn't have time to return them. A: You're going to have to pay late fees. B: How much? A: 25 cents a day. B: 25 cents a day? A: That means 25 cents for each late book. B: That's expensive. 3.audio A: May I help you with something? B: I would like to return some books. A: I'll take them. B: Here you go. A: These books were due two weeks ago. B: Yeah. I totally forgot they were due. A: You will need to pay late fees on these books. B: How much are the late fees? A: The fee is 25 cents every day. B: I have to pay 25 cents a day? A: And that's for each book that is late. B: That shouldn't be a problem.13. Using a Computer
1.audio A: What can I do for you today? B: I would like to use a computer. A: Do you have your library card? B: I sure do. A: There is a wait for the computers. B: That's all right. A: You need to print your name on this list. B: Okay. Now what? A: Once a computer is available, I will let you know. B: How am I supposed to log on to the computer? A: All you do is type in the number on the back of your card. B: That's it? Thank you very much. 2.audio A: How may I help you? B: I need to get on the Internet. A: Do you have your library card with you? B: Yes, I have it. A: You're going to have to wait for a computer. B: That's okay. A: Please put your name on this list. B: Then what do I need to do? A: When there is a computer available, I will call you. B: What do I do to log on to the computer? A: Just type in the number on the back of your library card. B: Okay. Thanks for your help. 3.audio A: What do you need? B: I need to use the Internet. A: You have your library card, right? B: Yes, I do. A: There is a wait right now to use the computers. B: That's fine. A: Would you please write your name on this list? B: Then what? A: I will call you when a computer is free. B: How do I log on to the computer? A: Use the number on the back of your library card. B: Thanks. I'll be sitting over there.14. Using a Copier
1.audio A: How may I help you today? B: I need to make some copies. A: The copier is right over there. B: Does it cost to use it? A: We do charge to use the machine. B: How much does it cost? A: We charge ten cents a copy. B: How many copies am I allowed to make? A: There is no limit to how many copies you can make. B: Would you mind showing me how to use it? A: Please read the instructions on the copier. B: Oh, okay. Thanks. 2.audio A: What can I do for you? B: I would like to use the copy machine. A: The machine is over there. B: Do I have to pay to use the machine? A: Yes, you will have to pay to use it. B: How much? A: It costs ten cents a copy. B: Am I limited to a certain number of copies? A: You can copy as much as you'd like. B: Could you show me how to use the copier? A: The instructions for the copier are posted on it. B: That's fabulous. Thank you. 3.audio A: May I help you? B: I need to copy some pages in my book. A: The copier is right over there, in the corner. B: Do I need to pay to use it? A: You have to pay to use the copier. B: How much do you charge? A: You need to pay ten cents for every copy. B: Is there a maximum number of copies I can make? A: You can make as many copies as you want. B: I'm going to need you to show me how to use the machine. A: There are instructions posted on the copier. B: Thank you for your help.1. Asking about Where to Get Off
1.audio A: This bus goes all the way to Santa Anita mall, right? B: Yes, it'll take us there. A: Are you positive? B: I always catch this bus. A: How long is this bus ride? B: It only takes half an hour. A: Where do we get off at? B: We can get off the bus right behind Macy's. A: There's a stop right next to the mall? B: Yeah, it's right in the parking lot. A: That's cool. B: Yes, I know. 2.audio A: Does this bus really go to the mall? B: It goes all the way there. A: Are you sure? B: I know it does. I catch this bus a lot. A: How long does it take for the bus to get there? B: The bus ride is only thirty minutes or so. A: Where do we get off the bus? B: Right behind Macy's is a bus stop. A: The stop is really at the mall? B: It's in the middle of the parking lot. A: That's perfect. B: I know it is. 3.audio A: Are you sure that this bus will take us to Santa Anita mall? B: Yes, it will. A: You know that for a fact? B: Yeah, I catch this bus all the time. A: Is it a very long bus ride? B: It's about thirty minutes long. A: Do you know where we get off at? B: There's a bus stop right behind Macy's. A: Really, there's a bus stop right by the mall? B: There's a bus stop in the mall parking lot. A: That's convenient. B: Absolutely.2. Asking for a Transfer
1.audio A: I need to get on another bus, but I have no more money. B: Where'd the rest of your money for the bus go? A: I spent it on a bag of chips. B: Well, that was an intelligent thing to do. A: You don't have any spare change? B: No, I don't. A: How am I going to get home? B: You should just ask the bus driver for a transfer. A: How much does that cost? B: It's free; just go ask for one. A: Thanks for letting me know. B: No problem, just go ask. 2.audio A: I'm broke, and I have to catch another bus. B: Why don't you have any money for another bus? A: I got hungry and bought some chips. B: That was smart. A: Do you have any change I can use for the bus? B: I don't have any. A: I don't know how I'm going to get home. B: Get a transfer from the bus driver. A: How much is a transfer? B: It doesn't cost anything. A: Thanks for your help. B: Don't mention it. 3.audio A: I don't have any more cash, and I have to get on another bus to get home. B: Why don't you have any more money? A: I wanted some chips at lunch today, so I spent it. B: That was a bright idea. A: Do you have some change I can borrow? B: I don't have any change for you. A: I need to get home. B: Why don't you just ask the bus driver for a transfer? A: I don't have money for a transfer. B: Go ask for a transfer. They're free. A: I'm glad you let me know. B: You're welcome.3. Complaining about a Late Bus
1.audio A: Where is the bus? B: I think it's running late. A: It should've been here 30 minutes ago. B: It should be coming soon. A: It better, because I'm already late for work. B: I can't stand riding the bus. A: Me too, it's so unreliable. B: That is true. A: It's also horrible having to be at a bus stop in any kind of weather. B: Exactly.That's the worst part. A: I think it's time we started driving. B: Yes, I agree. 2.audio A: When is the bus going to get here? B: It's obviously late. A: It was scheduled to be here about thirty minutes ago. B: I'm sure it'll be here in a little bit. A: I hope so, because I'm running really late for work. B: I hate having to take the bus every day. A: So do I, you can never count on public transportation. B: Exactly. A: I really can't stand being at the bus stop in the heat and rain. B: I know what you mean. A: We're going to have to get a car of our own. B: I couldn't agree with you more. 3.audio A: I want to get on the bus already. B: It just isn't on time today. A: It was supposed to be here thirty minutes ago. B: I think it'll be here pretty soon. A: I need to get to work, so it better. B: I really do hate public transportation. A: I agree, it's just never on time. B: That's right. A: I also hate having to stand at a bus stop in all kinds of weather. B: Oh, that's the worst. A: We need to get a car. B: I completely agree with that.4. Getting Off Too Early
1.audio A: Is this our bus stop? B: I think this is it. Get off. A: Dude, where are we at? B: I have no idea. A: I thought this was the right stop. B: It doesn't look right to me. A: Did you make us get off early? B: I think we did. A: I should not have listened to you. B: I really thought this was our stop. A: Now we have to walk. B: Maybe we should just wait for the next bus. 2.audio A: I'm not sure, is this our stop? B: Yeah, get off the bus. A: Do you have any idea where we are? B: I'm really not sure. A: This can't be the right stop. B: I don't think this is right. A: We got off too early, didn't we? B: Yeah, we did get off too early. A: I should've just stayed on the bus. B: I messed up. A: Great, we have to walk now. B: You want to wait for the next bus? 3.audio A: Are we supposed to get off right here? B: I think so; hurry up and get off. A: Where are we? B: I don't know. A: You said this was the right stop. B: I think I was wrong. A: Did we get off the bus too early? B: I don't know; it kind of looks like we did. A: Why did you tell me to get off? B: I'm sorry. I thought this was our stop. A: I really don't feel like walking. B: We could always wait for the next bus to come.5. How to Buy a Pass
1.audio A: I need to buy a bus pass. B: What kind of bus pass would you like to buy? A: What are the different kinds? B: You can get a day, weekly, monthly, or student pass. A: Could I get a student pass, please? B: Sure, can I see your student ID? A: Sure, here it is. B: Very good. A: How much for the pass? B: It's free, but the monthly sticker is $24. A: I'll take it. B: Thank you for your purchase. 2.audio A: I would like to get a bus pass. B: Do you know what kind of pass you want? A: Can you tell me my options? B: There are passes for a day, month, and week, and there are student passes. A: I would like the student pass. B: Let me see your student ID. A: Here you go. B: Thank you very much. A: How much will it be for the pass? B: The monthly sticker is $24, but the actual pass is free. A: That'll be fine. B: We appreciate your business. 3.audio A: Could I buy a bus pass today? B: Which bus pass would you like to purchase? A: What kinds of passes are there? B: There are day passes, weekly passes, monthly passes, and student passes. A: Let me get a student pass. B: Could I see your student ID, please? A: No problem, here you go. B: Thanks. A: How much does this pass cost? B: The pass is free; the monthly sticker costs $24. A: That's fine then. B: I hope you enjoy your pass.6. Missing the Bus Stop
1.audio A: Where do we get off at? B: I think we have a little ways to go. A: This bus ride is taking forever. B: I know. A: Did we miss our stop? B: I'm not sure. A: Didn't you say you knew where to get off the bus? B: I don't know. We may have missed our stop. A: Are you serious? B: Yeah, we did miss it. A: I can't catch the bus with you anymore. B: Sorry. 2.audio A: Do you know which stop we get off at? B: We still have more to go, I think. A: We've been on this bus for a while now. B: You're right. A: Should we have gotten off the bus already? B: I don't think so. A: I thought you knew. B: Maybe we did miss our stop. A: Really? B: I'm positive that we missed our stop. A: I'm never catching the bus with you again. B: My mistake. 3.audio A: When do we get off the bus? B: I think we have a while longer. A: I feel like we've been on this bus forever. B: That's true. A: Are you sure we weren't supposed to get off already? B: I don't know. A: I thought you knew where we get off at. B: I wasn't really paying attention. I think we missed our stop. A: Seriously? B: Yeah, we definitely missed our stop. A: That's the last time I get on a bus with you. B: My bad.7. On a Wrong Bus
1.audio A: So, where is this bus supposed to take us? B: It should take us back up to Altadena. A: Don't you know for sure? B: I'm not really sure if it does or not. A: Are you sure we got on the right bus? B: I've never taken this bus, but I think it's the right one. A: This place doesn't look like Altadena. B: That's true, and we have been on this bus for a while. A: Read one of the street signs or something. B: Yikes! Temple City. A: That's the last time I'm trusting you with the transportation. B: My bad, but at least we know the right bus to take us back. 2.audio A: Do you even know where this bus is supposed to go? B: It should take us all the way up to Altadena. A: Don't you know? B: I'm not positive if it does or not. A: Is this the right bus, or not? B: I have never been on this bus, but I'm sure it's the right one. A: Where are we? This is not Altadena. B: I know, and we've been on the bus forever. A: Tell me what the street signs say. B: Oh my gosh, that one says Temple City. A: Next time, I'll look for the bus myself. B: I know, but now I know the bus that'll take us back. 3.audio A: Are you sure you know where this bus goes? B: It should go to Altadena. A: What do you mean it should? B: I'm not completely sure if it really does. A: Dude, are we on the right bus? B: I'm almost positive that this is the right one. A: It doesn't look like we're on our way to Altadena. B: We have been riding this bus for a long time. A: What does that sign say? B: I think it says Temple City. A: Yup, I'm never trusting you with the bus schedules again. B: I'm sorry. But at least we know which bus to catch to get back where we started.8. Student Discount
1.audio A: How much does it cost for a bus pass? B: It'll be $65 for a monthly pass. A: Is there anything cheaper than that? B: If you're in school, you can get a student pass. A: How much will that cost? B: The pass is free. A: I don't have to pay for anything? B: You'll only have to pay for the monthly sticker. A: How much is the monthly sticker? B: It's $24 for each month. A: I'll take the student bus pass. B: Okay, I'll get you one. 2.audio A: Can you tell me the price for a bus pass? B: It costs $65 to buy a monthly pass. A: Is there a cheaper bus pass? B: There are student passes. A: For how much? B: It doesn't cost anything for the pass. A: It's absolutely free? B: The monthly sticker costs you. A: How much is that? B: Each month it'll cost $24 for a new sticker. A: Let me get the student bus pass. B: Let me go get it for you. 3.audio A: How much for a bus pass? B: Well, for a monthly pass, it'll cost you $65. A: Is there anything else that doesn't cost as much? B: If you're a student, you can get a student bus pass. A: How much does a student pass cost? B: That actual bus pass is free. A: It doesn't cost anything? B: The only thing you'll have to pay for is the monthly sticker. A: Can you tell me how much that'll cost? B: It's only $24 a month. A: Sounds good, let me get that. B: I'll get it for you right now.9. Talking to Someone on a Bus
1.audio A: How's it going? B: Good. How about you? A: Not bad, thanks for asking. B: Have you been on the bus for a while? A: Only about fifteen minutes. B: Do you ride this bus often? A: Not really, I usually drive. B: You have a car? A: Yes, I do. B: So why aren't you driving it? A: Once our President lowers gas prices, I'll be driving again. B: That's smart thinking. 2.audio A: How are you doing? B: I'm pretty good, you? A: I'm awesome. B: How long have you been on the bus? A: I've been on here for like, 15 minutes. B: Do you catch this bus a lot? A: Not much, I have a car. B: So, you have your own car? A: I sure do. B: Then, why are you on the bus with me? A: I'm waiting till our President gets out of office, and the gas prices go down. B: That's good thinking. 3.audio A: What's up, how are you? B: I'm splendid. How about yourself? A: Could be better. B: So, have you been on the bus very long? A: I got on about fifteen minutes ago. B: How often do you ride the bus? A: I usually just drive. B: You have your own vehicle? A: Yes, I have my own car. B: So then, why don't you drive it? A: I'm waiting for our President to lower the gas prices. B: Smart.10. The Bus System in LA
1.audio A: Can you tell me what bus to catch from Altadena to downtown LA? B: You can catch the 486. A: That bus goes all the way to LA? B: I believe so. A: Is the bus ride long? B: It only takes 45 minutes to an hour. A: That's all? B: It's a pretty short trip. A: Is there always a lot of people on that bus? B: It only gets crowded once it gets to LA. A: Oh okay, thank you. B: No problem. 2.audio A: Do you know a bus I can take from Altadena to downtown LA? B: I believe you can take the 486. A: Will that bus really take me to LA? B: It sure will. A: Is it a very long ride? B: It's a forty-five minute to an hour ride. A: Really? B: It doesn't take long at all A: Do a lot of people ride that bus? B: More people start getting on around LA. A: Wow, thanks a lot. B: Don't mention it. 3.audio A: Is there a bus in Altadena that'll take me to downtown LA? B: The 486. A: The 486 really goes downtown? B: Yes, it does. A: How long is the bus ride? B: It's about forty-five minutes to an hour. A: Is that right? B: Yeah, it's not that long of a trip. A: Is that a crowded bus? B: It starts getting more crowded the closer you get to LA. A: Thank you very much. B: You're very welcome.11. Where to Buy a Pass
1.audio A: Have you bought your bus pass yet? B: I didn't get it yet. A: Why not? B: I have no idea where to get it from. A: You should've just asked me. B: Well then, where do I get it? A: You can get it from the student business office. B: I didn't know that. A: I know you didn't. B: I appreciate you telling me. A: No problem. B: I'll make sure to get it tomorrow. 2.audio A: Did you get your bus pass? B: I haven't gone to get it yet. A: Why haven't you got it? B: I don't know where to go to get one. A: I know where to get them from. B: Where do I get it? A: They sell them at the business office on campus. B: I had no idea. A: I'm sure you didn't. B: Thank you. A: Don't mention it. B: I'll buy it later on today. 3.audio A: Did you go and buy your bus pass? B: No, I didn't. A: When are you going to go get it? B: I'm not sure where they sell bus passes at. A: Why didn't you just ask me? B: Where should I go? A: You can get one from student services. B: I had no clue that I could get it there. A: I already knew that. B: Thanks for letting me know. A: You're welcome. B: I'm going to go and get it right now.12. Where to Take the Bus
1.audio A: What bus can I catch to get to the Gold Line? B: Tell me where you live. A: I live in Altadena. B: You can catch the 264. A: It goes to the Gold Line? B: Yes, it does. A: What street do I go to to catch it? B: You can catch it on Altadena Drive. A: I had no idea that bus went to the station. B: Yes, it does. A: I'm glad you told me. B: You're welcome. 2.audio A: Do you know a bus that goes to the Gold Line station? B: Do you live in Pasadena? A: My house is up in Altadena. B: You could always take the 264. A: It'll really take me to the station? B: It goes all the way there. A: Do you know what street it goes on? B: Catch it on Altadena Drive. A: I would've never known. B: Now you know. A: I appreciate you telling me. B: No problem. 3.audio A: I need to find a bus that'll take me to the Gold Line. B: Where do you live? A: I live up in Altadena. B: The 264 will take you there. A: It goes all the way there? B: I know for a fact that it goes to the station. A: What street would I catch it on? B: If you go to Altadena Drive, you can catch it there. A: I didn't know that bus went to the Gold Line station. B: Yup, it does. A: Thanks for letting me know. B: It was my pleasure.13. Where to Change the Bus
1.audio A: Do you know which bus will take me from PHS to Vons? B: Which Vons do you want to go to? A: It's on Fair Oaks and Orange Grove. B: You actually need to catch two buses. A: Which ones do I need to take? B: The first bus you need to get on is the 268. A: What do I do next? B: Once you get to Fair Oaks and Washington, get off. A: Then what should I do? B: You need to get on the 261. It goes all the way to Vons. A: Is that it? B: That's it. 2.audio A: Which bus should I take from PHS to Vons? B: Can you tell me which Vons you want to go to? A: I believe that it's on Fair Oaks and Orange Grove. B: You'll have to catch two different buses to get there. A: Do you know which buses I need to take? B: The 268 is the first bus you need to catch. A: What do I do after I get on the 268? B: Get off when you get to Fair Oaks and Washington. A: Then what? B: Catch the 261 and get off at Vons. A: That's all? B: That's all you have to do. 3.audio A: Is there a bus that'll go all the way to Vons from PHS? B: Where is this Vons located? A: The Vons on Fair Oaks and Orange Grove. B: You're going to need to take two buses to get to that Vons. A: Which buses will I have to take? B: First, you need to get on the 268 going west. A: Then what do I do? B: You need to get off on Fair Oaks and Washington. A: What's next? B: Get on the 261, and it'll take you the rest of the way to Vons. A: There's nothing else? B: That's all there is to it.14. Which Bus to Take
1.audio A: I really need to find a bus that goes by PCC. B: Where do you need to catch this bus at? A: All the way up on Las Flores Drive and Fair Oaks. B: I can tell you what bus to catch, but you have to walk a little bit. A: Walking isn't a problem for me. B: The 267 stops at Altadena Drive and Fair Oaks. A: Which direction do I want? B: Get on the bus heading west. A: Do you know where I get off at? B: Del Mar and Hill. A: Thanks for letting me know. B: No problem. 2.audio A: Do you know which bus I can take to PCC? B: Tell me where you need to get on at. A: I live on Las Flores and Fair Oaks. B: If you don't mind walking, I know a bus you can take. A: I'm okay with walking. B: Walk all the way down Fair Oaks, and catch the 267 on Altadena Drive. A: Do you know which direction it should be heading? B: You have to catch it going west. A: Which stop do I get off on? B: You need to get off on the corner of Del Mar and Hill. A: Thank you for telling me. B: It was my pleasure. 3.audio A: I need to get to PCC, but I don't know which bus to catch. B: Where exactly are you coming from? A: I'm coming from Fair Oaks and Las Flores Drive in Altadena. B: Do you have a problem walking a little bit? A: I don't mind walking. B: If you walk down Fair Oaks to Altadena Drive, you can catch the 267. A: Tell me which direction it should be going. B: Make sure to catch it going west. A: Where do I get off? B: You get off on Del Mar and Hill. A: Thanks for the help. B: Don't mention it.15. Why to Buy a Pass
1.audio A: Did you ever get your bus pass? B: I don't think I'm going to get one. A: Why not? B: It's just a waste of cash. A: Actually, it'll save you money. B: Oh, really? A: Because you can use your bus pass as many times as you want. B: Really? A: Yes, and you never have to worry about scraping for change. B: That sounds like a good deal. A: So, are you going to buy one? B: I will. 2.audio A: Have you bought a bus pass yet? B: I'm not getting one. A: Why is that? B: It's cheaper if I don't buy one. A: Buying a bus pass will save you money. B: How do you figure that? A: There's no limit to how often you can use your bus pass. B: Really? A: Plus, you don't have to use change for the bus anymore. B: I like that. A: You want to buy one now? B: I'm going to. 3.audio A: You get your bus pass? B: I'm not going to buy one. A: You're not? B: I think it's a waste of money. A: It actually costs less if you have a bus pass. B: How is that? A: You can use it however many times you need to. B: Is that right? A: Yup, and you can keep the money in your pocket. B: That sounds nice. A: You should go get yours. B: Yeah, I think I will.1. Talking to Someone about a Sweater
1.audio A: Where can I buy an inexpensive cashmere sweater? B: Maybe you should look around for an outlet. A: That is a wonderful idea. B: Outlets have more reasonable prices. A: Thank you for your help. B: No problem. Good luck. 2.audio A: Where can I find a cheap cashmere sweater? B: How about an outlet? A: Great idea! B: Outlets give good deals. A: Thank you so much. B: You're welcome. 3.audio A: Do you know anywhere that sells cheap cashmere sweaters? B: Outlets have cheap cashmere sweaters. A: What a splendid idea! B: Outlets usually give you great deals. A: Thanks for helping me. B: You're welcome. 4.audio A: Do you know a place that sells cheap cashmere sweaters? B: An outlet carries cheap cashmere sweaters. A: That's a good idea! B: I've always had good luck at outlets. A: Thank you for the suggestion. B: I hope you find a nice sweater. 5.audio A: I'm looking for a shop that sells inexpensive cashmere sweaters. B: Have you tried an outlet? A: Why didn't I think of that? B: Many of my friends shop at outlets. A: Thanks. That is a good suggestion. B: I'm only too happy to help.2. Shopping for a Sweater
1.audio A: Pardon me. Could you help me? B: Of course. How can I help you? A: I am looking for a sweater. B: What size do you wear? A: Medium, I think. B: Here. How do you like this one? A: It's pretty. Can I try it on? B: You can try it on in the fitting room over there. 2.audio A: Excuse me. Can you help me? B: Certainly. What can I do for you? A: I need to purchase a sweater. B: What is your size? A: Medium should be fine. B: Is this one okay? A: Can I try it on somewhere? B: The fitting room is in the left corner. 3.audio A: May I ask you a question? B: Yes. How can I assist you? A: I want to buy a sweater. B: What size? A: I think a medium should fit me. B: How about this one? A: The color's nice. Do you have a dressing room? B: There's a fitting room right over there. 4.audio A: Do you have a second? B: Sure. What do you need? A: I'm here to buy a sweater. B: What size do you wear? A: I usually wear medium. B: What do you think about this one? A: It's nice. Where is your fitting room? B: The dressing room is in that corner. 5.audio A: Excuse me. Could you help me with something? B: I'll certainly try. A: I'm looking for a nice sweater. B: What size do you wear in a sweater? A: Medium is my size for shirts and sweaters. B: Here's a medium. What do you think? A: I like it. Where can I try it on? B: We have a large fitting room in that corner.3. After Trying on the Sweater
1.audio A: What do you think? B: It looks great. A: I would like to purchase it. B: Will this be cash or charge? A: Here, take my credit card. B: Just sign here, please. A: Sure. Here you go. B: Here's your receipt. Have a nice day. 2.audio A: Does it look too big? B: It looks like it was made just for you. A: Yes, I like it. I'm going to get it. B: How would you like to pay for it? A: Here's my credit card. B: Now, if you'll just sign here. A: Yes. Here you are. B: So long. Have a nice weekend. 3.audio A: Does it look too small? B: It fits you to a T. A: I agree. I'm going to buy it. B: Cash or charge? A: I'll charge it. B: Sign here, please. A: There you go. B: Good-bye, and thank you for shopping here. 4.audio A: Does it look like a good fit? B: It's definitely your size. A: Yes, it is very nice. I'll take it. B: How do you prefer to pay? A: Let me use my credit card. B: Now, if you'll just sign here. A: No problem. B: I hope you enjoy your purchase. Good-bye. 5.audio A: How does it look? B: It's a perfect fit. A: Let me pay for it now. B: Cash, credit card, or debit card? A: I think I'll use my credit card. B: Your signature here, please, and we're finished. A: Here's my John Hancock. B: Bye-bye. Visit us again soon!4. Returning a Radio (1)
1.audio A: I'd like to return this radio. B: All right. Do you have the receipt? A: Here it is. B: May I ask why you're returning the radio? A: It does not work very well. B: Would you like to exchange it? A: No. I'd just like a refund. B: Certainly. This will take only a few seconds. 2.audio A: I want to return this radio. B: Okay. May I see your receipt? A: Certainly. I have it right here. B: What is the problem with the radio? A: It has poor reception. B: Perhaps you'd like a different one? A: No, thank you. A refund is all I want. B: Okay. Give me a few seconds, please. 3.audio A: I need to return this radio. B: That won't be a problem, as long as you have your receipt. A: Here you go. B: What's the problem? A: It doesn't pick up my favorite station. B: I can exchange it for you. A: Thanks, but I just want a refund. B: A refund it will be. Do you have the original box? 4.audio A: I'm returning this radio. B: No problem. You do have your receipt, don't you? A: Here you are. B: What seems to be the problem? A: It doesn't have a headphone jack. B: If you'd like, I can show you a different one. A: No, thanks. A refund will be just fine. B: No problem. This'll only take a minute. 5.audio A: I don't want to keep this radio. B: No problem. Let me see your receipt, please. A: Of course. I always keep my receipts. B: Is there a problem with the radio? A: Something is rattling around inside it. B: Would you like a different model? A: No. Just give me a refund, please. B: Okay, a refund will be no problem.5. Returning a Radio (2)
1.audio A: I'd like to return this radio. B: Okay. Do you have your receipt? A: I lost it. B: I am sorry, but you need a receipt for a refund. A: But I purchased it yesterday. B: Perhaps you would like to talk to customer service. A: That's a start, I guess. B: They're right upstairs. A: That sounds good. I'll take the escalator. B: Good luck. I hope someone can help you. 2.audio A: I want to return this radio. B: Okay. Do you have your receipt? A: I'm sorry, but I lost it. B: I'm sorry, but store policy requires a receipt. A: But I bought it yesterday. B: Maybe you can find the receipt if you look harder. A: Can I talk to a supervisor? B: May I suggest customer service, upstairs? A: That sounds good. I'll take the elevator right now. B: Good luck. 3.audio A: Can I return this radio, please? B: Sure. Do you have your receipt? A: I misplaced it somewhere. B: Unfortunately, I cannot give you a refund without it. A: But I bought it right here just yesterday. B: I'm sorry, but there are no exceptions. A: Someone must be able to help me. B: Someone in customer service might be able to help you. A: Yes, if anyone can help me, it's customer service. B: Just take the escalator upstairs. 4.audio A: I don't want to keep this radio. B: No problem. May I have your receipt, please? A: Sorry. I could not find it. B: We can't give you a refund without a receipt. A: You know, I bought it at 3 p.m. yesterday. B: I wish I could help you, but it's store policy. A: Every rule has an exception. B: Perhaps if you try customer service. A: Yes, they might be able to help me. B: They're upstairs. Good luck! 5.audio A: I'm returning this radio. B: Certainly. Can I see your receipt, please? A: I looked everywhere, but I couldn't find it anywhere. B: I'm sorry, but you can't return the radio without your receipt. A: Even though I just bought it yesterday? B: Are you sure that you looked everywhere for the receipt? A: I looked everywhere, twice! B: Well, customer service is right upstairs. Maybe they can help. A: Great! I'll take the escalator. B: If they can't help you, nobody can.6. Exchanging a DVD Player
1.audio A: May I exchange this DVD player? B: Certainly. Do you have your receipt? A: Here you are. B: Now, why do you want to exchange it? A: It won't play a DVD. B: I'm sorry. I'll get you a new player. A: At first, I thought it was me. B: Okay, here's a new one for you. 2.audio A: I'd like to exchange this DVD player. B: Of course. Do you have your receipt? A: Here it is. B: Now, could you tell me why you want a different one? A: It refuses to play my DVDs. B: That's strange. Let me get you a new one. A: All my friends tried to get it to work. B: I hope this one works better for you. 3.audio A: I want to exchange this DVD player. B: No problem. Do you have your receipt? A: That's one thing I never forget. B: Now, what seems to be the problem? A: This DVD player won't play DVDs. B: Well, at least you kept your receipt. One moment, please. A: I spent almost an hour trying to make it work. B: If this one doesn't work, just bring it back. 4.audio A: Can I exchange this DVD player? B: Let me see your receipt, please. A: I always keep my receipt. B: Could you tell me what the problem is? A: When I hit “Play,” nothing happens. B: Yours is the first one that's been returned. A: Nothing I tried would make it work. B: You might want to try playing this one before you leave. 5.audio A: I need to exchange this DVD player, please. B: That won't be a problem if you have your receipt. A: Here you go. B: Now, if you'll just tell me the problem, please. A: It won't play my DVDs. B: This is a good product. I wonder what went wrong. A: I don't know. I trust this brand. This was a fluke, I think. B: You're right, this is a good brand. This new one should work just fine.7. Exchanging a DVD
1.audio A: Excuse me. Can you help me? B: Certainly. What can I do for you? A: May I exchanged an opened DVD? B: Certainly, as long as you have your receipt. A: Here you are. B: I'm sorry, but you're only allowed to return items within 30 days. A: Is there any way I can exchange it? B: I'm afraid not. A: I am not coming here anymore. B: I'm sorry, but please don't blame me. 2.audio A: Pardon me. May I ask you a question? B: Of course. How can I help you? A: I opened this DVD. Can I still return it? B: No problem. May I have your receipt? A: Here you go. B: Oh, it looks like you bought this more than 30 days ago. A: Can't you bend the rules just a little bit? B: I'm sorry. A: You just lost yourself another customer. B: Don't get mad at me, please. I don't make the rules. 3.audio A: Can you help me, please? B: No problem. What is your question? A: Is it possible to return an opened DVD? B: Sure, as long as you have your receipt. A: Here you go. B: I'm sorry. You can't return something you bought more than 30 days ago. A: Yes, but this is only day 32. Isn't that okay? B: I'm sorry, but rules are rules. A: Well, this is ridiculous. I won't shop here anymore. B: Well, if I was the boss, the rules might be different. 4.audio A: Can you give me a little help, please? B: That's what I'm here for. A: Can I return this DVD even though I already opened it? B: That won't be a problem if you have your receipt. A: It's right here in my wallet. B: Oh, the date on the receipt says that you bought it too long ago to return it. A: But aren't there any exceptions? B: If I make an exception for you, I have to do it for everyone. A: How do you expect to keep loyal customers? B: I wish I could help you, but I didn't make the rules. 5.audio A: Would you help me, please? B: It would be my pleasure. A: I want to return this opened DVD. Is that possible? B: No problem at all. Do you have your receipt? A: Let me dig it out of my wallet. B: I'm sorry. You can't return something more than 30 days old. A: There must be some way around this. B: I'm sorry, but I have to tell everyone the same thing—no. A: That's the dumbest rule I ever heard of. B: Maybe the rules will change if we lose all our customers.8. Looking for a Perfect Gift (1)
1.audio A: Can you help me pick out a gift for my daughter? B: She might like a laptop computer. A: That sounds like a good idea. B: Might I suggest a Mac? A: How much? B: Well, a 15-inch Pro is $2,100. A: That sounds great. I'll take it. B: Great. How would you like to pay for it? A: Here's my VISA. B: Let me ring you up. Okay, sign here, please. A: Everything I need is in this box? B: It'll take her only a few minutes to get online. A: Thank you for your help. B: So long. Thank you for shopping here. 2.audio A: I'm looking for a gift for my daughter. B: How about a laptop? A: Yes, she needs something to help her at school. B: How about a Mac? A: That sounds good. How much is one? B: Our newest 15-inch Pro is only $2,100. A: Only $2,100? Okay, let me have one. B: That's great. Will that be cash, check, or credit card? A: Let me dig my VISA out of my purse. B: If you'll just sign here, please. A: Do I need to buy anything else? B: All she has to do is open the box and follow the instructions. A: Thank you so much. B: Thank you. If you have any problems, just call. 3.audio A: I need help finding a gift for my daughter. B: Would she like a laptop? A: That sounds like a good idea. B: A Mac is a very popular brand. A: She mentioned a Mac. How much is it? B: A 15-inch Pro model is $2,100 plus tax. A: That sounds like a great price. I'll take one. B: This is a gift she'll cherish for years. How do you want to pay? A: I'll use my VISA. B: We're almost through. Just sign here, please. A: Just take it home and plug it in? B: She'll be online 20 minutes after she opens the box. A: She's going to be so pleased with this. B: Remember us for all your computer needs. 4.audio A: I wonder if you could help me find something for my daughter. B: Do you think she'd like a laptop? A: I think that would be perfect. B: A Mac is something most people appreciate. A: In fact, she prefers Macs. How much is one? B: Our 15-inch Pro will cost you only $2,100. A: She's going to be so happy. Let me have one. B: You've made a good decision. How would you like to pay? A: I'll pay for it with my VISA. B: It's all yours after you sign here, please. A: Are there any extras that she needs? B: This is good to go. If she wants accessories, just visit us again. A: You've been so helpful. Thank you. B: Have a nice day, and thank you for shopping here. 5.audio A: I'd appreciate it if you could help me pick out a gift for my daughter. B: Would she be interested in a laptop? A: That's exactly what I was thinking of. B: A Mac would be an excellent gift. A: I like Macs. How much for a Mac? B: You can take a 15-inch Pro home right now for only $2,100. A: A Mac it is. I'll take one home with me. B: She'll be very happy with this. And how do you plan to pay for it? A: I'll use my VISA, if that's okay. B: Now, if you'll just sign here, the Mac is all yours. A: Will she need anything besides what's in this box? B: Everything she needs is right here in the box. A: I appreciate your help. Maybe I'll be back for more computer stuff. B: Your daughter should get straight A's from now on. Good-bye.9. Looking for a Perfect Gift (2)
1.audio A: Can you help me pick out a gift for my niece? B: Most normal little girls go wild over Barbie dolls. A: That sounds good. Let me see one. B: Here's the latest model—Digital Barbie. A: She's nice. How much is she? B: Why, she's only $29.95. A: That's reasonable. I'll take it. B: Excellent. Would you like anything else? A: No, thank you. B: The total will be $32.42. Will that be cash? A: Cash will be fine. B: Here's your change. Thank you for shopping with us. 2.audio A: I'm looking for a gift for my niece. B: Well, little girls seem to love Barbie dolls. A: That's perfect. I want to see one. B: Here you are—she's called Digital Barbie. A: I like Digital Barbie! How much does she cost? B: This Barbie is only $29.95. A: That's perfect. Let me have her. B: Very good. Is there anything else you would like? A: No, that'll do it for now. B: Including tax, your total will be $32.42. Cash or charge? A: Let me give you cash, please. B: Here's your change and receipt. Thank you. 3.audio A: Do you have anything for a little girl? B: Well, we have some new Barbie dolls. A: That's a great idea. Show me the Barbie dolls. B: Here's one—the new, beautiful Digital Barbie. This doll is hot! A: How lovely! How much is she? B: It's only $29.95. A: No problem. Let me have one. B: That's great. Anything else? A: No, thank you. That's all I need at the moment. B: The grand total is $32.42. How would you like to pay? A: I'll give you cash. B: Thank you so much for shopping here. Here's your change and receipt. 4.audio A: I want to get something nice for my niece. B: Well, I've never heard of a little girl that didn't love Barbie dolls. A: I like that suggestion. Show me one, please. B: Here you go—Digital Barbie. A: My niece will love her! How much for her? B: Barbie is our best seller. She's only $29.95. A: That's great. I'll take her. B: Your niece will love this. Anything else? A: Thank you, but no. This will do it for now. B: With the tax, your total is $32.42. Would you like to charge it? A: I'll pay cash, thank you. B: Thank you for shopping here. 5.audio A: Can you help me find a nice gift for my young niece? B: Barbie dolls are quite popular, you know. A: You're right. Girls love Barbie. Show me a Barbie doll. B: Take a look at the newest Barbie—Digital Barbie. A: She's beautiful. What's the price for Digital Barbie? B: Our regular price for Digital Barbie is $29.95 plus tax. A: Only $29.95? I'll buy it, of course. B: Another one sold. Do you see anything else you would like? A: Thank you, but no. This will do it for now. B: Tax brings your total to $32.42. How would you like to pay? A: Cash, please. B: Here's your change. Thank you.10. Applying for a Credit Card (1)
1.audio A: Can you tell me where the pots and pans are? B: Pots and pans are right over there. A: Oh, thank you. B: Could I interest you in our store credit card? A: No, thanks. I already have credit cards. B: But our credit card saves you 10 percent. A: That's a nice discount. B: Here. Let me give you an application form. A: Thank you, but I'm just browsing today. B: Okay. Enjoy your browsing. 2.audio A: I'm looking for pots and pans. B: That section is right over there. A: Thank you so much. B: Perhaps you'd like to sign up for our store credit card. A: No, but thank you. I have plenty of credit cards. B: Our credit card saves you 10 percent instantly on all purchases. A: That does sound nice. B: Just fill out this form and you'll get your discount immediately. A: You know, I'll pass on it today. B: No problem. These forms are also at the front of the store on your way out. 3.audio A: I'm looking for your pots and pans section. B: We have a huge pots and pans section right over there. A: Thank you for your help. B: You know, we have a store credit card. A: No, thank you. I already have 1,000 credit cards. B: But our credit card gives you 10 percent savings. A: 10 percent is certainly better than zero percent. B: All you have to do is fill out this form for an instant discount. A: Thank you. Maybe next time. B: Okay. If you need anything else, I'll be right here. 4.audio A: Where are your pots and pans? B: All our pots and pans are right over there. A: I walked right past it. B: Perhaps you'd be interested in a store credit card. A: Thanks, but no thanks. My wallet is full of credit cards. B: But only our credit card will save you 10 percent on all purchases. A: That sounds nice. B: Just take this form, fill it out, and get your instant discount. A: Not today, thank you. I'm in a bit of a hurry. B: If you change your mind, I'm right here. 5.audio A: Where is the pots and pans section? B: You'll find all our pots and pans right over there. A: Thank you. All I had to do was open my eyes. B: Would you like to receive our store credit card? A: No, thank you. The last thing is need is another credit card. B: But with our credit card, you save 10 percent instantly. A: That's something to think about. B: If you fill out this form, you'll get a discount starting today. A: Maybe next time, when I have more time. B: I understand. Good luck in the pots and pans section.11. Applying for a Credit Card (2)
1.audio A: I'd like to get your store credit card. B: Here's the application form. A: I'm finished. Here's the form. B: Thank you. Now if you'll just give me a credit card. A: Here's my VISA. B: Thank you. 2.audio A: I want to get a store credit card. B: I have the application form right here. A: I've filled out the form. Here you go. B: Thanks. Now all I need to see is a credit card. A: Here's my MasterCard. B: Thank you very much. 3.audio A: I want to fill out the form for a store credit card. B: Very good. Here's the application form. A: I've filled out all the information. Here's the form. B: Thank you. Now I need to see one of your credit cards. A: Here's my American Express. B: Thanks. 4.audio A: I want to apply for your store credit card. B: It only takes a few minutes. Just fill out this form, please. A: I'm done. Here's the form. B: Thank you. Now if you'll just show me a credit card. A: Here's my Discover card. B: Perfect. Thank you. 5.audio A: I'm interested in a store credit card. B: Okay. Here's the application form. A: I've filled everything out. B: Thank you. Now let me see a credit card, please. A: Certainly. Here's my VISA card. B: Very good. Thank you.12. The Sale Is Over
1.audio A: Excuse me, but is this dress on sale? B: The dress was on sale yesterday. A: Are you sure? I'd be happy to pay the sale price today. B: I'm so sorry, but rules are rules. A: I'll just check out a few other stores. B: I'm sorry I couldn't help you. 2.audio A: Pardon me. Is this dress on sale? B: Actually, the sale ended yesterday. A: You know, it's only one day later. How about giving me the sale price? B: I'm sorry, but I can't change the price that's in the computer. A: Let me think about it. Maybe I'll wait until the next sale. B: Take a look around. Maybe you'll see something else you like. 3.audio A: Is this dress on sale? B: It was on sale—yesterday. A: Still, couldn't you sell it to me today at the sale price? B: I'm sorry, but I'd lose my job if I sold it to you at yesterday's sale price. A: I had my heart set on buying this dress. B: Well, feel free to browse. We have other items on sale today. 4.audio A: Am I right in thinking that this dress is on sale? B: I'm sorry. You're one day too late for the sale. A: Couldn't you still sell it today at the sale price? B: I'm sorry. One day can make a big difference sometimes. A: No problem. Other stores are having sales. I'll check them out. B: Before you go, let me show you some other dresses that are on sale. 5.audio A: Am I mistaken, or is this dress on sale? B: I'm very sorry. The sale ended yesterday. A: I really like this dress, but I want to pay the sale price. B: If you like, I can put you on our mailing list for the next sale. A: That's okay. Some days you win, some days you lose. B: Let me ask my manager when he thinks this dress will be on sale again.13. Misleading Advertisement
1.audio A: I'm glad these batteries are on sale. B: I'm sorry. These batteries are not on sale. A: But that's what the ad says. B: I'm sorry. If you look at the ad again, you'll see that the other brand is on sale. A: You're right. I misread the ad. B: Yes, many people make that mistake. A: You can't blame them. It's a confusing ad. B: You're right. Many ads are like that. A: As long as I'm here. B: Just one second, and I'll get you the batteries that are on sale. 2.audio A: It's about time these batteries went on sale. B: I'm sorry. These aren't on sale today. A: You're kidding me. The ad says they're on sale. B: Yes, the other brand of batteries is on sale. A: I see. I've got the wrong brand. B: Yes, it's an easy mistake to make. A: The ad is written in a misleading way. B: I agree. It seems like all ads are meant to confuse you. A: It's not the first or last time. B: Hold on, and I'll get you the batteries that are on sale. 3.audio A: You don't often find these batteries on sale. B: I'm not sure that these batteries are on sale today. A: But the ad says they're on sale. B: Yes, batteries are on sale, but not this brand. A: What do you know? I picked up the wrong brand. B: Yes, several customers have made that mistake today. A: Like many ads, it's deliberately confusing. B: I couldn't agree more. They write ads just to get you into the store. A: I should know better by now. B: If you can wait one minute, I'll bring you the batteries that are on sale. 4.audio A: This is the first time I've seen these batteries on sale. B: I'm sorry, but they aren't on sale today. A: Look at the ad. The ad says they're on sale. B: Yes, the ad says that the other brand of batteries is on sale. A: Yes, I misread the ad. B: Believe me, you're not the first person to make that mistake today. A: No wonder people make a mistake. The price is in big letters, and the brand is in tiny letters. B: You're right. You have to read an ad two or three times sometimes. A: You have to be careful with every ad you read. B: It's okay. I'll go get you the batteries that are on sale. 5.audio A: These batteries should be on sale more often. B: I don't think these batteries are on sale. A: Look at the ad. It says they're on sale. B: You're right. Batteries are on sale, but not this brand of batteries. A: I didn't pay attention to the brand name. B: Several people have misread that ad already today. A: People make the mistake because the ad is misleading. B: I agree with you. Ads can be very tricky. A: I don't know when I'll ever learn. B: No problem. I'll bring you the batteries that are on sale. I'll be right back.14. Exchanging a Dress
1.audio A: I would like to exchange this dress. B: You can exchange this dress with anything of the same value. A: Is there anything on sale today? B: I'm sorry. There are no sales today. A: Are dresses going to be on sale? B: Everything's going to be on sale next weekend. A: That's great. I'll wait. See you next weekend. B: Okay. I'll see you then. 2.audio A: I want to exchange this dress. B: You can exchange it with anything of the same price. A: Are there any sales today? B: We're having a big sale next weekend, but nothing today. A: What's going to be on sale? B: Dresses, skirts, blouses, pantsuits…everything will be on sale. A: That sounds great. I'll come back next weekend. B: Okay. Don't forget to bring your credit card. 3.audio A: This dress doesn't fit correctly. B: No problem. Shop around until you find something you like. A: What's on sale today? B: If you can wait until next weekend, you can save some money. A: Do you know what's going to be on sale? B: You'll be happy to know that everything in the store will be on sale. A: I won't miss that. I'll wait until next weekend. B: Great. Bring lots of cash so you can buy lots of things. 4.audio A: I don't want to keep this dress. B: Just leave the dress with me while you find one that you like. A: Do you have anything on sale today? B: Next weekend is our next sale date. A: Do you have any idea what's going to be on sale? B: Everything except the cash registers will be on sale. A: That sounds good. I'll see you next weekend. B: Okay. See you then. 5.audio A: I've brought this dress back to exchange it. B: That's not a problem. Leave it with me, and find something that you like. A: I was hoping you'd have something on sale today. B: We have nothing on sale today. But we're having a big sale next weekend. A: Is the sale going to include dresses? B: Everything you can see will be on sale. A: I like the sound of that. I'll just come back next weekend. B: The savings will be worth the short wait. See you next weekend.15. Buying Flowers
1.audio A: I need some flowers for my wife. It's her birthday. B: Very well. We have some fresh red roses. A: How much are the roses? B: $20 per dozen. A: That sounds like a good deal. B: Yes, they're on sale today. A: I'll take a dozen. B: Splendid. Will there be anything else? A: No, the roses will be fine. B: I'm sure your wife will love them. 2.audio A: My wife's birthday is today. I need some flowers. B: We have lots of fresh red roses. A: How much do the roses cost? B: $20 a dozen. A: That sounds good. Last year I paid $30. B: Yes, you came here on the right day. They're on sale today. A: Give me a dozen. B: Very good. Would you like anything else? A: No, I'll just give her the roses and a card. B: She should be very pleased with these roses. 3.audio A: I need to buy some flowers for my wife. B: Perhaps you'd be interested in red roses. A: What would the roses cost me? B: They're only $20 a dozen. A: I like the sound of that. B: Yes, that is today's sale price. A: A dozen will be fine. B: Is there anything else you'd like to get? A: No, thank you. B: These roses should make your wife very happy. 4.audio A: I want to buy some flowers for my wife's birthday. B: Red roses are always a popular gift for birthdays. A: What are the roses going for? B: They're only $20 a dozen. A: That sounds nice and cheap. B: Yes, you're saving money because they're on sale today. A: Give me the roses. B: Could I interest you in anything else? A: No, but thanks anyway. B: Your wife will be thrilled with the roses. 5.audio A: It's my wife's birthday. I need to buy some flowers for her. B: Most women love red roses for their birthday. A: How much will the roses be? B: You can get a dozen for only $20. A: Now, that's a price that I like. B: You're in luck today because the roses are on sale. A: I'll take the roses. B: Very good. Perhaps you'd like something else to go with the roses? A: No, the roses are good enough. B: Women love roses, so your wife will be very happy.16. Going to an Antique Shop
1.audio A: I want to find an old music box. B: We have a great selection. What decade are you looking for? A: Do you have anything made in the 1920s? B: We have six. A: Do any of them have dancing figures? B: Actually, two of them have dancing figures. A: That's fantastic. I think I like this one. B: A good choice. I prefer that one myself. A: Is there any warranty with this? B: Oh, no, I'm afraid not. These things are just too old to guarantee anything. A: I understand. B: Even if they break down, they're still works of art. 2.audio A: Excuse me. I'm looking for an old music box. B: Any particular decade? A: Something made in the 20s would be nice. B: We had seven, but we sold one this morning. A: Are dancing figures a part of any of the boxes? B: You're in luck. Two of them have dancing figures. A: These are great. I think I'll take this one. B: Yes, that one is very nice. A: Does this come with a warranty? B: I'm sorry, but you just have to take your chances. A: That doesn't surprise me. B: Even if it doesn't work, it's a beautiful collectible. 3.audio A: Pardon me. I need an old music box. B: Exactly how old a box do you want? A: Actually, I was thinking about something from the 1920s. B: We still have six left. A: Do any of the boxes have dancing figures? B: Dancing figures are quite popular. Two of the boxes have them. A: I love the dancing figures. I'll take this music box. B: Yes, I think you'll be very satisfied with that one. A: I was wondering, does this come with any kind of warranty? B: No. But if something goes wrong with it, I know someone who repairs these things. A: I was just hoping. B: It's amazing that these things still work as well as they do. 4.audio A: I want to purchase an old music box. B: We have a good variety. What decade would you like? A: I was hoping I could find something made in the 20s. B: There are six on this table. A: I hope at least one of them has dancing figures. B: Many people like the dancing figures. Two of our boxes have the figures. A: It's so hard to choose. I think I'll take this one. B: That one will bring you many hours of pleasure. A: Does a warranty come with this music box? B: I'm sorry, but if it breaks down, you're on your own. A: I just thought I would ask. B: When you buy a Model T, you can't expect a warranty. 5.audio A: I'm searching for an old music box. B: You came to the right place. Any particular decade? A: If you had a box made in the 20s, that would be nice. B: We just got one in yesterday, so now we have six. A: Would any of them have dancing figures? B: Yes, we still have two boxes left that have dancing figures. A: They're both so beautiful. Let me have this one, I think. B: That one truly is a beautiful piece of work, isn't it? A: One last question: Do you provide a warranty with the box? B: Oh, no. Everything we sell here is ‘as is.' A: I guess I was asking for too much. B: If it breaks down, maybe you can find a repairman on the Internet.17. Buying a Pan
1.audio A: I am looking for a pan. B: No problem. What size would you like? A: A big one would be nice. B: How about this one? It's our biggest—16" in diameter. A: I like that one, but it's too heavy. B: Okay, try this one. It's made of aluminum. A: This is much better. But it has an aluminum handle. B: Here you go. Same pan, but with a state-of-the-art, heat-resistant plastic handle. A: That's perfect. I'll take it. B: Great. Will that be cash or charge? A: Wait a minute. What about a lid for the pan? B: I'm sorry. I forgot to show you the lid. It comes with the pan. 2.audio A: I need a pan. B: Okay. Do you have a particular size in mind? A: The bigger the better, I think. B: Look at this one. It's our biggest pan. A: That is big enough, but it's too heavy for me. B: Okay, we have the same thing in aluminum. A: This is nice and light. But it has an aluminum handle. B: Try this one. Same aluminum pan, but with a heat-resistant bamboo handle. A: This is very nice. I'll take this one. B: That's a good choice. How do you want to pay for it? A: Cash. Oh, I almost forgot. I need a lid, too. B: I'm so sorry. A lid comes with the pan. Here it is. 3.audio A: I'd like to purchase a pan. B: Is there any particular size that you want? A: I cook a lot of big meals. B: What do you think of this one? It's a 16" pan. A: That's the right size, but it's so heavy. B: Well, look at our aluminum pan. It's much lighter. A: Yes, this is very light, but the handle is also aluminum. B: No problem. Look at this one. Same pan, but with a lightweight wooden handle. A: Great. This is exactly what I was looking for. I'll buy it. B: I think you'll love this pan. Do you want to pay with cash? A: Yes. Oh, wait a second, please. What about a lid? B: I'm sorry. I forgot to show it to you. Here it is. It comes with the pan. 4.audio A: Can you help me find a pan? B: Are you looking for a small, medium, or large pan? A: I want a big pan. B: Does this one look big enough? A: It's the right size, but it weighs too much. B: Well, what do you think of the aluminum pan? A: It's light enough, but the handle will get too hot after cooking. B: Here's the same pan, but it has a space-age, heat-resistant plastic handle. A: My family's going to love this one. I'll take it. B: I'm so happy that you found what you wanted. Do you want to use a credit card? A: Sure. Wait, wait. Does a lid come with this pan? B: Oh, I'm sorry. Here's the lid. Yes, it comes with the pan. 5.audio A: I'm looking for a pan I can use in my kitchen. B: What size pan were you thinking of? A: I've already got a small pan. I need a big one. B: Well, this one might work for you. A: No, that's way too heavy a pan for me. B: Here, lift this aluminum pan. It's the same size. A: Yes, it's very lightweight. But I don't want this aluminum handle. B: Here's a similar aluminum pan. But it has a heat-resistant handle. A: This feels very nice. It's perfect. I'll take it. B: I knew we'd find the right pan sooner or later. How would you like to pay? A: Cash. But first, I need a lid for this pan. B: Oh, no problem. Here's the lid that comes with the pan.19. Grocery Shopping (2)
1.audio A: I'm looking for some fresh produce that's on sale. B: Well, we just got in some mangoes. A: Mangoes. What are they? B: Well, it's a fruit with a big nut in it. A: Can you eat the nut? B: No, you peel off the skin and throw out the nut. A: How much are they? B: Well, the sale price is $1 each. A: What does a mango taste like? B: They're like a citrus fruit. A: How do I know if it's ripe? B: You can buy them hard. Wait a few days for them to develop a soft feel. A: Where do they come from? B: Most of them in this store are from Mexico. 2.audio A: Can you direct me to some fresh produce that's on sale? B: Well, we've got some great mangoes on sale. A: Mangoes? What are mangoes? B: Well, it's a fruit with a big seed in it. A: Can you eat the seed? B: No. Peel the skin with a sharp knife, and throw out the seed. A: How much are they? B: Well, they're on sale today for only $1 each. A: Can you describe their taste? B: They usually taste sweet, but they remind me of an orange. A: How can I tell if they're ripe? B: You can buy them either ripe or unripe. Unripe ones are hard. A: Where do they grow mangoes? B: The ones that are on sale are from Central America. 3.audio A: Where is some fresh produce that's on sale? B: Well, I think you'll like the mangoes. A: I've never had a mango. B: It's a fruit. It has a big stone in it. A: Can you eat the stone? B: No. You would break all your teeth on it. A: How much are these mangoes? B: The sale price today is $1 each. A: Can you describe their taste? B: They usually taste sweet, but they remind me of an orange. A: How can I tell if they're ripe? B: Don't cut into them until you can feel that they're soft on the outside. A: What country produces them? B: They come from tropical countries. 4.audio A: Can you tell me about some good deals on produce? B: The mangoes are on sale today. A: What exactly are mangoes? B: They have yellowish red skin. It's a fruit with one big seed. A: Is the seed edible? B: Maybe if you were a parrot. I wouldn't recommend it. A: How much does a mango cost? B: Normally, they're $2 each. Today, they're only $1 each. A: Maybe I won't like the taste. B: It's hard to describe. They're sweet, but also sort of citrusy. A: How do I tell the difference between a ripe one and an unripe one? B: They're similar to an avocado. When the outside feels soft, they're ripe. A: Where do most of them come from? B: These are from Mexico. 5.audio A: I'm looking for some good deals on produce. B: You might want to try the mangoes. A: Can you describe a mango to me? B: It's a fruit a little smaller than a grapefruit. It has a big seed in it. A: Do I eat the seed? B: Maybe some animals eat the seed, but humans don't. You'd have to soak it for 10 years. A: What's the price of these mangoes? B: Today you get a 50-percent discount. They're only $1 each. A: Tell me what they taste like. B: Their flesh is soft and juicy. It has a citrus taste. It's sweet. A: Do I need to buy them ripe, or will they ripen at home? B: Just press into it gently with your thumb. If it feels soft, it's ready to eat. A: Where do mangoes come from? B: These are from Guatemala, but we're going to start getting mangoes from India.20. Buying Business Cards
1.audio A: I would like to buy some business cards. B: Excellent. How many would you like? A: Two thousand would be fine. B: You need to fill out this form, please. A: All I want is the same thing on this card. B: That will be no problem, sir. A: I'm finished. Here's your form and my old card. B: Very good, sir. Your order will be ready in one week. A: Do you think you could finish it in three days? B: No problem, sir. But it will cost you extra. 2.audio A: I need to purchase some business cards. B: No problem. How many are you thinking about? A: I think 2,000 would be fine. B: If you'll just fill out this form, please. A: I want the new cards to be exactly like this card. B: We can do that very easily. A: I'm done. Here's the form and my old card. B: Great. Your order will take only one week. A: You know, I think it would be better if I could pick it up in three days. B: We can do that. It'll just cost you extra. 3.audio A: I need to get some business cards printed up. B: Do you know how many you need? A: I think I can get by with 2,000. B: We can get started as soon as you fill out this form. A: I hope you can make the new cards just like my old cards. B: You won't be able to tell the difference with a magnifying glass. A: I'm through. Here's the form and my old card. B: Very good. You can pick up your order in one week. A: Now that I think of it, three days is better than seven. B: We can do that, but you'll have to pay a little extra. 4.audio A: I need to order new business cards. B: Do you have any idea how many you'd like? A: I think 2,000 would be enough. B: Would you fill out this form, please? A: I don't want to make any changes to my old card. B: If you detect any difference, I'll take you out to dinner. A: That's it. Here's the form, and here's my old card to use as a model. B: Thank you. Your order will be ready seven days from now. A: I need it sooner. Let me have it in three days, okay? B: We can certainly give you faster turnaround, but it will cost you extra. 5.audio A: I'm about to run out of business cards. I need some new ones. B: We can print as many as you like. Just tell me how many. A: Two thousand should get me through the year. B: Here's a form to get you started. A: My old card is perfect, so all I want you to do is copy it exactly. B: I think you'll be very pleased with how well we duplicate your old card. A: Here you go, your form and my old business card. B: Thanks. Come back here next Wednesday to pick up your order, please. A: I'm sorry, but can you give me a three-day turnaround? B: If you don't mind paying a little extra, it's absolutely no problem.21. Flea Markets
1.audio A: Do you know where I can find old music boxes? B: You could try shopping at a flea market. A: What's that? I never heard of such a thing. B: A flea market is an outdoor place where people sell all kinds of used stuff. A: Where can I find one? B: Well, you can check the local paper or search ‘flea market' online. 2.audio A: Where can I find old music boxes? B: Have you tried a flea market? A: What's a flea market? B: A flea market is like an outdoor thrift shop. A: That sounds promising. Is there one nearby? B: Flea markets occur weekly or monthly in various neighborhoods. Check online or in a local paper. 3.audio A: Do you know where they sell old music boxes? B: How about a flea market? A: A flea market? What's that? B: A flea market is a big outdoor place where you can buy all sorts of second-hand things. A: I like the sound of that. Tell me where one is. B: I myself don't know of any, but maybe they're listed in the Yellow Pages. 4.audio A: Do you have any idea where I can buy old music boxes? B: You can find almost anything at a flea market. A: What in the world is a flea market? B: A flea market sells all kinds of used things, some that you've never even heard of. A: Great. Is there one near here? B: Actually, our local community college has one on the first Sunday of each month. 5.audio A: I'm looking for old music boxes, but I can't find any. B: If you go to a flea market, you can find all kinds of things. A: I don't want a music box that's full of fleas! B: Ha! A flea market is a popular outdoor place for selling used things. There are no fleas. A: That sounds like a good idea. Where is the nearest one? B: Actually, there's a huge flea market at the stadium on the second Sunday of each month.1. Calling Credit Card Company
1.audio A: I'm calling today about a bill that I never received. B: Can you tell me which credit card it was for? A: It was for my Master Card. B: You should've gotten that bill two weeks ago. A: I haven't got it in the mail yet. B: The computer is showing that all bills have been mailed. A: What am I supposed to do about my bill then? B: Maybe you should call your post office. A: But if it's their mistake, can I get an extension on my bill payment? B: Yes, but you will need to send us proof of their mistake. A: Thank you very much for your help. B: No problem. Enjoy the rest of your day. 2.audio A: I haven't received my credit card bill yet. B: Which credit card are you speaking of? A: My Master Card. B: We sent that bill out a couple of weeks ago. A: I never got it. B: Your bill was mailed already. A: What am I going to do since I haven't received the bill? B: If you haven't gotten it yet, then you should probably take that up with your post office. A: Can I get an extension on my bill if it does happen to be the post office's fault? B: If that's the case, you will need to provide proof of their mistake. A: Thanks for everything. B: Don't mention it. Call back if you have any more problems. 3.audio A: I was inquiring about a bill that I never got. B: Which credit card was the bill for? A: The bill was for my Master Card. B: That bill should have been mailed about two weeks ago. A: It never came in the mail. B: My computer shows that it has already been mailed. A: I have not gotten my bill, so what should I do about that? B: You should try contacting your post office. A: If it is the post office's fault, may I have an extension on my bill? B: You'll have to prove it was their error; then you can get an extension. A: Thank you for all your help. B: You are very welcome. Have a good day.2. Disputing a Charge
1.audio A: There's a problem with my credit card. B: Tell me what the problem is. A: A charge came up on my bill that I didn't make. B: What was the charge for? A: The charge was for a $350 purse, but I did not buy it. B: Are you sure that you didn't make that purchase? A: I would know if I bought something that expensive. B: I apologize. What day was this purchase made? A: It was bought on November 12th at 3:15 pm, while I was at work. B: All right, we'll do an investigation. A: Until this investigation is finished, will I have to pay for the charge? B: No, you don't. We'll take care of it. 2.audio A: I have a problem with my credit card. B: What's wrong with it? A: There is a charge on my card that I didn't make. B: Can you tell me what the charge was? A: It's for a purse that cost $350. B: Are you positive that you didn't buy the purse? A: I can't even afford a purse that expensive. B: I'm very sorry. When was this purchase made? A: I was at work, but the purchase was made at 3:15 on November 12th. B: We're going to investigate this claim. A: Do I have to pay for this charge? B: You won't have to pay for anything. 3.audio A: There is something wrong with my credit card. B: What's the problem? A: There is a charge on here that I never made. B: What charge was made? A: It was a charge for a $350 purse that I never bought. B: You didn't make this purchase? A: I think I would remember if I made a purchase that large. B: Sorry. When was this purse purchased? A: It was purchased on the 12th of November at 3:15 pm, but I was at work. B: We'll do an investigation and get to the bottom of this. A: In the meantime, do I have to pay for this charge? B: No. We'll take care of everything.3. Ordering Cable Services
1.audio A: I would like to order cable. B: Sure, what package do you want? A: What kinds of packages do you offer? B: We have all kinds of movie channel packages. A: What else do you have? B: There is a package for all sports channels. A: Do you have a package that includes all the movie channels with the basic channels also? B: Yes, we do offer that package. A: I want that. B: Do you want anything else? A: No, but is it possible for me to add channels later? B: You can always get rid of channels or add some later. 2.audio A: I want to get some cable. B: Do you know what package you want to get? A: What packages do you have? B: We have movie channel packages. A: What else have you got? B: You can get the sports package. A: Is there a package with basic and movie channels? B: We have that package. A: Let me get that package. B: Is there anything else you would like? A: That's everything, but can I add channels later? B: You will be able to add or get rid of channels another day. 3.audio A: May I order some cable from you today? B: Okay, what package would you like to order? A: I'm not sure of what packages you offer. B: We offer packages with all the movie channels. A: Are there any other packages? B: We also have packages with all the sports channels. A: I want a package that has the basic and movie channels. B: We have that available. A: I would like to get that. B: Would you like anything else with your package? A: That's it, but will I be able to add more channels at another time? B: Yes, you can add or get rid of channels later on if you would like.4. Inquiring about Internet Services
1.audio A: I would like to order some internet today. B: What kind would you like? A: What kind of internet is there? B: You can get DSL or dial-up. A: Which of those two is best? B: I would recommend DSL. A: Is that one better? B: It's better because it doesn't tie up your phone. A: What do you mean by that? B: DSL isn't connected through your phone line, but dial-up is. A: So then I can't use my phone if I'm on the internet? B: That's correct. With DSL you can do both. 2.audio A: I need to get internet. B: Which kind of internet connection do you want to get? A: What kind can I get? B: There is dial-up or DSL. A: Which one do you feel is best? B: I would get DSL if I were you. A: DSL is better than dial-up? B: It's the best choice; plus, it won't tie up your phone line. A: I'm not sure what that means. B: Dial-up is connected through your phone, unlike DSL. A: That'll make it impossible for me to use. B: Exactly. With DSL you don't have that problem. 3.audio A: I'd like to have internet on my computer. B: Do you know what kind of internet you would like to get? A: What are my options? B: You can either get dial-up or DSL. A: Which one would you recommend? B: DSL is the best choice. A: Why is DSL better? B: It's a lot better because it doesn't tie up your phone line. A: What exactly does that mean? B: Well, with dial-up your internet is connected by your phone line. A: That means that I can't use my phone and the internet at the same time, right? B: That's right. You won't have that problem with DSL.5. Installing High Speed Internet
1.audio A: I need to get my high speed internet installed. B: You'll need to make an appointment. A: Could I do that right now, please? B: What day would you like us to do the installation? A: Is Friday good? B: We're only available at 3:00 pm. A: You can't come any earlier than that? B: I'm sorry. That's the only available time. A: Are you available this Saturday? B: Yes. Anytime on Saturday will be fine. A: How does 11:00 sound? B: We can do it. See you then. 2.audio A: I would like high speed internet installed in my house. B: You have to make an appointment before we can come out and install it. A: I'd like to make an appointment right now. B: What day are you available? A: I would like to have it done this Friday. B: Three o'clock is the only time we can come in. A: Is it possible for someone to come a little earlier? B: I'm sorry, but that's our only available time. A: How about Saturday? B: We're completely open on Saturday. A: Can you come over at 11:00? B: That'll be fine. 3.audio A: When can I get high speed internet installed? B: You're going to have to make an appointment. A: Can I make one right now? B: When would you like the installation to be done? A: I'm off this Friday. B: The only time we can come on Friday is at 3:00 pm. A: I'm going to need it installed earlier than that. B: I'm sorry, but we're booked up on Friday. A: Is Saturday any better? B: Saturday is perfect. What time would you like? A: Is 11:00 fine? B: That's perfect. See you on Saturday.6. Reporting an Internet Problem
1.audio A: I need somebody to come over and fix my internet. B: What's wrong with it? A: For some reason it's just not connecting. B: How long have you been having this problem? A: It hasn't been working the past few days. B: Does the internet come up at all? A: It does, but it won't connect to anything. B: Well, the internet isn't down, so there must be something wrong with your connection. A: Could you send someone to fix it today? B: I'll send somebody over right away to fix it. A: When will they be here? B: They should be there in the next hour. 2.audio A: I need to get my internet fixed. B: What's the problem with your internet? A: It won't connect. B: How long has this been happening? A: This problem has been happening for a few days now. B: The internet doesn't come up at all? A: It just won't connect to a webpage, but it will pop up. B: There's obviously a problem with your connection. A: I'm going to need someone to come and fix it for me. B: I can send somebody right now to fix it. A: How long will it take for them to get here? B: They'll be there in about an hour. 3.audio A: Can you send someone to fix my internet? B: Are you having a problem with it? A: My internet is having problems connecting. B: Can you tell me how long your internet has been messing up? A: I've been having this problem for the last few days. B: Will the internet even pop up? A: It'll pop up, but it won't connect to a webpage. B: Since the internet isn't broken, your connection must be messed up. A: Do you think you can send somebody over to fix it? B: If you'd like, I can send someone to fix it right now. A: How long will it be till they get here? B: It should be no longer than an hour.7. Asking for Credit for Service Interrupted
1.audio A: I am calling about my cable service. B: What's the problem? A: For the past week my cable hasn't been working. B: I apologize, but the cable has been down lately. A: Do you know when it is going to start working again? B: Give it a couple days, and it should be back on. A: Will I still have to pay for the cable while it's not working? B: Since it's not working, I'm going to give you a credit. A: So I don't have to pay anything? B: You won't pay anything until your cable starts working again. A: Okay, thank you very much for your help. B: No problem. Thank you for being so understanding. 2.audio A: I have a question about my cable. B: What do you need? A: I haven't been able to watch my cable for the past week. B: Right now the cable isn't working. A: Could you tell me when it will be back on? B: The cable should be running again in a couple of days. A: In the meantime, do I still have to pay for the cable? B: We'll just give you a credit for the inconvenience. A: Does that mean I won't have to pay for it? B: It'll be free until it comes back on. A: Thanks, I appreciate your help. B: Thank you for all your patience. 3.audio A: I have a problem with my cable. B: What about it? A: My cable has been out for the past week or so. B: The cable is down right now. I am very sorry. A: When will it be working again? B: It should be back on in the next couple of days. A: Do I still have to pay for the cable? B: We're going to give you a credit while the cable is down. A: So, I don't have to pay for it? B: No, not until your cable comes back on. A: Thanks for everything. B: You're welcome, and I apologize for the inconvenience.8. Troubleshooting a Computer Problem
1.audio A: I'm having problems with my computer. B: What's wrong with it? A: For some reason it won't turn on. B: Have you checked the connections on your computer? A: What connections? B: There are cords that connect your computer to a power outlet. A: Will the cords keep it from turning on? B: It won't turn on if the cords aren't connected. A: I didn't think of that. B: Try it and see if it works. A: I think that I will, thanks. B: It should work, but let me know if it doesn't. 2.audio A: My computer isn't working. B: Tell me what the problem is. A: I'm trying to turn it on, but it won't work. B: Try checking the connections. A: Which ones are you referring to? B: The cords that you see behind your CPU that plug into an outlet. A: Is that why it won't turn on? B: If they're not connected right, that will keep it from turning on. A: I did not know that. B: You should check the connections. A: I'm going to do that. B: Tell me if it's still not working. 3.audio A: Something's wrong with my computer. B: What's the problem? A: My computer won't turn on. B: Did you see if all the connections are right? A: I'm not sure I understand what you mean. B: The connections between your CPU and your outlet. A: Is that what's stopping my computer from turning on? B: If your plugs aren't connected all the way, the computer won't turn on. A: I had no idea. B: Why don't you try it and see what happens? A: I'll try it right now. B: Let me know if that doesn't work.9. Making an Appointment to Have a Haircut
1.audio A: How are you doing today? B: Great. What can I help you with? A: I need to make an appointment for a haircut. B: Okay. What day would you like to come in? A: How's Saturday? B: Let me just check the books. A: Okay. B: Yes. We have openings only that morning. A: Can I make it for 10:30? B: That'll be fine. A: Sounds great, thank you. B: No problem. See you Saturday morning. 2.audio A: How's it going? B: Perfect. What did you need? A: I would like to schedule an appointment to get a haircut. B: What day are you free? A: I'd like to come in on Saturday. B: I'll just see if we have any openings. A: All right. B: The only time we have on Saturday is in the morning. A: I'd like to schedule it for 10:30. B: That's perfect. A: I appreciate that. B: We'll see you then. 3.audio A: How are you? B: I'm fine. How can I help you? A: I need to get a haircut, so can I schedule an appointment? B: What day would you like to make the appointment? A: I was thinking Saturday. B: All right. Let me check to see if we have any openings that day. A: That's fine. B: You can only make an appointment for Saturday morning. A: Is 10:30 okay? B: I'll pencil you in for that time. A: Thank you very much. B: You're welcome. We'll see you on Saturday.10. Making Requests to the Hairdresser
1.audio A: I want to try something different today. B: What do you mean? A: I want a different hair style. B: What style do you want? A: Can you make my hair short? B: Exactly how short do you want it? A: Make it a few inches long. B: Are you sure you want me to cut it that short? A: I've been thinking about this for a while now. B: Okay. I'll do it if you're positive that this is what you want. A: I honestly want my hair that short. B: All right, then let's begin. 2.audio A: Let's do something different today. B: Like how? A: I would like you to give me a different hair style. B: What did you have in mind? A: Give me a short haircut. B: Do you know how short you want your hair to be? A: I want you to cut it to a few inches long. B: That's pretty short. Are you sure about this? A: I've had this idea for some time now. B: I'm going to do it, but you have to be sure you really want me to. A: This is what I want. B: Fine then. Let's get started. 3.audio A: I really want to switch things up. B: What were you thinking? A: I think I want to try a new style. B: What would you like me to do? A: I want you to cut my hair shorter. B: How short? A: I want my hair to be only a few inches long. B: Do you really want it that short? A: Yes, I've been wanting it short for a while now. B: If you really want me to, then I'll do it. A: I'm absolutely sure that this is what I want. B: Let's do it.11. Paying the Hairdresser
1.audio A: Are you almost finished with my hair? B: I'm almost finished. A: How much longer is it going to be? B: I'm done now. Do you like it? A: I absolutely love it. B: You really like it? A: Yes, I truly do. B: I'm glad you like it. A: How much do I owe you? B: It's going to be $55. A: Here you go, thanks for everything. B: Make sure and come back in a couple of weeks. 2.audio A: Will you be done doing my hair soon? B: Give me a little while longer. A: How much time do you need? B: There you go. How do you like it? A: I think it looks gorgeous. B: You think it looks nice? A: I honestly think it looks great. B: Thanks. I'm glad that I did a good job. A: How much is it for my hair? B: Just give me $55. A: Thanks for doing such a good job. B: No problem. I'll see you next time. 3.audio A: Is my hair done yet? B: Yeah, I just need to make the final touches. A: How long until you're finished? B: I'm finished. What do you think? A: I like my hair so much. B: Do you really? A: It's beautiful. B: Well, thank you very much. A: How much is it for my hair? B: You owe me $55. A: Thanks for everything. B: You are very welcome. Come back again.12. Complaining to the Hairdresser
1.audio A: You're spending a very long time on my hair. B: I'm almost done. A: I needed you to be finished an hour ago. B: I'm all done now. A: Are you sure you're finished? B: I don't understand. A: You did a horrible job on my hair. B: What's wrong with it? A: I don't like anything about it. B: I apologize. A: That's fine, but I'm not paying for it. B: Excuse me? Let's try to work this out, okay? 2.audio A: It's taking you forever to do my hair. B: Give me a minute. A: You should've been done already. B: There you go. A: I don't think that you're done. B: What's wrong? A: My hair looks hideous. B: What's so bad about it? A: It doesn't look good at all. B: Sorry about that. A: I really hope that you didn't expect me to pay you for this. B: Well, let me talk to my manager, okay? 3.audio A: What's taking you so long? B: Don't worry. I'm almost finished. A: I need you to hurry up. B: All right. I'm finished. A: I think there's more you need to do. B: What do you mean by that? A: My hair looks awful. B: What don't you like about it? A: I just don't like my hair. B: I'm sorry that you don't like it. A: I won't be paying you for this. B: I'm sure we can work something out.13. Talking to People at the Laundromat
1.audio A: Have you been coming to this Laundromat long? B: I have been washing clothes here since a few years ago. A: Why is that? B: It doesn't cost me as much to wash here. A: I've just started doing my clothes here. B: Why are you washing your clothes here now? A: My washing machine broke down. B: You should just pay someone to fix it. A: It's too expensive to get it fixed. B: So you're just going to wash here? A: Yes, I think that's what I'm going to have to do. B: It costs less to wash here. 2.audio A: How long have you been washing clothes here? B: I started washing here about three years ago. A: How come? B: I can wash my clothes for less money here. A: This is my first time washing clothes here. B: What reason are you washing here today? A: I can't wash at home because my machine is broken. B: Go and get it repaired. A: That'll cost too much. B: Are you going to continue washing your clothes here for a while? A: I have no choice. B: Washing clothes at a Laundromat costs a lot less money. 3.audio A: Do you wash clothes here often? B: I have been coming here for the past few years. A: Why do you wash here? B: It's actually a lot cheaper for me to wash my clothes here. A: I've only washed my clothes here a couple times. B: Why don't you wash clothes at home? A: I would, if my washing machine wasn't broken. B: Why don't you just get it fixed? A: I can't afford it. B: So you plan on washing your clothes here from now on? A: That's my only option right now. B: Don't worry. Besides, it's a lot cheaper to wash clothes this way.14. Operating the Washer and Dryer
1.audio A: I'm not sure about how to operate the washer and dryer. B: What's the problem? A: I need help turning them on. B: You need change. A: The machines take change? B: Yes. It costs fifty cents for the washer and a dollar for the dryer. A: How do I do it? B: You put the coins into the slot, push it in, and it will turn on. A: That's it? B: There's nothing else to it. A: Thank you very much. B: You're welcome. Let me know if you need anything else. 2.audio A: I need help using the washer and dryer. B: Tell me what the problem is. A: I can't figure out how to turn them on. B: Do you have some quarters? A: I didn't know I needed change. B: The washer costs 50 cents and the dryer costs a dollar. A: Where do I put the change? B: The quarters go into the slot. You have to push the slot in, and the machine will turn on. A: Is that everything that I have to do? B: That's all there is. A: I appreciate you helping me with this. B: If you need anything else, just let me know. 3.audio A: Could you tell me how to use the washer and dryer? B: What do you need help with? A: Do you know how to turn them on? B: Do you have any change? A: I need change for the machines? B: You need to put 50 cents into the washer machine and a dollar into the dryer. A: So what do I need to do? B: The machines will turn on once you put the quarters into the slot. A: That's really all I have to do? B: That's everything. A: Thanks for all your help. B: I'm here if you need any more help.15. Returning a Call to Child's Teacher at School
1.audio A: I'm returning your phone call. B: I'm glad that you could get back to me so fast. A: No problem, but what were you calling about? B: I needed to talk to you about your son. A: Is he messing up in school? B: He was acting up in class one day last week. A: What was he doing? B: He wouldn't stop talking throughout the class. A: I don't know what's gotten into him. B: If you could, would you please talk to him? A: I will get right on that, and I am very sorry. B: I really appreciate your help. 2.audio A: Did you call me? B: Thank you for returning my call. A: What was your call about? B: I wanted to have a talk with you about your son. A: What did he do? B: He was messing around last week in class. A: Exactly what did he do? B: Even though I asked him not to, he kept speaking out in class. A: I don't know what his problem is. B: I need you to talk to him, if you don't mind. A: That won't happen again, I'm sorry. B: Thank you. Hopefully I won't have to call about him again. 3.audio A: I believe that you called me? B: Oh, hi. Thanks for getting back to me quickly. A: Why did you call me? B: I was calling about your son. A: Did he do something wrong? B: Your son was acting up in class. A: What do you mean? B: He was talking and causing a disturbance during class. A: That's really not like him. B: If you could just talk to him, I would greatly appreciate it. A: I apologize, and I'll make sure he doesn't do that again. B: Don't worry about it, but thank you very much.16. Meeting Child's Teacher at School
1.audio A: It's nice to meet you. B: I'm glad we're meeting today. Thank you. A: You're welcome. B: I would like to talk to you about your daughter. A: Is there a problem? B: No, your daughter is great. A: That's great news. B: Your daughter is a wonderful student. A: She isn't messing up in class? B: Of course not. Your daughter is smart and very well behaved. A: I'm so glad to hear that she's doing well. B: It is my pleasure to have her in my class. 2.audio A: We finally get a chance to meet. B: Thank you for meeting me here. A: It's no problem. B: I need to speak with you about your daughter. A: Is there something wrong? B: I enjoy having your daughter in my class. A: I'm glad to hear it. B: She is a great addition to my class. A: You don't have anything bad to say about her? B: She is always behaving herself, and she's so smart. A: I am so happy that she's doing okay. B: I'm more than happy having her in my class. 3.audio A: How are you? B: It's nice to meet you. Thanks for coming. A: It's my pleasure. B: I wanted to meet with you to discuss your daughter. A: Is she acting up in class? B: Not at all. She's a joy to have in my class. A: Is she really? B: She is absolutely wonderful. A: So she isn't causing you any problems? B: No. She is actually very intelligent and well behaved. A: I'm glad to know that you like her. B: You have nothing to worry about with her.17. Asking Someone to Run Errands
1.audio A: Can you go to the store for me? B: Sure, I can go to the store for you. What do you need? A: Just a couple things, here's a list. B: Is there anything else that you want me to pick up? A: No, I think that's all that I need. B: Is there any other place you would like me to go to for you? A: If you can, could you pick up my prescription for me? B: Sure, no problem. Is your prescription ready? A: I think so. It should be. B: Okay, I'll pick it up for you. A: Thank you so much. B: You're welcome. 2.audio A: Can you pick up some things from the store for me? B: Of course, what do you need? A: I need a few things, I'll give you the list. B: Is there something else you need that you can think of? A: Everything I need is on the list. B: Do you want me to make any other stops while I'm out? A: Since you asked, would you pick up my medicine from the pharmacy? B: Is it ready to be picked up? A: I believe so. B: No problem. I'll do that for you. A: I really appreciate you doing this for me. B: It's no problem at all. 3.audio A: I would appreciate it if you could go to the store for me. B: No problem. What do you want me to get? A: Here's a list with a few things that I need you to get. B: Did you forget to put anything on the list? A: I don't think I forgot anything. B: Would you like me to go anywhere else for you? A: If you don't mind, I would appreciate it if you would pick up my prescription. B: Has your prescription been filled yet? A: Someone at the pharmacy called and told me it was ready. B: Sure, I'll go get it for you. A: Thank you. B: Anything for you.18. Riding the Bus
1.audio A: How much is the fare for this bus? B: It costs $1.25 to ride the bus. A: So, how long have you been driving buses? B: I've been driving this bus for only a few months. A: Do you enjoy being a bus driver? B: Not really. A: I would never dream of driving a bus. B: I didn't either, but a paycheck's a paycheck. A: It was nice talking to you. B: Nice talking to you too. A: Have a good day. B: That'll be hard to do while driving the bus. 2.audio A: How much for the bus ride? B: It's $1.25 for this bus. A: How long have you been a bus driver? B: I started driving the bus a few months ago. A: Is it fun driving the bus? B: Not at all. A: I don't think I ever wanted to be a bus driver. B: I never did either, but it pays the bills. A: I enjoyed talking to you. B: I liked talking to you too. 3.audio A: What does it cost to ride this bus? B: The fare is $1.25. A: Have you been driving buses a long time? B: I haven't been driving for long?only for a few months. A: Do you like to drive the bus? B: Not in the least bit. A: I would have never dreamed of ever becoming a bus driver. B: I never dreamed of doing this either. The only thing I like about it is the money. A: It was really fun chatting with you. B: It was really nice talking to you too. A: Have a good one. B: I'll have a good day once this day is over.19. Talking with Angry Parent
1.audio A: Do you realize what time it is? B: I'm sorry, I lost track of time. A: Do you honestly believe that that is a good excuse? B: Not at all--that is what really happened. A: How many times do I have to ask you to call if you're going to be late? B: Yes, I know. I must've forgot. A: That's beside the point, you still should have called. B: You're right. I'm sorry. A: Next time you come in late without calling, you're gone. B: You're really going to kick me out? A: Yes, maybe then you'll figure out how to follow the rules. B: Actually, if you kick me out, your rules won't matter anymore. 2.audio A: Do you have any idea what time it is? B: My bad. I didn't realize that it was so late. A: Do you really think that that excuses your tardiness? B: Of course not. I really did lose track of time. A: Didn't I tell you to call when you're running late? B: Yeah, you did. I just forgot to call. A: It doesn't matter, you should have called and let me know. B: That's true. My bad for not calling. A: If you do this again, don't even bother coming home. B: You're going to kick me out over this? A: Exactly, maybe that'll teach you to respect my rules. B: Well, if I'm not living here anymore, then I won't have to listen to your rules. 3.audio A: Do you know how late it is? B: My fault. I didn't realize what time it was. A: I hope you don't think that excuse lets you off the hook. B: Not really. I'm telling the truth. A: Haven't I asked you to call if you're going to be home late? B: This is true, but it must've slipped my mind. A: Regardless, all you had to do was give a call. B: I know. I should've called. A: Come home late one more time, and you'll find your stuff outside. B: You want to throw me out over this? A: That's right, maybe then you'll respect my rules. B: That's fine, because if I leave, then your rules won't matter.20. Cleaning Up the Room
1.audio A: Did you clean your room today? B: No, not yet. A: When were you planning on doing that? B: I'm going to clean it up later. A: Didn't I ask you to clean it up earlier? B: I'm going to clean it. A: I want you to vacuum in your room, and don't forget to dust everything. B: I know. I'll do it. A: Make sure you clean it up before you do anything else. B: I'm not going anywhere until later, so I'll clean it then. 2.audio A: Have you begun cleaning up that room of yours? B: I haven't started yet, but I will. A: What time are you going to clean it up? B: I'm planning on cleaning it up a little later. A: I told you to clean it up earlier. B: I know. I am still going to clean it up. A: Make sure you vacuum and dust your room. B: I won't forget. A: I don't want you to leave until you clean up. B: My plans aren't until later, so I'll clean it before I go. 3.audio A: Have you started cleaning up your room yet? B: I haven't gotten started on my room yet. A: When exactly do you plan on cleaning it? B: I have every intention of cleaning my room later. A: I thought I asked you to clean your room earlier. B: I already told you that I'm going to do it. A: Remember to vacuum the floor and dust everything. B: I'll remember to do that. A: Make sure that you don't go anywhere until you clean your room. B: I'll clean my room before I leave.21. Buying a Burrito
1.audio A: Man, I'm so hungry! Can you buy me a burrito? B: I don't have any money to buy you a burrito. A: Please? I haven't eaten anything all day. B: Look, I only have money to buy myself a burrito. A: I'm so hungry, I could eat a whole cow! B: If you're so hungry, why don't you ask someone else for money? A: I get paid on Friday, I'll pay you back then. B: Well, I guess on Friday, then you can eat. A: That's pretty messed up. B: Why don't you just go home and eat? A: I don't want to go all the way home just to eat. B: Well, I guess you're out of luck. 2.audio A: I really want a burrito! Can you get me one? B: I haven't got any money to purchase a burrito for you and me. A: Would you please buy me one since I haven't eaten today? B: I only have a few dollars. A: I could eat a horse right now, I'm so hungry. B: I want to eat too. Ask someone else to feed you. A: Since I get my check this Friday, I can give you your money back then. B: So then, this Friday you'll be able to eat. A: You're mean to say that. B: You should just go home and make yourself a sandwich or something. A: My house is too far, and I'm really hungry. B: It sounds as if you're going to continue starving. 3.audio A: I'm starving! It would be truly appreciated if you bought me a burrito. B: I'm a little short. I don't have enough for you. A: I'm starving, as I didn't eat yet today. B: I really don't have enough money. A: My stomach feels so empty. B: Well, why don't you ask Bob for some money? I'm hungry too. A: I'll be getting money on Friday, and I'll get it back to you then. B: Okay, so on Friday, you can buy yourself something to eat. A: That's not nice. B: You can always go home and make something to eat. A: I can't go home yet, because I have things to do here. B: Sorry. That's not my fault.22. Caring for Puppies
1.audio A: Did you feed the puppies today? B: Yes, I have. A: That's good! Just make sure to bathe them later. B: No problem. I can do that for you. A: Thank you! You know they have to go to the vet on Saturday? B: I know. What time do they go? A: Their appointment is at eleven o'clock in the morning. B: Okay, I won't forget. 2.audio A: Have you given the puppies food yet? B: Of course. I fed them today. A: Good job! Please give them a bath later on today. B: Sure, I'll give them a bath. A: Thanks. But don't forget that they have a vet appointment this Saturday. B: I remember. What time do they need to be there? A: They need to be there at eleven in the morning. B: All right. I'll make sure and remember. 3.audio A: Have you given the puppies anything to eat today? B: I fed them earlier today. A: Great! Could you please bathe them later? B: Okay, I'll do that later. A: Thank you! Remember that they go to the vet this Saturday. B: I know. What time is their appointment? A: We need to have them there at 11:00 AM. B: I got it. I will remember.23. Cooking Dinner
1.audio A: What's for dinner tonight? B: It's whatever you're planning on cooking. A: You're not going to cook? B: No, I always cook. A: Yes, and I love your cooking. B: Don't give me that. If you're hungry, then cook dinner. A: You're being serious? B: Look, I'm really tired tonight. I don't feel like cooking dinner. A: I'll make dinner tonight. B: Thank you. I'm going to bed. A: Do you want me to wake you up when dinner is ready? B: Yes, please. 2.audio A: What are we going to eat for dinner? B: Whatever meal that you plan on making. A: I thought you were making dinner tonight. B: I do all the cooking. A: Your food tastes so much better than mine. B: Save it. If you want something to eat, then make it yourself. A: You really want me to cook tonight? B: I had a long day today. I really am not in the mood to make anything. A: No problem. B: Thanks. I'm going to go take a nap. A: Would you like me to come get you when the food is done? B: Thank you. 3.audio A: So, what's on the menu for dinner tonight? B: You tell me. A: You're not going to make anything to eat? B: You never cook. I always do. A: I think you're a better cook than I am. B: Oh please, you need to cook tonight. A: So you're telling me that you want me to make dinner? B: It was a hard day. Can you just do this for me tonight? A: I'll cook dinner, don't worry. B: I'm going to go rest for a little bit. A: I'll come wake you when it's ready, okay? B: Thanks.24. Washing Clothes
1.audio A: Have you washed any clothes yet? B: No, I've only washed my whites. A: When you wash your dark clothes, can you put some of mine in? B: Sure. Is there any extra care that I should take with your clothes? A: Just make sure you keep it on the gentle cycle. B: How many clothes of yours do you want me to wash? A: There isn't a lot, why, do you have a large load to wash? B: It's really only a small load. A: Do you mind washing my clothes? B: Not at all. It's no problem. A: Thank you so much. B: It's no trouble at all. 2.audio A: Have you finished washing clothes? B: I've finished my white clothes. I need to wash the rest. A: When you do your darks, can you wash some of mine too? B: I can do that. Is there a special way you want them washed? A: They need to be washed on the gentle cycle. B: Do you have a lot of clothes that need to be washed? A: There aren't many clothes, is your load big? B: My load isn't that big. A: If it's a problem, you don't have to do it for me. B: I can do this for you. Don't worry. A: I greatly appreciate this. B: Don't mention it. 3.audio A: Did you already wash your clothes today? B: I've only washed my white clothes. A: Could you wash some of my dark clothes with yours? B: Is there any special care I should take with your clothes? A: The only thing is that they have to be washed on the gentle cycle. B: Are there a lot of clothes? A: There aren't a lot of clothes, do you have a lot to wash? B: It's a medium load. A: You don't mind, do you? B: No big deal. I'll do it for you. A: Thanks a lot. B: You're welcome.25. Time for Bed
1.audio A: It's time for bed. B: I'm not ready to go to sleep. I'm not tired. A: It's quite late, and you have an early day tomorrow. B: I'm not going to be able to fall asleep. A: Why don't you try counting sheep? B: I've tried that before. It really doesn't work. A: That's beside the point, you still need to go to bed. B: Why can't I just stay up until I fall asleep? A: If I let you do that, then you're just going to be up all night. B: I promise I'll go to sleep soon. A: No, you're going to sleep now, so good night. B: See you in the morning. 2.audio A: Shouldn't you already be in bed? B: I can't sleep. I'm really not all that tired. A: You need to get some rest, as you have to get up early in the morning. B: It's impossible for me to get to sleep right now. A: Just close your eyes, and try not to think. B: That really does not work for me. A: It doesn't matter, you need to get some sleep. B: How about I tire myself out, and then fall asleep when I'm tired? A: Then you're not going to go to sleep. B: Don't worry, I'll make sure and get to sleep in a little while. A: I want you in bed, right now, so sweet dreams. B: Fine. Sleep well yourself. 3.audio A: Isn't it past your bedtime already? B: I am not sleepy. A: It's getting late, and you have to wake up early tomorrow. B: There is no way that I can fall asleep right now. A: Try listening to some soft music. B: It won't work. I'm nowhere close to being tired. A: I really don't care, just go to sleep. B: What if I stay up and do something, until I get tired? A: You'll be up all night if I let you do that. B: I'm going to get to sleep eventually. A: You need to go to sleep now, so go to sleep. B: Good night.26. Waking Up for School
1.audio A: Wake up, it's time for school. B: I'm so tired. Let me sleep for five more minutes. A: You have to get up and get ready for school. B: I know, but just five more minutes. A: I can't let you go back to sleep, because you won't wake back up. B: I promise I'll wake up, in five minutes. A: You still need to eat breakfast, take a shower, and get dressed. B: I realize that, and I can do all that when I wake up in five minutes. A: I don't want you to be late for school today. B: I'm not going to be late today. A: Fine, five more minutes. B: Thank you. 2.audio A: Get up, it's time for you to get ready. B: Let me just get five more minutes of sleep. A: I would, but you need to start getting ready for school. B: I understand, but all I want is five more minutes of sleep. A: If I let you go back to sleep, I know that you won't get up in five minutes. B: Trust me. I'm going to wake up. A: You have a lot to get done this morning. B: I already know, and I'll take care of all that when I wake up. A: I want you to be on time for school today. B: I'll make it to school on time. Don't worry. A: I'll let you sleep for a little while longer. B: I really appreciate that. 3.audio A: It's time for you to wake up. B: Give me five more minutes. I'm really tired this morning. A: I'm sorry, but it's time for you to get ready for school. B: I get that, but let me just sleep for a little bit longer. A: You're not going to get up in five minutes if I let you fall back asleep. B: Believe me. I will get up and get ready in five minutes. A: There's a lot that you need to do this morning. B: I understand, and it will get done after I wake up in five minutes. A: I would like for you to not be late for school. B: I'm going to be on time today. A: Go back to sleep then, but only five more minutes. B: Thanks a lot.1. Dating Discussion
1.audio A: Do you enjoy going on dates? B: Yes. I find dates to be a lot of fun. A: What's so fun about them? B: They give me the opportunity to get to know someone better. A: So you always have fun on dates? B: Not always. I don't always like the person I'm on the date with. A: Why not? B: My date may not be my type. A: So then why would you ask them out in the first place? B: I didn't realize until after our date that they weren't my type. A: Sounds like a huge waste of time to me. B: Now that I think about it, it really is sometimes. 2.audio A: Do you like dating? B: It's really a lot of fun. A: What makes it so much fun? B: It makes it easier to get to know somebody. A: Are dates always fun to you? B: Sometimes I may not like the person I'm having a date with. A: Why is that? B: The other person isn't always my type. A: Why would you bother going out with them then? B: I didn't know that they weren't my type until after I got to know them better. A: It seems to me that you're wasting your time. B: You are absolutely correct, sometimes it is a waste. 3.audio A: Are dates fun for you? B: I enjoy dating a lot. A: Why are they so fun for you? B: Dates allow me to meet new people. A: Your dates are always fun? B: Well, I don't always like who I'm dating; so not always. A: How come? B: The person I am dating may not be my type. A: How come you asked them out if they weren't your type? B: You don't always know what type of person you go on a date with until you know them well enough. A: Dating sounds pointless. B: Now that you mention it, sometimes you're right.2. Asking for a Date (1)
1.audio A: Can I ask you a question? B: Sure, what's up? A: Well, I was just wondering if you'd like to go out this Friday. B: Really? A: Yeah, I was thinking we could get a bite to eat and catch a movie. B: That sounds like fun. A: Of course, we can do something else if you'd like. B: No, no, dinner and a movie sounds great. A: Well, what time would you like me to pick you up? B: How about 7:30? A: That sounds good, so I'll see you then. B: Okay, cool. 2.audio A: May I ask you a quick question? B: Of course. A: How would you like to go on a date with me this Friday? B: Seriously? A: Well, I figured that we could go see a movie and get some dinner. B: Cool, that sounds like it will be fun. A: We can always do something else if you'd rather. B: Not at all. I would love to go to dinner and a movie. A: That's great, so what time do you want me to come get you? B: Is 7:30 okay? A: Friday at 7:30 sounds perfect. B: Great. See you then. 3.audio A: Can I ask you something? B: Sure you can. What's going on? A: Would you go out with me on Friday? B: Are you for real? A: I thought that we could go to dinner and a movie. B: That actually sounds like it would be a lot of fun. A: Unless there's something else you would prefer to do. B: Actually, I would really like to go to dinner and a movie. A: What time do you want me to come by and pick you up? B: Is 7:30 cool with you? A: That's perfect, so I'll see you then. B: Perfect. I will see you on Friday.3. Asking for a Date (2)
1.audio A: Hi, Todd, how is it going? B: Things are going well. How are you, Mary? A: I've also been doing well. B: You know I've been thinking about maybe taking in a movie this weekend. Do you like to go to the movies? A: Yes, I really enjoy movies. B: Well, I've been hoping that we could spend some time together away from here. I was wondering if you would like to go out Friday evening for dinner and a movie. A: Sure, that sounds good. B: Is there any movie in particular that you might be interested in? A: I was thinking about that movie, "Australia." B: Yeah, that looks like one that we both might enjoy. If I picked you up at 7:00, would that work out OK for you? A: Seven o'clock would be great! B: Fine, then I'll see you at 7:00. I am looking forward to a great evening! 2.audio A: Hey Todd, how are you? B: I've been doing well. How are things with you, Mary? A: Things are good with me also. B: Mary, I was looking in the paper at the new movies coming out. Do you enjoy movies? A: Yes, I go all the time. B: I was hoping that you and I could maybe spend a Friday evening together. I was wondering if you would like to go with me this Friday to see a movie and get a bite to eat afterwards. A: I would love to go out with you on Friday. B: Do you have a certain movie that you would like to see? A: I've heard a lot of things about the movie "Australia." B: You know, I was thinking that that would be a good movie to go see together. Would 7:00 be a good time to pick you up? A: Seven o'clock would be perfect! B: OK, I'll pick you up at 7:00 then. 3.audio A: Todd, how have you been? B: Everything is good. How have you been, Mary? A: Perfect, couldn't be better. B: Mary, I was thinking that I might go to the movies this weekend. Do you go to the movies very often? A: Yes, I like going to the movies. B: Would you be interested in letting me take you to the movies on Friday? Maybe we could get a bite to eat afterwards. A: I think I would enjoy seeing a movie with you on Friday. B: I am not sure what movies are out right now. Have you heard of any that you might be interested in? A: I think that that new movie, "Australia," looks like it might be good. B: That movie sounded interesting to me too. If I picked you up at 7:00, would that be too early? A: I think that seven o'clock will work out well. B: Perfect! Well, I'll see you at 7:00 on Friday, then!4. Meeting a Blind Date
1.audio A: Hi, are you Mia? B: I am Mia. You must be Rubin. A: Yes, that's me! B: It's so good to finally meet you. Karen has told me so much about you! A: I hope that she had good things to say about me! B: She had only good things to say. Did you have trouble finding me? A: Well, how many beautiful women in a red dress by the fountain are there? B: Thank you for the compliment! A: So would you like to go get a bite to eat, Mia? B: That sounds perfect. Lead the way! 2.audio A: Hi, is your name Mia? B: Yes, my name is Mia. Are you Rubin? A: Yes, I am Rubin! B: Finally! The infamous Rubin! I've heard so much about you that I feel like I already know you. A: Oh no, I hope they had positive things to say. B: Don't worry. All of the stories were good. How were you able to find me so quickly? A: It was pretty easy to find the beautiful woman in a red dress next to the fountain. B: Well, I guess that kind of narrowed it down! A: Mia, could I interest you in some lunch down the street at my favorite cafe? B: Yes, it's a great day for a little walk and some lunch. 3.audio A: Hi, I am looking for a woman named Mia. B: I think I am who you are looking for. You have got to be Rubin, then. A: That would be me! B: Rubin! Karen and Mike have spoken about you so often that I feel like I've met you before. A: I hope that what they had to say was mostly good! B: They only said wonderful things about you. You did a good job of finding me. A: Finding the beautiful woman in a red dress next to the fountain wasn't all that hard. B: Yes, I guess it was a choice of me or the pigeons! A: I was hoping that we could take a walk down the street to my favorite cafe. B: Lunch sounds great! Let's head on out!5. Calling After the Date
1.audio A: Hi Linda, this is Todd. B: Todd, good to hear from you! A: I just wanted to tell you what a great time I had with you at the movies last week. B: Me too, Todd! Thanks for suggesting that great movie. A: I also enjoyed it and was wondering if you would like to go for a hike in the mountains with me on Saturday. B: I would love to join you on a hike. Could I maybe bring a picnic lunch for us to eat on the trail? A: Sure Linda, that's a great suggestion. B: Fine then, what time are we going to leave? A: I was thinking maybe 9:00 or so, so that we could get started before the heat gets too bad. B: Nine would be perfect. I'll see you then! 2.audio A: Linda, this is Todd calling. B: Todd, I am so happy you called! A: Linda, I wanted to tell you how much I enjoyed our time together last Friday night. B: Boy, Todd, that was one great movie you picked out! Thanks for asking me to go with you! A: I had a great time too and was thinking that maybe you might want to join me for a hike to the waterfalls on Saturday. B: A hike would be great! Let me pack us a nice picnic lunch, OK? A: Linda, that would be a perfect addition. B: I'll take care of the lunch then, and you can take care of the other plans. What time would you like to pick me up? A: I was hoping to leave by 9:00 so that it won't be too hot for the hike. B: Nine is a great time to get started. I'll see you on Saturday! 3.audio A: Oh hi, Linda, this is Todd. B: Yes, Todd, how nice to hear your voice! A: Linda, I just wanted to say that I had a wonderful evening with you last Friday. B: I really enjoyed our evening together, Todd. A: I had fun also and was wondering if you would like to go hiking with me in the mountains on Saturday. B: Hiking would be perfect! May I bring along a picnic lunch for us to share? A: A picnic lunch would be a nice thing to have along. B: I'll work on the lunch, and you can work out the details of where we will go. What time will you be at my house? A: Nine would be good, don't you think? B: Nine is good. See you on Saturday!6. An Argument
1.audio A: John, I was talking to the travel agent about where we might be taking our vacation this year. B: I am going fishing in Alaska with my friend, Mark. A: What are you talking about? B: What's wrong with heading out with Mark for vacation? A: You and I have been together for a whole year, and our vacation time should be about the two of us! B: Really? Who made that rule up? A: With that attitude, I don't really think we have much more to discuss here. B: That works for me! 2.audio A: John, I was looking through some magazines for ideas about where we might go on vacation this year. B: I've already told my buddy, Mark, that I am going hunting with him in Alaska. A: You can't be serious! B: Hey, I've always gone hunting or fishing on vacation. I am sorry that bothers you. A: After a year together, I thought it pretty safe to assume that we would automatically spend our vacation together. B: Says who? I don't think that is necessarily the case. A: You know, now that I think about it, I really don't have much more to say to you at all! B: Whatever you say! 3.audio A: Brian and Christina were mentioning that maybe it would be fun to go on vacation together this year, John. B: I thought that I already told you that I am going with Mark to Alaska. A: Are you kidding me? B: You know what? You and I had no plans, so I made plans with Mark. What's the problem? A: We have been together for a year and usually, people who've been together a year, take their vacation together. B: I don't think that I ever heard of that rule before. Any more rules that you would like to tell me about? A: Go on your vacation with Mark and when you come back, why don't you just move in with him as well! B: I am really looking forward to getting away from you. Far away from you!7. Rejecting an Invitation
1.audio A: Joe, how are you doing? B: I am great! How about you, Mary? How are you? A: I am doing great! Thank you for asking, Joe. B: I was wondering if you want to go see a movie with me tonight? A: I need to stay home tonight and finish my term paper. B: OK. What about going to the movies on Friday night? A: What were you planning on seeing? B: I was thinking about seeing that one about the rapist serial killer. A: How about ?The Secret Life of Bees?? B: That's a chick flick! 2.audio A: Hi Joe, how are you doing today? B: Things are going good today. How have you been doing, Mary? A: Things are going well for me, Joe. B: Want to go see a movie tonight? A: My parents are taking me to dinner tonight. B: Could you go with me to the movies on Friday night, instead? A: What movie did you want to see? B: There is a new horror flick about a rapist serial killer. A: I was thinking that I would like to see ?The Secret Life of Bees.? B: Oh great! Sounds like something I need to bring Kleenex to! 3.audio A: Hey Joe, how have you been? B: I am doing well. How about you, Mary? A: I am doing OK, Joe. B: There is a new movie at the mall that I want to see. Want to go with me? A: I can't because I already promised my roommate that I would go shopping with her. B: I could go to the movies on Friday night instead. Would that be better? A: Did you have a certain movie in mind? B: I thought the movie about a serial killer who rapes and mutilates his victims would be a good choice. A: I kind of wanted to see ?The Secret Life of Bees.? B: Maybe we can think of something somewhere between a chick flick and a horror movie!8. Stopping the Relationship
1.audio A: Hi Kara, it's Mike here. B: Hi Mike, how are you doing? A: I'm doing well, and you? B: Everything is going great. A: Kara, would you be interested in going to dinner again this Friday? B: Mike, I had a good time too, but I am getting ready to move back to the east coast, so I think I shouldn't get too involved right now. A: Well, we could just go out as friends. B: Right now, I think I need to really focus on matters at home, but thanks for a nice evening. 2.audio A: Hi Kara, this is Mike B: Hello Mike. How are things going for you? A: Great, how are you? B: Fine. Everything is just fine. A: Kara, I had a great time the other night and was wondering if you would like to go out again this weekend. B: Mike, I enjoyed your company, but I am getting ready to graduate soon. I really need to focus on my studies. A: Maybe I could help you with what you need to get done. B: It would be better for me to just deal with getting my work done, but thank you for a lovely dinner. 3.audio A: Hello, this is Mike, Kara. B: Mike! Good to hear from you. How are you? A: Everything is fine, and how are you? B: Things are going well with me. A: Kara, I had fun the other night at the movies and was wondering if you would like to go out again this Friday. B: Mike, I don't think that it's a good idea to go out again. I really need to focus on getting packed and ready to move back home. A: Maybe we could just meet for coffee or something. B: I can't really deal with any distractions right now, but I appreciate the nice evening we spent together.1. Breakfast
1.audio A: What do you feel like eating this morning? B: I usually just have a bowl of cereal. A: The most important meal of the day is breakfast. B: Yeah, but I don't usually have time to eat a big breakfast. A: You can always make an easy breakfast. B: What do you make? A: All I make is oatmeal, toast, and some orange juice. B: That sounds pretty good. A: I like it, and it's a fast meal. B: That is a very quick meal to make. A: I can make it for you if you like. B: Oatmeal and toast sounds good to me. 2.audio A: What are you going to have for breakfast? B: I just have some cereal each morning. A: You're supposed to always have a hearty breakfast. B: I don't always have time to make breakfast. A: It's easy to make a quick breakfast. B: What do you have for breakfast? A: When I need to make a quick breakfast, I just make some oatmeal, toast, and OJ. B: That's a good idea. A: It's not time consuming at all. B: It doesn't take much time to make? A: Would you like me to make something? B: Why don't you make me some oatmeal and toast? 3.audio A: What do you want to eat for breakfast? B: All I usually have is some cereal for breakfast. A: You know that breakfast is the most important meal of the day? B: I sometimes run late in the morning, and can't make breakfast. A: That's not a good excuse. B: Tell me what you eat in the morning. A: I just eat some oatmeal, toast, and orange juice. B: That sounds like a great breakfast. A: It's good, and it's easy to make. B: That sounds like a very quick meal. A: So, are you still going to have cereal? B: I think I'm going to make myself some oatmeal and toast.2. Lunch
1.audio A: What's for lunch? B: I don't know. What do you want to eat? A: I was thinking of pizza. B: That's what I ate yesterday. A: What do you want to eat? B: I wouldn't mind a burger. A: I ate a burger just the other day. B: We're going to have to compromise. A: You could always get a burger, and I can get a pizza. B: Sounds good to me. A: Where can we go to get both? B: We can get both at the cafeteria. 2.audio A: What are we eating for lunch? B: I have no idea. What about you? A: I kind of want pizza. B: I ate pizza the other day. A: So, what do you feel like eating then? B: How about some burgers? A: I already had a burger yesterday. B: What are we going to do? A: We can just each get what we want to get. B: That sounds like a plan. A: Do you know a place that sells pizza and burgers? B: I think they sell both at the cafeteria. 3.audio A: Do you know what you want to eat for lunch? B: What do you feel like having? A: I want to get some pizza. B: I had pizza for lunch yesterday. A: Tell me what you want to eat. B: Do you want to get a burger? A: See, I had a burger for lunch yesterday. B: Think of something. A: How about I get pizza and you get a burger? B: Let's do that then. A: Where do they sell both at? B: They sell pizza and burgers at the cafeteria.3. Dinner
1.audio A: What's for dinner tonight? B: What are you planning on cooking? A: I'm not making anything. B: If you plan on eating, you are. A: What am I supposed to cook? B: What do you feel like having? A: I want some chicken and potatoes. B: That sounds really good. A: When are you going to make it? B: I have no plans on cooking tonight. A: Fine, I'll make it. B: I knew that already. 2.audio A: What are we going to eat for dinner? B: Are you going to cook anything? A: I didn't plan on cooking tonight. B: If you're hungry, then cook something. A: I don't know what to make. B: Tell me what you want to eat. A: I've been craving chicken and potatoes. B: I'd like that. A: Are you going to cook it tonight? B: I'm really not going to cook tonight. A: I guess I'll cook. B: Why don't you start cooking then? 3.audio A: Are we going to have dinner tonight? B: What are you planning on making? A: I'm not cooking dinner. B: The only way you're eating tonight is if you cook. A: I'm not sure what to cook for dinner. B: I don't know. What do you want to eat? A: I have a taste for some chicken and potatoes. B: That sounds delicious. A: So are you planning on cooking it? B: I already told you that I'm not cooking tonight. A: I'll cook dinner. B: I already know. Start cooking.4. Drinks
1.audio A: I'm so thirsty. B: Let's go get something to drink. A: That's a good idea. B: Do you know what you want to drink? A: I kind of want a soda. B: You shouldn't drink soda when you're really thirsty. A: What do you mean? B: When you're thirsty, you're not supposed to drink soda. A: What are you supposed to drink? B: Water is what's best for you. A: I guess I will get water. B: It's better for you. 2.audio A: I am really thirsty. B: How about we go and get something to drink? A: Let's do that. B: Do you know what you want to get? A: A soda sounds good. B: Soda isn't the best thing to drink when you're thirsty. A: Why is that? B: Soda isn't good for you. A: What should I drink then? B: You should really drink water. A: That sounds good. B: It's a lot better than soda. 3.audio A: My throat is really dry. B: Do you want to go get something to drink? A: Yes, I'm parched. B: What did you want to drink? A: I was thinking about getting a soda. B: Do you know that soda doesn't quench your thirst? A: Why not? B: Soda is really bad for you. A: I don't know what else to drink. B: You're supposed to drink water when you're dehydrated. A: I would like some water. B: That's what will keep you from being thirsty.5. Fruit
1.audio A: What are you going to eat with your sandwich? B: I think I'm going to eat a piece of fruit. A: What kind do you like? B: I really like apples and grapes. A: What kind of apples do you like to eat? B: I love green apples. A: I don't like green apples. B: Really? Why not? A: Green apples are too sour for me. B: So, you like red apples better? A: Yes, I love red apples. B: I think green apples are a lot better. 2.audio A: What are you going to have along with your sandwich? B: I may have a piece of fruit. A: What's your favorite kind of fruit? B: I really only eat apples and grapes. A: What is your favorite kind of apples? B: Green apples are the best! A: Green apples don't taste good to me. B: Why is that? A: They are way too sour for my taste. B: You only like red apples? A: Red apples are great. B: They're not as good as green apples. 3.audio A: Are you going to eat anything with your sandwich? B: I may get some fruit. A: Really, what kind of fruit do you like? B: I tend to only eat grapes and apples. A: What kind of apples do you prefer? B: I've always liked green apples. A: I don't really like green apples that much. B: Why do you say that? A: I think they are too sour. B: You'd rather eat a red apple? A: Don't you like red apples? B: They're okay, I guess.6. Salads
1.audio A: I really feel like eating a salad. B: What kind are you going to make? A: I'm really not sure. B: I really like Caesar salads. A: Caesar salads are pretty good. B: What kind of salad do you want to make? A: I want a salad with some chicken. B: I love chicken salads. A: I like my salads to have croutons, almonds, and shredded cheese. B: That sounds really tasty. A: You should make a salad like that. B: I think that I will. 2.audio A: I feel like I'm craving a salad. B: What kind do you want? A: I have no idea. B: Caesar salads are good. A: I like those too. B: What kind do you plan on making? A: I'd really like a salad with chicken. B: Chicken salads are really good. A: I always make my salads with shredded cheese, croutons, and almonds. B: That sounds like a great salad. A: Why don't you put it in your salad? B: That sounds like a plan to me. 3.audio A: I really want to make a salad. B: Do you know what kind of salad that you want? A: I'm not sure what kind that I want. B: I usually make a Caesar salad. A: Those taste really good. B: Which kind of salad are you going to make? A: I want a chicken salad. B: I enjoy chicken salads. A: I like salads with croutons, almonds, and shredded cheese. B: I really like how that sounds. A: Why don't you make a salad like that? B: I'm going to do that then.7. Desserts
1.audio A: I want something sweet after dinner. B: What do you have in mind? A: A dessert sounds nice. B: What kind are you thinking of getting? A: I want to get some pie. B: What kind of pie do you want? A: I have no idea. B: Do you want to know what kind of pie I like? A: Sure, what kind do you like? B: I love apple pie. A: I love apple pie too. B: There you go. Problem solved. 2.audio A: I have a sweet tooth. B: What exactly do you want? A: I would love to get some dessert. B: What did you want to get? A: I'd love to get a pie. B: What kind do you want to get? A: I'm not sure. B: I can tell you what kind I like. A: What kind do you like? B: Apple pie is my favorite. A: I love apple pie too. B: See, I helped you out. 3.audio A: I have a taste for something sweet. B: What are you thinking? A: I want some kind of dessert. B: Well, what kind of dessert do you want? A: I was thinking about ordering some kind of pie. B: Do you know what kind you want? A: I honestly don't know. B: Did you want to know my favorite kind of pie? A: What's your favorite kind? B: My absolutely favorite kind of pie is apple. A: That sounds really good to me right now. B: I'm happy to help.8. Meat
1.audio A: I need to get some beef. B: Do you know what kind of beef you want? A: I want to get some ground beef. B: How many pounds do you need? A: I would like four pounds of ground beef. B: What kind of ground beef do you need? A: I would like the extra lean. B: Let me go and get that for you. A: Thank you very much. B: No problem. A: I'll wrap it up for you now. B: I appreciate that. 2.audio A: I would like to buy some beef. B: What kind do you want? A: I need to get ground beef. B: How many pounds would you like me to get you? A: I need about four pounds. B: Exactly what type of ground beef do you want? A: Extra lean. B: I'll get that for you right now. A: I appreciate that. B: Don't mention it. A: I'll just wrap this up for you. B: Thanks for your help. 3.audio A: Could I get some beef? B: What kind of beef would you like to get? A: Ground beef would be fine. B: How many pounds would you like? A: Four pounds is enough. B: What kind of ground beef do you want? A: I'm going to need extra lean ground beef. B: I can get that for you. A: Thanks so much. B: You're welcome. A: Let me go wrap the ground beef up for you. B: Thanks for everything.9. Snacks
1.audio A: I'm hungry. B: You already ate. A: It wasn't enough, because I'm hungry again. B: There's nothing left from dinner. A: I'm going to get a snack. B: What kind of snack are you going to make? A: I don't know. B: You can always make a sandwich. A: I don't know what kind of sandwich I want. B: Just make yourself a peanut butter and jelly sandwich. A: I may just do that. B: Go right ahead. 2.audio A: I am starving. B: Didn't you just eat? A: I'm still hungry. B: We ate everything from dinner. A: I just need a snack. B: What are you going to make? A: I don't have the slightest clue. B: Go make a sandwich. A: I'm not sure what kind I want. B: Why don't you make a peanut butter and jelly sandwich? A: I think I will do that. B: Maybe you should. 3.audio A: I need to eat something. B: You just ate. A: I know, but I'm hungry again. B: There's no food left from dinner. A: I think I'm going to go make myself a snack. B: Do you know what kind of snack that you want? A: I'm not exactly sure. B: Why don't you make yourself a sandwich or something? A: I have no idea what kind of sandwich I want to make. B: A PB&J is pretty easy to make. A: I'm going to do that. B: Knock yourself out.10. Vegetables
1.audio A: What do you plan on making as a side dish for dinner? B: I was planning on making some kind of vegetable. A: Do you know what kind? B: What kind of vegetable do you want? A: I wouldn't mind eating some corn. B: How do you want it? A: What do you mean? B: I can boil it, grill it, or microwave it. A: You should throw some corn on the grill. B: Is that really what you want? A: That sounds good. B: I guess I can do that. 2.audio A: Are you going to make anything to go with dinner? B: I may make a vegetable. A: What vegetable are you going to make? B: What kind do you like? A: I like corn. B: How would you like me to make it? A: Excuse me? B: How do you want your corn? A: I'd like it grilled. B: Are you sure that's how you want me to make it? A: I'd love that. B: That's what I'll do. 3.audio A: What's the side dish that you're making for dinner? B: I'm not sure. I was thinking of making a vegetable. A: What kind of vegetable are you thinking about making? B: Do you know what kind of vegetable you want to eat? A: Why don't you make some corn? B: How would you like the corn? A: I don't understand what you mean. B: Do you want it boiled, grilled, or microwaved? A: Why don't you grill it? B: That's how you want it? A: Yes, that sounds delicious. B: Okay, I'll grill some corn then.11. Nutrition of Foods
1.audio A: I really need to start eating healthier. B: I have to start eating better too. A: What kind of food do you usually eat? B: I try my best to eat only fruits, vegetables, and chicken. A: Is that really all that you eat? B: That's basically it. A: How do you stick to only those foods? B: Actually, fruits and veggies are really good for you. A: Yes, I know, but what about the chicken? B: I mainly eat baked chicken, because there's not a lot of fat. A: That does sound pretty good. B: I know it does, and that's because it is. 2.audio A: I think I may try to eat a little better. B: I changed my diet recently, and I eat a lot healthier now. A: What do you eat? B: My diet consists mainly of fruits, veggies, and chicken. A: That's it? B: Just about. A: How is that the only thing that you'll eat? B: You know that fruits and vegetables are very healthy foods? A: So, what about the chicken? B: I bake chicken because it's a healthy way to eat it. A: That sounds delicious and nutritious. B: You should try it. You won't be disappointed. 3.audio A: I need to stop eating such unhealthy foods. B: I know what you mean. I've started eating better myself. A: What foods do you eat now? B: I tend to stick to fruits, vegetables, and chicken. A: Those are the only things you eat? B: That's basically what I eat. A: Why aren't you eating anything else? B: Well, fruits and vegetables are very healthy. A: And the chicken? B: It's really healthy to eat when you bake it. A: I guess that does sound a lot healthier.12. Foods Available at the Cafeteria (1)
1.audio A: I'm hungry. B: So am I. A: Where should we go eat today? B: How about we go eat in the cafeteria? A: I never bought food from the cafeteria. B: You haven't? They have a lot of good stuff. A: What do they have? B: They sell everything. A: I want Chinese food. B: I've gotten chow mein from there before. A: I guess we can eat there then. B: Trust me, the food isn't half bad. 2.audio A: I am starving. B: Let's go get something to eat. A: Is there somewhere you wanted to go eat at? B: We can always go to the cafeteria and eat. A: I haven't eaten there before. B: The food there is pretty good. A: What kind of food do they serve? B: You can get whatever you want at the cafeteria. A: I have a taste for Chinese food. B: They have really good chow mein. A: Let's go to the cafeteria. B: It'll be fine. 3.audio A: I am absolutely famished. B: Yeah. I am too. A: Where did you want to go for lunch? B: I was thinking we should just go to the cafeteria. A: I don't think I ever got food from the cafeteria. B: I actually like the food there. A: Does the cafeteria sell a lot of different food? B: They have anything you want. A: I was thinking about getting some Chinese food. B: I bought some chow mein at the cafeteria. It tasted great. A: We can eat at the cafeteria. B: I think you'll really like the food there.13. Foods Available at the Cafeteria (2)
1.audio A: I want to get a snack at the cafeteria. B: What are you going to buy? A: I may just get some chips. B: I'm probably going to buy something too. A: What do you want to get? B: I want some sort of candy. A: What kind do you want? B: I want some chocolate. A: What kind of chocolate? B: I'm going to get a Snickers or a Kit Kat. A: I don't think they sell Kit Kats. B: I'll just get a Snickers then. 2.audio A: Let's go and get something from the cafeteria. B: What are you going to get? A: I think I just want some chips. B: I want to get a snack too. A: What are you getting? B: I have a taste for candy. A: What kind are you going to get? B: Chocolate sounds good. A: What kind are you going to get? B: I'm thinking of getting either a Snickers or a Kit Kat. A: They don't sell Kit Kats at the cafeteria. B: I'm just going to buy a Snickers then. 3.audio A: I need a snack from the cafeteria. B: What are you thinking of getting? A: I only want some chips. B: I think I may get something too. A: What do you plan on buying? B: I have a sweet tooth. I want candy. A: What kind of candy do you want? B: I really want some chocolate. A: What kind of chocolate do you want? B: I either want a Snickers or a Kit Kat. A: The cafeteria doesn't sell Kit Kats. B: Then I guess I'll just get a Snickers.14. Ordering Food at the Cafeteria (1)
1.audio A: What can I get for you today? B: Could I get a hamburger, please? A: Would you like cheese on that? B: No, thank you. A: Would you like a drink? B: Let me have a soda. A: What kind of soda would you like? B: May I have a Sprite, please? A: Sure, no problem. B: I would also like a bag of chips. A: Will that be all? B: That's everything. 2.audio A: What would you like today? B: Let me get a hamburger. A: Do you want cheese on it? B: No cheese. A: Can I get you something to drink? B: Can I get a soda, please? A: What kind do you want? B: I'd like a Sprite. A: Would you like anything else? B: I'd like a bag of Doritos with that. A: Is that all? B: That'll be all. 3.audio A: What would you like to order? B: I would like to have a hamburger. A: Did you want it with cheese? B: I don't want cheese on it. A: Did you want anything to drink today? B: I think I'm going to get a soda today. A: What kind of soda can I get you? B: A Sprite sounds good. A: What else would you like? B: Let me get a bag of chips too. A: Anything else? B: That's all. Thank you.15. Ordering Food at the Cafeteria (2)
1.audio A: What did you get for lunch today? B: All I had was a sandwich, chips, and soda. A: Where'd you get your food from? B: I went to the cafeteria and bought it. A: What sandwich did you order? B: I ordered a ham sandwich, but they gave me a bologna sandwich instead. A: Was it any good? B: I enjoyed it, even though I had not asked for it. A: I ordered a sandwich there before. B: Is that right? A: Yes, and they messed my order up too. B: That may be true, but I'm sure you enjoyed your sandwich. 2.audio A: Did you get anything for lunch? B: I ate a sandwich with some chips and soda. A: Did you go somewhere and get your food? B: I bought my food from the cafeteria today. A: Tell me, what kind of sandwich did you decide to get? B: They gave me a bologna sandwich, but I asked for ham. A: How'd it taste? B: I didn't want that sandwich, but it was quite tasty. A: I got a sandwich at the cafeteria before. B: Is that so? A: Yes, and I believe they messed up on my order also. B: That may be so, but I bet your sandwich was delicious. 3.audio A: What are you having for lunch? B: I got a sandwich, some chips, and a soda. A: Did you bring that from home? B: I got it from the cafeteria. A: What kind of sandwich did you get? B: They messed up my order and gave me a bologna sandwich. A: How was it? B: Considering it wasn't what I ordered, it was still pretty good. A: I think I got a sandwich there once before. B: Really? A: Yes, and they didn't get my order right either.16. Where to Buy Food
1.audio A: I really want to get something to eat. B: What are you going to get? A: I don't know what I want to eat. B: Well, do you want burgers, Chinese food, or Mexican food? A: Chinese food sounds good. B: Where are you going to get it from? A: I haven't the slightest idea. B: I usually get my Chinese food from Panda Express. A: You like Panda Express? B: The food there is actually pretty good. A: Maybe I'll go there then. B: You should. I know you'll like it. 2.audio A: I think I'm going to go get some food. B: What do you want? A: I can't decide what to get. B: What kind of food do you want to get? A: I think I might like some Chinese food. B: Do you know where you're going to get it? A: I honestly don't know. B: I go to Panda Express for my Chinese food. A: You like the food there? B: I really like the food. A: I think I'll go and get my food there. B: I think you'll enjoy the food. 3.audio A: I want to get a bite to eat. B: What are you thinking of getting? A: I have no idea what I want. B: You can get a burger, or some Chinese food. Or maybe you can get some Mexican food. A: I wouldn't mind getting some Chinese food. B: Where are you going to get your Chinese food from? A: I'm not sure. B: When I want Chinese food, I go to Panda Express. A: Do they do a good job on the food? B: The food isn't bad there. A: I think I will get my food from Panda Express.17. Making a Shopping List
1.audio A: I think I'm going to go to the market today. B: Do we need food? A: Yes, I think so. B: What are you going to get? A: I'm not sure what we need. B: Maybe you should go and look in the refrigerator. A: Could you do it for me, and write out a list of things that we need? B: Just get the basics. A: Like what? B: You know. Get some eggs, milk, and bread. A: Just go and make a list for me, please. B: Fine, I'll go do that for you. 2.audio A: I may go grocery shopping later. B: We need to get food? A: I don't think we have any food. B: What are you going to buy? A: What food are we out of? B: Go and look in the kitchen. A: Could you look for me? B: You should just get the basics. A: What would that be? B: Get some eggs, milk, and bread. A: Would you please make a list for me? B: Okay, I'll write it down for you. 3.audio A: I'm going to go shopping for groceries in a little bit. B: Why, do we need groceries? A: I believe we are all out of food. B: Do you know what to get? A: I don't know what we need. B: Why don't you go and check the refrigerator? A: I would appreciate it if you would do that for me. B: Why don't you just get the basics? A: What do you mean? B: Eggs, milk, bread. Things like that. A: Go make that list. B: Sure, no problem.18. Buying Meat
1.audio A: I would like to get some meat today. B: What kind do you need? A: I need about a pound of ground beef. B: The ground beef is $2.48 a pound. A: That sounds good. B: What else would you like? A: I also need three pounds of chicken breasts. B: The chicken breasts are $4.05 a pound. A: How much will the three pounds of chicken cost altogether? B: Altogether, it's going to be $12.15. A: That will be all for me. B: All right, let me get your meat for you. 2.audio A: I want to buy some meat. B: What kind would you like? A: I want one pound of ground beef. B: That's going to be about $2.48. A: That will be fine. B: What else can I get for you? A: Let me also have three pounds of chicken breasts. B: That's going to be $4.05 a pound. A: Can you tell me the total cost of the chicken breasts? B: That will be $12.15. A: That's all I'm going to get today. B: That's fine. Let me get your meat. 3.audio A: I would like to purchase some meat. B: What kind of meat would you like to get today? A: First off, I'm going to need a pound of ground beef. B: A pound of ground beef is $2.48. A: That's perfect. B: What else will you be needing? A: I'm also going to need three pounds of chicken breasts. B: The chicken breasts cost $4.05 per pound. A: What's the total price for the chicken? B: It's going to be $12.15. A: I think that will be all for me today.19. Comparing Foods from Different Stores
1.audio A: Have you ever shopped at Whole Foods market? B: Nope. How's the food there? A: It's very good, and it's fresh too. B: I do my shopping at Vons. A: I shopped there before too, but the food is better at Whole Foods. B: What's wrong with Vons? A: Their range of organic foods is very limited. B: Whole Foods has a lot of organic foods? A: Yes, the food there is very healthy. B: I've never been, but I may start shopping there. A: The food there is a great step up from Vons. B: Thanks for letting me know. 2.audio A: Have you ever done your shopping at Whole Foods market? B: I haven't shopped there. How is the food? A: The food there is wonderful. B: I go to Vons for my groceries. A: I prefer the food at Whole Foods. B: Is there something wrong with Vons? A: Vons doesn't offer a lot of organic foods. B: Do they offer organic foods at Whole Foods? A: Yes, that's the place to go to get healthier food. B: Maybe I'll try that store out. A: If you like Vons, then I'm sure you'll love Whole Foods. B: You're making me a believer. 3.audio A: Have you ever been shopping at Whole Foods? B: No, I haven't. Is the food good there? A: They have the freshest foods there. B: I usually shop at Vons. A: I used to shop there, but I find the food at Whole Foods to be a lot better. B: What's the problem with Vons? A: They don't have a lot of organic foods there. B: Is there a big selection of organic foods at Whole Foods? A: They have lots of healthier food at Whole Foods. B: I haven't been shopping there, but maybe I'll try it sometime. A: Whole Foods is way better than Vons, trust me. B: I'll take your word for it.20. Finding Foods in the Supermarket
1.audio A: I can't seem to find the cereal aisle. B: You'll find the cereal by the breakfast foods. A: What breakfast foods? B: They're over by the oatmeal and the breakfast bars. A: I think I know what you're talking about. B: Can I help you with anything else? A: Could you tell me where the dishwashing detergent is? B: You'll find that by the paper towels. A: I didn't think of that. B: That's where it'll be. A: Thank you very much. B: If you need anything else, please feel free to ask me. 2.audio A: Could you tell me where the cereal is? B: If you go to the breakfast aisle, you'll find the cereal there. A: What aisle is that? B: You'll find it by the oatmeal and breakfast bars. A: I know where that is at. B: Is there anything else you need help finding? A: Could you point me toward the dishwashing detergent? B: That's over by the paper towels and toilet paper. A: I didn't even think about that. B: That's where it is. A: Thank you so much for helping me. B: Let me know if you need anything else. 3.audio A: I need to find the cereal aisle. B: The cereal is over by the breakfast foods. A: Where is that at? B: It's by the oatmeal and breakfast bars. A: I think I can find that. B: Did you need help finding anything else? A: Actually, I do need to find the dishwashing detergent. B: That would be over by the paper towels and toilet paper. A: I thought it was over there. B: Yeah, you'll find it there. A: I really appreciate all your help.21. How to Cook a Meal
1.audio A: I was thinking about cooking dinner tonight. B: What do you want to make? A: I'm not exactly sure. B: I wouldn't mind a beef bowl. A: How do I make that? B: All it has is rice and teriyaki beef. A: That sounds easy, but how do I make it? B: First, you need to make some white rice. A: Then what do I do? B: Then you need to shred some beef and marinate it with teriyaki sauce. A: Is there anything else I need to do? B: Then you cook it up and eat it. 2.audio A: I really want to make something for dinner. B: What are you going to cook? A: I haven't the slightest clue what I'm going to make. B: A teriyaki bowl sounds nice. A: I don't know how to make that. B: All you need to make it is white rice and some teriyaki beef. A: That sounds fairly simple, but how do I cook it? B: The first and simplest thing you have to do is make some white rice. A: What's next? B: Then you should shred your beef and pour some teriyaki marinade over it. A: What's the next thing I need to do? B: Then all you need to do is cook it and enjoy. 3.audio A: I want to make dinner tonight. B: What are you thinking of making? A: I don't have any idea what to cook. B: How about making a teriyaki bowl? A: Can you tell me how to make it? B: All it consists of is teriyaki beef and rice. A: But what do I have to do to prepare it? B: All you have to do is cook some white rice. A: What do I do after that? B: Then cut up the beef and marinate it in teriyaki sauce. A: What else do I have to do? B: All that's left is to cook it.1. Registering for a Class
1.audio A: Hello, I need to register for a class. B: What class are you trying to take? A: I want to take a Psychology class. B: Well, there are only two classes open. A: Can you tell me what days the classes are on? B: One class is on Tuesday and Thursday from 2:00 p.m. - 4:00 p.m. A: And the other class? B: That class is from ten to twelve on Monday and Wednesday. A: Are you sure these are the only open classes? B: Yes, I am sure. A: Okay, sign me up for the class on Monday and Wednesday. B: Very well then. 2.audio A: I would like to register for a class today. B: No problem, what class would you like to take? A: I would very much enjoy taking a Psychology class. B: There are two classes that are still open. A: Which days are these classes on? B: The first class is a Tuesday and Thursday class from two to three. A: What about the other class? B: The other class is on Monday and Wednesday from 10:00 a.m. to 12:00 p.m. A: Are you sure there are no more open classes? B: I'm positive. A: Sign me up for Monday and Wednesday. B: Okay, I'll sign you up. 3.audio A: Could you help me to register for a class? B: Do you know what class you want to take? A: Are there any Psych classes available? B: I believe there are still two Psychology classes open. A: On what days are the classes? B: There is one class on Tuesday and Thursday from 2 to 4. A: Can you tell me about the other class? B: It's from 10-12 on Monday and Wednesday. A: You're positive that these are the only classes left? B: These two are the only ones. A: The class on Monday and Wednesday will be fine. B: Very good.2. Meeting New Students
1.audio A: Hello, how are you doing? B: Pretty good, and you? A: I'm doing great. B: That's great to hear. A: So how long have you been going to PCC? B: I've been going here for a couple years now. You? A: This is my first year. B: How do you like it so far? A: It's all right. B: You don't like it? A: I'll like it better once I finish my GE. B: That's exactly how I used to feel. 2.audio A: How are things with you? B: Not too bad. How about yourself? A: Not bad. B: I'm glad to hear that. A: Have you been going to PCC long? B: I've only been here two years. How about yourself? A: I just started this year. B: Do you like it? A: It's fine for right now. B: You do not like it, right? A: Once I'm finished with my GE, it should get better. B: I felt the same way my first year. 3.audio A: How is everything going with you? B: Great. You? A: Pretty good. B: Good for you. A: When did you start going to PCC? B: This is my second year. How about you? A: I only got here this year. B: You like it so far? A: It's OK. B: I can tell you don't really like it. A: It'll get better after I finish my General Education. B: I understand what you mean.3. Finding a Classroom
1.audio A: Could you help me? B: What do you need? A: I can't seem to find my class. B: What building is it in? A: It's in the C building. B: Oh, I know exactly where that is. A: Do you think you can tell me where it is? B: Sure, what room number is it? A: It's room number 261. B: I have a class around there right now. A: Could you show me where it is? B: No problem, come on. 2.audio A: Excuse me, I need your assistance. B: Sure, what's up? A: I have no idea where my class is. B: Tell me which building it's in. A: My class is in the C building. B: I know where the C building is. A: Do you mind telling me where it is? B: Of course, which room number is it? A: Number 261. B: I actually have a class right around there. A: Can you please show me? B: I can do that. 3.audio A: Do you mind helping me? B: What can I help you with? A: I'm not sure how to find my next class. B: Do you know what building that it's in? A: The C building, I think. B: Well, that's not far away. A: Could you point me in that direction? B: Do you know what the room number is? A: It's C261. B: My next class is around there. A: Can you show it to me? B: Sure, let's go.4. Buying Textbooks
1.audio A: How do I buy my textbooks? B: Do you have your book list for your class? A: Yes, I have my list. B: Fine. Once you have it, you can go to the bookstore. Do you know where that is? A: Yes, I know where the bookstore is. B: OK, so once you pass the gym, it's the first door on your left. Do you know you can also sell your used textbooks there? A: No, I didn't know I could do that. B: You just take them with you and trade them with the used textbook man just outside the door. Do you think you will be doing that today? A: Yes, I am going today. B: Well, if you decide to go, I could meet you over there at 1:00 today or tomorrow to help you. Would that work for you? A: Yes, thank you. That would be great. B: Well, then, I'll talk to you later. Have a good day! 2.audio A: Where can I buy textbooks? B: First, you need to have the list of books for your class. Do you have that? A: Yes, I have that. B: Well, when you have that, you can take it over to the bookstore. Can you find it? A: No, I don't know where the bookstore is. B: Just pass the gym and it's the first door on your left. Were you aware that you can also turn in your old textbooks for money? A: Really? How can I do that? B: Take your used textbooks with you and give them to the representative near the entrance. He will pay you for them. Are you going today? A: No, I can't make it today. B: I could help you with buying your books if you meet me there at 1:00 today or tomorrow. Would you like my help? A: No, thanks. I'm good. B: I'll see you later then. Have a great day! 3.audio A: Can you help me buy my textbooks? B: There will probably be a book list in the bookstore. Do you have your class schedule handy? A: No, I don't have that. B: To get started, take that list over to the bookstore. Do you know where the bookstore is? A: I am not sure where the bookstore is. B: When you pass the gym, it'll be the first door on the left. Do you know how to sell your old textbooks for money? A: Yes, I knew I could do that. Exactly how do I go about selling them? B: If you give your used textbooks to the person at the booth outside the door, he will reimburse you. Can you go over there today? A: I think maybe I could be there. B: I am free at 1:00 today or tomorrow if you need some help. Want to meet me over there? A: Maybe that would work. B: I'll catch you later then. Have a wonderful morning.5. Talking about a Professor
1.audio A: Could you tell me if you have ever taken a class from Dr. Miller? B: Yes. Are you going to be taking a class from him? A: Yes, but I have never taken his class before. B: He is very interesting and challenging. Is that what you are looking for? A: Yes, that's what I need. B: He is really clear on what you need to learn to get a good grade. Are you willing to study hard? A: Yes, I guess so. B: What I really liked about him is that he was an understanding and friendly teacher. Do you enjoy that in a teacher? A: Yes, I had a teacher like that before. B: Did you know that he has 20 years teaching experience? A: No, I didn't, but that could be a good thing. B: Well, take a look at everything and figure out what is best for you. Good luck! 2.audio A: Do you know anything about Dr. Miller's classes? B: Yes. Are you in his class? A: I'm thinking of taking his class next semester. B: He really knew his stuff, but he graded hard. Would that be OK? A: Yes, I really need someone who is really good. B: I didn't find it overwhelming to earn a good grade if you work at it. Can you do that? A: Maybe, but I'm not sure. B: Man, this guy was so funny when he was teaching. I like that, don't you? A: No, that stuff isn't important to me. B: Did you know that he is a fairly new teacher and very current in his field? A: I don't care about any of that. B: We all are looking for different things in an instructor. I hope I've helped you. 3.audio A: Would you talk to me about taking one of Dr. Miller's classes? B: Yes. Have you ever been in one of his classes? A: I'm thinking about taking his class next semester. B: He was a very easy teacher. Are you thinking of taking a class with him? A: I'm not sure because I really need to learn something, but I also worry about grades. B: Grades are important, but don't you think that gaining the knowledge is important, too? A: I really need to learn this stuff. B: He made everything so interesting that the time just flew by. Do you know what I mean? A: Yes, that sounds right for me. B: Did you know that he came here last year after 10 years in the military? A: Yeah, I already knew that. That could be a good thing. B: I think you know that you have to make the best decision for you. Enjoy your year!6. Making an Appointment with Your Professor
1.audio A: Professor, could I make an appointment with you? B: I am free tomorrow afternoon between two and four; do you have a particular time in mind? A: Two o'clock would be the best time. B: Fine, do you know where my office is? A: No, I'm not sure. B: Remember, it is in the E building on the third floor. A: I see. B: Don't worry, it will work out fine once you get there. I'll see you then. A: I'll see you then. B: Looking forward to meeting with you! 2.audio A: Excuse me, Professor, is there a time when I could meet with you? B: I could meet with you tomorrow anywhere from two until four; what time works out best? A: I would like to come in at three o'clock. B: I am glad that that works out; can you find my office? A: Yes, I can. B: Just follow the walkway to the outside and climb the stairs to the third floor. A: I got it. B: If you do get lost, just ask someone in the building to point the way. A: Thank you, I'll be there. B: If you need to cancel your appointment, please give me a call! 3.audio A: Professor, do you have a few moments when I could meet with you? B: I schedule my appointments from two to four on Saturday; what works best for you? A: Three would be a good time. B: Great, do you need directions to my office? A: I'm not sure. B: Well, just make sure to go through the double doors, and I'll be on the right. A: OK, I'll find it. B: It's very easy to find. A: See you then. B: I will enjoy seeing you; have a good week!7. Turning Homework in Late
1.audio A: Excuse me, Professor. I have to talk to you about why my homework didn't get done. B: What happened that you didn't get it done? A: I had to watch a football game instead. B: Well, you had more than one day; couldn't you have fit it in on another day? A: Yes, I think so. B: Either way, I only allow one missed assignment per semester. When will you be turning the make-up in? A: I'll make it up next week. B: Fine, but it cannot happen again if you want an ?A? in the class. A: OK, I can do that. B: Remember that you are in college now, not high school. 2.audio A: I don't have my homework today. B: You usually are good about turning it in; what happened? A: I was really sick. B: But couldn't you have done it when you felt better? A: Yes, I probably could. B: You have already missed one other assignment; when can I expect the make-ups? A: Next class meeting. B: That will be soon enough, but make sure you get next week's assignment in as well, all right? A: That would work for me. B: Good. I know that you are capable of being an excellent student. 3.audio A: Let me tell you what happened to my homework. B: OK, go ahead--what is the excuse THIS time? A: Actually, I did it, but then it got lost. B: Could you have gotten it done at another time? A: Yes, I could. B: You have never missed an assignment before--when will you be making this one up? A: I'll make it up early next week. B: That would work, but don't let it happen again. A: I'll try. B: That will solve it then. Let's work hard to not let it happen again.8. Finding an Error in Your Test Score
1.audio A: Excuse me, Professor. I think there might be an error in my test score. B: Sure. Do you think that the total is wrong or that you got something marked wrong that should have been marked right? A: I think that the percentage is incorrect. B: Let's just go over all of it to double-check. A: Sure, let's do it. B: Here is the answer sheet. Do you see a place where I marked something wrong that should have been right? A: I don't see any mistakes. B: OK, now that we've gotten those straightened out, let's total the score. A: Yes, let's total it. B: Well, if I total that like this and divide by this number, I get this total. Do you agree? A: Yes, you're right. B: Well then, we are all straight. Have a good day and thanks for bringing that to my attention. 2.audio A: I was looking at my test score and think that it should be higher. B: Is the math wrong or the way the answer was marked? A: I think an answer got marked wrong that should have been marked right. B: These things can happen; let's double-check the answers first to be sure, all right? A: That would be great! B: Look at the answer sheet and compare it to your answers. Do you see any place where I made a mistake in grading? A: This one right here should be right. B: Yeah, I see the same thing; now we can do the math and check that, right? A: Yeah, let's do the math. B: I count all of the correct answers, total them, and divide by the total. Does this look right to you? A: Looks pretty good. B: Thank you for caring enough to check on your scores; keep studying! 3.audio A: Could we go over some things, because I think my test score is wrong. B: What do you think is wrong, the math or the way your answer was scored? A: Both. B: I am willing to take a second look because teachers make mistakes, too. Will that work for you? A: Yeah, I'm ready. B: Check your answers against the ones on the answer sheet and let me know where you see the mistake. A: These look strange. B: Yes, I agree; let's move on to the calculating of the score. Would that be OK? A: OK, let's do the calculation. B: We add all of these up and divide by this and that gives us this percentage. A: I see. B: Anytime you have a question, please feel free to ask!9. Borrowing Class Notes
1.audio A: Do you have the notes from last week's class? B: Did you come late? A: I couldn't make it. B: Why is that? A: I was sick. B: Oh, okay. Well, here you go. A: Are these all of them? B: Oh, wait, here are the rest. A: Thanks a bunch. B: Don't mention it. 2.audio A: Do you mind if I borrow the notes from last week? B: Were you here last week? A: I was unable to make it. B: How come? A: I was sick that day, and couldn't make it. B: Well, here are the notes. A: Are there any more? B: Sorry, here you go. A: Thanks a lot. B: No problem. 3.audio A: Let me get last week's notes. B: Yeah, sure--you didn't come to class that day? A: I couldn't come. B: Why not? A: I wasn't feeling well. B: Here they are. A: Thanks a lot; are these all the notes? B: Oh, no, this is the rest. A: Thank you very much. B: It's no problem at all.10. Grading Policy
1.audio A: I was wondering how you are going to calculate our final grades. B: Grades are based on many things: homework, attendance, quizzes, mid-term, and final. A: What counts the most? B: Actually I look at all of it and let's not forget class participation. A: Do you grade on a curve or use percentages? B: Homework, attendance, and quizzes are sixty percent; the mid-term and final are worth twenty percent each. A: What if we miss something? B: I will allow one unexcused absence; after that you need to contact me ahead of time. A: Will you tell us if we are failing during the year? B: You will be able to track your progress during the year. 2.audio A: What do you base our grades on? B: All of your coursework is important, including everything from attendance and homework to all of your test results for the semester. A: Does the final count the most? B: All of it is important; please just do your best at all times. A: How do you total our scores? B: The final and mid-term are twenty percent each; homework, attendance, and quizzes are the rest. A: What if we are out sick? B: Make sure you contact me as I only allow one unexcused absence. A: How can we know if we are doing OK during the year? B: Your grade will not be a surprise; you will know what you need to work on. 3.audio A: How do you decide what grade we get? B: I look at many things: attendance, quizzes, and tests. A: What is the most important factor? B: Obviously I look for improvement as we go along, but I would like you to do your best from the beginning. A: How can we keep track of our grades? B: The final and midterm are 40 percent of your grade; homework, attendance, and quizzes total 60 percent. A: What if we can't get to school? B: You can only miss one class without penalty. A: If we have a major problem, will you let us know? B: I will be letting you know during the year if you have a major problem.11. Discussing Your Grades with Your Professor
1.audio A: I'd like to talk to you about my grades. B: Sure! What exactly do you have questions about? A: I am worried that I messed up on a test. B: Well, let me take a look at my grade book. How do YOU think you are doing? A: I think I am doing great, except for that one test! B: Well, your scores show that you could do a little better. What do you think you could improve on? A: I think that I could study a little harder for tests. B: Fine! Please remember that regular attendance is the most important way to begin. A: Yes, I know. B: I'm sure you'll do fine. 2.audio A: Could you talk to me for a few minutes about my grades? B: Step into my office for a moment. What is your concern? A: Am I failing? B: Let's go on the computer to see what's up. Do you think you are doing well? A: I am pretty sure that I am in trouble. B: I can see that you are trying, but where do you think you could improve? A: I missed a few classes; I need to make sure I come to school on a regular basis. B: Having a regular study routine and following it is very important, right? A: I'll try; it's hard! B: Thanks for stopping by! 3.audio A: Professor, I'm concerned about my grades. Do you have a minute? B: Of course, how can I help you? A: I want to know if I am doing OK. B: Let's pull out your scores so far. Do you think you are doing OK? A: I am afraid that I might not be doing all that well. B: I'm seeing that you are doing OK in some areas, but not so well in others. A: I think I could take better notes and read a little more. B: You can greatly improve your grades by always reflecting on what you can improve on. A: I'm working on it! B: Just do your best and I am sure that you will see improvement.12. Talking to Professor about Being Absent
1.audio A: Excuse me, Professor. I am going to miss next week's class. B: Is this something that you could schedule for another time? A: No, I have to do this; it's important! B: Have you arranged for someone to take notes for you? A: I've made arrangements with a friend to help me. B: You know that I only allow one absence per semester, don't you? A: Yes, I know. B: Write down your name and the date on a piece of paper and give it to me. A: OK, I can do that. B: Well, have a good day off from class. 2.audio A: Professor, I will not be here for our next class meeting. B: Is this absolutely necessary? A: I tried to work something out, but I really do have to miss one class. B: Will you be able to make up the work you missed? A: I'm going to be doing a lot of extra reading. B: Remember that I will only let you miss one class meeting per semester. A: Yes, I remember. B: Could you e-mail me this week as a reminder? A: Sure, no problem. B: Make good use of that day off; you'll only have one this semester! 3.audio A: I have to miss school next week. B: Isn't there some way you could work your schedule out to be here? A: Unfortunately, this is what I have to do. B: How are you going to catch up? A: I've got it all covered. B: If you miss this class, you will have used up your quota for the semester. A: Don't worry, this will be the last class I miss. B: Make sure to remind me right before you are absent. A: I'll remember. B: Enjoy your day off and don't forget to study!13. Talking to Professor about Leaving Early
1.audio A: Professor, I am going to need to leave class early today. B: What is the problem? A: I need to go to the airport to pick up a relative. B: Are you planning on having someone take notes for you? A: Yes, I've got that part covered. B: When, exactly do you need to leave? A: I don't need to leave until the very end of class. B: Fine, but next time try and not have to miss class again. A: Thanks, Professor. See you later! B: See you later! Drive carefully. 2.audio A: Excuse me, Professor, I have a problem and need to leave class early. B: Why do you have to leave early? A: I am not feeling well. B: Could you make it up by attending my other section this week? A: Yes, it's all taken care of. B: Are you leaving right away or can you stay for a few more minutes? A: I can stay a few more minutes. B: OK, but please make sure that you get all of your make-up work completed. A: Thanks, Professor. I've got it covered! B: Go do what you have to do, but make sure it doesn't happen again. 3.audio A: I am sorry, but I can't stay until the end of class. B: Where do you need to be that is more important than school? A: I have an appointment. B: Do you have a plan to make up your missed work? A: No, but I'll make sure someone helps me out this week with my missed work. B: Are you going to go right away? A: I am leaving right now. B: All right, but please remember that it is your responsibility to catch up. A: Thanks, Professor. I'll make sure everything gets taken care of. B: Goodbye, and try not to miss any more school.14. Talking to a Counselor
1.audio A: I have an appointment for 1:30. B: What can I help you with? A: Well, I have a problem with my class schedule. B: What is it? A: It seems that I've been given two classes scheduled at the same time. B: I can understand the problem with that. A: Is there any way that you can fix my schedule? B: No problem, do you want those classes still? A: Yes, I do. B: Let me see if I can find one of these classes on another day. A: Thank you very much. 2.audio A: I'm here for my appointment. B: What can I do for you today? A: I have an issue with my schedule. B: Tell me the problem. A: I have two classes on here that are at the same time. B: Oh, I see. A: Can you change that for me? B: Do you still want both classes? A: Yes, I would like to keep both classes. B: I'll try to change one to a different day. A: I would greatly appreciate that. 3.audio A: I was supposed to meet with you at 1:30. B: Yes, I see. What did you need to see me about? A: There's a problem with my schedule. B: What's the problem? A: Two of my classes occur at the same time. B: Well, I can see that's a problem. A: Is it at all possible for you to fix that error? B: Yes, I can. Would you still like to have both of these classes? A: I want to keep both of them, if that's possible. B: Well, let me find you one of these classes on a different day. A: Thanks a lot.15. Adding a Class
1.audio A: I am unsure how to add a class and need help. B: I have an opening. Do you have an add sheet for me to sign? A: Yes, I have an add sheet. B: After I sign it, you must take it to the Admissions and Records Office to add the class. Do you know where that is? A: No, I'm not sure. B: When you cross the quad, the office is right in front of you. Go inside and follow the signs to the correct line. A: Thanks. I understand what to do now. B: It should be easy to find. After you add the class, check with me in a few weeks to make sure that you are on my roll sheet. A: That sounds good. B: Good, just make sure that you do the same thing if you ever need to drop a class. Good luck! 2.audio A: Professor, can you help me add your class? B: You have to bring me an add sheet to sign. Do you have one? A: No, I will have to get an add sheet. B: You must take the signed add slip to the Admissions and Records Office to add the class. Do you know where that is? A: No, I don't know where that is. B: The office is in front of you as you cross the quad. The signs in the hallway will tell you where you need to be. A: I think I can find it. B: You'll find it easily. Make sure you add the class and then we will look at the roll sheet later to make sure that you were added on. A: Thank you for letting me add your class. B: To drop a class, you need to do the same thing with a drop slip. Good luck! 3.audio A: I am not sure how to add a class. B: Do you have an add sheet for me to sign? A: I'll bring one next time. B: When you get the signed add slip, you must take it to the Admissions and Records Office or you will not be added. Can you find the office? A: I think I know where it is. B: Across the courtyard on the right is the office. Follow the signs to the correct line. Is that clear? A: Thank you for your directions. It's clear. B: You can't miss it. Add the class and then come back. We'll check later to make sure you are on the roll sheet. A: That's great. Thank you so much. B: Do the same thing with a drop slip if you ever need to drop a class. Good luck!16. Date and Time of a Field Trip
1.audio A: When are we leaving for our field trip? B: Our science field trip is next Monday at 8:00 in the morning. Can you mark that on your calendar? A: Yes, I will write that down. B: That will be Monday, December 2nd. We need to start loading the buses half an hour early, so plan to arrive at 7:30. A: Yes, I will be there on time. B: We will return 6 days later on December 8th. Will someone be picking you up? A: Yes, someone is coming to get me. B: The return bus will leave the campground at 5:00 p.m. and return to campus 3 hours later at 8:00 p.m. A: What should we bring with us? B: I am going to post all of that information on the geology club web page. Check it out when you get a chance. See you Monday! 2.audio A: Can you tell me what the date and time of our field trip is? B: We are leaving on our science field trip at 8:00 a.m. next Monday. Do you have something to write that down on? A: Yes, I can write that on my calendar. B: That will be on the second of December. Be there ? an hour early to get your bags on the bus. Do you understand? A: Yes, I understand. B: The bus will bring you back 6 days later on December 8th. Is someone coming to get you? A: No, I don't have a ride yet. B: We will be leaving the campground at 5:00 in the evening and arrive at our campus at 8:00 p.m. Any more questions? A: How much will the trip cost? B: I put all of that information in the packet. I'll give you another copy if you need one. See you on Monday! 3.audio A: What date will our field trip be on? B: The science field trip is next Monday at 8 o'clock in the morning. Do you want to make note of that on your calendar? A: Yes, I will make note of that. B: Next Monday is December 2nd. The buses will leave at 8, but we must begin loading at 7:30. A: Be there half an hour early. B: You might want to tell whoever is picking you up that you will return on December 8th. Do you have a ride? A: Yes, someone is picking me up. B: To get back to campus by 8:00 p.m., we will be leaving the campsite at 5:00 p.m. Do you have any more questions? A: Not at the moment?maybe later, though. B: All of the extra information that you need is on the bulletin board in the hallway. See you on Monday!17. Where to Buy Lunch
1.audio A: Hi, could you help me find a place where I could buy some lunch? B: Sure! What kind of food would you like? A: I was thinking of pizza or something else Italian, maybe. B: I know the perfect place! A: Good! Where is it? B: It's right past that last building on the left. Do you want me to go with you? A: That would be great. B: Glad you asked me to join you. This will be fun! 2.audio A: Man, I'm hungry. Do you know a good place to have lunch? B: Yes, I know a great place. What types of food do you like? A: Mexican, Japanese or Chinese would be great. B: Oh, I know a place where you might like to eat. A: Is it close by? B: It's down a block on the right; can I show you the way? A: OK, I'd love the company. B: This will work out well. I'm getting hungry just thinking about it. 3.audio A: Let's have some lunch; do you know of a great restaurant somewhere? B: I'm hungry, too. What types of food sound good? A: Maybe just a quick sandwich, salad, or something. B: I have a great idea of where you might like to go. A: Can we walk there? B: It's on the second floor. May I join you? A: Of course! Let's go. B: Let's hurry. I'm starving!18. Using a Vending Machine
1.audio A: Can you help me figure out how to use this machine? B: Yes, I would be happy to help. What do you want to buy? A: I want to buy that candy. B: OK. So this machine will make change if you need it. Do you have your dollars ready? A: Yeah, so far, so good. B: Next, you feed your dollars into the machine in the slot. Make sure they are smooth. A: Yeah, I already knew that. B: I'm sure you know that if the dollar gets stuck, you might have to re-feed it. A: OK, let's move on! B: Now you just make your selection and pray. If nothing comes out, try again or call the number on the side of the machine. A: I hope it works! B: Well, good luck! 2.audio A: I've never seen a machine like this before and need some help. B: Sure, no problem. What are you trying to get? A: I want to buy a drink. B: OK. This machine needs you to use that change machine first to get correct change. A: I've got the correct change already. B: First you put your money in the dollar slot or the coin slot. The dollars have to be smooth. A: OK, what next? B: Just know that sometimes the money doesn't go in perfectly the first time and you have to try again. A: OK, next? B: Choose what you want and push the button. Sometimes it takes a couple of tries. A: I agree with you. B: Hope that works for you! 3.audio A: I want to know how to buy something from this machine. B: Yeah, the new ones can be tricky. What are you trying to buy? A: I want to buy one of those snack things. B: Are you ready to go? A: I'm clear so far. B: The money goes in the slot over there. It has to be smooth to go in. A: It won't go in! B: Just remember that you might have to feed the money in a couple of times to get it to work. A: Yes, next step. B: Make your selection and hope for the best. Vending machines aren't all that reliable. A: They're totally unreliable. B: You seem to have it down. Have a good day!19. Getting a Library Card
1.audio A: Excuse me. I am interested in getting a library card. B: Sure, let me give you an application. You can fill it out right here at the counter. A: OK, here it is. B: Let me take a look at this for you. May I have your driver's license, please? A: Here's my license and form. B: You seem to have filled the form out all right. Are you familiar with our rules and fines? A: Yes, I know what to do. B: The hours and limitations are printed on the card and this handout. A: OK, I see. B: Thank you for joining the library; we look forward to serving you. 2.audio A: I was wondering if you could help me to get a library card. B: Of course, just fill out this form and let me know when you are finished. A: I'm finished. B: I will also need your driver's license; hand me the filled-out form, please. A: OK, the form is all filled out. B: Perfect! Do you know the hours and rules for the library? A: No, I have no idea what they are. B: Everything you need to know is printed on the card and handout. A: Yes, right. B: Great! You are all set to enjoy the library. 3.audio A: Good morning. Is this where I can get a library card issued to me? B: No problem, we have a short form right here; just hand it to me when you are done. A: I'm done. B: That looks great, but I will also need your driver's license or other form of I.D. A: Sure, here it all is. B: Well, this looks nice. Do you know how to use it? A: I am pretty sure how to use it, but can you remind me? B: Of course, just remember that all of the needed information is on the card. A: I see. B: Well, I hope you have a wonderful time on your library visits!20. Returning Overdue Books
1.audio A: Can you help me with returning my late books? B: This is the right spot to pay your fee. Put your books down right here. A: OK, here they are. B: I can see that you owe 25 cents a day. That will be one dollar and fifty cents total. A: OK, here's the money. B: We are interested in getting our books back; so as long as all the fines are paid off by the end of the semester, you will be fine. Does that make sense? A: I'm not sure. B: Your registration and transcripts can be held up if there is an outstanding fine. A: Now I understand. B: Well, you can always keep your late fees down by using the night drop if we are closed. Enjoy the library! 2.audio A: These books should have been turned in last week. B: You have come to the correct place. Hand me your books. A: Here they are. B: Whoa, these are pretty late! You owe five dollars total to clear your fine. A: I don't have the money right now. B: We only require that all fines must be paid off by the end of the semester. So you will be okay to go. A: What would happen if I didn't pay it? B: It's really important to always clear your fines, so you'll get a report card and transcripts on time. A: Yeah, but I don't know how they can do that. B: Always remember that the night drop is here, and we really appreciate you returning your books for all to use. 3.audio A: My library books are late, where can I put them? B: This is where they need to be turned in. Let me see them to check the date, OK? A: Yeah, I think that they are really late! B: Not all that late. You only owe the library fifty cents. A: What if I can't pay it? B: We appreciate you paying off all fines as soon as possible, but always before the end of the semester. A: Yeah, I get it. B: Your report card and transcripts will be held until you pay all fines, so always make sure that you do that. A: That's not really fair! B: If we aren't here, always feel free to use the night drop outside. Thanks for coming in!21. Using a Parking Meter
1.audio A: Excuse me, could you help me figure out how to use this new parking meter? B: Sure, it was confusing for me also. Have you ever used a regular meter? A: Yes, I understood the old one. B: Well, on this one you can use coins or a debit or credit card; which one would you like to use? A: Debit or credit card. B: OK. Now, do you see what the rate is on the sticker? A: Yes. B: OK, now that we know what it will cost, put the money or card into the machine. A: Yes, I can do that. B: Wonderful; now, this machine asks you the number of your spot, so put that in also. A: Yes, I'm ready. B: All you have to do now is take your receipt and put it on your dashboard. 2.audio A: Whoa, I never saw a meter like this before; how do you use it? B: It's simple, once you do it a few times. Do you know how the old one worked? A: I never used a parking meter before. B: So we start out by deciding whether you will use cash or a credit or debit card. A: Cash. B: Fine, can you read the rate on the display? A: Yes, I can. B: Fine. Now that we know what they are ripping us off for, insert the payment. A: I'd rather not pay, but I have to. B: Fine, this machine does not ask you the number of your spot, so we can move on, all right? A: Perfect, let's do it. B: Now just check the meter to see how many minutes you have. 3.audio A: This parking meter is really confusing. Can you help me figure it out? B: It's just like the old one, but with new stuff added. A: Yeah, OK. B: The first step is deciding on debit or credit card payment, so which one is it? A: I have coins. B: Perfect. Now, can you see the rate on the sign? A: I didn't see that, but now I do. B: Once you know what it will cost, put the payment in. A: Here it goes! B: You are doing great! Let's move on to the next step. A: I am a little confused. B: Just make sure that everything registered, and then you are good to go!22. Purchasing a Parking Permit
1.audio A: I'd like to purchase a parking permit for next semester. B: Are you a daytime student or do you just come in the evenings? A: I am a daytime student. B: Will you be driving a motorcycle or a car? A: I will be driving my car. B: OK, that will be twenty-five dollars. How would you like to pay for it? A: I'll pay for it with a check. B: Would you like to pay for any extra permits for another vehicle? A: No, thanks; I'm fine. B: Here you go then. Have a great school year! 2.audio A: I'll need a parking permit for next semester. B: Do you attend school during the day or only at night? A: I only attend class part-time in the evenings. B: Do you drive a motorcycle or an automobile? A: I have both, but I usually use my car to get to school. B: Great, the price for that permit is thirty dollars; cash, check, or credit card? A: I'll pay cash. B: Do you need to buy a duplicate permit for a second vehicle? A: No, thank you. B: OK, here is your permit; enjoy the new semester. 3.audio A: I want to buy a parking permit, please. B: Are you a full-time student or do you attend part-time in the evenings? A: I attend both day and evening classes. B: Will you be riding a motorcycle or do you drive a car? A: I ride a motorcycle. B: That permit will run twenty-five dollars; will that be cash or credit card? A: I'll use a credit card, thank you. B: Do you need a second permit for a car? A: No, just the motorcycle permit. B: Fine, here it is and have a great semester!23. Parking at School
1.audio A: Can you tell me where I can park? B: Are you driving a motorcycle or an automobile? A: I drive an automobile. B: Fine. You can either park in the student lot or on the street. Do you know what a handicapped space is? A: Yes, I have seen those spots. B: Well, when you see the blue spots with the handicapped logo, do not park there unless you have a special permit. Are you going to be parking in the daytime or evening? A: I park in the evenings. B: Then you also need to be aware of the time limits on the street signs. Have you seen those signs? A: Yes, I have seen those signs. B: The signs always tell you how long you can park there and on what days. Do you know how to read the curb colors? A: Yes, I know what the curb colors mean. B: Well, just as long as you realize that red means no parking and white means loading and unloading, I think you know what you need to know. 2.audio A: Where should I park? B: Do you have a car or motorbike? A: I drive a scooter B: In that case, you can park either in a student lot or on the street. Are you aware of the marked handicapped spots? A: No, I haven't seen those spots. B: The handicapped logo with blue means that you are not to park there unless you have a handicapped permit. Will you mostly be parking during the day or night? A: I park in the daytime. B: Make sure you pay special attention to the street signs with time limits. Have you noticed those signs? A: No, I have not seen the signs. B: Pay attention to what the signs tell you in terms of time limits and what days you can park there. Do you know what the curb colors mean? A: No, I don't know what the curb colors mean. B: Just remember that red means absolutely no parking and white means loading and unloading only. I think you'll be good to go! 3.audio A: What is the best place to park? B: What vehicle do you usually bring to school? Is it an automobile or a motorbike? A: I drive a motorcycle. B: OK. That means you can park in the student lot or on the street. Have you seen the handicapped spots? A: I am not sure what a handicapped spot is. B: Look for the blue signs and blue marked spaces. Do you usually park in the daytime or the evening? A: I park days and evenings. B: Be careful about the time limits on the streets. Have you seen the signs for time limits? A: What signs? B: As long as you are careful reading the signs, you will always know how long you can park and what days are OK to park there. Are you aware of the curb colors? A: What curb colors? B: If you can remember that red means absolutely no parking and white means that you can only load and unload, you are going to be OK.24. Fighting a Parking Ticket
1.audio A: Hey, I got this parking ticket; can you help me figure a way out of it? B: First of all, did you park somewhere too long or in the wrong spot? A: I was there too long. B: Was the area clearly labeled with the time limit and all? A: Yeah, I saw it. B: You will need to convince the judge that you couldn't see the signs. A: Yeah, I understand. B: Whatever you do, you need to be respectful and polite to the judge. A: Yeah, you're right. B: Just try to talk to him about how IF you made a mistake that it won't happen again. A: OK, I will. B: Good luck! 2.audio A: Man, I got another parking ticket. I am so unlucky--what can I do? B: Was your car where it wasn't supposed to be, or did you stay there too long? A: I was in an area where I wasn't supposed to park. B: Could you tell where you were supposed to park and for how long? A: I could tell what I was supposed to do. B: That's too bad. That means that you can't use receipts or a witness to help you out. A: I guess not. B: Try brown-nosing the judge, but don't be too obvious about it. A: Sure, if it will help. B: Try and convince him that something was labeled wrong or something. A: Sounds good! B: Give it your best shot; it might work. 3.audio A: I don't know how to fight a parking ticket. B: Did you get written up for exceeding the time limit or for parking where you weren't supposed to be? A: Both. B: Did you see all the signs and just decide to blow them off? A: I was confused. B: Maybe you could explain that you are new and got confused--could you do that? A: If it might work, I'll go for it! B: Let the judge see that you are only a poor starving student who won't do it again. A: I can see how that might work. B: Without actually saying that the parking ticket guy was an idiot, make it seem as though it was HIS mistake, not yours! A: I could do that! B: Try it. It just might save you the price of a parking ticket.1. Health Insurance
1.audio A: I would like to purchase some health insurance. B: Have you ever purchased health insurance before? A: I have health insurance now, but I want to look into other choices. B: Do you know if you are interested in an HMO or a PPO? A: Could you explain the difference to me? B: To clarify it for you, with a PPO you pay more but you get to choose your own doctor. A: When I pay for a service, is the payment the same for a PPO or HMO? B: The payments are quite a bit higher for the PPO, but you can go anywhere you like. A: How much will an HMO cost me per month? B: Go to our website and fill in the questionnaire. Once we have all of your information, we can give you a quote. 2.audio A: I am calling to purchase health insurance. B: Do you have health insurance now? A: I was on my parents' policy, but I need to start buying my own. B: You can purchase an HMO or a PPO. Do you know what you want? A: I don't know what I want. B: Let me explain it to you. An HMO is a little cheaper, but you can only choose certain doctors. A: When I go to the doctor, do I pay the same out-of-pocket expenses for a PPO? B: The payments are a little lower for an HMO as long as you go to their doctors. A: How much will a PPO cost me per month? B: We need to factor in many things. Why don't you come in, and we will have you fill out a questionnaire. 3.audio A: I need information on purchasing health insurance. B: Is this the first time you have had health insurance? A: This is my first time buying health insurance. B: You have a choice of HMO or PPO. Do you understand the difference? A: I am not sure what those are. B: Just so you understand completely: An HMO is a little cheaper, but you have limited choices of which doctor you choose. A: If I need to use my insurance, are the payments the same for a PPO and HMO? B: By going to the providers on the HMO list, you save money in out-of-pocket expenses. A: Can you give me a comparison between a PPO and an HMO? B: We can mail you a questionnaire and when we have all of your information, we will mail you a quote.2. A Medical Emergency
1.audio A: What seems to be the problem? B: Oh, my God! It's my stomach. It's killing me! A: Where does it hurt the most? B: Right here! It hurts right here! A: How long has it felt like this? B: I felt OK when I woke up, and then, suddenly, I had this really sharp pain. A: Do you have a history of stomach pain? B: No, and I haven't done anything out of the ordinary. A: I think that we are going to have to get you to an emergency room right away. B: Thank you for helping me. 2.audio A: Can you tell me where it hurts? B: I am so glad they called you. It feels like something is really wrong with my stomach! A: Does it hurt when I push here? B: It's mostly on my right side. Right here! A: Have you been feeling this way for awhile? B: I started feeling kind of sick last night after dinner, but this morning the pain got really bad! A: Have you eaten anything unusual lately? B: No, not that I remember. A: We are going to take you to an emergency room right now. B: I will feel better when I know what the problem is. Thank you. 3.audio A: Where are you feeling the pain? B: I can't stand up! My stomach is killing me! A: Can you put your hand where it hurts the most? B: It hurts smack in the middle of my gut! A: Did this just come on suddenly? B: I felt OK until an hour or so ago, and then I just doubled over. A: Have you exercised strenuously or played sports recently? B: No, and I don't usually get a lot of stomachaches. A: We need to get you to an emergency room to see what the problem is. B: I think that that is the best way to figure out what is causing this. Thank you.3. Going to an Emergency Room
1.audio A: Sorry to bother you, but I was wondering if you could drive me to the emergency room. B: Of course. What is the problem? A: I am running a really high fever of 105 degrees, and I have a rash on my stomach. B: If you can, go and unlock the back door, so I can get in when I get there if you fall asleep. A: I can do that when I get off of the phone. B: Do you know where your driver's license and insurance card are? A: I already had them out before I called you. B: Where is your nearest emergency room? A: It's just a few blocks away. B: Fine, I am on my way. I'll be there in about five minutes. 2.audio A: I hate to call you this late at night, but could you possibly help me get to the emergency room? B: We will come right over. What happened? A: My temperature went up to 105, and I have a rash! B: Make sure that someone unlocks the back door, so I can get in if you fall asleep before I get there. A: I will do that in a minute. B: Make sure that you have your insurance card and driver's license where we can grab them. A: I know right where they both are. B: Is there an emergency room near you? A: It is on the other side of town, next to city hall. B: I am on my way. Give me ten minutes and I'll get to you. 3.audio A: I really need your help and want to know if you could drive me to the emergency room. B: I will take you there right away. What is wrong? A: I woke up with a rash and a temperature of 105! B: I want to be able to get to you when I get there. If you can unlock the back door right now, that would be great. A: I will make sure that I do that before you get here. B: Also, make sure that we have your driver's license and insurance card before we leave for the emergency room. A: I am getting them out while I am speaking to you. B: Do you know where your nearest emergency room is? A: It is near the bridge that crosses over the river. B: I am driving to you even as we speak. Hang in there!4. A Stomachache
1.audio A: You don't look so good. B: I have a major stomachache A: Did you eat something strange? B: I had spaghetti with clam sauce for lunch. A: Maybe you have food poisoning. B: Yes, that could have been it, but I haven't been feeling that great for the past few days. A: Are you under a lot of stress? B: Not really. Things have been going OK. A: Maybe you have a touch of the flu. B: I think that I might be getting the flu. 2.audio A: Are you feeling OK? B: My stomach is bothering me. A: What have you been eating? B: I had a ham sandwich with mayonnaise for lunch. A: Maybe the food had something wrong with it. B: It could be bad food, but I didn't feel so well yesterday, either. A: Have you been under a lot of pressure lately? B: I haven't been under any more stress than usual. A: Perhaps you have caught that bug that is going around. B: I feel like maybe I am coming down with the flu. 3.audio A: You look kind of green. B: I don't feel so good. I am feeling sick to my stomach. A: Have you had anything to eat lately? B: I had fried shrimp and clams for lunch. A: Perhaps the food was bad. B: Perhaps, but I haven't felt well for a few days now. A: Has anything been upsetting you lately? B: My stress level is pretty much what is usually is. A: Do you think that maybe you are getting the flu? B: It seems to me like I may have caught a bug.5. A Toothache
1.audio A: What can I do for you today? B: Doctor, I have the worst toothache! A: How long have you had this pain? B: For about a week or so, but it's gotten really bad in the last couple of days. A: Did you do anything that might have aggravated your tooth? B: You know, I was eating jawbreakers in the movies the other day, and I accidentally bit down really hard on one. A: What kind of toothbrush do you use? B: I just use a regular hard bristle toothbrush. A: Does it bother you when you eat something really cold? B: Yes, it definitely bothers me more when I do that. 2.audio A: So what brings you to my office today? B: My tooth is killing me! A: How long has your tooth been bothering you? B: It just started hurting me last night. A: Have you injured your tooth in any way? B: I think one of my fillings might be coming loose. A: Do you have a special kind of toothbrush that you like to use? B: I have an electric toothbrush. A: Does it bother you when you eat something really sweet? B: Oh yeah, when I do that, it hurts a lot more! 3.audio A: How have you been doing? B: I can't sleep or eat. I have a really bad pain in my tooth! A: How long have you had this toothache? B: It bothers me off and on, but it's gotten much worse these past few weeks. A: Is there anything that you've done to your tooth that might have caused the pain? B: My girlfriend told me that I grind my teeth a lot when I sleep. Maybe that is the problem. A: When you brush your teeth, what do you use? B: I use a soft bristle toothbrush. A: Does it bother you when you have to chew a lot? B: Absolutely. That set it off big time!6. Buying Over-the-Counter Medicine
1.audio A: Excuse me, could you help me pick out a lotion? B: Sure, what is the problem? A: I got poison oak while hiking, and I need something to help me with the itching. B: I can suggest a product called Technu that comes in a lotion or cream. A: Which do you prefer? B: Hikers tell me that the cream is best because it stays on longer. A: Is there anything else I can do to help with the itching? B: You can take an antihistamine. A: Thank you so much for all of the information. B: You are welcome. Please feel free to ask me a question any time you need help. 2.audio A: I need help picking out a lotion. B: It would be my pleasure to help you. What do you need help with? A: I picked up some poison oak while hiking, and I can't stop itching. B: We have Technu, and it is available in lotion or cream. A: Do you find that one works better than the other? B: I have heard that the cream is longer lasting. A: Is there anything I can take that will help with the itching? B: If you take an antihistamine, that would help a lot. A: Thank you for helping me figure out what to do with my poison oak. B: It was a pleasure. Come back anytime. 3.audio A: Can you help me find a lotion for a problem I am having? B: That's what I am here for. What questions can I answer for you? A: I have poison oak, and I need help with the rash that won't stop itching. B: The best product is Technu, and you can buy either the lotion or cream. A: Which one is best? B: The cream form is very popular. A: Can I do anything else to help with the itching? B: You could also take an antihistamine to help the rash go away quicker. A: I appreciate you helping me find a solution to the itching. B: Anytime you have a question, please feel free to ask.7. Filling Prescription
1.audio A: I need to get my prescription filled. B: You may pick it up in twenty minutes. A: If I wanted to, could I have it mailed to me? B: Yes, and you can renew this prescription by phone. A: Are there any special instructions about this medication? B: Take it three times a day. A: Can I take it with food? B: You should take this medicine with food and no alcohol. A: Are there any side effects with this medication? B: You might get a little dizzy, but that is it. 2.audio A: I am here to get my prescription filled. B: Your prescription will be ready in twenty minutes. A: Do you ever deliver prescriptions by mail? B: Yes, in fact, you can renew this prescription over the Internet and have it delivered to your home. A: How should I take this medication? B: You should take it twice a day. A: Should I avoid alcohol with this medication? B: You need something in your stomach when you take it. Don't drink alcohol with this medication. A: Should I expect any side effects? B: Sometimes you might feel dizzy, but that isn't common. 3.audio A: I am dropping off my prescription to get it filled. B: You can come back in twenty minutes, and it will be ready. A: If I couldn't wait, could the prescription be mailed to me? B: Yes, you can have it delivered or filled at any location in our HMO. A: When should I take this medication? B: You need to take it at bedtime. A: Should I take this medicine on an empty stomach? B: Don't mix alcohol with this medication, but you can take it with or without food. A: What are the side effects of this medication? B: You might feel a little dizzy at first, but it should pass.8. Normal Test Results
1.audio A: I was wondering if you have my test results in. B: I didn't see anything out of the ordinary, but I want you to log onto our website for a printout of all of the details. A: So, basically, I am OK? B: If there were any major problems, I would always notify you by phone to come in. A: What will I learn when I see the results on the website? B: A description of each test is given on the site. A: What will the numbers tell me? B: The website will give you a normal range and then tell you what your results are. A: Are all of my test results on that site? B: Your entire test history is on the site. You can compare your results from other years. 2.audio A: Could you tell me my test results? B: Your results are posted on the website. Just put in your password and you can see the exact numbers. A: Are you saying that all my results were normal? B: We always contact you by phone to come in if there is a need for follow-up. A: How will I know what the results mean on the website? B: The purpose of each test is given on the site. A: Will the numbers mean anything to me? B: The website will give you your results and then tell you what the normal range is. A: Can I see all of my test results at once? B: Yes, you can see every test for the past five years. You can compare them. 3.audio A: I think I was supposed to call for my test results today. B: If you go onto our website and put in your password, you can access your test results. A: Are you saying that there weren't any problems? B: I will always have you come in for a discussion if there is a major problem. A: Will I be able to read the results on the website and understand them? B: Yes, if you go there, you can see what each test is about. A: How will I know what the numbers mean? B: You can see your results and how they compare to the normal range. A: How can I see test results from tests I have taken before? B: We put all of your test results up in the same place. Just check the dates for what you need.9. Calling in Sick
1.audio A: Good morning, is this Ryan? B: You are speaking with Ryan. How can I help you? A: Ryan, this is Malia, and I need to call in sick today. B: What seems to be the problem? A: I went hiking and have terrible poison oak. B: When did you get that? A: I think I got it on Saturday, but it just showed up today. B: What are you doing for it? A: The doctor prescribed an ointment and gave me a shot. B: Good. You probably should be much better by tomorrow. 2.audio A: May I speak to Ryan, please? B: This is Ryan you are speaking with. What can I do for you? A: Hi, Ryan, this is Malia, and I will not be coming to work today. B: What is wrong with you? A: I have really bad poison oak and can't stop itching. B: How long have you had it? A: I've had it a few days, but the rash really got bad last night. B: How have you been treating it? A: I have some lotion that the doctor gave me, as well as an antihistamine. B: That should work. I'll see you tomorrow when you return to work. 3.audio A: I would like to speak with Ryan. B: This is Ryan. How may I help you? A: Ryan, this is Malia, and I am afraid that I am feeling a bit under the weather. B: Do you know what the problem is? A: I have a horrible rash from poison oak. B: Have you had it a long time? A: The doctor said that I probably have had it a few days. B: Have you been using anything for it? A: I bought some over-the-counter lotion, and I am taking an antihistamine. B: That will probably take care of your symptoms. I'll see you tomorrow.10. Missing Classes
1.audio A: Is this Professor Clark's office? B: This is Professor Clark speaking. A: This is Kalia from your morning literature class. B: Yes, what can I do for you? A: I had a skydiving accident over the weekend and won't be able to come to school today. B: My goodness! Are you OK? A: I broke my leg, but it is healing. B: How long will you be out of class? A: I should be able to return by next Monday. B: Fine. Well, thanks for calling and letting me know you will be absent. I hope you feel better soon. 2.audio A: Good morning, may I speak with Professor Clark, please? B: You are speaking with Professor Clark. A: Professor, I am Kalia from your morning literature class. B: Yes, how can I help you? A: I ran my car into a tree yesterday and need to miss a few days of school. B: Oh, my God! I hope you are all right. A: I have a concussion, but I will be OK. B: How much school will you miss? A: I only need to take this week off. B: I appreciate you calling and telling me that you won't be in class. See you next week! 3.audio A: Is this Professor Clark? B: Yes, I am Professor Clark. A: Professor, this is Kalia, and I am in your literature class on Monday mornings. B: Yes, how are you doing? A: I was partying hard over the weekend, fell down the stairs, and need time to recuperate. B: That sounds painful. Are you going to be OK? A: I sprained my wrist, but the doctor says it will be fine. B: How many days will you be out of school? A: The doctor said I should be good enough to return next week. B: I am glad you let me know that you will be missing class. Get well!11. Discussing Test Results
1.audio A: I was wondering if I could get my test results from the other day. B: Yes, I would like to schedule an appointment for you to come in and talk with me. A: Is something wrong with me? B: No, sometimes the test results aren't clear and we need to do more to get a clearer picture. A: Can we talk about it now? B: I would if I knew anything for sure, but I want to take a second look. A: When can I come and see you? B: You can come in this afternoon. If you would feel better, bring your husband with you. A: Now I know that something bad is up! B: Just relax. We will talk about it this afternoon. 2.audio A: The nurse said that you might have my test results in from the other day. B: I would like for you to come in and talk about a few more tests that I would like to run. A: Does this mean that you have bad news for me? B: I just want to talk to you about the tests that I want to run. A: Can't you just tell me now? B: I don't know anything for certain. We always do a double check if there is a question. A: I want to see you right away. B: You can come in this afternoon. If you are feeling too stressed, feel free to bring a friend along. A: I know for sure that something is wrong! B: Don't worry about a thing; we are just taking a second look and talking. 3.audio A: The lab said that you would be getting my test results in today. B: I want you to come in and discuss some further tests that I would like to run. A: I think that this is a bad sign. B: For now, I would like to run a few more tests to look into some of the problems that you mentioned. A: Why wouldn't you tell me over the phone? B: If there is any question about test results, we always do a recheck. A: I need to come in right away. B: I would be happy to see you this afternoon. If you are feeling upset, please bring a friend or relative along. A: You are scaring me! B: Come on in this afternoon and we will talk. It will be fine!12. Changing an Appointment Time
1.audio A: I have a doctor's appointment scheduled with Dr. Smith, and I need to change it. B: What day did you have it scheduled for? A: My appointment was on Tuesday. B: What time was it scheduled for? A: It was for two o'clock in the afternoon. B: I see your appointment. What day would you like to switch to? A: I would like to switch it to next Friday. B: What time would you like? A: I would like to come in at 10:00 in the morning. B: Fine, I will pencil that in right now. We will see you then. 2.audio A: I scheduled an appointment with Dr. Smith, and I can't make it on that day. B: What day was your appointment on? A: My appointment was on Monday. B: What time had you chosen? A: It was for 10:00 in the morning. B: I am looking at your appointment right now. What day would you prefer? A: I would prefer next Thursday. B: What time would be best for you? A: I want to come in at 2:00 in the afternoon. B: I am writing you down for that time. We look forward to seeing you. 3.audio A: Good morning, I made an appointment with Dr. Smith, but I have to change it. B: When you made your appointment, what day did you choose? A: My appointment was on Wednesday. B: At what time was that appointment? A: It was for 4:00 in the afternoon. B: I can see the appointment that you had. What day do you need to change to? A: I want to change to next Tuesday. B: What time would you prefer? A: I would prefer three o'clock in the afternoon. B: I will put you down for that time. Thank you for calling to reschedule.13. Going Home Early Because Of Being Ill
1.audio A: Professor, excuse me, but I need to leave early. B: What seems to be the problem? A: I am not feeling well. B: What is bothering you? A: I think I am beginning to have an asthma attack. B: Would you like someone to walk you over to the Student Health Center? A: No, I think that I should just go home because I have some medicine there. B: Do you need a ride home? A: I live in the dorms across the street, so I'll be OK. B: OK, then, hope you feel better soon. Check your e-mail for missed assignments. 2.audio A: Excuse me, professor. I need to go home now. B: Is everything OK? A: I just feel funny. B: What exactly seems to be the matter? A: I have a terrible headache. B: Do you think that you should go to the Student Health Center? A: I already have some medicine at home if I could just get there. B: Do you need someone to drive you home? A: Thank you, but the bus stops right at my house. B: Well, go home and rest up. Make sure you check the website for your assignments. 3.audio A: I am sorry, but I cannot stay for the rest of class today. B: Why do you need to leave early? A: I don't feel so good. B: What doesn't feel right? A: I feel as if I am going to be sick to my stomach. B: Perhaps you should get checked out at the Student Health Center before you go home. A: I have some medicine at home that I could take. B: Are you going to be OK to drive home, or would you like someone to go with you? A: Thank you, but my friend is in the library, and he can give me a ride home. B: We hope that you are feeling better soon. E-mail me if you have any questions.14. Having a Blood Test in the Lab
1.audio A: The doctor sent me over here to have my blood drawn. B: Certainly, please have a seat and roll up your left sleeve. A: What is this test for? B: Well, today your doctor wants us to check your white blood cell count. A: What does that tell him? B: Well, if it is elevated, you might have an infection. A: Will the blood test hurt? B: It is only a little pin stick. I am going to put a tourniquet on your arm to puff your veins up. A: Ouch! B: There we go! I got the blood that I needed. 2.audio A: My doctor says that I need a blood test. B: I can help you with that. Just have a seat and roll up your left sleeve. A: What are you taking my blood for? B: Your doctor has requested a check of your white blood count. A: What information does that give him? B: If your white blood cell count is off, it could signal an infection somewhere in your body. A: Is a blood test painful? B: I am putting a tourniquet on your arm to plump up the vein. It will only feel like a little pin prick. A: My God, that hurts! B: That was it! Thank you for coming in today. 3.audio A: I came to this lab to have my blood drawn. B: You are in the right place. Roll up your left sleeve and have a seat. A: What am I being tested for? B: Your doctor wants to know what your white blood cell count is. A: What does my white blood cell count tell him? B: Usually if your white count is off, the doctor suspects an infection. A: How much will it hurt? B: It is only a pin prick. I have to put this tourniquet on your arm to make the vein easier to find. A: Is that my blood going into that tube? B: That blood that just filled the tube is all that I needed. Thanks for coming in!15. Having a Cold
1.audio A: How are you feeling today? B: I have a terrible cold! A: Where do you think you picked that up? B: A lot of people in my gym have it. Maybe I got it from the equipment. A: Have you taken anything for it? B: I think that I am just going to rest and drink plenty of liquids for a while. A: Yes, staying rested and hydrated is really important. B: My mother also has this special potion with hot wine, cayenne pepper, and sugar that works miracles. A: You might want to ask the pharmacist for his suggestions if you get any worse. B: Yes, if my symptoms don't pass in a few days, I will ask for help. 2.audio A: You don't look so good. B: I feel horrible. I think I picked up a bug. A: Do you know who you got it from? B: A lot of people in my dorm are sick. Perhaps I picked it up there. A: Did you take any cold medication? B: I've been taking vitamin C and zinc and trying to get some rest. A: I think that rest and liquids are what doctors recommend for a cold. B: My grandmother swears by hot chicken soup for a cold. A: A pharmacist might be able to help you if your home remedies don't work. B: Yes, if I get worse, I will definitely look for extra help with this. 3.audio A: You look a bit under the weather. B: I am not feeling all the great. I think I have that crud that is going around. A: I know that it's going around the dorms. B: My boyfriend hasn't been feeling so well. Maybe he passed it on to me. A: I have some cold tablets if you would like one. B: Mostly, I feel like I need some rest and hot soup. A: Drinking liquids and getting rest is a good idea with a cold. B: My grandmother thinks that honey and whiskey is a good cure for a cold. A: You could always go to the pharmacy if it gets worse and you want suggestions. B: If things don't get better in a few days, I will look for some other solutions.16. Making a Doctor's Appointment
1.audio A: I need to make an appointment to see the doctor. B: What seems to be the problem? A: I have a rash that I need a doctor to look at. B: Do you have a fever with that rash? A: No, it just itches a lot. B: I have openings on Tuesday or Wednesday. Which would be best for you? A: I need an appointment on Tuesday. B: Fine, I am putting you down for 9:00 on that day. Would you like to see Dr. Smith or Dr. Jones? A: I would like to see Dr. Jones. B: I can schedule you with him with no problem. We look forward to seeing you. 2.audio A: Good morning, I would like to make a doctor's appointment. B: Can you describe your health concern? A: I have been having skin problems that aren't going away. B: Are you in any pain? A: No. Except for the rash, I feel fine. B: Would Tuesday or Wednesday be best for you? A: I would like to come in on Tuesday. B: I will write you in for that day at 4:00. You can see either Dr. Smith or Dr. Jones. A: I would like to see Dr. Smith. B: I will write you in on that doctor's schedule. See you then. 3.audio A: I need to come in and see the doctor. B: Are you scheduling a check-up, or are you ill? A: I have really itchy skin and think I may have to have it looked at. B: Have you been feeling any joint aches with that rash? A: No, but I have a low fever. B: I have times available for Tuesday or Wednesday. Which one would work best for you? A: I want to come in on Wednesday. B: I can fit you in on that day at 10:00. Dr. Smith or Dr. Jones is available. A: I would prefer Dr. Smith. B: You can see the doctor of your choice then, and we will see you at your scheduled appointment time.17. Blood Pressure
1.audio A: Have you been having any problems lately? B: No, but the nurse at school says that I should have my blood pressure checked. A: Do you have a history of high blood pressure? B: No, I have never been told that I have high blood pressure. A: High blood pressure is called the silent killer because it hardly ever has symptoms. B: How do you check for high blood pressure? A: We are going to use this cuff here, and it will give me a reading. B: What do the numbers mean? A: They tell me how much your heart is working at rest and when pumping blood. B: Good. That will help me know how I am doing. 2.audio A: How have you been feeling lately? B: I've been feeling a little light-headed lately. A: Has your blood pressure been high before? B: If I have high blood pressure, it is news to me. A: Usually people with high blood pressure have no symptoms, so we call it the silent killer. B: What do you use to check for high blood pressure? A: I am going to put a cuff on you to get a reading. B: What does the reading tell you? A: I get an idea of the pressure in your arteries when your heart is pumping blood versus at rest. B: I hope that the test results show me to be really healthy. 3.audio A: Have you been feeling OK lately? B: My coach wants you to check my blood pressure. A: Has anyone ever told you that you had high blood pressure? B: I don't have any symptoms of high blood pressure. A: People with high blood pressure seldom know they have it, which is why we call it the silent killer. B: What test do you do for high blood pressure? A: We will pump air into this cuff to get a reading. B: When you get the reading, what information does it give you? A: It tells me how hard your heart pumps blood and how much your arteries relax at rest. B: I am hoping that this test goes well for me.18. Not Feeling Well
1.audio A: So, how are you feeling today? B: I'm pretty tired. I haven't been sleeping well. A: Do you have enough time to get the right amount of sleep? B: I have enough time. I just can't seem to fall asleep and stay asleep. A: What time do you usually go to bed? B: I don't have one time in particular. I just go to sleep whenever I feel tired. A: Have you been under a lot of stress lately? B: I just lost my job, and I am unsure about being able to find another one. A: Have you ever tried doing relaxation exercises before you go to bed? B: I haven't ever tried that, but it sounds like a good idea. 2.audio A: How have you been doing lately? B: Actually, I haven't been sleeping well. I am kind of out of it. A: Is there some reason why you can't get enough sleep? B: I go to bed, but I just can't get comfortable enough to stay asleep. A: When do you turn in for the night? B: I usually try to go to bed around 11:00 or so during the week. A: Do you have a lot on your mind when you try to go to sleep? B: My mother is ill with cancer, and I think about her a lot. A: Do you ever meditate or read before bedtime? B: I usually watch a lot of television before I go to bed. Maybe I should try something else to help me quiet down. 3.audio A: Has everything been OK with you lately? B: I haven't been able to get a good night's sleep lately. I'm exhausted! A: Have you been too busy to get enough sleep? B: I try to go to sleep, but I just can't stay asleep. A: How late do you try to go to sleep? B: I go to bed when I finish my work. A: Has anything in your day-to-day life been bothering you lately? B: I am worried about how I am going to pay my tuition. A: You might consider listening to relaxing music as you go to sleep to clear your head. B: Doing something relaxing before I go to sleep sounds like a plan.19. Physical Check-up
1.audio A: Good morning, how are you doing today? B: I have been feeling pretty good, Dr. Smith. A: So, I can see by your chart that you are here for your annual physical. B: Yes, I am playing on the tennis team this year, and they are requiring me to get a physical exam. A: We are basically going to check your heart, lungs, blood sugar levels, and eyes, ears, and nose. B: I've kind of been having problems being out of breath. Can you look at that? A: Yes, I will check you for asthma, and maybe we can check you for allergies later. B: Thank you. What will the blood test tell you? A: We will be checking for blood sugar, cholesterol, and white blood cell count. B: I have been working hard to stay healthy. I hope the tests turn out well. 2.audio A: So how are we feeling today? B: Things are going well for me, Dr. Smith. A: Am I correct in thinking that you are here for your annual physical? B: Yes, I am applying for new health insurance, and I need a physical examination to qualify. A: Your basic physical exam will include lungs, heart, blood levels, and eyes, ears, and nose. B: I've been having a little trouble breathing. Would you look into that, please? A: We can do an allergy test, and later I can send you for an asthma test. B: I would appreciate it. When you give me a blood test, what are you looking for? A: I am going to check your cholesterol, blood sugar, and white blood cell count. B: I am expecting the tests to go well. I have been taking good care of myself. 3.audio A: Nice to see you; how have you been feeling lately? B: I have been feeling great, Dr. Smith. A: I am happy that you have decided to come in for your annual physical. B: Yes, I am going on a cross-country bike ride on vacation and want to make sure that I don't have any problems. A: We are going to look at your heart and lungs, do a few blood tests, and see that your eyes, ears, and nose are all working as they should be. B: I've been having trouble with congestion in my chest. Can you give me some tests for that? A: I can do a chest X-ray to check for congestion. B: That would be great. What is the blood test for? A: The blood test is for cholesterol, white blood cell count, and blood sugar. B: I have been feeling great. I don't imagine that any of my tests will turn out badly.20. Seeing a Doctor in an Emergency
1.audio A: I need a doctor's appointment right away! B: Is this an emergency? A: I am having trouble breathing. B: Have you had a cold lately? A: It has been going on for a few days now. B: You should hang up and dial 911. A: I don't think that this is that bad, but I need to see a doctor right away. B: Is there someone who can drive you to our Urgent Care facility on Sunset Blvd.? A: Yes, I can get a ride to Urgent Care. B: Good. When you get there, a doctor will be able to see you right away. 2.audio A: I need to see a doctor soon! B: Do you feel this is an emergency? A: My chest feels tight, and I can't catch my breath. B: Did this come on suddenly? A: It started yesterday. B: If you feel this is a real emergency, you should dial 911 for the paramedics. A: I don't want to dial 911, but I want to see a doctor right now. B: Do you have transportation to our Urgent Care facility on Sunset Blvd.? A: My friend can drive me to Urgent Care. B: That will work out well. Remember, if you have major problems, call 911. 3.audio A: I have to see the doctor right now! B: What makes you feel this is an emergency? A: I feel like I can't breathe well. B: How long has this been going on? A: It started last night. B: In the event of a real emergency, please dial 911. A: I know that I can dial 911, but I just want to go to the doctor now. B: In that case, can you come to our Urgent Care facility on Sunset Blvd.? A: My family can bring me to Urgent Care. B: Come in right away, and they will see you as soon as possible.21. Taking an X-Ray
1.audio A: I was told to come to you to get a chest X-ray. B: No problem. Just take your clothes off from the waist up and put the gown on, with the opening in the back. A: Then what should I do? B: You will stand over here up against this plate. A: Should I just stand naturally? B: You will raise your arms up shoulder high. A: Is this all right? B: Yes, you are doing great. A: Where will you be going? B: I need to stand behind this shield. Now you will take a deep breath, hold it, and let it out. A: Is that it? B: That's it. You can get dressed when the film is developed. 2.audio A: My doctor said that I need a chest X-ray. B: Just take your clothes off from the waist up and put this gown on, with the opening in the back. A: What should I do after that? B: You need to come over here and face this plate. A: Am I standing the right way? B: I will need your arms raised to shoulder height. A: Am I doing this the right way? B: Everything you are doing is perfect. A: Are you going to leave? B: I am just getting behind this screen. You need to take a deep breath, hold it, and then breathe normally. A: Is that all there is to it? B: You can get dressed as soon as the film is processed. We will be all done here. 3.audio A: I came here to get a chest X-ray. B: I will need you to take your clothes off from the waist up and put on the gown, leaving the opening in the back. A: What comes next? B: I will need you to face this glass plate right over here. A: Should I do anything else? B: Your arms need to be raised to shoulder height. A: Is this OK? B: So far, so good. A: How come you are walking away? B: I am not leaving. I just need you to take a really deep breath, hold it, and then let it out. A: Will I be finished then? B: You will be able to put your clothes on as soon as I have checked the film.22. Seeing the Doctor
1.audio A: I have been having a lot of headaches lately. B: Have you been having these headaches for a long time? A: I have had headaches my whole life, but they have been getting worse lately. B: Have you been under a lot of stress lately? A: I've been under stress, but no more than usual. B: Have you been getting enough sleep lately? A: No, I only sleep a few hours a night. B: Have you had any head injuries lately? A: Yes, actually I fell skiing last week and hit my head. B: I am going to send you for a CT scan, and I will see you again when we see the results. 2.audio A: I have been getting headaches almost every day lately. B: Have you just started getting a lot of headaches? A: I never had very many headaches before, but the last few weeks I have been getting a lot of them. B: Have you had any unusually stressful situations in your life lately? A: My mother just passed away last Tuesday. B: I'm sorry. How about sleep? Are you getting enough rest? A: I have been working really hard, and sleep has not been a priority. B: Have you bumped your head or fallen lately? A: No, I haven't hit my head. B: I am going to send you to a neurologist for a few tests. 3.audio A: I have had some really horrible headaches lately. B: How long have your headaches been going on? A: I get headaches occasionally, but they have been really bad lately. B: Any unusual amounts of stress in your life going on right now? A: I am getting ready to take my GRE. B: Have you been able to sleep regular hours? A: It has been hard for me to sleep with a bad headache. B: Has anything hit you in the head lately? A: I hit my head on a cupboard door a week ago. B: Let's have you come back in a few days and see how you feel.23. Talking to the Doctor about Problems
1.audio A: How are you doing today? B: I've been having trouble breathing lately. A: Have you had any type of cold lately? B: No, I haven't had a cold. I just have a heavy feeling in my chest when I try to breathe. A: Do you have any allergies that you know of? B: No, I don't have any allergies that I know of. A: Does this happen all the time or mostly when you are active? B: It happens a lot when I work out. A: I am going to send you to a pulmonary specialist who can run tests on you for asthma. B: Thank you for your help, doctor. 2.audio A: What brings you to my office today? B: I've been getting really short of breath, and my coach wanted to have a doctor check me out. A: Have you had the flu lately? B: No, I have been pretty healthy. I just have trouble taking a really deep breath. A: Have you ever been tested for allergies? B: Peaches make me break out, but I don't have any other allergies. A: Does this happen all the time or maybe a little more in the cold weather? B: I've noticed that it is worse when I am under stress, like during finals week. A: I feel that you should see a pulmonary specialist to check for asthma. B: I appreciate the referral, doctor. 3.audio A: Good morning, how have you been doing? B: I haven't been able to take a deep breath lately, and I need to know why. A: Have you had any type of bug lately? B: No, I've been feeling fairly good most of the time. It just is hard to breathe. A: Has anyone ever told you that you have allergies? B: No one has ever checked me for allergies. A: Does this happen more when you are under stress? B: When the weather gets really cold, it gets worse. A: I am going to refer you to a pulmonary specialist who can run tests on you for asthma. B: Thank you for pursuing this. I appreciate your help.24. Taking a Urine Sample
1.audio A: What is that plastic cup for? B: Your doctor has requested a urine sample. A: Am I supposed to pee into the cup? B: We want what we call a clean sample. Urinate a drop or so into the toilet, and then stop the flow and urinate into the cup. A: Then what do I do with the cup? B: You put the cup in the little cubby in the restroom and close the door to the cubby. A: What is this test for? B: He is looking to see if you have a bladder or urinary tract infection. A: When will I know the results? B: Your doctor will call you in a few days with the results. 2.audio A: Why are you handing me a plastic cup? B: Your doctor wants to test your urine and needs a sample. A: How am I supposed to do that? B: We need you to urinate like you normally would, and then stop and finish into the cup. A: What am I supposed to do with the cup when I am done? B: Leave the cup in the cubby in the restroom. Just close the cubby door and walk away. A: What kind of test is this? B: He wants to know if you have bacteria in your urine, which could signal an infection. A: How long will it take to get the results? B: We will send your doctor the results, and he will contact you. 3.audio A: What am I supposed to do with this plastic cup? B: That cup is for a urine sample. A: How, exactly, does this work? B: This particular test calls for you to urinate into the cup after you have urinated a little into the toilet. A: When I finish, what should I do then? B: You need to leave the cup in the cubby in the restroom, and the lab tech will get it from the other side. A: What is my doctor testing me for? B: If there are bacteria in your urine, it could mean an infection somewhere. A: Will I know the results right away? B: Your doctor will be contacting you with the results.25. How to Stay Healthy
1.audio A: Doctor, can you give me some suggestions on how to stay healthy? B: Well, first of all, you need to make sure that you eat the right foods. A: What are the best foods to eat? B: You should emphasize fresh fruits and vegetables, along with whole grains and protein. A: What should I avoid? B: You need to avoid highly fatty and greasy foods. You should also avoid too much sugar and caffeine. A: What else is important to stay healthy? B: You need to get plenty of exercise every day. If you smoke, you need to stop. A: Is it OK to drink alcohol? B: Actually, studies have shown that people who have one-half a glass of alcohol per day do better than those who don't drink. 2.audio A: Doctor, what is the best way to stay healthy? B: Having a good diet is probably the most important thing. A: It is very confusing to know what to eat. B: You need plenty of fruits and vegetables, small amounts of protein, and whole grains. A: Are there certain things that I should avoid? B: You shouldn't consume too much sugar or caffeine. Also, watch your intake of fatty food. A: After watching my diet, what else should I do? B: You need to stop smoking, and make sure that you get 30 minutes of exercise every day. A: Can I have a glass of wine now and then? B: As long as you don't overdo it, a glass of wine a day should be OK. 3.audio A: Doctor, what are some things I can do to stay as healthy as I can be? B: You need to eat healthy foods and avoid unhealthy foods. A: Sometimes I don't know what the best foods are. B: Fresh fruits and vegetables are important, along with protein and whole grains. A: What things should I avoid? B: You don't want to eat food that is high in fat. You need to avoid caffeine and sugar. A: Beyond diet, what else can I do to be healthy? B: Getting 30 minutes of exercise a day is important. If you smoke, you need to stop. A: How about having a beer on the weekend? B: Less than a serving of alcohol a day can actually be good for you. Do not overdo it!26. Prescribing Medicine
1.audio A: Is there a medication you can prescribe to help me with my problem? B: There are various choices of blood pressure medication that we can try. A: What is available? B: We could start with Hydrochlorothiazide, which is a diuretic. A: Are there many side effects? B: There really are not many side effects. You need to drink a lot of water when you take this pill. A: Is that the only medication I need to take? B: It might be, but for a while I also want you to take an ACE inhibitor, Lisinopril. A: What are the side effects of that drug? B: You may have a little bit of a dry cough, but you will feel much better. 2.audio A: Can I get some medicine to help me? B: For your high blood pressure, we have several choices of medications. A: What types of drugs can I try? B: Hydrochlorothiazide is a diuretic that helps with water retention. A: What about side effects from that medication? B: Most people have no side effects. You will have to make sure that you drink plenty of liquids with this medication. A: Do I only need to take that one drug? B: I am going to add a second drug for now, Lisinopril, which is an ACE inhibitor. A: What can I expect when I take that medication? B: You will feel much better except for the fact that you might have a little cough. 3.audio A: What about a medication to help me with my problem? B: There are several types of medications that we can try for your high blood pressure. A: What types of medications would be best? B: For water retention, I am going to start you on Hydrochlorothiazide, which is a diuretic. A: What are the side effects from taking that drug, B: You need to stay hydrated on this drug, but most people experience little side effects. A: Will that one medication take care of all of my problems? B: For now I want you to take a second drug, Lisinopril, an ACE inhibitor. A: Am I going to experience any complications with that drug? B: The most you will experience will be a dry cough but you probably won't experience anything negative.1. Visiting a Travel Agent
1.audio A: I need help planning my vacation. B: Sure, where would you like to go? A: I haven't decided where to go yet. B: Do you enjoy warm or cold climates? A: I am thinking that I might enjoy a tropical climate. B: I have some brochures here that you might like to look at. A: These look great! B: Do you know how much you want to spend on this vacation? A: I have about a thousand dollars to spend on this trip. B: Well, take these brochures, and get back to me when you want to make your reservations. 2.audio A: Could you help me with vacation plans? B: Do you know where you will be traveling? A: I am open to suggestions at this point. B: Are you wanting to travel to a tropical climate, or would you like to go somewhere with a cooler climate? A: I would like to travel to a cooler destination. B: I can give you some brochures that could give you some ideas. A: I will look at them right now. B: How much money is in your budget for this trip? A: I think that I can spend about two hundred dollars a day. B: Take your time choosing a destination and, when you've narrowed it down, I'll be happy to help you make a reservation. 3.audio A: I was wondering if you would be able to help me with vacation plans. B: Have you chosen your destination? A: I don't know where I want to go yet. B: Do you enjoy warm weather, or are you looking forward to a cooler vacation? A: A nice temperate climate would be best for me. B: Why don't you take a look at these brochures that might help you make up your mind? A: This place looks nice. B: Have you thought about what you would like to spend on this vacation? A: I just got a bonus and can spend about three thousand dollars total. B: I'll be happy to help you make a reservation whenever you decide upon a destination.2. Making a Plane Reservation
1.audio A: Could you help me make a plane reservation? B: I would be happy to help you. Where do you plan on going? A: I am going to go to Hawaii. B: For that destination, you may leave from Los Angeles or Burbank Airport. Which would you prefer? A: I think that I would rather leave from Los Angeles Airport. B: Would you prefer a morning or afternoon departure? A: I need to leave in the morning. B: Fine. On your return flight, do you have a preference as to morning or afternoon? A: I would prefer to return in the afternoon. B: I have booked you on your flight at a great rate. Here are your tickets. 2.audio A: I need to make a plane reservation. B: That is what I am here for. What is your destination? A: I will be traveling to Aspen, Colorado. B: Would you prefer to leave from Los Angeles or Burbank Airport? A: Burbank Airport would be best for me. B: You can leave in the morning of afternoon from that airport. Do you have a preference? A: I can only take a flight that leaves in the afternoon. B: I can book that for you right now. When you return, would you prefer morning or afternoon? A: I think that I would like a morning return flight better. B: I was able to book your flight, and I will print your tickets right now. Have a great trip! 3.audio A: I am planning a trip and need help making my airline reservation. B: Sure. Where are you traveling to on your trip? A: I will be vacationing in Oregon. B: You have an option of departing from Los Angeles or Burbank Airport. What is your preference? A: I live closer to Los Angeles Airport, so that would be the best choice. B: Does it matter to you if you leave in the morning or afternoon? A: I can leave at either time. B: I'll put you on a morning flight. Is a morning or afternoon return flight preferable for you? A: Either morning or afternoon would work for me. B: I'll give you an afternoon flight. Here are your tickets.3. Booking a Flight Online
1.audio A: Have you ever booked a flight online? B: I have booked airline tickets online many times. It has worked out great for me! A: How do you book airline tickets online? B: The best way is to go to a website like Travelocity or Expedia. They can help you find the best price. A: What information do I need to provide to book a flight? B: You need to know where you are going and when you want to travel. A: How do I get the cheapest rate? B: Usually you get the best price by having some flexibility in your travel time and dates. A: Can I fly on different airlines? B: You can choose the airline you prefer to fly with or let the website find you the best deal. 2.audio A: Do you think it is a good idea to book airline tickets online? B: I think that booking airline tickets online is the only way to go. A: Can you help me figure out how to book airline tickets online? B: You can find the best price by using a website like Travelocity or Expedia. A: What do I need to know to book a flight? B: You will need to type in the dates that you wish to travel and where you are going. A: How do I get the best price? B: If you have some flexibility in when you can travel, that will usually get you a better rate. A: Can I choose which airline I fly with? B: These sites deal with a lot of different airlines, so you can choose whichever one you prefer. 3.audio A: Is booking airline tickets online a good way to go? B: I have had really good luck booking airline tickets online. A: How do you book airline tickets online? B: Usually you can find the best price by using a website like Travelocity or Expedia. A: What are they going to ask me to book a flight? B: They will ask you when you will be traveling and what your destination will be. A: Is there anything special I can do to get the lowest price? B: You get a better rate if you aren't too particular about what time you travel. A: Do you have to fly with a particular airline? B: The travel sites deal with many different airlines. It is always up to you to choose who you will fly with.4. Buying a Plane Ticket
1.audio A: I would like to book a flight. B: I can help you with that. Where are you traveling to? A: I am traveling to Singapore. B: What date will you be traveling? A: I want to fly on June 14th. B: Do you want to fly out of Los Angeles International or Burbank Airport? A: I would like to fly out of Los Angeles International Airport. B: Would you prefer a morning or an afternoon flight? A: I would rather fly in the morning. B: Well, I have you booked on a flight that will fit your schedule. The tickets will arrive by mail in a few days. 2.audio A: I want to buy a plane ticket. B: I can help you make your reservation. What is your destination? A: My final destination is Sydney, Australia. B: What is your travel date? A: I am making a reservation for December 12th. B: Would you prefer to leave from Los Angeles International or Burbank Airport? A: I want to fly out of Burbank Airport. B: Would you rather fly in the morning or later in the day? A: I need an afternoon flight. B: I have you booked on a flight in the afternoon. Your tickets will arrive in the mail within 3 days. 3.audio A: I need to make a plane reservation. B: We can book your trip right now. What city are you flying to? A: I need to fly to New York City. B: What date would you like me to book this plane ticket for? A: I need a flight on July 4th. B: You can fly out of Los Angeles International or Burbank Airport. Which do you prefer? A: I will fly out of whatever airport has the cheapest price. B: If you have a choice, what time of day would you prefer to fly? A: I would like to be booked on the least expensive flight. B: I was able to find an inexpensive flight for you. We are sending you your tickets in the mail.5. Making a Hotel Reservation
1.audio A: I would like to make a hotel reservation. B: What day will you be arriving? A: I will be arriving on May 14th. B: How long will you be staying? A: I need the room for 3 nights. B: How many people will be staying in the room? A: I will be staying in the room alone. B: Would you like a smoking or nonsmoking room? A: We need a nonsmoking room. B: We have booked a room for you. Please be sure to arrive before 4:00 on your check-in date. 2.audio A: I would like to book a reservation at your hotel. B: What date would you like to make that reservation for? A: I need the reservation for May 14th. B: How many days do you need the reservation for? A: I will be staying for 3 nights. B: Is that a single room, or will there be more guests? A: I need a double room. B: We have smoking and nonsmoking rooms. Which do you prefer? A: We require a smoking room. B: Your room is booked. You must arrive before 4:00 the day you are to check in. 3.audio A: I need to book a room at your hotel. B: On what day will you be beginning your stay? A: Our stay will be beginning on May 14th. B: Can you tell me how many days you need the room for? A: Please book the room for 3 nights. B: Would you like a single or double room? A: I need a room for 3 people. B: Do you need a nonsmoking room? A: We must have a nonsmoking room. B: We have reserved your room. To secure the room, you must pre-pay with a credit card.6. Getting a Passport
1.audio A: I need to get a passport. B: The first thing you need to do is go to the post office and get an application. A: After I fill it out, where do I take it? B: You need to take your application to a specially designated post office. They will help you mail it to the proper place. A: How do I know where these agencies are? B: They are listed online. All you need to do is put in your ZIP code. A: Will I need to bring anything else? B: You also need to bring your original birth certificate and two pictures. Look at the website for details. A: What if I need a visa? B: You only need a visa for certain countries. Contact that particular consulate for details. 2.audio A: Can you help me figure out how to get a passport? B: The automobile club can provide you with an application. A: Where can I turn my application in? B: You need to go to a passport agency in your town. They will help you process it. A: How can I find which place to take it to? B: You can check in your phone book. A: What else do I need to bring? B: If you go online, the site will provide a detailed list of what you need to bring. A: Do I need to do anything special to get a visa? B: You must contact the consulate of the country that you wish to travel to. 3.audio A: I've never had a passport before and need to know what to do to get one. B: You can download an application. A: What do you do with the application? B: You need to take your application to a special post office or passport agency. A: Can you tell me how to find these agencies? B: Any post office can refer you to the proper place. A: Is the application the only thing that I will need to bring? B: The passport website lets you know what types of identification and pictures you must provide. A: What if I am going to a country that requires a visa? B: The requirements for a visa vary from country to country. You can go online to find out what the requirements are for the country you are visiting.7. Luggage Limits
1.audio A: I don't know how much luggage I can take on the plane with me. B: You need to look up each individual airline online to get their restrictions. A: I just wonder what the general rules are. B: In the United States, if you fly economy on a domestic flight, you usually have to pay for checked baggage. A: What about international flights? B: On international flights, you usually have a two-bag limit with weight restrictions. A: What about carry-on bags? B: All airlines will allow you to bring one small carry-on that will fit under the seat. Sometimes you can also bring a purse or handbag. A: Do you have any words of wisdom for travelers in regard to luggage? B: Keep it light in regard to what you pack. Figure out what you absolutely need and leave the rest at home. 2.audio A: I am getting packed for my vacation and don't know what the luggage restrictions are. B: You could call the airline that you will be flying, and they can tell you what you can bring. A: I just need to know what most of the airlines have decided to do. B: Unless you fly on a discount carrier, you usually have to pay a fee for checked baggage if you fly economy. A: Do I also have to pay on an international flight? B: Some international airlines charge a fee for extra bags or weight but allow you a free bag. A: How much carry-on luggage may I bring? B: You may bring a carry-on piece of luggage, and usually you can bring a handbag also. A: What overall suggestions do you have regarding travelers and luggage? B: Do not bring anything on a trip that you don't really need. Think of it as leaving space for anything that you might want to purchase along the way! 3.audio A: I heard that the airlines are changing the luggage restrictions, and I need to find out what they are. B: There are online sites that list the general restrictions of the airlines. A: Because I fly a lot, I need to pack in a way that will be suitable for most airlines. B: Except for the discount carriers, you almost always have to pay a fee for checked baggage if you fly economy within the U.S. A: Do they charge a fee for baggage on an international flight? B: Almost all international carriers charge for excessive luggage. You are limited in weight and size. A: Is carry-on luggage allowed? B: You are restricted in what you may carry on. You almost always can bring one small piece for free. A: What do you think is the most important thing to remember when packing for a trip? B: Pack lightly! You don't want to haul around or pay fees on things that aren't essential.8. Carry-on Luggage
1.audio A: I haven't traveled much and need to know what I can carry in my luggage. B: There are different considerations. You have to consider airline rules and rules for customs. A: How do I find out about each country's Customs regulations? B: You can go to a website for the particular country you are interested in. A: Is there anything that I should keep in mind for all countries? B: Do not ever lie about what you are carrying in your luggage. If you get caught, there is a major fine just for lying. A: How about regulations for what you can carry on an airline? B: The Internet is a good source for special regulations for particular airports and airlines. A: I heard that I can't bring my own bottled water on the plane. B: You can buy water at the airport once you pass luggage inspection. 2.audio A: What can I carry in my luggage when I travel on an airline trip? B: When you fly, you need to think about what you can carry onboard and what you can take into a particular country. A: Where can I go to find out about Customs regulations? B: Just Google the country you are interested in with these keywords: Customs and restrictions. A: Are there any general rules for all countries? B: Always answer all questions accurately. If you get caught omitting anything, you will be fined and possibly detained. A: What about airline regulations for the contents of your luggage? B: If you go to a website for a particular airport or airline, you can get specific information. A: Is it true that I can't even bring my own water with me? B: You can bring an empty bottle with you if you like and fill it up once you pass inspection. 3.audio A: How can I find out what I can carry in my luggage on an airline flight? B: You have to think about Customs regulations and airline regulations. A: What is the best place to get information about the Customs regulations for a country? B: It is easier to go online, but if you can't do that, you can write the Customs Office for the country you are interested in. A: What is the most important thing I should keep in mind as far as Customs is concerned? B: Always be honest in declaring everything you are carrying. Otherwise, you can be fined for not declaring everything. A: How do you find out what you can carry in your luggage for a particular airline? B: You can always call the airline you are flying, and they can give you specific information. A: Can I at least bring my own bottled water with me? B: You can't bring your own water. You must buy it at the airport.9. Dropping Off at the Airport
1.audio A: Can you drive me to the airport tomorrow afternoon? B: I would be happy to drive you to the airport. When do you need to leave? A: For an international flight, the airline wants us to check in two hours in advance, so I need to leave my house at 2:00. B: Do you have a lot of luggage to check in? A: I am only carrying one large bag and a carry-on. B: I'll bring our smaller car then. Do you know where you need to get dropped off? A: Yes, I am flying out on Singapore Air to Sydney, so I need to be at the International Terminal. B: Will I be able to come in with you to say goodbye? A: Actually, with airport regulations being so strict, you should probably just drop me off at the curb. B: That will work out fine. Just give me a call if anything changes. 2.audio A: If you are free, I was wondering if you could give me a ride to the airport this afternoon. B: Sure, I'll give you a ride. What time do you need to get there? A: I need to leave my house at 2:00 so I can get to the airport two hours before my flight. B: How much luggage are you bringing? A: I have my carry-on, a purse, and a large suitcase. B: I won't have to drive our larger car then. Do you know where your terminal is? A: I need to be dropped off on the second level of the International Terminal since I am flying to Sydney on Singapore Air. B: Do you want me to go in with you at the airport to help you pass the time before you leave? A: I would like that, but only ticketed passengers can go into the departure area. B: I'll drop you off wherever you need to be dropped off. See you later! 3.audio A: Could you help me out with a ride to the airport this afternoon? B: I can give you a ride with no problem. What is your departure time? A: My flight departs at 4:00, so I need to leave my house at 1:00 to get to the airport by 2:00. B: Are you bringing a lot of bags with you? A: I am bringing my purse, a carry-on, and a large suitcase. B: Your stuff should all fit in my car just fine. Do you know which terminal you are going to? A: Since I am flying to Sydney on Singapore Air, I need to be dropped off on the second level of the International Terminal. B: Can I go inside the airport with you and maybe we can have a drink before you leave? A: They only allow ticketed passengers into the departure area, so you'll have to drop me off at the curb. B: I can take you wherever you need to go. Let me know if there are any changes to your travel plans.10. Picking Up at the Airport
1.audio A: Would you be able to pick me up at the airport next Sunday? B: Sure, I would be happy to help you. What time are you arriving? A: I will be arriving at 3:00 in the afternoon. B: By the time you pick up your luggage, it will be around 3:30. What if I meet you outside at the curb? A: That would be a good time to meet, but what if I am running late? B: I can track your plane online. I can just put in the flight number and I can see if you are on time. A: Can you make sure that you have your cell phone with you so I can call you? B: Yes, that would be good idea. A: If something happens and you can't make it, just let me know and I'll book a Super Shuttle. B: Don't worry. I'll be able to pick you up. 2.audio A: I am flying in next Sunday and was wondering if you might be able to pick me up at the airport. B: I can pick you up. What time does your flight arrive? A: My flight arrives at 3:00 in the afternoon. B: I think if I am at the curb at 3:30, that would allow you time to pick up your luggage. How does that sound? A: I think that would work out well, but what if the plane is late? B: I can call the airline, and they will tell me if the flight is delayed. A: I am going to carry my cell phone so I can call you. B: Yes, that would help us find each other at the airport. A: If you find that you have to make other plans, I can always book a Super Shuttle to pick me up. B: You don't have to take a Super Shuttle. I'll be there. 3.audio A: Could you help me out and pick me up at the airport next Sunday? B: It would be no problem to pick you up. When is your flight arriving? A: I am coming in around 3:00 in the afternoon. B: I think that by the time we factor in half an hour to clear Customs, that maybe I should meet you at the curb at 3:30. A: I will meet you at the curb, but how will you know if the plane is delayed? B: Don't worry. I can track your flight on my iPhone browser. A: I want to be able to call you on my cell phone in a pinch. B: I'll make sure to keep my cell phone with me and turned on. A: If it doesn't work out, just let me know and I can take a Super Shuttle. B: You won't need to take a Super Shuttle. Just stay in touch and look for me!11. Going through the Customs
1.audio A: Could you tell me how to get my bags? B: Just go straight ahead, down the escalator, and there will be signs directing you. A: Where do we clear Customs? B: You will pick your bags up first. A: Should we have our passports out? B: You should have your passport out and your Declarations form totally filled out before you get into line. A: My friend here is continuing on to Puerto Rico, and we were wondering if she has to go through Customs. B: Travelers who are continuing on to another country will check in over there and be directed where to go next. Their bags have been checked through. A: Are there any restrooms in this area? B: Yes, right over there after you pass through the line. 2.audio A: I have never arrived at this airport before and need to know where to go next. B: Go to the end of the walkway, down the stairs, and to the right. A: Do we need to clear Customs before we go get our bags? B: You will clear Customs and Immigration when you have picked up your luggage. A: What do I need to have out when I pass through Customs? B: Make sure that your passport is out and that your Declarations form is complete. A: My seatmate here is traveling through to Canada, and I told her that she probably doesn't have to clear Customs. B: People who are not entering the United States should go to the left and follow the directions given to them. Their bags are already routed through to their final destination. A: Can we use the restrooms before we clear Customs? B: Yes, there is one right over there especially for this area. 3.audio A: Where is the luggage claim area? B: You can get to Baggage Claim by going down the escalator and following the signs. A: Don't I have to clear Customs before I go get my bags? B: After you have picked up your bags, you will be directed to Customs. A: Do I need to have this Declarations form filled out before I get there? B: Do not get in the Customs and Immigration line until you have your passport out with your completed Declarations form. A: My brother won't be staying in the U.S. but is continuing on to Mexico. B: Passengers continuing on should check in with the attendant on the left who will direct them to where they can connect with their next flight. A: Is there a restroom we can use in this area? B: Of course, right over there on your left.12. Talking to a Curbside Agent
1.audio A: Can you help me figure out where I should go first to check in at this airport? B: If you already have your ticket, we can take your bags here at the curbside check-in. A: How do I know what gate to go to? B: There are arrivals and departures listed on the screens inside. A: Is there someplace where I can find out what I can carry in my baggage? B: There are signs posted near the baggage check area to help you know what the rules are. A: Can my friend go inside with me? B: Your friend can go with you to the ticket counter but not past the security check. A: When I return, will this curbside area be a good place to get picked up? B: This area is only for departures. The bottom level is for arrivals. 2.audio A: I don't know the departure procedures at this airport and was wondering if you could help me. B: If you need to pick up your ticket, you need to go to the ticket counter right inside the door. They will check your bags for you. A: I don't know where my plane is departing from. B: There are agents for your airline at the counter in the corner. A: Where can I find out what I can carry on in my bag? B: There should be a list of restrictions printed on your ticket. A: Can I take my friend along with me to say goodbye? B: Only ticketed passengers can go past the security checkpoint. A: Is this the area for departures and arrivals or only departures? B: This is the drop-off area for departures. Arrivals are on the lower level. 3.audio A: I am flying out today and need to know where I should begin checking in. B: If you only have a carry-on and already have a ticket, you may proceed directly to the gate to check in. A: Do you know what gate my plane is leaving from? B: Check on the screens when you go through baggage inspection for your airline. A: I need to know what the restrictions are for carry-on luggage contents. B: Check out the list of banned carry-on materials on the signs inside the airport. A: I have a lot of time to kill before my flight departs and want my friend to keep me company. B: For security purposes, only ticketed passengers can go to the gate. A: Can my friends pick me up here when I return? B: The curbside area is a departure area only. Arrivals are downstairs.13. Talking to a Flight Attendant
1.audio A: Can I ask you some questions about the in-flight instructions? B: I would be happy to help you clarify anything you need help with. A: Could you help me find out where my nearest exit is? B: There is a card in your seat pocket that shows you where your nearest exit is. Yours is two rows in front of you. A: Where is my oxygen mask that you were talking about? B: Your oxygen mask is above you, next to the reading light. It will drop down when you need it. A: I am concerned about landing in the water. B: The life jackets are under your seat. You can also use your seat cushion as a flotation device. A: What is the most important thing we can do to stay safe? B: The most important thing you can do is keep your seatbelt fastened when the captain asks you to. 2.audio A: I am kind of confused about the in-flight instructions and need to ask you a few questions. B: It would be my pleasure to help you with any questions you might have. A: Where is that card that shows my nearest exit? B: That card is in the seat pocket right in front of you. Your nearest exit is directly behind you. A: Is my oxygen mask up here? B: Your oxygen mask will drop down if we lose cabin pressure. A: Do we have any life jackets on this plane if we need them? B: Your seat cushion can be used as a flotation device and your life jacket is under the seat cushion. A: It seems really windy outside. B: The wind won't be a problem. Always make sure that your seatbelt is fastened when you are requested to fasten it. 3.audio A: Would it be all right if I asked you a few questions about your in-flight instructions? B: I would love to help clarify any questions you might have. A: When you were talking about the nearest exit, what were you talking about? B: There's a card in this seat pocket that shows you where your nearest exit is. Your nearest exit is right here. A: What if I need an oxygen mask? B: The oxygen mask is above you and will drop down if you need it. A: Where are the life jackets? B: You will find your life jacket under your seat if you need it. Also, you have a seat cushion that can be used as a flotation device. A: If I want to be safe, what can I do? B: Keep your seatbelt fastened at all times. If you fall asleep, keep it fastened loosely around you in case we hit turbulence unexpectedly.14. Talking to a Seatmate
1.audio A: That rain is really coming down out there! B: Yes, it's kind of crazy weather outside. A: I get kind of nervous flying in this kind of weather. B: I don't think anyone feels all that comfortable flying in a storm. A: Do you think it will be this bad the whole trip? B: On the weather channel, this storm looked to be a big one. It will probably be with us for a while. A: I worry about too much ice on the wings. B: I have to believe that our pilot knows what he is doing and we'll be okay. A: When do you think the pilot will turn off the Fasten Your Seatbelt sign? B: He'll turn it off as soon as he knows that we are through the turbulence. A: Do you think that we are going to crash? B: Maybe. You just never know. 2.audio A: It sure is windy out there! B: It definitely is not the perfect day to fly, is it? A: I am scared of flying to begin with, but bad weather makes it a little worse. B: Anyone who actually enjoys flying in bad weather is out of their mind. A: Will the whole flight be this bad? B: I think that it will probably let up once we get out of here. Let's cross our fingers! A: What if we hit a flock of birds? B: Plane crashes are very rare. We'll be fine. A: Do you think that the pilot will ever turn off the Fasten Your Seatbelt sign? B: The pilot needs to make sure that there is no more turbulence before he lets us get up. A: Do you think that we are going to die? B: Can I buy you an alcoholic beverage? 3.audio A: I can't believe how bad the weather is today! B: Yes, according to the weather report, we will be flying through a pretty nasty storm. A: I don't really like flying in this kind of weather. B: It is normal to feel a little nervous about flying in bad weather. A: How long do you think this will last? B: Usually the pilot can get enough altitude to get above it. I hope that happens this time! A: What if one of the engines stops working? B: I trust that the airline wouldn't let us take off without feeling that all was okay. A: How much longer do you think that the pilot will leave the Fasten Your Seatbelt sign on? B: When we are past the turbulence, I am sure that the pilot will shut the light off. A: Do you think we are headed for an air disaster? B: Would you like a pillow and blanket so you can take a nap?15. Ordering Food and Drink
1.audio A: I was wondering if I could order something to drink. B: Yes, we have alcoholic beverages as well as coffee, tea, or soda. A: How much do drinks cost? B: Our alcoholic beverages are five dollars each. All others are complimentary. A: When will our meals be served? B: We will serve a snack with the beverages. Dinner will be served a few hours into our flight. A: What are our dinner choices? B: You will have a choice of chicken, fish, or beef. I will be bringing a menu by shortly. A: I am a vegetarian and need a vegetarian meal. B: Vegetarian meals need to be requested at least two days before your flight. I might be able to find you extra servings of vegetables, however. 2.audio A: I am getting thirsty and was wondering if I may order a drink. B: Yes, I would be happy to take your drink order. We have coffee, tea, or soda as well as bar drinks. A: Do you charge for beverages? B: We offer nonalcoholic beverages for free. Our bar drinks are five dollars each. A: Are we going to get fed on this flight? B: You will get a small snack served with your beverage. We will be serving dinner about halfway through the flight. A: Do we have a choice of what we get for dinner? B: Tonight we have chicken, fish, or beef to choose from. You will get a chance to look at a menu a little before our mealtime. A: Do you have vegetarian meals? B: We serve many different meals for people with religious or dietary restrictions. We do need to know about this at the time you book your flight. 3.audio A: When you get a chance, could you take my drink order, please? B: On this flight you may have your choice of bar drinks or coffee, tea, or soft drinks. A: What is the price of drinks? B: Our alcoholic beverages are five dollars apiece. All others are two dollars each with free refills. A: Do we get to eat on this flight? B: We always pass out a small snack with your beverage. You will be served dinner in a few hours. A: What are we having for dinner tonight? B: We are serving a chicken, fish, or beef plate. You may select whatever you choose. A: Can I order a vegetarian plate? B: With advance notice, we are able to accommodate a wide variety of special diet needs. Once we are in the air, unfortunately, there isn't much we can do.16. Missing Connecting Flight
1.audio A: My flight just arrived late, and I need to know what to do. B: That's okay. The airline computer is keeping track of what is happening with you. A: Do I have to call anyone? B: By speaking with us at the arrival gate, we can fix the problem for you and direct you. A: What if there are no more connecting flights for today on this airline? B: We will go online to see if there is something available with this airline. If we need to, we can check for a flight with another carrier. A: What if I can't find another flight out of here tonight? B: We can help you find transportation to a local hotel. A: Will the airline pay for my room if I have to spend the night at the airport? B: Since the flight delay was our fault and you are continuing on with our airline, we will cover the cost of a hotel room. 2.audio A: Our flight was late, and I missed my connecting flight. B: We can help you find an alternate flight that will get you where you are going. A: Whom should I call? B: The arrival gate is where you need to find someone to help you. You are in the right place. A: I think the flight we missed was the last flight out of here today. B: We can go on the computer to try to find an alternate flight on another airline if we cannot accommodate you. A: What if I get stuck here and can't get out of this airport? B: There is a shuttle that is still running and can take you into town to a hotel. A: I don't have any money for a hotel room. B: The flight that you missed is not with our airline, and we would not have suggested booking the flights so close together. We won't pay for your hotel room. 3.audio A: I had a connecting flight, but our arriving flight was late. B: We will help you make alternative plans. A: Can you give me the number of the airline so that I can call? B: The airlines always have personnel at the arrival gate to help direct you when a flight is late. We can help you right here. A: I remember that when we booked this flight, our connecting flight was the only one on this day. B: Our ticketing is tied in with other airlines. If we cannot accommodate you, perhaps another airline has some open seats to your destination. A: Where will I stay if I can't get another flight tonight? B: Since I believe there is a flight out of here at 5:45 in the morning, you may want to consider just staying at the airport. A: I don't think I should have to pay for a hotel room. B: We will pay 50 percent of the price of your room.17. Ground Transportation
1.audio A: I just arrived and need help getting transportation to my hotel. B: There are shuttles, taxis, and buses that go all over the city. A: Which one is the best form of transportation? B: It depends on where you want to go. If you are going to a well-known hotel, they have their own shuttles that drop you right off at the door. A: Where can I catch a cab? B: All ground transportation leaves from the island as you walk out the arrivals gate. A: Where can I rent a car? B: The car rental agencies are against the wall as you exit. A: Are there any subways in this town? B: We have a subway system, but you need to take a shuttle to get to the station. 2.audio A: I need help figuring out how to get to my friend's house in the city. B: You may take a shuttle, a taxi, or a bus to get wherever you need to go. A: Which form of transportation is preferable? B: It depends on what you are looking for. If you are looking to travel inexpensively, a bus might be your best bet. A: Where do the buses pick you up? B: The ground transportation center is right outside the exit leading to the street. A: Is there a car rental place around here? B: You can find a car rental agency just outside of baggage claim. A: Is there a subway in this city? B: Our subway station is a mile outside of the airport. I would suggest you take the designated shuttle to get there. 3.audio A: I need information about my options for ground transportation. B: This city has many taxis, shuttles, or buses to transport you to your destination. A: Is one form of transportation better than another? B: It depends on where you are traveling. If your destination is close by, you might want to just grab a taxicab. A: Where are the shuttle pick-up points? B: When you pick up your luggage, walk out of the door and you will see the transportation kiosk. A: Where are the car rental agencies? B: You will see the car rental agencies as you walk down the hallway as you exit. A: I heard that you have a very good light rail system in this city. B: We have a subway station in the airport. The in-airport moving sidewalk system will take you to it.18. Arranging a Tour of the City
1.audio A: I was wondering if you could help me book a few tours. B: You have come to the right place. How many days will you be visiting here? A: I will be here for a week. B: Have you ever visited our city before? A: This is my first time visiting this city. B: What are you interested in? Do you enjoy museums and buildings, or would you rather hit some outdoor hotspots and venues? A: I really enjoy visiting museums and art galleries. B: We have tours for all interests. A: Do you have a city tour? B: Yes, in fact, I usually suggest that to visitors. 2.audio A: I need help knowing how to book some tours. B: We will be able to book your tours here. How long will you be here? A: I am only staying for three days. B: Is this your first stay in our city? A: I have been here before on a business trip but didn't really have a chance to see much. B: Have you thought of what types of things you would like to see? Would you maybe like to visit some outdoor venues or nighttime hotspots? A: I love being outdoors and would love to spend some time at the beach. B: We have a tour that can take you where you can see all of that. A: Do you have a tour where I can get a quick overview of the city? B: We do have tours like that, and I think that that is a good place to start. 3.audio A: I need help figuring out what to see and visit in this city. B: We are definitely the place to come to when booking tours. What is the length of your stay here? A: I am on a layover and will only have today and tomorrow morning to sightsee. B: How familiar are you with our city? A: Actually I was born here but haven't been here in twenty years. B: Do you have any ideas of what you would like to see? Perhaps you would enjoy our world-renowned museums or a visit to our magnificent zoological gardens. A: I was interested in checking out local architecture. B: I think that you would enjoy a number of our tours. A: Is there any way that I can take a quick tour of the city, so that I can get some idea as to what I might like to see?19. Complaining about a Tour
1.audio A: I am having some big problems on this tour. B: What seems to be the problem? We are here to help you. A: This tour company seems very disorganized. No one seems to have a clear picture as to where we are going and when we are going to get there. B: I will see what I can do about that. How about the accommodations on the tour? A: So far, we have been staying in really out-of-the-way accommodations. B: Is anything wrong with your room? A: The television in our room was broken, and they didn't send anyone to fix it. B: I will complain to the hotel manager about that. How about the hotel restaurant? A: The food in the restaurant was terrible, and a few people from our group got sick. B: I am so sorry that you had such a bad experience. We would like to offer you a free city tour and lunch to make it up to you. 2.audio A: I paid good money for this tour and would appreciate some help with some problems that have come up. B: I would like to help you smooth out any difficulties you are having. What can I help you with? A: This tour company can't seem to coordinate anything. We are always arriving after something is closed or get there when the guides for the site are on a break. B: We are trying to fix that. Are the accommodations to your liking? A: Our accommodations are pretty substandard. B: Is there anything in particular that is wrong with your room? A: The room smelled of smoke, even though it was supposed to be a nonsmoking room. B: You should not have to put up with that. Was the hotel restaurant good? A: Actually a few people from our group got sick, and everyone thinks it was from the bad dinner that we ate. B: Our tour company takes pride in providing excellent tours. Please let me offer you a free city tour and lunch as an apology. 3.audio A: I would like to discuss some problems that I am having with this tour. B: I am sorry you are having a difficult time. What may I help you with? A: This tour company doesn't seem to know the town very well. We are always getting lost! B: I am sorry that that has been the case. How would you rate your accommodations? A: Our accommodations are not very pleasant. B: What don't you like about your room? A: The room was very noisy, and we couldn't get to sleep. B: That is unacceptable. Did you at least enjoy your dinner in the hotel restaurant? A: The food was horrible at the hotel restaurant, and a few of us got sick after eating there. B: I am glad that you told me about the problems. I would like you to be my guest for a free massage at the hotel spa tonight.20. Sightseeing
1.audio A: Where should we go sightseeing today? B: I think that some things might be best done in the morning and others in the afternoon. A: I think that I would like to go to the beach this morning. B: That would be a good place to start our sightseeing. We could have breakfast there. A: I hear that there is a very nice natural history museum there. B: Yes, it would be nice to check that out since we are so close by. A: Where should we go in the afternoon? B: I think that I would like to go to the amusement park. It's supposed to be quite good. A: At the end of the day, I would love to take in the sunset at therestaurant by the park. B: That sounds like a great idea! Let's go get a map. 2.audio A: It's so hard to choose where to go first on our sightseeing trip! B: We could think of what would make a good morning activity versus an evening activity. A: I really wanted to make sure that I got a chance to go to the local beach. B: I think that that would be a fun beginning to our day. We could walk around there. A: I heard that the Natural History Museum is pretty close to the beach. B: I heard the same thing. We might as well go there since we are just down the street. A: What would be a good place to go to in the afternoon? B: The local amusement park is supposed to be wonderful. A: The restaurant on the edge of the park would be a great place to watch the sun go down. B: That sounds like a perfect sightseeing day to me. 3.audio A: There are so many places to go on our sightseeing trip that I am having trouble narrowing it down. B: Let's figure out what to do before lunch and later figure out what to do in the afternoon. A: I heard that the local beach is a place that can't be missed. B: That would be a relaxing way to begin our morning. It would be good to get out in the sun. A: The Natural History Museum is close by, isn't it? B: That museum is supposed to be fantastic! A: Do you have any suggestions as to where we could go in the afternoon? B: We could check out the local amusement park. A: We could eat dinner and watch the sun go down at that restaurant by the park. B: That could really end up being a great day!21. Making Alternate Plans
1.audio A: I guess that we won't be going rollerblading today with all this rain! B: Yes, rollerblading in six inches of water would not be fun. What would you like to do instead? A: I think that maybe we could check out the local mall, grab some lunch, and maybe see a movie. B: Yes, that sounds like a relaxing way to check out the local culture and still stay dry. A: What else could we do in bad weather? B: You know, we could take a double-decker bus tour of famous haunted houses and buildings. A: That would be fun, and the rain would only add to the atmosphere. B: There is an old English pub next door. Maybe when we finish with the haunted house, we can duck in there for some brew. A: What a great idea! B: If we are lucky, maybe they'll have some great food at the pub for supper. 2.audio A: This rain sort of blows our chances of going rollerblading! B: No, I don't think that we will be able to do what we planned to do. What can we do for fun today? A: There is a large indoor mall just down the street with an incredible ice rink we could check out. B: We could stay inside and dry, and still get out of this hotel room for a while. A: I am trying to think of something else that we could do in bad weather. B: We could sign up for that double-decker bus tour of haunted houses. A: The rainy day would only add to the haunted house atmosphere. B: I think that when we are done with our haunted house touring, we should pop into the English pub next door for a beer. A: I could go for that! B: I hope that we can get some nice hot food for dinner at the pub. 3.audio A: I think that rollerblading today is kind of not happening in this rainstorm. B: We definitely need to come up with a different plan to amuse ourselves. What do you think would be fun? A: There is a large indoor mall hooked onto the Modern Art Museum just down the street. B: That would allow us to stay dry and still get a feel for the local culture. A: I wonder what the locals do in bad weather. B: There is a sign for a double-decker tour of haunted houses in the lobby. A: Haunted houses would be a perfect outing for a rainy day! B: I think we should wrap up our rainy haunted house day with some ale at the English pub down the street. A: I think that rainy days and pubs go together! B: Usually pubs have some pretty good cold-weather food. Maybe we can have dinner there.22. Shopping for Souvenirs
1.audio A: I want to look at the souvenirs over at the souvenir stand. B: What do you need to buy? A: I usually buy myself some jewelry or some clothing. B: I always buy a lot of things for my family. How about you? A: Yes, they practically swarm me when I get home! B: What are some of their favorite gifts? A: The teenagers like me to bring them tee shirts that you can't get anywhere else. B: This stuff is pretty expensive, isn't it? A: Souvenirs cost a lot for what they are, but we can shop around for better prices. B: Let's go across the street and see what they have over there. 2.audio A: Let's stop and look at the souvenirs at the souvenir stand. B: What types of souvenirs were you looking for? A: When I travel, I usually like to bring back a special necklace or clothing. B: I end up buying a lot of stuff for the kids in my family. Do you like to do that, too? A: My family loves for me to take trips so they can get the goodies I bring them. B: What types of things do they like? A: The little kids like little trinkets, like those little shell animals over there. B: I feel like this stuff is kind of overpriced. A: Some souvenir stands charge more than others, so it pays to shop around. B: Why don't we try checking prices a little farther away from the tourist section? 3.audio A: We need to stop so I can shop for some souvenirs at the souvenir stand. B: Do you have anything in particular that you are looking for? A: I love to go clothes-shopping when I travel or buy a new piece of jewelry. B: The kids in my family love getting souvenirs. How about the children in your family? A: Everyone in my family enjoys getting treats from my travels! B: What do they like you to bring home? A: My nieces love to get little jewelry boxes like those on the top shelf. B: Things seem to cost a lot at this stand. A: You really need to shop around with souvenirs because they can vary a lot in price. B: We could walk a few more blocks away from the beach and see what the prices are like there.23. Trying to Find a Doctor
1.audio A: I am really not feeling very well. B: Do you think you need to go to a doctor? A: I think that we should maybe check into how to find a doctor in this country. B: I don't know where to begin looking for a doctor here. A: I think that we should call the front desk to see if they can help us. B: I have an American Express card. I heard that their travel services are quite good. A: That sounds like a great idea! B: Do you have travel insurance? A: Yes, I bought travel health insurance. B: I am going to call down to the office right now and see what they can do for us. 2.audio A: I haven't felt well since we ate dinner at that restaurant with the fish on the menu. B: Should I look into finding a doctor for you? A: I feel bad enough that I am thinking about how we could find a doctor. B: How does someone find a physician in this country? A: The front desk should be able to find a doctor on call for us. B: With my American Express card, we could probably get a good referral for a doctor. A: Yes, the card should help us find a good doctor. B: Did you buy supplemental health insurance for travelers? A: Yes, I am insured by a supplemental policy. B: I will call American Express right now, and we'll get you some medical advice. 3.audio A: I think I am running a fever, and my stomach hurts. B: Do you feel bad enough that we should call a doctor? A: I don't want to wait till the last minute to try and locate a physician. B: Do you know how to find a doctor in this country? A: The front desk would probably be our best source for a doctor. B: I am going to call the travel services number on my American Express card to get a referral. A: I am sure that they could refer us to a good doctor. B: Are you insured by a traveler's insurance policy? A: No, but I checked before I left, and my home health policy covers me here. B: I will call the insurance company and see what doctor they want us to use.24. Losing the Wallet and Passport
1.audio A: I can't find my purse! B: What was in your purse? A: It contained my wallet and passport. B: How much money was in your wallet? A: There was about $200 in my wallet, and I had some traveler's checks in there, too. B: We can call American Express to deal with the traveler's checks. How about credit cards? A: I had a MasterCard and a Visa Card. B: We can look at the back of my cards to get the emergency phone numbers. A: Where do I report that my passport is missing? B: We need to take a cab to the embassy to report that right away. They will help us. 2.audio A: I think that someone stole my purse! B: What did you have in your purse? A: Both my wallet and my passport were in there. B: Did you have a lot of money in your wallet? A: Fortunately there was only a little change and some traveler's checks. B: Did you have any credit cards in your wallet? We need to report them as well as the traveler's checks. A: I only had a Visa Card in my wallet. B: We can call the front desk to get the lost or stolen card phone numbers. A: I am worried about reporting my passport as missing. B: The embassy can help us. We should walk over there and they can advise us on what we can do about replacing your passport. 3.audio A: I left my purse in the taxi! B: Can you remember what you had in your purse? A: I had my wallet and my passport in that purse. B: How much cash was in your wallet? A: Most of my money was in traveler's checks with just a little amount in cash. B: Do you know what credit cards you had in your wallet? We can call and report those as well as your traveler's checks. A: I had an American Express Card and a Visa Card in my wallet. B: We can call the information number to get the phone numbers for lost or stolen cards. A: Do you know how to report a missing passport? B: We need to contact the embassy right away. They will be able to help you replace your passport.25. Being Cautious in a Big City
1.audio A: Is there anything special I need to think about as I tour this city? B: You need to keep in mind that this is a very poor country. Things are a little more desperate here than you are used to. A: What do I need to look for? B: Be particularly vigilant anytime you are in a crowded place with other tourists. Pickpockets know that tourists aren't paying all that much attention. A: I have seen many children on the street begging, so what do I do about them? B: It is best not to give money to children or other beggars on the street, as they can swarm you. You can give money to a local charity. A: Should I be concerned about what I eat or drink? B: Do not drink any water that isn't bottled. Avoid street vendor food. A: How about being out on the street at night? B: I would take a cab to your destination at night. Don't walk down the street alone. 2.audio A: This city is much larger than the one I live in, and I wonder if there is anything special that I need to keep in mind. B: Crime can happen anywhere, but it is a little worse here because of the poverty. A: Should I be vigilant about anything in particular? B: The train stations, airports, and tourist sites are favorite spots for pickpockets. A: When I see children on the street begging, what amount should I give them? B: I wouldn't suggest giving money to them. Most of them are put out there by adults who then take their money. A: Can I eat or drink anything I want to? B: Do not use tap water at all, not even to brush your teeth. Only eat fruit that has been peeled. A: Can I walk around and see the sights at night? B: I would be sure to travel in a group at night. Stay in well-lit areas. 3.audio A: Do I need to take any special safety precautions in this city? B: This is a very large city with a lot of crowds to work your way through. Keep in mind that poverty makes people a little more desperate. A: What should I watch out for? B: You have to pay special attention at train stations, airports, and tourist sites. They are known for having a lot of pickpockets. A: There are so many children begging on the street that I don't know which ones to give money to. B: It is a natural instinct to want to give money to those children, but it is better to give money to one of the local charities or schools. A: Are the local food and drink safe? B: Avoid eating food prepared by street vendors. Use only bottled water. A: How safe is it to be out at night? B: You should always travel with others at night and stick to well-lit areas.26. Local Customs
1.audio A: This is really a fascinating city! B: Yes, this city is thousands of years old and has quite a history! A: I really love this temple we are visiting. B: As you enter the temple, please remove your shoes as the others are doing. A: It is so quiet here. B: Yes, they are showing respect to their gods. People come here to pray and meditate. A: I noticed that the women all have some sort of head covering. B: It is a tradition that women cover their heads while in the temple. A: I noticed that all of the people were eating with their hands at dinner last night. B: Yes, that is another custom that people practice here. 2.audio A: I have never traveled to a place that was so different from my home. B: Yes, this city has a fascinating and diverse past. It is thousands of years old! A: This temple is beautiful! B: Please make sure that you remove your shoes before you enter the temple. A: It is very quiet in here even though there are a lot of people in this area. B: Yes, even the children are expected to be respectful and quiet here. People need quiet to meditate. A: The women all seem to have beautiful scarves or veils on their heads. B: Women in this society would not consider setting foot in a temple without their head being covered. A: I noticed at dinner last night that people in this country like to use their bread to eat with instead of silverware. B: Yes, that bread is made of a special texture that works well for that. 3.audio A: This city is certainly very different from what I am used to at home. B: This is an amazing city. It is quite ancient with a diverse past! A: What an amazing temple! B: See how everyone is removing their shoes before entering? We need to do the same. A: The people in this room are very quiet. B: This is an area of peace and tranquility. It is expected that people keep their voices down out of respect for those who are meditating. A: The women's scarves are quite beautiful. B: Women of this faith must have their heads covered to enter the temple. A: Last night at dinner, I noticed that everyone was using bread to eat with instead of silverware. B: Yes, eating your curry or vegetables with your bread is a custom in this country.27. Shuttle Bus at the Airport
1.audio A: Is this where I catch the Super Shuttle? B: Yes, this is where you catch the Super Shuttle. Where are you headed? A: I am headed home to Pasadena. B: You can tell where each van is headed by the name on the front of the van. I am the driver for Glendale, but your van should be along in a minute. A: Do you know how much it costs to get to Pasadena? B: I believe the cost of that trip is sixty dollars. A: Do you know if the shuttle goes directly to Pasadena, or does it make a lot of stops? B: Before you pay the driver, you need to ask him. He needs to be upfront with you about the number of stops he will be making. A: Do I need to have exact change? B: You don't need exact change, but it is useful to have smaller bills. 2.audio A: They told me inside that I should catch the Super Shuttle here. B: You are in the right place to catch the Super Shuttle. What is your destination? A: I am trying to get to my home in Pasadena. B: Look at the sign on the front of the van to tell where each van is headed. My van is going to Glendale, but yours will be along in minute. A: How much does a trip to Pasadena cost? B: If I remember correctly, that trip costs sixty dollars. A: I am hoping that this shuttle goes straight to my city without making a bunch of stops. B: Always ask the driver how many stops he plans to make before you pay him. A: If I have large bills, should I break them while I am waiting? B: It is better if you have cash close to the amount of the fare. There is an ATM machine right over there. 3.audio A: Am I in the right place to catch the Super Shuttle? B: This is the Super Shuttle stop. Where are you trying to get to? A: My final destination is my home in Pasadena. B: The destination of each van is always written across the top. I have Glendale written on mine, but your van will be here shortly. A: What is the price of a shuttle trip to Pasadena? B: The trip to Pasadena costs sixty dollars. A: I need to know if this shuttle is going to make a lot of stops or go straight to Pasadena. B: If you find out the driver will be making too many stops on the way, you may wish to wait for a more direct shuttle. A: What should I pay the driver with? B: There is an ATM machine over by that wall. It is best if you have bills close to the amount that you will owe.1. How to Find a Job
1.audio A: I was wondering if you could help me use the Student Job Center. B: There are many ways; what kind of job would you like? A: I want to work in a restaurant. B: Fine! Will you need part-time or full-time work? A: I want to work part-time. B: Fine, the two best ways are to use our local listings binders over there or you can use the computers with the Internet job listing sites. See them over there? A: Yes, I know what to do. B: Well, in addition, you can schedule an appointment with a job counselor on this list. If you would like to do that, sign here, OK? A: Yes, I think that would be great. B: Fine, well the job search tools are all here for you to use. Feel free to look around and use what works best for you. Have fun with it! 2.audio A: Could you help me figure out how to look for a job? B: We have lots of options, what type of job do you need? A: I want to work in an office. B: Do you want to work part-time or full-time? A: I want to work full-time. B: We have binders with local job listings or you can make use of the computers. OK? A: I am confused a bit but I am sure that I can figure it out. B: If you make an appointment with a job counselor, they can also provide you with a lot of information. Do you want to see a counselor? A: No, I don't think I need to do that. B: Well, you know that this job center is here for your use, so help yourself. Good luck! 3.audio A: What is the best way to find a job here? B: There are different ways of conducting a job search. Do you know what you want to do? A: I don't know. B: Can you work part-time or full-time? A: It doesn't matter right now, either one would be OK. B: The binders have current local jobs listings and the computer jobs lists are good too. Understand? A: OK, I'll go check it out. B: Schedule an appointment with a counselor and you can get more information. Would that work for you? A: I am not sure. B: Everything that you need for a successful job search is here. Happy job searching!2. Preparing for a Job Interview
1.audio A: Could you help me try and figure out how to get ready for my job interview? B: The most important thing to do is to make sure you know the company and what services or products it provides. Do you know all about them? A: Yes, I pretty much understand the company. B: Well, after you've done your research, you have to decide whether the company is casual or formal. Have you decided what they are yet? A: Yes, I've been observing them. B: When you are choosing what to wear, keep all of that in mind. Have you chosen what to wear? A: I already have something to wear. B: I would always be ready to go shopping with you! Should we talk about other basics? A: I am ready to think of other things. B: You need to make sure you arrive on time, smile, be pleasant and friendly, look the person in the eye and answer all questions to the best of your ability. You'll do great! 2.audio A: I am not sure what to do to get ready for my job interview. B: Make sure that you understand the company. Do you understand what it is that they do? A: No, I probably need to do some more research. B: When you've finished your research it will help you figure out whether your company is rigid in philosophy or kind of more relaxed. Does that make sense? A: I think that their attitude is rather casual. B: So all of that information will help you to pick out what to wear. Do you have something to wear? A: I have absolutely nothing so far. B: I could go shopping with you sometime if you need it, but can we talk about other basics? A: Yes, where should we go from here? B: Focus on being relaxed and open, don't forget to smile and shake hands and be genuinely interested in what their company is about. I'm sure you'll do well. 3.audio A: What should I do to prepare for a job interview? B: An understanding of the basic workings of a company and the services or goods it provides is essential. Do you have that? A: Sort of, but I could know more, I guess. B: With that understanding, you can figure out what your company is looking for in terms of basic attitude. Right? A: I think that they are a very formal company. B: What you wear is important. So keep in mind what is suitable for the company and type of work you will be doing. Need help? A: I need a lot of help in this area. B: In addition to clothes we need to think about other basics, OK? A: Yes, what else should we think of? B: Be prompt. Don't forget to be friendly and interested. Listen carefully and listen to what they are really asking you. You'll be a hit!3. Greeting by Receptionist
1.audio A: I am here for my job interview. B: Fine, have a seat. May I get you some water or coffee? A: Sure, thank you. B: I'll get that for you right now. A: Thank you. What a nice office this is! B: Yes, could you come in now? I am going to take you back to meet your interviewer, Mr. Gotcha. 2.audio A: I have an appointment for an interview today. B: Great, have a seat. Would you like some tea or coffee? A: I'd love some. B: The coffee area is right over there. Please help yourself. A: Thank you. What a beautiful view from this office! B: Yes. Oh, here comes Mr. Gotcha now. I'll show you to his office. 3.audio A: Good morning. I have an interview scheduled this morning. B: The interviewer will be with you in a moment. Would you care for some water? A: Yes, that would be great. B: Just help yourself to whatever you would like from the table in the waiting area. A: Thank you. This is a very lovely office building! B: Yes. Why don't you come straight through the door and we'll walk down to Mr. Gotha's office together.4. Job Interview (1)
1.audio A: Good morning, I am here for my interview. B: Hello, nice to meet you. I'm Mr. Gotcha. Have any trouble finding the place? A: No problem. B: So why don't you tell me why you are interested in changing positions? A: Unfortunately, our company is shutting down due to the economy. B: What would you consider your strengths? A: I am probably best at researching for marketing purposes. B: What is your biggest weakness? A: I tend to get bored easily and so love to keep myself challenged. B: We have a position where that could work out well. 2.audio A: Thank you for taking the time to interview me. B: Hi there, I'm Bill Gotcha, the owner of Gotcha Enterprises. Did you find your way here OK? A: Your assistant gave wonderful directions. B: Why are you switching jobs at this point in your career? A: Our company is moving overseas and I wish to stay in the United States. B: What are you best at? A: I am good at organizing systems that have been having problems. B: What is your biggest challenge in terms of skills? A: I don't like to sit around and so like to always find things to do to keep myself busy. B: That is good to hear! 3.audio A: Good afternoon. Thank you for the opportunity to interview for this position. B: Hello, have a seat. I'm Bill Gotcha. I am assuming you found your way here with no trouble? A: Actually, I am very familiar with the area so there was absolutely no problem. B: I am curious as to why you want to leave your current employer. A: I am interested in switching fields. B: Do you feel that you are exceptionally good at anything in particular? A: I am good at pulling together teams of people to accomplish a task. B: What are you not good at? A: I am impatient with myself at times and am hard on myself. B: We appreciate hearing that about you!5. Job Interview (2)
1.audio A: Good morning. Thank you for the interview. B: No problem. Now, do you prefer working with others or flying solo? A: Actually, I enjoy both. B: So, what is most important to you in a job? Do you need job security or professional growth and a chance to advance? A: I need job security. B: Would you be able to relocate? A: I am open to relocating. B: What are your annual salary requirements? A: I need at least 75,000 per year. B: I'll keep that in mind. Thank you for coming in today. We'll be in touch. 2.audio A: Thank you so much for interviewing me this evening. B: Happy to meet with you. Now, do you prefer group projects? A: I like to work alone on some things and then bring those things to the group. B: Do you value a steady job more or one that offers a chance to move ahead? A: I want to grow in my job and move ahead. B: Could you work for us in another state, if need be? A: I need to stay in the area because of family. B: How much do you need to make per year? A: 75,000 per year. B: Yikes! Thanks for your interest in this job. We'll be getting back to you. 3.audio A: I really appreciate the opportunity to interview for this position. B: I was wondering if you like team projects, or projects that you work on alone. A: I like to work on group projects that value and need each individual's contributions. B: Are you most interested in a good steady job with benefits or one that will allow you to quickly advance? A: I have children so a steady job is important but I would like a chance to advance. B: How would you feel about relocating to another state? A: I could not relocate in the next year, but might be open to it in the future. B: Do you know how much this job offers per year? A: A minimum of 75,000 per year. B: OK, well, that's all I need to know for now. If something comes up, we'll be contacting you.6. Asking Questions at an Interview
1.audio A: May I ask you how much this position pays per year? B: This job pays sixty-five thousand dollars per year. A: What kind of benefits does this job have? B: This job provides full medical, dental, and disability. A: What type of vacation time do we get? B: You get 3 weeks paid vacation that you may use as you wish. A: Do we have a 401K? B: We offer a 401K with some matching funds available depending on length of service. A: What type of professional development do you offer? B: We provide up-to-date training on state of the art equipment. A: Where do I sign up for my benefits package? B: Down the hall. I'll show you when the interview is over. 2.audio A: What is the annual salary for this job? B: The annual salary is sixty-five thousand dollars per year. A: What does the benefits package include? B: This job pays for half of your medical, dental, and disability. A: Do we get paid time off? B: You have a total of 21 days paid time off which can be used for vacation, personal, or sick leave. A: How about retirement? B: We still offer a traditional retirement plan that pays out if you stay with the company for 5 years or more. A: Can I get company provided specialized training? B: We offer full tuition reimbursement for job related classes. A: Where is the benefits office? B: It's on the second floor in Suite 201. 3.audio A: What will I earn per year in this job? B: You can expect to earn sixty-five thousand dollars per year. A: Are we covered by a good benefits plan? B: The job has a menu plan where you are given a fixed amount of money and you choose what you most need in terms of benefits. A: Can we take personal days off? B: You get 2 weeks paid vacation and an additional 10 days of sick leave. A: What do you offer in terms of a retirement plan? B: We do not currently offer any retirement plan. A: Do you reimburse for education that relates to my job? B: We allow several weeks release time each year for our employees to attend job-related seminars and conferences. A: Do you have a benefits brochure? B: Whoa! Who said you got the job?7. Accepting a Job Offer
1.audio A: Is this Mr. Wallace? B: Yes, this is Mr. Wallace. A: Mr. Wallace, this is the Xenon Company. B: Oh, hello, how are you doing? A: Mr. Wallace, we were very pleased with your interview and would like to offer you the position. B: Wonderful! I am very happy to be able to join your organization. A: We are interested in having you begin as soon as possible, perhaps in two weeks? B: Yes, that would be perfect! A: We will see you then. 2.audio A: Good morning, may I speak with Mr. Wallace, please? B: You are speaking to him, may I help you? A: Mr. Wallace, this is the Xenon Company calling to speak with you. B: Yes, good to hear from you! A: We are calling you today to offer you the job you interviewed for last week. B: That's great! I am looking forward to working for you. A: Would you be able to begin working for us in two weeks? B: I could begin working then with no problem. A: Welcome to our company; we will see you then. 3.audio A: This is Jason Brack calling, is Mr. Wallace in? B: Yes, how may I help you? A: I am calling you from the Xenon Company. B: Yes, I was hoping to hear from you! A: You had great interview and we are pleased to be able to offer you a position. B: Excellent. I will consider it an honor to join your organization. A: Would two weeks from now be a good start date for you? B: That would be great. I could give notice to my current job and start with you on that date. A: Glad that will work for both of us; I look forward to seeing you then.8. Talking on the Phone
1.audio A: This is Ray. May I speak with Lee? B: Yes, this is Lee speaking. A: Lee. How are you today? B: Oh, things are going great. What's up? A: I was wondering if you could meet me tomorrow for lunch? B: Sure! Where did you have in mind? A: I was thinking of Joe's in the village. B: I love that place. Sure, let's go there. A: Fine then, I'll meet you around twelve. B: I'll see you there. Look forward to it. 2.audio A: Good morning, this is Ray speaking. Is Lee in? B: Hi, Ray. This is Lee. A: Good morning, Lee. How is it going with you today? B: Things are wonderful. What can I help you with? A: Could we meet for lunch tomorrow to discuss the new project? B: That would be great. What restaurant did you have in mind? A: We could go to Lozano's downtown. B: That would be perfect. It's a nice quiet place to meet. A: I'll see you there around twelve then. B: I am looking forward to meeting with you. See you then. 3.audio A: May I speak with Lee? This is Ray. B: Lee here. A: Lee, I thought that was you. How's it going? B: I am doing well. How can I help you? A: I would like to treat you to lunch tomorrow so I can get some suggestions from you. B: Sounds like a plan. Where would you like to meet? A: How about the new Chinese place next door? B: Yes, that would work well for me. A: I'll join you around twelve for lunch then. B: It's a go then. See you there.9. Making a Request for Office Supplies
1.audio A: Excuse me. I was wondering how to order office supplies. B: We have a requisition form on the company web site. What type of supplies do you need? A: I need paper, ink cartridges, and paper clips. B: How quickly will you need your supplies? A: I need all of my supplies right away. B: We also will have to check your department budget. Do you know how much money you have for office supplies? A: I will check to see what my budget is. B: Would you like these supplies delivered or would you like to pick them up? A: Please deliver them to my office. B: Fine, well just send the form to us and we will let you know as soon as your supplies come in. Have a good day! A: Thank you! 2.audio A: I need help in ordering my office supplies. B: You can print out a copy of the Order Supply Form from our company web site and turn it into me. What will you be needing? A: I need ink cartridges, staples, and Post-its. B: Will you need all of them right away or can some wait? A: Some of these can wait but there are a few things that I need right away. B: You can only buy supplies that you have a budget for. Do you know what your budget is? A: We have plenty of money for office supplies. B: You can pick these supplies up or they can be delivered to your building. Which would you prefer? A: I want to pick them up. B: Well, just finish the request and we will contact you when the supplies come in. Have a good day! A: You too! 3.audio A: How do I order the office supplies that I need? B: Fill out this form with whatever you need. What do you need the most? A: I need many things. B: I can get a few of them right away, but might have to order some. A: I can wait a few days for these items. B: Make sure that you have money allocated for these supplies. How much do you have for office supplies? A: I don't think we have very much money for supplies, but we have a little. B: Would you like them delivered to you or can you come get them here? A: I am not sure yet. B: When you finish completing the request form, we will order and let you know when the supplies are here. Have a great day! A: Good-bye!10. Offering Help
1.audio A: I was wondering if you need any help on your new project. B: Sure! That would be great! Are you good at writing or would you rather do the computer work? A: I would like to help with the computer work. B: Great! We are going to be working in teams of three. Are you OK working with others? A: Yes, I like working like that. B: We will begin next Monday. Would you be available then? A: Yes, I can be there. B: Well, if you could send me your basic background information before next Monday, it would be useful. A: I will send the information to you. B: Well then, thanks for your help. Have a great day! 2.audio A: Would you like me to help you on your new project? B: I would love the help! Would you prefer helping with the writing part or is programming more your thing? A: I would enjoy helping with the writing portion. B: Perfect! You'll be working alone on that portion. Do you like to work alone? A: That is OK sometimes. B: Our first meeting is next Monday. Could you meet with us at that time? A: No, I can't be there. B: Please send me your background information before the meeting so I can look at it. A: I can send that information to you. B: OK. I look forward to working with you. Enjoy your week! 3.audio A: Could I help you on your new project? B: I have a need for help with writing and also a need for help with the computer work. Which would you prefer? A: I want to help with both. B: That would be wonderful. Sometimes we will be working together and sometimes independently. Would that be OK? A: Most of the time that is what I prefer. B: We start on Monday. Can you be there? A: I am not sure yet. B: I need your background information before the meeting. A: I will do that. B: I'll enjoy working with you. Have a great day!11. Asking for Help
1.audio A: Can you help me plan the office party? B: Sure. What do you need the most help with, the food or entertainment? A: I need help with food. B: OK, well, let's coordinate our efforts. Should this party be formal or casual? A: I think it should be casual. B: I agree. Next, we have to decide on food. We have a choice of Chinese or Continental Cuisine. Which one should we have? A: I would prefer Chinese food for this party. B: Perfect choice. For music, should we have a live band or a DJ? A: I think we should hire a live band. B: OK then. Well, I will work on my part and get back to you with my progress on Friday. 2.audio A: I need help with the office party. B: Yes, of course. We could split it. What part would you like to do, the food or the entertainment? A: I have no idea what the entertainment should be. B: Let's make sure we are on the same page. Do we want a formal or informal gathering? A: Let's make it a formal affair. B: Yes, that would be best. Now, for food should we have Chinese or American food? A: American food would be the best choice. B: That would be great. What kind of music would you like, a band or recorded music? A: We should bring in a really good DJ. B: That works for me. Let's see what we can each do about planning our part and meet again on Friday. 3.audio A: Would you help me figure out what to do about the office party? B: I would be happy to help. What would you like me to help with, food or entertainment? A: I would like to help you with both. B: That will work out fine. To make sure everything goes together, do you think this party should be casual or dressy? A: A dressy party would be fun! B: That will work out fine. Do you think that Chinese or Continental food would be best? A: We should probably have both. B: Yes, that will work out fine. Should we hire a band or bring in a DJ? A: Maybe we could do both! B: Everything sounds great then! I'll meet you back here on Friday to discuss the details.12. Responding to a Plea for Help
1.audio A: Is there anything I can help? B: Yes, thank you. I am really far behind on this project. Could you help me with the extra typing or xeroxing? A: I can do either one. B: Good. That would be very helpful. Can you start with those pages over there? A: No problem. B: Thank you very much! How long have you been working here? A: I have been working here for 5 years. B: Well, we have some special projects coming up. Would you be interested in working on any of those? A: Yes, I would love to work on a special project! B: Well then, I'll keep you in the loop. Thank you for your help today. 2.audio A: Do you need any help? B: I need some help catching up. Are you good at typing or could you help me xerox? A: I like xeroxing. B: Thank you! There are papers on the table to start with. A: That would be OK. B: I really appreciate the help. How many years have you been with the company? A: I just started working here. B: I have a special assignment coming up. Would you be interested in helping me on it? A: I'd like to, but I am very busy. B: I'll make sure that management keeps you in mind for special projects in the future. Thanks for the help! 3.audio A: What can I do to help you? B: I have some extra help with my project. What would you prefer to help me with, typing or xeroxing? A: I could do some typing for you. B: That is very kind of you to offer to do that. Can you start with the pages on the table? A: That would be a good place to start. B: I like your positive attitude. How many years have you been employed here? A: I have worked here long time. B: We have a really interesting project coming up. Would you want to join us on it? A: I'm not sure. Let me think about it. B: OK. I will mention how great you were about helping me today. I appreciate your help.13. How to Do a Timesheet
1.audio A: Can you help me with my timesheet? B: Sure! I can help you. Do you know where the timesheets are kept? A: No, I don't know where to find one. B: Well, once you get one off the shelf over there, you first put your name on it. OK? A: Yes, I can do that. B: Now you have to fill in the hours in the blanks and total the hours for the week. Do you know how to use military time? A: No, I don't know what that is. B: OK, so we just start counting hours at midnight and record it. Show all minutes as a dot and then write how many minutes. OK? A: Yes, I understand how to do this. B: After you total your hours, make sure you sign it and turn it in to your supervisor. A: That was easy! B: Good luck and let me know if you need any help later on. 2.audio A: How do we do timesheets here? B: They are actually fairly straightforward. Do you know where the blanks are kept? A: Yes, I already have one. B: OK, well after you take one out of that second drawer, you put your name on the top. Do you see? A: I am kind of confused. B: Next you fill in all of your hours for each day and total them. Do you know how to show time on a 24-hour clock? A: I'm not quite sure. B: Midnight is zero and when you put the minutes in, make sure that you show them with a dot followed by the minutes. Do you understand? A: No, I have no idea what you are talking about. B: It's easy, just write in the hours, total it, sign it, and put it in the box. A: Thanks for your help. B: Try it and if you can't do it, one of us can always help you later. 3.audio A: I need help with my timesheet. B: OK, no problem. Have you found the blank ones? A: Yes, I have seen them. B: Yes, well put your name on it after you have downloaded it off the company website. OK? A: Yes, I understand what to do. B: You fill in the hours and total them for the week. Have you ever used a 24 hour clock? A: What? Huh? B: So after you noted the hours, starting at zero which is midnight, you just write down the minutes as a dot followed by minutes. Get it? A: Huh? What? B: Just make sure you show your total, sign it, and turn it in. A: I thought you said this was easy. B: You are a quick learner. I don't think you'll have any trouble with this.14. Making a Phone Call
1.audio A: I need help figuring out how to use this phone. B: Sure. First you pick up the receiver and hit one of the first 3 buttons. Do you hear a tone? A: Yes, I hear the tone. B: OK. Now you dial 9 on the keypad. Do you hear the tone change? A: Yes, it changed. B: Well, when you hear it change, that means you have an outside line. Where are you trying to call? A: I am trying to call home. B: OK. Well, to dial to the outside you just now dial the number. For a call inside the company just hit the extension number. Do you know the extensions? A: Yes, I have a list of extensions. B: Well, if you ever need help with an extension, you can dial O. 2.audio A: Can you show me how to use this phone? B: Yes, I can help you with that. Pick up the receiver and hit one of the buttons. Do you hear a tone? A: No, I don't hear anything. B: Next you dial 9 on the keypad. You should hear the tone change. Did you hear it change? A: I'm not sure. B: OK. Well, after you get the line to change you have an outside line. Who are you trying to call? A: I am trying to call a client. B: To call a number on the outside you now just dial the number. For inside calls, punch in the extension number. Has someone given you an extension list? A: No, I don't know anyone's extension. B: All of the extensions are listed on the wall chart over there if you ever need help. 3.audio A: I want to make a phone call. Can you show me how? B: Of course, pick up the receiver, hit a button and listen for a tone. Are you hearing it? A: Yes, now what do I do? B: Well, after you dial 9 on the keypad, you should hear the tone change. A: No, nothing changed. B: When you dial 9 and hear the tone change it means you have an outside line. Who are you trying to call? A: I am trying to call my boss. B: For an outside call you now just dial the number. For a company number you need to know the extension. Do you have a list of extensions? A: I know a few extensions but I don't know all of them. B: You can always look an extension up on the company website.15. Making an Appointment for a Meeting
1.audio A: I would like to make an appointment for a project meeting. B: Of course, I have Monday or Tuesday available. What day would be best for you? A: I would like to meet on Monday. B: Very well then. Are mornings or afternoons best? A: I want to come in the morning. B: I will have my assistant check my calendar and get back to you with the exact time. Can you bring me an outline of the project when you come? A: Yes, I can bring the outline when I come to the meeting. B: Do you think that we should include the entire committee in the meeting or just our sub-committee? A: I think that we should have just the sub-committee. B: OK then, I will make the arrangements for them to attend. Do you know how to get there? A: No, I need directions, please. B: Fine, we will make sure that we send you all of the information that you need. See you there! 2.audio A: Could I meet with you to discuss the project? B: Good idea. We could meet on Monday or Tuesday. Which day would you prefer? A: Tuesday would be good for me. B: OK. Do you think we should meet in the morning or in the afternoon? A: I think the afternoon would be best. B: That will work out. I will e-mail the exact time tomorrow. I need you to bring your plans with you. A: Yes, I will bring my plans with me to the meeting. B: Should we invite the whole committee or should we just have the sub-committee there? A: I feel that the whole committee needs to be there. B: Yes, I agree. We'll make sure that they get notified. Can you find the meeting place? A: Yes, I know how to get there on my own. B: Great! We will send you all the details later. Looking forward to meeting with you! 3.audio A: When could we meet to discuss the project? B: I will be available on Monday or Tuesday. Choose which day is best for you. A: I prefer Monday. B: Good. Can you come in the morning or would afternoon be best? A: Either one is OK. B: Great! When I check with the others, I will send you an exact time. When you come, be prepared to do your presentation. A: I will be prepared to do my presentation. B: Who would you like to see there? Just the sub-committee or should we ask the whole committee? A: Everyone needs to be there. B: That will probably be best. Do you need help with directions? A: I think I know where it is. Maybe you could send me directions just to make sure. B: OK. We will e-mail you all the information you need tomorrow. Have a good day!16. Rearranging an Appointment
1.audio A: I had an appointment tomorrow and I need to change it to a different date. B: Certainly, what day would be best for you? A: I think that Monday or Tuesday would be good for me. B: I can give you Monday; I have ten or eleven in the morning. A: I think ten o'clock is best. B: Fine, I'll put you down for that. A: That would be great! B: Happy I could help you; see you then! 2.audio A: I was wondering if I could reschedule my appointment to a later date? B: OK, just tell me what day would be best for your appointment. A: Wednesday or Thursday would be perfect. B: Thursday is available; would ten or eleven be best? A: I would love to have an eleven o'clock appointment. B: Great, I'll just add you in, if that works. A: Perfect, I appreciate that. B: So happy that we had an opening for you. 3.audio A: I can't make my appointment and need to make another one. B: That's OK, we can reschedule it if you tell me what day works for you. A: Friday, Saturday, or Sunday would be good for me. B: I can give you Friday; would you prefer ten or eleven? A: Ten o'clock is perfect. B: Well, in that case, I'll just write you in. A: Thanks. That will work out well. B: It was my pleasure to have been able to make it work.17. Giving an Excuse for Being Late to Work
1.audio A: Excuse me for being late to work. B: Where have you been? A: My car broke down. B: That's too bad. Please try to fix it so that it doesn't happen again. A: Yes, I'll work on it. B: Thank you, have a seat. We are working on the new project A: Great! Fill me in. B: Let's take a look at the Campbell Project. A: I don't understand the projected revenues. B: Let's take another look at it for those of you who don't understand. 2.audio A: I am sorry I am so late to work. B: What was the problem? A: I lost track of time. B: Things happen; make sure it doesn't become a habit. A: It won't happen again. B: All right, please take this message and call this client. A: No problem. B: Now does everyone understand the diagram on the board? A: Yes, I understand the numbers. B: I will explain it again; especially for those of you who arrived late. 3.audio A: I lost track of time, am I late? B: Yes. What kept you from arriving on time? A: My friend needed me to help him. B: I realize that everyone has emergencies; just get here on time from now on. A: My apologies. B: I appreciate you saying that and would like you to join us in our meeting. A: Sure, I'll sit right here. B: Wonderful, does anyone have any questions about this project? A: I am confused about the projected revenues. B: I'm glad that some of you get it, but let's go over it once more.18. Accepting Excuses for Not Meeting Commitments
1.audio A: So tell me again, why couldn't you get the supplies I ordered? B: Well I ordered them when you asked, but the supplier said they might need to back order them. A: When do you think they will finally arrive? B: I think maybe by Tuesday. A: If they don't arrive by then, what are our options? B: I could try another supplier down the street. A: That would work for me. B: OK, I will stay on it and let you know how it's going. A: Thank you for taking care of the problem. B: Thank you for your business. We appreciate you as a client. 2.audio A: You promised me the supplies would be in today and now you say they aren't here? B: They said they had part of the order, but the rest won't be available until later. A: I guess that's it then, when will you be able to get the rest? B: I am not sure. A: I am not convinced that will work for me, what now? B: I could order them from another supplier as a back-up. A: That is a good plan. B: Good! I will call you later this afternoon and let you know when your supplies will arrive. A: I appreciate you staying on it. B: We appreciate your business and aim to please. 3.audio A: I really needed the supplies today and you are telling me you don't have them? B: The supplier said that it will be a few more days until they can ship the order. A: Fine, what day will the whole order be here? B: If we are lucky, they may get here tomorrow. A: Is there anywhere else we can get these supplies? B: Let's order the missing items from someone else just to be sure. A: I appreciate that suggestion. B: I will track your order on the internet and e-mail you the moment it arrives. A: I look forward to hearing from you. B: Please let me know if there is anything else I can do for you in the meantime.19. Asking for a Description of a Person
1.audio A: What does she look like? B: Well, she was pretty tall, about 5 feet 10 inches and kind of scary looking! A: What do you mean, scary? B: Well, she had a crazy sounding laugh and wild hair. Do you know what I mean? A: Yes, I know what you mean. B: And her piercing eyes! She looked like an alien who just came down from outer space. Do you believe that people from outer space live amongst us? A: No, that's impossible! B: Unless they beam us up for a ride, we will never know for sure. Have you ever thought that you saw a flying saucer? A: Are you crazy? B: Hah, I guess we never know what can happen. Do you like Star Wars movies? A: Yes, I have seen all of the Star Wars movies. B: I loved Star Wars movies. My favorite character was Yoda. What about you? A: I liked Darth Vader. B: Yeah, that character was pretty cool. If you had to describe that character, what would you say about them? A: They were very beautiful. B: Yeah, I know what you mean! 2.audio A: Can you describe her for me? B: She was large, hairy, and scary! A: What are you talking about? B: When she laughed, it sent chills up my spine. Have you ever met someone like that? A: Yes, one time I met someone like that. B: She had eyes like laser beams. Sometimes I wonder if aliens from UFOs live here with us. Do you think that's possible? A: Sure, I think it could happen. B: I guess it's impossible to say for sure unless you go for a ride in one. Do you think that would be an interesting experience? A: No, I never want to be near a UFO! B: Well, you will probably never see one. Have you seen any Star Wars movies? A: No, I haven't seen any Star Wars movies. B: Star Wars was the best. I really like Darth Vader. Do you have a favorite character? A: I like Luke Skywalker. B: Oh yeah, I forgot about that character! What words do you think would best describe that character? A: He looked like a black vacuum cleaner. B: I totally agree! 3.audio A: How does she look? B: I am not sure how tall she was but she was very scary! A: Is this a joke? B: Oh my god, you should have seen her! She looked like she had just crawled out from underneath something. Do you get what I am saying? A: No, I have no idea what you are talking about. B: Oh man, her eyes were the most incredible glowing green. She might be a Martian or something. Do you think that is possible? A: Yes, I believe in UFOs. B: I've never seen a UFO but I would like to. How about you? A: Yes, I think that seeing a UFO would be fascinating. B: Personally, I've never seen one. I think is would be fun to see the universe like in a Star Wars movie. Have you seen the Star Wars movies? A: I saw some of them. B: I loved the special effects and the story. I like Princess Leah. Who did you like the best? A: I like Yoda. B: Yes, that is a good choice. How would you describe that character if you had to tell someone what they looked like? A: He was hot! B: That's a really good description.20. Asking for Permission
1.audio A: I was wondering if I could borrow the company van for a fundraiser this weekend. B: Sure, I think that would be possible. Where is the fundraiser? A: It is in the park downtown. B: Would you need it for both Saturday and Sunday? A: We will need it for Saturday only. B: I think that would be OK. Who will be driving it? A: Mary and I will be driving the van. B: Could you drop it off on Sunday night? A: Yes, we can do that. Can we borrow the chairs from the lunchroom also? B: Yes, that would be fine. Just make sure that everything is returned by Sunday night. 2.audio A: Our unit is participating in a fundraiser this weekend and would like to borrow the van, if possible. B: I would need to check on that. Where is the fundraiser? A: It will be at the beach by the pier. B: What day will you need it for? A: We will only be needing it for Sunday. B: Maybe that could work. I need to know who will be driving it. A: The only two drivers will be Mary and I. B: If I give you the keys to the garage, could you bring it back on Sunday evening? A: Sure. We also would like to use the chairs from the lunchroom. Would that be OK? B: OK, but make sure that everything is back by Sunday night at the latest. 3.audio A: Could we borrow the company van for a fundraiser this weekend? B: That would be a possibility. Where is this fundraiser taking place? A: It is in the hotel ballroom down the street. B: Do you need it for the whole weekend? A: We will need it for both days. B: We will need to know who will be driving the van. A: The van will be driven by Mary and me. B: It needs to be back on Sunday night. Can you arrange for that? A: Yes, no problem. Would you mind if we borrowed a few of the chairs from the lunchroom? B: Just keep track of everything and get it all back where you took it from by Sunday evening.21. Agreement and Disagreement
1.audio A: I was thinking of holding the company retreat in the mountains. B: I agree, I think that that would be perfect! A: I was thinking it could take place sometime in January. B: That might be a little too cold for some people. A: Yes, you are right. B: What about April? April has good weather that isn't too cold or too hot. A: Yes, that would work out better. B: You know, maybe we could take a survey to see how that works for everyone. A: Good idea! We'll have to get right on it. B: Fine! Well, I'll get right on it now! 2.audio A: I think that the company retreat should be in the mountains this year. B: What a great idea! A: January would be a good month for a mountain retreat. B: I like the mountain idea, but I am not so sure about the month of January. A: You know, now that I think about it, you might be right. B: April might be nice. It is far enough away to make the necessary arrangements. A: That is a good suggestion. B: We could ask everyone what would be the best time for them. A: Yes, that would let us know what would work best. B: I'll put the survey online this afternoon. 3.audio A: The Mountains would be a great place for the company retreat. B: That's a wonderful choice. A: I have chosen January as the month for this retreat. B: January is a little too close to the Christmas holidays. A: Yes, maybe another choice might be better. B: I think that April would work. Spring is a lovely time to be in the mountains. A: Thank you for thinking of that. B: Maybe if we asked around we could see what people would prefer. A: That is a good idea. B: I'll take care of taking the survey and get back to you with the answers.22. Certainty and Uncertainty
1.audio A: I was thinking about applying for the new position. B: Do you think that is a good idea? A: It seems like a good idea but I am not really sure. B: What are your main concerns? A: It would give me a chance to grow, but I am wondering if I would like the job. B: I know what you mean, I've thought about that myself. A: I also am thinking about the pay. B: Could you take a slight pay decrease for a chance to move forward? A: Yes, it might be worth it. I am not certain. B: I think I'm convinced that trying for this position is the best choice for you. 2.audio A: I am not certain, but I think I might ask to be considered for the new job. B: Why are you considering trying for it? A: I think that I might like it, but I am still thinking about it. B: What is it about this job that appeals to you? A: I think that I would enjoy the position but there isn't a lot of creativity involved. B: Yes, you could be right. There is a lot to consider. A: I am also wondering about the pay. B: Would a slight decrease in pay be worth it for a new opportunity for growth? A: I am thinking that might be the case. B: I think you should give it a shot. What do you have to lose? You can always change yourmind. 3.audio A: I am considering going for the new job that was posted yesterday. B: Are you certain that that is what you want to do. A: It may not be the best choice for me, but I am considering it. B: Why do you think that this would be a good move? A: I believe that this job would allow me to move up but might be a little boring for me. B: Yes, there are always pros and cons to making a career change. A: Also, the matter of pay is also a consideration. B: I think the slight pay decrease might be worth it. The benefits are much better. A: Yes, sometimes giving up a little to move forward is the best choice. B: I think you definitely should apply for the position.23. Likes and Dislikes
1.audio A: Whoa, look at all those ice cream choices! B: Yes, that is a lot of choices. What is your favorite? A: I love anything with chocolate the best. B: I like chocolate myself. A: Is there any kind of ice cream you don't like? B: I really don't like any ice cream with nuts in it. A: I haven't ever cared for that myself. B: Have you ever had garlic ice cream? A: That sounds absolutely disgusting! B: It was. Let's stick with the regular choices today, though. 2.audio A: There are so many flavors of ice cream to choose from! B: Yes, there must be about a hundred. Do you have a favorite? A: I love fruit flavored ices the best. B: Yes, fresh fruit flavored is the best ever. A: What is your least favorite ice cream? B: I don't like peppermint ice cream. A: Yes, I know what you mean. B: One time, I tried garlic ice cream. A: That could be interesting. B: That doesn't sound like a good choice for today. Let's order! 3.audio A: I have never seen so many flavors of ice cream in one place! B: There certainly are a lot. Can you choose a favorite? A: Vanilla with toppings is my favorite. B: Is there anything as good as a hot fudge sundae? A: No way! B: I don't like ice cream with too many different flavors in it. A: I agree with that, it just doesn't work for me. B: I saw garlic ice cream on the menu once. A: I think that that would be horrible! B: I think I'll stick with a more traditional choice today!24.Making Promises
1.audio A: I need help preparing for my presentation on Friday. B: I could help you with that. A: Are you sure you have the time? B: I promise you that I have the time to do this. If I didn't, I wouldn't offer to help. A: What would be the best time for you to help me? B: Tomorrow night would work for me. A: Should we just meet here? B: OK, and I'll bring some information that helped me with my presentation. A: I'll see you then. B: See you tomorrow night. 2.audio A: Could you help me prepare for my presentation on Friday? B: I would love to help you prepare for your presentation. A: I hate to ask you to do something like that. B: This will not interfere with my work. I promise you that. A: When could we get together? B: I could easily give you some time tomorrow night. A: Would you like to meet at the coffee house next door? B: Yes, and could you write down anything you might be having trouble with? A: I'll come prepared. B: Goodbye until then. I promise you that you'll do well after we meet. 3.audio A: I am a little nervous about my presentation on Friday. B: If you would like me to, I could help you with that. A: Wouldn't that take you away from your project? B: I have plenty of time to do this. I promise you it won't be a problem for me. A: Is there a good time for you to help me? B: If we work on this tomorrow night, you could easily be ready for Friday. A: How about meeting in my office? B: That would work out well. Bring any concerns that you might have. A: Sounds like you'll be able to help me a lot. B: Don't worry. Everything will go well. I promise!1. Asking a Friend About Car Insurance
1.audio A: What kind of car insurance do you have? B: I went with the Automobile Club. A: Why did you choose that company? B: I looked at the price of the type of insurance that I wanted. A: What should I think about in choosing services? B: There are websites that will figure out what coverage is right for you. A: What did you end up buying? B: Well, my car is very old, so I didn't worry so much about what it would cost to repair it. I did buy a lot of coverage for fixing someone else's car. A: Have you ever had to use your insurance? B: I never had to use my insurance. 2.audio A: When you insured your car, what kind did you buy? B: I decided to buy from GEICO. A: What influenced your choice of companies? B: I looked at the customer satisfaction rating of the company. A: How did you figure out what services to buy? B: Every individual has different considerations. Your agent can help you understand what you need to think about. A: What did you place an emphasis on when you bought your insurance? B: I carry a lot of liability insurance because I own a house and need to protect it from a lawsuit. A: Did you ever get into an accident and need your insurance? B: I was in an accident and was happy that I had good insurance to cover it. 3.audio A: What car insurance company did you decide to go with when you bought your new car? B: State Farm seemed like the best deal for me. A: How did you make that decision? B: I compared rates and services available. A: Where can I get help in figuring out what I need to purchase for coverage? B: You can pick up a pamphlet at your insurance company that will explain the options to you. A: What did you decide to cover yourself for? B: I pretty much carry the average amount in all categories as the agent recommended. A: How many times have you actually used your insurance? B: I was in an accident, but it was the other person's fault and their insurance covered it.2. Buying Insurance
1.audio A: I am interested in buying auto insurance. B: Sure, I can help you. Did you bring all of your registration papers? A: Yes, I brought everything with me. B: Is your car with you? A: Yes, it is out in the parking lot. B: Wonderful. Let's go out and check to see what shape it is in. A: OK, can you help me figure out what I should insure my car for? B: I will look it up on the Blue Book list and we will factor in its condition. A: What else do I need to consider? B: Yes, you need to figure in liability for damage to the other car as well as injury issues as well. 2.audio A: Good morning, I need to buy car insurance for the used car I just bought. B: Yes, no problem. Do you have your registration and Certificate of Ownership with you? A: Yes, it is all right here. B: Did you drive your car here? A: Yes, it is out in the back. B: That's great. We'll go out and check the condition of your car. A: I understand, what should I insure my car for? B: There is a Blue Book price for your car and we will use that price. A: What other things do I need to insure for? B: We will factor in damage to the other car as well as property damage and injury. 3.audio A: I just bought a used car and need to insure it. B: We can take care of that right now. Do you have all of your paperwork with you? A: Yes, I took care of all of that and have the papers with me. B: Did you bring your car with you? A: Yes, it is parked on the street. B: Fine, I need to go out with you to check your car for wear and tear. A: Fine, how will I know how much I should insure my car for? B: After looking at your car, I will use the Blue Book price and we will consider the condition of the car. A: Are there other considerations when I insure my car? B: We always need to think about property damage, damage to other vehicles, and injury.3. Deciding to Buy the Car
1.audio A: I really like that car and I am thinking of buying it. B: Yes, I agree. Do you want to take it to a mechanic to have it checked out? A: I already took care of that yesterday. B: That's good. Have you discussed the price with the seller? A: Yes, I think we've agreed upon a fair price. B: Have you set up your financing to pay for this car? A: Yes, my parents are going to loan me the money. B: That's good. Would you like me to go talk to the seller with you and drive your car home? A: That would be a great help! B: Glad to be of help. I can't wait to see your new car! 2.audio A: That car is exactly what I want, so I probably should buy it. B: From what I see, it's a good deal. Should a mechanic check it out for you? A: A mechanic looked at it for me on Tuesday when I first looked at it. B: It's good that you took care of that. Have you agreed upon a price with the seller? A: Yes, he was willing to lower his price a bit and I'm good with that. B: Do you know how you are going to pay for this car? A: Yes, I have already pre-qualified for a loan with my credit union. B: You are very well prepared! I could go with you to talk to the seller and help you get your car home. A: I appreciate the offer of help! B: It will be my pleasure to help you. I am looking forward to riding in your new car. 3.audio A: I think that that car drove really well and is a good deal. B: It seems to be a good choice for you. You might want to have a mechanic take a look at it just to be sure. A: My friend is a mechanic and he came and looked at it for me this morning. B: That was smart of you to think ahead. Have you and the seller agreed upon a price? A: Yes, he is willing to accept the price that I offered him. B: Have you thought about how to pay for your car? A: I saved up enough money to pay cash for this car. B: You've really thought this through. Let me go with you to make the payment and drive your car home for you. A: That would make it a lot easier for me. B: Let's go take care of that right now. I really want to see your new car!4. Declining to Buy the Car
1.audio A: Thank you for letting me test drive the car. B: So do you think that you would like to purchase this car? A: You know, I am not interested in purchasing the car right now. B: What's the problem? We can at least sit down and maybe work out a deal. A: Actually, I have several other cars to look at before I make my decision. B: What didn't you like about the car? Maybe I can fix something for you. A: It is a combination of things, but I appreciate your time. B: I have some other cars you might want to look at. A: Again, I appreciate your time but I will not be purchasing this car. B: Give me a call if you change your mind. Have a good day. 2.audio A: I appreciate you letting me take the car out for a spin. B: Why don't you come over here and we can work out the details of the purchase? A: I don't think that this is the car for me at this point in time. B: It's a great deal. Let's talk price. Maybe you'll change your mind. A: This is only the first car that I've looked at. B: Is there something in particular that didn't look good to you? A: It isn't one thing in particular, but I think I can do better for my money. B: I really think that you should reconsider. A: Thank you again for your time. B: Thank you for stopping by. Good luck in your search for a car. 3.audio A: I enjoyed taking the car out for a test drive. B: Isn't that a great car? Let's work out the details of purchase. A: I will not be purchasing the car today. B: Why don't you take a second look at that car? You'll see that it is as good a deal as you are going to get. A: I need to compare this car to others to make an informed choice. B: You said on the phone that this is the kind of car you wanted. What has changed your mind? A: I just really need to make sure that I get the best car for my money. B: You know, you can look around but I just don't think that you are going to get a better deal for your money. A: I will continue looking around for cars and will get back to you if I change my mind. B: OK, then. Have a good day.5. Detecting a Problem with the Car
1.audio A: I was thinking about buying this used car, and was wondering if you would take a look at it for me to see if it has any problems. B: Sure, pull up over there and we'll take a look. A: I just wasn't sure what to look for. B: The first thing you do is look for any signs of wear both inside and out. We will also look at the body for signs of major repair. A: Someone told me that I could go online and see if the car is listed as having been in a major accident. B: Yes, that's right. Next, we will turn on the engine and I will check under the hood to look at the hoses and belts. A: Should we take the car for a drive? B: Yes, but before we pull away, let's check to make sure that the radio, turn signals, lights, and seats all work properly. A: As I am driving what should I be checking? B: You want to make sure that the brakes don't pull to one side and that the car has good alignment and acceleration. A: Thanks for your help. B: You are welcome. Enjoy driving your car! 2.audio A: Could you take a few minutes and see if there are any problems with this used car that I am thinking of buying? B: I am happy to help. Just pull up and we'll give it a good look. A: I don't know much about cars. B: We need to look inside and outside for signs of an accident or major damage. Also, we need to look for wear on the tires. A: If I go online I can also check to see if the car has been involved in a major accident. B: Yes, you can check the history of the car online. Next, we need to turn on the engine and take a look at the belts and hoses. A: Will you take a drive with me to check handling? B: A test drive would be good. But first let's make sure that the turn signals, radio, lights, and seats work properly. A: On a test drive, what should I look for? B: We are checking for solid braking and good overall handling. A: I appreciate you helping me figure out what to look for. B: My pleasure. This seems to be a solid car and a good choice for you. 3.audio A: I want to buy this used car, but I need help figuring out if there are any problems with it. B: I can help you with that. Drive the car over by the garage and we'll check it out. A: I know some things to look for, but I know there are other special things to look for. B: Always start with looking for signs of major damage that may have been repaired and also check tire wear. A: If the car has been in a major accident, that should have been recorded online. B: Right. All major accidents should have been recorded. Next start the car up, pop the hood, and we'll take a look at the belts and hoses. A: I would like for you to take a test drive with me. B: We'll do that in a minute, but first we should check that the radio, turn signals, and all of the lights work properly. A: As we drive, what am I checking for? B: You want to make sure that the alignment is good, that the engine accelerates smoothly, and that the car can safely brake to a stop. A: I like knowing what to look for when buying a used car and appreciate the help. B: This car is in good shape and should give you no major problems. Enjoy it!6. How to Pay for the Used Car
1.audio A: I am buying a used car and don't know much about financing it. B: I can help you. Do you have a down payment? A: Yes, I have saved up three thousand dollars for a down payment. B: Good, because you will not be able to get a loan without putting some money down on the car. A: I don't know where exactly to get a loan. B: Other than friends or family, you can go to a bank, credit union, or use the dealer financing if you bought the car off a car lot. A: What is the best choice for financing? B: It depends. The worst financing deal is usually at the dealer, but they will oftentimes give you a loan when a bank turns you down. A: What do I need to have with me when I apply for the loan? B: You will need a recent pay stub and a copy of the pink slip for the car. Before the loan is complete, you will need to show proof of insurance. Good luck! 2.audio A: Can you help me learn about financing options for a used car? B: I would love to help you with what I know. I am assuming that you have a down payment. A: Yes, I already borrowed some money from my parents for the down payment. B: That will work. A bank or finance company will not loan you money without a down payment. A: I am not sure who will loan money to me. B: You can apply for a loan at a bank, credit union, or approach the used car dealer who sold you the car. You might also try family and friends. A: Who offers the best interest rate? B: A credit union will usually give you the best interest rate, but the dealer will almost always give you some type of loan. A: Do I need any documents when I apply for a car loan? B: Be sure that you take a recent pay stub and a copy of the pink slip. You will have a few days to produce proof of insurance. Enjoy your new car! 3.audio A: I need help figuring out how to pay for a used car that I am thinking of buying. B: I would be happy to help you. Have you saved up a down payment? A: I will be getting money from selling my old car. B: You really need that money so that a bank or finance company will loan you the rest of the money that you need. A: Who gives loans out to people wanting to buy cars? B: Usually people go to a bank, credit union, or, if they bought the car at a car lot, they might use the dealer finance company. A: What is the best place to get financing? B: The dealer will charge you a higher interest rate, but sometimes they are your only choice if you are just starting out. A: Will I need some documentation when I apply for the loan? B: Just make sure that you bring them your last pay stub and a copy of the pink slip. You can then work on getting insured. Enjoy your new car!7. Making an Appointment with the DMV
1.audio A: I need to go to the DMV and don't know how to make an appointment with them. B: First of all you need to figure out if you really need to be there in person. Sometimes you can take care of your business at the Automobile Club or at the DMV website. A: If I do need to go in, how can I make an appointment? B: You can either make an appointment by going online or by calling the phone number listed on their website. A: What if I just show up there? B: If you have all day to wait and a good book to read, that might work for you. A: Is the DMV open on Saturdays? B: Due to state budget cuts, the DMV is no longer open on Saturdays. A: I think that you have just convinced me to join the Automobile Club! B: Yes, the Automobile Club takes all the pain out of DMV transactions! 2.audio A: How can I make an appointment at the DMV? B: You could check the DMV website or see if the Automobile Club could help you. Many things can be taken care of without actually going in to the DMV in person. A: How do I make an appointment if I have to actually go in? B: You have two choices. You can call them at the number listed on their website or you can contact them online. A: Can I just walk in and get help? B: Without an appointment, you will be waiting for many hours. I would not advise it. A: Can I take care of this on a Saturday? B: Unfortunately, the DMV is no longer open on Saturdays. A: It probably would be easier for me to join the Automobile Club. B: The Automobile Club has many benefits, and taking care of your DMV transactions is one of the best benefits. 3.audio A: Can you help me figure out how to make an appointment with the DMV? B: I would try to avoid going in to the DMV in person. If you are a member of the Automobile Club, they oftentimes can take care of things for you or you can try the DMV website. A: It would be nice not to have to go in but if I have to, how do I make an appointment? B: The easiest way to contact them is online, but they also have a phone number listed on the website if you prefer to call them on the phone. A: What do they do if you just show up with no appointment? B: That is not a good way to go. You could be left waiting for many hours and there is no guarantee that they will see you at all! A: What about going to the DMV on Saturday? B: For a while the DMV was open on Saturday, but not anymore. A: I think that the Automobile Club idea was a good suggestion. B: You should check out the Automobile Club. I think you would enjoy being a member.8. Negotiating a Price with a Student
1.audio A: This car is exactly what I want! B: I am glad that you like it. I've had good experiences with this car. A: So, how much do you want for the car? B: Well, the price in the paper was five thousand dollars. A: Yes, I know, but I think that might be a little high for this car. B: I might be able to come down a little on the price. A: How about selling the car for four thousand? B: No, that's way less than I could accept. However, I could accept forty-five hundred. A: That sounds fair to me. B: It's a deal then. Thank you! 2.audio A: I really love this car! B: Great! I was hoping that it would go to a driver who appreciates it. A: How much are you willing to take for the car? B: As I am sure you noticed, the price on the window is five thousand dollars. A: Don't you think you could come down a bit on the price? B: You seem like a nice person. Maybe I could lower the price a bit. A: Would you sell it to me for four thousand? B: I am thinking more in the line of four thousand five hundred. A: I'll take it then! B: Perfect! That works for both of us. 3.audio A: I am definitely interested in buying this car. B: Wonderful! It's good to find a person who really needs this car. A: What is the price for this car? B: The price I listed on eBay was five thousand dollars. A: I was thinking that maybe you might be willing to lower the price a bit. B: You know I just got a good deal on my new car. I think I can afford to knock a little off of this car. A: I was thinking that four thousand would be a good price. B: I couldn't go that low, but I could sell it for forty-five hundred. A: That would work well for me. B: It's done then. I've enjoyed doing business with you.9. Negotiating a Price with a Dealer
1.audio A: How much does this car cost? B: Well, come on in and we'll sit down and discuss that right now. How much do you want to pay? A: I really was just wondering what the price is. B: Well, figuring in tax, license, dealer prep, and registration, I can let this car go for fifteen thousand dollars. A: I was thinking a little lower than that. B: Whoa! Let's keep talking here. I am sure we can work something out. What price are you thinking is fair? A: I was thinking more like thirteen thousand dollars. B: You know, you look like you are a sweet kid. I'll give it to you for fourteen thousand dollars. A: That would be a good price if the car was in great shape, but it is registered as having been in an accident. B: OK, thirteen thousand seven hundred and fifty, and that's my final offer. 2.audio A: If I want to buy this car, what will it cost me? B: Let me get my contract out, and we'll figure that out for you right now. A: Can't you just tell me what it costs? B: You know, I am prepared to offer you a great deal today on that car. With tax, license, registration, and dealer prep, the total will be fifteen thousand dollars. A: Fine, I'll come back later with my father, who is a lawyer, and we can talk then. B: I am sure that we can work something out. What price were you thinking would be a good deal for you? A: Thirteen thousand would be more like it. B: Fourteen thousand for this car is a good price. For that I am practically giving it away. A: Normally that would be a good price, but that car has been in an accident. B: Yes, I see your point. Thirteen thousand seven hundred and fifty is my final offer. 3.audio A: How much money for this car? B: Yes, that car is beautiful, isn't it? Come on inside and we'll discuss the price. A: I just want to know the price. B: Fifteen thousand out the door! What a deal! That will, of course, include tax, license, registration, and dealer prep. A: I appreciate your help, and I'll see you later. B: Oh, you look like a smart person. What price would be fair to you? A: I think that thirteen thousand would be fair for this car. B: I can see that you are a smart buyer. Fourteen thousand is my best price. A: If the car hadn't been in an accident, that would be a good price, but it has a few minor problems. B: Thirteen thousand seven hundred and fifty is my final offer.10. Test Driving the Car
1.audio A: I really love the look of this car. B: Would you like to test drive this car? A: Yes, I would love to take it for a drive. B: I'll go get the keys, and you can get out your Driver's License and Proof of Insurance. A: Here's my Driver's License and Proof of Insurance. B: Well, just sign this card, and we'll be on our way. Don't forget to buckle your seatbelt! A: Can I take it on the freeway to check for acceleration? B: That would be fine; just don't exceed the speed limit! A: This car handles great, and I love it! B: I am glad that you like this car. 2.audio A: The styling of this car really appeals to me. B: Would you like to take this car for a spin? A: That would be a great idea. B: Fine, all I'll need from you is your Driver's License and Proof of Insurance. A: I've got my Driver's License and Proof of Insurance ready. B: OK, after you sign this card, we'll take a spin. Make sure you buckle your seatbelt! A: I would like to go on the freeway to test it for speed. B: As long as you don't exceed the speed limit, that would be fine. A: Whoa, this car has wonderful pickup! B: Yes, this is a very popular car. 3.audio A: Wow, what a cool car! B: How about taking this car out for a drive to see if you like how it handles? A: I would enjoy seeing how it handles. B: While I'm getting the keys, you just need to take out your Driver's License and Proof of Insurance. A: I found my Driver's License and Proof of Insurance. B: Great! Sign this card, buckle your seatbelt, and we'll hit the road. A: I want to take the car up to freeway speed. B: Take a left at the next signal to enter the freeway. Just keep it under the speed limit! A: This car has a nice smooth ride, even on the freeway. B: You know, I've driven it myself, and I agree with you.11. Title Transfer
1.audio A: Now I've decided to buy this car, how do I transfer the title to myself? B: Actually, your best bet is to contact the Automobile Club or to go to the DMV website. A: Basically, what will I need to do? B: Both buyer and seller need to transfer the ownership by filling out a Change of Ownership form and signing over the Certificate of Title, which will be either pink or rainbow. A: Will I have to pay any fees? B: All of the transfer fees are the responsibility of the buyer. A: How much will it cost to transfer the title? B: The DMV has a special formula that they use to calculate the fees. They will figure it out for you. A: Do I need a Smog Certificate? B: No, only if your car was manufactured before 1975. A: Where do I take my forms? B: You can take them to the DMV. You have ten days to complete the process. 2.audio A: I don't really know all that much about the paperwork involved in buying a used car. B: If you are a member of the Automobile Club, they can help guide you through the process, or just go to the DMV website. A: What is the big picture of what I will need to take care of? B: The car has a pink or rainbow Certificate of Title, which both the buyer and seller need to sign. They also both need to fill out theChange of Ownership form. A: Who pays the fees to transfer the ownership? B: The buyer must pay all of the fees. A: Will it be really expensive to transfer the title? B: The DMV will calculate the fees for you when you submit the paperwork. A: What about a Smog Certificate? B: No, your car was built after 1974, so you will be fine. A: Where can I turn in my forms? B: If you are a member of the Automobile Club, you can turn in your forms to them. 3.audio A: Can you help me figure out how to transfer the title of the car I wish to buy so it will be registered in my name? B: You can go to the DMV website for information or, if you are a member of the Automobile Club, they can be very helpful. A: Can you just fill me in on what needs to be done? B: When you both fill out and sign a Change of Ownership form and sign the Certificate of Title, the ownership will be transferred. A: Are there any fees involved? B: As the buyer, you are responsible for all of the fees. A: How much money will I have to pay to transfer the title? B: The only way to calculate the fee is to turn your paperwork in to the DMV, and they will figure it out for you. A: Do I need to take the car in for a Smog Certificate? B: No, your car is a newer model, so you won't need one. A: Whom do I give my forms to when they are completed? B: Check online for special situations, but usually you can mail your forms in to the DMV.12. Where to Buy a Used Car
1.audio A: Where is the best place to buy a used car? B: I have always purchased my used cars from an advertisement in the paper, but actually you have many options. A: Where else could I look for a car? B: You could look on the Internet. Craigslist is best, as most of the cars listed there are sold locally. A: What would be best if I wanted to actually go see a lot of used cars that are for sale? B: The best place is CarMax, which is a very large used car lot. A: Where is CarMax? B: There are many of them. You can look on the Internet or in the phone book for the one closest to you. A: How about the listings on the college bulletin board? B: Actually, that is not a bad way to go, especially near the end of a semester as students are moving away. 2.audio A: Can you help me figure out the best place to buy a used car? B: There are a lot of different ways to go. I bought my last one from an advertisement in the paper. A: What are my other options for looking for a used car? B: Internet listings are good. Craigslist is pretty good because most of the cars are sold locally. A: I think that I might actually like to see many used cars together so I can compare them. B: The biggest used car lot is CarMax. I would check that place out. A: How can I find out where CarMax is? B: Look in the phone book or on the Internet for the one closest to you. There are a lot of them. A: Have you ever seen the listings on the school bulletin board? B: The school bulletin board can have some great deals, as many students sell their cars before they return home or as they get better paying jobs. 3.audio A: Where did you buy your last used car? B: I found my last one in an advertisement in the newspaper, but there are a lot of other places to look for used cars. A: Besides an advertisement, what else could I do to find a used car? B: My friend bought his used car off of Craigslist. It works out better than eBay because the cars listed are located close by. A: Is there anywhere I can go to see many used cars all in the same place? B: Go to CarMax if you want to see the largest selection of used cars in one place. A: I don't know where CarMax is. B: CarMax has many car lots in many cities. For the one closest to you, check out the Internet or phone book. A: Have you ever known anyone who bought a car off a listing on the university bulletin board? B: You can get a good deal there. Especially at the end of the year, when students are selling things and returning home.13. At the Window of the DMV
1.audio A: Could you tell me what window I should go to? B: Do you have an appointment? A: Yes, I have an appointment. B: The DMV windows are set up for different tasks. What are you here to do? A: I need to transfer ownership of a used car. B: I can see that you have all of your forms filled out. Drop the forms in that box, and I will call you when your name comes up. A: Thanks for helping me. B: You are welcome. May I see your current Driver's License? A: Here is my license, it is not a very good picture of me! B: That's a pretty good picture. Just pay the fee over at the last window and you're done! 2.audio A: This is my first time at the DMV, and I don't know what window to go to. B: It depends on what you are doing. Did you make an appointment? A: I made an appointment last month. B: All of the windows are for specific services. What do you need to do today? A: I just bought a used car and need to transfer the ownership. B: If you just put all of your filled-out forms in the drop box, your name will be called when it comes up. A: Thank you, that helps me know what to do. B: My pleasure. The only other thing I need is your current Driver's License. A: Here is my license, it is a very old picture of me! B: You look good in that picture. Take this over to the last window to pay your fee, and you've finished registering your car. 3.audio A: Could you help direct me to the proper window? B: There are different windows for different things. Did you make an appointment on the Internet? A: I made my appointment over the Internet. B: Different windows will be able to help you with different problems. What do you need help with? A: I need help transferring the ownership of a new car from my friend to myself. B: The signed forms go in the box, and I will call your name in a few minutes. A: Thank you for making it seem less confusing. B: If you would give me your current Driver's License, I will be able to complete the transfer process. A: Here is my license, I never really liked that picture! B: That is a great picture! Take the forms over to the last window to pay your fees and you're finished!1. Applying For a Driving Permit
1.audio A: I would like to apply for a permit. B: Can I see your ID? A: No, I left it in the car. B: I'm going to need to see your ID and $27 for your permit. A: One moment while I go and get my ID. B: Make it quick. A: Here's my ID and the $27. B: Thanks. Now fill this out. A: Do you have a pen that I can use? B: Use this one. A: Thanks a lot. B: You're welcome. Turn the application in at Window B. 2.audio A: Can I apply for a permit today? B: I need to see your ID. A: I think I forgot it in the car. B: You need to give me your ID and $27. A: I'm going to go and get my ID from the car right now. B: Go get it. A: Here you go. B: All right, I'm going to need you to fill this out. A: May I borrow your pen? B: Here's a pen for you. A: Thanks for your help. B: You need to turn that in at Window B. 3.audio A: I really need to apply for a driving permit. B: Do you have your ID with you? A: I may have left my ID in my car. B: Well, I need your ID and $27. A: I'll go get it really quick. B: Please hurry. A: Here it is. B: Thank you very much. Please fill out this paperwork. A: I need to use a pen. B: Here you go. A: Thank you very much. B: Thank you. Now turn in your application at Window B.2. Taking the Written Test
1.audio A: Have you taken the written test yet? B: No, I haven't. A: You should study before you take it. B: I have been studying. A: Why don't you take the test? B: Do you know if it costs any money to take it? A: Since you already paid for your permit, you don't have to pay again. B: All right. Do you know if the test covers the whole book? A: No, the test skips a lot of things in the book. B: Did you pass it the first time that you took it? A: No, I didn't, because it was pretty hard. B: Well, I hope that I do well. 2.audio A: Did you take the written test? B: I haven't taken it yet. A: Make sure to study first. B: I study every night. A: I'm sure you're ready. B: Does it cost money? A: No, it doesn't cost anything. B: Does the test cover everything in the manual? A: It skips around. B: Did you pass the test your first try? A: I thought it would be easy, but I didn't pass it. B: Wish me luck. 3.audio A: Have you already taken the written test? B: Not yet. A: You really need to study for it. B: I already know. I have been studying. A: You should probably go and take it then. B: I'm not sure, but does it cost anything to take it? A: No, because you applied for your permit and you paid already. B: Will the test be on everything in the manual? A: It doesn't cover everything. B: When you took the test, did you pass it the first time? A: No, I didn't pass it. B: Hopefully, I won't fail the test.3. Learning How to Drive (1)
1.audio A: You know how to drive, right? B: I'm pretty good. A: Do you think you can teach me? B: Did you get your learner's permit yet? A: I have it already. B: Do you have any experience driving a car? A: I've only done it once. B: Do you know all the in the car? A: Yes, I am aware of them. B: When do you want to start learning how to drive? A: Whenever you have time. B: We can do it tomorrow; just call me. 2.audio A: Do you know how to drive? B: I'm a great driver. A: Could you teach me how to drive? B: Have you gotten your learner's permit? A: Yes, I have my learner's permit. B: Have you ever been behind the wheel? A: I've only driven a car one time. B: You do know all the in the car, don't you? A: I know them. B: Tell me when you want me to teach you. A: We can do it when you have some time. B: I'm not busy tomorrow. Call me then. 3.audio A: Are you a good driver? B: Yes, I'm rather good at driving. A: I need you to teach me how to drive. B: Yes, but do you have your learner's permit? A: Yes, I have it. B: Have you ever driven a car before? A: I drove a car before, but only once. B: Are you aware of all the in the car? A: I already know all of them. B: When would you like me to start teaching you? A: When do you have time? B: Call me tomorrow, and we'll get started.4. Learning How to Drive (2)
1.audio A: Do you want to practice your driving right now? B: No problem. We can do it right now. A: Are you buckled up? B: All right. Now what do I do? A: Start the car. B: Which way do you want me to go? A: Take a left. B: How far do you want me to go? A: I'll tell you when to stop. B: Just make sure to tell me beforehand. A: We're back now, so why don't you try parking? B: Well, that was fun. Let's do it again soon. 2.audio A: Let's go practice your driving. B: If that's what you want to do, then we can. A: Did you buckle your seatbelt? B: I'm buckled up. What's next? A: You need to start the car now. B: What do you want me to do? A: Go left. B: How far should I go? A: I'll let you know when I want you to stop. B: Tell me before you want me to stop. A: All right, try parking here. B: Thanks. Let's go driving again tomorrow. 3.audio A: Do you think we can go driving right now? B: Yeah, sure. Let's go. A: Buckle up. B: All right. Now what? A: Now you put the key in the ignition and start the car. B: Which direction should I take? A: Make a left on this next street. B: Tell me how far to go. A: Keep going until I tell you to stop. B: Okay, but let me know ahead of time. A: That's all for today, so park right there. B: That was great. Thanks for taking me driving.5. Failing the Road Test
1.audio A: So how did I do on my driving test? B: Do you want the truth? A: Of course, I do. B: Well, you really didn't do all that well. A: How bad did I do? B: To be completely honest, you failed your test. A: How? B: There were a number of reasons. A: What were they? B: Basically, you just can't drive. A: Can I have another try? B: You can take it in a couple weeks. 2.audio A: How did I do? B: Do you really want to know? A: Yes, I do. B: You did pretty bad. A: Exactly how bad? B: You didn't pass the test. A: I don't understand how I could've failed it. B: There are a few reasons why you failed. A: What are the reasons? B: The main reason is the fact that you're a horrible driver. A: Can I take the test again? B: You'll be able to take the test again in a couple weeks. 3.audio A: Did I do well on my test? B: Do you want to know the honest answer? A: Why wouldn't I want to know? B: You had pretty bad scores. A: Exactly what do you mean by bad? B: You failed. A: How'd I fail it? B: There are a couple of reasons why you didn't pass. A: What did I do wrong? B: To sum it all up, you really just don't know how to drive. A: Will I be able to take a retest? B: Sure you can, in about two and a half weeks.6. Passing the Road Test
1.audio A: How'd I do on my driving test? B: You did great on your test. A: Did I pass my test? B: You passed with flying colors. A: Did I mess up at all on my test? B: There was only one thing. A: What was it? B: You had some problems with parking. A: Parking is always the hardest thing for me. B: You should practice that. A: I will, but in the meantime, do I get my license? B: Yes. You got your license. 2.audio A: Did I do well on my driving test? B: You did a wonderful job. A: So, I passed? B: Yes, you passed. A: Did I mess up on anything? B: You did mess up on something. A: What was that? B: Your parallel parking isn't all that great. A: Yes, that's pretty hard for me. B: You just need a little more practice. A: I know, but I still get my license, right? B: You got it. 3.audio A: About my driving test, did I do well? B: You did a fabulous job. A: Are you telling me that I passed the test? B: That's what I'm telling you. A: What did I mess up on? B: You did mess up a little on one thing. A: Tell me. B: You had a little trouble on your parallel parking. A: That's not easy for me. B: That's something that you really need to work on. A: Am I still going to get my license? B: You're still going to get it.7. Getting the Driver's License
1.audio A: I need to get my driver's license. B: You need to take your driving test. Have you? A: No, I still need to take it. B: Please fill out this paperwork. A: All right, but will I be able to take my test today? B: Actually, you're going to have to make an appointment first. A: May I make one right now, please? B: Sure, you can. The soonest day available will be this Friday. A: Friday will be fine. B: What time can you come in? A: I would like to do it sometime in the morning. B: I'll schedule you for 11 o'clock, Friday morning. 2.audio A: I would like to get my driver's license today. B: You will have to take your driving test. Have you taken it yet? A: I haven't taken it yet. B: Could you fill these papers out, please? A: Can I take my test right now? B: You need an appointment. A: I would like to do that right now, if I could. B: Is Friday good for you? A: That's perfect. B: Okay, so Friday at what time? A: The morning would be nice. B: All right. Come in on Friday at 11:00. 3.audio A: How can I get my driver's license? B: Have you taken your driving test yet? A: I have yet to take my driving test. B: Okay, first I'm going to need you to fill out the paperwork. A: When can I take my test? B: You'll have to make an appointment for that. A: I would like to make one right now. B: How does Friday sound? A: That would be great. B: What time would you like to take the test? A: If I could do it in the morning, then that would be good. B: Eleven o'clock on Friday morning. See you then.8. Asking Where to Park on Campus
1.audio A: I need to find somewhere to park. B: Off campus or on campus? A: I need to find a space on campus. B: Why don't you park in the parking structure for students? A: Where is the parking structure at? B: It's on the west side of the campus. A: Do you know if the parking structure is full or not? B: It was empty last time I went up there. A: How long ago was that? B: I went up there early this morning. A: Do you think it'll be full now? B: It might be. You'll have to go see for yourself. 2.audio A: Do you know where I can park? B: Do you need a spot here or off campus? A: I want a space on campus. B: There's a parking structure for students. A: Where can I find it? B: Go to the western side of the campus, and you'll find it there. A: Is it full? B: When I went up there, it wasn't full at all. A: When was that? B: Sometime this morning. A: Would it be full now? B: I am really not sure. 3.audio A: I really need to find a parking spot. B: Are you looking for a space on or off campus? A: Do you know any spaces on campus? B: You can park in the student parking structure. A: Where is it located? B: You'll find the parking structure on the west side of the campus. A: Do you have any idea if the parking structure has any spaces left? B: Last time I checked, it was pretty empty. A: What time was it when you went up there? B: That was earlier this morning. A: It wouldn't be full right now, would it? B: I have no idea.9. Getting a Parking Ticket
1.audio A: Have you ever gotten a parking ticket? B: I've never gotten one. Have you? A: I got a ticket yesterday. B: Really? What did you get one for? A: I parked in the red zone. B: Why did you do that? A: I needed to get something real quickly. B: Where did you park at? A: At my apartment building. B: Don't you have your own parking spot? A: I needed to be fast. B: That was very lazy of you. 2.audio A: Have you gotten a parking ticket before? B: No, I haven't. What about you? A: I got a ticket a couple of days ago. B: What did you do? A: I got it for parking in the red zone. B: Why would you park in the red zone? A: I had to run in and get something quickly. B: Where were you at? A: I got the ticket in front of my apartment. B: I thought that you had your own parking spot? A: I had to make it quick. B: Hope it was worth it. 3.audio A: Did you ever get a parking ticket? B: No, have you? A: Yes, I just got one the other day. B: How'd you get a ticket? A: The ticket was for parking in the red zone. B: I don't understand why you would do that. A: There was nowhere to park, and I needed to run in and get something. B: Where'd you get the ticket at? A: I parked in front of my apartment building. B: What about your parking spot? A: But I really needed to be quick. B: I bet that you wish you hadn't done that.10. Paying Off Parking Tickets
1.audio A: Have you ever gotten a parking ticket? B: I've gotten a few. A: How many is a few? B: I've gotten about six. A: Have you paid all your tickets off? B: Yes, I've paid all of them off. A: How much is the fine? B: It's like $130 each ticket. A: That's not cheap at all. B: I got a parking ticket the other day. A: Pay it off, and they'll clear your record. B: I'm going to do that as soon as possible. 2.audio A: Did you ever get a parking ticket? B: Only a few. A: What's a few? B: I've gotten six, I think. A: Did you pay your fines? B: Of course I have. A: How much are the parking tickets? B: I think they're $130. A: That's expensive. B: I just got a parking ticket. A: You should probably pay the fine soon. B: I'm going to pay it today. 3.audio A: How many parking tickets have you gotten before? B: I've gotten a few parking tickets before. A: How many? B: Only about five or six. A: Have you paid off your parking tickets? B: Yes, I paid my fines. A: How much do you have to pay for the ticket? B: If I remember correctly, it's about $130. A: That's a lot of money. B: I got one the other day. A: You better make sure you pay it off. B: I may just go to the DMV today, so I can pay the fine.11. Failing to Stop at a Stop Sign
1.audio A: Is there a problem, officer? B: Did you not notice that stop sign that you ran through? A: I'm sorry, I didn't even notice it. B: You didn't see it? A: I honestly couldn't see it because of the bushes growing over it. B: That's true. Those bushes are a problem. A: I swear that I didn't mean to run it. B: I can understand why you didn't stop for it. A: Are you going to give me a ticket today, sir? B: Under the circumstances, I think I'm just going to let you go with a warning. A: Thanks a lot. B: No problem. Next time, just pay closer attention. 2.audio A: What's the problem? B: There was a stop sign back there that you didn't stop for. A: I really didn't see it. B: How'd you miss it? A: I only saw bushes at the intersection. B: Those bushes are covering the stop sign. A: I really didn't mean to run it. B: I see why you didn't stop. A: Are you still going to write me a ticket? B: No, I'm just going to let you go. A: Thanks for being so understanding. B: That's all right. Make sure to look closely next time. 3.audio A: What's up, officer? B: Are you aware that you ran through that stop sign? A: There was a stop sign? B: How could you not notice it? A: If there really was a stop sign, I couldn't see it because of the overgrown bushes. B: You're right. The bushes are covering the sign. A: If I saw the stop sign, I would've stopped for it. B: Now that I think about it, I can see how you missed it. A: Am I getting a ticket for this? B: I'll let you off with a warning. A: Thank you, I really do appreciate that. B: Don't worry about it. I need to have something done about those bushes.12. Driving Through a Red Light
1.audio A: Is there a problem, officer? B: I stopped you for driving through a red light. A: Did I really? B: You didn't know? A: I had no idea that I ran it. B: Don't you know that yellow means slow down? A: Yes, sir. B: Why'd you speed up instead? A: I really have no excuse, sir. B: I'll have to write you a ticket. A: I understand, and I am very sorry. B: Here's your ticket. 2.audio A: What's wrong, officer? B: You do realize that you ran a red light, don't you? A: I did? B: You didn't see the red light? A: I'm sorry for running it, but I really didn't know. B: Didn't you learn that red means stop? A: I know that. B: Then tell me why you sped up on the yellow light. A: I'm not sure. B: I'm giving you a ticket for this. A: I'm sorry for the misunderstanding. B: Maybe you'll think about this before you decide to run another light. 3.audio A: Why'd you pull me over? B: Are you aware that you drove through a red light? A: I ran a red light? B: Yes, you did. A: I apologize, but I didn't realize that I did that. B: Weren't you taught that yellow means slow down, not speed up? A: I did learn that. B: So, then why did you speed up? A: I don't know what to tell you. B: I'm going to have to write you a ticket. A: I understand. B: Here you go. Don't do that again.13. Fighting a Ticket in Court (1)
1.audio A: You're here today to argue your ticket? B: I am. A: Plead your case. B: The police officer that pulled me over said I was speeding. A: Were you speeding when you got pulled over? B: I was not speeding. A: How fast were you going? B: In a 40 mph zone, I was only going about 35. A: Seeing as the officer that pulled you over isn't here, I'll let you go. B: Do I still need to pay the fine? A: No, you don't. B: I appreciate your understanding. 2.audio A: You want to argue your ticket today? B: Yes. That is why I'm here. A: Tell me your argument. B: I was pulled over for allegedly speeding. A: Are you sure you weren't speeding? B: To be honest, I really wasn't. A: What speed were you going? B: I was under the speed limit. I was going 35, when the speed limit was 40. A: I'm just going to let you go, since the arresting officer isn't here. B: What about my ticket? Do I still need to pay? A: Don't worry about it. B: I'm so glad for your help. 3.audio A: Are you here about your ticket? B: Yes, I am, Your Honor. A: What is your argument? B: Your Honor, the police officer pulled me over for speeding. A: You must've been speeding. B: No, Your Honor, I was not. A: Tell me how many miles per hour you were going. B: I was going 35 in a 40 mph zone. A: That's fine, so I'll let you go with a warning. B: So, I don't have to pay the ticket? A: You won't have to pay the fine. B: Thank you very much, Your Honor.14. Fighting a Ticket in Court (2)
1.audio A: What are you here for today? B: I need to fight this ticket that I got. A: Is the arresting officer here? B: Yes, he is, Your Honor. A: Plead your case. B: I was told by the officer that I ran a red light. That information isn't true. A: Why would the officer lie? B: I'm not sure, but the signal had a camera on it. A: Did the camera take a picture of your license plate? B: No, my picture wasn't taken. A: There was no picture taken, so I'll let you go. B: Thank you very much, Your Honor. 2.audio A: Why are you in court today? B: I got a ticket, and I would like to fight it. A: Is the officer that pulled you over here today? B: He's here. A: Tell me what happened. B: The officer says that I ran a red light, but I didn't. A: The officer wouldn't lie about that. B: He must've, because the signal had a camera on top of it. A: There was no picture taken of your license plate? B: I don't believe it took my picture. A: I'm just going to let you go. B: I appreciate that. 3.audio A: What are you doing here today? B: I would like to fight my ticket. A: Is the arresting officer in the courtroom today? B: Yes, the officer is here today. A: What's your case? B: I was pulled over for running a red light, but I never did. A: Do you believe that the officer lied? B: There was a camera on the signal. So, he was obviously lying. A: Your license plate was caught on camera? B: A picture of my license plate was never taken. A: Since there is no picture of your license plate on record, I'm going to let you go. B: Thank you. I'm glad that you believe me.15. Paying the Ticket Fine
1.audio A: I need to pay the fine on my ticket. B: Do you have the ticket with you? A: Yes, I have my ticket with me. B: Let me see your ID. A: I forgot to bring that with me. B: You need it to pay your fine. A: Why can't I just give you the money for the fine? B: Because, I need to see a photo ID in order to verify who you are. A: I think I understand. B: All right, come back and bring your ID. A: So once I pay this off, my record will be cleared? B: Once you pay it, your record will be cleared. 2.audio A: Could I pay for my parking ticket? B: I need to see your ticket. Do you have it? A: Here's my ticket right here. B: I'm going to need to see your ID. A: I don't have it. B: You can't pay your fine without your ID. A: I don't understand why I can't just pay you. B: We have to make sure that the person issued the ticket is the one paying it. A: I get it now. B: Just come back when you have your ID with you. A: Will my record be cleared after I pay the fine? B: Only if you pay your fine. 3.audio A: I have a parking ticket to pay for. B: Did you bring your ticket? A: Yes, I remembered to bring my ticket with me today. B: Did you bring your ID? A: I didn't bring my ID. B: You're going to need your ID to pay the ticket. A: What do you need my ID for? B: We have to know that this ticket is really yours. A: All right, I see what you mean. B: Next time you come back, bring your ID. A: Will everything be cleared from my record? B: Yes, everything will be cleared.16. Calling a Traffic School to Make an Appointment
1.audio A: Pasadena Traffic School. How can I help you? B: I would like to sign up for some classes. A: What classes did you want to sign up for? B: I need to take a driver's course. A: You'll have to make an appointment. B: What do I need to make an appointment for? A: You need an appointment so you can sign the papers. B: All right, can I make an appointment right now? A: When are you available? B: Can I make it for tomorrow at 9:00 a.m.? A: I can schedule you for that day and time. B: Thanks a lot. I'll be there tomorrow. 2.audio A: What can I do for you today? B: Can I sign up for some classes today? A: Which classes? B: I would like to take a driver's course. A: Would you like to make an appointment? B: Why do I need an appointment? A: You need to sign the paperwork. B: Can I do that right now? A: When can you come in? B: How about 9 o'clock tomorrow morning? A: I'll schedule you for then. B: Thanks for all your help. 3.audio A: What do you need today? B: I need to take a few classes. A: What kind of classes would you like to take? B: How about a driver's course? A: You're going to need to make an appointment. B: I don't understand why I need to make an appointment. A: You need to make one to come down and fill out your paperwork. B: I'd like to make one now if I could. A: Sure you can; when would you like to come in? B: I'd like to come in tomorrow morning at 9:00. A: That'll be fine. B: That's great. Thank you very much.17. Talking to the Traffic School Instructor
1.audio A: What can I do for you today? B: I have a question. A: What do you need to know? B: I need to take the driver's course. How many hours do I need? A: It depends on what you're trying to do with the completion of the course. B: I need to get my license. A: You're going to need to complete six hours. B: How many hours a day can I do? A: You can do two hours a day for three days. B: That's all I need to do to finish? A: Yes, that's all you need to do. B: Thanks. I'll get back to you. 2.audio A: What can I help you with? B: May I ask you something? A: What's your question? B: How many hours behind the wheel do I need? A: What do you need to take it for? B: I'm trying to get my license. A: You need six hours. B: Can I do all six hours in one day? A: You have to do it in three days. B: That's all I have to do? A: That's everything. B: Well, that's a relief. 3.audio A: May I help you? B: I needed to ask you a question. A: Ask away. B: How many hours of the behind-the-wheel course do I need to take? A: Why do you need to take the course? B: I want to get my license. A: You have to do six hours behind the wheel. B: How many days do I need to finish the course? A: You can't finish in less than three days. B: Is that all? A: There's nothing else to it. B: That sounds easy enough.18. A Traffic Incident
1.audio A: Hey man, you hit my car. B: I really didn't mean to. A: It doesn't matter, because you damaged my car. B: It looks okay to me. A: Look what you did to my rear bumper. B: What's wrong with it? A: My bumper is smashed in. B: I didn't do that. A: Your front bumper is just as damaged. B: If you'd just give me your number and insurance, then I'll handle it. A: Here. I'd better get a call from you. B: Don't worry. 2.audio A: You ran into my car. B: That was my fault. I'm sorry. A: You messed up my car. B: I don't see any damage. A: My rear bumper is messed up. B: I don't see anything wrong with it. A: It's smashed in. B: That's not my fault. A: The same thing is wrong with your bumper. B: I'll take care of everything. I just need your phone number and insurance. A: I need your information too. B: Here you go. 3.audio A: Why'd you run into me? B: I didn't mean to. It was an accident. A: You have completely damaged my car. B: I did not. It looks perfectly fine. A: You don't see what happened to my bumper? B: What did I do to it? A: You smashed my bumper in with your car. B: I really don't think that I did that. A: Your bumper looks exactly the same. B: Look, just give me your insurance and number and I'll take care of it. A: Give me your information, in case I don't hear from you. B: Trust me.19. A Car Accident
1.audio A: Was there an accident on the freeway today? B: You haven't heard about it? A: No, do you know what happened? B: This truck flipped over on the 210. A: Are you serious? B: I'm telling you the truth. A: Did anyone get hurt? B: Two people were injured. A: Are they going to be okay? B: I think so. A: That's a miracle that no one was killed. B: Yes, they were lucky. 2.audio A: What happened today on the freeway? B: You don't know what happened? A: What did happen? B: There was a truck on the freeway, and it flipped over. A: Really? B: I wouldn't lie about something like that. A: Were there any injuries? B: I heard that a couple people got hurt. A: Are they all right? B: The news said they should be fine. A: I'm glad to know that everyone made it out okay. B: Me too. 3.audio A: I heard there was an accident today. B: Nobody told you what happened? A: Tell me the news. B: A truck turned over on the freeway. A: Are you kidding me? B: I am completely serious. A: Did anyone get hurt? B: I believe that two people did get hurt. A: Were the injuries minor? B: I believe so. A: That's great to hear. B: Yes, it is.20. Calling the Insurance Company
1.audio A: How may I help you? B: I need to ask you something about my insurance. A: What's your question? B: Did you make any changes to my insurance? A: What kind of changes are you referring to? B: My premium isn't the same. A: Is there a problem with your premium? B: Did you guys raise my premium? A: Yes, we did go up on the premiums. B: Why wasn't I told of this change? A: I apologize, and next time we will make sure to let you know. B: I'd appreciate that. 2.audio A: What can I do for you today? B: I am inquiring about my insurance. A: What do you need to know? B: I think my insurance was changed. A: What changes were made? B: I think there's a problem with my premium. A: What's wrong with it? B: It's higher than it was before. A: I believe that the premiums did go up. B: It would have been nice if I was notified of this. A: I'm sorry about the inconvenience, and we'll notify you next time. B: That would be nice. 3.audio A: What do you need? B: I have a question about my insurance. A: What are you wondering about? B: Were there any changes to my insurance? A: What do you think was changed? B: My premium is different. A: What's the problem? B: I think that my premium went up. A: We have raised the premiums. B: You guys didn't think to notify everyone? A: Next time we'll call and let you know. B: Thanks for the favor.1. Scheduling an Apartment Viewing
1.audio A: Hi, can I speak with the apartment manager, please? B: Hello, this is the apartment manager speaking. A: I'm calling about the apartment for rent on Main Street. B: Would you be interested in seeing the apartment? A: I would love to see it. B: Are you free today at around 6 p.m.? A: Yes, I will be able to make it then. B: Well, I'll see you at 6 p.m. Do you know how to get there? A: I used to live in that area. B: I'll give you an application form when I see you. A: That sounds good. Do I need to bring anything? B: No. Just bring yourself. 2.audio A: Hello, I was wondering if I could talk with the apartment manager. B: I am the apartment manager. How can I help you? A: I was wondering if the apartment on Main Street is still available. B: Yes, it's still vacant. Are you interested in seeing it? A: Yes, I would love to see the apartment. B: I will be at the apartment today at 6:00. Can you make it? A: Yes, I can be there at 6. B: Great. I'll see you at 6. Do you know where it is? A: Yes, I have a friend who lives in that neighborhood. B: I'll be bringing an application form. A: OK, should I bring anything with me? B: No. I might need to see your ID card, but that's about it. 3.audio A: Could I speak to the apartment manager? B: I am the apartment manager. How can I help you? A: I wanted to know if that apartment on Main Street is still for rent. B: I haven't rented it out yet. Would you like to see it? A: Yes, I want to see it. B: How about today at 6 p.m.? A: That time is okay with me. B: Very good. We'll meet at 6. Do you need directions? A: No, thank you. I go by there on my way to work. B: If you're interested, you can fill out an application form. A: That's a good idea. Do I need to bring anything myself? B: No. The only thing I need to see is your driver's license. 4.audio A: I'd like to speak with the apartment manager, please. B: This is he. What can I do for you? A: I'm interested in the apartment on Main Street. B: It's still available. Do you want to see it? A: Yes, I would very much like to see it. B: Does today at 6 p.m. sound okay to you? A: I have no problem with 6 p.m. B: Okay, I'll see you at 6 o'clock. Do you need any directions? A: No, thanks. I already drove by to see what the neighborhood looks like. B: I'll have an application form with me. You can fill it out if you're interested. A: Should I bring anything with me? B: No. I only need to check your driver's license. 5.audio A: May I speak to the apartment building manager, please? B: I'm the manager. How can I help you? A: I was hoping that the apartment on Main Street was still available. B: Why, yes, it is. Would you like to get a look inside the apartment? A: Yes, it would be nice to see the apartment. B: How about today at 6 o'clock? A: Yes, I can be there at 6. B: Sounds good. I'll see you at 6. Do you want directions? A: I'm okay, thank you. I already checked out the address on MapQuest. B: If you like the place, you can fill out an application form. I'll bring one with me. A: Is there anything that I need to bring with me? B: No. I won't need to see anything except your driver's license.2. A Broken Window
1.audio A: This is Janet Smith in apartment 23. Can I speak to the apartment manager? B: Hi. How can I help you today? A: Well, my window facing the empty lot is broken. B: Oh, that's not good. What happened? A: I dont know. I wasn't home when it happened. B: Do you have any clue who might have done this? A: I have a feeling that it might have been the neighborhood kids. B: Why, what leads you to that suspicion? A: Well, next to the broken glass was a baseball. B: Well, a baseball is certainly solid evidence. A: I saw them playing just before I left my apartment. B: Well, did you recognize any of them? A: No, I just took a quick look. B: Well, it'll take a couple of days to repair it. A: A friend of mine is in the business. How about if I call him? B: That's okay by me. First, let me come see the damage. A: Come on over. So does my friend charge you or me? B: Since you didn't break it, you don't have to pay for it. A: That's a relief. I thought I was going to get stuck with the bill. B: If I knew which kid did it, I would bill his parents. 2.audio A: I'm Janet Smith in apartment 23. Is this the apartment manager? B: Hello. What can I do for you today? A: My living room window is broken. B: Are you serious? Do you know what happened? A: I am not really sure, because I was out when it occurred. B: Do you have any idea who might have been behind this? A: Something tells me it might be some of the kids in the complex. B: What led you to think it might be the kids in this building? A: I found a baseball near the broken glass. B: Well, you can't ignore a baseball in your living room, can you? A: I saw them in the lot just before I went out. B: Do you know any of them? A: No, I didn't pay any attention to who they were. B: I'll call the window repairman, but it'll probably take a couple of days. A: I could get fast service if I call a friend of mine. B: I don't have a problem with that. Let me look at the damage first. A: Okay, I'm waiting for you. But who does my friend give the bill to? B: Since the kids broke it, your friend can bill me. A: Whew! I was worried that I would have to pay for it. B: Believe me, if I find out which kid broke the window, I'll bill his parents. 3.audio A: This is Janet Smith in apartment 23. May I speak to the apartment manager? B: Speaking. What can I do for you? A: Something happened to my window. It's broken. B: That doesn't sound good. Do you know how it happened? A: I don't know the exact details. B: Do you have an idea who might be responsible for the window? A: I'm almost sure it is the local kids in the apartments. B: How did you come to that conclusion? A: There was a baseball in my living room along with the broken glass. B: Well, at least there's no mystery about how it happened. A: I saw a group of them playing in the lot just before I went out to my car. B: Can you tell me which ones you recognized? A: I just looked at them for a second. B: I'll call a repairman, but it might take two days. A: How about if I call a friend of mine who is a repairman? B: That's no problem. I'll come by right now to look at the damage. A: Okay. Come on over. But tell me, who pays for this? B: You can pay for it, and I can reimburse you. Or he can bill me directly. A: I'm glad to hear that. I didn't want to get stuck with the bill. B: I will bill the kid's parents if I ever find out which kid did it. 4.audio A: Hello, I'm John Smith in unit 23. Am I speaking to the apartment manager? B: This is he. How may I help you? A: My window that faces the empty lot is broken. B: I'm sorry to hear that. Why is it broken? A: I can't tell you exactly how it happened. B: Well, tell me what you think might have happened. A: I've got a pretty good idea that it's the kids who live here. B: Why do you think that? A: Next to the broken glass in my living room was a baseball. B: Well, you don't need Sherlock Holmes to figure this one out, do you? A: Just before I went shopping, I saw them in the lot. B: Can you give me a name or two, or a description? A: I have absolutely no idea. B: I'll call a repairman for you, but it'll probably take one or two days. A: I could probably get it fixed today, because a friend of mine is a repairman. B: That's okay. But let me see the damage first. I'm coming over. A: The glass is all cleaned up, so come on over. But do I pay for this? B: No. I will pay your friend, or I will reimburse you if you pay him. A: That's good news. I was worried you were going to make me pay for this. B: You're not at fault. But the kid who did it is. 5.audio A: This is John Smith in unit 23. Is this the apartment manager? B: Hi. What do you need today? A: I've got a broken living room window. B: I'm sorry about that. How did it get broken? A: I've got a good idea, but I'm not exactly sure. B: Well, why don't you give me a few details? A: I would bet a dollar to a dime that it's one of the local kids. B: Do you have any support for that charge? A: A baseball was on my living room carpet. I don't own a baseball. B: Well, it sounds like someone hit a home run. A: I saw them playing ball in the lot just before I went to the market. B: Do you know for sure who they were? A: All I did was glance at them before I left. B: If you like, I'll call a repairman, but it might take a few days. A: How about if I call my friend? He's a repairman and could probably fix it today. B: Sure. Let me come over to see the damage right now, though. A: Sure, come on over, but tell me, do I have to pay for this? B: You're not responsible, so you don't pay. Tell him to bill me. A: Well, lucky me. I was afraid that I was going to get stuck for the bill. B: Maybe I'll install a camera on that end of the building to catch these kids.3. Asking about Public Transportation
1.audio A: Can you give me a little more information about your apartment? B: Sure, what can I help you with? A: What kind of public transportation is near your apartment? B: I'm not sure, but I believe there is a bus stop about three blocks away. A: Do you know what direction that bus travels? B: I'm sorry. If you check online, you can get that kind of information. A: Okay, I'll just go online. B: Okay. Good luck with your search. 2.audio A: Hello, I was hoping you could give me more info about your apartment. B: I can try to help you. What would you like to know? A: Is there access to public transportation near the apartment? B: I'm pretty sure there's a bus stop within walking distance. A: Do you know anything about the buses that stop there? B: I don't know, but I'm pretty sure you can find out that stuff online. A: I think the local library has bus info. B: Good luck. The bus info shouldn't be too hard to find. 3.audio A: Can you give me a little more information about your apartment? B: All right, what do you need to know? A: What is the public transportation like near your apartment? B: I don't use buses, but I think there's a bus stop a few blocks away. A: Which route does the bus travel? B: I wish I could help you, but I know nothing about the bus system. A: I'll just check my phone book. It has lots of good information. B: I'm sorry I couldn't help you more. 4.audio A: I was hoping you could give me more information about the apartment for rent. B: I can certainly try. A: Do buses or trains run by the apartment? B: I can't swear to it, but I think a bus stop is a couple of blocks away. A: Where does the bus take you? B: I don't want to lead you astray. You should check online. A: My neighbor takes the bus. I'll ask him if he knows. B: Bus line information should be pretty easy to find. 5.audio A: Could you give me a little more information about the apartment? B: Sure, if I can. What do you want to know? A: Is there a bus or train system near the apartment? B: I'm pretty sure there's a bus stop only a few blocks away. A: Do you know which buses stop there? B: I'm sure there's an 800 number or a website that could help you. A: I don't have a computer. I'll just look in my phone book. B: Bus line information should be pretty easy to find.
4. Interviewing a Potential Roommate
1.audio A: Hello, this is Albert. B: Hi. I'm Jack. You called about the room for rent. Are you still interested? A: Yes, I am. B: I was wondering if I could ask you a couple of questions. A: Shoot. B: I just want to be sure that we get along. A: I agree with you 100 percent--we must get along. B: Are you a party animal? A: Oh, no. I'm a very quiet person. B: Great! Next: Are you neat or are you a slob? A: I'm a pretty neat person. B: Are you a night owl or a day person? A: Early to bed, early to rise. B: Finally, do you smoke? A: Actually, I quit smoking four years ago. B: Excellent answers. Do you have any questions for me? A: Just one: Is there a parking lot? B: Unfortunately, you have to park in the street. A: Well, I'm desperate. I'll take it anyway. B: Great! Let me know when you're ready to move in. A: I think it will be tomorrow if that's okay. B: No problem. I'll be here all day tomorrow. 2.audio A: Hello. You've reached Albert. B: I'm Jack. Are you still interested in renting a room? A: Yes, very much so. B: Would it be all right if I asked you some questions? A: Fire away. B: I just want to make sure that we are compatible. A: That's a good idea. We need to get along. B: Do you like to party? A: I don't party, and I don't like people who do. B: Great! Now, are you a neat person, or do you leave trash all over? A: One of my mottoes is to clean as you go. B: Do you sleep in or rise early? A: I go to bed early, and I get up early. B: And last, are you a smoker? A: I can't stand cigarette smoke. B: Excellent. Now, do you have any questions for me? A: Only one. Where can I park my car? B: I hate to tell you, but it's street parking. A: I don't like it, but I need an apartment now, so I'll take it. B: Great! Give me a call, and I'll help you move your stuff in. A: Will tomorrow be okay with you? B: That sounds good. I'll see you tomorrow. 3.audio A: Hi, this is Albert. B: Hi, my name is Jack. You called about a room for rent. Are you still interested? A: Yes, more than you know. B: I don't mean to pry, but could I ask you a couple of questions? A: Ask away. B: I don't want us to be roommates who don't get along. A: Yes, we must get along if we are going to be roommates. B: Is partying one of your priorities? A: I'm a student. I don't have time to party. B: Very good. Now, do you clean up after yourself? A: I clean up my own mess, and I expect others to do so, too. B: What time do you usually hit the sack? A: Occasionally, I stay up late if there's a big test the next day. B: What about smoking? A: If I ever get elected President, I will ban smoking nationwide. B: Very good. Now, would you like to ask me anything? A: Yes, I have one question. Do I have to park in the street? B: I'm sorry. Yes, you have to park your car in the street. A: I hate street parking, but I need the apartment now. B: Very good. Just call me when you're ready to move your stuff over here. A: How about if I come over tomorrow afternoon? B: Just ring the doorbell. I'll be here all day. 4.audio A: Hello, Albert speaking. B: This is Jack. Are you still interested in renting a room? A: Oh, yes. B: Would you mind answering a couple of questions? A: No problem. B: Since we might be roommates, I want to make sure there's no friction. A: You are right. We need to be compatible. B: Do you go out to clubs or bars a lot? A: I have been to only one nightclub in my whole life. B: Good. Now, do you expect others to pick up after you? A: Occasionally I might slip up, but usually I'm clean and neat. B: What kind of hours do you keep? A: The early bird gets the worm. B: I hope you're not a smoker. A: I can smell a cigarette from a mile away. It makes me gag. B: Your answers are great. Now, do you have a question or two for me? A: Just one question. What's the parking situation? B: This place allows only one parking space per apartment, so you'll have to park on the street. A: I don't like it, but I guess I can live with it. B: Okay, I think we'll be good roommates. Just call me when you're ready to move in. A: I can move in by tomorrow afternoon. B: That's fine. I was planning on being home tomorrow anyway. 5.audio A: Hello, Albert here. B: Hi, Albert. I'm Jack. Are you still thinking about renting a room? A: Yes, I need a room badly. B: Can I ask you a few questions? A: I'm an open book. B: I want to make sure that we get along okay. A: I'm with you. We both need to live in harmony. B: Do you like to drink and party? A: I hate noise, and I hate loud people. B: Excellent. Now, do you leave a trail of trash wherever you go? A: A place for everything, and everything in its place. B: Do you keep normal hours? A: I'm usually asleep before the 11 o'clock news. B: You don't have a cigarette habit, do you? A: Cigarette smoking is the dumbest habit in the world. B: I like your answers. Now, are there any questions you'd like to ask me? A: Yes, is the parking off street, or on street? B: You're not going to like this. It's street parking only. A: That figures, nothing is perfect. But, I'll take it. B: You know, I think we're going to hit it off. Call me when you're coming over. A: I can get all packed tonight and be there tomorrow. B: Just come on over anytime. I'll be here the whole day.2. Asking about Checks
1.audio A: Hi, Tom. This is Hannah from apartment 4C. B: Oh, hi, Hannah. A: There is something wrong with my garbage disposal. B: Exactly what's going on? A: When I turn on the disposal switch, all I get is silence. B: When did this happen? A: Well, about a week ago is when it started sounding strange. B: Did you accidentally drop something in the disposal? A: No. I only use it about once a week. I hardly ever put anything into it. B: Actually, I've heard that too little use is bad for a disposal. A: Well, no one ever told me that. B: Did you try to turn it with the disposal key? A: I don't have a key. B: Well, I've got a spare key, so I'll come over to show you how to use it. A: Okay, come on over now, and show me how to use it. B: If the key doesn't work, I'll have to call the repairman. A: Well, if it doesn't work, it's no big deal. B: Yes, but if something's broken, I like to get it fixed ASAP. 2.audio A: Tom, are you there? It's Hannah from 4C. B: Hey, Hannah. Long time no hear from. A: My garbage disposal refuses to work. B: What happens when you turn on the switch? A: When I turn on the switch, nothing happens. B: When did you first notice this? A: A week ago it started sounding different. B: Did you put something in it that you shouldn't have? A: I use it rarely. When I do use it, I put pasta or other soft food into it. B: Maybe you haven't been using the disposal enough. A: Sort of like an air conditioner in your home or car? B: Exactly. However, sometimes you can get it going again by using the key. A: What key? B: A disposal key. I've got a spare one, so I'll come over to show you. A: Okay, come on over now, and show me how to use it. B: If the key doesn't correct the problem, I'll have to call someone. A: Well, like I said, I rarely use it so it won't be a problem. B: Well, it's my nature to fix things as soon as I can. 3.audio A: Is anybody home? It's me--Hannah. B: Hey, Hannah. How's everything going? A: My garbage disposal isn't working. B: Can you be a little more specific? A: Nothing happens when I turn on the switch. B: Do you remember how it started? A: about a week ago I noticed a new sound. B: You didn't drop a fork or anything into it, did you? A: I don't use it very often. When I do use it, I put only soft food into it. B: I've heard that disposals need to be run frequently. A: That's interesting. I never heard that before. B: Have you tried to turn it manually using the key? A: I don't have a key, and I wouldn't know how to use it. B: I've got an extra key. I'll show you how to use it. A: I'm always willing to learn something new. Come on over. B: The key might not work. Then I'll have to call the plumber. A: If it works or doesn't work, it doesn't matter much to me. B: Yes, but I prefer to fix things now instead of later. 4.audio A: Hello, Tom? This is Hannah in 4C. B: Hi, Hannah. What can I do for you? A: My garbage disposal went south. B: Does it turn at all? A: There is nothing but silence when I turn on the switch. B: Did it die suddenly? A: It started to make a weird sound last week. B: You didn't try to grind up a dead body, did you? A: No, that's against the law, isn't it? I only use it on soft food, maybe once a week. B: Strange as it seems, a disposal should be run frequently. A: Once a week might not be enough, huh? B: There's a key that will turn it manually to loosen it up. A: Even if I could find this key, I wouldn't know how to use it. B: How about if I bring one over and show you how to use it? A: Great, come on over, and teach me all about garbage disposal keys. B: The key isn't a guarantee. I still might have to call a repairman. A: It's no big deal to me if you can fix it or not. B: Well, we don't want the food that's in there to start to smell bad, do we? 5.audio A: Hi, Tom. This is Hannah calling. B: Hi, Hannah. What's up? A: I think my garbage disposal kicked the bucket. B: Is it dying, or is it dead? A: Turning on the switch is the same as not turning on the switch. B: Did it make strange sounds before it croaked? A: Last week I noticed that it sounded strange. B: You haven't been putting mango or avocado seeds in there, have you? A: I use the disposal rarely. When I do use it, I put only soft food into it. B: I think a disposal freezes up when it's not used frequently. A: You mean it's sort of like use it or lose it? B: Try loosening it up by using the disposal key. A: Disposal key? I have a house key and a car key, but no disposal key. B: Well, I've got an extra key. I'll bring it over. A: Okay, Come on over, and show me how to fix this thing. B: Sometimes the key works, sometimes it doesn't. I still might have to call a plumber. A: Well, there's no big hurry, as far as I am concerned. B: If we don't fix it sometime, your apartment might start to attract bugs or rodents.2. Asking about Checks
1.audio A: Yes, this is John Smith. B: John, this is Terry Evans. I called to tell you I have good news. A: Great, what is it? B: The owner has approved your rental application. He enjoyed talking to you. A: That's great. He seemed like a really nice guy. B: Now, before you can move in, you need to pay some fees. A: Fees, what kind of fees? B: You know. First and last month's rent and security deposit. A: Oh, those fees! B: First and last is $2,500, and the deposit is $1,000. Just send me a check for $3,500. A: No problem, what's your address? B: Send it to 3035 E. Foothill Blvd., Pasadena, CA 91107. A: So, when can I move in? B: The first of next month. Just stop by my office and pick up your keys. A: Very good! Let me have your phone number. B: Sure. It's 626-555-3000. 2.audio A: John speaking. B: John, my name is Terry Evans. I have good news for you. A: I'm all ears. What is it? B: Your rental application has been approved. The owner thinks you'll be an excellent tenant. A: Oh, that's so good. It makes my day. B: Now, before you move in, you have to pay some fees. A: Fees, what are you talking about? B: You know--first and last month's rent, and the security deposit. A: Oh, of course. When you said fees, I was thinking of parking fees or something. B: That will come to $3,500, 2,500 plus $1,000. You can send me the check. A: I'll do that immediately. Where do I send it? B: Mail it to 3035 E Foothill Blvd, Pasadena, CA 91107. A: One more question. When can I move in? B: You can move in on the first. Stop by here and pick up your keys. A: Great! What's your phone number? B: My number is 626-555-3000. 3.audio A: I'm John Smith. How can I help you? B: Hi, John. This is Terry Evans. I've got some good news for you. A: I hope you're from the lottery. Go ahead. B: The apartment owner was impressed with your interview. He has approved your rental application. A: Oh, my gosh. That's wonderful news! B: Of course, there are some fees to pay before you move in. A: Fees? I don't remember anything about fees. B: You know, the usual--first and last month's rent, and the security deposit. A: But, of course. You cannot move in unless you pay such fees. B: So, you can write me a check for $3,500. That's $2,500 and $1,000 deposit. A: No sooner said than done. Where shall I mail it? B: Just mail it to 3035 E. Foothill Blvd., Pasadena, CA 91107. A: So, when will I be able to move in? B: Move in on the first. Come on by my office, and pick up your keys. A: Sounds great! Tell me your phone number. B: Certainly. My office number is 626-555-3000. 4.audio A: Yes, this is John Smith. How may I help you? B: Hello, John. Terry Evans here. I'm happy to give you some good news. A: What is it? B: The apartment owner likes you. He has approved your rental application. A: Oh, thank you. That's the news I was hoping to hear! B: Before you move in, of course, you have to pay some fees. A: Fees, I'm confused. What fees are you talking about? B: You know, the security deposit, and the first and last month's rent. A: Oh, I got it. I thought you were talking about something else. B: Just send me a check for $3,500. That's the deposit of $1,000, plus $2,500 for rent. A: Just give me your address, and I'll mail the check today. B: You can send it to 3035 E. Foothill Blvd., Pasadena, CA 91107. A: So, when can I start packing? When can I move in? B: Your rent will start on the first, so move in then. Stop by here for your keys. A: Very good! Now all I need is your phone number. B: Call my office anytime at 626-555-3000. 5.audio A: Yes, I'm John Smith. What can I do for you? B: Hi, John. This is Terry Evans here. Do you want some good news? A: Sure, let me have it. B: The apartment owner likes you. He approved your rental application. A: Wow, that's fantastic! I don't know what to say. B: Now you can't move in, of course, until you've paid some fees. A: Fees, I don't remember anything about fees. B: Fees, like the first and last month's rent, and the security deposit. A: Oh, yes, of course, those fees! B: You can send me a check for the total--$2,500 plus $1,000 equals a total of $3,500. A: All I need is your address, and the check will be in the mail pronto. B: My address is 3035 E. Foothill Blvd., Pasadena, CA 91107. A: Okay, got it. Now when will he let me move in? B: Move in when your rent starts, on the first. But get your keys from me first. A: Okay, give me your phone number, please. B: You can always reach me, or leave a message, at 626-555-3000.
7. Warning about Late Rent Payment
1.audio A: Hello, Nicole here. B: Nicole, this is Richard. I think you know why I'm calling. A: Oh, it's about the rent. B: Yes, this is the second month in a row. A: I thought there was a grace period. B: There is no grace period in the rental agreement. A: Oh, I guess I forgot. B: Well, when can I expect the rent? A: You'll get it by Monday. B: Don't forget the $50 late fee. A: Is that in the rental agreement? B: The late fee is circled in red ink! A: Oh, Well, I can't find my copy of the agreement. B: If you're late next month, I might give you an eviction notice. 2.audio A: Hi, this is Nicole. B: Hi, Nicole. Richard here. I think you've got a good idea why I'm calling. A: Yes. It's about the rent, isn't it? B: Yes, your rent is late. This is the second month in a row. A: But I thought that I had a grace period. B: I told you last month that the rental agreement contains no grace period. A: Oh, I guess I was thinking about the last place that I lived. B: Well, tell me when I'm going to get your rent. A: I get paid tomorrow, so you'll get the check by Monday. B: Don't forget to include the $50 late fee. A: Are you sure a late fee is in the rental agreement? B: How could you miss the late fee? It's circled in red ink! A: I can't find my copy of the rental agreement. I know it's somewhere in my apartment. B: If you're late one more time, I'm probably going to evict you. 3.audio A: Hello, Nicole here. Who's calling, please? B: Hey, Nicole. It's Richard. I'm pretty sure you know why I'm calling. A: Yes, a dollar gets a dime that you're calling about the rent. B: Nicole, for the second month in a row, your rent is late. A: I thought you said there is a grace period. B: No, I didn't. There was no grace period last month, this month, or any month. A: Maybe I'm confusing this place with my last place. B: Well, I'm waiting to receive your rent check. A: I get my money tomorrow, so I can pay you by Monday. B: Remember, just like last month, you have to pay the $50 late fee. A: I don't remember seeing a late fee in the rental agreement. B: If you look at your agreement, you'll see the late fee circled in red ink! A: I forget where I put my rental agreement. B: One more late check, and you're looking at eviction. 4.audio A: Hello. This is Nicole. B: This is Richard. Let's not play games. You know why I'm calling. A: Oh, not again! You're calling about the rent. B: Yes, your rent check is late, just like last month. A: What happened to my grace period? B: Why would there be a grace period this month? There wasn't one last month. A: I guess I might be a little confused. B: What day in the near future can I expect your check? A: My boss told me he will pay me tomorrow. You'll get my check by Monday. B: Remember to include the $50 late fee. A: Are you sure the rental agreement included a late fee? B: The red ink around the late fee in your agreement should tell you something. A: I seem to have lost my rental agreement. B: Don't be late again, or you'll be evicted. 5.audio A: Hi, this is Nicole. B: Nicole, it's Richard. You know why I'm calling. A: Yes, I know. It's the rent, isn't it? B: Yes, just like last month, your rent is overdue. A: What about my grace period? B: Are you getting Alzheimer's? There is no grace period in the rental agreement. A: Sometimes my memory isn't so good. Maybe I do have Alzheimer's. B: I'm looking forward to receiving your check in the very near future. A: Is Monday okay? I get paid tomorrow. B: Remember that the check amount must include the $50 late fee. A: Okay, if the rental agreement actually has a late fee, I'll pay the fifty dollars. B: Look at your agreement. There's a big red circle around the late fee. A: As soon as I find my rental agreement, I'll read it again. B: I'm not giving you any more chances. Be late again, and you'll be evicted.8. Checking Smoke Detectors
1.audio A: Hello, this is Betty. B: Hi, Betty. Larry here. How many smoke detectors are in your apartment? A: Actually, I have two. B: Are the batteries fresh? A: Both batteries are good. B: Great. I need to come by and check them myself. A: No problem, when are you coming by? B: Thursday at noon. I'll let myself in if you're not there. A: Okay, remember to lock my door when you leave. B: I'll be in and out of there in just a few minutes. 2.audio A: Hello, this is Betty. B: Hello, Betty. This is Larry. How many smoke detectors are on your ceiling? A: I have two smoke detectors. B: Do you have fresh batteries in both of them? A: Both batteries are pretty fresh. B: Very good. I have to come by there and check out all the detectors. A: Very good, when do you think you'll be coming over? B: I'll be by on Thursday at noon. You don't have to be there. A: I won't be home. Just remember to lock my door, okay? B: You won't even know that I've been there. 3.audio A: Hello, Betty speaking. B: Hey, Betty. This is Larry. Tell me how many smoke detectors you have, please. A: This apartment came with one, and I installed another one. B: Are there fresh batteries in each of them? A: Each detector beeps when the battery is low. They're not beeping. B: Good. I'm calling all the tenants because I have to check all the detectors. A: Okay, What day were you thinking about dropping by? B: I'll be at your building at noon on Thursday. If you're not there, I'll let myself in. A: If you're thirsty, you can grab a beer or soda out of my frig. B: Thanks, but it'll only take me about two minutes to test them and leave. 4.audio A: Hi, this is Betty. B: Hi, Betty. It's Larry. I need to know how many smoke detectors are in your apartment. A: There was one when I moved in. Then I added one. B: Do both detectors have fresh batteries? A: I always keep them fresh. I don't want to burn to death. B: That's good. I have to come by there and check out all of the detectors. A: Not a problem. When will you be here? B: I'll be letting myself into all the apartments on Thursday at noon. A: If it's raining, make sure you wipe your feet before you come inside, okay? B: Not to worry. I'll be in and out of your place in a flash. 5.audio A: Hi, this is Betty. B: Hi, Betty. It's Larry. Can you tell me how many smoke detectors you have? A: There are two smoke detectors in my apartment. B: Do you know how new the batteries are? A: I'm very afraid of fires. I change the batteries every Labor Day. B: Good. I'm calling all the tenants before I come by to test the detectors. A: My detectors are ready for you. When will you be visiting? B: This Thursday at noon. But you don't have to be there. A: Okay, just pardon the mess when you come in. B: You'll never even know that I was there.9. Mailbox Key Missing
1.audio A: Hello, Nicole? This is Jimmy in 309. B: Hello, Jimmy. What's up? A: You're not going to believe this. B: Believe me, I think I've heard everything. A: I can't find my mailbox key. B: Is that all? That's a lot better than losing your car keys. A: I had a duplicate, but I can't find it either. B: If you come by my place, I can loan you a key. A: There's no emergency. All I get is junk mail and bills. B: Can you wait till Wednesday? I'll make you two more keys. A: Sure, that'll be fine. B: Okay. I'll see you Wednesday. But it's going to cost you $2 per key. 2.audio A: Can I speak to Nicole? This is Jimmy in apartment 309. B: Hi, Jimmy. This is Nicole. What's happening? A: You probably never heard this one before. B: Don't bet on it. I've been an apartment manager for a long time. A: I've looked everywhere, but I can't find my mailbox key. B: Well, that's pretty minor. I lost my car keys and house keys once. A: To make matters worse, I can't find my duplicate either. B: If you want, come over here and I'll lend you a key. A: No, there's nothing vital in the mailbox. Just junk and bills. B: If you can wait until Wednesday, I'll make two more keys for you. A: Wednesday's fine. B: Okay, I'll bring them by Wednesday. Have $4 ready for me. 3.audio A: Hi, Nicole. This is Jimmy in 309. B: Hello, Jimmy. Can I help you? A: I've got a little problem. B: Tell me your problem, and maybe I can help. A: I've looked everywhere, but I can't find my mailbox key. B: Well, that's pretty minor. I lost my car keys and house keys once. A: As if that wasn't bad enough, I also misplaced the duplicate. B: Well, if it's an emergency, come by here and I'll lend you a key. A: No, even if there's a bill in there, it can wait. B: If you don't mind waiting until Wednesday, I'll make two more keys for you. A: Oh, I can wait, believe me. B: Okay, see you Wednesday. They're not free, you know. It'll be $4. 4.audio A: Hey, Nicole. It's Jimmy in 309. B: Hi there, Jimmy. What can I do for you? A: I screwed up, and I need your help. B: Tell me the specific problem. Let me see what I can do. A: I've torn my apartment apart, but I can't find my mailbox key. B: Well, you should be grateful it wasn't your car keys. A: On top of that, I couldn't find the duplicate either. B: If you need to get in there, come by and borrow a key. A: No, my mailbox is usually empty anyway. B: Well, then, I'll make you two more keys on Wednesday. A: No problem. I can wait till Wednesday. Maybe there'll be something in there by then. B: Okay. Have $4 ready for when you see me Wednesday. 5.audio A: Hello? This is Jimmy in 309. B: Hi, Jimmy. This is Nicole. What's going on? A: Maybe you can get me out of a small jam. B: Well, I can certainly try. A: Somehow, I managed to lose my mailbox key. B: Believe me, losing a mailbox key is a lot better than losing your car keys. A: I've got a duplicate somewhere, but I haven't been able to find it either. B: If you absolutely can't wait, come over here and borrow a key. A: No, I doubt that there's anything important in my mailbox, if there's anything at all. B: Well, if there's no emergency, I can make you two more keys on Wednesday. A: Not a problem. All my fan mail can wait till then. B: Okay, see you Wednesday. Have $4 for me, and I'll give you a receipt.2. Asking about Checks
1.audio A: Good afternoon, Jim. This is Olivia. B: Oh, hi, Olivia. How can I help you? A: I'm going to be moving out. B: Oh, really? When are you leaving? A: I'll be leaving on the last day of June. B: Any particular reason? A: I got a new job. B: Congratulations! What is it? A: I'm going to be an ESL instructor at Pasadena City College. B: Great! By the way, what's ESL? A: ESL stands for English as a Second Language. B: Well, I'm glad it wasn't your neighbors causing you to move. A: Just because they play their TV loud enough for the whole complex? B: Yes, I know. I'm going to have another talk with them. A: Anyway, it's been nice knowing you for these past few years. B: You, too. Keep in touch, and good luck with your new job. 2.audio A: How's it going, Jim? This is Olivia. B: Hello, Olivia. What's up? A: I wanted to let you know that I have to move out. B: I'm sorry to hear that. When are you moving? A: The thirtieth of June. B: May I ask why you're leaving? A: I found a new job. B: Good for you! What's your new job? A: I am an ESL teacher at Pasadena City College. B: Very good! What does ESL mean? A: ESL means English as a Second Language. B: Well, I'm glad you're not moving because of your neighbors. A: I can't tell you how happy I'll be not to have to listen to their TV. B: Yes, I'm going to tell them one more time to turn down their TV and keep it down. A: You've been a good apartment manager and a good person. I'll see you in June. B: Thank you. I hope your new job and new apartment are good for you. 3.audio A: Hey, Jim. How are you? Olivia here. B: Hi, Olivia. What's going on? A: I just wanted to give you notice that I'm moving. B: Oh, that's too bad. What's the moving date? A: I'll be gone on the last day in June. B: Can I ask you why you're moving? A: I've been looking for a long time, and I finally found a good job. B: Very good! What's your new job? A: I'm going to teach ESL at Pasadena City College. B: Good for you! What does ESL stand for? A: ESL is English as a Second Language. B: Well, I'm glad you don't feel you're being chased out by your neighbors. A: Their TV is so loud you'd think they were stone deaf. B: I'll tell them one more time to turn down their TV. Then I'm going to evict them. A: Thanks for all your help over the past few years. B: Thanks. Good luck with your new neighbors and your new job. 4.audio A: Hi, Jim. It's Olivia. B: Hey, Olivia. What's happening? A: I'll be moving out in a while, so I wanted you to know. B: Well, that's not good news. When are you moving? A: The last day of June. B: Is something wrong with your apartment? A: No, not anything new. But I just found out that I've been hired for a new job. B: Great! What is the new job? A: I'm going to be an ESL instructor at Pasadena City College. B: That's great! ESL is some kind of electronics class? A: ESL is a class for students who are learning English as their second language. B: I'm glad that your neighbors aren't the reason that you're moving. A: I won't miss having to listen to their darn TV. B: I'm giving them one more warning about their TV. Then they're out of there. A: I appreciate what a good apartment manager you've been these past few years. B: It's been nice knowing you, too. Good luck teaching LES. 5.audio A: Hello, Jim. It's Olivia. B: Hi, there. What can I do for you today? A: You should know that I'll be moving out in a while. B: Gee, that's too bad. What day do you plan to leave? A: June 30 is my last day. B: I hope it's not your neighbors or the latest rent increase. A: No, neither one. I got lucky. I found a new job. B: Hey, give me five! Good for you! What is it? A: I'll be teaching ESL at Pasadena City College. B: Great! Is ESL a class about the Internet? A: No. ESL is English for students whose native language is not English. B: I was worried that you were moving because of your neighbors. A: Whoever my next neighbor is cannot possibly be as loud as those people. B: I'm going to give them 30 days' notice if they don't turn that TV down. A: Thanks for everything. I'll give you the keys on the thirtieth. B: You've been a very good tenant. Good luck with your new SLE job.1. Looking for an Apartment
1.audio A: How did you find your apartment? B: You can check on the bulletin boards at school for local housing. A: What if I need a roommate? B: There are websites that can hook you up with a roommate. A: How much do apartments cost around here? B: It depends on what you want. Do you want a one- or two-bedroom apartment? A: I just need a one-bedroom apartment. B: That will probably cost you around twelve hundred dollars a month. A: Would you come with me to look at apartments? B: I would be happy to look at apartments with you. 2.audio A: When you need an apartment, where do you look for one? B: Our school has a link on its website for apartments. A: Can I share an apartment with someone? B: Some of the ads in the paper are from people looking for roommates. A: Are apartments expensive in this city? B: Do you need a single apartment, or is this for two people? A: I want a two-bedroom apartment. B: You can get that type of apartment for around fifteen hundred dollars a month. A: Would you have time to go look at apartments with me? B: I love apartment hunting. I'll be happy to go with you. 3.audio A: Can you tell me the best way to look for an apartment? B: The local newspaper has ads for housing. A: Is there any way to find a roommate to share an apartment with? B: Sometimes you can post an advertisement saying that you need a roommate. A: What do landlords charge for rent? B: Would you like an apartment for just yourself, or do you need it for two people? A: There are two of us, but we only need a one-bedroom apartment. B: You should be able to easily find that for twelve hundred dollars a month. A: I really would appreciate it if you could come look at apartments with me. B: Sure, I'll go look at apartments with you anytime you want.2. Subleasing
1.audio A: I heard that you're looking for an apartment. B: Yes. Who told you that? A: A friend of ours told me. B: Why are you asking? A: I was asking because I found an apartment. B: Why are you telling me this? A: I was wondering if you wanted to sublease with me. B: I sure would! A: Since we're subleasing, we can each pay half of the rent. B: How much is the rent each month? A: It's $1000 a month. B: That's wonderful. 2.audio A: Are you still looking for an apartment? B: Who said I was? A: One of our friends let me know. B: Why'd you want to know? A: I found an apartment for lease. B: So what? A: I wanted to know if you would sublease the apartment with me. B: That would be great! A: That's great, because this way we can go halves on the rent. B: What's rent? A: It's $1,000 each month, but it'll only cost us $500 a month each. B: I like the sound of that. 3.audio A: Is it true that you're looking for an apartment? B: I am. How'd you know? A: I heard it from one of our friends. B: Well then, why do you ask if I'm looking for an apartment? A: I was thinking about leasing this apartment. B: What does this have to do with me? A: Would you like to sublease the apartment with me? B: I would love to! A: This way, we'll each have to pay only half the rent. B: How much is the rent? A: For each of us, it's $500 every month. B: Sounds good to me.3. Responding to an Ad for Roommates
1.audio A: Hello, I was just responding to your ad. B: Which ad is that? A: The ad for a roommate. B: Great. Are you interested? A: I sure am. B: Can we meet today? A: Of course, just tell me when and where. B: Why don't you meet me at 5:30 at Starbucks? A: That'll be perfect. B: We'll discuss the living situation and payments at that time. A: That'll be fine. B: Okay, I'll see you then. 2.audio A: Hi, I'm calling about your ad. B: Which ad are you calling about? A: The ad for a new roommate. B: Are you interested in being my new roommate? A: Yes, I'm interested. B: I would love to meet you, if that's at all possible. A: That's fine, where would you like to meet? B: I would like you to meet me at Starbucks at 5:30. A: I can meet you then. B: We'll talk about the roommate situation then. A: Thank you very much. B: See you later. 3.audio A: Hey, I was wondering about the ad you have. B: What ad are you referring to? A: I'm calling about the ad for a new roommate. B: Oh, yeah. Were you interested in being a roommate of mine? A: I actually would like to be your new roommate. B: That's great. Would you like to meet me sometime today? A: Tell me where, and I'll be there. B: Let's meet at Starbucks at 5:30. A: Starbucks at 5:30 will be fine. B: I'll fill you in on all the details when we get together. A: All right, that sounds great. B: I'll see you at Starbucks.4. Finding an Apartment
1.audio A: I finally found an apartment that I want to rent. B: Where did you see it? A: I saw it in this ad for apartments in today's newspaper. B: You found an apartment in the ads? A: I really did, but what's so great about it is that it's really affordable. B: Tell me about the apartment. A: Well, most importantly the apartment is beautiful. B: How much is the rent for the apartment? A: The rent is $725 each month. B: That's pretty cheap for out here. A: That's what I said when I found out how much the rent was. B: Congratulations on the new apartment. 2.audio A: I found an apartment to rent. B: Where did you find this apartment? A: I found it in today's apartment ads. B: Really? I can't believe you actually found an apartment in the ads. A: I actually found it in the ads, and it's not too expensive either. B: I want to hear more about this apartment. A: All you really need to know is that the apartment looks great. B: How much will you have to pay for rent? A: Every month I'd only have to pay $725. B: For where we live, that is really inexpensive. A: It is, isn't it? B: I'm glad to hear that you finally found an apartment. 3.audio A: I think I may rent out this apartment that I found. B: Oh, really? Where'd you find it? A: I was looking through the ads today, and I found it in there. B: In the ads? Are you serious? A: Yeah, and it's affordable too. B: I'd like to hear about this apartment. A: First of all, it's absolutely gorgeous. B: What is the rent each month? A: It's only $725 a month. B: That's amazing. The rent is very cheap. A: I know it is. B: It's a good thing that you read that ad today.5. Asking about the Apartment Location
1.audio A: Hello, how are you doing today? B: I'm great. A: What can I do for you today? B: I wanted to ask about the apartment for rent. A: Ask away. B: I was wondering if the apartment is located in a nice area. A: As a matter of fact, the apartment is in a wonderful location. B: What surrounds the apartment? A: There are many stores and restaurants surrounding the apartment. B: Is that right? A: I promise you that you will love the location. B: From what you're telling me, it sounds like I will. 2.audio A: How are you? B: Good, thank you. A: What can I help you with? B: Can I ask you a few questions about the apartment? A: Ask whatever you'd like. B: I want to know if the location of the apartment is nice. A: I honestly believe that you will love the location. B: What kinds of places are around the apartment? A: Surrounding the apartment are great places to eat and stores to shop at. B: Oh, really? A: I'm sure that the location will be to your liking. B: I hope that you're right. 3.audio A: How is everything with you today? B: I'm fine. Thank you for asking. A: Can I help you with something? B: I actually have a few questions about the apartment. A: What questions do you have? B: Is this apartment in a nice location? A: It is in a great location. B: Are there any stores near the apartment? A: You will find many stores and restaurants near the apartment. B: Really? A: I guarantee that the apartment is in a beautiful location. B: That sounds wonderful.6. Asking about the Neighborhood
1.audio A: I wanted to ask you a few questions. B: What about? A: They are pertaining to the neighborhood that the apartment is in. B: Sure. What would you like to know? A: What can you tell me about the neighborhood? B: In all honesty, the neighborhood could be a little nicer. A: What do you mean by that? B: The neighborhood streets are a little dirty. A: Is there anything else wrong with the neighborhood? B: That's just about it. A: Hopefully the cleanliness problem will get better. B: I hope so, too. 2.audio A: I have a few questions for you. B: What are your questions about? A: They're questions about the neighborhood. B: What are your questions? A: If you don't mind, would you tell me something about the neighborhood? B: I think the neighborhood could be better. A: What problems does the neighborhood have? B: A lot of the streets are rather unclean. A: What else is wrong with it? B: Nothing else that I can think of. A: Maybe in time they will clean up the streets. B: Maybe they will. 3.audio A: May I ask you a couple of questions? B: What are these questions pertaining to? A: Just a few questions about the neighborhood. B: Okay. Ask away. A: Tell me about the neighborhood. B: The neighborhood does have its problems. A: How is that? B: What I mean is that the streets aren't all that clean. A: Are there any other problems? B: Other than it not being so clean, it's actually a nice neighborhood. A: I'm sure that the problem will eventually be fixed. B: I hope that you're right.7. Asking about Safety Features
1.audio A: I really like this beautiful apartment! B: Thank you. Do you have any further questions? A: Yes, I was wondering about safety features. B: Yes, what are your concerns? A: How about fire alarms and escape routes? B: Every apartment has its own smoke alarm, and the whole building is on a sprinkler system. A: What about fire extinguishers? B: They are in the hallways on all of the floors. It is suggested that you buy an individual one for your own apartment. A: What about escape routes in a fire? B: The escape routes are clearly posted in the hallways. 2.audio A: This apartment is everything that I am looking for! B: Thank you. Is there any other information that you need? A: Could you tell me a little about safety features? B: Yes, we have thought of safety. What, specifically, are you interested in? A: Are your fire alarms up to code? B: In case of a fire, we have a whole building sprinkler system. In addition, every apartment has its own alarm system. A: Do you have fire extinguishers available? B: Yes, there are fire extinguishers outside your door. You might want to buy a personal one for your kitchen. A: Are the escape routes clearly posted somewhere? B: There are fire exit signs in the hallway. 3.audio A: What a great apartment! B: Thanks. Can I answer any questions for you at this point? A: Have you put any safety features into this building? B: Yes, your safety is of concern to us. What specifically were you interested in? A: Can you talk about fire safety? B: We have a global sprinkler system for the building and individual alarms for each apartment. A: Are there fire extinguishers anywhere? B: There are fire extinguishers in the hallways. If I were you, I would buy a personal one for the kitchen. A: How do I exit the building in case of a fire? B: There is a card that has escape routes posted on the inside of your front door.8. Asking about Floor Plan
1.audio A: Hello, I'm calling about the apartment. B: What would you like to know? A: I just wanted to find out some details about the apartment. B: Like what, exactly? A: Could you tell me about the floor plan? B: You can actually see the whole apartment for yourself. A: I don't have the time to go see the apartment. B: Actually, you can view this apartment online. A: I did not know that I could do that. B: I can give you the website to view that apartment on. A: That is really convenient. B: That's the reason we made the website. 2.audio A: I was wondering about the apartment. B: I'd be happy to help. A: Could you give me details about the apartment? B: What is it that you would like to know? A: Actually, it's the floor plan that I am inquiring about. B: If you would like to, you can see it for yourself. A: I am very busy and don't know when I can view the apartment. B: If you would like, you can view it online. A: I can do that? B: If you would like the website, I can give it to you. A: That would be more convenient than having to go all the way down there. B: Convenience is the reason that we made the website. 3.audio A: Could you help me with a question that I have about the apartment? B: What can I help you with? A: I would like to know about the apartment. B: What exactly did you want to know? A: I was wondering about the floor plan. B: You could always take a look at the floor plan. A: I won't be able to come down to see it anytime soon. B: Well, if you're too busy, then why don't you just look at it online? A: That's actually possible? B: Yes. I'll just give you the website so you can see for yourself. A: I absolutely love how convenient that is. B: That's the exact reason why we thought of it.9. Visiting a Rental Agent
1.audio A: How are you doing today? B: I'm doing fine. Thanks for asking. A: What can I help you with today? B: I would like you to help me find an apartment. A: I will be able to help you with that. B: Thank you. I would appreciate that. A: Do you have any idea what kind of apartment you want? B: I need a two-bedroom apartment. A: Is there anything else in particular that you wanted? B: No. As long as it's a two bedroom, nice, and affordable, I'll take it. A: I'll see what I can do for you. B: Thanks for everything. 2.audio A: Hi, how are you? B: I'm great, thank you. A: How can I help you? B: I would really like to find an apartment for rent. A: That shouldn't be a problem. B: That would be great. A: Tell me what kind of apartment that you are looking for. B: I really need a two bedroom. A: Anything else? B: That's all I really need. A: I will try to find something for you, and then I'll give you a call in a couple of days. B: That would be fabulous. 3.audio A: How is everything with you? B: Everything's fine with me. A: What did you need me for today? B: I need to find an apartment. A: I'm sure I can help you find an apartment. B: I would greatly appreciate your help. A: What kind of apartment did you have in mind? B: What's most important is that I get a two bedroom. A: Would you like anything else special? B: That's the most important thing. A: Give me a few days, and I'll call you when I've found something. B: Thank you so much for all your help.10. Discrimination
1.audio A: Good morning, is this the Renter's Hotline? B: Yes, what can I help you with? A: I have a question about discrimination in housing. B: What type of discrimination? A: I think that he doesn't want to rent to me because of my race. B: What made you think that your race was a problem? A: He seemed OK talking to me on the phone, but seemed to change his mind when he saw me in person. B: What else made you feel he was discriminating against you? A: Well, he had a 25 unit apartment building and everyone I saw there was his same race. B: Racial discrimination is very hard to prove, but if you would like to come down, we can go over a checklist that can help you build a case. 2.audio A: I would like to speak with someone in the Housing Department. B: You have reached the right area. Can I help you with something? A: I think that I may have experienced discrimination in trying to rent an apartment. B: Can you be specific as to what type of discrimination? A: I felt that he didn't like me because I wasn't the same race that he was. B: How come you feel it was race that was the issue? A: When I showed up on his doorstep, he seemed bothered by my appearance. B: Is there anything else that made you feel he was using race as a factor in who he rented to? A: As I walked through the apartment building all I saw were people who were the same race as the manager. B: It is not easy to prove racial discrimination, but please go to our website which can help you file a formal complaint. 3.audio A: Hello, is this the Legal Advice Line? B: You are in the right department. What can I do for you? A: I think that the landlord where I am trying to rent an apartment may be discriminating against me. B: Discrimination is a pretty broad term. What type, specifically? A: I have a feeling that he will not consider my application because of my race. B: Are you sure that race was the issue? What makes you feel this way? A: When he saw me in person, he seemed bothered by me although I seemed to be under consideration when I e-mailed him. B: Do you have any proof that he would not rent to you because of your race? A: I didn't see one person in that whole building who wasn't the same race as the manager. B: It is difficult to prove racial discrimination, but you may file a formal complaint in our office.11. Making an Appointment for an Apartment Viewing
1.audio A: How are you today? B: Great, thanks. A: Can I help you? B: I would actually like to view the apartment for rent today. A: I'm sorry, but you won't be able to view it today. B: Why not? A: You have to make an appointment first. B: Oh, okay. Can I do that right now? A: Is this Friday okay? B: Is 6 o'clock Friday evening okay? A: Yes, I will schedule you for that time. B: Thank you very much. See you then. 2.audio A: How are you doing? B: Everything's fine with me. A: What can I do for you today? B: Is it possible for me to view the apartment today? A: Unfortunately, you will not be able to view it today. B: Why can't I view it today? A: You'll need to make an appointment to view the apartment. B: I understand. May I make an appointment then? A: How does this Friday sound? B: Friday at 6:00 pm would be perfect. A: That will be fine. B: Thanks for your help. 3.audio A: How's it going? B: I'm fine, thank you. A: Did you need help with something? B: If I could, I would like to view the apartment sometime today. A: That won't be possible today. B: Why is that? A: You can only view the apartment with an appointment. B: I would like to make one right now if I can. A: Are you available this Friday? B: Can we do it at 6 o'clock? A: Your appointment for Friday at 6:00 pm has been confirmed. B: All right. I'll see you on Friday.12. Talking about the Lease
1.audio A: I need to talk to you about something. B: What did you need to talk about? A: I have some questions about my lease. B: Like what? A: Exactly how long is my lease for? B: Your lease will be up in three years. A: What will happen if I move out before then? B: If you move out before then, you will not get your deductible. A: I don't understand. B: Because our contract says that you will live here for three years. A: Okay, I think that I understand. B: I'm glad you understand. 2.audio A: Can we talk? B: What about? A: I'm not too clear on some things about my lease. B: Is there a problem? A: How many years is my lease for? B: In three years your lease will be up. A: Can I move out before those three years? B: If you do, I will keep your deductible. A: Why would you keep it? B: I would keep it because you would be breaking our contract. A: I get it now. B: I hope that I cleared things up for you. 3.audio A: I would like to talk to you, if you have time. B: What's going on? A: I want to discuss some things about my lease. B: What aren't you too sure about? A: Can you tell me when my lease is up? B: Your lease is for three years. A: If I ever decide to leave before the three years, will there be a problem? B: If you do, I will keep your deductible. A: Why is that? B: If you break the contract, then you will not receive your deductible. A: Oh, I see. B: All right. I'm glad I could clarify things for you.13. Negotiating the Price (1)
1.audio A: I would love to rent this apartment. B: I'm happy to hear you say that. A: How much are you asking for every month? B: I'm renting this apartment out for $1050 a month. A: That is quite a lot of money for just one month. B: That is a fair price. A: What do you say to $850 a month? B: That's no good. A: It's either $850 or nothing at all. B: I won't go any lower than $1050. A: Could you please go lower? B: That's the best I can do. 2.audio A: This apartment is wonderful. B: I'm glad you like it. A: How much would I have to pay for rent? B: The rent is $1050 each month. A: That's way too much money. B: It isn't too much. A: How about if I pay $850? B: I can't take that. A: I can't go any higher than $850. B: I honestly don't know what else to tell you. A: You can't go any lower than that? B: If you can't afford $1050, then we have no deal. 3.audio A: I think I may rent this apartment from you. B: That's great to hear. A: How much are you looking to rent it for? B: For each month you would have to pay $1050. A: That is too expensive. B: I don't think that is too much for rent. A: How does $850 a month sound to you? B: That's not enough. A: That's the best that I can do. B: $850 a month is not enough money. A: Would you please reconsider? B: That's my final offer. Take it or leave it.14. Negotiating the Price (2)
1.audio A: I would love to rent out your apartment. B: That's great. A: How much is the rent? B: The rent each month is $1050. A: That's a lot of money. B: Did you have a better price in mind? A: What about $800? B: That's way too low. A: I can't pay much more than that. B: How about $900 a month? A: That would be fine. B: Great. It was a pleasure doing business with you. 2.audio A: I think I may rent this apartment from you. B: That would be wonderful. A: Can you tell me how much I would have to pay for rent? B: The rent is $1050 every month. A: That's way too much. B: What is good for you? A: I can afford about $800 a month for rent. B: That's not high enough. A: How much more are you thinking? B: I can let it go at $900 a month. A: That's almost perfect. B: I can live with that too. 3.audio A: I want to rent this apartment. B: I'm glad to hear that. A: How much are you asking? B: You will have to pay $1050 every month. A: I can't afford that. B: What can you afford? A: I was thinking $800 a month. B: I'll need you to pay more than that. A: How much more? B: How does $900 every month sound to you? A: I can live with that. B: We have a deal then.15. Policy Towards Pets
1.audio A: I was wondering if you allow pets in this building. B: We do allow some pets, but you must pay an additional five hundred dollar security deposit. A: What kind of pets do you allow? B: You may keep either one cat or one dog. A: Can cats and dogs be outside? B: Cats can be outside, but we want them collared or tagged so we know who they belong to. Dogs must be on a leash and are not allowed in the flowerbeds. A: Are there any special places nearby that I can walk my dog? B: There is a dog park down the block. A: Do many other tenants in this building have pets? B: Not too many, but you shouldn't have any trouble finding someone to share walks with. 2.audio A: What is your policy towards tenants keeping pets? B: You may have a pet, but you have to pay an extra two hundred dollar cleaning deposit. A: How many pets can we have? B: You may have only one pet. You can have either a small dog or a cat. A: What is the policy as to where the pets can be outside? B: We ask that you keep your cats indoors or on your balcony. Dogs need to be walked to the street or park. A: Where can I walk my dog? B: There is a park down the street, but you must keep your dog on a leash. A: How many other people have pets around here? B: We have quite a few pet owners here, so if you need help finding a veterinarian, just ask around. 3.audio A: Are renters allowed to have pets? B: We allow a small well-behaved pet, but you need to sign an agreement saying you'll pay for any damages. A: Do you allow both cats and dogs? B: We only allow a medium or small dog or a cat. A: Are there any special areas where animals are allowed or not allowed? B: Cats are to be kept indoors at all times. Dogs must be on a leash and with the owner when outdoors. A: Are there places where I can take my dog for a run? B: There are quite a few hiking trails nearby. A: Are there a lot of pets in this building? B: We don't have a lot of pet owners, but there are a few around if you have any questions about local pet supplies and dog parks.16. Checking the Apartment for Anything Damaged
1.audio A: What do you think about the apartment so far? B: It is beautiful. A: You don't have any problems with how it looks? B: Actually, there is a problem. A: Like what? B: There are some stains that were left in the carpet. A: Those stains will be cleaned out of the carpet before you move in. B: Oh, is that right? A: Yes. Now what other problems do you have? B: That was the only problem that I saw. A: I'm glad that everything else is to your liking. B: I honestly love it. 2.audio A: Do you like the apartment? B: I absolutely love the apartment. A: Everything is okay? B: I do have one problem with the apartment. A: What's the problem? B: I don't like all those stains in the carpet. A: We will have the carpet cleaned before you move into the apartment. B: I did not know that. A: I assure you that we will, and if there are any more problems, feel free to tell me. B: That was the only thing that I saw wrong with the apartment. A: I'm glad to know that you think the apartment is so nice. B: It's absolutely incredible. I'll take it. 3.audio A: What are your thoughts on the apartment? B: I think that it's absolutely gorgeous. A: There aren't any problems with the apartment? B: I think that the apartment looks very nice, but I do see some problems. A: What problems? B: I did notice a few stains in the carpet. A: We will have the carpet cleaned before you move in. B: You will? A: Yes, but other than that, are there any more problems? B: That was the only thing that I saw that was wrong with the apartment. A: I'm happy that you find this apartment so appealing. B: It is. I love it.17. Asking a Friend to Help Move In
1.audio A: Hey, what's up? B: Everything's fine with me. How about you? A: I need your help. B: What do you need? A: Remember when I told you I'm going to be moving? B: Yeah, I remember. A: Do you think you could help me move? B: Sure, that shouldn't be a problem. When? A: Are you busy this Saturday? B: I don't think I have any plans. A: Is 10 o'clock okay with you? B: That'll be fine. I'll see you then. 2.audio A: What's going on? B: Things are fine with me. What's going on with you? A: Would you help me? B: Help you with what? A: You do know I'm getting ready to move, right? B: I remember you telling me. A: Do you mind helping me move in? B: I can help you with that. A: Is this Saturday okay for you? B: I'm free this Saturday. A: Can you come help me at 10:00? B: That's perfect. I will see you on Saturday. 3.audio A: What are you doing? B: Nothing much. What's up with you? A: Actually, I was wondering if you could help me with something. B: What would you like me to help you with? A: You know I'm going to be moving in soon? B: You told me already. A: I was just wondering if you could help me move in. B: I can help you with that. A: Do you have plans on Saturday? B: No, I don't think so. A: How does 10 am sound to you? B: Saturday at 10:00? I can do that.18. Calling a Moving Company
1.audio A: How are you doing today? B: Great. Thanks for asking. A: Would you like our assistance with a move? B: Yes, actually I would. A: What would you like us to move for you? B: I need you to move my furniture. A: Could you tell me what kind of residence that we will be picking the furniture up from? B: The furniture is in my apartment. A: Where will we be moving it to? B: You'll be taking it to the house I just bought. A: All right. I just need both addresses, and we will take care of the moving for you. B: Excellent. Thank you very much. 2.audio A: How are you? B: I am doing well. A: Did you need us to move something for you? B: That's exactly what I'm calling about. A: What exactly do you need moved? B: All my furniture needs to be moved. A: Where will we be moving your furniture from? B: I need it moved from my apartment. A: Where would you like us to move the furniture to? B: I need the furniture moved to my new house. A: All I need is a little more information, and we'll take care of the rest. B: Sounds great. I'm glad you could help me. 3.audio A: How are you doing? B: I'm fine, thank you. A: Did you need our help with a move? B: Yes, I do need your help with a move. A: What can we move for you? B: I need all my furniture moved. A: Will we be picking the furniture up from an apartment or a house? B: You'll be taking it from my old apartment. A: Are we moving the furniture to a house or an apartment? B: To my new house. A: We can do the move for you, but first I'm going to need some more information. B: Thanks a lot. I'll give you all the information you need.20. Where to Put the Furniture
1.audio A: Thank you for helping me move. B: Don't mention it. Where do you want all your furniture? A: Okay, I want you to put the sofa in the living room. B: Would you like me to put it anywhere special? A: No, up against the wall is just fine. B: Where would you like this table? A: That table should go in the dining room. B: Would you like me to put it anywhere in particular? A: You can place it right in the center of the room. B: How are things looking so far? A: I think the furniture looks nice in here. B: You're absolutely right. 2.audio A: I appreciate all your help with this move. B: It's the least I could do. Tell me where to put your furniture. A: That sofa should go in the living room. B: Was there a certain place you wanted the sofa? A: I think it would look best up against that wall. B: What should I do with this table? A: I want that table in the dining room. B: Should I just put it down anywhere? A: I want it in the center of the room. B: What do you think? How does it look in here so far? A: I love the way things are looking. B: That's exactly what I was thinking. 3.audio A: I really am thankful for you helping me move. B: It's no problem. Just let me know where you want me to put everything. A: I would like you to put that sofa in the living room. B: Is there any particular place you want it? A: Set it against that far wall. B: What do you want me to do with this table? A: That's the dining-room table of course, silly. B: Where in the room do you want it? A: It would look best in the center of the room. B: Do you like where everything is so far? A: Everything looks great. B: Yeah, I agree.21. Greeting a Neighbor
1.audio A: Hello, it's nice to meet you. B: It's great meeting you too. A: Did you just move in? B: I moved in this past weekend. A: I had no idea that house was sold. B: I had to buy. The first time I saw it, I fell in love. A: It is a beautiful house. B: Have you been living here long? A: About 20 years now. B: Wow! That's a long time. A: Hopefully we will be neighbors for a lot longer. B: I love this house too much to ever move. 2.audio A: It is very nice meeting you. B: I'm happy to meet you also. A: When did you get moved in? B: Just this past weekend. A: I didn't even know the house got sold. B: I absolutely love this house, so I had to buy it. A: I understand, because the house is extraordinary. B: How many years have you been living in your house? A: I've been living here for over 20 years. B: Twenty years? That is a very long time. A: I hope that we remain neighbors for a while longer. B: I could never move out of this house. 3.audio A: Hey, nice to meet you. B: It's nice to meet you too. A: When exactly did you move into the house? B: I finished moving in this last weekend. A: I didn't realize that the house was bought. B: Yeah, I saw the house and just fell in love with it. A: It was impossible to pass up. B: So, how long have you been living here? A: Twenty years and counting. B: That's great to hear. A: I sure hope that you stay here for that long. B: I'd be crazy to ever move out.22. Prohibited Parking
1.audio A: Is there anything specific that I should know about where to park my car? B: You have an assigned place in the back of the building with your apartment number on it. A: Are there any other spots available to me? B: You will see several visitor and unmarked spots. These are available on a first-come basis. A: What if there is nothing else available? B: You can park on the street, but you have to pay attention to the rules. A: What are the rules? B: Most of the laws are posted on the signs, but you also cannot park anywhere on the street between two and six in the morning. A: Are the parking tickets expensive around here? B: Parking tickets are very expensive, and if you don't pay them they may tow your car away. 2.audio A: What are the rules about where I should park? B: Your assigned space is in the back where I marked it on the map. A: Can I park anywhere else in the parking lot? B: There are a few spots back there for visitors. They are unassigned. A: Where can my guests park if all of those spots are gone? B: You can park on the street, but you can get ticketed for failing to follow the rules. A: How will I know what the rules are? B: Just pay attention to street cleaning days and limits on the hours you can park out there. A: Are parking citations costly? B: Yes, parking tickets can be extremely expensive. 3.audio A: Where can I park my car? B: You have one assigned place right beside your own apartment. A: Are there any other open spots available in the parking lot? B: Your guests can park in a visitor or unmarked spot if one is available. A: Is there any place else to park if the spots are all gone? B: There is always street parking, but you must obey the laws about parking out there. A: Do they post the rules anywhere? B: The rules for parking are all clearly posted. Just follow them and you'll be OK. A: Do you have to pay a large fine for a parking ticket? B: You don't want to get a parking ticket. You have better things to spend your money on!23. Trash and Recycling
1.audio A: Can you tell me where we are supposed to take our trash? B: Put it in the dumpster next to that stairway. A: What day do they pick the trash up? B: They empty the trash every Wednesday. A: Are we supposed to mix our recyclables in, or sort them? B: We are supposed to sort our recyclables. A: Is there a special container for recyclables? B: You should have a blue container in your kitchen. Empty that into the blue bin downstairs. A: What about plant material? B: Anything that can be composted goes into the bin with the green lid. 2.audio A: I need a little help about where to dump my trash bags. B: Put them in the parking lot dumpster near the parking spaces. A: When is trash day? B: Trash day is Wednesday. A: Do they sort our recyclables, or do we do it? B: They expect us to take out our recyclables. A: Do we put our recyclables in a separate bin? B: Just take all of your recyclables to the blue bin downstairs. A: Is there a special bin for yard waste? B: All material to be composted goes into the bin with the green lid. 3.audio A: Where are the dumpsters located in this building? B: Right now they are in the front of the building for pickup. A: When do the dumpsters get emptied? B: They usually get emptied Wednesday, unless there is a holiday in there somewhere. A: Are there separate containers for recyclables? B: We don't mix our recyclables with regular trash. A: What does the container for recyclables look like? B: All of your recyclables go into the blue bin. A: How about composting materials? B: We have a great composting program that uses the bin with the green lid.24. Laundry Room Rules and Hours
1.audio A: So where are the laundry rooms located? B: There is a laundry room located at the end of each hallway. A: Can I use them at any time? B: All laundry rooms are locked at eleven at night and re-open at seven in the morning. A: Do they use change? B: You should bring quarters for the washer and dryer. A: Can you buy detergent in the laundry room? B: Yes, there are detergent dispensers in the laundry room. A: Are there rules in the laundry room? B: Yes, if you leave your laundry in the machine unattended, people can just take it out and put it on a table so they may use the machine. 2.audio A: Does every floor have a laundry room? B: Each hallway has a laundry room located near the stairway. A: Are they open for use around the clock? B: The laundry room near the recreation center is open twenty-four hours a day. The rest have posted hours. A: Do I need to bring coins with me? B: The washers and dryers require correct change, but there is a change machine in the laundry room. A: Are there any detergent dispensers in the laundry room? B: Yes, but they are expensive. A: Are there any specific rules about doing laundry? B: Yes, you are only supposed to tie up three machines at a time for your own use, so that the other machines are available for other tenants. 3.audio A: Do you have a lot of laundry rooms? B: We have many laundry rooms. Your closest one is next to the pool. A: Are there any certain hours we can use them. B: All of the laundry rooms can be used whenever you need to use them. A: What type of payment do they require? B: If you bring dollar bills, you will be in great shape. A: Is there any place to buy laundry detergent in the laundry room. B: There are detergent dispensers in the laundry room but it is cheaper to buy it across the street at the market. A: Is there anything I should know about the rules of the laundry room? B: Yes, we ask that you please clean up after yourself as in wiping up spilled detergent or cleaning out lint screens.25. Neighbors and Help
1.audio A: Hi, I am your new neighbor and was wondering if I could ask you a question or two. B: Hi! I would be happy to answer any questions you might have. A: Everyone here seems very friendly. B: Yes, many of us have lived here a long time and know each other well. A: How long have you lived here? B: I have lived in this building for ten years. A: When I get settled, would you consider giving me a list of places you use, like cleaners and grocery stores? B: I can help you with that. Would you like to go to the local farmer's market with me this morning? A: That would be great! B: Fine. I'll knock on your door around ten o'clock then. 2.audio A: Hi, I am your new neighbor and would like to ask you about a few things. B: Hi, nice to meet you. Sure, ask me anything you need to know. A: So far, everyone that I've met seems so helpful. B: We all seem to get along pretty well. A: Have you lived here a very long time? B: I first moved here ten years ago. A: I am having trouble figuring out the best places to shop and such. B: I am a pretty good source for all of that information. You could go to the local farmer's market with me today if you wish. A: I would love to go with you! B: I'll be leaving around ten o'clock. I'll pick you up. 3.audio A: Hi, I just moved in next door and have a few questions. B: Hello, and welcome to our building. I would be happy to help you with your questions. A: You all seem like a very pleasant group of tenants. B: We all try and help each other out when we can. A: When did you first move here? B: I have lived here for quite awhile. Ten years! A: I am not from around here, and I don't know where basic services are. B: I could help you find everything you need. Would you be interested in going to the local farmer's market with me? A: What a great opportunity to get oriented to the neighborhood! B: It starts around ten. Just meet me in the parking lot around 9:45, and I'll take you there.26. Visitors and Extra Tenants
1.audio A: I have a question about extra people living with me in my apartment. B: You may have one roommate, but they need to have an approved application on file with us. A: What about overnight guests? B: An occasional overnight guest is not a problem. A: How many days could I have an extra guest? B: We usually consider any guest who stays over a week to be a possible problem. A: Will I have to pay extra for roommates or visitors? B: If you are given permission for extended visitors, you may be charged extra. A: Can my guests use the pool and laundry room? B: Your guests may use the pool and laundry facilities, but you must be with them at all times. 2.audio A: Can I have roommates in my apartment? B: You may have one roommate, but they need to pass a credit check. A: Can overnight guests stay with me? B: You may have an overnight guest, but they may not stay for an extended period of time. A: How long could my friends and family stay with me without it being a problem? B: No one can stay with you for over a week without special permission. A: Will I owe extra money for more people staying in my apartment? B: You are not charged extra for a roommate or short-term guests. A: If I have visitors, may they use the pool? B: Your short-term guests may use the facilities with you present. 3.audio A: What about roommates in my apartment? B: You may have one roommate, but their name must appear on the lease. A: Can I have someone visit me for a short period of time? B: We understand that a family member or friend may visit from time to time. Just make sure that they are not moving in with you. A: How many days could a friend stay without it being a problem? B: You cannot have an extra tenant for over a week, unless we give you special permission. A: Will I be charged extra money for having roommates or visitors? B: A roommate or a short-term guest would not cost you anything extra. A: Can my family and friends use the facilities when they visit me? B: Your guests may not use the facilities unless you are with them.27. Locked Out
1.audio A: I need your help with something. B: What's wrong? A: I somehow locked myself out of my apartment. B: How did you lock yourself out? A: I'm really not sure. B: Where's your key? A: I locked it inside the house. B: I do have a spare key to your door. A: May I use it, please? B: Okay, but once you get in, bring my key right back. A: I will, and thank you so much. B: Make sure to keep your key with you next time. 2.audio A: Could you help me? B: What happened? A: I'm locked out of my apartment. B: What did you do to lock yourself out? A: I have no idea. B: You don't have your key? A: It's inside of my apartment. B: I have a key to your apartment. A: Could I borrow it for just a second? B: All right. Bring it back when you're done. A: Great, thanks a lot. B: I hope you'll be more careful next time. 3.audio A: I really need you to do something for me. B: What's the problem? A: I can't get into my apartment. B: How'd you manage that? A: I don't know. B: Do you know where your key is? A: It's inside my apartment. B: I have a spare key. A: Will you let me use it to get inside? B: Sure. Remember to give it back when you're finished. A: I appreciate this. B: No problem. Try not to lock yourself out again.28. Noisy Neighbors
1.audio A: Those neighbors of mine are so noisy! B: Yes, I can hear them. What is that pounding sound? A: I think that they are hammering nails to hang pictures. B: How often do you hear them making noise? A: They play their music really loud, and I can hear it. B: Have you spoken to them about the noise problem? A: No, I haven't spoken with them about it. B: What else do you hear that bothers you? A: I hear a lot of plumbing sounds, like the toilet flushing and the dishwasher running. B: If this continues, I would speak to the manager. 2.audio A: I am really losing patience with my noisy neighbors! B: They are noisy, all right. What do you think is making that sound? A: I think they are hammering some new flooring down in their living room. B: Do they usually make a lot of noise? A: I can hear music through the walls all the time. B: Do you ever tell your neighbors about the noise problem? A: No, I don't know them very well. B: Are there any other sounds that you can hear? A: I hear them talking loudly a lot, and their television is really loud. B: I would talk to the manager if the noise continues. 3.audio A: Those noisy neighbors of mine are driving me crazy! B: Yes, they are very noisy. What do you think they are doing in there? A: Someone said they are installing some countertops in their kitchen. B: Is there usually a lot of noise coming from over there? A: Whenever they play music, I can hear it coming through the walls. B: Do your neighbors know that you can hear them? A: I mentioned it to them once. B: Are you ever disturbed by other sounds? A: They have a lot of noisy parties that get out of hand. B: I think that you should talk with the manager to see if he can help you.29. Asking the Neighbor Not to Make Noise
1.audio A: I was meaning to talk to you about something. B: What's going on? A: Were you having a party in your apartment last Friday? B: Yes, I had a little party. A: It was very loud. B: I didn't intend on being too loud. A: It's fine if you want to have people over, but I couldn't sleep with the noise. B: I really do apologize for all the noise. A: Next time, do you think that you could keep it down? B: Will do. A: Thank you very much. B: Okay, and once again I'm sorry for keeping you up. 2.audio A: May I talk to you? B: What's up? A: Did you have a party Friday? B: I did have a few people over. A: It was way too loud. B: I didn't realize I was making a lot of noise. A: I couldn't sleep with how loud it was. B: I'm sorry for being so loud. A: Could you try not to be so loud the next time? B: I'll make sure to do that for you. A: Thanks, I would appreciate it. B: Let me apologize again for the noise. 3.audio A: We really need to talk. B: What do we need to talk about? A: Was there a party going on in your apartment on Friday? B: I did throw a party on Friday. A: You were quite loud. B: I really didn't mean to be loud. A: I don't mind if you have company, of course, but the noise made it difficult for me to sleep. B: I am sorry if my party kept you up. A: It's all right, but next time could you try to keep it down? B: I will try to. A: Thank you, because that would be great. B: You're welcome, and I apologize for the inconvenience.30. Poor Area Lighting
1.audio A: I would like to speak with the manager about some safety concerns. B: This is the manager. What can I do for you? A: I was parking my car last night in the garage area, and it was very dark out there. B: Is this the first time you noticed this? A: The lighting has always been bad, but it seems to be getting worse. B: We are trying to save electricity, so we put in new energy-saving bulbs. Maybe that was the problem. A: Whatever the problem is, it needs to be fixed. B: Why do you feel this is so unsafe? A: It is unsafe because it allows people to hide in there and jump people and rob them. B: I will go out there after dark and check it out. Thanks for bringing it to my attention. 2.audio A: Could I speak with the property manager about a problem I had last night? B: I am the property manager. What was the problem that you experienced? A: Have you noticed that the lighting in the garage area is almost nonexistent? B: Has this been a problem for you in the past? A: I just moved here recently, so I really don't know how long it has been like this. B: Maybe some of the bulbs were burned out. A: All I know it that it feels very unsafe out there at night. B: Do you really think it is that unsafe to have a few dark patches here and there? A: It is unsafe because a rapist could hide in there and attack women. B: I will have the night manager look into it. Thank you for telling me about it. 3.audio A: I had a problem last night in the parking lot and would like to speak to the manager. B: This is the manager speaking. How can I help you? A: I got out of my car in the parking area, and the area was not lit very well. B: How long have you noticed this problem? A: This is the first time that I noticed it. B: Maybe you were just parking in a shadowy area. A: Regardless of the cause, the problem needs to be taken care of. B: I am not sure that having a few shadows here and there is such a problem. A: It is unsafe because people can't see where they are walking and could have an accident. B: When it gets dark tonight, I will take a look. I appreciate your concern.31. Recreation Area Problems
1.audio A: Could I speak with the manager about some problems in the pool area? B: Sure, what seems to be the problem? A: My apartment is next to the pool, and there seems to be some really late-night partying going on out there. B: The hours for the pool are eight in the morning to ten at night. Is the noise that you are hearing later than that? A: Yes, sometimes people are in the Jacuzzi at midnight! B: Did you call the night manager? A: No, I didn't really know if anyone was around that late. B: I am going to give you my number to call if it happens again. A: Thank you for your help. B: You are welcome. I will be sending letters to tenants to remind them of the rules. 2.audio A: I had some concerns about the pool and Jacuzzi area and would like to speak with someone. B: I can help you with that. What are you having problems with? A: I live right next to the pool, and late at night it is really noisy out there! B: There is not supposed to be anyone in the pool area after ten o'clock at night. Are you noticing people out there any later? A: I've heard people out there at one in the morning! B: Did you contact anyone? A: No, I just waited until now to tell you. B: I will give you the direct line to call to report this when it is happening A: I appreciate your help. B: You are welcome. Evidently a few people need some reminders. 3.audio A: I was wondering if I could speak to someone about some concerns of mine with the pool area. B: I can answer any questions that you might have. What are your concerns? A: I enjoy living next to the pool, but it gets really loud out there at night. B: The pool is supposed to be closed after 10:00. Are you saying that people are partying later than that? A: There have been parties out there that haven't ended until two in the morning! B: Did you call the front desk? A: Yes, I tried, but no one picked up. B: You can have my personal line to call if this happens again. Do not hesitate to call. A: Thank you for taking care of this for me. B: Thank you for bringing it to my attention. We will send reminder memos to help people remember what the rules are.33. Key and Lock Problems
1.audio A: I need to speak with the manager, please. B: Yes, this is the manager. How may I help you this morning? A: We are having problems getting into our apartment. B: Is this the first time that you have tried this key since I gave it to you? A: Yes, this is the first time that we have tried this key. B: Does the key go into the lock okay? A: It fits in the lock just fine. B: Let's try it one more time. Just try to gently slide the key in the deadbolt and turn it to the right. A: It still doesn't work. B: I will come up to help you right away. I'll bring another key to try. 2.audio A: I need to speak with the manager right away. B: The manager is not here right now. May I take a message? A: Our key doesn't seem to be working in our lock. B: How many times have you used this key in the lock? A: We have already used this key successfully before. B: Does the key fit in the lock? A: It is really hard to get it into the lock, but it does go in. B: Make sure you are on the top lock. Put the key in and try turning it to the right. A: I can't get it to work. B: Could you return to the manager's office? I have another key that I would like you to try. 3.audio A: Good morning. Could I speak with the manager, please? B: I am the assistant manager. Is there something I can help you with? A: The key you gave us to our apartment doesn't seem to be working. B: Did this key work okay for you before? A: We were using my roommate's key before and never really tried this one. B: Does the key seem to belong in that lock? A: It doesn't really fit at all. B: Try putting your key in the top lock one more time and turn it to the right. A: It works now, but it didn't work before. B: We have been having trouble with that lock. I will call a locksmith right away.34. Calling the Landlord to Report a Leak
1.audio A: I have a problem. B: What's the problem? A: A pipe burst in my ceiling. B: Why do you think that? A: There is water dripping from my ceiling. B: Is it causing a flood in your apartment? A: No, but my carpet is getting wet. B: How long has this water been dripping? A: It only started leaking today. B: I'll have someone come down to fix it right away. A: That's great. B: I apologize for the inconvenience. 2.audio A: I'm calling about a problem with my apartment. B: Tell me what the problem is. A: There must be a leaking pipe in my ceiling. B: Are you sure? A: There is water leaking from my ceiling. B: Is the water flooding your apartment? A: It's not flooding, but my carpet is beginning to smell. B: Has it been leaking long? A: I believe it began leaking today. B: Someone will be right up to fix it. A: I'd appreciate that. B: Let me also apologize about the problem. 3.audio A: I have a problem that needs fixing immediately. B: What is it? A: I think that a pipe broke in my ceiling. B: How do you know? A: The ceiling is wet and water is dripping onto my carpet. B: Your apartment isn't flooded, is it? A: Not yet, but my carpet is wet. B: When did this all start? A: It just started today. B: I will send a plumber up to fix it right now. A: That would be fabulous. B: I'm sorry about the problem.35. Roof Leaking
1.audio A: May I speak with the property manager, please? B: Hello, this is the property manager. How may I help you? A: During that horrible rainstorm last night, my roof began to leak. B: What room was the leak in? A: It was in our bedroom. B: Are you on the top floor, or is there another apartment above you? A: We are on the top floor. B: I will be sending someone out as soon as I can get hold of the roofer. Will you be home this morning? A: Yes, we will be in all morning. B: Fine. If you do end up going somewhere, we can just use our pass key. 2.audio A: Good morning. I need to speak with the property manager, please. B: Good morning. You are speaking to the property manager. A: While it was raining last night, water started leaking in from the ceiling. B: Was it leaking in the bedroom? A: It was in the living room. B: Can you tell me which floor you are on? A: We are on the bottom floor. B: I would like to look at the leak. Will you be home this morning? A: Yes, someone will be here to let you in. B: Just in case you have to leave, we will just use the master key. 3.audio A: I need to talk with the property manager right away! B: This is the property manager. What seems to be the problem? A: This morning, when we woke up, there was water pouring in from the ceiling! B: Could you tell me what room had the leak? A: There were several rooms, but the worst leak was in the bathroom. B: Could you please remind me which floor you are on? A: We are on the second floor, one of the middle floors. B: I will be sending the assistant manager to check it out. May we look at it this morning? A: Actually, I have to go to school right now. B: If you aren't there, we will use our master key to get in and check things out.36. Plumbing
1.audio A: I am having some plumbing problems and need them fixed. B: What exactly is wrong with the plumbing? A: The toilet flushes really slowly. B: Are there any problems with the plumbing in the kitchen? A: Both the kitchen and the bathroom plumbing are messed up. B: How long have you had these problems? A: It has been going on for a while, but just started to get worse this morning. B: I will send someone out to take a look at the problem. Will you be home this afternoon? A: Yes, I will be home this afternoon. B: Fine. I will be there around 2:00. If someone is not there, I will use my key to get in. 2.audio A: I just moved into my apartment, and the plumbing is not working. B: Can you describe the plumbing problems you are having? A: The bathtub barely drains at all. B: Okay, the bathroom plumbing needs looking at. What about the kitchen plumbing? A: Neither the kitchen nor the bathroom plumbing is working well. B: Has this problem been going on for a long time? A: It just started happening last night. B: I will be coming over to look at it this afternoon. Will you be there? A: I will not be home. B: I can always use my key to get in, but I would prefer that you be there. 3.audio A: The plumbing in my new apartment is not working. B: I need you to tell me what the problem is. A: The bathroom sink is stopped up. B: Is the kitchen plumbing messed up also, or just the bathroom plumbing? A: Just the bathroom plumbing seems to have a problem. B: Did this just start happening, or has it been going on for a while? A: Everything worked beautifully until a few hours ago. B: Are you going to be home so I can come by and take a look at the problem? A: I am not sure if I will be home later. B: I will be coming by around 10 this morning. If you aren't there, I'll just use my key.37. Threatening not to Rent
1.audio A: Do you like the apartment so far? B: I see a problem. A: What's the problem? B: I noticed that the faucet in the kitchen is leaking. A: That's no big deal. B: It's going to be a problem when my water bill comes. A: What do you want me to do about it? B: I would like you to fix the problem. A: I won't be able to do that right now. B: Well, I won't be able to rent the apartment until the problem is fixed. A: Fine, I'll have it fixed for you. B: I'm happy that we've come to an agreement. 2.audio A: How do you like the apartment? B: I like the apartment, but I see something wrong with it. A: What's wrong? B: There's a leaking faucet in the kitchen. A: That isn't a problem. B: That leak is going to raise my water bill. A: What can I do? B: You need to fix it. A: I can't right now. B: I won't rent it if the faucet isn't fixed. A: I will fix it for you. B: I'm glad you finally agree. 3.audio A: What do you think of the apartment? B: I like it, but there is one problem. A: What problem is that? B: The faucet in the kitchen is leaking. A: I don't understand what the big deal is. B: That leak is a problem for my water bill. A: What you would like me to do about it? B: The leak must be fixed. A: I won't be able to fix it at the moment. B: I will not rent the apartment with that leaking faucet. A: If that's the case, then I will fix the faucet. B: Thanks for understanding.38. Poor Upkeep
1.audio A: I would like to make an appointment to discuss the problems I keep having with my apartment. B: Are you having problems? This is the first I've heard of it. A: We gave you a list of problems last week. B: What kind of problems are you talking about? A: The garbage disposal doesn't work, we have rats, and the toilet is backed up. B: Maybe I could get back to you in a few weeks. I am leaving on vacation this afternoon. A: These things are your responsibility, and you need to fix them immediately. B: Don't tell me what to do! I'll get to it when I get around to it! A: If these problems are not addressed immediately, I will be contacting the health department this Friday. B: I'll be right over! 2.audio A: We would like you to stop by again so we can show you some more problems that have come up with our apartment. B: I am kind of busy right now, but maybe later next week I could stop by. A: We sent you an e-mail the first week we moved in; it listed the problems we found. B: What problems did you find? A: The roof leaks when it rains, there is mold on the bedroom walls, and the dishwasher doesn't work. B: I don't really consider any of that to be my responsibility. You can fix those things yourself. A: Maintaining basic health and safety standards is your responsibility. B: I am maintaining the building. You are way too picky! A: Unfortunately, you won't be getting a rent check unless these problems are fixed by Friday. B: You wouldn't dare do that! 3.audio A: You really need to look at some of the problems we are having with the apartment. B: That apartment never had any problems before. Are you sure the problem isn't you? A: We spoke with you the first week we moved in about things that you promised to fix. B: Where do you think you have problems? A: There is no hot water, the bedroom has a broken window, and there are rats in the kitchen. B: You know, no one else who has been in that apartment has had a problem before. A: You are obligated to maintain your building and my apartment. B: I will fix these problems when I get around to it. A: I will be withholding my rent check this Friday unless these problems are addressed immediately. B: You can't do that! It's illegal!39. Asking the Landlord about Fixing a Problem
1.audio A: I'm having a problem. B: What's the problem? A: A pipe burst in my wall. B: Is the pipe causing any water damage? A: The water is causing mildew. B: I can come fix the pipe sometime tomorrow. A: Can I just call someone myself to fix it? B: I don't think that would be a good idea. A: You won't do it until tomorrow. B: I guess you have a point. A: So, I can call someone to fix it? B: Go right ahead. 2.audio A: I have an issue. B: What's going on? A: There is a leaking pipe in my wall. B: Is there any water damage? A: There is mildew. B: I'll go to your apartment tomorrow to fix the pipe. A: Why can't I call someone to fix it today? B: I'll just do it myself. A: I need it done today. B: You're right about that. A: Are you okay with me calling a plumber? B: That's fine. 3.audio A: There is a problem in my apartment. B: What is it? A: A pipe broke in my wall, and water is leaking. B: Is the water causing any damage? A: Yes, it's creating mildew on the walls. B: I won't be able to fix the pipe until tomorrow. A: I can call a plumber to fix it right now. B: I'll do it for you. A: You can't do it until tomorrow, and I need it fixed now. B: That's true. A: You're okay with me calling someone? B: I'm all right with that.40. Explaining the Problem to the Plumber
1.audio A: Thank you for coming. B: You're welcome. What's the problem? A: I have a leaky pipe. B: Where exactly is the pipe? A: The pipe is behind a wall in my bathroom. B: How long has the pipe been leaking? A: It began leaking a couple of days ago. B: I must tell you that in order to get to the pipe, I must tear down that wall. A: I know. B: That won't be a problem? A: Not as long as it gets fixed. B: All right, I will start working now. 2.audio A: Thank you for coming so quickly. B: No problem. What's wrong? A: A pipe in my apartment is leaking. B: Where is the pipe? A: The pipe is in my bathroom. B: Can you tell me how long the pipe has been leaking? A: The pipe has been leaking for a couple days. B: You do realize that I will need to rip down your wall to get to the pipe, right? A: Yes, I'm aware of that. B: Is that all right? A: I just need the problem fixed. B: I'll get started on it now. 3.audio A: I'm glad you could make it. B: It's my job. What can I help you with? A: I think a pipe burst in my apartment. B: In what room is this pipe? A: You'll find the pipe in my bathroom. B: When did the pipe start leaking? A: It's been leaking for a couple of days now. B: I will need to tear down that wall to fix that pipe. A: I understand. B: You're fine with that? A: I just want the problem taken care of. B: Okay. I will begin working on it now, if you'd like.42. Talking about Apartment Upgrades
1.audio A: I really like the apartment, but I was wondering if I could change some things. B: What would you like to change? A: I would like to have different carpet. B: I would be willing to put in a different color carpet if you pay the price difference. A: How much more would it cost? B: It would cost between 2 and 10 dollars more per square yard. A: While I am at it, would it be possible to switch paint colors? B: I would be willing to look at a different color. You need to bring me a sample. A: When can my apartment be painted and ready to go? B: You can have the new carpet and paint by next Monday. 2.audio A: This apartment is great, but could I upgrade a few things? B: What are you unhappy with? A: I want to have a different color carpet. B: If you agree to pay more money, you could upgrade the carpet. A: Would it cost a lot more? B: It could be as little as 2 dollars or as much as 10 dollars more per square yard. A: I was also wondering if it would be possible to pick a different paint color. B: Bring me a paint sample to look at, and I will consider it. A: When can you finish with the new carpet and paint? B: Your new apartment can be recarpeted and repainted by next Tuesday. 3.audio A: I think that I would enjoy living here, but I would like to make improvements. B: What would make this apartment better for you? A: I think that it would look better with a better quality carpet. B: You can have a different carpet, but you have to pay more if it costs more. A: How much more would it cost to upgrade? B: It could vary quite a bit, between 2 and 10 dollars per square yard. A: Do you think that I could have a different paint color in my apartment? B: I have to see a sample. Bring me one this week, please. A: How long will it take for my new apartment to be ready? B: Both the new paint and new carpet will be finished by next week.43. Moving Out
1.audio A: How are you doing? B: Great. What's up? A: I wanted to talk to you about something. B: What did you want to talk about? A: I just wanted to let you know that I'm moving out. B: When? A: In the next few weeks. B: I don't understand why you want to move. A: I'm going to school out of state. B: I see. That'll be fine. A: Thanks for understanding. B: Yes. I'm fine with it. 2.audio A: How are you? B: I'm all right. What did you need? A: We need to talk. B: What's going on? A: I'm going to be moving out. B: When exactly are you planning on moving out? A: I'm going to be moving in a few weeks. B: Why are you going to move? A: I'm leaving the state to go to school. B: I can understand that. A: So you're fine with it? B: Yeah, I understand. 3.audio A: How have you been? B: I'm fine. What's going on? A: I would like to talk to you about something. B: What about? A: I'm planning on moving out soon. B: When will you be doing this? A: I will be moving out a few weeks from now. B: Why is that? A: I have to leave the state for school. B: That's all right. A: I'm glad that you're okay with this. B: I'm absolutely cool with it.44. Eviction Notice
1.audio A: I received an eviction notice from you, and I don't understand what it means. B: Well, you are behind in your rent; it's a 30-day notice to vacate. A: You can't make me move just for being late with my rent. B: You have been late with your rent several times now. I am filing suit for back rent to protect myself. A: Are you throwing me out? B: This notice is to let you know that you will be evicted by a sheriff if you don't make good on your rent. A: If I catch up on my rent, can I stay? B: You can stay if you catch up and stay caught up. Otherwise, I will find another renter. A: I will go get the money right now. B: Thank you. Please make sure that you pay with cash or a cashier's check. 2.audio A: I opened my mail, found this eviction notice, and don't know what to do with it. B: Actually, it is a 30-day notice to vacate the premises. A: Just for being a few days late? B: This isn't the first time you have been considerably late with the rent. I need to start the procedure to evict you. A: Are you taking my apartment away? B: This is a notice to inform you that the sheriff will evict you in 30 days if you do not pay up on your rent. A: Can I keep the apartment if I pay my rent in full? B: You can keep the apartment if you stay caught up on your rent. Otherwise, I need to find someone who can make the payments. A: I will go write a check right now. B: Thank you. I will need a cashier's check or cash, please. 3.audio A: What is this eviction notice for? B: The notice you received is a 30-day notice to vacate. A: Are you kidding me? B: I mentioned to you before that you need to keep up with your rent. This notice to evict is letting you know that I mean business. A: You can't just throw me out on the street! B: You have 30 days to catch up on your rent, or a sheriff will evict you. A: Will you still throw me out if I make the rent payment? B: You can stay, but you might think about looking for a less expensive living arrangement if you are having trouble making the payments. A: I am going to take care of the rent payment right now. B: Thank you. The payment needs to be in the form of cash or a cashier's check.45. Getting the Deposit Back
1.audio A: I'm moving out. B: Your lease isn't up yet. A: I won't be able to stay here anymore. B: That's going to be a problem. A: I don't know why there's a problem. B: It's a problem because I can't give you your deposit back. A: Why can't you give it back to me? B: You're breaking our contract. A: I'm going to need my deposit back. B: That's not going to happen. A: I can't stay here, though. B: That's really not my problem. 2.audio A: I have to move. B: You have not fulfilled your lease agreement yet. A: I can't stay here anymore. B: There's a problem with that. A: What is the problem? B: I won't be able to give you back your deposit. A: Why not? B: This was stated in our agreement. A: But I need it back. B: I can't do it. A: It will be impossible for me to stay here. B: That's not my fault. 3.audio A: I'm going to be moving out soon. B: You still have time on your lease. A: There's no way that I can stay here. B: That's not going to be all right. A: I don't understand why. B: I'm going to have to keep your deposit A: Why can't I have it back? B: Because you're leaving before your lease is over. A: You have to give it back to me. B: You're not going to get it. A: But I'm not able to live here anymore. B: I can't help you with that.Asking to see a product
May I see that laptop for a moment? Bill Nichols: Excuse me. May I see that laptop for a moment? Sales clerk: Sure. You mean this one? Bill Nichols: No, the one on the left. Yes, that's the one. ... Thank you. Sales clerk: It's a state-of-the-art piece of equipment, sir. With a gigantic 16.1" UXGA TFT screen, 2.8 Ghz mobile processor, generous 512 MB RAM, removable 80 GB hard drive, convenient CD-RW/DVD combo drive, stunning fast graphics board with 64 MB DDR SDRAM, dual battery capability, integrated Fast Ethernet card, IEEE 1394 digital interface and eight USB ports, it has all the power of a desktop computer packed into an ultra-slim notebook! Bill Nichols: That's impressive! What's the sale price? Sales clerk: The regular price is $2980.00, but until December the 31st it's on sale for just $2,699.00.Menswear and ladieswear (color, design and material)
Do you have that in other colours? Sales clerk: May I help you, sir? Paul Ryefield: Yes, please. I'm looking for a cotton polo shirt. Sales clerk: Any particular colour? Paul Ryefield: Not really. Sales clerk: How about this one? Paul Ryefield: I like the design, but don't particularly care for the colour. Do you have that in other colours, too? Sales clerk: Well, they come in white, pale yellow, aqua, red and green. Will a white one do? Paul Ryefield: Yes. I prefer white - and may I see a pale yellow one, too? Sales clerk: Why, of course. Let's see... White... Pale yellow. Here you are, sir.At a doctor
I have a terrible stomachache. Doctor: Good morning. Please have a seat here. What's the problem? Paul Ryefield: I have a terrible stomachache. Doctor: Do you have diarrhea? Paul Ryefield: Yes, I do. Doctor: Do you have any other symptoms? Paul Ryefield: Yes, I feel sick. Doctor: You mean you feel nauseous? Paul Ryefield: That's right. I feel like vomiting. And right now I feel dizzy, too. Doctor: When did the symptoms start? Paul Ryefield: This morning. Yesterday evening I ate something raw. Doctor: All right. Please take off your clothes to the waist and lie down there. ... Just tell me if it hurts when I do this. Paul Ryefield: It doesn't hurt. ... Ouch. It hurts there. Doctor: Okay. Let's hope it's just indigestion, but we'll need to run some diagnostic tests to be sure. We'll run a blood test and we'll also need a urine sample. Paul Ryefield: Can you give me something for the time being? Doctor: Yes, I'll give you a prescription for indigestion tablets.Booking a hotel room
I'd like to book a room please. Receptionist: Good afternoon, San Felice Hotel. May I help you? Mrs Ryefield: Yes. I'd like to book a room, please. Receptionist: Certainly. When for, madam? Mrs Ryefield: March the 23rd. Receptionist: How long will you be staying? Mrs Ryefield: Three nights. Receptionist: What kind of room would you like, madam? Mrs Ryefield: Er... double with bath. I'd appreciate it if you could give me a room with a view over the lake. Receptionist: Certainly, madam. I'll just check what we have available. . . Yes, we have a room on the 4th floor with a really splendid view. Mrs Ryefield: Fine. How much is the charge per night? Receptionist: Would you like breakfast? Mrs Ryefield: No, thanks. Receptionist: It's eighty four euro per night excluding VAT. Mrs Ryefield: That's fine. Receptionist: Who's the booking for, please, madam? Mrs Ryefield: Mr and Mrs Ryefield, that's R-Y-E-F-I-E-L-D. Receptionist: Okay, let me make sure I got that: Mr and Mrs Ryefield. Double with bath for March the 23rd, 24th and 25th. Is that correct? Mrs Ryefield: Yes it is. Thank you. Receptionist: Let me give you your confirmation number. It's: 7576385. I'll repeat that: 7576385. Thank you for choosing San Felice Hotel and have a nice day. Goodbye. Mrs Ryefield: Goodbye.Room service
I'd like some breakfast, please. Room service: Room service. Mary Jones: Good morning. This is room 113. I'd like some breakfast, please. Room service: Right. Excuse me. Mrs. Jones? Mary Jones: That's right. Room service: What can I do for you? Mary Jones: I'd like some grapefruit juice, marmalade, two scrambled eggs with two sausages, toast, and a pot of black coffee, please. How long will it take? Room service: Just a few minutes, ma'am. Mary Jones: Great. Thank you.Checking out of the hotel
I'd like to check out now. Receptionist: Good morning. May I help you? Daniel Adams: Yes, I'd like to check out now. My name's Adams, room 312. Here's the key. Receptionist: One moment, please, sir. ... Here's your bill. Would you like to check and see if the amount is correct? Daniel Adams: What's the 14 pounds for? Receptionist: That's for the phone calls you made from your room. Daniel Adams: Can I pay with traveller's cheques? Receptionist: Certainly. May I have your passport, please? Daniel Adams: Here you are. Receptionist: Could you sign each cheque here for me? Daniel Adams: Sure. Receptionist: Here are your receipt and your change, sir. Thank you. Daniel Adams: Thank you. Goodbye.Ordering breakfast
I'll have three scrambled eggs with country ham. Waitress: Good morning. Are you ready to order? Bill Nichols: Yes, I am, thank you. I'll have three scrambled eggs with country ham, toast and jam, please. Waitress: Would you like anything to drink? Bill Nichols: I'll have a tomato juice and some iced tea. Waitress: Anything else? Bill Nichols: Could I have a slice of pumpkin pie? Waitress: Sure. Coming right up.Ordering lunch and dinner
What else do you recommend? Waiter: Are you ready to order, sir? Mr Ryefield: Yes. I'll have the beef stew for starters and my wife would like tomato soup. Waiter: One beef stew and one tomato soup. What would you like for the main course? Mr Ryefield: I'll have the Cayenne Pepper Steak and my wife would like the Fried Trout with mashed potatoes. Waiter: I'm afraid the trout is off. Mrs Ryefield: Oh dear. Err... What else do you recommend? Waiter: The sole is very good. Mrs Ryefield: OK. I'll have that. Do you have any coleslaw? Waiter: No, I'm sorry, we don't. Mrs Ryefield: Just give me a small mixed salad then. Mr Ryefield: Same for me. Waiter: Certainly. (...) Would you like something to drink? Mr Ryefield: Yes, please. May I see the wine list? Waiter: Certainly. Here you are.(...) Mr Ryefield: A bottle of Chablis ‘99, please. Waiter: Excellent choice!Telephone facilities
How do I get an outside line? Operator: Operator. May I help you? Paul Ryefield: Yes. How do I get an outside line, please? Operator: Just dial 0, wait for the dial tone, and then dial the phone number you want to call. Or we can place a call for you, if you want. Paul Ryefield: No, thanks a lot. I'll try it myself.Buying food
How much is that? Mrs Ryefield: I'll have a whole-wheat loaf, three white loaves, a baguette and ten rolls, please. How much is that? Baker: The whole-wheat loaf is 45 cents, the white loaves are 35 cents each, the baguette is 27 cents and the rolls are eight cents each. That makes two dollars fifty-seven cents. Mrs Ryefield: There you go. Baker: Thank you, ma'am. Forty-three cents change. Have a nice day.At the post office
Air mail, please. Postal clerk: Yes, ma'am? Mrs Ryefield: How much is a stamp to send a letter to France, please? Postal clerk: Air mail or surface mail? Mrs Ryefield: Air mail, please. Postal clerk: That'll be eighty-five cents. Mrs Ryefield: Four stamps, please. How much is that? Postal clerk: Three dollars and forty cents. Mrs Ryefield: There you go.Taking a picture
Could you please take a picture of us with this camera? Paul Ryefield: Excuse me. Could you please take a picture of us with this camera? Man: Sure. Which button do I press to shoot? Paul Ryefield: This one. Man: Do I have to focus it? Paul Ryefield: No, this is a focus-free camera. All you have to do is point and press the button. Man: All right. Say "cheese".Reservations (airline)
Do you have any flights to Sydney next Tuesday afternoon? Reservations clerk: Northwind Airways, good morning. May I help you? Mary Jones: Yes, do you have any flights to Sydney next Tuesday afternoon? Reservations clerk: One moment, please... Yes. There's a flight at 16:45 and one at 18:00. Mary Jones: That's fine. Could you tell me how much a return flight costs? I'll be staying three weeks. Reservations clerk: Economy, business class or first class ticket? Mary Jones: Economy, please. Reservations clerk: That would be €346. Mary Jones: OK. Could I make a reservation? Reservations clerk: Certainly. Which flight would you like? Mary Jones: The 16:45, please. Reservations clerk: Could I have your name, please? Mary Jones: My name is Mary Jones, that's M-A-R-Y J-O-N-E-S. Reservations clerk: How would you like to pay, Ms. Jones? Mary Jones: Can I pay at the check-in desk when I pick up my ticket? Reservations clerk: Yes, but you will have to confirm this reservation at least two hours before departure time. Mary Jones: I see. Reservations clerk: Now you have been booked, Ms. Jones. The flight leaves at 16:45, and your arrival in Sydney will be at 9:25 a.m., local time. The flight number is NWA 476. Mary Jones: Thank you.Confirmation of flight reservation
I'd like to reconfirm my flight Reservations clerk: Northwind Airlines. Can I help you? Daniel Adams: Hello. I'd like to reconfirm my flight, please. Reservations clerk: May I have your name and flight number, please? Daniel Adams: My name is Daniel Adams and my flight number is 374. Reservations clerk: When are you leaving? Daniel Adams: On May 11th. Reservations clerk: And your destination? Daniel Adams: Buenos Aires. Reservations clerk: Hold the line, please. (...) All right. Your seat is confirmed, Mr. Adams. You'll be arriving in Buenos Aires at 4 o'clock p.m. local time. Daniel Adams: Thank you. Can I pick up my ticket when I check in? Reservations clerk: Yes, but please check in at least one hour before departure time.At passport control
Do you have a return ticket? Immigration officer: Good evening. Where have you come from? Paul Ryefield: Bucharest, Romania. Immigration officer: May I have your passport and form I-94, please? Paul Ryefield: Here you are. Immigration officer: What's the nature of your visit? Business or pleasure? Paul Ryefield: Pleasure. I'm visiting my relatives. Immigration officer: How long are you going to stay in the United States? Paul Ryefield: Three weeks. Immigration officer: What is your occupation? Paul Ryefield: I work as an accountant for a Romanian telecommunications company. Immigration officer: Do you have a return ticket? Paul Ryefield: Yes, here it is. Immigration officer: That's fine. Thanks. Enjoy your trip. Paul Ryefield: Thank you.Railway travel
A ticket to London, please. Paul Ryefield: What time does the next train to London leave? Railway Station Clerk: At 16:35, from platform 8. Paul Ryefield: Is it a direct train to London? Railway Station Clerk: No, you have to change trains at Birmingham. Paul Ryefield: I see. One ticket to London, please. Railway Station Clerk: Single or return, sir? Paul Ryefield: Single, please. Railway Station Clerk: 64 pounds, please. Paul Ryefield: Here you are. Railway Station Clerk: Here's your ticket and change, sir.